Adlei 1 tt A Vi Alin’i Brya: Dicti Eicli] Heyd Kroe! la Mast ai Oehls Ollen 1 V-54h 1887 New Grammar for Germans to Learn English. By P. Gands. 12mo. Key to same. 12mo. 1 •om 840 ns* ting mo. Roemer’s Polyglot Reader (in German). Translated by Dr. Solger. 12mo. Key to saofie (in English). 12mo. Schulte. Elementary German Course. By Adam E. Schulte, Teacher of Ger- man in the Public Schools of the City of New York. 12mo. Return this book on or before the Latest Date stamped below. V/rag L G: Fi Wrag-i (Pc Ki JDictiol Jontar Jforesti Meadow Hillhoi Secc Kuovo Ollendo: Kei Pri] Hoemer Key University of Illinois Library . a Pa ^ ' Mfiy -9 I9si KllY *354 d’fi ■6 ccT li FEB KOV 0 9 OCI I 2 m ?r\on .'Q-C/ 974 12 Ahn. A after ofNe Key Butler. able I By Fb Be Belen tainin^ the Auxiliary and the Rejnlar Verbs-on By E. M. DE Belem. 88 pages. 18nio. the plan of the L161— H41 late Abbd Bossuet. Adle] 1 G tt A Vi Ahn’i Brya Bicti Bichl Heyd Kroe: la Mast ai OehlE 4-fe8..g. VMn 1887 Ollen 1 New Grammar for Germans to Learn English. By P. Gands. 12mo. Key to same. 12mo. :s I •om 840 ns* ling mo. Boemer’s Polyglot Reader (in German). Translated by Dr. Solger. 12mo. Key to same (in English). 12mo. Schulte. Elementary German Course. By Adam E. Schulte, Teacher of Ger- man in the Public Schools of the City of New York. 12mo. I STANDARD ITALIAN TEXT-BOOKS. "Wrage’s Practical German- Grammar. 12mo. Key to same. Lehrbuch der Englischen Spracbe. Key to same. German Primer. First German Reader. Wrage and Monfanti’s Method of Learning Spanish, on Ollendoi-ff’s System. (For Germans to Learn Spanish.) 13mo. Key to same. ITALIAN TEXT-BOOKS. Dictionaries. See Meadows and Millhousb. Montana’s Elementary Grammar of the Italian Language. 12mo. Foresti’s Italian Reader. 12mo. Ideadows’s Italian-English Dictionary. A new revised edition. MilUlOUse’s New English-and-Italian Pronouncing and Explanatory Dictionary. Second edition, revised and improved. Two thick vols., small 8vo. Nuovo Tesoro di Scherzi, Massime, Proverhi, etc. 1 vol., l2mo. Cloth. Ollendorff’s New Method of Learning Italian. Edited by F. Foresti. 12mo. Key to do. Primary Lessons. 18mo. Doemer’s Polyglot Reader (in Italian). Translated by Dr. Botta. Key to same, in English. SPANISH TEXT-BOOKS. Ahn. A New, Practical, and Easy Method of Learning the Spanish Language, after the System of F. Ahn, Doctor of Philosophy and Professor at the College ofNeuss. 12mo. Key to Spanish Grammar. Sutler. The Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase-Book : An Easy and Agree- able Method of acquiring a Speaking Knowledge of the Spanish Language. By Francis Butler. 293 pages. 18mo. De Belem. The Spanish Phrase-Book; or. Key to Spanish Conversation: con- taining the Chief Idioms of the Spanish Language, with the Conjugations of the Auxiliary and the Regular Verbs— on the plan of the late Abbd Bossuet. By E. M. DE Belem. 88 pages. 18mo. Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2016 V https://archive.org/details/ollendorffsnewmeOOvela OLLENDORFF’S NEW METHOD OF LBAENING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE SPANISH LANGUAGE WITR AJSr APPENDIX CONTAINING A BRIEF BUT COMPREHENSIVE RECAPITULATION OF THE RULES, AS WELL AS OF ALL THE VERBS, BOTH REGULAR AND IRREGULAR; SO AS TO RENDER THEIR USE EASY AND FAMILIAR TO THE MOST ORDINARY CAPACITY TOGETHER WITH PRACTICAL RULES FOR THE SPANISH PRONUNCIATION AND MODELS OF SOCIAL AND COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE THE WHOLE DESIGNED FOR YOUNG LEARNERS AND PERSONS WHO ARE THEIR OWN INSTRUCTORS BY M. VELAZQUEZ and T. SIMONNE PROFESSORS OF THE SPANISH AND FRENCH LANGUAGES ISTEW YORK D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 1, 3, AND 5 BOND STREET 1887 Enteeed, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1848, by D. APPLETON & CO., In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District of New York. O" IVoTi^E. — A Key to the Exercises of this Grammar is published i separate Volume \/ mi PREFACE. The superiority of Ollendorff s Method of teaching Ian- guagos is now so universally acknowledged, both in the United [ States and in Europe, that an adaptation of it to the Euphonic Castilian, or Spanish Language, must be considered as a de- V sideratum to persons wishing to learn it. Divested of the ab- stractedness of Grammar, it contains, however, all its elements ; but it develops them so gradually, and in so simple a manner, as to render them intelligible to the most ordinary capacity. The difficulties are met singly, thoroughly analyzed, and made familiar by dint of a varied and interesting repetition, — the most effectual means to impress them on young and unlearned minds, generally averse to thought or reflection, and always prone to trust to their undisciplined memory, a power often treacherous from want of proper direction. It is, therefore, hardly possible to go through this book with any degree of application, without becoming thoroughly conversant with the colloquial, idiomatic, and classic use of the Spanish language. Consequently, persons transacting business in the countries of which the Spanish is the vernacular tongue, will find this work to be their best guide in learning to speak it with propriety. For the benefit of persons grammatically acquainted with the English, or other languages, a Synopsis of the Spanish has been annexed as an Appendix, containing tables of the regular con- jugations of the verbs, copious lists of the irregular verbs, gen- eral mles of etymology, syntax, Ac., by means of which they may learn all the peculiarities of the Spanish, and make them- selves perfect masters of it in a very short time, without the assistance of a teacher. 7'7ti779 0 PKEFACK. To enhance, if possible, the importance and utility of this Method, the pronunciation of the Spanish letters is explained and exemplified, in so simple, clear, and easy a manner, as to render it comprehensible to every capacity. Consulting also the benefit of the learners, and with a view to render this work a complete course for Reading, Speaking, and Writing the Spanish language, Models of Familiar and Commercial Letters are added to it, containing directions for all the usual commercial transactions, by the aid of which, young learners, and persons who instruct themselves, may transact, in writing, any business. It is hardly necessary to remark, that the English phrases in the Exercises are not always models worthy of imitation ; but they are made use of in order to instinct the scholar how to express them properly in Spanish, and thereby to teach liim its idioms. Msw Yo3K Fthruarxi 1848 CONTENTS Pag-e Preface — 5 El Estornino Sagaz 8 Lessons L to LXXXVI 9-397 Some Idiomalical Expressions 389 Some of the proverbs most in use. . . 396 Appendix 401 Orthography 401 Remarks on the Pronunciation... 400 Double Letters 406 Division of Syllables 407 Punctuation 407 Accent 408 Reading Lessons 410 Common Spanish Abbreviations-... 414 Etymology 419 Article 41^ Nouns 419 Adjectives 426 Nouns of Number 430 Pronouns 433 Of the Verb 438 Terminations of the Verbs 442 Conjugations of the auxiliary verbs 449 Idiomatical translation of some tenses 451 Passive Verbs 452 Pronominal or Reflective Verbs.. 453 Gerund 454 Participle 454 Verbs that have two participles. . . 455 Adverbs 458 Prepositions 457 Conjunctions 457 Interjections 458 Analogy 458 Syntax 459 Of the Article 460 Of the Noun and Adjective 464 Of the Pronoun 468 Of the Verb 473 Of the Participle 483 Of the Adverb 484 Of the Preposition 485 Of the Conjunction 488 Of the Interjection 488 Table containing the Verbs that gov- ern certain Prepositions 489 The Irregular Verbs 514 Impersonal Verbs 532 A list of all the Irregular Verbs 533 Modelos de Cartas mercantiles y familiares 537 Tabla de laJVloneda corriente en Es- paha, y las Repiiblicasde America 514 Cartas Familiares 544 Index 551 EXPLANATION OF THE SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOlv. The irregular verbs are designated by a star (*). The figures 1, 2, 3, placed after the verbs, denote that they are regular, and incil cate the conjugations to which they respectively belong. T’he figures 1, 2, 3, placed before the verbs, denote the persons, either singular oi plural. N. 1, N. 2, &c., are used to designate the simple tenses of the verbs. N. 1, pf., N. 2, p., &c., designate the compound tenses of the verbs. Expressions which vary either in theii construction or idiom from the Er.glish Rre marked thus t. A hand (5^^) denotes a particular re nark THE SAGACIOUS STARLING. A THIRSTY starling found a decanter of water, and attempted to drink ?Tom it ; but the water scarcely touched the neck of the decanter, and the fiird’s bill could not reach it. He began to peck at the outside of the vessel, in order to make a hole ai it ; but in vain, the glass was too hard. ' He then attempted to upset the decanter. In thi® he succeeded no bet- ter ; the vessel was too heavy. At length the starling hit upon an idea that succeeded: he threw littlo pebbles into the decanter, which caused the water gradually to rise till with- in the reach of his bill. » * * Skill is better than strength : patience and reflection make many things easy which at first appear impossible. EL ESTORNINO SAGAZ. Un estornino sediento hall6 una garrafa llena de agua, 6 inmediata- mente procurd beber ; pero el agua d pdnas llegaba al cuello de la garrafa, y el pico del pdjaro no podia alcanzarla. Se puso luego d picar la garrafa d fin de hacer un agugerito ; pero se e» lorzd en vano, porque el vidrio era muy grueso. Entdnces intentd voltear la garrafa para derramar el agua ; pero no pudo hacerlo, porque era muy pesada. Al fin concibid una idea, que se le logrd : echd poco d poco en la garrafa ona cantidad tan grande de piedrecitas, que hicieron subir gradualmente e! ;igna d la distancia que su pico podia alcanzar, y luego apagd su sed. * * * Mas vale mafia que fuerza : la paciencia y la reflexion hacen fdeiit« muchas cosas, que parecian imposibles d primera vista. OLLENDORFF’S SPANISH GRAMMAR. FIRST LESSON.— Leccion Prhnera. DEFINITE ARTICI.E .—Ariiculo Definido. Masculine Singular. — Masculinu Singular The. Of or from the. To or at the. EL Del. Al. Have you? Y es, Sir, I have. The hat. Have you the hat? iTieneV.?^ Si, sehor, yo teugo. nor. El sombrero. I Tione V. el sombrero You. 1 listed f (V.) Ohs There are in Spanhh three ways of addressing a person, to wit 1st. By translating literally the pronoun thou, Td. 2d “ “ “ you, Vos, in the singular. VosoTROs, VosoTRAs, plural M. “ the pronoun you, UsTED, sing. ; UsTEDES, pi. As the celebrated Spanish poet, Cadalso, says. “ Una dama seria y grave Y que la critica sabe Del Vos, del Tii, y del listed” Tu is used among the Clearest relatives of a family, intimate fr’ends, little children, in poetry, and speaking to menial servants. To Teachers. — Each lesson should be dictated to the pupils, wlio ehould pronounce each word as soon as dictated. The teacher should ala« exercise his pupils by putting the fjuestions to them in various ways. ■ A Spanish interrogative sentence stands between two points of intorro- gallon; the first of which is inverted, to show when the emphasis begins. 10 FIRST LESSON. was formerly generally used among all classes of society, adoressin^ each other individually; at present it is confined to persons of high rank, oi those placed in high posts, as superiors addressing their inferiors. Public speakers, preachers, &c., addressing the public, congregations &c., use Vosotros; unless they be corporate bodies entitled to l>e styled Vsias, (your Lordships,) &c. UsTED, a contraction of Vuestra Merced, ( your Honor, or your W orship, formerly used, then abridged into Vuesarced, and finally into listed, or Uste, is the only word used in the common intercourse in polite society, in all the transactions of life ; excepting the cases above explained, and when he persons spoken to are entitled to a higher mark of respect by calling ihem Usia, (Vuestra Sehoria, V. S., your Lordship or Ladyship,) &c. listed, and its plural Ustedes, are common to both genders, and agiee with the verb in the third person singular or plural, according to their re- spective number; as. You are a good boy, listed es un huen muchacho : You are good boys, Ustedes son buenos muchachos, Usted, and Ustedes, have been always written in abbreviation, thus; Vmd., Vmds. — Vm,, Vms. At present, Usted is represented by a V., and Ustedes by VV, The speaker by using Usted may be sure never to give oiFence. The omission of it is considered vulgar ; for instance. Digame que hora es, (tell me what hour it is,) instead of Digame V. que hora es. When Usted is made use of at the beginning of a phrase, to avoid ita repetition the cases of the pronouns he, el, or she, ella, are employed ; as. When I saw you this morning, I told you, that I would accompany you and present you to him this afternoon — Cuando yo vi d Usted esta mahana le dije, que yo le (or la) acompanaria, y le (la) presentaria d el esta tarde In translating ancient history, public speeches, &c., tu, vos, or vosotros must be used ; because Usted is of a very modern introduction into the lan- guage. With the view to make the scholar perfectly familiar with the use oi these three modes of address, some of the exercises are translated in one and some in another ; but preference is given to Usted, because it is the most necessary and usual in the colloquial polite intercourse. L The bread. The cane. I’he soap. The sugar. The paper. Have you the paper ? Yes, Sir, I have the paper Yo. yo^ >6 El pan. El baston. El jabon. ja. El aziicar. zu. El papel. iTiene-V. el papel? Si, senor, yo tengo el papel. Have you my hat? Yc 2 , I have your hat My I I Tiene V. mi sombrero i I Si, yo tengo su sombrero de V 1 Mi, (both genders.) SECOND LESSON. 11 O^Miiid that (n) stauds for a common noun. iour. y" I su (u) de Have you your cane ? I have my cane. Have you my paper? I have your paper. Which hat have you ? Which or What 7 Which bread have you? I nave my bread. Which cane have you ? I have your cane V. is more polite than ol ;^ii) de V I Tiene V. su baston Yo tengo mi baston. I Tiene V. mi papel ? Yo tengo su papel de V., o? el papel de V. ^ Que sombrero tiene V ? ^ Que 7 que . — 7 I Que pa'i tiene V ? Yo tengo mi pan. I Que baston tiene V. ? Y 0 tengo el baston de Y., or Yo tengo su baston de V EXERCISE. 1 . Have you the hat ? — Yes, Sir, I have the hat. — Have you your hat 1 have my hat. — Have you my hat ? — I have your hat. — Which hat have you ? — I have my hat. — Have you the bread ? — I have the bread. — Have you my bread ? — I have your bread. — Have you your bread ? — I have my bread.^Which bread have you ? — I have your bread. — Have you my cane? — I have your cane. — Have you your cane? — Which cane have you ? — I have your cane. — Have you your soap? — Yes, Sir, I have my soap. — Which soap have you ? — Your soap, Sir. — Which sugar have you ? — I have your sugar. — Have you my paper ? — I have your paper. — Have you the paper? — Yes, Sir, I have the paper. — Which sugar have you. Sir ? — I have my sugar. Sir. — Have vou your hat ? — Yes, Sir, I have my hat.* SECOND LESSON . — Leccion Segunda. Have you the paper ? Have you it 7 I have it. I Tiene V. el papel ? ^ he tiene V. ? Yo Ze tengo. ' In writing these exercises, the pupils must pronounce all the phrasea aloud, as they write them. Ohs. DdSjre dictating a new lesson, the teacher puts to the pupils th« questions contained in the printed exercise of the last lessiu ; then he dio tates the new lesson, and puts fresh questions. 12 SECOND LESSON. It Have you my hat Yes, Sir, I have it The cloth. The shoe. I'he dog. The horse. The leather Le, 'this pronoun goes before th« verb.) I Tiene V. mi sombrero ? Si, senor, yo le tengo. El pano. El zapato. El perro. El caballo. El Cordoban. For the pronunciation of the syllables nor, no, za, llo, see ths Table. Have you my good cloth ! [ i Tiene V. mi buen pano 1 Good. Bueno, makes buen before a noun mi*scu!ine singular. ue . — 6 Bad. Malo, “ mat “ « Pretty. Handsome or fine. Ugly. Old. Bonito. Hermoso. Feo. jeo, Viejo. vie, jo . — i Have you the pretty dog ? No, Sir. I have it not. No, Not, I have not. Have you my old hat! I have not your old hat. I Tiene V. el bonito perro ? No, senor. Yo no le tengo. No, [verb.) No, (^No comes always before the Yo no tengo. I Tiene V. mi sombrero viejo ? jo Yo no tengo sombrero viejo de V Which paper have you? I have the good paper. Have you my good soap • I have it not I Que papel tiene V. ? Yo tengo el buen papel. uen . — I Tiene V. mi buen jabon ? Yo no le tengo. Have you the paper hat ? Of. I I Tiene V. el sombrero de papel 1 1 T>e, Chs. Two substantives depending on each other, without any stop between them, or separated by an apostrophe (’), are translated by changing iheir order, and placing the preposition de (of) between them : as, He haa a brick House, il tiene una casa de ladrillo ; Pope’s works, las ohras de Vcfe. The leather shoe. The gun. The ‘jon. The iron gun. I El zapato de cordoban. I El fusil. u. j El hierro, el fierro. iet —6 I El fusil de hierro. THIPD LESSON”. 13 The cotton The cap. The cotton cap. Have you the leather shoe ? My old iron gun. Your pretty cotton cap. El algodon. El gorro. rro, El gorro de algodon. I Tiene V. el zapato de cordoban ? Mi fusil viejo de hierro. Su boiiito gorro de algodon de V jf El bonito gorro de algodon de V' EXERCISE. 2 . Have you my fine horse ? — Yes, Sir, I have it. — Have you your do iltoe ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Have you my pretty leather shoe ? — [ have it. — Wliich horse have you ? — I have your good horse. — Which shoe have you ? — I have my ugly leather shoe. — Have yo j my cap ? — I have it not. — Have you your bad cap ? — Yes, I have it. — Have you my ugly cotton cap ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Which cap have you ? — I have the paper cap. — Have you the good cloth ? — Yes, I have it. — Have you my fine cloth ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Which cloth have you ? — I have your pretty cloth. — Have you ycur old soap ? — I have it not. Sir. — Have you my good soap ? — No, Sir ; I have your bad soap. — Which soap have you ? — 1 have your old soap. — Have you your good gun ? — I have it not. Sir. — Have you my old iron gun ? — I have it. — Which gun have you ? — I have the old iron gun. — Have you my cloth cap ? — Yes, Sir, I have your pretty cloth cap. — Have you the fine leather shoe ? — No, I have it not. — Which leather shoe have you ? — I have the ugly leather shoe. — Have you your old horse ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Wliich horse have you ? — I have my fine horse. — Have you my old dog ? — No, Sir, I have not your old dog I have your good dog. THIRD LESSON . — Leccion Tercera. Have you any thing ? I have something. Any thing — something. I have nothing. I have not any thing. Nothing. Not any thing I Tiene V. algo ? or alguna cosa. Yo tengo algo. go. Alguna cosa, algo. gu. Yo no tengo nada. Yo nada tengo, (or no tengo uinguua cosa.) No (v) nada Nada (v). Ohs. A If nada is used without no, nada is placed before the verb. I nave nothing 1 Nada tengo, (or no tengo nada.) 14 THIRD LESSON. Obs. B. The pronoun subject, or nominative, is almost always omitled be* sause the termination of the verb shows the person which perfonns the ac- tion expressed by the verb. The wine. El vino. The money. El dinero. The gold. El oro. The button. El boton. The gold button. El boton de oro. The coffee. El cafd. The cheese. El queso. The candlestick. El candelero. The golti candlestick. El candelero de oro. Have you any thing good? I have nothhig good. Are you hungry ? I am hungry. I am not hungry. Are } ou thirsty ? I am not thirsty. Are you sleepy ? I am sleepy. Are you ashamed ? I am not ashamed. What have you? * What ? What have you good ? Ohs, C. Que, in connection with before the adjective. What have you bad ? I have nothing bad. I Tiene V. algo bueno, ,or de bueno?) Yo no tengo nada de bueno, (ir naaa de bueno tengo.) t I Tiene V. hambre ? [bre.; t Yo tengo hambre, (or tengo ham- t No tengo hambre I I Tiene V. sed ? t No tengo sed. 1 1 Tiene V. sueho ? sue. t Tengo sueno. ho — n. 1 1 Tiene V. vergiienza ? ue. t No tengo vergiienza. za — z. I Que tiene V. ? I Que ? I Que tiene V. bueno? (or de buen*. an adjective, requires, sometimes, I I Que tiene Vm. malo? (''r de malo. 1 No tengo nada male, de malo.) EXERCISE. 3. Have you my good wine ? — I have it. — Have you the old gold ? — 1 nave it not. — Have you any tiling? — Yes, I have something. — What aave you ? — I have the money. — Have you the gold candlestick ?— No, 1 nave it not; I have nothing. Sir. — Have you my old (jihcjo) cheese? — have it. — Have you a^iy thing bad? — Yes, Sir, I have something bad; I have the bad coffee. — Hove you your ugly iron mutton ? — No, I have it not. — What have you ? — I have the gold candle- stick. — Have vou my cloth cap ? — No, I have it not. — Yes, you have FOURTH LESSON. 15 )l. — No, Sir, I have not any thing. — Have you any thing handsi me 1 — No, Sir, I have something ugly. — What have you ugly ? — I have the ugly dog. — Have you any thing old ? — I have nothing old ; I havo something pretty. — What have you pretty ? — I have the pretty papeT cap. — Are you hungry ? — Yes, I am hungry. — Are you sleepy ? — No, I am not sleepy ; I am thirsty. — Are you ashamed ? — No, Sir, I am sleepy. — Have you any thing good ? — Yes, Sir, I have voui good bread. FOURTH LESSON . — Leccion Cuarta. Have you that book ? T have that book. That. That horse. That money. That cloth cap. That old dog. That pretty paper hat. I Tiene V. ese libro ? Ten go ese libro Ese. Ese caballo Ese dinero. Ese gorro de pano. Ese perro viejo. Ese bonito sombrero de papei. flave you the bread of the baker? I Tiene V. el pan del panadero ^ Of the. Of the tailor. Of the neighbor. Have you the cloth of the tailor ? The tailor’s cloth. S' (meaning) the (n) of the (n). The neighbor’s cap. My tailor’s dog. That neighbor’s horse. Ohs. A. El (n) de is used before Have you my neighbor’s cap ? Have you that tailor’s cloth ? Del. Del sastre. Del vecino. [Tiene V. el pano del sastre ? El pano del sastre. El (n) del (n), or el (n) de. El sombrero del vecino. El perro de mi sastre. El caballo de este vecino. adjective pronouns, such as my, that I I Tiene V. el gorro de mi vecino ? I I Tiene V. el pano de este sastre ? Have you the neighbor’s? That, or the one. S meaning that of, or the on*> of The neighbor’s. My tailor’s That tailors. Your brother’s. Brother. The man. [ Tiene V. el del vecino ? El del, or el de. El del, or el de. (See Obs. A,] El del vecino. El de mi sastre. El de ese sastre. El de su hermano de V. Hermann. El horabre. id FOURTH LESSON. Have you my bread or the baker’s? Or, I have your neighbor’s. Have you yours or mine s I have mine , I have not yours. MinCi or my own. Yours. Ohs. B. El suyo is used when \ the phrase ; but el de V. must be us I Tiene V. mi pan d el del pauadero d, Yo tengo el de su vecino de V I Tiene V. el suyo 6 el mio ? Yo tengo el mio ; no tengo el de V El mio, El suyo, (or el de F.) nas been expressed in the first part rd d when V. has not been expressed Are you warm ? I am warm. Are you cold? I am not cold. Are you afraid ? I am afraid. That coal. My friend. The man’s. 1 1 Tiene V. calor ? t Tengo caloi. t I Tiene V. frio ? io. — 6. t Yo no tengo frio. t I Tiene V. miedo ? T Tengo miedo. i Ese carbon, j Mi amigo, i El del hombre. EXERCISES.' 4. Have you that book ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Which book have )ou? — I have the neighbor’s. — Have you my stick or that of my friend ? — I have your friend’s. — Have you your bread or the baker’s ? — I have not that of the baker ; I have mine. — Have you the neigh- bor’s horse ? — No, I have not tlie neighbor’s. — Which horse have you? — I have the baker’s. — Have you your dog or the tailor’s ? — I have my own. — Have you the pretty gold button of my brother ? — I have it not. — Which button have you ? — I have my cloth button. — Have you my cloth cap, or the tailor’s ? — I have not yours ; I have the tailor’s, — Have you my brother’s horse, or mine ? — I have your brother’s. — Which coffee have you ? — I have the neighbor’s. — Have you your dog, or that of the man ? — I have the man’s. — Have you your friend’s money ? — I have it not ; I have my own. — Are you afraid of that dog? —No, Sir. — Are you cold or warm ? — I am warm. — Are you sieepy ? — 1 am not sleepy ; I am hungry. 5 . Have you my bread, or the baker’s ? — I have yours. — ^Have you my gold candlestick, or the neighbor’s ?— I have the neighbor’s. — Have you your paper or mine ? — I have mine, — Have you your tailor’s cloth 1 — have it not. — Wliich cloth have you ? — My brother’s.. — V/hi :h haf FIFTH LESSON. 17 save you ? — I ha\'e tlmt man’s. — Have you the old sticR of ny brother 1 *— No, I have not your brother’s old stick ; I have my own. — Have you that man’s soap ? — No, I have it not. — Which soap have you ? — I have your brother’s old soap. — Have you my iron gun, or my broth er’s ? — I have yours. — Wnich shoe have you ? — I Lave my friend’s .Gather shoe. — Have you your gold button, or mine? — I have nol yours. — Which button have you ? — I have the tailor’s. — Have you any thing good ? — Yes, Sir, I have something good. — What have you good? — I have your brother’s good horse. — Are you afraid of thai man ? — No, Sir, I am not afraid of that man. — Have you my neigh- bor’s coal ? — Yes, Sir, I have it. — Have you that man’s good horse ? — No, Sir, I have my own. FIFTH LESSON . — Leccion Quinta The merchant. Of the shoemaker. The boy. The pencil The chocolate. E! comerciante. Del zapatero. El muchacho. El Idpiz. El chocolate. chueno iz. — z. Have you the merchant’s cane or your own? I have neither the merchant’s cane nor mine. Neither — nor I Tieiie V. el baston del comerciante 6 el de V.? Yo 710 tengo ni el palo del comer- ciante ni el mio. No — ni — ni. I have neither the bread nor the Yo no tengo ni el pan ni el queso, (oi cheese. ni el pan ni el queso tengo.) Ohs. A. When no is used, it stands before the verb ; but when it is not used, ni — ni must be placed before the nouns, and then the verb is placed last. Are you hungry or thirsty ? I am neither hungry nor thirsty Are you ^arrn or cold ? I am neither warm nor cold. Have you the iron or the gold button ? [ have neither the iron nor the gold button. Have you yours or mine ? I have neither yuiirs nor mine t I Tiene V. hambre 6 sed ? t Yo no tengo ni hambre ni sed. t I Tiene V. calor 6 frio ? t Ni calor ni frio tengo. 1 * I Tiene V. el boton de liierro 0 el de oro? t Ni el betoa de hierro ni el do ore tengo. I Tiene V. el suyo o el mio ? Yo no tengo ni (d do V. ni el mio. FIFI'H LESSON. (8 The cork The corkscrew That umbrella . The Frenchman Of the carpenter The wine. The hammer. El corcho. El tirabuzon. Ese pardguas. guas . — S El Frances. ces . — e Del carpintero. El vino. El martin 0. llo . — II IV hat is the matter with you? I t i Que tiene V.? Nothing is the matter with me | t Yo no tengo nada, {^or iiada tengvi ; What is the matter with ? J i Que ? Nothing is the matter with ? ^ Nada , (or no—nada.'l Ohs. B. The first of these phrases means — What have you ? and tlwe second — I have nothing ; in which what is translated que^ and nothings nada; and is the matter with is changed into tiene, tienen, or tengo &.c.j 'have.) EXERCISES. 6 . 1 am neither hungry nor thirsty. — Have you my shoe or the snoe- maker’s? — I have neither yours nor the shoemaker’s. — Have you your pencil or the boy’s ? — I have neither mine nor the boy’s. — Which pencil have you ? — I have that of the merchant. — Have you my choco- late or the merchant’s ? — I have neither yours nor the merchant’s ; 1 nave my own. — Have you the bread or the wine ? — I have neither the bread nor the wine. — Have you your cloth or the tailor’s ? — 1 have not the tailor’s ; I ha\ e mine — Have y )u your corkscrew or mine ? — I have neither yours nor mine. — Which cork have you ? — I have my neighbor’s. — Have you the iron or the gold button ? — I have neither the iron nor the gold button. — Are you warm or cold ? — 1 am neither warm nor cold ; I am sleepy. — Have you my hammer or the carpen- ter’s ? — I have neither yours nor the carpenter’s. — Which hammer have you ? — I have the iron hammer. — Have you any thing ? — I have something fine. — What have you fine ? — I have the Frenchman’s fine umbrella. — Have you the hat or the cap ? — I have neither the hat nc. r me cap. 7. Have you' my gun or yours ? —I have neither youi-s nor mine. — Which gun have you ? — I have my friend’s. — Have you my clotli cap or that of my brother ? — I have neither yours nor your brother’s.— Wliich cap have you ? — I have my boy’s paper cap. — Have you the book of the Frenchman or that of the merchant ?- -I have neither the Frenchman’s nor the merchant’s — Which book have vou?— ! hav<» SIXTH LESSON. 19 fOUTs . — What is the matter with you ? — I am cold and hungiy. — Hav€ fou any thing good or bad ? — I have neither any thing good or bad SIXTH LESSON— Leccion Sexta. The ox. The biscuit. Of the captain. Of the cook. El buey. El bizcocho. Del capitan. Del cocinero ue^. Have I ? /. You have. You have not. Am I hungry ? You are hungry You are not hungry Am I afraid? You are afraid. You are not afraid You are right I am right You are wrong I am wrong. Am 1 right or wrong? You are neither right nor wrong. Are you right or wrong ? 1 am neither wrong nor right. Obs. I am wrong, is rendered i io ill — Yo no tengo razouj or Yo hag Are you rights or not 7 i Tiene V. ra tor wrong, word for word is. You hav V, ni tiene razon ni deja de tcnerla. Have I the nail ? You have it You have it not. Have I any thing good ? You have nothing good. Have I the carpenter’s hammer ' You have it not Have you it ? I have it. I hive it not i Tengo yo? Yo. V. tiene. V. no tiene. 1 1 Tengo yo harnbre i t V. tiene harnbre, t V. no tiene harnbre. 1 1 Tengo yo rniedo ? t V. tiene miedo. t V. no tiene miedo. t V. tiene razon. t Yo tengo razon. t V. no tiene razon. — V. hace mai t Yo no tengo razon. — Yo hago mal 1 1 Tengo yo razon, 6 no ? t V. ni tiene razon ni deja de tenerla t I Tiene V. razon, 6 no ? t (Yo) ni ♦eugo razon ni dejo dr tenerla. i Spanish by, f am not right, or i 0 mal. Are you right or wrong ? by zon, 6 no ? and. You are neither right > neither reason nor are in need of it 1 Tengo yo el clavo ? V. le tiene. V. no le tiene. I Tengo yo algo (de) bueno ? V. no tiene nada (de) hueiio. I Tengo yo el martillo de) carpinterc V. no le tiene. I Le tiene V. ? Le tengo. No le tengo 20 SIXTH LESSOS. I'lie mutton- The knife. Have you the fine one ? Have I the ugly one ? The fine one. The ugly one El carnero. El cuchillo. llo . — 1 1 Tiene V. el hennoso ? t I Tengo yo el feo ? t El hermoso. t El feo. Which one have you ? Which one have I ? Which one ? Am I afraid or ashamed ? You are neither afraid nor ashamed, tiave I my knife or yours ? You have neither yours nor mine. I Cual tiene V. ? I Cual tengo yo ? ua . — I Cual ? I Tengo yo miedo 6 vergiienza ? V. no tiene ni miedo ni vergiienza I Tengo yo mi cuchillo 6 el de V. ? V. no tiene ni el suyo ni el mio EXERCISES. 8 I have neitlier the baker’s dog, nor that of my Mend. — Are you ashamed ? — I am not ashamed. — Are you afraid or ashamed ? — I am neither ashamed nor afraid. — Have you my knife ? — Which one ? — The fine one, — Have you my mutton or the cook’s ? — I have neither yours nor the cook’s. — Which (one) have you ? — I have that of the captain. — Have I your biscuit? — You have it not. — Am I hungry or thirsty ? — You are neither hungry nor tliirsty. — Am I warm or cold ? — You are neither cold nor warm. — Am I afraid ? — You are not afraia. — Have I any thing good ? — You have nothing good. — What have I?- You have nothing. — Which pencil have I? — You have that of the Frenchman. — Have I your cloth or the tailor’s ? — You have neither mine nor that of the tailor. — Which one have 1 ? — You have your friend’s. — Have I your iron gun? — You have it. 9. Am I right? — You are right. — Am I wrong? — You are wrong. — Am I right or wrong? — You are neither right nor wrong; you are afraid. — Have I the good coffee or the good sugar ? — You have neither the good coffee nor the good sugar. — Have I any thing good or bad ? — You have neither any thing good nor bad. — What have I? — You have nothing. — What have I pretty? — You have my friend’s dog. — Which one ? — The pretty one. — Which corkscrew have I ? — You have the old one. — Have I the old one ? — Yes, Sir, you have it. — Have I your chocolate? — No, you have yours. — Have I the shoemaker’a leather shoe? — You have not the shoemaker’s; you have the cap- tain’s. — Have I it ? — Yes, you have it. — Am I ashamed of that man 1 — No, you are not ashamed of that man ; you are afraid of his dog. SEVENTH LESSON. 21 SEVENTH LESSON. Who 7 V/ho has the pencil 1 Who has it? Has the boy it? He has it not. Has he it not? He. Ohs. A. Ely when it is a pronoun, ? hen it is an article, it has it not Has he the hat ? He has it. I have You have. He has. Have I? Have you? Has he ? — Leccion Septima. I Quien ? qute . — () I Quien tiene el lapii ' I Quien le tiene ? I Le tiene el muchacho ? El no le tiene. i No le tiene el 7 El. is pointed out by an accent ; bia I Tiene O el sombrero ? 6l le tiene. Yo tengo. V. tiene. ^ll tiene. i Tengo yo? I Tiene V. ? I Tiene ^1 ? The chicken. The chest, the trunk The bag. The waistcoat The ship. The young man. Has the young man ? Has my friend ? Has that bedter? The rice. I The countryman, the peasant The servant. Is the peasant hungry ? He is hungry. Is your brother warm ? Is he ashamed ? What has he ? ■ What has my friend ? j What have I ? El polio El haul, el cofre. El costal or saco. El chaleco. El barco. El jdven or mozo . — Mozo mearsi also servant, waiter. I Tiene el mozo ? i Tiene mi amigo ? i Tiene ese panadero? El arroz. El aldeano, el paisano. ea. El criado. 1 1 Tiene hambre el aldeano ? t El tiene hambre. t I Tiene calor su hermano de V t I Tiene ^1 vergiienza? ue. I Que tiene el ? I Que tiene mi amigo? I Que tengo yo ? Has he his shoe ? Yes, Sir, he has his shoe. I Tiene el su zapato ? Si, (sehor, el tiene su zapaio seventh lesson. His. His bird His foot His eye. Su. (Adjective pionoua.) Su pdjaro Su pie. Su ojo. Which book has that maul He has his own. His or his own. Has he his or mine I He has neither his nor yours. Has he his money \ Yes, he has his own. I Que libro tiene ese hombre ? tiene el suyo, (or el suyo prcpio.) El suyo, or el suyo propio. (Ab solute possessive pronoun.) I Tiene 61 el suyo 6 el inio? fil no tiene ni el suyo ni el de V I Tiene ^1 su dinero 7 Sij 6\ tiene el suyo. Has anybody my money ? No, Sir, nobody has it. Somebody, anybody. Some one, any one. Nobody, not anybody. No one, not any one. I Tiene alguno (or algu en) mi di- nero? No, senor, ninguno le tiene. Alguno. Alguien. Ninguno Nadie Obs. B. Alguno, Alguien, Ninguno, and Nadie, are indefinite proiiouni standing always for persons. See Appendix. Has anybody my bird ? Somebody has it Nobody has it. i Tiene alguno mi pdjaro? Alguno le tiene. — Alguien le tiene. Ninguno le tieno. — Nadie le tiene EXERCISES. 10 . Who has my trunk ? — The boy has it. — Is he thirsty or hungry He is neither thirsty nor hungry. — Has the man the chicken ? — He aas it. — ^Who has my waistcoat ? — The young man has it. — ^Has th<^ captain my ship ? — He has it not. — Who has it ? — The merchant has it. — Who has tne knife ? — Which knife ? — ^Mine. — The servant has it. — -Is he afraid ? — He is not afraid. — Is the man right or wong ? — • He is neither right nor wrong. — Who has the countryman’s nee ? — My servant has it. — Has he my horse ? — No, Sir, he has it not. — Who has it ? — The peasant has it. — Who has my old shoe ? — The shoe- maker has it. — What has your friend ? — He has his good money.— Has he my gold ? — He has not yours ; he has his own. — Who has it ?- * The young man has it. — Who is cold ? — Nobody is cold. — Is anybjxly warm ?— -Nobody is warm. EIGHTH LESSON. 23 11 . lias any one my gun ? — No one has it. — Has the young man my book ? — He has it not. — What has he ? — He has nothing. — Has he the hammer or the stick ? — He has neither the hammer nor the stick. — Has he my umbrella ? — He has it not. — Who has it ? — Nobody has it. — Yes, somebody has it. — Who ? — That man has it. — Has your baker my bird or Ms ? — He has not yours, he has Ms. — Have I you> bag or that of your friend ? — You have neither mine nor my friend’s ; vou have your own. — Who has the peasant’s bag”! — The old baker has it. — Who is afraid ? — The tailor’s boy is afraid. — Is he sleepy ? — He is not sleepy ; he is cold. — What is the matter with Mm ? — NotMng. — Has the peasant my money ? — He has it not. — Has the captain it ? — He has it not. — Who has it ? — Nobody has it. — Has your neighbor any thing good ? — He has notMng good. — What has he ugly ? — He has notMng ugly. — Has he any thing ? — He has nothing. Has the merchant my cloth or liis ? — He has neither yours, nor Ms. — WMch cloth has he? — He has that of my brother. — WMch clotn has the tailor ? — He has his own. — Has your brother his wine or the neighbor’s ? — He has neither Ms nor the neighbor’s. — Which wine has he ? — He has Ms own. — Has anybody my gold button ? — Nobody has it. — Who has my button ? — ^Your good boy has it. — Has he my paper or my horse ? — He has neither your paper n.i ^^ur horse ; he has Ms friend’s horse. — Who has the Frenchman’s good chocolate ?~-The merchant has it. — Has he it ? — Yes, Sir, he has it. — Are you afraid oi ashamed ? — I am neither afraid nor ashamed. — Has your cook Ms mutton ? — He has it. — Have you my bread or my cheese ? — I have neither your bread nor your cheese. — Have I your wine or your bread ? — You have neither my wine nor my bread. — What have I ? — You have your mutton. — Has any one my gold button? — No one has it. 12 . EIGHTH I ESSON -Leccion Octava. El marinero. Su drbol. El espejo. Su colchou de V., or el cclcbss de V. The sailor. His tree. The looking-glass. Y^our mattress. 1 The stranger. The foreigner The garden. My glove. El estrangero. El estrangero or forastero. El jardin. Mi guanto. 24 EIGHTH LS8SOW. This OX. This hay. That friend That man. Este bney. Este heno. Ese amigo. Aquel hombre This I Esie. That I EsCf aquel. _ Ohs. A. Este refers to the persons or things nearest to the speaker ; ess io tlrO persons or things nearest to the person spoken to ; and aquel is used lo point out persons or things distant, both from the speaker and from the person spoken to. It is also employed when speaking of events, &c., passed long time since ; as. In those days, en Have you this or that book ? I have this one, I have not that one This one. That one. Qbs. B. One is not translated ; we Have I this one or that one ? \Tou have this one, you have not that one. Has the man tnis hat or that one ? aquellos dias. I Tiene V. este libro 6 aquel 7 Tengo este, no tengo aquel Este. Aquel. only say this or that. I Tengo yo este 6 aquel ? V. tiene este, no tiene aquel I Tiene el hombre este sombrero d aquel ? He has nr»^ this one, IJiiY thai one. ']&! no tiene este, sino aquel Sino. Pero. tiene este, pero no tiene aqueL It is better to repeat the verb in the second part of the phrase. But. He has this one, but not that one. Ohs. C. He has not this one, but that one The billet The garret. The grana^. The ass. The crm. Have you this billet or that one? I have not this one, but that one. I have this one, but not that one. Has the neighbor this looking-glass or that one? Ho has this one, but not that one 6l no tiene este, sino tiene aquel El billete. El desvan. El granero. El burro. El grano, el trigo. I Tiene V. este billete 6 aquel ? No tengo este, pero tengo aquel. Tengo este, pero no tengo aquel. I I iene el vecino este espejo < aquel ? ^ tiene este, pero no tiene aquel Have you the oillet that my brother has ? I have not the billet which your brother lias ^ Tiene V. el billete que mi her mano tiene ? Yo no tengo el biliete que su he?* mano de V tiene SIGHT H LE6SON. 25 Which. Thai. Have you the horse which I have ? I have the horse which you have. I have not that which you have. That which. The one which. Have I the glove which you have? You have not the one which I have. That which he has. T^e one which you have. Q,ue. (Relative pronoun ) I Tiene V. el caballo que tengo r Tengo el caballo que V. tiene. Yo no tengo el que V. tiene. El que I Tengo yo el guanto que V. tiona > V. no tiene el que yo tengo. El que 6\ tiene. El que V. tiene. EXERCISES. 13 . Which hay has the stranger ? — He has that of the peasant.- -liaa die sailor my looking-glass ? — He has it not. — Have you this hat or that one ? — I have this one. — Have you the hay of my garden or diat of yours ? — I have neither that of your garden nor that of mine, Dut I have that of the stranger. — Which glove have you ? — I have that of the sador. — Have you* his mattress? — I have it. — Which gun has the sailor ? — He has his own. — Who has my good billet ? — This man has it. — Who has that stick ? — Your friend has it. — Have you the corn of your granary or that of mine ? — I have neither that of your granary nor that of mine, but I have that of my merchant. — Who has my glove ? — That servant has it. — What has you servant ? — He has the tree of this garden. — Has he that man’s book ? — He has not the book of that man, but lie has that of this boy. — Has the peasant thi^; or that ox ? — He has neither this nor that, but he hag the one which the boy has. — Has this ass his hay or that of the horse ? — He has neither his nor that of the horse. — Wliich horse has this peasant ?— He has that of your neighbor. — Have I your hay or his ? — You have neither mine nor his, but you have that of your friend. — Have you this horse’s hay ? — I have not his hay, but his corn. — Has your brother my wine or his ? — He has neither yours nor his own, but he hes the sailor’s. — Has the stranger my bird or his own ? — He nas that of tlie captain. — Have you the tree of this garden ?— I have It not. — Are you hungry or thirsty ? — I am neither hungry nor thirsty, ful I cm sleepy. 14 . Has the .sailor this bird or that one ? — He has not this, but that 2Jne. — Has your servant tliis sack or that one ? — He has this one but not that one. — Has your cook this chicken or that one? — He !ias neither this one nor that one, but he has that of his neighbor.— A.m I riglit or wrong? — You are neither right nor wrong, but you? §ock 1 boy is wrong. — Have I this knife or that one? — You have nei 26 NINTH LESSON. ther this nor that one. — What have I? — You have nothing gr>od, but you have something bad. — Have }^ou the chest which I have ? — 1 have not that which you have.- — Which horse have you ? — I have the one which your brother has. — Have you the ass which my friend has 1 — I have not that which he has, but I have that which you have.—* Has your friend the looking-glass wliich you have or that which J have ? — He has neither that which you have nor that which I have but he has liis own. 15 . Which bag has the peasant? — He has the one whicn his ooy hafi. — Have I your golden or your iron candlestick ? — You have neither mv golden nor my iron candlestick. — Have you my waistcoat or that of the tailor ? — I have neither yours nor that of the tailor. — Which one have you ? — I have that which my friend has. — Are you cold or warm ? — I am neitiier cold nor warm, but I am thirsty. — Is your friend afraid or ashamed ? — He is neither afraid nor ashamed, but he is sleepy. — Who is wrong? — Your friend is wrong. — Has any one my umbrella ? — No one has it.— Is any one ashamed ? — No one is ashamed, but my friend is hungry. — Has the captain the ship which you have or that which I have ? — He has neither that which you have, nor that which I have. — Which one has he ? — He has that of his friend. — Is he right or wrong ? — He is neither right nor wrong. — Has the French- man any thing good or bad ? — He has neither any thing good nor bad, but he has something pretty. — What has he pretty ? — He has the pretty chicken. — Has he the good biscuit ? — He has it not, but hie neighbor has it. NINTH LESSON.— Lecciou Nona, DEFINITE ARTICLE IN THE PLURAL MASCULINE. The. Los. Of the, from the. De los. To the^ at the, i A los. • THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. Rule . — Nouns terminating in a short or unaccented vowel are mad? plural by adding s to the singular ; as, book, libro, books, libros. Nouns ending in a long or accented vowel, or in a consonant, or in y add es to make the plural ; as, bashaw, baja, bashaws, bajdes, captain ^apkan., ca,p<’alns, capitanes, law, ley, laws, leyes. NINTH LESSON. 27 Words oiidiiiff in z add es, and change the z into c, judge, judges, ^'mcccs, oy juezes. The book. Good. The stick. The ox. The judge. El libro + s. Bueno -{- s. El baston -j- El buey es. El juez + ( *^8. The books. Good books The sticks The oxen. The judges. or retain it; a:' Los libros Buenos libros Los bastone-B Los bueyee Los juecefi' The books The good books. Of the books. The canes. The good canes. Of the canes. The neighbors. The good neighbors. The friends. The old friends. The pretty dogs. The ugly hats. The woods, (forest.) The Frenchmen, (the French.) The Englishman. The Englishmen, (the English.) Ohs. A. Adjectives must agree ii pronouns they qualify, and their pi kiid down above for nouns. The place, the places The nail, the nails. Los libros. Los buenos libros. De los libros Los bastones. Los buenos bastones. De los bastones. Los vecinos. Los buenos vecinos Los amigos. Los amigos viejos. Los bonitos perros. Los sombreros feos. Los bosques. Los Franceses. El Ingles. Los Ingleses. gender and number with the noun£ ral is made according to the niliis El lugar, los lugares. El clavo, los clavos. Have you the books ? I have the books. Who has the hats ? He has the hats. Have I the birds ? Yes, Sir. I I Tiene V. los libros ? 1 Yo tengo los libros. I Quien tiene los sombreros r El tiene los sombreros. I Tengo yo los pajaros 1 Si, sehor Have you my knives ? ? have not your knives I Tiene V. mis cuchillos ? Yo no tengo sus cuchillos de V My Yen? SINGULAR. PLURAL Mi. Su (n) de V El (a) de V. Vuostro /'See Obs. Mis. Sus (n) de V Los (n) de V V uestros. A, Lesson IV 28 NI^^H LESSOJ<. llis or lier Our. Tlieir. 8INGULAH PLURAI* Su. Sus. Nuestro. Nuestros. tus -(i Su. . Sus. Ohs. B. These adjectives agree in number with the nouns that come aftei ibeni, and to which they refer. I lis or her books. Our book, our books. The w'ork, (labor.) The works. Our gloves. Small. Large. I Sus libros. I Nuestro libro, nuestros libros. El trabajo. Los trabajos. I Nuestros guantes. I Pequeno, (sing.) Pec aeh os, (plur.) I Grande, (sing.) Grandes, (plur.) Which hats ? WJiich ones 7 These books. Those books. These. Those. These or tnose booKs. Have you these or those bocks ? These birds or those. Have I these or those bira ? I Que sombreros ? I Cuales ? Estos libros. Esos libros, aquellos libros- Estos. Esosj aquellos. (See Obs. A, Lesson VIII.) Estos libros 6 aquellos. I Tiene V. estos libros 6 aquellos ? Estos pdjaros 6 aquellos. I Tengo yo estos pdjaros 6 aquellos < The eyes. The asses VV'hich horses have y>u? Have you the fine norses of your good neighbors ? Have I his small gloves ? V^ou have not his small gloves, but yiu have his large hats. Ha3 your brother his iron guns ? He has not his iron guns Whicli ones has he I Los ojos. Los burros. I Que caballos tiene V ? I Tiene V. los hermosos caballos di sus buenos vecinos (de V. ?) i Tengo yo sus guantes pequenos? (or guantecitos.) V. no tiene sus guantes pequenos, pero V. tiene sus sombreros gran- des. I Tiene el hermano de V. sus fusiles de hierro ? fil no tiene sus fusiles de hierro. I Cuales tiene ^1 ? Of my gardens. Of your pretty horses De mis jardines De sus bonitos caballos de "V NIKTH LESSON. 29 The Fieiichmeij’s fine umbrellas. Of my woods. Of your fine trees. Have you the Frenchmen’s fine um- brellas ? I have not their umbrellas, but I have their hue canes. Have you the trees of my gardens ? I have not the trees of your gardens {lave you my leamern shoes ? I have not your leathern shoes, but 1 have your cloth caps. The bread, the loaves. Los hcrmosos pardguas dc ^os Fran ceses. De mis bosques. De los hermosos drboles de V. ^ Tiene Vm. los hermosos paiaguac de los Franceses ? Yo no tengo sus paraguas, pero tengo sus hermosos bastones. ^Tiene V los drboles de mis jar- dines ? Yo no tengo los drboles de sus jar- dines de V. I Tiene V. mis zapatos de cordoban ? Yo no tengo sus zapatos de cordo- ban de V., pero tengo sus gorros de pano. Ei pan, los panes. EXERCISES. 16 . Have you the gloves ? — Yes, Sir, 1 have the gloves. — Ha^^e you my gloves? — No, Sir, I have not your gloves. — Have I your looking- glasses ? — You have my looking-glasses. — Have I your pretty books ? — You have not my pretty books. — Which books have I ? — You have the pretty books of your friends. — Has the foreigner ou/ good guns ?— He has not our good guns, but our good ships. — Who has our fine norses ? — Nobody has your fine horses, but somebody has your fine oxen. — Has your neighbor the trees of your gardens ? — He has not the trees of my gardens, but he has your handsome woods. — Have you the horses’ hay ? — I have not their hay, but their corn. — Has your tailor my fine golden buttons ? — He has not your fine golden buttons, but your fine golden candlestick. — What has the sailor ? — He has his fine sliips. — Has he my sticks or my guns ? — He has neither your sticks nor your guns. — Who has the tailor’s good waistcoats ? — Nobody has .\is waistcoats, but somebody has his gold buttons. — Has the French- man’s boy my good umbrellas ? — He has not vour good umbrellas, but your good sticks. — Has the shoemaker my leather shoes ? — He lia^ vour leather shoes. — What has the captain ? — He has his good sailors. 17 . Which mattresses has the sailor ? — He has the good mattresses of his captain. — Which gardens has the Spaniard ? — He has the gardens 3f the English. — Wliich servants has the Englishman ? — He has the sen^ants of the French. — What has your bov ? — He has his pretty birds 80 TENTH lesson. — What has thu merchani ? — He hasour pretty chests. — What has the baker ? — He has our fine asses.— -Has he our nails or our hammers ? — • tie has neither our nails nor our hammers, but he has our good loaves. — Has the carpenter his iron hammers ? — He has not his iron hammers, but his iron nails. — Which biscuits has the baker ? — He has the bis- cuits of his friends. — Has our friend our fine pencils ? — He has not our fine pencils. — Which ones has he ? — Ho has the small pencils of merchants. — Which sticks has your servant ? — He has the sticks of his good merchants. — Has your fnend the small knives of our merchants ? — He has not their small knives, but their golden candlesticks. — Have you these guns ? — I have not these guns, but these iron knives. — Has the man this or that billet ? — He has neither this nor that. — Has he your book or your friend’s ? — He has neither mine nor my friend’s ; he has his own. — Has your brother the wine which 1 have or that which you have ? — He has neither that which you have nor that which I have. — Wliich wine has he ? — He has that of his merchants. — Have you the bag which my servant has ? — I have not the bag which your ser- vant has. — Have you the chicken which my cook has or that which the peasant has ? — 1 have neither that which your cook has nor that which the peasant has. — Is the peasant cold or warm ? — He is neither cold nor warm. TENTH LESSON . — Leccion Decima. Those of. Have you my books or those of the man ? [ have not your books I have those of the man Los de. I Tieiie V. mis libros 6 Los del hom- bre ? Yo no tengo los libros de Vrn., tengo los del hombre. Those which. Have you the books which I have ? I l Estos, (plur.) Ohs. C. In Spanish aquel and aquellos refer always to the object first mentioned ; este, estos, to the object last spoken of. Have you my canes or my guns? I have the latten but I have not the former Has the man these or those trunks ? He has these, but not those. Have ysu your guns or mine ? I have neither yours nor mine but those of our good friends I Tiene V. mis bastones 6 mis fusiles ? Yo tengo estos, pero no tengo aquel- los. I Tiene el hombre estos 6 aquellos baules ? Tiene esos, pero no aquellos. I Tiene V. sus fusiles 6 los mios ? Yo no tengo ni los de V. ni los mios, pero los de nuestros buenos ami* AUGMENTATIVE AND DIMINUTIVE NOUNS. Augmentative and Diminutive nouns, in Spanish, are those which by the v‘,ddition of a certain termination increase or diminish the signification ot heir primitives 52 TENTH LESSON. The augmentative nouns are formed by adding on, ore, azo, or onazo, to llie masculine nouns, and onn, ota^ aza^ or onaza to the feuiinine j sup- pressing their last letter, should it be n, e, or o ; as. A boy. TJn muchacho. | A girl. Vna inuchacha A big boy. Un muchachon. | A big girl. Una muchachona On and o/e, ona and ota, genera^.y indicate goodness in the object ; uza, onazo, onazUt most commonly refer only to size. The termination azo frequently signifies the blow or injury caused by the object to which it is added ; as, Whip. A very large whjp. A stroke with a whip. Latigo. Un latigazo. Un latigazo. The termination a^ro^dded to the noun to express a bkw, or injury, haa no change when it is formed out of a noun feminine ; as. Hand. A large hand. A blow, or stroke with the hand. Mano. Manaza. Manazo. The diminutive nouns are formed by adding illo, uelo for the mas- culine, and ita, ilia, uela for the feminine, to the noun, which drops its last letter if it be a, e, or o ; as, A boy. I Un muchacho. A little boy. 1 Un muchachito Una muchacha. Una muchachita. A girl. A little girl. Ito and ita generally express love towards the object, and beauty in it , illo and ilia sometimes mean pity, and sometimes contempt ; uelo and uela formerly were used in the same sense as ito and ita, at present they indi- cate only contempt. The greatest part of nouns ending in an, in, on, che, ge, que, re, te, ve, add Clio, cillo, zuelo, or cita, cilia, zuela to the noun, which in such case does not drop the ast letter ; as, Lion Man,. Woman. Leon. Honihre Mujer. Pretty little lion. Leoncito. Good little man. Hornbrecito Handsome little woman. Mujercita Exception. Gentleman, Mister, Senor. Xc»uns ending in z change it into c, and add cito, cita, &c. ; as, . Cross. Cruz. I Little cross. Crucecita. Fish Fez. j Little fish. Peceritn^ vececillo Nouns ending in co or ca change this syllable into quito, qmia; aj. Boat. Barco. 1 Little boat. Barquito. Barge Barca. j Little barge. Barquita ftndiuQ *ii p'o or fra, di'D the o and add uito. iiita. 6 lc. X as, TENTH LESSON. 33 B'nend Amigo. i Dear little friend Amiguito. t rieiid Amiga. | Dear little friend. Amiguita Nouns ending in zo, za. generally dc not admit the termination, and ex Dress the diminutive by translating the adjective ; as, The little Claudius, El pequeiio Claudio, or El niilo Claudio, Sometimes they drop the last two vowels and add the regular termination; as, Jz/Zzrt, Jui’ita ; indio, in* dito. When the letter n precedes the said last syllables io, ia, it is geuerall? cloanged into n; as, Antonio, Antohito. EXERCISES. 18 . Have you these or those billets ? — I have ne thei these nor those. — Have you the horses of the Spaniards or those of the English ? — 1 iiave those of the English, but I have not those of the Spaniards. — VVhich oxen have you ? — 1 have those of the foreigners. — Have you the chests which I have ? — I have not those which you have, but those which your brother has. — Has your brother your biscuits or mine ? — He has neither yours nor mine. — Which biscuits has he ? — He has his own. — Which horses has your friend ? — He has those which I have. — Has your friend my books or his ? — He has neither yours nor his ; but ne has those of the captain. — Have I your waistcoats or those of the tailors ? — You have neither these nor those. — Have I our asses ? — You have not ours, but those of our neighbors. — Have you the birds of the sailors ? — I have not their birds, but their fine sticks. — Which caps has your boy ? —He has mine. — Have I my shoes or those of the shoe- makers ? — You have not yours, but theirs, (those of the shoemakers, j jy. Which paper has the man ? — He has ours. — Has he our coffee ? — He has it not. — Have you our bags or those of the strangers ? — I have not yours, but theirs. — Has your carpenter our hammers or those of our friends ? — He has neither ours nor those of our friends. — Which nails has he ? — He has his good iron nails. — Has any one the ships of the English? — No one has those of the English, but some one has those of the French. — Who has the cook’s chickens ? — Nobody has his chickens, but somebody has his mutton. — Who has his cheese ? — His boy has it. — Who has my old gun ? — The sailor has it. — Have I that peasant’s bag? — You have not his bag, but his corn. — Which guns nas the Englishman ? — He lias those which you have. — Which urn- orellas has the Frenchman ? — He has those which his friend has. — Has he our books ? — He has not ours, but those which his neighboi nas. — Is the merchant’s boy hungry ? — He is not hungry, but thirsty, — Is your friend cold or warm ? — He is neither cold nor warm. — Is ho fraid ? — He is not afraid, but ashamed. — Has the young man the sticks 34 ELEVENTH LESSON. 3f our servants? — He hys not their sticks, but their soap. — Which pencils has he ? — He has chose of his old merchants. — Have you anv thing good or bad ? — I have neither any thing good nor bad, but some* thing tine. — What have you fine'? — I have our cooks’ fine wine. — Have YOU not their fine mutton ? — No, Sir, I have it not- KLEVENTH LESSON . — Leccion Undecwia. The comb The glass. The glass, (tumbler.) Have you my small combs ? I have them. El peine. El vidrio, (a factitious substanco.j El vaso. ^ I Tiene V. mis peines chiquitos * (or ( peinecitos ?) I Yo /os teiigo. Them. I Los. Ohs. A. Los is a pronoun when it placed ; but when los is an article, Has he my fine glares? He has them. Have I tliem? You have them. You have them not. Has the man my pretty combs ? He has them not. Has the boy them? The men have them. Have the men them? is governed by a verb before which it ,t comes before a substantive. ; Tiene 6\ mis hermosos vasos '? 6l los tiene I Los tengo yo ? V. los tiene. V. no los tiene. I Tiene el hombre mis bonitos peiu«s ^ !&1 no los tiene. I Los tiene el muchacho ? Los hombres los tienen. I Los tienen los hombres? They They have them. They have them not. Who has them? I Elios I Elios los tienen. I Elios no los tiener I I Quien los tiene ? The Germans. The Turks. The Germans have them The Italians. The Spaniards. Los Alemanes. Los Turcos. Los Alemanes los tienen Los Italianos. Los Espanoles. Sof/ie or any | Obs. B. Some iiwdi any^ used in an unlimited sense, are not translated, particularly when they are not '^ullowed by a noun : but the noun which a ELEVENTH LESSON. 35 j!i(iersl(/od in English is sometimes expressed in Spanish, or, what is morg asual, we give another form to the sentence, by merely using the woKb-— Vet, Sir, Sif seilor ; No, sir. No, senor, either with or without the verb fJavo you any wine? ] have some, (wine understood.) I have noL any, (wine understood.) Will you send for wine? i will send for some, (wine under- stood.) i will not send for any, (wine under- stood.; j I Tiene V. vino ? T engo vino. Si, teiigo. Si, senor. r No tengo vino. ^ No tengo. ( No, senor. 1 I Quiere V. enviar poi vino r Yo quiero enviar por vino. ) Si, quiero. f Si, senor C No quiero enviar por vino / No quiero. ( No, senor. So?ne, meaning a little, is expressed and translated by un pocv t have some, (a little.) Yo tengo un Some or any wine. t Vino. Some or any bread t Pan. Some or any tea t T6. Some or any buttons t Botones. Some or any knives t Cuchillos. Some or any men t Hombres. Have you any wine ? I have some wine. Has this man any cloth? He heis some cloth. Has he any books? He has some books. Have you any money? I have some money. t I Tiene V. vino ? t Yo tengo vino, or Tengo un poco. t I Tiene paho este hombre i t fil tiene paho. 1 1 Tiene dl libros ? t El tiene libios, or Tiene algunos libros. t I Tiene V. dinero ? t Yo tengo dinero, or Tengo un poco de diueio. No Not any 1 have no wine. Ho has not any money. You Uave no books. They have not any friends No. (In a general indefinite f?cniio. Yo no tengo vino. El no tiene dinero. V. no tiene libros. Elios no tienen amiiroa 56 ELEVENTH LESSON. Some, Some, Any. Some. Ones I Un pocoy (a smaJ quantity.; r Alguno. {Algun^ before a noun ) masculine siiiguiar.) ( Algunos. Obs. C. Alguno, Algun, and Algunos are used in a limited sense. Has he any paper? Have you any good paper? Have I any? Have you any good ? I Tiene (el) algun papel ? I Tiene V. algun biieu pape. ? I Tengo yo alguno? I Tiene V. alguno buono ? (No. , I Ninguno. (Ninqun, before a noun No. Not any. ISone. S ^ i \ ^ masculine singulai.) L Ningunos Ohs. D. Ninguno, Ningun, and Ningunos, are used in a limited sense He has not any paper. < He has not any good paper. | He has not any. | I have none. | He has not any good. | He has none good. | Have you any paper? I have some I have some good. (El) no tiene ningun papel, or Ningun papel tiene. (See Obs. B, Lesson III.) (6i) no tiene ningun bueii papel, oi Ningun buen papel tiene. Ninguno tiene, or No tiene ninguno. Ninguno tengo, {pi. ningunos tengo.) No tiene ninguno bueno, or No tiene ningunos buenos. Ninguno bueno tiene, or Ningunos buenos tiene. I Tiene Vm. algun papel ? Tengo alguno, (or un poco.) Tengo alguno bueno. Some old wine. Some bad cheese Vino af ejo. Queso malo. Ohs. E. When malo is befor*' a noun of person it means wicked. Any excellent coffee. The painter. The picture. The picture, (likeness.) Tlie painter has some pictures. Excelente cafe ex . — x El pintor. El cuadro. El retrata El pintor tiene algunos cuadros. ELEVENTH LESSON. 37 EXERCISES. 2C. Have }ou my fine glasses ? — I have them. — Have you the fine aoraes of tl .e English ? — I have them not. — Which sticks have you ? —1 have t lose of the foreigners. — Who has my small combs ? — My boys have them. — Which knives have you ? — I have those of your friends. — Have I your good guns ? — You have them not, but your friends have them. — Have you my pretty pictures, or those of my brothers ? — I have neither yours nor your brothers’, but my own. — Which ships have the Germans ? — The Germans have no ships. — Have the sailors our fine mattresses ? — They have them not. — Have the cooks them ? — They have them. — Has the captain your prettv books? — He has them not. — Have I them? — You have them. Yon have them not. — Has the Italian them ? — He has them. — Havo the Turks our fine guns ? — They have them not. — Have the Spam’^rtb^ them ? — They have them. — Has the German the pretty umbi%lla» of the Spaniards? — He has them. — Has he them? — Yes, Sir, he has them. — Has the Italian our pretty gloves ? — He has them not. — Who has them ? — The Turk has them. — Has the tailor our waistcoats o those of our friends ? — He has neither the latter nor the former.— Which caps has he ? — He has those which the Turks have. — Which flogs have you ? — I have those which my neighbors haye. 21 . Have you any woods ? — I have some woods. — Has your brotlier any soap ? — He has no soap. — Have I any mutton ? — You have no mutton but you have some cheese. — Have your friends any money ?- They have some money. — Have they any tea ? — They have no tea, but the\ have some excellent coffee. — Have I any soap? — You have no soap, but you have some coal. — Has the merchant any cloth ? — He has no cloth! but some pretty shoes. — Have the English any gold ? — They have no gold, but they have some excellent iron. — Have you any good coffee ? — i have no good coffee, but some excellent wine. — Has the merchant any good books ? — He has some good books. — Has the young man any tea ? — He has no tea, but some excellent chocolate. — Have the French any good gloves ? — They have some excellent gloves. — Have they any birds ? — They have no birds, but they have some pretty pictures. — Who has the fine knives of the English ? — Their friends have them. — Who has the good biscuits of the bakers ? — Tlie sailors of our captains have them. — Have they our ships ? — Yes, Sir, they nave them. — What have the Italians ? — They have some beautifu pictures. — What have the Spaniards ? — The,y have some fine asses,— What have tlie Germans ? — Thev have some excellent corn. 38 TWELFTH LESSaN, 22 . Have you any friends ? — I have some friends. — Have your friends any coal ? — They have some. — Have the shoemakers any good shoes 1 — They have no good shoes, but they have some excellei t leather. — Have the tailors any good waistcoats ? — They have no good waistcoats, but some excellent cloth. — Has the painter any umbrellas ? — He has no umbrellas, but he has some beautiful pictures. — Has he the pictures of the French or those of the Italians ? — He has neither tlie latter nor the former. — Which ones has he ? — He has those of his good friends. — Have the Russians (los Rusos) any thing good ? — They have some- thing good. — What have they good ? — They have some good oxen. — Has any one my small combs ? — No one has them. — Who has the peasants’ fine chickens ? — Your cooks have them. — What have the bakers ? — They have some excellent bread. — Have your friends any old wine ? — They have no old wine, but some good coffee. — Has any- hoe*" / y6ur srolden candlesticks ? — Nobody has them. TWELFTH LESSON . — Leccion Duodecima duo, — o INDEFINITE ARTICLE. Of a, an, from a, an. .4 or an, or one. Un. De un. Vo a, an, at a, an. A man. A book. A stick, (of wood.) A slick, (a cane.) Of a boy. Of a good sailor A un. Un hombro. Un libro. Un palo. Un bastofl. De un muchacho. De un buen marinero. A small knife. ^ Un cuchillo pequeho. A' A large cap. I Un cuchillito. I Un gorro grande. One. Two. Three. Rave you any books ? Yes, Sir, I have one. Have you a glass ? I have no glass I have one. Have you a good horse ? I have a good horse I Tiene V. algunos libros ? Si, senor, yo tengo uno. I Tiene V. un vaso ? Yo no tengo vaso. Yo tengo uno. I Tiene V. un buen caballo ? Yo tengo un buer caballo TWELFTH LESSORS. 39 Have you any good horses? 1 Tiene V. buenos cabal 1 os ? [ have two good ones. Tengo dos buenos Have you two good horses ? 1 Tiene V. dos buenos caballos ' Yes, Sir, I have two good ones Si, senor, tengo dos buenos Four. Cuatro. Five. Cinco. Have you five horses 1 Tiene V. cinco caballos ? i have none, Sir. Ninguno tengo, senor Have you a small lion ? 1 Tiene V. un leoncito ? I have one Tengo uno. Have you any good shoes ? 1 Tiene V. buenos zapatos ? I have some good. Tengo algunos buenos. I have some bad ones. Tengo algunos mal 5 s. Has your brother a friend ? 1 Tiene algun amigo su hermano de V.? He has a good one. Tiene uno bue: lo. Has he one ? 1 Tiene uno ? He has one. (El) tiene uno. He has two good ones Tiene dos buenos. He has two of them. t tiene dos. Have you five good dogs ? 1 Tiene V. cinco buenos perros ? 1 have three good and two bad ones. t Yo tengo tres buenos y dos maloi Who has a pretty umbrella ? 1 Quien tiene un bonito pardguas ? My brother has one. Mi hermano tiene uno The hatter. El sombrerero. EXERCISES. 23 . Have you any wine ? — I have some. — ^Have you any coffee ? — I (lave not any. — Have you any good wine ? — I have some good. — Have you any good cloth ? — I have no good cloth, but I have some good paper. — Have I any good sugar ? — You have not any good. — Has the man any good paper ? — He has some. — Has he any good cheese ? — He has not any. — Has the American {el Americano) any money ? — He has some. — Have the French any cheese ? — They have Qo* any. — Have the English any good wine ? — They have no good 'vine, but they have some excellent tea. — Who has some good soap ? — The merchant has some. — Who has some good bread ? — The baker has some. — Has the foreigner any woods ? — He has some. — Has he any coal ? — He has not any. — What rice have you ? — 1 lave some good. — What hay has the horse ? — He has some good. — Wi.at leather has ti e shoemaker ? — He has some excellent. — Have 40 TWELFTH LESSOR you any nails ? — 1 have not any. — Who h?s some iiahs ?— The merchant has some. — Have 1 any shoes ? — You have some shoes. — Have I any hats ? — You have no hats. — Has your friend any pretty knives ? — He has some pretty ones. — Has he any ^ood oxen He has not any good ones. — Have the Italians any fine horses ? — They have not any fine ones. — Who has some fine asses ? — The Spaniardi be VO some. 24. Has the captain any good sailors ? — He has some good ones. — Have the sailors any good mattresses ? — They have not any good ones. — Who has some good biscuits ? — The baker of our good neigh- bor has some. — Has he any bread ? — He has not any. — Who has some beautiful hats ? — The French have some. — Who has some excellent iron nails ? — The carpenter has some. — Has he rny ham- mers ? — Ha has some. — What hammers has he ? — He has son^e iron ones. — What is the matter with your brother ? — Nothing ?s the mat ter with him. — Is he cold ?— ^He is neither cold nor warm. — Is he afraid ? — He is not afraid. — Is he ashamed ? — He is not ashamed. — What is the matter with him ? — He is hungry. — Who has some beautiful gloves ? — I have some. — Who has some fine pictures ? — The Italians have some. — Have the painters any fine gardens ? — They have some fine ones. — Has the hatter good or bad hats ? — He nas some good ones. — Has the carpenter good or bad nails ? — He ha> some good. — Who has some pretty caps ? — The boys of our mer chants have some. — Have they any birds ? — They have not any.— Who has some ? — ^IVIy servant has some. — Has your servant any sticks ^ — He has not any. — Who has some ? — The servants of my neighbo have some. 25. Have you a pencil ? — I have one. — Has your boy a good book ?— He has a good one. — Has the German a good ship ? — He has none — Has your tailor a good ccat ? — He has a good one. He has twr good ones. He has three good ones — Has the captain a fine dog ? — He has two of them. — Have your Hends two fine horses ? — They have four. — Has the young man a good o^ a bad hat ? — He has no gooC one. He has a bad one. — Have you a cork ? — I have none. — Have I a friend ? — You have a good one. You have two good friends. — Has tlie carpenter an iron nail ? — He has six iron rails. * He has six good ones and seven bad ones. — Who has good tea ? — Our cook has some. — Who has five good horses ? — Our neighbor has ‘^iv. — Has the peas- ant any corn ? — He has some. — Has he any gm\s ? — He has not any — W ho has some good tnends ? — The Turks have sow —Have .hcv THIRTEENTH LESSON. 41 any money ? — They have not any.— Who has their money ? — Theii friends have it. — Are their friends thirsty ? — They are not thirsty, but hungfry. — Has your servant a good dog ? — He has one. — Has he tliis or that nail ? — He has neither this nor that. — Have the peasants these or those bags ? — They have neither these nor those. — Which bags have they ? — They have their own. — Have you a go(»d servant 1 — I have a good one. — Who has a good chest ? — My brother has one —Has he a leather or an iron chest ? — He has an iron one. THIRTEENTH LESSON.— Leccion How much 7 How many 7 How much bread have you ? How much money ? How many knives? How many men? How many friends ? Only, But 1 have but one friend. 1 have but one. I have but one good gun. I have but one good one. The book is not mine, but yours. You have but one good one. How many horses has your brother ? He has but one Hu lias but two good ones. Much Many. A good deal, very much. Much bread. Many men. A good deal of good bread. Have you much money ? I have a good deal. Have you much good wine I have a good deal. Decima tercia I Cuanto 7 I Cuantos 7 I Cuanto pan tiene V. 1 I Cuanto dinero ? 1 Cuantos cuchillos? i Cuantos hombres? I Cuantos amigos ? ^ Solo. J Solamente I No (v) sino I No (v) mas que Solo tengo un amigo. Tengo uno solamente. No tengo mas que un buen fusil. (Yo) tengo solamente uno bueno El libro no es mio sino de V. V. no tiene mas que uno bueno. I Cuantos caballos tiene su bermanv , deV.? No tiene mas que uno. El tiene solamente dos buenos. I Muchc Muchos. Muchisimo. MucJnsimcs, Mucho pan. Muchos hombres. Muchisimo pan bueno. I Tiene V. mucho dinero T Tengo muchisimo. I Tiene V. mucho vino bueno ? Tengo muchisimo. THIRTEENTH LESSON. Too much, Too many. Vou have too much wine. \Tou have too many books Enough. Enough money Knives enough. DemasiadOf sohradu Demasiadosy sohradna V. tiene demeisiado vino. V. tiene demasiados libroix Bastante, hastantcs Bastante dinero. Bastantes cuchillos Little^ (in size.) Little, Few, A little, Small in quantit} or number. I I A little room. | A little wine. \ Few friends. | But little. ^ Only a little. i But few. Not much. Not many. You have not much money. We have few friends. Pequeho. Poco, pocos. Unos pocos, unos cuanlot> Un poco, (after a verb.) Un poco de, (before a noun ^ Un cuarto pequeno. Un poco de vino. Unos pocos amigos. Unos cuantos amigos. Solo un poco Solamente un poco. May poco Solo pocos. Solamente unos cuantos Muy pocos. No mucho. No muchos. V. no tiene mucho dinero. Nosotros tenemos pocos amigos We. We have. Have wo ? We have not. Nosotros. (Nosotros) tenemos. [Tenemos (nosotros?) (Nosotros) no tenemos. Ohs. The pronoun subject is almost alv/ays omitted in Spanish Courage. flave we any vinegar ? We have some. We have not any. They have but little courage. Valor. (Aiiimo.) [ Tenemos vinagre 1 Si tenemos, (or Tenemos mi poco ] No tenemos, (or Ninguno tenemce ) t Tienen muy poco valor Have you a good deal of money 1 j I have but little of it. | You have but little of it ! He has but little of it. j W e liaie but a little of it ' I Tiene V. muchisimo dinero 1 Solo tengo un poco. V. tiene solo un poco. (^11) tiene solamente un pcHx- Solo tenemos un poco THIKTEEN’I'H LESSON. 43 Have you enough wine ? I have but a little, but enough. I Tiene V. bastante vino ] Solo tengo un poco ; tongo scFo el bastante. •‘^even. Eight. Nine. Ton. Siete. Ocho. Nueve, Diez. And. I/- Some bread and meat. | t Pan y came. Have you any tea and coffee ? I ‘f’ i Tiene V. te v cafe ? The hatter. The joiner. El sombrerero. El ensambladoi EXERCISES. 26. How many friends have you ? — I have twc good friends. — Have you sight good trunks ? — I have nine. — Has your servant three glasses ? — Be has only one good one. — Has the captain two good ships ? — He iids but two good ones. — How many shoes has the shoemaker ? — He has only five. — How many guns has your brother ? — He has only four. — Have you much bread ? — I have a good deal. — Have the Spaniards much money ? — They have but little. — Has your neighbor much cof- fee ? — He has only a little. — Has the foreigner much corn ? — He has a good deal. — What has the American (el Americano 1 ) — He has much sugar. — What iias the Russian (el Ruso ?) — He has a great deal of ham. — Has the peasant much rice ? — He has not any. — Has he much cheese ? — He has but little. — What have we ? — We have much bread, much wine, and many books. — Have we much money? — We have only a little, but enough. — Have you many brothers ? — I have only one. —Have the French many friends ? — They have but few. — Has our neighbor m.uch hay ? — He has enough. — Has the Italian much cheese ? — He has a great deal. — Has this man courage ? — He has none. — Haj ne painter’s boy any pencils ? — He has some. — How many hammem has the carpenter ? — He has only one. 27. Have you much paper ? — I have but little. — Has the cook mucn mutton ? — He has but little mutton, but he has a good deal of ham. — How many oxen has the German ? — He has eight. — How many horses hiMs he? — He has only four. — Wlio has a good many biscuits ? — Om 14 FOURTEENTH LESSON. ‘•^ailors have a good many. — How many books have we ? — We have only three pretty ones. — Have you too much cheese ? — I have no’ enough. — Have our boys too many books ? — They have too many.— Has our friend too much coffee ? — He has only a little, but enough.— Who has a good deal of tea ? — The peasants have a good deal. — Have they many gloves ? — They have not any. — Has the cook enough sugar ? — He has not enough. — Has he enough vinegar ? — He has enough. — Have you much soap ? — I have only a little. — Has the merchant much cloth ? — He has a good deal. — Has our tailor many buttons ? — He has •i good many. — Has the painter many gardens ? — He has noi many. — How many (gardens) has he ? — He has but two. — How many knives has the Germ.an ? — He has three of mem. — Has the captain any fine horses? — He has some fine ones, but his brother has none. — Have we any buttons ? — We have a good many. — What buttons have we ? — We have gold buttons. — What candlesticks have our friends ? — They have gold candJesticks. — Have they gold nails ? — They have some. 28. Has the youth any pretty sticks ? — He has no pretty sticks, but some beautiful birds. — What chickens has our cook? — He has some pretty chickens. — How many has he ? — He has six. — Has the hatter any hats? — He has a good many. — Has the joiner much work ? — He has not a great deal, but enough. — Have we the horses of the French, or those of the Germans ? — We have neither these nor those. — Which horses have we ? — We have our own. — Has the Turk my small combs ? — He has them not. — Who has them? — Your boy has them. — Who has our looking-glasses ? — The Italians have them. — Has the Frenchman this or that umbrella ? — He has neither this nor that. — Has he the mattress es which we have ? — He has not those which we have, but those which his friends have. — Is he ashamed ? — He is not ashamed, but afraid. FOURTEENTH LESSON.- A few A few books. j Have you a i'ew books 1 | I have u few. | You have a few I Ho has a few I -Leccion Decima cuarta. Algunos. Unos. Unos pocGs. Unos cuantos. Algunos libros, (or unos Hbioe ) [Tiene V. algunos fibres'^ Yo tengo algunos. Tengo unos cuaiitos. V. tiene algunos. 6l tiene algunos. FOTTRTEKNTH LESSON 45 But a few I have but a few. Y have but a few books. He has but a few farthings. { Solo (v) alguncs. Solamente algunos. Solo unos cuantos. Solamente unos cuantos. C Solo tengo algunos, (or unos cuantos. ^ (Yo) tengo solamente algunos. ^ No tengo mas que algunos. V. tiene solamente algunos libros. 6 l tiene solamente algunos cuartos I have but a few. No tengo mas que algunos. You have but a few V. no tiene mas que algunos. He has but a few. El no tiene mas que algunos. PLURAL. PLURAL. Oae, or a farthing. Farthings. Un cuarto. Cuartos One, or a shilling. Shillings. Un real. Reales One, 01 a dollar. Dollars. | Un peso. Un duro. Pesos. Duros Other Another. > Otro. ' Have you another horse “ I have another. No other horse. I have no other horse I have no other. I Tiene V. otro caballo ? Yo tengo otro. Ningun otro caballo. No tengo otro caballo. No tengo otro. Some oiner. Any other Have you any other horses ! have some others. I hav) no others. { Otro. Otros. Algun otro. Algunos otros. S I Tiene V otros caballos ? } I Tiene V. algunos otros caballos ? 5 Yo tengo otros. Yo tengo algunos otros. S Yo no tengo otros. No tengo iiing\mos otroe The arm. The heart. The foot. The writing The volume El brazo. El corazon El pie. I El escrito ^ El tomo. / El voMmou FOURl^ENTH LESSON. No otner Not any other ytither the one nor the other No (v) otro. No (v) ningun otru i No (v) otros. ( No (v) ningunos otros Ni el uno ni el otro, Ni uno ni otro. Ni los unos ni los otros Ni unos ni otros. H ii at day of the month is it 7 (It is) the first. (It is) the second. (It is) the third. .What day of the month is this ? (It is) the eleventh. t I Que dia del mes tenem^ ? t I Que dia es hoy ? El primero. t El dos. t El tres. t i A cuantos estamos? t A once. Obs. Except the first day of the month, all the other days are ex preyed by a cardinal number preceded by the article Which volume have you ? I have the fourth The first. The second The third. The fourth. The fifth. The sixth. The seventh. The eighth. The ninth. The tenth. The eleventh. The twentieth. The thirtieth. I [ ive you tlio first or second book ? I Que tomo tiene V. ? Yo tengo el cuarto. SINGULAR. PLURAL. J El primero. ^ Los primeros. 1 El primer.* \ 1 El segundo. Los segundos. ^ El tercero. ) Los terceros. ( El tercer.* \ El cuarto. Los cuartos. El quinto. Los quintos. El sexto. Los sextos. El septimo. Los septimos. El octavo. Los octavos. ^ El nono. Los nonos. ^ El noveno. Los no veil os. El decimo. Los decimos El undecimo. Los undecimos El vigesimo. Los vigesimos El trig^simo. Los trigdsimos.’ 1 Tiene V. el primero 6 el segundt 1 lioro ? * Vrimero and tercero lose the o before a noun. Ex . — El primer tomo . terccj tomo. ^ Henceforth the learner sliould write the date before his task Ex - Nueva-York, Setiembre veintej de inil ochoeientos cuarenta y siete ; Rtvv Vork, September 20tb, 1847 FOURTEENTH LESSON. 47 vVIiich volumes have you , have the two first cues. The twelfth. The thirteenth I Que tomos tione V.? t Yo teiigo los dos primeros El duodecimo. El decimo tercio But. The American The Russian. Pero. El Americano, (pi.) los Aniericuiios El Ruso, (pi.) los Rusos EXERCISES. 29 . Have you many knives ? — I have a few. — Have you many pencils ? — 1 have only a few. — Has the painter’s friend many looking-glasses ■ — 1 le has only a few. — Has your boy a few farthings ? — He has a few. — Have you a few farthings ? — We have a few. — How many shillings have you ? — I have ten. — How many shillings has the Spjmiard ? — He has not many, he has only five. — Who has the beautiful glasses of the Italians? — We have them. — Have the English many ships? — They ha\e a good many. — Have the Italians many horses? — They have not many horses, but a good many asses. — What have the Germans ? — They have many dollars. — How many dollars have they ? — They have eleven. — Have we the umbrellas of the Spaniards ? — We have them not, but the Americans have them. — Have you much coffee ? — I have only a little, but enough. — Has the Frenchman many shillings ? — Ho has only a few, but he has enough. — Has your servant many far- things ? — He has no farthings, but shilling’s enough. Have the Russians paper ? — They have but little paper, but a good deal of iron. — Have the Turks much wine ? — They have not much wine, but a good deal of colfee. — Who has a good deal of dollars ? — The Germans (have a good deal.) — Have you no other gun ? — I have no other. — Have we any other cheese ? — We have some other. — Have I no other gun ? — You have another. — Has our neighbor no other horse ? — He has no other. — Has your brother no other friends ? — He has some others. — Have the shoemakers no other shoes ? — They have no others. — How many gloves have you ? — I have only two. — Have 5 ^ou any other biscuits ? — I have no other. — How many arms has this man ? — He has only one, the other is of cork. — What heart has your boy ? — He has a good heart. — Have you no other servant ? — I have anotlier. — Has your friend no other birds ? — ^He has some others. — How many other birds has he ? — He has six others. — How many gar- have yon ? — I have cnlv one, but mv friend has two of them. 30 . 48 FIFTEENTH LESSO^ 31 Which volume have you ? — I have the first. — Have you the secono volume ? — I have it. — Have you the third or fourth boon > — I have neither the former nor the latter. — Have we the fifth or sixth volume? — We have the fifth, but we have not the sixth volume. — Which volumes has your friend ? — He has the seventh (volume.) — What day of the month is it ? — It is the eighth. — Is it not the eleventh ? — No, Sir, it is the tenth. — Who has our dollars ? — The Russians have them. — Have they our gold ? — They have it not. — Has the youth much money ? — He has not much money, but much courage. — Have you the nails of the carpenters or those of the joiners ? — I have neither those of the carpenters nor those of the joiners, but those of my merchants. — Has the Italian a few farthings ? — He has a few. — Has he a few shillings — He has five of them. — Have you another stick ? — I have another.- What other stick have you ? — That of my brother. — Have you a few other candlesticks? — We have a few. — Has your boy another hat? — He has another. The one and the other. Neither the one nor the other. Have you tiie first or the second volume of my dictionary ? I have both. Have you my book or my paper ? 1 have neither the one nor the other. Has my brother my gloves or his own ? He has both yours and his. Has he my books or those of the Spaniards ? He lias neither the one nor the other. Amhos. Uno y otro. El uno y el otro. Los unos y los otros. (Plur.) Ni el uno ni el otro. I Tiene V. ©. primero 6 ei segundo tomo de mi diccionario ? Tengo ambos. I Tiene V. mi libro 6 mi papel ? Yo no tengo ni el uno ni el otro. I Tiene mi hermano mis gu antes 6 los suyos ? t tiene dmbos. i Tiene 6\ mis libros 6 los de Espanoles ? El no tiene ni los unos ni los otros FIFTEENTH LESSON . — Leccion Decima quinta. Both. The Scotchman The Irishman. The Dutchman The Russian El Escoces. El Irlandes. El Holandes EI FIFTEENTH LESSON. 49 Some mure. Any more. Some more. Any more. A few more. me more wine S me more money /. few more buttons. { Mas. "i Algun. [ ^ t Todavia. f ® Ann. J f Todavia mas. | \ Aun mas. ( In a limited I Algunos mas. ^ sense L Todavia algunos.) S Mas vino. Todavia vino, (or algun vina) \ Mas dinero. ^ Aun dinero, (or algun dinero.) J Algunos botones mas. Todavia algunos botones. iitve you any more wine 1 I have some more wine. I have some more. Has he any more money 1 He has some more. Have I any more books ? Vou have some more. I Tiene V. todavia mas vino ? Tengo todavia mas vino, t Todavia tengo, (or aun ten^?.; I Tiene 61 mas dinero ? Tiene alguno. I Tengo yo mas libros ? V. tiene algunos mas. Not any more, no more Much more. Many more. I have no more bread. He has no more money Have you any more wine ? 1 have no more. We have no more. Has he any more vinegar ? He has no more. We have no more books. He has no more dogs. Ho has no more Not muck more. Not many more. Have you much more wine ? 1 have not much more. Have you many more books i \ have not many more 3 No (v) mas. Mucho mas. Muchos mas. Yo no tengo mas pan. 6l no tiene mas dinero. I Tiene V. aun mas vino ? No tengo mas. No tenemos mas. I Tiene todavia vinagre ? No tiene mas. Nosotros no tenemos mas libros. fil no tiene masperros. No tiene mas. No (v) mucho ?nas. No (v) muchos mas. I Tiene V. mucho mas vino ? (Yo) no tengo mucho rnas. I Tiene Vm. muchos mas libroE ? No tengo muchos mas. 50 FITTEENTH LESSON. You have a few more. We liave a few more. They have a few more. Have I a few farthings more 1 Have you a few dollars njore ? I have a few more. Orie more book. One more good book. Four more books. A few more books. t Otro libro mas. t Otro bucn libro mas t Otros cuatro libros mas Algunos libros mas. I Tiene V. algunos pesos mud ) (Yo) tengo algunos mas I Tengo yo algunos cuartos mas I V. tiene algunos mas. (Nosotros) tenemos algunos mas, Elios tienen algunos mas. Tome, volume I Tomo, volumen. EXERCISES. 32 . Which volume of his dctionary have you ? — I have the first. -How many tomes has it ? — It has two. — Have you my dictionary or my brother’s ? — I have both. — Has the foreigner my comb or my knife ? — He has both. — Have you my bread or my cheese ? — I have neither the one nor the other. — Has the Dutchman my glass or that of my friend ? — He has neither the one nor the other. — Has the Irishman our horses or our chests ? — He has both. — Has the Scotchman our shoes or our caps ? — He has neither the one nor the other. — What has he ? — He has his good iron guns. — Have the Dutch our ships or those of the Spaniards ? — Tliey have neither the one nor the other. — Which ships have they ? — They have their own. — Have we any more hay ? — We have some more. — Has our merchant any more paper ? — He nas some more. — Has your friend any more money ? — He has not any more. — Has he any more nails ? — He has so.iie more. — Have you any more coffee ? — We have no more coffee ; but we have some more chocolate. — Has the Dutchman any more sugar ? — He has no more sugar ; but he has some more tea. — ^Has the painter any more pictures ? — He has no more pictures ; but he has some more pencils. — Have the sailors any more biscuits ? — They have not any more. — Have your boys any more books ? — They have not any more. — Has the young man any more friends ? — He has no more. Has our cook much more ham ? — He has not much more. — Has he many more chickens ? — He has not many more. — Has the peasant much more hay ? — He has not much more hay ; but he has a great deal more wine. — ^Have the French many more horses 7 — Thv have not many more. — Have you much more paper ? — I nave much more — Have we many m^re looking-glasses ? — V/e have many more. — 33 . SIXTEENTH LESSON. 51 Ha\ft you one more book ? — I have one more. — Have our neighbors one more garden ? — They have one more. — Has our friend one more umbrella ? — He has no more. — Have the Scotch a few more books ? — They have a few more. — Has the tailor a few more buttons ? — has not any more. — Has your carpenter a few more nails ? — He lus no more nails ; but he has a few sticks more. — Have the Spaniards a few farthings more ? — They have a few more. — Has the German a few more oxen ? — He has a few more. — Have you a few more shillings ?— I have no more shillings ; but I have a few more dollars. — What have you more ? — We have a few more ships and a few more good sailors. — Have I a little more money ? — You have a little more. — Have you any more courage ? — I have no more. — Have you much more \unegar ? — I have not much more ; but my brother has a great deal more. Has he sugar enough ? — He has not enough. — Have we dollars enough ? — We have not enough. — Has the joiner iron enough ? — He has enough. — Has he hammers enough ? — He has enough. — Have you rice enough ? — We have not rice enough ; but we have enough sugar. — Have you many more gloves ? — I have not many more. — Has the Russian another ship ? — He has another. — Has he another bag ? — He has no other. — What day of the month is it ? — It is the sixth. — How many friends have you ? — I have but one good friend.— Has the peasant too much bread ? — He has not enough. — Has he much money ? — He has but little money, but he has enough hay. — Have we the cloth or the cotton caps of the Americans ? — We hava neither their cloth nor their cotton caps. — Have you any more bread ? —I have no more. — Have you any more oxen ? — I have n«Dt anv naore. 34 . SIXTEENTH LESSON . — Leccion Decima sexia. Several. Several men. Several children Several knives Varies f {algunoSy or mucho^.) Varies hombres. Alguiios nifios. Algunos cuchillofv The father The son. The child. The cake T As much as I Tanto come yo As much as he. Tan to como 6\. As much as we. Tanto como nosotros. As much as you. Tanto como vosotros, (or voe ) As much as you. Tanto como V., (or VV.) As much as they. Tanto como ellos. Coat, (or garment.) Vestido. A gun, (a piece of artillery.) Un canon. A tooth. Un diente. Have you as much of your wine as 1 Tiene V. tanto de su vino como del of mine ? mio ? I have quite as much of yours as of Tengo tanto del de V como del mio mine. EXERCISES. 35 . Have you a horse ? — I have several. — Who has my grood cakes ? — Several men have them. — Has your friend a child ? — He has several. — Have you as much coftee as tea ? — I have as much of the one as of the other. — Has this man a son ? — He has several. — How many sons has he ? — He has four. — How many children have our friends ? — They have many ; they have ten of them. — Have we as much bread as wine ? —You have as much of the one as of the other. — Has this man as many friends as enemies ? — He has as many of the one as ot the other. — Have we as many shoes as coats ? — We have as many of the one ds of the other. — Has your father as much gold as iron ? — He has more of the latter than of the former. 36 . Have you as many guns as I ? — I have just as many. — Has the foreigner as much courage as we ? — He has quite as much. — Have we 64 BIXIEENTH LESSON, IS mucn good as bad paper ? — We have as much of ihe one as of the other. — Have your sons as many cakes as books ? — They have more of the latter than of the former ; more of the one than of the other. — How many teeth has this man ? — He has but one. — How many fingers has he ? — He has several. — How many guns have you ? — I have only one, but my father has more than I ; he has five. — Have my children as much courage as yours ? — Yours have more than mine. — Have I as much money as you ? — You have less than I. — Have you as many books as I ? — I have fewer than you. — Have I as many enemies as your father? — You have fewer than he. — Have the French as many ships as we ? — They have fewer than we. — Have we as many combs as they ? — We have fewer than they. — Have we fewer knives than the children of our friends ? — We have fewer than they. 37 . Who has fewer friends than we ? — Nobody has fewer. — Have you as much of your wine as of mine ? — I have as much of yours as of mine. — Have I as many of your books as of mine ? — You have fewer of mine than of yours. — Has the Turk as much of your money as of his own ? — He has less of his own than of ours. — Has our merchant fewer dogs than horses? — He has fewer of the latter than of the former ; (fewer of the one than of the other.) — Has our cook as much Dread as ham ? — He has as much of the one as of the other. — Has he as many chickens as birds ? — He has more of the latter than of the former. 38 . Has the carpenter as many sticks as nails ? — He has just as many of these as of those. — Have you more biscuits than glasses ? — I have more of the latter than of the former. — Who has more soap than I i — My son has more. — Who has more pencils than you ? — The painter has more. — Has he as many horses as I ? — He has not so many horses as you ; but he has more pictures. — Has the merchant fewer oxen than we ? — He has fewer oxen than we, and we have less corn than be. — Have you another book ? — I have another. — Has your son one more coat ? — He has several more. — Have the Dutch as many gardens fvs we ? — We have fewer than they. We have less bread and less wine than they. We have but little money, but enough bread, ham, cheese, and wine. — Have '^ou as much courage as our neignbor’a sen ?— I have just as much. SEVENTfiEJJfTH LESSON. 5£ SEVENTEENTH LESSON . — Leccion Decima seytima, OF THE INFINITIVE. Tliere are in Spanish three conjugatiqns, which are distinguished by Jic n of the present of the infinitive, viz. ; I The first has its intinitive terminated in ar ; as : — Hablar, to speak ; Comprar, to buy ; Cortar, to cut. .in ER ; as : — Vender, to sell ; Comer, to eat, (to dine ;) Beber, to dr:nk. .in iR ; as : — Recibir, to receive ; Dividir, to divide ; Abrir, to open. Each verb we shall hereafter give ^ion to which it belongs marked after risk (♦) are irregular. Fear. Shame Right. Time. Courage A mind, (or a wish.) W rong. To work. To speak. Have you a mind to work ? I am ashamed to speak. will have the number of the conjuga» it. The verbs marked with an asto- Miedo de. Vergiienza de. Razon de. Tiempo de. Valor de, (para.) Gana, (or deseo de.) No tener razon de, (or hacer mal en.) Trabajar 1 Hablar 1. I Tiene V. gana de trabajar ? Tengo vergiienza de hablar To cut. To cut it. To cut them. To cut some. Cortar 1. Cortarle Cortarlos. Cortar alguno 06s A, When a pronoun object is governed by a v^rb in the infinitive it is placed after the infinitive, and joined with it, so as to form a single word Still Have you still a mind to buy it ? Aun, (or Todavia.) I Tieae V todavia deseo de com I prarle 7 56 SEVENTEEMH LESSON. Have you time to cut the bread ? 1 have time to cut it. Has he a mind to cut trees ? He has a mind to cut some I Tiene V. tiempo de rebanar el pan t Yo tengo tiempo de rebanarle. I Tiene el gana de cortar drbolcs 1 Tiene gana de aortar algunos To buy. To buy some more To buy one. To buy two. To buy one more. To buy two more. To break, to tear. To pick up. To mend. To repair. To look for, to seek. Have you a mind to buy one more horse ? I have a mind to buy one more. Have you a mind to buy some books? I have a mind to buy some, but I have no money. Are you afraid to break the glasses ? I am afraid to break them. Has he time to work ? He has time, but no mind to work. Comprar 1. Comprar algunos mas. Comprar uno. Comprar dos. t Comprar otro mas. Comprar dos mas I Romper 2. Alzar del suelo 1. C Remendar * 1. < Reparar 1. ( Commoner * 2. I Buscar 1. I Tiene V. gana de comprar todavia otro caballo ? Tengo gana de comprar otro mas. I Tiene V. gana de comprar libros ? Tengo gana de comprar algunos, pore no tengo dinero. I Tiene V. miedo de romper los vasos 1 Tengo miedo de romperlos. I Tiene ^1 tiempo de trabajar ? ^ El tiene tiempo, pero no tiene gana de trabajar. ' fil tiene tiempo, pero no tiene gana El tiene tiempo, pero no tiene gana L de hacerloy (to do it.) Ohs. B. To avoid the immediate repetition of a verb in the same mood m tense, it is more elegant to suppress it, or to make use of the verb haner in its stead, as in the example. To he right. Ami right in buying horses ? To be wrong. Fou are wrong in buying one. Tener razon de^ (or hacer bien en) I Tengo yo razon de comprar caba- 11 os. No tener razon de, (or hacer mol on.) V. no tiene razon de comprar una t V hace mal en comprar uno. SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 57 Oba. C. When the present participle governed by in, stands for the in Suiiive governed by of, it is rendered in Spanish by the infinitive ; then “ in buying” must be translated “ de comprar” . You (PJur.) I VV., (for Ustedes.) (See Less. I.' EXERCISES. 39 . Have you still a mind to buy my friend’s horse ? — I have still a mind to buy it ; but I have no more money. — Have you time to work ? — I have time, but no mind to work. — Has your brother time to cut some sticks ? — He has time to cut some. — Has he a mind to cut some oread ? — He has a mind to cut some, but he has no knife. — Have you time to cut some cheese ? — I have time to cut some. — Has he , a desire to cut the tree ? — He has a desire to cut it, but he has no time. — Has the tailor time to cut the cloth ? — He has time to cut it. — Have I time to cut the trees ? — You have time to cut them. — Has the painter a mind to buy a horse ? — He has a mind to buy two. — Has your captain time to speak ? — He has time but no desire to speak. — Are you afraid to speak ? — I am not afraid, but I am ashamed to speak. — Am I right in buying a gun ? — You are right in buying one. — Is your friend right in buying a great ox ? — He is wrong in buying one. — Am I right in buy- ing little oxen ? — You are right in buying one. 40 . Have you a desire to speak ? — I have a desire but I have not the courage to speak. — Have you the courage to cut your finger ? — I have not the courage to cut it. — Am I right in speaking ? — You are not wTong in speaking, but you are wrong in cutting my trees. — Has the son of your friend a desire to buy one more bird ? — He has a desire to buy one more. — Have you a desire to buy a few more horses ? — We have a desire to buy a few more, but we have no more money. — What has our tailor a mind to mend ? — He has a mind to mend our old coats. — Has the shoemaker time to mend our shoes ? — He has time, but he has no mind to mend them. — Wlio has a mind to mend our hats ? — The hatter has a mind to mend them. — Are you afraid to look for my norse ? — I am not afraid, but I have no time to look for it. — Wliat have you a mind to buy ? — We have a mind to buy something good. — itave you a mind to break my nail 2 — I have a mind to pick it up, but not tc: break it. 41 . Who has a mind to break our looking-glasses ? — Our enemy has a uiind to break them. — Have the foreigners a mind to break our guns ‘i —They have a mind, but they have not the courage to break them.— 58 EIGHTEENTH LESSON. Wlio has a mind to buy my beautiful dog ? — Nobody has a mind to buy It. — Have you a mind to buy my beautifu trunks, or those of the French man ? — I have a mind to buy yours, but not those of the Frenchman.— Which books has the Englishman a mind to buy ? — He has a mind tn ouy that which you have, that which your son has, and that which mine has. — Which gloves have you a mind to seek ? — I have a mind to seek V.mrs, mine, and our children’s. 42. Wliich looking-glasses have the enemies a desire to break ? — They have a desire to break those which you have, those which I have, and those which our children and our friends have. — Has your father a desire to buy these or those cakes ? — He has a mind to buy these. — Am I right in picking up your canes ? — You are right in picking them up. — Is the Italian right in seeking your hat ? — He is wrong in seeking it. — Have you a mind to buy another ship ? — I have a mind to buy another. — Has our enemy a mind to buy one more ship ? — He has a mind to buy several more, but he is afraid to buy them. — Have y )u two horses ? — I have only one, but I have a wish to buy one more EIGHTEENTH LESSON . — Leccion Decima octava, Hacer * 2 Querer * 2. To make To do. To be willing. To wish. Will you? Are you willing ? Do you wish ? j will, I am willing, I wish. Will he? is he willing? does he wish ? He will, he is willing, he wishes. We will, we are willing, we wish. You will, you are willing, you wish. They will, they are willing, they Wish. Do ) oil wish to make my fire ? [ am willing to make it. [ dc not wish to make it. Does he wish to make it ? He wishes to make It. I Quiere V. ? ^ Quereis vos ? i Querna vosotros ? Yo quiero. I Quiere ^1 ? t\ quiere. Nosotros queremos. V quiere, (plur., VV.) quieren, voso- tros, or vos quereis. Elios quieren. I I Quiere V. hacer mi tuego ? Yo quiero hacerle. Yo no quiero hacerle I Quiere 61 hacerle ? ^11 Quiere hacerle. EIGHTEENTH LESSON. Does he wish to buy your horse ? He wishes to buy it. To burn. To warm To tear The broth My fork. 69 I Quiere el comprar su caballo (ie V ^ ]&1 quiere comprarlo Quemar 1. Caleutar * 1. Desgarrar 1. Despedazar 1 El caldo. Mi tenedor Obs A. Do, doth, does, and did, in questions, in negative sentences, auci when energetically used, must not be translated; they, however, point oul he person and tense TO BE — ^SER and estar. To he may be expressed in Spanish by Ser or Esiar ; but the meaning jf these verbs being very different, the scholar must pay particular atten- non to the following rules, in order to use them properly : Sei is used to express the qualities inherent, or essential to persons o! things ; the state of fixed mind ; the materials of which a thing is made the condition, employment, rank, trade, &c. of persons ; the object, pur- pose, destination, &c. of persons or things. Estar is employed to denote the accidental, or temporary qualities or affections of persons or things, and is followed in English by a present participle. These rules will be more easily understood by these examples; This man is good. Tins man is in good health. He was wicked during his youth He was sick in his youth. [nk is black. This ink is whitish- He is very tall. He is placed very high. His watch is gold. His watch is broken. Is this wine good ? Este hombre es bueno. Este hombre estd bueno. 'ktlfui malo en su juventud. El estuvo malo en su juventud. La tinta es negra. Esta tinta estd blanca. ^il es muy alto. El estd muy alto. Su reloj es de oro. Su reloj estd quebrado I Es bueno este vino ? To be, followed by an active participle, is translated Estar ; as. They are playing. | Elios estan jugando. To he is translated Tener in the following accefitations Tc bo five feet long. To bo three feet broad, wide. To be seven feet deep. To be fifty feet in circumference To be twenty years old. Tener cinco pies de largo. Tener tres pies de ancho. Tener siete pies de profundo. Tener cincuonta pies de circunfo reucia. Tener veinte aiios. 60 SIOHTEBKTH LESSOR. be afraid of. Tener miedo do. To be obliged to. Tener precision do. To be so good as to Tener la bondad de To be prudent in. Tener prudencia. To be right in. Tener razon para. To be wrong in No tener razon para. To bo cold. Tener frio. T o be hot, or warm. Tener calor. To be hungry, thirsty, sleepy, &c. Tener hambre, sed, auenc To go. Ir *3. At the house of. En la casa de, (or en casa de.j To the house of. A la casa de, (or d casa de.) To be at the man’s house. Estar en la casa del hoinbre. To go to the man, or to the man’s house. Ir d casa (or la casa) del hombre. To bo at his friend’s (house.) Estar en la casa de su amigo. To go to my father’s (house.) Ir d casa (or la casa) de mi padre At home. En casa. To be at home. Estar en casa. To go home. Ir d casa. Ir d la casa. Ohs. B. A casa means the house of the person who speaks. Ex. — Dc you go home, (to your house ?) i Va V. d su casa ? — Do you go home, fU niy house ?) iVa V. d casa 7 (the house of him who speaks.) ) Estar en casa. ) Estar en mi casa. I Estar en nuestra casa. } Ir d casa. ^ Ir (or venir) d mi casa. V Ir (or venir) d nuestra casa ) Estar en su casa de V. J Estar en la casa de V. ^ Ir d su casa de V. ^ Ir d la casa de V* I Estar en su casa de ellos, (or ellaa ^ Ir d su casa de ellos, (or ellas.) Estar en su casa, Ir d su casa. To be at my house. To be staying with mo. To be at our house. To be staying with us. To go to my house. To come to me. To go to our house. To come to us. To be at his house. To be staying with him To go to his house. To go to him. To be at your house. To be staying with you. To go to your house. To go to you. To be at their house. To be staying with them. To go to their house. To go to them EIGHIEENTH LESSON. 61 To be at some one’s house. To be with some one. To go to some one’s house To go to some one. ^ Estar en la casa de alguno. ^ Ir d la casa de alguno. At whose house 7 To whose house 7 T o whose house do vou wish to go ? T c whom do you wish to go ? I wish to go to. no one’s house. [ wish to go to no one. At whose house is your brother? With whom is your brother? With whom is he ? He is at our house He is with us. Is he at home ? He is not at home. Are you ? Tired. • Are you tired ? 1 am tired. I am not tired. Is he? He is. We are. They are. To drink. Where 7 I En c isa de quien 7 i En la casa de quien ? ^ A casa de quien 7 i A la casa de quien? I A casa de quien quiere V. ir ? t A la casa de quien quiere V ir? No quiero ir a casa de ninguno. ^ En casa de quien estd su hemiano de V. ? I En la casa de quien estd su hermano de V.? I Con quien estd ? I En la casa de quien estd ? ( Estd en nuestra casa .? 6l estd con nosotros. ^ Estd en nuestra casa. I Estd (el) en casa ? (6l) no estd en casa t I Estd V. ? I Estan W. ? (plur.) ( I Estais VOS ? or vosotros. Cansado. - I Esta V. cansado ? i Estais cansados I (Yo) estoy cansado. (Yo) no estoy cansado. I Estd 61 ? El estd. (Nosotros) estamos. Elios estan. I Beber 2. I I En donde ? i Donde ?) What do you wish to do ? | Que quiere V. hacer ? What does your brother wish to do ? | i Que quiere hacer su hermano de V.? Is your father at home ? What will the Germans buy ? They will buy something good. They will buy nothing. I Estd en casa su padre de V. ? I Que quieren comprar los Alemanes* Elios quieren comprar algo bueno ? Elios no quieren comprar nada. 62 EIGHTEENTH JE8SON Do they wish to buy a oook 1 They wish to buy cue. Do you v/ish to drink any thing ? I do not wish to drink any thing. i Quieren (ellos) comprar un ibro? Elios quieren comprar uno I Quiere V beber algo t Yo no quiero beber nada. Do you wish to look for my son 7 ’ Quiere V. buscar d mi hijo 7 Obs C, When the object direct of an active verb is a person, /rope? aoun, or any noun personified, it must be preceded by the preposition d Yo estoy pronto d (quiero) buscar d* hijo de V. Ir d la casa del amigo de V Ir d casa de su vecino I am willing to look for your son To go to your friend. To go to his neighbor EXERCISES. 43. Do you wish to work ? — I am willing to work, but I am tired.— Do you wish to break my glasses ? — I do not wish to break tnem. — Are you willing to look for my son ? — I am willing to look for him. — What do you wish to pick up ? — I wish to pick up this dollar and that shil- ling. — Does that man wish to cut your finger ? — He does not wish to cut mine. — Does the painter wish to burn some paper ? — He wishes to burn some. — What does the shoemaker wish to mend ? — He wishes to mend our old shoes. — Does the tailor wish to mend any thing ? — He wishes to mend some waistcoats. — Do you wish to do any thing ? — I do not wish to do any thing. — What do you wish to do ? — We wish to warm our tea and our father’s coffee. — Do you wish to wa^m my Drother’s broth ? — I am willing to warm it. 44. Do you wish to speak ? — 1 do wish to speak. — Is your son willing to work ? — He is not willing to work. — What does he wish to do ? — He wishes to drink some wine. — Do you wish to buy any thing ? — I wish to buy something. — What do you wish to buy ? — I wish to buy some forks. — Are you willing to mend my coat ? — I am willing to mend it. — Who will mend our son’s shoes ? — We will mend them. — What does he wish to buy ? — He wishes to buy some ships. — Does your father wish to look for his umbrella or for his stick ? — He wishes to look for both. — Do you wish to drink some wine ? — I wish to drink some, but I have not any. — Does the sailor wish to drink some wine ? — He does not wish to drink any, he is not thirsty. — What does the cap- tain wish to drink ? — He does not wish to drink any thing. — Whai does the hatter wish to make ? — He wishes to make some hats — Dc you wish to buy a bird ? — I wish tc buy several. EIGHTEENTH JLESOGN. 03 45. How many forks does your servant wish to buy ? — He wishes toba} ^ree. — Do you wish to buy many caps ? — We wish to buy only a few out our children wish to buy a great many. — Does any one wish tc tear vour coat ? — No one wishes to tear it. — Who wishes to tear my ijooks ? — Your children wish to tear them. — With whom is our father ? — He is W’th his friend. — Will you go to my house ? — I will not go tc yours but to my brother’s. — Does your father wish to go to his friend ? —He does not wish to go to his friend, but Ip his neighbor. — At whose house is your son ? — He is at our house. — Will you look for our nais or for those of the Dutch ? — I will look for neither yours, nor for those of the Dutch, but I will look for mine, and for those of my good frieiuj^ 46. Ami right in warming your broth ? — You are right in warming it — Is my servant right in warming your tea ? — He is wrong in warming it. — Is he afraid to tear your coat ? — He is not afraid to tear it, but to burn it. — Are your children at home ? — They are not at home, but at their neighbors’. — Is the captain at home ? — He is not at home, but at his brother’s. — Is the foreigner at our brother’s ? — He is not at our brother’s. -At whose house is the Englishman ? — He is at yours. — Is the American at our house ? — No, Sir, he is not at our house. — With whom is tlie Italian ? — He is with nobody ; he is at home. — Dc you wish to g© home ? — 1 do not wish to go home ; I wish to go to the son of my neighbor. — Is your father at home ? — No, Sir, he is not at home. — Will you go to any one’s house ? — I will go to no one’s house. 47. , Where is your son ? — He is at home. — Is your brother at home ? — He is not at home ; he is at the foreigner’s. — What will the German do at home ? — He will work, and drink some good wine. — What have you at home ? — I have notliing at home. — Are you tired ? — I am not tired. — Who is tired —My brother is tired. — Do you wish to drink any thing ? — I do not wish to drink any thing. — How many chickens does the cook wish to buy ? — He wishes to buy four. — Does the Span- iard wish to buy any thing ? — He wishes to buy something, but he has no money. — Do you wish to go to our brothers’ ? — I do not wisl* to go to their house, but to their children’s. — Is the Scotchman at anybody’s house ? — He is at nobody’s ; he is at his own house. — Is this good paper ? — It is very good. — Who is that man ? — He is my shoemakiBr. — Is this boy in good health ? — Yes, Sir. — Is he wicked ? — No, Sir, he is not wdcked. — Is your watch gold ? — It is gold, but it is broken. 64 NINETilENTH LESSOR. NINETEENTH LESSON . — Leccion Decima mtna, Where ? There, thither To go there To be there Do you wiph to go tiere? Yes, £ wisli to go there. To take, to carry To send. Vo take, to lead, to conducts To take it there Him, (object of the verb.) To send him there. To take him there I En donde 7 i Donde ? Alla, or AllL Ir alld, (or ir alli.) Estar alia, (or estar alli ) I Quiere V ir alld ? Si, yo quiero ir alli. Llevar 1 Enviar 1, (or mandar 1.) Conducir * 3. Llevarle alia. , I Le. I Enviarle alli. 1 Conducirle alld. Thevi, (object.) To carry them there. To carry some there. Los, (pronoun object ti a verb ) Llevarlos alld. Llevar alguno, (or algunos alld.) Wil you send him to my father ? I wiU send him there, to him. I Quiere V. enviarle d casa, (or & le casa de mi padre ?) Yo le quioro enviar (alld.) O/s. A. Alli and alld are omitted when no ambiguity can result froit the omission. Do y m wish to go honie ? Yes, 7 wish to go there. The physician. Te come. I Quiere V. ir d casa ? Si, yo quiero ir (alld.) El medico. Venir * 3. Whei ? To-morrow. To-day. Somewhere, anywhere, i hithei Nowhere, noi anywhere l>o you wish to go anywheiv ' I wish to go somewhere, do not w isb to go anywhere To write. At what o’clock ? At one o’clock. At two o’clock. I Cuando ? Manana. Hoy. oy- 6 a Alguna parte Ninguna parte I Quiere V. ir d alguna parte > Yo quiero ir d alguna parte. No quiero ir d ninguna pnrti» I Fscrihir 3. I 1 t A que here. t A la una. 1 t A 1a#» cW NINETEENTH LESSON. 65 Half. The quarter One 0^ clock* Medio. Media, (fern ) El cuarto. t La una* Ohs. B. The word o^clock is never translated. The noun hour, hora Hiust be preceded by the article la before una, (one o’clock,) and las before the rest of the hours. Half being an adjective must agree with Aora, fern- .nine, consequently it is translated media. Feminine nouns will be fully explained hereafter. I t A la una y media At half-past one. At a quarter past one. At a quarter past two. At a quarter to one. At twelve o’clock at night. Midnight. At twelve o’clock. Mid-day. The night. In the night Less. At twenty minutes to four Note, (billet.) t A la una y cuarto. t A las dos y cuarto A la una mdnos cuarto. A los tres cuartos para la una A las doce de la noche. Media noche. A las doce. Medio dia. La noche. En la noche, (de noche.) Mems. A las cuatro mdnos veinte raiiiutos. Billete. EXERCISES. 48 . Do you wish to go home ? — Yes, I wish to go. — Does your son wish to go to my house ? — He wishes to go. — Is your brother at home V — He is. — Where do you wish to go ? — I wish to go home. — Do your children wish to go to my house ? — They do not wish to go. — Tc whom will you take this note ? — I will take it to my neighbor’s. — Will your servant take my note to your father ? — He will take it there.— To whom do our enemies wish to carry our guns, (canones ?) — To the Turks. — Will he carry them home ? — He will not carry them home. — Will you come ? — I will not come, (tr.) — Where do you wish to go ? — I wish to go to the good English. — Will the good Italians go to oui house ? — They will not go. — Where do they wish to go ? — Tliey wil go nowhere. 49 . Will you take your son to my house ? — Yes, I will. — When will you take him to the captain’s ? — I ^vill take nim there to-morrow.— Do you wish to take my children to the physician ? — I will take thcirr 66 TWENTIETH LESSON. there. — When will you take them ? — I will take them to-day. — At whai o’clock ? — At half-past two. — When will you sena your servant to the physician ? — To-day. — At what o’clock ? — At a quarter past ten.^ — Will you go anywhere ? — I will go somewhere. — Where will you go ? — I will go to the Scotchman. — To whom does he wish to go ?— He wishes to go to his friends. — Will the Spaniards go anywhere ?— They will go nowhere. — Will our friend go to any one ? — He wih go to no one. 50. When will you take the young man to the painter ? — To-day. — Will he carry these birds ? — He will carry them home. — Will you take the physician to this man ? — I will take him there. — When will the physician go to your brother ? — He will go there to-day. — Will you send a servant to my house ? — I will send one there. — Has your brother time to come to my house ? — He has no time to come (tr) there. — ^Will the Frenchman write one more billet ? — He will write one more. — Has your friend a mind to write as much as I ? — He has a mind to write quite as much. — To whose nouse does he wish to send them ? — To his friends’. — Who wishes to write little notes ? — The young man. — Do you wish to carry many books to my father’s ? — I will only carry a few. 51. Will you send one more trunk to our friend ? — I will send him several more. — How many more hats has the hatter? — He has six ^ more. — Will he send them to the shoemaker ? — He will send one. — Do you wish to buy as many dogs as horses ? — I will buy more of the latter than of the former. — At what o’clock do you wish to send your servant to the Dutchman’s ? — At a quarter to six. — At what o’clock is your father at home ? — He is at home at twelve o’clock. — At what o’clock does your friend wish to go there ? — He will go there at mid- night. — Are you afraid to go there ? — I am not afraid, but ashamed lo go there. TWENTIETH LESSON . — Leccion Vigesima, To, (meaning in order to or for.) j Para. To see. | Ver * 2. Have you any money to buy bread ? i Tiene V. dinero para comprar pan ? 1 have some to buy some. Si, tengo para comprar un poco. iVill you go to your brother in order ; Quiere V. ir d la CcTsa do su henna to see him ? no para verle ? TWENTIETH LESSO^N. 67 [t b uecetssary to go early to see him. Can you cut me some bread? lias your brother a knife to cut his bread ? He has none to cut it. To sweep. To kill. To salt. Salt. Es necesario ir temprano para verle t I Puede V. rebanar pan para mi? I Tiene su hermaiio de V. un cuchilh para rebanar su pan ? 6l no tiene ninguno para rebaiiarle Barrer 2. Matar 1 Salar 1. Echar en sal. Sal, (feminine ) To he able, {can.) Can you ? or are you able 1 I can, or I am able. I cannot, I am not able. Can you not? are you not able? Can he ? is he able ? He can, he is able. He cannot, he is not able Can he not ? is he not able ? We can, we are able You can, you are able. They can, they are able. Poder * 2. Saber * 2. I Puede V 7 (i Podeis vos?) Yo puedo. Yo no pur^do. I No puede V ? I Puede el ? ^11 puede ^11 no puede. I No puede el ? (Nosotros) podemts V. puede — {plur.) VV pueden. Elios pueden Me. Him. To see me To see him. To see the man To see the tree. To kill him. To. To the, or at the, SINGULAB To the friend. To the man. To the captain, lb the book. PLURAL. To the friends. To the men. To the captains To the books. To him, to her To me Me, (object.) Le, (object.) Verme, (or para verme.y Verle, (or para verle ) Ver al hombre. (See Obs. C, Les son XVIII.) Ver el drbol Matarle, (or para matarle-'' Al — (plur.) d los SINGULAR. Al amigo. Al hombre. Al capitan. Al libro. Le, (complement.) Me, (complement.) PLURAL. A los amigos A los hombres. A los capitan?a A los libros To fspeak to me. To speak to him, (to her.) To write to him. (to her.) Hablarme. Hablarle. Escribirle. 68 TWENTIETH LESSON. To write to me. To speak to the man. To speak to the captain To write to the captain. Esoaibirme. Hablar al hombm Hablar al capitan. Escribir al capitan. Can you write to me ? I can write to you. Gan the man speak to you ? lie can speak to me. , [ Piiede V. escribirme 1 Yo puedo escribirle. Yo puedo escribir d V i I Puede el hombre hablai d V ? \ ]&1 me puede hablar. ) Puede hablarme. Ods. A. When a verb govcnis another in the infinitive, the pronoun ob- ject may be placed either before the first, or after the second verb. Will you write to your brother ? 1 will write to iiim. I I Quiere V. escribir d su hermano ? Yo le quiero escribir. Quiero escribirle. The basket. The floor The cat The broom. The carpet. El canasto. El suelo. El gate. La escoba, La alfombra, El tapete. ) Tliese two words are \ feminine. Will you send the book to the man ? I will send it to him. When will you send it to him ? I will send it to him to-morrow. I Quiere V. enviar el libro al hombre 1 Yo quiero envidrsele. tCuando quiere V. envidrsele ? Yo quiero envidrsele manana. SINGULAR. Object, Complement, governed by a verb. gov. by d undei stoo. < 1st person. Ms. To me. ' 1 Me. Me. 3d. 4( Him. To him 1 1 Le. Le. PLURAL. 1st .<( Us. To us. Nos. Nos. 2d. « You. To you. A' V., (d VOS.) OSf (d V.) 3d. « Them. To them. Los. Les. Does he wish to speak to you ? I i Quiere el hablar a V. ? He does not wish to speak to me, | fil no quiere hablarme, pero quteri but to you. I hablar d V. 1 (See Obs C, Lesson VllL TWENTIETH LESSON. 69 Do you wish lo write to him? [ do not wish to write to him, but to his brother. I Quiere V. escribirlo ? No quiero escribirle, pero qaiero es cribir d su hermano. The following is the order in which the personal pronouns must be placed !U a sentence : — SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. It to me. Them to me. r Me le. t Me los It to thee. Them to thee. t Te le. t Te los It to him. Them to him. t Se le t Se log It to her. Them to her. t Se le. t Se los. It to us. Them to us. t Nos le. t Nos los. > t Os le. t Os los. It to you. Them to you. "j ► t Se le (d V.) t Se los (a V.) It to them. Them to them j t Se le (d ellos.) t Se los (d ellcs ) r 1 Cuando me quiere V. enviar el ca- When will you send me the basket ? ^ I nasto I I t Cuando quiere V. enviarmo el ca L nasto ? I will send it to you to-day Yo quiero enviarsele d V. hoy. Yo se le quiero enviar hoy I Quiere V darmo pan ? Yo quiero darle d V. un poco Are you willing to give me some bread ? I am willing to give you some, (a little.) Obs. B. We call Subject, the nominative case ; Object, the direct ob- •ective case ; Complement, the indirect objective case. When two pronounfl^ object and complement, come together, the complement is always before th«? object When they are governed by a verb in the infinitive or imperative mood, they are added to it and form a single word with it ; but in that casr the acute accent should be written on that vowel of the infinitive upoB which lies the stress of the voice. Example — You wish to send them to me | V. quiere enviarmelos. To have to. Have you any thing to do ? { have nothing to do To lend Tener * 2 que. I Tiene V. algo que hacer ? Nada tengo que hacer Prestar 1. TABLE OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. ro TWENTIETH LESSON. s >. : VS eo eo ^ OJ cT « S S w ^ M « S c* .£3 ^ .t 3 •«-» ,w 2 * I .1 i i S :5 G X >1 .ti ^ ^ -> _G ® ^ ® ►-< G3 ^ 'S3 t>» .tJ § § ^ --SS- s s ® ® § g- g. -a -= £, s g CQ OQ O O . G G >» >% ’G 3 I I -S -C 3 05 - .> 5 I I s 03 CB O O O G G >% >> *5 ■S >-. «o eo Co «o g 3 3 5 3 S ■« ’G 'G "G crj CO 00 « d S .g ^ ^ G O O >, G ^ w 2 7:1 S .T-- £ ? S- G o O 0 ) ^ §1 K) G. § s O G -TiJ >S § s S) I ^ G G I 1 TWENTIETH LESSON. 71 Different foims of sentences in which nronoiins are used as Subjcals Objects, and Complements : — Do you lend it ? I lend it. Do you not lend them I do not lend them. Does he lend it to me I He lends it to you. Does he not lend it to me ? He does not lend it to you Do I lend them to you ? — to him 1 — to her ? — to them ? You lend them to me. You lend them to him — to her — to them. Does he not lend it to her ? — to you ? — to them ? f Je does not lend it to her — to you — to them. I Le — la presta V. ? Yo le — la presto. [No los — las presta V ? Yo no los — las presto. I Me le — me la presta ^1 ? ]fcl se le — se la presta d V. I No me le — me la presta 6\ 1 El no (se) le — (se) la presta d V. [ (Se) los — (se) las presto yo d V ? — d el ? — d ella ? — a ellos ? V. me los — me las presta (d mi.) V. (se) los — (se) las presta d 6\ — d ella — d ellos. I No (se) le — (se) la presta 61 d ella ? V.?— d VV ?— d ellos?— d ellas ? El no (se) le — (se) la presta d ella — d V. — d VV. — d ellos — d ellas EXERCISES. 62. Can the carpenter buy a hammer ? — He has enough money to buy one. — Has the captain money enough to buy a ship ? — He has not enough to buy one. — Has not your son paper to write a note ? — He has not any. — Does your father wish to see me ? — He does not wish to see you. — Has not your servant a (itna) broom to sweep the floor ? — He has one (una) to sweep it. — Is he willing to sweep it ? — He is willing to sweep it. — Has the sailor money to buy the chocolate ? — He has none to buy it. — Has the cook money to buy some ham ? — He has some to buy some. — Has he money to buy some chickens ? — He ha« some to buy some. — Have you salt enough to salt my ham ? — I have enough to salt it. — Has your neighbor a desire to kill his horse ? — He has no desire to kih it. — Will you kill your friends ? — I will kill only my enemies. 53. Can you cut me some bread ? — I can cut you some. — Have you a Knife to cut it ? — I have one. — Will you speak to the physician ? — J will speak to him. — Does your son wish to see me in order to speak to me ? — He wishes to see you in order to give you a dollar. — Does he wish to kill me ? — He does not wish to kill you ; he only wishes to see you.— Who has a mind to kill our cat ? — Our n^^ighbor’s boy has c 72 TWENTIETH LESSON. mind to kill it. — How much money can you send me ? — 1 can send you twenty shillings. — Will you send me my carpet ? — I will send it tc you. — Will you not send him your coats ? — No, I will send them to the tailor. — Are your children able to write to me ? — Yes, Sir. — Will you lend me your basket ? — Yes, Sir. 54. H ive you a glass to drink your wine ? — Yes, Sir, but I have no wine ; I have only tea. — Will you give me money to buy some ? — Yes. Sir, but I have only a little. — Will you give me that which you have ? — Yes, Sir. — Can our neighbor make his fire ? — He can make it ; but he has no money to buy coal. — Are you willing to lend him some ? — I am willing to give him some. — Do you wish to speak to the German ? — I wish to speak to him. — Where is he ? — He is with the son of the American. — Does the German wish to speak to me ? — He wishes to speak to you. — Does he wish to speak to my brother or to yours ? — He wishes to speak to both. — Can the children of our neighbor work — They can work, but they will not. 55. Do you wish to speak to the children of the Dutchman ? — I wish to speak to them. — What will you give them ? — I will give them good cakes. — Will you lend them any thing ? — I am willing, but I cannot, I have nothing. — Has the cook some more salt to salt the mutton ? — He has a little more. — Has he some more rice ? — He has a great deal more. — Will he give me some ? — He will give you some. — Which ox will he kill ? — That of the good peasant. — Who will send us biscuits ? —The baker will send you {jplural) some. — Have you any thing to do — T have nothing to do. 56. To whom do you wish to speak ? — To the Italians and to the French. —Do you wish to give them something ? — I wish to give them some money. — Do you wish to give this man some bread ? — I wish to give him some. — Will you give nim a coat ? — I will give him one. — Will you lend me your books ? — I will lend them to you. — Will you lend your neighbors your mattress ? — I will not lend it to them. — Will you lend them your looking-glass ? — I will lend it to them. — To whom wiL you lend your umbrellas ? — I will lend them to my friends. — To whom dees your friend wish to lend his horse ? — To nobody. TWENTY-FIRST LESSON 7(5 TWENTY-FIRST LESSON . — Leccion Viges.ma primer a. Whom..... To whom What .... t^yUlBTl^^QUtCTl^Sy (pl») ^ 4 , . / 1 X c For persons. .A quien — a qmenes, (pi.) ) ^ ) Fcr things of both genders and . i^ue. ^ numbers Sulject. Object. Object. Complement (( (( Who .... Whom ... What ... Whom. ) Whose. ) What.... Quien — quienes. } _ A quien — a qmenes. ) ^ Que. For persons or tilings. Quien — quienes. For persons Que. For persons or things. Who wi^nes to write ? Whom do you wish to see ? To whom do you wish to speak ? What does he wish to write ? Of what do you wish to speak ? i Quien quiere escribir ? (Subject.; I A quien quiere V. ver? (Object. I A quien quiere V. hablar ? (Com- plement.) I Que quiere escribir el ? (Object) I De que quiere V. hablar ? (Com plement.) Ohs. A. Responder requires the preposition d after it. There are in Spanish some verbs that govern, or require certain prepositions after them. The scholar will find a complete list of them in the Appendix To answer. To answer the man. To answer the men. To whom do you wish to answer? I wish to answer to my brother. To answer him. To answer them. Responder 2 Responder al hombre. Responder d, los hombres I A quien quiere V. responder ? Yo quiero responder d mi hermano. Responderle. Responderles To answer the note. To answer it. To itf to them.. To answer the notes. To answer them. Will you answer my note ? I will answer it ! Responder al billete, (d la esquela.) Responder d el. A elt d ellos Responder d los billetes. Responder d ellos. I Quiere V. responder d mi billete ? j Yo quiero responderle. Tlie play, the theatre | El teatro, (la comedia, sometimef j used.) I El baile The ball 4 ui — b 74 TWENlf-FIRST LESSON. To or at the play. To or at the ball. To or at the garden. SINGULAR. A1 teatro, Al baile, A1 jardiii, PLURAL d los teatros d los bailos. d los jardiii(?8 The storehouse. The magazine. The warehouse. The counting-house. The market. > El almacen. I El escritorio, (el despacho, or el ofic o \ I El mercado. (La plaza, fern,) There. Ohs B. There is not translated when it refers to a place just men- tioned, and which can easily be understood in English. Do you wish to go to the play ? Yes, I wdsh to go (there.) Is your brother at the play ? Yes, he is (there.) He is not there. Where is he ? I I Quiere V. ir al teatro ? (d la come- I dia ?) I Si, yo quiero ir I I Estd su hermano de V. en el let tro ? I Si, estd. I No, el no estd alia I 5 Donde estd ? In. Is your father in his garden ? He is there. Is he in the storehouse ? He is (there — in it.) TherCi (meaning in it, in them.) ‘Where is the merchant ? He is in the warehouse. To have to, (must') What have you to do I have nothing to do. Have you any thing to do ? I have to answer a note. I have to speak to your brother. To have to, {to meaning for to.) What has the man to drink 7 Ho has wine. What have you to eat ? We have ham En. I Estd su padre de V. en su jardin ? Estd en el, (or estd alii.) I Estd el en el almacen Estd alia, or alH. En cZ — en ellos. I Donde estd el comerciante ? ^il estd en el almacen. I Tener que. (It implies obligation.^ I I Que tiene V. que hacer ? Yo no tengo nada que hacer Nada tengo que hacer. I Tiene V. algo que hacer*? j Tengo que responder d un billete. Tengo que hablar d su hermano de V. Tener que, or para. I Que tiene que (or para) beber ol hombre ? 6 1 tiene vino. tQue tieneii VV que (para) comer? Tenemos jamon. TWENTY-FIRST LESSON 75 EXERCISES. 57 . Will you write to me ? — I will write to you. — Will you write to the lalian ?— I will write to him. — Will you answer your friend ? — I wil answer him. — Whom will you answer ? — To my good father. — Will you not answer your good friends ? — Yes, Sir. — Who will write to vou ? — The Russian. — Will you answer him ? — No, Sir. — -Who will write to our friends ? — The children of our neighbor. — Will they answ^er them ? — They will answer them. — To whom do you wish to write ? — I wish to write to the Russian. — Will he answer you ? — He wishes to answer me, but he cannot. — Can the Spaniards answer us ? — They cannot answer us, but we can answer them. — To whom do you wish to send this note ? — To you. Sir. 68 . What have you to do ? — I have to write. — W hat have you to write ? — A note. — To whom ? — To the carpenter. — What has your father to drink ? — He has some good wine. — What has the shoemaker to do ^ — He has to mend my shoes. — To whom have you to speak ? — I have to speak to the captain. — WTien will you speak to him ? — To-day. — W’here will you speak to him ? — At his house. — To whom has youi brother to speak ? — To your son. — Which note has he to answer ? — That of the good German. — Have I to answer the note in Spanish ? — Yes, Sir, in Spanish. — Has not your father to answer me ? — He haa to answer you. — Who has to answer my notes ? — Our children. — W^ill you answer the merchants’ ? — I will answer them. 59 . Which notes will your father answer? — He will answer only those of his good friends. — Who will answer my brothers’ ?— Your friends will answer them. — Have you a mind to go to the ball ? — I have a mind to go (there.) — When will you go (there ?) — To-day. — At whai o’clock ? — At half-past ten. — When will you take your boy to the olay ? — To-morrow. — At what o’clock ? — At a quarter to six. — Whore your son ? — He is at the play. — Is your friend at the ball ? — He is there. — Where is the merchant ? — He is at his counting-house. — Where do you wish to take me to ? — I wish to take you to my ware- .^louse. — Where does your cook wish to go to ? — He wishes to go to the market. — Where is the young man ? — In the magazine. 60 . Where is the Dutchman ? — He is in his garret. — Will you come w me in oider to go to the play ? — I will come (?r) to you, but I have no 76 TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. mind to go to the play. — Where is the Irishman ? — He is at the mar ^’et. — To which theatre do you wish to go ? — To the theatre of the Spaniards. — Will you go to my garden or to that of the Scotchman ? — I will go neither to yours nor to that of the Scotchman ; I wish to go to that of the Italian. — Dc»es the physician wish to go to our storehouses or to those of the Dutch ? — He will go neither to yours nor to those of the Dutch, but to those of the French. — What do you wish to buy «it the market ? — I wish to buy a basket and some carpets. — Where wil you take them to ? — I will take them home. 61 . How many carpets do you wish to buy ? — I wish to buy two. — To whom do you wish to give them ? — To my servant. — Has he a mind fcn sweep the floor ? — He has a mind to do it, but he has no time. — Have the English many storehouses ? — They have many. — Have you many guns in your warehouses ? — We have many (there,) but we have but little corn. — Do you wish to see our guns ? — I will go into your warehouses in order to see them. — Do you wish to buy any thing ? — I do wish to buy something. — What do you wish to buy ? — I wish to buy a basket, a looking-glass, and a gun. — Where will you buy youi n-unk ? — I will buy it at the market. — Who wishes to tear my coat ?— No one wishes to tear it. 62 . Will the English give us some bread ? — They will give you some.- Will you give this man a shilling ? — I will give him several. — How many shillings will you give him ? — I will give him five. — What will the French lend us ? — They will lend us many books. — Have you time to write to the merchant ? — I wish to write to him, but I have no time to-day. — When will you answer the German ? — I will answer him to-morrow. — At what o’clock ? — At eight. — Where does the Spaniard wish to go to ? — He wishes to go nowhere. — Does your servant wish to warm my broth ? — He wishes to. warm it. — Is he willing to make my fire ? — He is willing to make it. — Where does the bakei wish to go to ? — He wishes to go to the wood. — Where is the boy ?— He is at the play. — Who ;s at the captain’s ball ? — Our cliildren anc CUT friends are there. TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 77 TWENTY-SECOND LESSON . — Leccion Vigesima scg^xnds To or at the corner. To or at the hole. In the hole, in the holes. To or at the bottom. IV or at the bottom of the bag. At the corner of the garden. The hole The room. J AI or cn el rincon. X. los, en los rincones. (Plur.) < A1 or en el agujero. ( A los, en los agujeros (Plur) S En el agujero. En los agujeros. (Plur.) i A1 fondo, (or en el fondo.; J Al fondo del costal. En el fondc del costai. A or en el i aicon del jardin El agujero, (or el hoyo.) El cuarto. To or at the end. To or at the end of the road. To or at the end of the roads. The road. A1 cabo. A1 cabo del camino. A1 cabo do los caminos El camino. To send for. To go for, to fetch. To fetch, to bring. Will you send for some wine ? I will send for some, (a little.) Will your boy go for some bread ? He will not (go for any.) I will send for the physician. I will send for him. He will send for my brothers. He will send for them Will you send for glasses ? I will send for some. What have you to do ? I have to go to the market. You have to mend your coat What have you to drink ? . have (to drink some) good wine. Enviar por, {mandar por, or enmoA d huscar.) Ir por, (or ir d buscar ) Traer I Quiere V. enviar por vino ? tYo) quiero enviar por un poco. I Quiere ir por pan su muchacho de V.? (^^) no quiere, (or no, sefior.) (See Lesson XI./ Yo quiero enviar por el medico. Yo quiero enviar por 6\. ti quiere mandar (or enviar) pot mis hermanos 6l quiere mandar por ellos I Quiere V. enviar por vasos ? Yo quiero enviar por algunos I Que tiene V. que hacer ? (Yo) tengo que ir al mercado. V. tiene que remendar su vestido. I Que tiene V. quo beber f Tengo buen vino 78 TWENTY -SECOND LESSON. They ha\o. ' Elios tienen. What have the men to do? i Que tienen que hacer los hombnja Tliey have to go to the storehouse. (Elios) tienen que ir al almaceu This evening. This. The cook. The hearth. The study. In the evening. The. This morning. In the morning. Esta tarde (Fern.) Este. Esta. (Fem.i El cocinero El hogar. El estudio. t For la tarde, (or en la tarde.) El. La. (Fern.) Esta mahana. (Fein.) + For la mahana, (or en la mahana ) Now, at present | Ah ora. Thou. I Tu. Ohs. A. In addressing one another the Spaniards use V. (Usted,) VV fUstedos.) The second person singular is used by parents and children, brothers and sisters, and by intimate friends, or in addressing menial servants .'"See Lesson I.) Thou hast Thou art. Art thou fatigued ? I am not fatigued. Are the men tired ? Th tienes. Td estas, (or th eres.) I Estas tii fatigado ? Yo no estoy fatigado I Estan cansados los hombres / Obs. B. When the adjective qualifies a noun or a pronoun, it agrees with it in gender and number. Rule . — Adjectives form their pluial in thf. same manner as nouns. They are not tired. | Elios no estan cansados. Thou wilt, (or wishest) Thou art able, (or canst.) Art thou willing to make my fire ? I am willing to make it, but I can- not. Art thou afraid ? I am not afraid, I am cold Art thou hungry ? Tu quieres. Th puedes. I Quieres th hacer mi fuego ? Yo quiero hacerle, pero no puedo I I Tienes (th) miedo ? Yo no tengo miedo, tengo frio I Tienes hambre ? To sell. To tell> to say. To toll some one, to say to some OBO Vender !2. Decir * 3. Decir d alguno. TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 79 The word. H ill you tell the servant to make the fire? ! will tell him to make it. To make a fire. Thy. Thine Thy book, thy books. Art not thou tired ? La palabra. (Fem.) I Quiere V. decir al criado qjo eiici< enda candela. Yo quiero decirle que la encienda. I Encender candela, or lumbrc. 7'u. Tus. (Plur.) El iuyo. Los tuyos. (Flur) Tu libro. T u& libros. ( Plur ) I ^No estas td cansado ? EXERCISES. 63. Will you send for some sugar? — I will send for some. — Son, Jiijo rnio,) wilt thou go for some cakes ? — Yes, father, (jpadre,) I will go for some. — Where wilt thou go ? — I will go into the garden. — Who is in the garden ? — The children of our friends are there. — Will you send for the physician ? — I will send for him. — Who will go for my brother ? — My servant will go for him. — Where is he ? — He is in his counting- house. — Will you give me my broth ? — I will give it you. — Where is it ? — It is at the corner of the hearth. — Will you give me some money to (para) fetch some bread ? — I will give you some to fetch some. — Where is your money ? — It is in my counting-house : will you go for it ? — I V ill go for it. — Will you buy my horse ? — I cannot buy it ; I have no money. — Where is your cat ? — It is in the hole. — In which hole is it ? — In the hole of the garret. — ^Where is this man’s dog ? — It is in a corner of the ship. — Where has the peasant his com ? — He lias it in his bag. — Has he a cat ? — He has one. — Where is it ? — It is at the bottom of the bag. — Is your cat in this bag ? — It is in it. 64. Have you any tiling to do ? — I have something to do. — What have 3 ^ ;U to do ? — I have to mend my coat, and to go to the end of the road. — Wlio is at the end of the road ? — My father is there. — Flas your cook any thing to drink ? — He has (to drink some) wine and some good broth. —(Jan you give me as much ham as bread ? — I can give you more of the latti)r than of tne former. — Can our friend drink as much wine as cof- fee — He cannot drink so much of the latter as of the former. — Have /ou to speaR to any one ?— I have to speak to several men. — To how many men have you to speak ? — I have to speak to four. — When have you to speak to them ? — This evening. — At what o’clock ? — At a quarter to nine. — When can you go to the market, (la plaza 7) — I can go (thither) in the morning. — At what o’clock ? — At half-past seven-— 80 TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. When will you go to the Frenchman? — I will go to him to-mght.-» Will you go to the physicitEh in the morning or in the evening ?•— I will go (to him) in the morning. — At what o’clock ? — At a quartos past ten. G5. Have you to write as many notes as the Englivshman ? — 1 have to write fewer of them than he. — Will you speak to the German ? — I wiD speak to him. — When will you speak to him ? — At present. — Where is he ? — He is at the other end of the wood. — Will you go to the market ? — Yes, I will go to {jpara) buy some bread. — Do your neighbors not wish to go to the market ? — They cannot go (thither ;) they are fatigued. — Hast thou the courage to go to the wood in the evening ? — I have the courage to go (thither,) but not in the evening. — Are your children able to answer my notes ? — They are able to answer them. — What do you wish to say to the servant ?-^I wish to tell him to make the fire, {que ejicienda,) and to sweep (que harra) the warehouse. — Will you tell your brother to sell {que me venda) me his horse ? — I will tell him to sell {venda) it you. — What do you wish to tell me ? — I wish to tell you a word, {la palabra) — Whom do you wish to see ? — I wish to see the Scotchman. — Have you any thing to tell him ? — I have to tell him a few words. — Which books does my brother wish to sell ? — He wishes to sell thine and his own. TWENTY-THIRD LESSON . — Leccion Vigesima tercera. To go out To remain, to stay. When do you wish to go out 1 I wish to go out now To remain (to stay) at home. Salir * 3. Qaedar 1, Quedarse, (Reflective verb.)' I Cuando quiere V. salir ? Yo quiero salir ahora. Quedar or eslar ea casa. Here, To remain here. There. W ill you stay here 7 I will stay here. Aqui. Quedar aqui, (or quedarse aqui ) Alld, or alii. I Quiere V. quedarse aqui ? Yo quiero quedarme aqui. The pronominal verbs, in Spanish, terminate their present of the infmi' ti/o mood by the pronoun se, which must be suppressed in order to find oul the conjugation ; thus, acercarse, dolerse, arrepentirse, (se,) are acerrjr, ls< conjugation ; doler, 2d conjugation ; and arreperitir, 3d conjugation TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. iVil! your friend remain here ? lie will not stay here. Will you go to your brother I will go to him. The pleasure The favor. To give pleasure. To do a favor. Are you going? I am going. Am I not going ? I am not going. Thou art going. Is he going? He goes, he is going. He is not going. Are we going? We go, we are going. 81 i Quiore quedarse aqui su a nigo dt V.? ^ll no quiere quedarse aqai. I Quiere V. ir d la casa de su her mano ? Yo quiero ir d ^1. El placer, (or el gusto., El favor. Bar gusto Hacer un ^avor t Va V. ? Yo voy. I No voy yo ? Yo no voy. Tu vas. t Va dl ? 61 va El no va. I Vamos nosotros ? Nosotros vamos. What are yon going to do ? I am going to read. To read. I Que va V. d hacer ? I Que vais d hacer ? I Yo voy d leer. I Leer 2. Are you going to your brother ? I am going there. Wh3r© is he going to? Ho is going to his father i Va V. d casa de su hermaius ■ Yo voy alia. I A donde va ^1 ? El va d casa de su padre The soldier. All, every. Every day. Every morning Every evening I El soldado. ^ Todo. ^ Todos. (Plur.) ( Toda. Todas. (Fem.) I + Todos los dias. I t Todeis las mahanas ^ t Todas las tardes. ( t Todas las noches. It is. I Es. Late. I Tarde. 82 TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. It in the impersonal verbs, that is to say, verbs used only in the third person singular, and wnen it js redundant, is not translated ^^hat o’clock is it ? It is three o’clock. It is twelve o’clock. It is a quarter past twelve. It wants a quarter to six. It is half-past one 1 1 Que hora es ? t Son las tres. t Son las doce. t Son las doce y cuarto t Son las seis menos cuarto. t Es la uiia y media. Need, To want. To he in want of I want It. I ara in want of it. Are you in want of this knife ? I am not in want of it. I am in want of them. I am not in want of them. I am not in want of any thing. Is he in want of money ? He is not in want of more. What are you in want of? What do you want ? Tenet necesidad de Haber menester de Necesitar 1 Haher menester. Le necesito Le he menester. I Necesita V. este cuchillo ? No le he menester. No' le necesito. Los he menester Los necesito. No los he menester. No los necesito. Yo no necesito nada. Nada he menester I Necesita ^1 algun dinero ? No necesita mas. i Que necesita V. ? I Que ha menester V. ? To he acquainted with, to know. | Conocer 2 To be acquainted with (to know) a ] Conocer d un hombre. man. I (See Obs. C, Less XVIIl. Is your father in want of me ? He is in want of you. Are you in want of these books ? I am in want of them. Is he in want of my brothers ? He is m want of them. I Me necesita su padre de V ? necesita d V. I Necesita V. estos libros ? Yo los necesito. Necesita dl d mis hermanosl los necesita. TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. 83 EXERCISES. 66 . Will you do me a favor ? — Yes, Sir : which, {cua 1 ) — ^Will you tell my servant to make (que encienda) the fire ? — I will tell him to make it, {que la encierula.) — Will you tell him to sweep {que harra) the ware- houses ? — I will tell him to sweep (que los barra) them. — What will you tell your father ? — I will te J him to sell you his horse. — Have you any thing to tell me ? — I have nothing to tell you. — Have you any tiling to say to my father ? — I have a word to say to him. — Do these men wish to sell their carpets ? — They do not wish to sell them. — John ! {Juan) art thou here ? — Yes, Sir, I am here. — What art thou going to do ? — I am going to your hatter to tell him to mend {que componga) your hat. — Wilt thou go to the tailor to tell him to mend 'que componga) my coats ? — I will go to him.— Are you willing to go lo the market ? — Yes, Sir. — What has your merchant to sell ? — He nas to sell some beautiful gloves, combs, good cloth, and fine baskets. — Has he any iron guns to sell ? — He has some to sell. — Does he wish to sell me his horses ? — He wishes to sell them to you. — Have you any thing to sell ? — I have nothing to sell. 67 . Is it late ? — It is not late. — What o’clock is it ? — It is a quarter past welve. — At what o’clock does the captain wish to go out ? — He wishes to go out at a quarter to eight. — What are you going to do ? — I am going to read. — What have you to read ? — I have to read a good book. — Will you lend it to me ? — I will lend it you. — When will you lend it me ? — I will lend it you to-morrow. — Have you a mind to go out ? — I have HD mind to go out. — Are you willing to stay here, my dear {querido) friend ? — I cannot remain here. — Where have you to go ? — I have to go to the counting-house. — When will you go to the ball ? — To-night. — At what o’clock ? — At midnight. — Do you go to the Scotchman in the evening or in the morning ? — I go to him in the evening and in the morning. — ^Where are you going to now ? — I am going to the theatre. — Where is your son going to ? — He is going no- where ; he is going to stay at home to write his exercises. — Where is your brother ? — He is at his warehouse. — Does he not wish to go out ? — No, Sir^ he does not wish to go out. — ^What is he going to do there 1 —He is going to write to his friends. — Win you stay here or there ?— will stay there. — ^Where will your father stay ? — He will stay there 84 TWENTY-THIRD LESSON 68 . At what o^clock is the Dutchman at ht)me ? — He is at home ever^ evening at a quarter past nine. — When does our neigl bor go to the Irishmen ? — He goes to them every day. — At what o’clock ? — At eight o’clock in {de) the morning. — What do you wish to buy ? — I do not wish to buy any thing ; but my father wishes to buy an ox. — Does lu wish to buy this or that ox ? — He wishes to buy neither tliis nor that — Which one does he wish to buy ? — He wishes to buy your friend’s — Has the merchant one more c^t to sell ? — He has one more, but he does not wish to sell it. — When does he sell his books ? — He will seh them to-day. — Where ? — At his warehouse. — Do you wish to see my friend ? — I do wish to see him in order to know him. — Do you wish to know my children ? — I do wish to know them. — How many children have you ? — I have only two ; but my brother has more than I : he has six (of them.) — Does that man wish to drink too much wine? — He wishes to drink too much (of it.) — Have you wine enough to drmk ? — I have only a little, but enough. — Does not your brother wish to buy roo many cakes ? — He wishes to buy a great many, but not too many. 69. Can you lend me a knife ? — I can lend you one. — Can your fathei lend me a book ? — He can lend you several. — What are you in want of ? — 1 am in want of a good gun. — Are you in want of this picture ? — I am in want of it. — Does your brother want money ? — He does not want any. — Does he want some shoes ? — He does not want any. — What does he want ? — He wants nothing. — Are you in want of these sticks ? — I am in want of them. — Who wants some sugar ? — Nobody wants any. — Does anybody want paper ? — Nobodv wants any. — What do I want ? — You want nothing. — Does your father want these or those pictures ? — He wants neither these nor those. — Are you in want of me ? — I am in want of you. — When do you want me ? — At present. — What have you to say to me ? — I have a word {una palahra) to say to you. — Is your son in want of us ? — He is in want of you and youi brothers. — Are you in want of my servants ? — I am in want of them — Does any one want my brother? — No one wants him. — Does youi father want any thing ? — He does not want any thing. — What does the Englishman want ? — He wants some glasses. — Does ho not wan' some wine ? — He does not want any, he has enough. TWENIT-FOURTH LESSON. 85 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.— Xeccwn Vigesima cuarta. THE CONJUGATIONS. In Sf>anish all the tenses and persons of verbs are formed from the present of the infinitive mood, by changing the last two letters of it iutc d'lO termination corresponding to each person in every tense. Soe the table of terminations in the Appendix. Conjugations 2d. 3d. 'i ?rminatlous of the Infinitive er. ir. “ of tho Gerund iendo. iendo. * of the Past Participle ’do. ido. 1st per. sing. Yo ( o. 0. SA “ Til es. es. 3A “ 6l, Ella, V e. e. 1 st. per. pi iir N osotros emos. imos. 2d. “ Vosotros, Vos eis. is. 3d. « Ellos, Ellas, VV en. en. > No. 1 Infinitive To speak. I speak, then speakest, he speaks. We speak, you speak, they speak. FIRST CONJUGATION. Gerund, l Infinitivo. Gerundio Speaking. | Hablar. Hablaiido. Present, No. 1. Yo hablo, td hablas, el habla, V habla. Nosotros hablamos, vosotros habla??, ellos hablan, VV. hablan. SECOND CONJUGATION. To sell. Selling. I sell, thou sellest, he sells. We sell, you sell, they sell. Vender. Vendiendo. Yo vendo, tii voudes, el yende, V. vende. Nosotros vendemos, vosotros vendeis, ellos venden, VV. venden. THIRD CONJUGATIOxN. To receive. Receiving. I receive, thou receivest, he receives. We receive, you receive, they re- ceive. Recibir. Recibiendo Yo recibo, td recibes, ^1 recibe, V recibe. Nosotros recibimos, vosotros recibbi ellos reciben, VV. reciben. Ohs. A. The preceding are the regular terminations of the present tense ; but as some irregular verbs have been introduced in the exorcises, they an? conjugated below in order to make the scholar acquainted with their irregu iarities, and to enable him to translate them properly. TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON, To have. Having. I liave, thou haat, he has. VVe have, you have, they have. To ask for. Asking for. I ask for, thou askest for, he asks for. VVe ask for, you ask for, they ask for Tc warm. Warmijig. [ warm, thou warmest, he warms. W'^e warm, you warm, they warm. To make. Making. To do. Doing. I make, thou makest, he makes. I do, thou dost, he does. We make, you make, they make. We do, you do, they do. Tcner. Tenieiido Yo tengo, tii tieues, dl tiene. Nosotros tenemoSy vosotros teneisy ol- ios tienen. • Pedir. Pidiendo Yo pido, tii pides, 6\ pide. Nosotros pedimosy vosotros pedts, eh los piden. Calentar. Calentando. Yo caliento, tii calientas, dl calieiita Nosotros calentamosy vosotros caltn taisy ellos caiientan. llacer. Haciendo. Yo hago, td haces, 6\ hace Nosotros hacemoSy vosotros haceiSt ellos hacen. To go. Going. I go, thou goest, he goes. We go, you go, they go. To mend. Mending. To repair Repairing. I mend, thou mendest, he mends. [ repair, thou repairest, he repairs. We mend, you mend, they mend. We repair, you repair, they repair. To be. Being. [ am, thou art, he is. We are, you are, they are. To take to. Taking to. To lead to. Leading to. /'Meaning to conduct.) Ir. Y endo. Yo voy, td vas, dl va. Nosotros vamos, vosotros vais, eIlot< van. Remendar. Remendando. Yo remiendo, td remiendas, dl re- mienda. Nosotros remendamosy vosotros re- mendaisy ellos remiendan. " Estar Estanda Yo estoy, td estasy dl estd. Nosotros estamoSy vosotros estais. el- los estan. Ser. Siendo. Yo soy (soi,) td eres, dl es. ^ Nosotros somos, vosotros sois, ellos son 1 > Conducir, Conduciendo TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 87 i take, thou takest, he takes. ( lead, thou leadest, he leads. I conduct, thou conductest, he con- ducts. VVe take, you take, they take. We lead, you lead, they lead. We conduct, you conduct, they con- duct To come. Coming. 1 come, thou comest, he comes. We come, you come, they come. To see. Seeing. I see, thou seest, he sees. We see, you see, they see. To go out. Going out. I go out, thou goest out, he goes out. We go out, you go out, they go out. To he able (can). Being able. I am able, thou art able, he is able. We are able, you are able, they are able. To tell. Telling. To say. Saying. ( tell, thou tellest, he tells. I say, thou sayest, he says. We tell, you tell, they tell. We say, you say, they say. Yo conduzco,* t1 conduces, 61 con* duce. No&otros conducimosy vosotros condu^ ciSf ellos conducen. Venir. Viniendo. Yo vengo, td vienes, 6i 'vlene. Nosotros venimos, vosotros veniSy ellos vienen. Ver. Viendo. Yo veo, td veSf el ve. Nosotros vemosy vosotros veisy ellos ven. Salir. Saliendo. Yo salgo, td sales y dl sale. Nosotros salimosy vosotros salisy ellos salen. Poder Pudiendo. Yo puedo, td puedes, dl puede. Nosotros podemos, vosotros podeisy ellos puoden. Decir Diciendo. Yo digo, td dices, dl dice. Nosotros decimosy vosotros decisy ell<3« dicen. To finish. Any one. No one. Where (to.) To love. \ love, I do love, I am loving. Thou lovest, thou dost love, thou art loving. He lo /es he does love, he is loving. Acabar 1. Alguien. Alguno. ) Indefinite pro- Nadie. Ninguno. ( nouns. A donde. Amar 1. Yo amo. Td amas. fil ama. Verbs in ucir take z before c, when c is followed by a or o. (See App.) 88 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. Vou love, you do love, you are lov- V. ama, VV. aman, vosotros an>ak ing. We love, we do love, we are loving. Nosotros amamos. I'hey love, they do love, they are Elios aman loving. Obs. B In Spanish the Gerund may be, as in English, conjugated with Ih*^ verb sOy I am loving, is E stay amando; You areivriting — V.cstA iscribiendo. To like, to be fond of, to please one | Gustarle d uno. Ohs. C. This verb is always in the third person singular or p.ura it agreef with the thing liked, which is its subject, and never agrees with the person who likes, which is its complement I like, I am fond of. Thou likest, thou art fond of. He likes, he is fond of. We love, we are fond of. Sing You love, you are fond of. Plur. You love, you are fond of. They love, they are fond of. Do you like this man ? I do like him. I do not like him. Are they fond of those children ? Yes, they are fond of them. No, they are not fond of them. Obs. D. Word for word : Does this man please you? Yes, he pleaseis me. No, he does not please me. — Do those children ’ please them? Yea, Ehey please them. No, they do not please them. (A mi) me gusta — me gustan. (A ti) te gusta — te gustan. (A dl) le gusta — le gustan. (A nosotros) nos gusta — nos gustan. A V. le gusta. A vosotros os gusta A V. le gustan. I A VV. les gusta. ' A VV. les gustan. (A ellos) les gusta, oi les gustan I Le gusta A V. este hombre Si, 6\ me gusta. No, no me gusta. I Les gustan estos nihos ? Si, d ellos les gustan. No, a ellos no les gustan. What are you fond of? I am fond of study. Do you like him ? I do like him. I do not like him. Do you sell your horse ? I do sell it Do you sell it ? Does he send you the note ? He does send it to me. I Que le gusta d V. ? A ml me gusta el estudio. I Le gustd el d V. ? 6l me gusta. El no me gusta. I V ende V. su caballo ? Si, yo le vendo. I Le vende V. ? I Envia dl el billete d V” ? El me le envia.' See for the place of p’oncuns what has been said in Lesson XX., TWENTT-FOLTTITH LESSON. 89 To open. Do you open the note ? I do not open it. Docs he open his eyes? He opens them Whom do you love ? I love my father. To arrangCj to set in order. What are you arranging? 1 am arranging my books What is he drinking? He is drinking wine. Is he fond of wine ? He is fond of it Ahrir 3 — past participle abierto I Abre V. el billete ? Yo no le abro. I I Abre el los ojos ? El los abre. I A quien ama V.? ) See Obs. C, Yo amo ^ mi padre ) Less XVllJ Ordenar 1. Arregla? I Que esti V. arreglando ? Estoy ordenando mis libros I Que estd el bebiendo ? Estd bebiendo vino I Le gusta el vino ? A el le gusta What is the American fond of? He is fond of coffee To answer. Do you answer the note ? Yes, I answer it. To know. I know. A stick of wood. Yet Not yet. It is not yet seven o’clock. Also. More than. He buys more than twenty. The cook. I Que le gusta al Americano ? Le gusta el cafe. Responder 2, (takes a before a noun./ I Responde V. al billete ? Si, yo le respondo. Saber * 2. Yo sd, (the other persons are regular.) Un palo. Todavia. No (v) todavia. No son todavia las sieto. Tambien. El cocinero. S relating to quantity, not to comparison. Mas de. EXERCISES. 70. Do you lo /e your brother ? — do love him. — Does your brother love 7f.u ? — He does not love me. — Dost thou love me, my good child ? — ] do love thee. — Dost thou love this ugly man ? — I do not love him. — Wliom do you love ? — I love my children. — Whom do we love ? — We love our friends. — Do we like any one ? — We like no one. — Does any- body like us ? — The Americans like us. — Do you want any thing ? — I want nothing. — Whom is your father in want of ? — He is in want of his servant. — What do you want ? — I want the exercise. — Do you want this or that exercise ? — I want this one. — What do you wish to do with >t ? — I wish to have it, in order to read it.- -Does your son read oiu 90 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. exercises ? — He does read them. — ^Wlien does he read them ?- -Hf reads them when he sees them. — Does he receive as many exercises as I ? — He receives more of them than you. — What do you give me ? — I do not give thee any thing. — Do you give this book to my brother ? — I do give it him. — Do you give him a bird ? — I do give him one. — To whom do you lend your books ? — I lend them to my friends —Does your friend lend me a coat ? — He lends you one. — To whom do you ■e id your clothes, (vestidos ?) — I do not lend them to anybody. 71 . Do we arrange any thing ? — We do not arrange any thing. — What does your brother set in order ? — He »ets in order his books. — Do you sell your ship ? — I do not sell it. — Does the captain sell his ? — He does sell it. — What does the American sell ? — He sells his oxen. — Does the Englishman finish his tea ? — He does finish it. — Which notes do you finish ? — I finish those which I write to my friends. — Dost thou see any thing ? — I see nothing. — Do you see my large garden ? — I do see it. — ^Does you father see our ships ? — He does not see them, but we see them. — How many soldiers do you see ? — We see a good many, we see more than thirty of them. — Do you drink any thing ? — 1 drink some wine. — What does the sailor drink ? — He drinks wine also. — What do the Italians drink ? — They drink some chocolate. — Do we drink wine ? — We do drink some. — What art thou writing ? — I am writing a note. — To whom ? — To my neighbor. — Does your friend write ? — He does write. — To whom does he write ? — He writes to his tailor. 72 . Do you write your exercises (el tema) in the evening ? — W e write ihem in the morning. — What dost thou say ? — I say nothing. — Does your brother say any thing ? — He says something. — What does he say ? — I do not know. — What do you say to my servant ? — I tell him to sweep (que barra) the floor, and to go (que vayd) for some bread, cheese, and wine. — Do we say any thing ? — We say nothing. — What does your friend say to the shoemaker ? — He tells him to mend (que remiende) his shoes. — What do you tell the tailors ? — I tell them to make (que hag an) my clothes, (vestidos.) — Dost thou go out ? — I do not go out. — Who goes out ? — My brother goes out. — Where is he going to ? — He is going to the garden. — To whom are you going ? — We are going to the good English. — What art thou reading ? — I am reading a note from (de) my friend. — What Is your father reading ? — He is read- ing a book. — What are you doing ? — W 3 are reading. — Are your chil- dren reading ? — They are not reading, they have no time to read. — Do you read the books which I read ? — I do not read those which you read, but those whitii your father reads. — Do you know this man ? — I do not know him. — Does your fiiend know him l—He does know him. TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 91 73 . Do you know my children ? — We do know them. — i)otl ey knotv you ? —They do not know up. — W hom are you acquainted with ? — I am ac- quainted with nobody. — Is any one acquainted with you? — Some ono is acquainted with me. — Who is acquainted with you ? — The good cantain knows me. — What dost thou eat ? — I eat some bread. — Does not your son eat some cheese ? — He does not eat any. — Do you cut any thing ? — We cut some sticks. — What do the merchants cut ? — They cut some cloth. — Do you send me any thing ? — I send you a good gun. — Does your father send you money ? — He does send me some. — Does he send you more than I ? — He sends me more than you. — How much does he send you ? — He sends me more than fifty (cincuentd) dollars. — When do you receive your money ? — I receive it every morning. — At what o’clock ? — At half-past ten. — Is your son coming? — He is con dng. — Do you come to me ? — I do not come (ir) to you, but to your children. — Where is our friend going to ? — He is going no •vhither ; he remains at home. — Are you going home ? — We are not going home, but to our friends’. — Where are your friends ? — They are in their garden. — Are the Scotchmen in their gardens ? — They are there. 74 . What do you like ? — I like study. — Are you fond of birds ? — I anr fond of them. — How many horses does the German buy ? — He buys a good many ; (he buys) more than twenty. — What does your servant carry ? — He carries a large trunk. — Where is he carrying it to ? — He is carrying it home. — To whom do you speak ? — I speak to the Irishman. — Do you speak to him every day ? — I speak to him every morning and every evening. — Does he come to your house ? — He does not come to my house, but I see him at the theatre. — What has your servant to do ? — He has to sweep the floor, and set my books in order. — What does your boy break ? — He breaks noiAing, but your boys break my glasses. — Do they tear any thing ? — They tear nothing. — Who burns my hat ? — Nobody burns it. — What is my son fond of ? — He is fond of money. — What does your cook kill ? — He kills a cliicken. 75 . To what house do you take my boy ? — I take him to the painter.— When is the painter at home ? — He is at home every evening at four o’clock. — What o’clock is it now ? — It is not six o’clock. — Do you go out in the evening ? — I go out in the morning. — Are you afraid to go out in the evening ? — I am not afraid, but I have no time to go out in the evening. — Do you work as much as your son ? — I do not work as much as he. — Does he eat more than you ? — He eats less than I. — Can /our children write as many exercises as mine ? — They can write as many.— -When do our neighbors go out ? — They go out every morning 92 T’WiJiNTY-FIFTH LESSON. at a quarter to six. — Do you like Spanish? — Yes, Sir, I like it. — D« you speak it ? — No, but I am going to learn it. — Are you fond of study 'i — I study every day, and I like it. — Do you like your dictionary ? — 1 do not like it ; it is not good. — Do you not like mine ? — I like yours. We should fill volumes were we tc gi\e all the exercises that are applicable to our lessons, and which the pupils may very easily compose by tliemselves. We shall, therefore, merely repeat what we have already said at the commencement: — Pupils who wish to improve rapidly ought to com- pose a great many sentences in addition to those given ; but they must pro- nounce tnem aloud. This is tho only way in which they will acquhe the habit of speaking fluently TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON.—Leccion Vigesima quinta. To bring. I bring, thou bringest, he brings. To find. To or at the play. The butcher. The sheep. Traer * 2. Yo traigOj tfi traes, el trae Hollar 1. A1 teatro. El carnicero. El carnero- Whati (meaning that which, the thing which.) Do you find what you look for ? Do you find what you are looking for? I find what I look for I find what I am looking for. He does not find what he is looking for. We find what we look for. They find what they look for I mend what you mend. [ buy what you buy. Do you take him to the play ? I do take him thither. Lo que, (subject or object.) I Halla V. lo que busca ? I Halla V. lo que estd buscando? Yo hallo lo que busco. Yo hallo lo que estoy buscando £l no halla lo que estd, buscando Hallamos lo que estamos buscando Elios hallan lo que estan buscando Yo remiendo lo que V. remienda Yo compro lo que V. compra I I Le lleva V. al tcatio ? I Yo le lie VO alia Estudiar 1. En vez de. En lugar de. I En vez de traer followed by tho present participle^ but To study. Instead of. Instead of bringing Ohs. Instead of is in English in Spanish it is Allowed bv the present of the infinitive mood. TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON 93 To play. Jugar * 1 I play, thou playest. Yo juego, tu juegas. ) The otners He plays, they play. ]&1 juega, ellos juegan. ) are leguiar To listen to. Escuchar 1 Instead of listening. En vez de escuchar. Instead of playing. Ell lugar ('or en vez) de jugar. Do you play instead of studying / [JuegaV en lugar de estudiar? 1 study instead of playing. Yo estudio en lugar de jugar. iTiat man speaks instead of listen- Este hombre habla en vez de ts rng. cuchar To have a sore. < Tener mal de (n^ [ Tener (n) malo. Have you a sore finger Y t 1 Tiene V. el dedo malo i 1 have a sore finger. t Yo tengo un dedo malo. Has your brother a sore foot s 1 1 Tiene su hermano de V. un pii malo ? He has a sore eye. t El tiene mal de ojos. We have sore eyes. t Nosotros tenemos los ojos maloe. The elbow El codo. The arm. El brazo. The back. La espalda — (pi.) las espaldas, (fom.) The knee. La rodilla — (pi.) las rodillas, (fern ) It. Le, (mas.) La, (fern.) Them. Los, (mas.) Las, (fern.) !)c you read instead of writing ? 1 Lee V. en vez de escribir ? Does your brother read instead of 1 Lee su hermano de V en lugar du speaking ? hablar ? The bed. La cama, (fern.) Does the servant make the bed ? 1 Hace la cama el criado ? He makes the fire instead of making Hace el fuego en lugar de hacer la the bed. cama. To learn. Aprender 2. I learn to read. Aprendo d, leer. He learns to write. Aprende d escribir EXERCISES.- 76. Do you go to the play this evening ? — I do not go to the play. — What have you to do ? — I have to study. — At what o’clock do you gti cut ? — I do not go out in the evening. — Does your father go out 94 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. He does not go out. — What does he do ? — He writes. — Does he wril€ a book ? —He does write one. — When does he write it ? — He writes it In the m )rning and in the evening. — Is he at home now ? — He is at nome. — Does he not go out ? — He cannot go out ; he has a sore foot. — Does the shoemaker bring our shoes ? — He does not bring them.— Is he not able to work ? — He is not able to work ; he has a sore knee. —Has anybody a sore elbow ? — My tailor has a sore elbow. — Who has a sore arm ? — I have a sore arm. — Do you cut me some bread ? — i cannot cut you any ; I have sore fingers. — Do you read your book ? —I cannot read it ; I have a sore eye. — Who has sore eyes ? — The French have sore eyes. — Do they read too much ? — They do r ot read enough. — What day of the month is it to-day ? — It is the ihird, (Lesson XIV.) — What day of the month is it to-morrow ? — To-morrow is the fourth. — Are you looking for any one ? — I am not looking for any one. — What is the painter looking for ? — He is not looking for any thing. — Whom are you looking for ? — I am looking for your son. — Have vou any thing to tell him ? — I have something to tell him. 77 . Who is looking for me ? — Your father is looking for you. — Is any- body looking for my brother ? — Nobody is looking for him. — Dost thou find what thou art looking for ? — I do find what I am looking for. — Does the captain find what he is looking for ? — He finds what he is looking for, but his children do not find what they are looking for. — What are they looking for? — They are looking for their books. — Where dost thou take me to ? — I take you to the theatre. — Do you not take me to the market ? — I do not take you thither. — Do the Spaniards find the umbrellas which they are looking for ? — Th»>y do not find them. — Does the tailor find his thimble ? — He does not find it. — Do the merchants find the cloth which they are looking for ? — They do find it. — What dc the butchers find ? — They find the oxen and sheep which they are looking for. — What does your cook find ? — He finds the chickens which he is looking for. — What is the physituan doing ? — He is doing what you are doing. — ^What is he doing in his room ? — He is reading.— -What is he reading ? — He is reading tlie book of your father. — Whom is the Englishman looking for ? — He is ’ooking for his friend, in order to take him into the garden. — What is tie German doing in his room ? — He is learning to read. — Does he aot learn to write ? — He does not learn it. — Does your son learn to write ? — He learns to write and to read. 78 . Does the Dutenman speak instead of listening ? — He speaks instead >if listening, — Do you go out instead of remaining at home ? — I remain TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 95 at home instead of going out. — Does your son play instead uf study- ing ? — He studies instead of playing. — When does he study? — He studies every day. — In the morning or in the evening ? — In the morn- ing and in the evening. — Do you buy an umbrella instead of buying a book ? — I buy neither the one nor the other. — Does our neighboi break his sticks instead of breaking his glasses ? — He breaks neithei the ones nor the others. — What does he break? — He breaks liis guns. — Do tlie children of our neighbor read ? — They read instead of writing. — What does our cook ? — He makes a fire, instead of going to the market. — Does the captain give you any thing ? — He does give me something. — What does he give you ? — He g'jyes me a great deal of money. — Does he give you money instead of giving you bread ? — He gives me (both) money and bread. — Does he give you more cheeso than bread ? — He gives me less of the latter than of tlie former. Do you give my friend fewer knives than gloves. — I give him more of the latter than of the former. — What does he give you ? — He gives me many books instead of giving me money. — Does your servant make vour bed ? — He does not make it, (la.) — Wliat is he doing instead of making your bed ? — He sweeps the room instead of making my bed. — Does he drink instead of working ? — He works instead of drinking. — Do the physicians go out ? — They remain at home instead of going out. — Does your servant make coffee ? — He makes tea instead of making coffee. — Does any one lend you a gun ? — Nobody lends me one. — What does your friend lend me ? — He lends you many books and many diotionaries. — Do you read the book which I read ? — I do not read the one which you read, but the one which the great captain reads. — Are you ashamed to read the books which I read ? — I am not ashamed, but I have no wish to read them. 79. TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON . — Leccion Vigesnna sexta. To go for. Something, any thing. Do you go for any thing ? Ir por * 3, (or ir a buscar.') Alguna cosa. iVa V. 6 buscar alguna cosa — oj I go fo* nothing. Ho goes for some . . . . algo ? Yo no voy d buscar nada. 6l va d buscar . . (or dl va por ) (See Lesson XI.) Ir * 3 For the conjugation of this verb, see Appendix. 96 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. Do you learn Freiich ? I do learn it. I do not learn it. French. English. German. Italian. Spanish. Polish. Russian. Latin. Greek. Arabian, Arabic. Syrian, Syriac. I learn Spanish. •Vly brother learns German. The Pole. The Roman. The Greek. The Arab, the Arabian. The Syrian. • I Aprende V. el francos ? Si, yo le aprendo. Yo no le aprendo. I El Frances. ! El ingles. El aleman. El italianct. El espahol. El polaco. El ruso. El latin. El griego. El drabe, el ardbigo. El siriaco. Yo aprendo el espahol. Mi hermano aprende el aleman. El Polaco. El Romano. El Griego. El Arabe. El Siriaco. Are you an Englishman ? | ^ Es V. Ingles V Ohs. A. Where the indefinite article is used in English to denote quail aes, the Spaniards make use of no article. No, Sir, I am a German. He is a Frenchman. Is h*e a tailor t No, he is a shoemaker. Is ho a fool ? No, sehor, yo soy aleman. El es Frances. I Es (el) sastre ? No, (el) es zapatero. I Es (el) bobo, (tonto, or necio ?) The fool. The afternoon. The morning. The day. I El bobo, or tonto, or necio I La tarde. (Fern.) I La man an a. (Fern.) I El dia. Ohs. Bi The indefinite article a in English is sometimes rendered by th« dfjfinite article el, la, in Spanish, particularly in speaking of the parts of th^ body. If the nouns expressing these are in the plural, they often take the article los, las. Examples: — Are you ? — i Es Vm.? I am, — Yo soy. For the conjugation of this verb, see Appendix ; and for the difference between Estar and Ser, see lesson XVI TL, and also the Appendix TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON 97 He has tf large forehead. He has blue eyes. You have a beautiful foot I'hey have white teeth. Tieno la frente ancha. Tiene ojos (or Us ojos) azu.es, V. tiene un pie hermoso. Elios tieneii los dientes blancos. Tlie forehead. Blue. Black. White. Large. Big. La frente. (Fern. Azul. Negro. Blanco. Grande, or largo. Larga. (Feni ) Great. \ Grande. Ob» C. Grande (great,) loses the last syllable wnen its meaning is greatness in quality ; as, the Great Captain, el Gran Carpitan; but it re- ains it when it is applied to size or bulk ; and even in the first meaning vhen coming before a vowel — as, un grande odio, a great, or implacable aatred ; un grande cahaLlOy a large horse; un gran caballoy a famous Big, large. Tall. A large knife. A large man. A great man. I A Spanish book. An English book. Spanish money. English paper. Obs. D. All adjectives expressing their substantives. Example : — Do you read a German book ? I read an Italian book. Grande, largo. Grande, (or alto.) Un cuchillo grande. Un cuchillon Un hombre grande. Un hombroa Un gran hombre. Un libro espanol. Un libro ingles. Moneda espanola* Papel ingles. the names of nations are placed aflai I Lee V. un libro aleman ? Yo leo un libro italiano To listen to something. To listen to some one. What, or the thing which. It. t Escuchar alguna eosa, or algo. Escuchar d uno, or d alguno. ho que. ho. Obs. E. It, not standing for a substantive, but meaning the thing which s translated lo. It is an indefinite pronoun object, and has no plural numbei Do you listen to that man ? V es, I listen to him. Do you listen to wha* he tells you ? Yes, I listen to it. Do you listen tc what I tell you ? Do you listen to me ? 5 I Escucha V. a ese hombre ? Si, yo le escucho. I Escucha V. lo que le dice ? Si, yo lo escucho. I Escucha V. lo que le digo ? I Me escucha V. ? 98 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON I do listen to you. Do you listen to my brother ? I do not listen to him. Do you listen to the men ? i listen to them. SI, yo escucho d V., (or le oscueho I Escucha V. d mi hermano ? Yo no le escucho I Escuc ha V. d los hombres ? Yo los escucho. To correct. To take off. To take away Corregir * 3. Quitar del medio. (See the verb PedU in the Appendix '' ( Quit arse — quitar 1. I Llevarse — Llevar 1. Ohs. F. Quitar and Llevar are used here as reflective or pronomina* zerbs. (See Lesson XXIII.) The exercise. | El tema. El ejercicio To take. I Tomar I. Do you take your hat off i I take it off. My — thy — his — your. t i Se quita V. el sornbrerc / Me le quito. El — los — la — las. Ohs. G. When the adjective possessive pronouns are used with a verii arhich in Spanish is a reflective verb, they must be changed in Spanish into the definite article — viz., el, (mas.) la, (fern.) singular ; los, (mas.) las, (fem.) plural. Examples : — I take my gloves off. Do you take your shoes off? 1 take them off. Does your father correct your exer- cises ? He corrects them. Yo me quito los guantes. t i Se quita V. los zapatos ? t Yo me los quito. I Corrije los temas de V. su padre I !^1 los corrije. To drink coffee. To drink tea» Do you drink tea ? Yes, Sir, I drink some, (a little.) Do you drink tea every day 1 1 do drink some every day. My father drinks coffee. He drinks coffee every morning. My brother drinks chocolate. He drinks chocolate every morning. t Tomar cafe. t Tomar mi, tu, su, &c., cafe, or e cafe. t Tomar te. t Tomar mi, tu, su, &.C., tS, or el t4 1 1 Toma V. te ? Si, senor, yo tomo un pooo. 1 1 Toma V. su td (or el td) todos la dias ? t Yo tomo un poco todos los^ias. t Mi padre toma cafd. t Toma su cafd todas las mananas t Mi hermano toma chocolate, t Toma chocolate todas las manana? TWENTY SiXTH LESSON. 99 Obs. II. When some, not followed jy a substantive, means a liltle, it w translated itn poco. (See Lesson XL) The nose. 1 La nariz, (feminine ; EXERCISES. HO. Do you go for any thing? — I dt) go for something. — What do ycu g!. for ? — I go for some wine. — D )es your father send for any thing ? -—He sends for some wine. — Doen your servant go for some bread ? — He goes for some.— -For whom d( es your neighbor send ? — He sends for the physician. — Does your ser ;ant take off his coat in order to make the fire ? — He takes it off in order to make it. — Do you take off your gloves in order to give me money '' — I do take them off in order to give you some. — Do you learn French ^ — I do learn it. — Does your brother learn German ? — He does learn it.- -Who learns English ? — The French- man learns it. — Do we learn Itali in? — You do learn it. — What do the English learn ? — They learn Fr mch and German. — Do you speak Spanish ? — No, Sir, I speak Italian — Who speaks Polish ? — My brother speaks Polish. — Do our neighbors speak Russian ? — They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. — Do you spoak Arabic ? — No, I speak Greek and Latin. — What knife have you ? — have an English knife. — What money have you there ? Is it Itahan or Spanish money ? — It is Rus- sian money. — Have you an Italian hat ? — No, I have a Spanish hat.— Are you a Frenchman ? — No, I am an Englishman. — Art thou a Greek ? — No, I am a Spaniard. H. Are these men Germans ? — N*», they are Russians. — Do the Rus- sians speak Polish ? — They do not speak Polish, but Latin, Greek, and Arabic. — Is your brother a merchint ? — No, he is a joiner. — Are these men merchants ? — No, they are carpenters. — Are you a cook ? — No, 1 am a baker. — Are we tailors? — No, we are shoemakers. — Art thou a fool ? — I am not a fool. — What h» that man ? — He is a physician. — Du you wish me any thing ? — I wisij yua a good morning. — Has the Gei- man black eyes ? — No, he has blue eyes. — Has that man large feet ? — He has little feet, a large forehead, and a large nose. — Have you time to read my book ? — I have no tine to read it, but much courage to (para) study Spanish. — What dosr thou do instead of playing ? — I study instead of playing. — Dost thou le^rn instead of writing ? — I write in- stead of learning. — ^What does tl e son of our friend do ? — He goes into the garden instead of doing his exercise. — Do the children of oui neighbors read ? — They write instead of reading. — What does oui cook ? — He makes a fire instead of going to the market. — Does youi father sell his ox ? — He sells his horse instead of selling his ox. 100 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 82 . Does the son of the painter study English ? — He studies Greek ir>' stead of studying English. — Does the butcher kil. oxen ? — He kiila sheep instead of lulling oxen. — Do you listen to me ? — I do listen to you. — Does your brother listen to me ? — He speaks instead of listening to you. — Do you listen to what I am telling you ? — I do listen to what you are telling me. — Dost thou listen to what thy brother tells thee ? — I do listen to it. — Do the children of the physician listen to what we tell them ? — They do not listen to it. — Do you go to the theatre ? — 1 am going to the warehouse instead of going to the theatre. — Are you willing to read my book ? — I am willing to read it, but I cannot ; I nave sore eyes. — Does your father correct my exercises, or those ol my brother ? — He corrects neither yours nor your brother’s. — Which exercises does he correct ? — He corrects mine. — Do you take off your hat in order to speak to my father ? — I do take it off in order to speak to him. — Do you take off your shoes ? — I do not take them off. — Who 'akes off his hat ? — My friend takes it off. — Does he take off his gloves ? —He does not take them off. — What do these boys take off? — They take off their shoes and their hats. — Who takes away the glasses ? — Your servant takes them away. — Do you give me English or German paper ? — I give you neither English (repeat papel) nor German paper ; 1 give you French paper. — Do you read Spanish ? — I do not read Spanish^ but German. — What book is your brother reading ? — He is reading a Spanish book. — Do you drink tea or coffee in the morning ? — I drink tea. — Do you drink tea every morning ? — I do dri. k some every morn- ing. — What do you drink ? — I drink coffee. — What does your brother drink ? — He drinks chocolate. — Does he drink some (le) every day ? — He drinks some (le) every morning. — Do your children drink tea ? — They drink coffee instead of drintiing tea. — What do we drink ? — We drink tea or coffee. 'TWENTY' SEVENTH LESSON. — Leccion Vigesima septima. / To wet, to moisten. To shoio. I show you my bock You show them to me. I Mojar 1 Humedecer 2.^ Mostrar * 1. Ensenar 1 * Hacer ver. Yo muestro (enseno) mi lihro d V. V. me los mue&tra, (me los ensena.) * See verbs in car, cer, &c., in the App with a past Very muclh y participle. Muy. Bien. Extremameute. Infinitamente. Muyf Sumamentc. Obs. B. The Superlative Absolute is also formed by adding the fodowing terminations to the positive, viz. isimo, isima, for adjectives ; isimamente foi adverbs. In forming the Superlative Absolute, adjectives ending in For adverbs. Lo menos. i You are as good as he. You are not less rich than I. We are less prudent than they. He is not so good as you. You are richer than we You speak as correctly as I. You speak not less correctly than I He is very J He is extremely > prudent. He is infinitely ) You read very elegantly. I have the handsomest, fie is the least prudent. The most foolishly. The least prudently The more — the more. The less — the less. The more — the less. The lesvs — the more. V. es tan bueno como ^1. i V. 710 es menos rico que yo. Somos menos prudentes que ellos. El no es tan bueno como V. V. es mas rico que nosotros. I V. habla tan correctamente como yo. : V. no habla menos correctamente que yo. U C muy El es< extremameute ( infinitamente 1 es prudentisimo V. lee muy elegantemente — eUga nV. simamente. Yo tengo el mas herrnoso. 6s el menos prudente. Lo mas imprudentemeiite. Lo menos prudentemente. Cuanto mas — tanto mas. Cuanto m6nos — tanto m€nos Cuanto mas — tanto m^nos Cuanto uf'^nos — tanto mas > prudente. TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. Ill Die more he studies, the more he learns The less he drinks, the less thirsty he is. The more he plays, the less he learns. I he less lie plays, the more he studies So inuch the more — than. So much the less — than. Cuanto mas estudia, tanto mao aprende. Cuanto menos bebe, tanto meiK#s sed tiene. Cuanto mas juega, tanto mdaos aprende. Cuanto menos juega, tanto mas es- tudia. Tanto mas — que. Tanto menos — que. IRREGULAR COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. High — ^higher — highest. Low — lower — lowest. Good — better — very good — best. Great — greater — greatest. Bad — worse — worst. Li ttle — 1 ess — 1 e ast. Small — smaller — smallest. Strong — very strong. New — very new. Wise — very wise. Sacred — very sacred. Faithful — very faithful. Honest — very honest. Healthy — very healthy. Alto — superlcr — supremo. Bajo — inferior — mfimo. Bueno — mejor — bonisimo — 6ptimo Grande — mayor — miximo. Malo — peor — pdsimo. Pequeno — menor — mmimo. F uerte — fortisimo. N ue VO — no visimo. Sabio — sapientisimo. Sagrado — sacratisimo. Fiel — fidelisimo. Integra — integOrrimo. Salubre — salub^rrimo. ADVERBS. Well — better — the best Bad— worse — the worst. Little — less — the least. Much — more — the most. Bien — mejor — lo mejoi. Mai — peor — lo peor. Poco — menos — lo m^nos. Mucho — mas — lo mas. Phis book is small, that is smaller, and that is the smallest of all AIL Hiis hat is large, but that is larger. Is your hat as large as mine ? Is it larger than yours ? ft is not 80 large as yours. £ste libro es pequeno, ese es maj pequeno, y aquel es el mas pe- queho de todos. Todo. Todos, (adj.) Este sombrero es grande, pero aquel es mas grande. I Es' su sombrero de V. tan grande como el mio ? I Es mas grande que el de V ? No es tan grande como el de V 112 TWENTY -NINTH LESSON. A.ie our neighbor’s children as good as ours ? Tliey are better than ours. They are not so good as ours I I Son los nihos de nuestro vecino tai I buenos como los nuestros ? I Son mejores que los nuestros. I No son tan buenos como los nuestros A very fine book t Very fine books A very pretty knife. Very well. Un libio muy hermoso, or hermosiei mo. Libros muy hermosos, or hermosisi mos. Un cuchilk muy bonito Muy bien. Xliat man is extremely learned. This bird is very handsome. Aquel hombre es extromamente sabio or sapientisimo. Este pajaro es muy hermoso, or hei mosisimo. Whose ? {of whom ?) Whose hat is this ? Ohs. C. Cuyo agrees in gender after it. To be, (meaning belonging to ) It is. It is my brother’s hat It is the hat of my brother. It is my brother’s. Who has the finest hat ? Whose hat is the finest ? That of my father is the finest. Whose gun is the handsomer, yours or mine ? j I De quien ? {Cuyo, cuya — cuyos I cuyas.) r I De quien es este sombrero ? J I Cuyo sombrero es este ? ( I Cuyo es este sombrero ? and number with the noun that come? I Ser de. I Es — de. (See Ser, in the Appendix.'^ Es el sombrero de mi hernmno. t Es de mi hermano ^ Quien tiene el mas hermoso son • brero 1 * I Cuyo sombrero es el mas hermoso El do mi padre es el mas hermoso. I Que fusil es el mas hermoso, el de V. 6 cl mio ? Do you read as often as I ? I read els often as you. Does he read as often as I ? lie reads and writes as often as you. Do our children write as much as we ? They write more than you. iVe read more than the children of oui friends. I Lee V. tan d, menudo como yo ? Leo tan d, menudo como V. I Lee 6\ tan d, menudo como yo ? ]&1 lee y escribe tan d, menudo come V. I Escriben nuestros ninos tnnto come nosotros ? Escriben mas que VV Leemos mas que los ninos de nues* tros amigos. TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. 113 To whom do you write ? I write to our friends. We read good books I A quien escribe V. ? Escribe d nuestros amigos. Leemos buenos libros. EXERCISES. 91 . Whose book is this ? — It is mine. — Whose hat is that ? — It .s m\ Other’s. — Are you taller {mas alto) than I ? — I am talfer than you. — fa your brother as tall as you ? — He is as tall as I. — Is thy hat as bad is that of my father ? — It is better, but not so black as his. — Are the clothes (vestidos) of the Italians as fine as those of the Irish ? — They are finer, but not so good. — Who have the finest gloves ? — The French have them. — Who has the finest horses ? — Mine are fine, yours are finer than mine ; but those of our friends are the finest of all. — Is your horse good ? — It is good, but yours is better, and that of the English- man is the be^t of all the horses which we know. — Have you pretty shoes ? — I have very pretty ones, (Zo5,) but my brother has prettier ones (los) than I. — From whom {de quien) does he receive them ? — He receives them from {de) his best friend. Is your wine as good as mine ? — It is better. — Does your merchant sell good knives ? — He sells the best knives that I know, {conocer .) — Do we read more books than the French ? — We read more of them than they ; but the English read more of them than we, and the Ger- mans read the most. — Hast thou a finer garden than that of our physician ? — I have one finer than his. — Has the American a finer stick than thine ? — He has a finer one. — Have we as fine children as our neighbors ? — We have finer ones. — Is your coat as pretty as mine ? — It is not so pretty, but better than yours. — Do you depart to-day ? — I do not depart to-day. — When does your father set out ? — He ‘‘ets out this evening at a quarter to nine. — Which of these two children is the better, {sabio ?) — The one who studies is better than the one who plays. — Does your servant sweep as well as mine ? — He sweeps better than yours. — Does the Englishman read as many bad books as good ones ? —He reads more of the good than of the bad ones. Do the merchants sell more sugar than coffee ? — They sell more of the latter than of the former. — Does your shoemaker make as many shoes as mine ? — He makes more of them than yours. — Can you swim as well {tan bien) as my son ? — I can swim better than he, but he can ?peak Spanish better than I. — Does he read as well as you ? — Hq reads better than I. — Does the son of your neighbor go to market ? — 92 . 93 . 114 THIRTIETH LESS 0 IT. N^o, he remains at home ; he has sore feet. — Do you learn as well a& viur gardener’s son ? — I learn better than he, but he works better tlian I. — Whose gun is the finest ? — Yours is very fine, but that of the captain is still finer, and ours is the finest of all. — Has any one finer children than you ? — No one (tkemy has finer ones. — Does your son »’ead as often as I ? — He reads oftener than you. — Does my brothcn speak French as often as you ? — He speaks and reads it as often as 1. — Do I write as much as you ? — You write more than I. — Do our neighbor’s children read German as often as we ? — ^We do not read it as often as they. — ^Do we write it as often as they? — They write oftener than we. — To whom do they write ? — They write to their friends. — Do you read English books ? — We read French books instead r>r reading English books. THIRTIETH LESSON. — Leccion Trigesima, To believe. To put. To put on. Do you put on ? I put on I put on my hat. He puts on his gloves Do you put on your shoes ? We do put them on. What do your brothers put on ? They put on their clothes. Where do you conduct me to ? I conduct you to my father. Creer 2. (See verbs in eer, in the Appendix.) Poner * 2. (See this verb in the Appendix.) ^Uterse (Reflective verb.) t i Se pone V. ? t Me pongo. t Me pongo el sombrero t Se pone los guantes. t i Se pone V. los zapatos ? t Nos los ponemos. 1 1 Que se ponen sus hermanos de V. 1 t Se ponen los vestidos. I A donde me conduce V. ? V Yo conduzco d V. d casa de mi pad re. ( Yo le conduzco d casa de mi padie. Do you go out ? I do go out. Do we go out ? fVIien does vour father go out ? I Sale V. ? Yo salgo. I Salimos ? I Cuaiido sale su padre de V. ? Early. As early as you. He goes out as early as you Late. Too. Temprano. Tan temprano como V. El sale tan temprano como V Tarde. Demasiado. Them, to be translated los tiene. THIRTIETH LESSON. 115 Too late. Too soon, too early. Too large, too great, (in size.) Too little, too small. Demasiado tarde. Demasiado tem.prano. Demasiado largo, or grande Demasiado peqiieno, or deinasiadc chico. Too much ! Demasiado, demasiadamente. Do you speak too much ? I do not speak enough. Later than you. I go out later than you. Sooner earlier Does your father go there earlier than 1 1 He goes there too early. Already ■ -c you speak already ? Not yet, I do not speak yet. Not yet. Sir. Do you finish your note ? 1 do not finish it yet Do you breakfast already ? I Habla V. demasiado — demasiada- mente ? Yo no hablo bastante. Mas tarde que V. Salgo mas tarde que V Mas temprano, i Va su padre de V alia mas toni' prano que yo ? El va alia demasiado tempraua Ya, todavia, aun, I Habla V. aun ? No (v) todavia. Todavia no, Aun no. No hablo todaria. Todavia no, senor. I Acaba V. su billete ? No le acabo todavia. Aun no le acabo. I Almuerza V. ya ? I Esta V. ya almorzando ? Who receives the most money ? The English receive the most. We read more than they, but the French read the most. The letter. That letter. The letters. I Quien recibe mas dinero ? Los Ingleses son los que reciben rn&4 Leemos mas que ellos, pero los Fran- ceses son los que leen mas. La carta, (feminine.) Aquella (or esa) carta. Las cartas. _ , , \ Comer demasiado es peligroso. /> eat too much IS dangerous. 17/ 1 1 i- ^ ^ til comer demasiado es peligroso. Ohs. There is no preposition before an infinitive when it is used m ih© subject of a verb ; it is then taken substantively, and in Spanish is fre- (pxently preceded by the article el, (the,) as — 116 THIRTIETH LESSON. To speak too much is foolish. To do good to those that have offend- ed us, is a commendable action. El hablar demasiado es muy necio. Es muy necio hablar demasiado Hacer (or el hacer) bien d los que nos ban ofendido es una accion laudable EXERCISES. 94 . Do you put on another coat in order to go to the play ? — I do put on another. — Do you put on your gloves before you put on your shoes ? — I put on my shoes before I put on my gloves. — Does your brother pul on his hat instead of putting on his coat ? — He puts on his coat before he puts on his hat. — Do our children put on their shoes in order to go to our friends ? — They put them on in order to go to them. — What do our sons put on ? — They put on their clothes and their gloves. — Do you already speak Spanish ? — I do not speak it yet, but I begin to learn. — Does your father go out already ? — He does not yet go out. — At what o’clock does he go out ? — He goes out at ten o’clock. — Does he breakfast before he goes out ? — He breakfasts and writes his notes (la carta) before he goes out. — Does he go out earlier than you ? — I go out earlier than he. — Do you go to the play as often as I ? — I go there as often as you. — Do you begin to know (conocer) this man ? — I do begin to know him. — Do you breakfast early ? — We do not breakfast late. — Does the Englishman go to the concert earlier than you ? — He goes there later than I. — At what o’clock does he go there ? — He goe? there at half-past eleven. 95 . Do you not go too early to the concert ? — I go there too late. — Do J write too much ? — You do not write too much, but you speak too much — Do I speak more than you ? — You do speak more than I and my brother. — Is my hat too large ? — It is neither too large nor too small. — Do you speak Spanish oftener than English ? — I speak English oftenei than Spanish. — Do your friends buy too much corn ? — They buy bul little. — Have you bread enough ? — I have only a little, but enough. — Is it late ? — It is not late. — What o’clock is it ? — It is one o’clock. — Is it too late to (para) go to your father ? — It is not too late to go to him. — Do you conduct me to him, (alia ?) — I do conduct you to him. (alia .) — Where is he ? — He is in his counting-house. — Does the Spaniard buy a horse ? — He cannot buy one. — Is he poor ? — He is not poor ; he is richer than you. — Is your brother as learned as you ? — He is more learned than I, but you are more learned than he and I. 96 . Do you kiiow that man ? — I do know him. — Is he learned ? — He is (68) the most learned of all men that I know. — Is your horse wotse THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. 117 (preceding Lesson) than mine? — It is not so bad as youis. — Is mine vvorse than the Spaniard’s ? — It is worse ; it is the worst horse that 1 jinow. — Do you give those men less bread than cheese ? — I give them !ess of tJie latter than of the former. — Do you receive as much money as your neighbors. — I receive much more than they. — Who receivesi Kie most money ? — The English receive the most. — Can your son already write a letter ? — He cannot write one yet, but he begins to read 1 little. — Do you read as much as the Russians ? — We read more than ihey, but the French read the most. — Do the Americans write more Uian we ? — They write less than we, but the Italians write the least, (preceding Lesson.) — Are they as rich as the Americans ? — They are '.ess rich tlian they. — Are your birds as fine as those of the Irish ? — They are less fine than theirs, but those of the Spaniards are the least line. — Do you sell your bird ? — I do not sell it; I like it too mu/h to Kph it, {para que le venda.) THIRTY-FIRST LESSON . — Leccion Trigesima 'primera. THE PAST PARTICIPLE. The past participle is formed from the infinitive mood, by changing the jerminalions ar, cr, ir, into ado^ ido, ido . — (See Lesson XXIV.) FIRST CONJUGATION. To love, loved. Amar, amado. To speak, spoken Hablar, hablado. To buy, bought; Comprar, comprado SECOND CONJUGATION. To sell, sold. Vender, vendido To eat, to dine, eaten, dined. Comer, com ido To drink. drunk Beber, bebido THIRD CONJUGATION To receive, received. Recibir, recibido To divide. divided. Dividir, dividido. To part. parted. Partir, partido. To hcf been \ } Estar, sido eetado. To havCf hadf (auxiliary.) i Haber f hahido. I have, thou hast, he has. Yo he, tti has, el ha. U’e have, you have. , they have. Nosotros hemos, vosotros hubeis, 1 1 ban. 118 THIRTY -FIRST LESSON. Oh . When to have is used as an active verb, it is ti'anslatel by* TENErt ; but when it is an auxiliary verb, that is to say, a verb ust J to f >nn the compound tenses of other verbs, it must be translated by HABiiA. When the past participle follows immediately after the verb hub^r, it k civariable ; that is to say, it neither takes the gender nor the nuruLer of tha lubjoct To have been to, (gone to.) To have gone to. To have been at. To have gone at. To have been in. H.ave you been to market ? Did you go to market ? I have been. I went I have not been. I did not go. I have esteemed them. He has esteemed her They have been esteemed. The sisters have been admired I Haber ido d. I Haber ido a Hahei estadi. m. j Haber ido d. Haber estado en. I Ha ido V. al mercado ? [ Fue V. d la plaza ( Yo he ido. Yo fui.*- Yo no he ido. Yo no fui. Yo los he estimado fil la ha estimado. Elios han sido estimados. Las hermanas han sido admiradaa Ever. Never Have you been at the ball ? Have you ever been at the bal‘ '< I have never been. Thou hast never been there. He has never been there. You have never been there. Jamas. Alguna vez. En algun tiempo. I No — -jamas. Nunc a. Nanca i Ha estado V. en el bade ? I Ha ido V. al baile ? S I Ha estado V. alguna vez en el bad#^ I Ha ido V. alguna vez al baile ? I Nunca he estado. Jamas he ido I Nunca (jamas) has ido alld. I Nunca (jamas) ha ido alia. ) V. no ha ido jamas alia. Already, yet Have you already been at play ? 1 nave already been Not yet I have not yet been there. Hast thou ever been there * I Ya. the k I Ha estado V. ya en el teatro? ) ^Haido V.ya al teatro,(d la com^dia ?) I Ya he ido. Ya he estado. I Todavia no. No — todavia. Aun no > Yo no he ido (estado) alia todavia. i Todavia no he ido (estado) alia I [ Has ido (estado) tii jamas (alguna vez) alld? no ha ido (estado) alia todavia Me has not been there. THIRTY- FIRST LESSON. 119 Vou have not been there yet. We have not yet been there. Have you already been at my fa- ther’s ? 1 have not been yet. bave already been. Wliere have you bc»cu this riiorn- ing? 1 have been in the garden. Where has thy brother been ? He has been in the warehouse. Has he been there as early as I? He has been there earlier than you. I V. no ha ido (estado) alia todavio. Todavia no hemos ido (estado) all4. iHa ido (estado) V. ya d, casa de padre ? Todavia no he ido, (estado ) Ya he ido. Ya he estado iAdonde ha estado (ido) V. esta manana ? Yo he estado en el jardin. I Adonde ha estado tii hermaiio ^)1 ha estado en el almacen. I Ha ido (estado) 6\ alld. tan temprano como yo ? 6l ha ido (estadv ) alia mas temprano que V Anywhere. Nowhere. To remain, to stay. Do you go anywhere ? I go nowhere now ; I stay at homo. Do you remain in the garden ? Yes, I remain here. Alguna parte Cualquiera parte. Ninguna parte. Quedarse. Estarsc. i Va V. d alguna parte ? Yo no voy d ninguna parte ahora ; me quedo en casa. I Se queda V. en el jardin ? Si, mo quedo aqui. EXERCISES. 97. Where have you been ? — I have been to the market. — Have you been to the ball ? — I have been. — Have I been to the play ? — You have been there. — Hast thou been there ? — I have not been there. — Has your son ever been at the theatre ? — He has never been. — Hast thou already been in my warehouse ? — I have never been. — ^Do you intend to (Obs. B, Lesson XXL) go there ? — I do intend to go there. — When will you go there ? — I will go there to-morrow. — At what o’clock ? — At twelve o’clock. — Has your brother already been in my large garden ? — He has not yet been there. — Does he intend to see it ? — He does intend to Bee it. — When will he go there ? — He will go there to-day. — Does he intend to go to the ball this evening? — He does intend to go. — Have you already been at the ball ? — I have not yet been. — When do you intend to go there ? — I intend to go to-morrow. — Have you already been in the Frenchman’s garden ? — I have not yet been in it. — ^Have 70U been in my warehouses ? — 1 have been there. — When did you gc 120 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. there ? — I went this morning. — Have I been in your counting-house, oi in that of your friend ? — You have neither been in mine, nor in that of my friend, but in that of the Englishman. •98, Has the Italian been in our warehouses, or in those of the Dutch ? — He has neither been in ours nor in those of the Dutch, but in those of the Germans. — Hast thou already been at the market ? — I have not foi been, but I intend to (Obs. B, Lesson XXL) go there. — Has oui aeighoor’s son been there ? — He has been there. — WJien has he been there ? — He has been there to-day. — Does the son of our gardener in- tend to go to the market ? — He does intend to go there. — What does he wish to buy there ?— -He wishes to buy some chickens, oxen, corn, wine, and cheese. — Have you already been at my brother’s house ? — [ have already been there, (alia.) — Has your friend already been there ? — He has not yet been there. — Have we already been at our friends’ ? — We nave not yet been there.- — Have our friends ever been at our house ? — They have never been. — Have you ever been at the theatre ? — I have never been. — Have you a mind to write an exercise ? — I have a mind to write one. — To whom do you wish to write a letter ? —I wish to write one to my son. — Has your father already been at tna concert ? — He has not yet been, but he intends to go. — Does he intend to go there to-day ? — He intends to go there to-morrow. — At what o’clock will he set out ? — He will set out at half-past six. — Does he intend to leave (salir) before he breakfasts ? — He intends to breakfast before he leaves. 99. Have you been to the play as early as 1 ? — 1 have been (there) earlier than you. — Have you often been at the concert ? — I have often been (there.) — Has our neighbor been at the theatre as often as we ? — He has been (there) oftener than we. — Do our friends go to their counting house too early ? — They go there too late. — Do they go there as late as we ? — They go there later than we. — Do the English go to their warehouses too early ? — They go there too early. — Is your friend as often in the counting-house as you ? — He is (there) oftener than I. — What does he do there ? — He writes. — Does he write as much as you ’ — He writes more than I. — Where does your friend remain ? — He re mains m his counting-house. — Does he not go out ? — He does not go out. — Do you remain in the garden ? — I do remain there. — Do you go to your friend every day ? — I do go to him every day. — When does he come to you ? — He comes to me every evening. — Do you go anywhere in the evening ? — I go nowhere ; I stay at home. — Do you send for any one?- -I send for my physician. — Does your servant go for any THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. 121 ? — He g-oes foi some wine. — Have you been anywhere this morn ing ? — 1 have been nowhere. — Where has your father been ? — He has been nowhere. — When do you drink (Lesson XXVI.) tea ? — 1 drink some (el) every morning. — Does your son drink coffee ? — He drinks chocolate. — Have you been to drink some coffee ? — I have been to drinV some, (ie.) THIRTY-SECOND LESSON.— Leccioa To have — had, (auxiliary) To have — had, (active.) Have you I ad my book ? I have not had it. Have I had it ? You have had it. Have I not had it ? You have not had it. Thou hast not had it. Hai he had it ? He has had it He has not had it. Hast thou had the coat ? 1 have not had it. Trigesima seghnda Haher — hahido, Tenet — tenido, i Ha tenido V. mi libro No le he tenido. Le he tenido yo ? V. le ha tenido. [ No le he tenido yo ? V. no lo ha tenido. Tii no le has tenido. I Le ha tenido dl ? El le ha tenido. ]&1 no le ha tenido. I Has tenido el vestido ? Yo no le he tenido. I have had them. I have not had them. Have I had them ? You have had them. You hav 3 not had them. Has he had them ? He has not had them Have you had any bread ? 1 have had some, (a little.) I have not had any. Have you had any ? Have 1 had any ? You have had some. You have not had any. Has he had any ? He has not had any. Have vou had any knives ? I have had some. 1 have net had any. Yo los he tenido No los he tenido. I Los ho tenido yo ? V. los ha tenido. V. no los ha tenido. I Los ha tenido 6\ ? t\ no los ha tenido. I Ha tenido V. pan ? He tenido un poco. Yo no he tenido ninguno. I Ha tenido V. alguno? I He tenido yo alguno ? V. Ha tenido un poco. V. no ha tenido ninguno. I Ha tenido el un poco 1 El no ha tenido ninguno. I Ha tenido V. algunos cuchOlos: i He tenido algunos, uuo£$. Ningunos he tenido. 122 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. What has he had ? He has had uothing I I Que ha tenido 41 i I No ha tenido nada. Nada ha tenido Have you been hungry ? I l\'»ve been afraid, lie has never been either right or wrong. t I Ha tenido V. hambre 1 t Yo he tenido miedo. t nunca ha tenido, ni ha dejadc de tentr razon. To take place. Thati (meaning that thing.) Does the ball take place this even- ing? It does take place It takes place this evening. It does not take place to-day When did the ball take place ? When has the ball taken place ? I I f I It took place yesterday. It has taken place yesterday. Tenerse. Verificarse Celehrarse, Darse. Haber, flnv personal.) Eso. Aijuello t i Se celebra el baile esta noche ? t ^ Se da el baile esta noche 1 t I Hay baile esta noche ? t Se celebra. Se da le hoy. t Se celebra esta noche. Se da esta noche, &c. t No se celebra hoy. No se da hoy No le hay hoy. 1 1 Cuando se celebrd ? t I Cuando se did el baile ? t I Cuando se ha tenido baile ? t I Cuando ha habido baile ? t Se did ayer. Se celebrd ayer. Se tuvo ayer. Yesterday rhe day before yesterday. How many times, (how often ?) Once Twice. Many times. Several times. I Ayer. I Anteayer Antier I Cuantas veces ? Una vez. Dos veces. Muchas veces. Varias veces. Algunas veces. C Antfguamente. En otro tiempo Formerly. < En tiempo pasado. En lo paaado. ^ Antes de este tiempo. Sometimes. | Algunas veces. Do you go sometimes to the bal 'i I go sometimes. i Va V. algunas veces al baile ? Voy algunas veces THIRTY-SJiCOND LESSON. 123 Goue Gone there. flave you goue there sometimes ? I have goue there often. Oftener than you Elave you not had? Have they not had any oread ? Have the men had my trunk ? They have "^ot had it. Who has had it ? Have they had my knives ? Have they not had them ? They have not had them Who has had them ? I Ido. Ido— alld. I Ha ido V. alld algunas veces ? He ido alld d menudo. Mas d menudo que V. I No ha tenido V.? ^ No han ellos tenido pan ? I Han tenido mi cofre (mi haul) los hombres ? No le han tenido. I Quien le ha tenido? I Han tenido ellos mis cuchillos ? I No los han tenido ellos ? No los han tenido. I Quien los ha tenido ? Have I been wrong in buying books ? You have not been wrong in buying some. When had I it, (when have I had it?) Where had you them? (have you had.) Have you had any thing ? I have had nothing. t I He hecho tral en comprar libros i t V. no ha hecho ?nal en comprai algunos. I Cuando le he tenido? I Donde los ha tenido V. ? I Ha tenido V. algo ? Nada he tenido. The watch. | El reloj. Relojes, (pi ) EXERCISES. 100 . Have you had my dog ? — I have had it. — ^Have you had my glove f — I have not had it. — Hast thou h id my umbrella ? — I have not had it. —Have I had your knife ? — You Jiave had it. — When had I it ? — You had it yesterday. — Have I had your gloves ? — You have had them.— Has your brother had my iron haramer ? — He has had it. — Has he had my golden knife ? — He has not had it. — Have the English had my beautiful ship ? — They have had it. — Who has had my leather shoes ? ' — Your servants have had them.— -Have we had the iron trunk of oui good neighbor ? — We have had it — Have we had his fine gun ? — Wc nave not had it. — Have we had the mattresses of the foreigners ?— We have not had them. — Has the American had my good watch ? — He has had it. — Has he had my ij on knife ? — He has not had it. — Has the young man had the first volume of my dictionary ? — He has not 124 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. had the firsi, but the second. — Has he had it ? — Yes, Sir, he has had it — When has he had it ? — He has had it this morning. — Have you had any sugar? — I have had some. — Have ! had »ny good paper? — You have not had any. — Has the cook of the Russian captain had anv chickens ? — He has had some. — He has not had any. 101 . 1 las the Frenchman had good wine ? — He has had some, and he has 3till (aun) some. — Hast thou had large cakes ? — I have had some. — Has tliy brother had any ? — He has not had any. — Has the son of our gardener had any bread ? — He has had some. — Have the Poles had good tobacco ? — They have had some. — What tobacco have they had ? — They have had tobacco and snuff. — Have the English had as much sugar as tea ? — They have had as much of the one as of the other.— Has the physician been right? — He has been wrong. — Has the Dutch- man been right or wrong ? — He has never been either right or wrong, (see Lesson VI.) — Have I been wrong in buying a horse ? — You have been wrong in buying one. — What has the painter had ? — He has had fine pictures. — Has he had any fine gardens ? — He has not had any. — Has your servant had my shoes ? — He has not had them. — What has the Spaniard had ? — He has had nothing. — Who has had courage ? — The English sailors have had some. — Have the Germans had many friends ? — They have had many. — Have we had more friends than enemies ? — We have had more of the latter than of the former. — Has your son had more wine than bread ? — He has had more of the latter than of the former. — Has the Turk had more paper than corn ? — He has had less of the latter than of the former. — Has the Italian painter had any thing ? — He ha^ had nothing. 102 . Have I been right in writing to my brother ? — You have not been wrong in writing to him. — Have you had a sore finger ? — I have had a Bore eye. — Have you had any thing good ? — I have had nothing bad. — Did the ball take place yesterday ? — It did not take place. — Does it take place to-day ? — It takes place to-day. — When does the ball tJike place ? — It takes place this evening. — Did it take place the day before jresterday ? — It did take place. — At what o’clock did it take place ?— It took place (it has taken place) at eleven o’clock. — Did you go to my brother’s ? — I went. — How often have you been at my friend’s house ? — -I have been twice. — Do you go sometimes to the theatre ? — I go sometimes. — How many times have you been at the theatre ? — I have been only once. — Have you sometimes been at the ball ? — I have often been. — Has your brother ever gone to the ball ? — He has never gone. — Has he gone there as often as you ? — He has gone oftener THIRTT-THIRD LESSON 125 Uian 1. — Dost thou go sometimes into the garden ? — I go sometimes. — Flast thou often been there ? — I have often been tliere. — Does youi old cook often go to the market ? — He goes there often. — Does he gc ihere as often as my gardener? — He goes oftener than he. — Did that talm place ? — It did take place. — When did that take place ? — I do nc ‘ hiiovv. 103 . Have you formerly gone, to the ball ? — I have gone there sometimes —When hast thou been at the concert ? — I was (I have been) tho day before yesterday. — Didst thou find anybody (alguna gente) there ? — 1 found nobody there. — Hast thou gone to the ball oftener than thy brothers ? — I have not gone thither so often as they. — Has your friend often been at the play ? — He has been there several times. — Have you sometimes been hungry ? — I have often been hungry. — Has your valet often been thirsty ? — He has never been either hungry or ihirsty. — Did you go to the play early ? — I went late. — Did I go to the ball as early as you ? — You went earlier than I. — Did your brother go there too late ? — He went there too early. — Have your brothers had any thing ? — They have had nothing. — Who has had my sticks and my gloves? — Your servant has had both. — Has he had my hat and my gun ? — He has had both. — Hast thou had my horse or my brother’s ? — I have had neither yours nor your brother’s. — Have I had your note or the physician’s? — You have had neither the one nor the ^ther. — What has the physician had ? — He has had nothing. — Has anybody had my golden candlestick ? — Nobody has had it. — Has any one had my silver knives ? — No one has had them. THIRTY-THIRD LESSON . — Leccion Trigesima tercera OF THE PERFECT TENSE. — Del Preterito Perfecto Proximo The preterito perfecto proximo (tho perfect teme) is formed from the present of habery (to have,) and the past participle of the verb which is U be conjugated. This tense is used to express a thing done at a time designated in an in- determinate manner, or at a time past, but of which something yet re mains ; as, Yo he aprendido la gramatica — I have learned grammar ; He esiudiado esta mahana — I have studied this morning. I Hacer, Hecho, I I Que ha hecho V. ? ^ No he hecho nada \ Nada he hecho To makcy to do. Made, done. What have you done ? I have done nothing TUIRTY-TUIRD LESSON. 126 lIoB that shoemaker made my shoes ? Ele has made them. [ie has not made them. To putj to put on, Puty put on. Have you put on your shoes? I liave put them on. To take off. Taken off. Have you taken off your gloves ? I have taken them off. I Ha hecho mis zapatos aquel zaps tero ? 6l los ha hecho. No los ha hecho. Ponery pon^rse. Puesto. (See the verb Poner in App.1 t ^ Se ha puesto V. los zapatos t Me los he puesto. ' Quitarse, Quitado. t Se ha quitado V. los guantes ? t Yo me los he quiteido. To telly to say. Toldy said. Have you said the proverbs? I liave said them. Have you told me the proverb ? I have told you the proverb. [ have told it you. Decir * 3. •Dicho. (See this verb in App^i t Ha dicho V. los refranes ? Yo los he dicho. I Me ha dicho V el refran ? Yo he dicho el refran d V Yo le he dicho d, V. Se le he dicho d. V I The proverb. Thaty (meaning that thing.) ThiSy (meaning this thing.) Has he told you that 7 He has told me that. Have I told you that ? You have told me that. El refran. El proverbio Eso. Aquello. Esto. I Ha dicho ^1 eso d. V. ? I Le ha dicho esto d, V. ? Me ha dicho eso. ‘ He dicho yo eso ^ V. ? V. me ha dicho eso. It. Obs. ThiSy thaty and it, are translated as above when they do not refer to a noun. EstOy esoy and aquello y may be either the subject or tlifl abject of the verb, but lo is most always the object of the verb. Have you told it me ? I have told it you. I have not told it you. Has he told it you ? He has told it me. He has not told it me. Have you told him that ? ^ I have told it him, (to him.) You have told it him. lie has told it him I Me lo ha dicho V. ? Yo se lo he dicho d, V. No se lo he dicho d. V I Se lo ha dicho dl d, V.T El me lo ha dicho. ^ll no me lo ha dicho. [ Le ha dicho V. eso ? Yo se lo he dicho. V. se lo ha dicho (d dl.) (El) se lo ha dicho d 6L THIRTY-THIIiD LESSON. 127 Have yun told it them, (to them?) I have told it them. Flave you spoken to the men 1 t have spoken to them. To whom did you speak, (have you spoken ?) Which proverbs has he written ? tie has written those which you see. I Se lo ha dicho V. k ellos ? Yo se lo he dicho d ellos. I Ha hablado V. d los hombres ? Yo les he hablado. I A quien ha hablado V. ? I Que refranes ha escrito dl ? ^il ha escrito los que V. vd. To drink. Drunk. To see. Seen. To read. Read. To he acquainted with. Been ac- quainted with. Which men have you seen ? I have seen those. Which books have you read ? 1 have read those which you lent me. Have you been acquainted with these men ? I have not been acquainted with them. Bcher. Behido, Ver. Vis to — (See App.) Leer, Leido, Conocer, Conocido. I Que hombres ha visto V 1 He visto d aquellos. I Que libros ha leido V. ? Yo he leido los que V. me ha do. I Ha conocido V. d estos hombres ? Yo no los he conocido. Have you seen any sarbrs ? [ have seen some. [ have not seen any. To call. Called. To throw. To throw away. Who calls me ? Your father calls you. Have you called the boys? I have not called them. 00 you throw your money away 1 do not throw it away. Who throws away his books? Wave you thrown away any thing? I have thrown away my gloves. Are you willing? I am willing ta I Ha visto V. d algunos marineros ? He visto d algunos. A ningunos he visto. Llamar. Llamado. Tirar, Arrojar. Desperdiciar. Botar. I Quien me llama? Su padre de V. le llama. I Ha llamado V. d los muchachos ? No los he llamado. I Desperdicia V. su dinero ? No, yo no le desperdicio, (or bote.) I Quien tira sus libros ? I Ha tirado V. algo? Yo he tirado mis guantes. ( I Quiere V. ? ( t Tiene V. gana do 7 ( Yo quiero. J t Tengo gana de 128 THIRTT-TEIED LESSOH. To he ill. Estar malo. Enfermo. I Estd V. malo ? Si. Lo estoy. Are you ill ? I am EXERCISES. 104 . Have you any thing to do ? — I have nothing to do. — What hast Ihcu done ? — I have done nothing. — Have I done any thing ? — You have done something. — What have I done ? — You have torn my books. — What have your children done ? — They have torn their clothes. — What nave we done ? — You have done nothing; but your brothers have burnt my fine pencils. — Has the tailor already made your coat ? — He has not yet made it. — Has your shoemaker already made your shots ? — He has already made them. — Have you sometimes made a hat ? — I have never made one. — Have our neighbors ever made books ? — They made some formerly. — How many coats has your tailor made ? — He has made twenty or thirty. — Has he made good or bad coats ? — He has made (both) good and bad. — Has your father put on his coat ? — He has not yet put it on, but he is going to put it on. — Has your brother put his shoes on ? — He has put them on. — Have our neighbors put on their shoes and their pantaloons ? — They have put on neither, (m unos ni otros .) — Wlat has the physician taken away? — He has taken away nothing . — W hat have you taken off? — I have taken off my large hat. — Have your children taken off their gloves ? — They have taken them off. — When lid the ball take place? — It took place the day before yesterday. — Who has told you that ? — My servant has told it to me. — What has your brother told you ? — He has told me nothing. — Did I tell you that ? — You did not tell it to me. — Has he told it to you ? — He has told it to me. — Who has told it to your neighbor ? — The English have told it to him. — Have they told it to the French ? — They have told it to them. — Who has told it to you ? — Your son has told it to me. — Has he told it to you ? — He has told it to me. — Are you willing to tell your friends tliat ? — I am willing to tell it to them. Are you the brother of that young man? — I am. — Is that young man your son ? — He is. — Are y )ur friends as rich as they say ? — They a:e so. — Are these men as learned as they say ? — They are not so. — = Do you sweep the warehouse often ? — I sweep it as often as I can. — Has our neighbor money enough to buy some coal ? — I do not know, — Has your cook gone to the market ? — He has not gone. — Is he ill 1 —He is. — Am I ill ? — You are not. — Are you as tall (alto) as I ? — am. — Are you as fatigued as your brother ? — I am more so than he - 105 . THIRTY-THIHD LESSON. 129 Have you written a letter ? — I have nDt written a letter, but an exer- cise. — What have your brothers written ? — They have written their exercises. — When did they write them ? — They wrote {have written) diern yesterday. — Have you written your exercises ? — I have written ^hem. — Has your friend written his ? — He has not written them yet.-'- Which exercises has your little brother written ? — He has wriiten his own. — Have you spoken to my father ? — I have spoken to him. — When did you speak to him ? — I spoke to him the day before yesterday. — How many times have you spoken to the captain? — I have spoken to him several times. — Have you often spoken to his son? — I Lave often spoken to him. — To which men has your friend snoken? — He has spoken to these and to those. 106 . Have you spoKen to the Russians ? — I have spoken to them. — Have lae English ever spoken to you ? — They have often spoken to me. — What has the German told you ? — He has told me the proverbs. — Which proverbs has he told you ? — He has told me these proverbs. — What have you to tell me ? — I have a few proverbs to tell you. — Which exercises has your friend written? — He has written those. — Which oooks have your children read ? — They have read those which you have lent them. — Have you seen these men or those ? — I have neither- seen these nor those. — Which men have you seen ? — I have seen those to whom {d quienes) you have spoken. — Have you been acquainted with these men ? — I have been acquainted with them. — With which boys has your brother been acquainted ? — He has been acquainted with those of our merchant. — Have I been acquainted with these French- men? — You have not been acquainted with them. — Which wine has your servant drunk ? — He has drunk mine. — Have you seen my bro- ±rrs ? — I have seen them. — Where have you seen them ? — I have seen them at their own house. — Have you ever seen Greeks ? — I have never seen any. — Has your father seen any ? — He has sometimes seen some. — Do you call me ? — I do call you. — Who calls your brother ? — My father calls him. — Dost thou call any one ? — I call no one. — Have /ou thrown away your hat? — I have not thrown it away. — Does your father throw away any thing ? — ^He throws away the letters which he receives. — Have you thrown away your pencils ? — I have not thrown them away. — Dost thou throw away thy book ? — I do not throw it away ; 1 want it to (jpara) study (el E^paiW} Spanish 130 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSOR. THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON . — Leccion Trigesima cuarta. To light, (kindle,) lighted, (lit.) To extinguish, extinguished To open, opened. To be able, (can,) been able, (could.) To be willing, been willing. Encender encendido. Extinguir, extinguido Apagar, apagado. Abrir. abieito.* Poder *, podido. Querer *, querido NEUTER VERBS. hi neuter verbs the action is intransitive, hat is, it remains in the agont 111 Spanish, neuter verbs form their compound tenses with haber, (to nave therefore their past participles are invariable. To set out. Set out. To go out. Gone out. To come. Come. Has your father set out? Have your friends set «ut ? They have not set out. f Partir. Partido. ? Salir. Salido. f Marcharse. Marchado I Salir — Salido. Irse — Ido. I Venir. Venido. j ^ Se ha ido el padre de V. ? ( i Se ha marchado el padre de V. ? I Se han ido (marchado) los amigos de V.? No se han ido, (marchado.) When did your brothers go out ? When have your brothers gone out ? They went out at ten o’clock. They have gone out at ten o’clock. Have the men come to your father ? They have come to him. I Cuando se han ido (marchado) loa hermanos de V.? Elios se han ido (marchado) d las diez. I Han venido los hombres d casa de su padre de V. ? Si, han venido. Han venido aqui. Han venido d casa. Obs. When did your brothers go out ? They went out at ten o’clock. — Until the learner is acquainted with the Preterito Pcrfecio Re- wotOf (imperfect tense,) he must use the Spanish Preterito Perfecto Proz- imOf (perfect tense ;) therefore, before translating the above two sentences, they must be changed into. When have your brothers gone out ? They hav*?< gone out at ten o’clcok . — i Cuando han salido los hermanos de V / Han salido d las diez. Which fires have you extinguished ? I i Que fuegos han apagado VV ? Which storehouses have you opened? | i Que almacenes han abierto VV ? THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON llav*9 you conducted them to the 5?tor( house ? r have conducted them there. Which books have you taken? tlow many notes have you received ? VVe liave received but one. Upon. Lpon the bench. The bench. Upon it. 131 I Los ha conducido V. a alniacen? Los he conducido alld. I Que libros ha tornado V. ? I Cuantos billetes hau rocibido VV. Heinos recihido solarnente uiio. No hemos recibido sino uno Sobrcj (prep.) Sobre el banco El banco. Sobre 6\, Under Under the bench. Under it Where is my hat? It is upon the bench. Are my gloves on the bench ? They are under it. Do you learn to read ? 1 do (learn it.) I learn to write. Have you learned to speak ? We have (learned that.) Dehajo de. Bajo. Debajo del banco. Debajo de el. Debajo I En donde estd mi sombrero ? Estd sobre el banco. I Estan mis guanles sobre el banco ? Estan debajo. Debajo de dl. I Aprende V. d leer ? Si, yo aprendo. Aprendo d leer. Yo aprendo d escribir. ^ Han aprendido VV. d hablar ? Si, hemos aprendido, (d hablar.) In the storehouse In the hearth. In it. Within. En el almacen. En el hogar. Dentro. To wash. To get mended. To have mended Got mended. Had mended To get washed. To have washed. Got v^ashed. Had washed. To get made. To have made. Got made. Had made. To get swept. To have swept. Got swept. Had swept. To get sold. To have sold. Got sold. Had sold. Lavar 1. Mandar remendar, componer Hacer remendar, reparar, Mandado remendar. Hecho remendar. Mandar lavar. Hacer lavar. Mandado lavar. Hecho lavar. Mandar hacer. Hacer hacer. Mandado hacer. Hecho hacer, Hacer harrer. Mandar harrer. Hecho harrer. Mandado harrer. Hacer vender. Mandar vender. HerJio vender. Mandado vender 132 THIRTY -FOURm LESSON. To get the coat mended. To have it mended. To get them mended Are 5 "ou getting a coat made ? Do you order a coat ? r am getting one made. I have had one made [lave you had your coat mended ? I have had it mended. I have not had it mended. I liave had my shoes mended [ have had them mended. To wipe. When? Where ? Have you seen my books ? T have seen them vVhen did you see my brother ? When have you seen my brother? I saw him the day before yesterday. I have seen him the day before yes- terday. Where have you seen him? [ have seen him at the theatre. t Hacer remendai el vestido t Mandar remendar el vestido. t Hacerle remendar, (reparar.) t Hacerlos remendar, (reparar.) t i Se manda V. hacer un vestido ? t t Se hizo V. hacer un vestido ? t Mando hacerme uno. t Hago hacerme uno. K t Me he mandado hacer uno ( + Me he hecho hacer uno. t ; Ha hecho V. remendar su vestide ? t Yo le he hecho remendar, (leparur.) t No le he hecho reparar. i Yo he hecho remendar mis zapatos t Los he hecho remendar. Enjugar. Enjugado^ {cnjuto, ir- regular participle.) I Cuando 7 i Donde 7 i En dondc ; I Ha visto V. mis libros ? Yo los he visto. I Cuando ha visto V. d mi herrnano Yo le he visto anteayer, (antier.'l I i En donde le ha visto V. ? 1 Yo le he visto en el teatro EXERCISES. 107 . Where are your brothers gone to ? — They are gone to the theatre- — When did the F'‘?nch boys come to your brother ? — They came tc him yesterday. — Did their friends also come? — They came also. — Has any one come to us ? — The good Germans have come to us. — Has the servant carried my note ? — He has carried it. — Where has he carried it ? — He has carried it to your friend. — Which books has the servant taken ? — He has taken those which you do not read. — Have tlie merchants opened their storehouses ? — They have opened them. — Which storehouses have they opened ? — They have opened those which you have seen. — Which fires have the men extinguished ? — They have extinguished those which you have seen. — Have you received any notes ? — We have received some. — How many have you received ? — TS'e have '"eceived only one ; but our brother has receiveo more tiian we; he has »*eceived six. THIRTY-FOtTRTH LESSON. 133 108 . Wliere is niy coat ? — Tt is upon the bench. — Are my shoes upon the bench ? — They are under it. — Is the coal under the bench ? — It is in die iiearth. — Have you put any coal into the hearth ? — I have put some into it. — Are you cold ? — I am not cold. — Have you not been afraid to burn my papers ? — I have not been afraid to burn them. — Have you sent your little boy to market ? — I have. — When ? — This {la manana) morning. — Have you written to your father ? — I have written U) him. — Has he answered you ? — He has not yet answered me. — Arc you getting your floor swept ? — I am getting it swept. — Have you had your counting-house swept ? — I have not had it swept yet, but I intend to have it swept to-day. — Have you evei written to the physician ?— I have never written to him. — Has he sometimes written to you ? — Ht has often written to me. — What has he written to you ? — He has v/ritten something to me. — How many times have your friends written to you ? — They have written to me more than twenty times. — Have you seen my sons ? — I have never seen them. 109 . Have you already seen a Syrian ? — I have already seen one. — Where have you seen one ? — At the theatre. — Have you given the book to my brother ? — I have given it to him. — Have you given money to the merchant ? — I have given him some, — How much have you given to him ? — I have given to him fourteen dollars. — Have you given any gold forks to our neighbor’s children ? — I have given them some. — Wilt thou give me some wine ? — I have given you some already. — \Wien didst thou give me some ? — I gave you some this morning. — Wilt thou give me some now ? — I cannot give you any ; I have none --Has the American lent you money ? — He has lent me some. — Has the Italian ever lent you money ? — He has never lent me any. — Is ho poor ? — He is not poor ; he is richer than you. — Will you lend me a dollar ? — I will lend you two. — Has he come earlier than I ? — At what o’clock did you come? — I came at half-past five. — He has come earlier than you 110 . Has the concert taken place ?— It has taken place.— Has it taken place late ? — It has taken place early. — At what o’clock ? — At twelve. —At what o’clock has the ball taken place ? — It has taken place at midnight. — Does your brother learn to write? — He does learn. — Does he know how (Lesson XXVII.) to read ? — He does not know how yet. —Do you know the Frenchman whom I know ? — I do not know tlie one wliom you know, but I know another. — Does your friend know the same merchants as I know ? — He does not know the same, but la 134 THIRTY-FIFTH LESSOiy. know«i Others. — Have you ever had your coat mended ? — I nave some times had it mended. — Hast thou had thy bat or thy shoe mended ?— I have neither had the one nor the other mended. — Have you had youi coats or your gloves washed ? — I have neitlier had the one nor the other vashed. — Has your father had any thing made ? — He has not had any thing made. — Have you looked for my gloves ? — I have looked for tliem. — Where nave you looked for them ? — I have iooKed for therr upon the bed, and have found them under (it.) — Have yon found my letters in the hearth ? — I have found them in it. — Have you found rav pantaloons under the bed ? — I have found them upon it, (dla.) THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON . — Leccion Trigesima quinta. To ‘promise y promised. To learuy learned. Do you promise me to come ? I do promise you, (it to you.) What have you promised the man ? I have promised him nothing. Have you ever learned Spanish ? I learned it formerly. I have learned it formerly. To wear out. To refuse. To spell. How 7 Well. Badly So. Thus. So 80 . In this manner Hew has your brother written his exercise ? He ha* written it well Prometer, prometido Aprender, aprenUido I Me promete V. venir ? Se lo prometo d V. I Que ha prometido V. al homhre ? Yo no le he prometido nada. Nada le he prometido. [Ha aprendido V. alguna vez e espanol ? Yo le he aprendido en otro tiempo. Usar. Gastar. Consumir Rehusar. Negar * Deletrear. I Como? Bien. Mai. Asi, t De suerte que. Asi asi. t De este modo. De esta manera Asi. I Como ha escrito su tema su her mano de V. ? Le ha escrito bien. To dry To put to dry Secar. Poner d secar. Hacer secar. THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. 135 Do you put your coat to dry ? ’ do put it to dry The coat. How old ? llcw old are you ? 1 am twelve years old. !Iow old is vour brother ? Ho is thirteen years old ( I Pone V. d secar su cas^ca ? \ I flace V. secar su casaca ? Yo la pongo d secar, (or la hago eecai.) La casaca, (fern.) I Que edad ? i Cuanios aiios ? S t I Que edad tiene V. ? ( f I Cuantos ahos tiene V. ? I t Tengo doce anos. r t i Cuantos anos tiene su hermano ) de V. ? f t ^ Que edad tiene su hermano de V t 1 Tiene trece ahos. Almost He is almost fourteen years old CasL Tiene casi catorce ahos. About . Nearly. I am about fifteen years old. He is nearly eighteen years old. Something like. He is something like thirty. Cerca de. Poco mas 6 menos de. f Tengo cerca de quince ahos. t Tiene diez y ocho ahos poco mas 6 menos. Como unos, (unas, fern.) t lil tiene como unos treinta anos. Hardly. Not quite. 1 am not quite sixteen years old. Art thou older than thy brother? am younger than he. Old, (in years.) Apenas, No — todavia. Todavia no t No tengo todavia diez y seis ahos. t Todavia no tengo diez y seis ahos 1 1 Eres mayor que tu hermano ? 1 1 Eres de mas edad que tu her mano ? ( t Soy menor. t Soy de mdnos edad que dl. Soy mas jhven que el. t Tengo menos ahos que ^1. Viejo. Anciano. Avanzado en ahos, (or edad.) There is. There are. There has been. There have been. I Hay. > Ha habido, (past participle.) How many shillings are there in one ^ t Cuantos reales hay en un peso ? dollar ? \ i Cuantos reales tiene un peso J 136 THIRTY -FIFTH LESSON. Eight There are two sixpences in one shil ling Ocho Hay dos medios en un real, t Un real tiene dos medios (reulos.j To understand To hear To wait for To expect. To lose* Entender * 2. Comprender 2. Oir * 3. Sentir * 3 (In speaking of noise , Aguardar. Esperar Perder * 2. Do you understand me ? I do understand you. Have you understood the man ? I have understood him. I hear you, but I do not understand you. I Me comprende V ? I Me entiende V. ? Yo le comprendo d V Yo le entiendo d V. I Ha entendido V. al hombre ? Yo le he comprendido. Yo oigo d V., pero no le comprorido, (or entiendo.) The noise. The wind. Ihe noise (roaring) of the wind. Do you hear the roaring of the wind ? I do hear it. To bark. The barking. Have you heard the barking of the dogs? I have heard it. Some one. Somebody. Do you wait for somebody ? Do you expect some one ? Do you expect something? Do you wait for my brother ? I am waiting for him. Do you expect some friends 7 I do expect some here. El ruido. El estruendo. El estrepito El viento. El susurro (or el bramido el estru- endo) del viento. iOye V. (oi siente V,) el susurm del viento ? Si, le oigo. Si, le siento. Ladrar 1. El ladrido. i Ha oido V los ladridos de los pei ros ? Los he oido. Alguien. Alguno. I Aguarda V. d alguien, (d aijiuno?) I Espera V. d alguien, (d alguno?) ^ Espera V. algo, (alguna cosa'^) I Aguarda V. d mi hermano ? Yo le estoy aguardando. I Espera V. d algunos amigos ? Yo aguardo d algunos aqui. How much };as your brother lost He has lost about one dollar. I have lost more than he. I Cuanto ha perdido su hermano de V.? Ha perdido cerca de an peso. Yo he perdido mas que ^1. THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. 137 To remain* The nobleman Noblemen. Gentle. Pretty- Gentle. Tame. Where has the nobleman remained He has remained at home. Have you remained with him With. With me. Nobody. No one. What, (that which.) The pauper. I Quedarse 1, (reflective.) C El hidalgo < El gentilhombre. ^ El noble. Hidalgos. Gentilhombres Nojlea Gracioso. Bonito. Benigno. Manso, (in speaking of animals.) ? I Donde se ha quedado el hidalgo ? Se ha quedado en casa. I Se ha quedado V. con ? Con. Conmigo. Nadie. Ninguno Lo que. El pobro. EXERCISES.. 111 . Do you promise me to come to the ball ? — I do promise you. — Have I promised you any thing ? — You have promised me nothing. — What nas my father promised you ? — He has promised me a fine book. — Have you received it ? — Not yet. — Do you give me what (lo que) you have promised me ? — I give it you. — Has your friend received muc. money ? — He has received but little. — How much has he received ? — He has received but one dollar. — How much money have you given to my son ? — I have given him thirty shillings. — Have you not promised him more ? — I have given him what I promised him. — Have you any Spanish money ? — I have some. — What money have you ? — I have dollars, shillings, and farthings. — How many sixpences are there in a shilling ? — There are two sixpences in a shilling. — Have you any six- pences ? — I have a few. — How many sixpences are there in a shilling ? — There are two. — And how many are there in a dollar ? — Sixteen. — Will you lend me your coat ? — I will lend it you, but it is v/orn out. — Are your shoes worn out ? — They are not worn out. — Will you lend them to my brother ? — I will lend them to him. — To whom have you lent your hat ? — I have not lent it ; I have given it to somebody.— To whom have you given it ? — I have given it to a pauper. 112 . Does your little brother already know how to spell ? — He does know. — Does he spell well ? — He does spell well. — How has youi little boy spelt ? — He has spelt so-so. — How have your children written their exercises ? — They have written them badly. — Has my 138 THIRTY-FIFTH LESSOH. neighbor lent you his gloves ? — He has refused to lend them to me.— Do you know Spanish ? — I know it. — Does your son speak Italian ?— He speaks it well. — How do your friends speak ? — They do not speak badly. — Do they listen to what you tell them ? — They listen to it.~ How hast thou learned English ? — I have learned it in this manner.— Have you called me ? — 1 have not called you, but I have called youi brother. — Is he come ? — Not yet. — Where did you wet your clothes ? —I wetted them in the garden. — Will you put them to dry ? — I have already put them to dry. — Does the nobleman wish to give me any thing to do ? — He wishes to give you something to do. — How old arc you ? — 1 am hardly eighteen years old. — How old is your brother ? — He is twenty years old. — Are you as old as he ? — I am not so old. — How old art thou ? — I am about twelve years old. — Am I younger thar. you ? — I do not know. — How old is our neighbor? — He is not quite thirty years old. — Are our friends as young as we? — Tney are older than we. — How old are they ? — The one is nineteen, and the other is twenty years old. — Is your father as old as mine ? — He is older than yours. 113 . Have you read my book ? — I have not quite read it yet. — Has your friend finished his books ? — He has almost finished them. — Do you understand me ? — I do understand you. — Does the Frenchman under- stand us ? — He does understand us. — Do you understand what we are telling you ? — We do understand it. — Dost thou understand Spanish ? — I do not understand it yet, but I am learning it. — Do we understand the English ? — We do not understand them. — Do the English under- stand us ? — They do understand us. — Do we understand them ? — We hardly understand them. — Do you hear any noise ? — 1 hear nothing. — Have you heard the roaring of the wind ? — I have heard it. — What do you hear? — I hear the barking of the dogs. — Whose (Lesson XXIX.) dog is this ? — It is the dog of the Scotchman. — Has your father lost as much money as I ? — He has lost more than you. — How much hav^c I lost ? — You have hardly lost a dollar. — Did your friends remain at the ball ? — They remained there. — Do you know as much as the English physician ? — I do ncit know as much as he. — How many books have you read ? — I have almost read two. — Do you wait for any one ? —I wait for no one. — Are you waiting for the man whom I saw this morning ? — I am waiting for him. — Art thou waiting for thy book ? — I am waiting for it. — Do you expect your father this evening ? — I dc i!‘xpect him — ^Do you expect some friends ? — I do expect some. THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. 139 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON . — Leccion Trigesima ^exta. To heat Beaten. Tc bite. Bitten. { Golpear 1. Golpeado. Apulear 1. Apaleado t Dar * 1. Dado. Pegar 1, (familiar.) 1 Morder ^ 2. Murdido Why? Why do you beat the dog? Because. I beat it, because it has bitten me. I Porque ? ^ Porque golpea V el perro ? Porque. Le golpeo (le doy) porque me ha mordido. To owe. Owed. How much do you owe me ? •* owe you fifty dollars. How much does this man owe you ? He owes me six shillings. Do our neighbors owe as much as we? We owe more than they. How much dost thou owe ? Two hundred dollars. Five hundred dollars. Oue thousand dollars. A hundred. One hundred. Deher 2. Dehido. I Cuanto me debe V 1 Yo le debo d V. cincuenta pesos, (or duros.) I Cuanto debe d V. este hombre ? El me debe seis reales. I Deben nuestros vecinos tanto conio nosotros ? Debemos mas que ellos I Cuanto debes tii ? Doscientos pesos. Quinientos pesos. Mil pesos. Ciento. 01)3. CientOf (hundred,> when immediately followed by a noun, dro|»s the last syllable ; as, There are places for one hundred men, and for one hundred women — Hay plazas para cien homhreSy para cien mujcres. The numeral adjectives doscientos^ &c., retain the syllable, but change its lermination to agree with the noun they refer to ; as, doscientos bueyes, doscientas vacas. To have to To he to. I am to. Where are you to go this morning ? I am iu gu to tho warenouse. Is your brother to come here to-day ? Soon. Shortly. He is to come here soon Tener que. Deher. Haber de. He de. t ^ A donde ha de ir V. esta man ana ? •f He de ir al almacen. t I Ha de venir hoy aqui su hermanc de V.? Pronto. LuegOfprontamente. ( t 6l ha de venir aqui pronto. 140 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. To return, (to come back.) A-t what o’clock do you return from market ? I return at twelve o’clock. Does the servant return early from the warehouse 1 [la returns at six o’clock in the morning. At nine o’clock in the morning. At five o’clock in the evening At eleven o’clock at night ! Volver * 2. Vuelto. I A que hora vuelve V. del mercaco (de la plaza?) Yo vuelvo d, las doce I Vuelve el criado temprano drj m macen ? V uelve a las seis de la manana t A las jiueve de la manana. t A las cinco de la tarde t A las once de la noche How long 7 During. For, (relating to time.) EIow long has he remained there ; A minute. An hour. A day. A month. A year. The summer. The winter. During the summer. For one month. To live, ) To remain, ) To reside. To dwell. I I Cuanto tiempo ? S Durante. Mientras, todo el, toda la. For. Durante. [Cuanto tiempo se ha quedadt. atia Un minuto. Una hora, (fern.) Un dia. Un mes Un ano. El estio. El verano El invierno Durante el verano. For un mes. 5 Vivir, ) Parar, ^ Residir. Morar Where do you live ? I live in Troy-street, number one hundred and twenty-two. Where did your brother live ? Where has your brother lived ? He lived in Rivoli-street — he has lived in Rivoli-street — number forty- nine. Dost thou live at thy brother’s house ? I do not live at his, but at my father’s house. Does your friend still live whore I have lived ? fie liven no longer where you lived. He lives no longer where you have lived. I En donde vive V. ? Yo vivo en la calle de Troya, mlmor*' ciento vointidos. I En donde ha vivido su hcrmano de V.? Ha vivido en la calle de Rivoli, mi mero cuarenta y nueve. [Vives tii en casa de tu hermano? Yo no paro en la casa de mi herma- no, pero vivo en casa do mi padre [Vive todavia su amigo de V en donde yo he vivido ? Ya no vive mas en donde V ha vivido THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON 141 No longer. Do you speak to that man ? [ speak to him no longer. (low long have you been speaking to that man ? I have spoken to him for two hours. Did you remain long with my father? Have you remained long with my father ? 1 remained with him an hour. Long, (relating to time.) Not long, (relating to time.) The number. Other. Others. 00 you see the men whom I see ? 1 do not see those whom you see, but I see others. Ya no — mas. I Habla V. d ese hombre Ya (yo) no le hablo mas. ^Cuauto tiempo ha estado V na blando d, este hombre ? Yo le he hablado durante dos hoi as I Ha parado V. largo (or mucho) tiempo en casa de mi padre ? t Me detuve una hoia en su casa. Largo tiempo. Mucho tiempo. No mucho (largo) tiempo. El numero. Otro. Otros. [ Ve V. d los hombres que yc reo 1 Yo no veo d los que V vd, pero veo I d otros. EXERCISES. 114 . Why do you not drink ? — I do not drink because I am not thirsty. — Why do you pick up this nail ? — I pick it up because I want it. — Wh^ do you lend money to this man ? — I lend him money because he wants some. — Why does your brother study ? — He studies, because he wishes to learn Spanish. — Has your cousin drunk already ? — He has not yet drunk, because he has not yet been thirsty. — Does the servant show you the floor which he sweeps ? — He does not show me that which he sweeps now, but that which he swept (he has swept) yesterday. — Why do you love that man ? — I love him, because he is good. — Why does your neighbor beat his dog ? — Because it has bitten his boy. — Why do our friends love us ? — They love us because we are good. — Why do you bring me wine ? — I bring you some because you are thirsty. — WTiy does the sailor drink ? — He drinks because he is thirsty. — Do you see the sailor who is in the ship ? — I do not see the one who is in the ship, but the one who is in the market. — Do you read the books which my father has given you ? — I do read them. — Do you understand them ? — I understand them so-so. — Do you know the Italians whom we know ? — We do not know those whom you know, but we know others. — Does the shoemaker mend the shoes which vou have sent him ? — ^He does not mend them, because tl ley arc vorn out. 142 THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 115 . Is your servant returned from market ?~He is not yet returned.— How long do you intend to remain at the ball ? — I intend to remain there a few minutes. — How long did the Frenchman remain with you ? — He remained with me for two hours. — How long did your brothers remain in town, (Ja ciudad ?) — They remained there (en ella) during the winter. — Do you intend to remain long with us ? — I intend to remain with you during the summer. — How much do I owe you ? — You do not owe me much. — How much do you owe your tailor? — I owe him eighty dollars. — How much dost thou owe thy shoemaker ? — I owe him already eighty-five shillings. — Do I owe you any thing ? — You owe me nothing. — How much does the Englishman owe vou ? — He owes me more than you. — Do the English owe as much as the Spaniards ? — Not quite so much. — Do I owe you as much as my brother? — You owe me more than he. — Do our friends owe you as much as we ? — They owe me less than you. — How much do they owe you ? — They owe me two hundred and fifty dollars. — How much do we owe you ? — You owe me three hundred dollars. Why do you give money to the merchant ? — I give him_some, be- cause he has sold me something. — Where are you to go ? — I am to go to the market. — Is your friend to come hither to-day ? — He is to come hither. — When is he to come hither? — He is to come hither soon. — When are our sons to go to the play ? — They are to go (there) to-night. — When are they to return (from it ?) — They are to return from it at half-past ten. — When are you to go to the physician ? — I am to go to him at ten o’clock at night. — When is your son to return from the painter’s ? — He is to return from him at five o’clock In the evening. — Where do you live ? — I live m Rivoli-street, number forty-seven. — Where does your father live ? — He lives at his friend’s house. — Where do your brothers live? — They live in jWilliam-street, number one nundred and twenty. — Dost thou live at thy brother’s house ? — I live at his house. — Where does he live at present ? — He lives at his father’s house. — Do you still live in Broadway? — Yes, Sir. — ^Does your friend live in John-street ? — No, Sir. THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON . — Leccion Trigesima scptima. 116 . How long ? Till Until THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 143 Till twelve o’clock, (till noon.) Till to-morrow. Till the day after to-morrow Till Sunday Till Monday. Till this evening. Till evening. Until morning. Until the next day. Until that day. Until that moment. Till now. Hitherto Until then. Then. ' Ilasta medio dia, (las doce del dia.) Hasta manana. Hasta pasado manana Hasta el Domingo. Hasta el Lunes Hasta esta tarde, Hasta la tarde. Hasta la manana. Hasta el dia siguiente Hasta aquel dia. Hasta aquel memento Hasta ahora. Hasta aqut ^ I Hasta entdnces. ' Ent6nces Tuesday. Wednesday. Thursday. Friday Saturday. El Miirtes. El Midrcoles El Jueves. El Viernes. El Sdbado. Ohs. A. The names of the days of the week, months, and seasons of (he year, are of the masculine gender, except la primacera, the spring, which is feminine. ^ Till my return. Till I return. Till my brother’s return. Till my brother returns. Till four o’clock in the morning Till midnight, (twelve o’clock at night.) The return, (or .returning — corrlihg back.y Hasta mi vuelta. t Hasta que yo vuelva. Hasta la vuelta de mi Lermano. t Hasta las cuatro de la manana. Hasta media noche, (las doce de 1& noche.) La vuelta, (fern.) How long did you remain at my father’s house H I remained at his house till eleven o’clock at night. One. People. They. Any one. t I Hasta que hora se ha quedadr- (ha estado) V. en casa de mi padre ? Yo me he quedado (yo he estado) hasta las once de la noche. Se ('or a verb in the third person.) Ohs. B. They, people, any^one, one, not referring to any person already mentioned, but used in a general and unlimited sense, are rendered by se, translating the verb In the third person singular, or by the third person plural of the verb without any pronoun. One may also be translated as, One is not always master of his passions — Uno no es siempre duenj de 9US acciones, 144 THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. Have they brought my shoes? They have brought them. They have not brought them. What have they said ? They have said nothing. What have they done ? They have done nothing. To he willing, (to wish.) Been willing, (wished.) Have they been willing to mend my coat ? They have not been willing to mend it. To he able, (can.) Been able, (could.) Have they been able to find books ? They could not find them Can they find them now ? One cannot find them. They cannot find them Can you read, (are you able?) I cannot read, (I am not able.) I Han traido mis zanatos ? Los han traido. No los han traido. I Que se ha drcno ? ^ Que han dicho? Nada se ha dicho. Nada han dicho. I Que se ha hecho ? I Que han hecho ? Nada se ha hecho. Nada han hecho. Querer * 2. Querido. ^ I Han querido remendar mi veslido 1 ^ I Han querido componer mi vestido? I No han querido remendarle, (con. I ponerle.) ( Poder * 2. Podido. \ Saber, Sahido. the ( t ^ Se han podido hallar los librosV ) I Han podido hallar los libros < t No se han podido hallar. ( No han podido hallarlos. ^ t ^ Se pueden hallar ahora ? ( I Pueden hallarlos ahora ? ( No se pueden hallar. ( No pueden hallarlos. I t I Sabe V. leer ? 1 t Yo no sc leer. They, (meaning one.) One. Can they do what they wish ? Can one do what he wishes ? They do what they can, but not what they wdsh. One does what he can, but not what ho wishes. I i/no, (in a general unlimited sense ; I I Puede hacer uno lo que quiere ? ^ Hacen lo que pueden, pero no lo que quieren. Se hace lo que se puede, pero no lo que se quiere. Uno hace lo que puede, pero no lo que quiere. What is said new ? Nothing new is said. Wine is sold here. Spanish is spoken here. t I Que se dice de nuevo { t No se dice nada nuevo, (de nuevo.' t Aqm se vende vino, t Aquf se habla Espanol THIRTY -SE ;ENTH LESSON. 145 Obs C. To form these tiiid similar sentences, in which a p&ssivo verb ia English is made use of, the Spaniards use the reflective pronoun se and a ?erb in the third person. Something new. Any thing new. Nothing new. Not any thing new. New, My new coat. My new friend. To brush This me man Those fine trees Algo (de) nuevo Nada ^de) nuevo Nuevo Mi vestido nuevo. Mi nuevo amigo. Acepillar, Acepillad^. Este hermoso hombre. Aquellos hermosos drboles. Do they believe that I They do not believe it Do they speak of that ? They do speak of it They do not speak of it I Se cree eso ? i Cteeii eso ? No se cree eso. No lo creen. I Se habla de eso ? Si, se habla de ello. No se habla de ello. (See Lessons XX., XX VI., Obs. E, and Obs., Less. XXXIII ) Thread. Father and son. French and Italian. 01 s. D. Y (and) changes into e Hilo. Padre 6 hi jo. Frances 6 Italiano. before nouns beginning with t or ht. EXERCISES. 117. How long have you been writing ? — I have been writing until mid- night. — How long did I work ? — You worked (have worked) till four o’clock in the morning. — How long did my brother remain with you ? — He remained with me until evening. — How long hast thou been working ? — I have been working till now. — Hast thou still long {largo tiempo) to write ? — I have to write till the day after to-morrow. — ^Has the physician still long to work ? — He has to work till to-morrow. — Am I to remain long here ? — You are to remain here till Sunday. — la my brother to remain long with you ? — He is to remain with us till Monday. — How long are we to work ? — You are to work till the day after to-morrow. — Have you still long to speak ? — I have still an hour to apeak. — ^Did you speak long ? — I spoke (have spoken) till the next day. — ^Did you remain long in my counting-house ? — I remained in il 146 THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. liil this moment. — Have you still long to live at the Frenchman's house ? — I have still long to live at his house. — How long have you still to live at his house ? — Till Tuesday. — Has the servant brushed my coats ? — He has brushed them. — Has he swept the floor ? — He has swept it. — How long did he remain here ? — Till noon. — Does youi friend still live with you ? — He lives with me no longer. — Have vor remained in the garden till now ? — I have remained there till new. 118 . What do you do in the morning ? — 1 read. — And wnat do you do tlien ? — I breakfast and work. — Do you breakfast before you read ? — No, Sir, I read before I breakfast. — Dost thou play instead of work- ing ? — I work instead of playing. — What do you do in the evening ? — I work. — What hast thou done this evening ? — I have brushed youi clothes, and have gone to the theatre. — Didst thou remain long at the theatre ? — I remained (there) but a few minutes. — Are you willing to wait here ? — How long am I to wait ? — You are to wait till my father returns. — Has anybod}^ come ? — Somebody has come. — Have you waited for me long ? — I have waited for you two hours. — Have you been able to read my note? — I have been able to read it. — Have you understood it ? — I have understood it. — Have you shown it to any one ? — I have shown it to no one. — Plave they brought my fine clothes ? — They have not brought them yet. — Have they swept my floor and brushed my clothes ? — Yes, Sir. — What have they said ? — They have said nothing. — What have they done ? — They have done nothing.— ^ Has your little brother been spelling ? — He has not been willing to spell. — Has the merchant’s boy been willing to work ? — He has not been willing. — What has he been willing to do? — He has not been willing to do any thing. 119 . Has the shoemaker been able to mend my shoes ? — He has not teen able to mend them. — Why has he not been able to mend them ? — Because he has had no time. — Have they (se) been able to find my gold buttons ? — They have not been able to find them. — Why has the tailor not mended my coat ? — Because he has no good thread. — Why have you beaten the dog ? — Because it has bitten me. — Why do you drink ? — Because I am thirsty. — What have they wished to say ? — They have not wished to say any thing. — Have they said any thing new ? — They have not said any thing new.^ — What do they (se) say new in the market ? — They say nothing new there. — Do they believe that ? — They do not believe it. — Do they speak of that ? — They dc speak of it. — Do they speak of the man that has been killed ? — They do not speak of him. — Can they do what they wish ? — They do whal THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. . U7 Jiey can ; but tliey do not what they wish.— What have they orought 1 —They have brought your new coat. — Do you like your new friends 1 —I do like them. — Is Spanish spoken here ? — Yes, Sir, Spanish, French, and Italian are spoken here. — What is sold here ? — Spanish Dooks are sold here.— What is said new ?— Nothing new is said.- Do •hey not say that the city (la ciudad) of Mexico has been .aken 1-^ Yes, Sir, they say so. THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— jLeccion Trigesima ociava. How far ? Up to. .4.5 far as. As far as my brother’s. As far as here, hither As far as there, thither As far as London. As far as Paris. 1 1 Hasta donde ? ; Hasta. Hasta la casa de mi hermano. Hasta aqui. Hasta alld,. Hasta alii. Hasta Londres. Hasta Paris. To, at, or in Madrid. To, at, or in Cadiz. A' Madrid. En Madrid A' Cadiz. En Cadiz. To, at, or in Spain. To, at, or in England. | A Espana. En Espaha A Inglaterra. En Inglaterr% As far as England. As far as Spain. As far as France. As far as Italy Hasta Inglaterra. Hasta Espana. Hasta Francia. Hasta Italia. As far as my house. As far as the warehouse. As far as the corner. s\s far as the end of the road. As far as the middle of the road Hasta mi casa. Hasta el almacen. Hasta el rincon, (la esquina.) Hasta el fin del camino. Hasta el medio del camino. Above, or up stairs. Below, or down stairs. As far as above. .\s far as below. Arriba. Abajo. Hasta arriba. Hasta abajo. This side. That side. On this side of the road. On that side of the road. De este lado Por este lado. De aquel lado. Por aquel lade, De (por) este lado del camino. De (por) aquel lado del camino. 148 . THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. This side of the road. That side of the road. El lado de acd del caniiiic Mas acd del camiuo. El lado de alld del camino. Mas alia del camiuo Germany. America. Spain. Holland. La Alemania. La America. La Espana. La Holaiida. Obs. A. The names of empires, kingdoms, states, provinces, cities, &c., are generally feminine when they terminate in a, and masculine when they end in other letters ; as, Spain lays in the south of Europe — Espana esid situfida al sur de Europa, But when they refer to a common noun, such as reino, (kingdom,) &c., they are masculine; as. The United States cl America are prosperous — Los Estados Unidos de la America son pros- peros. To go to Spain. | Ir d Espana. ^ ^ Venir de Francia. 7 0 come, to return from France. ^ Francia. Ohs. B. When the names of countries are governed by verbs expressing lo go to, to coine from, to return to or from, they do not admit the article. Do you intend to go to Spain ? Yes, Sir, I intend to go (there) in the spring. Does he return from France ? Vo, Sir, he returns from Germany. I Piensa V. ir d Espana ? Si, sehor, yo pienso ir en la prima vera, (fern.) I V uelve (dl) de Francia ? No, senor, (dl) vuelve de Alemania To go on one side. To go on the middle. The middle, half. The well. The cask. The castle Ir por un lado, Ir por el medio El medio. La mitad, (la media) El pozo. El barril. El tonel. El Castillo. To travel. To travel in, {through.) Do you go to Paris ? Do you travel to Paris ? I travel (I go) there. Is he gone to England ? He is gone there. How far is he gone ? How far has he travelled ? He is gone as far as Siberia. Viajar 1. Caminar 1. Ir * 3. Viajar en {por.) i Va V. d Paris ? I Si, voy alld. Si, voy d Pa^’a. I i Ha ido el d Inglaterra 1 { Si, ha ido alld. Ha ido d Inglaterra. I Hasta donde ha ido ? I Hasta donde ha viajado 7 El ha ido hasta Siberia. THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 149 To steal. To steal something from some one. Hare they stolen your hat from you ? Fhey have stolen it from mo. Has the man stolen the books from you? tie has stolen them from me. ^Vliat have they stolen from you ^ All. All the wine. All the books. All the men. Rohar 1. Hurtar 1. Robar algo {algun.j cosa) d alguno. d uno. t i Lo ban robado d V. el sombrero 1 t Me lo han robado. 1 1 Te ha robado los libros el horo« bre ? t El me los ha robado. t i Que le han robado d V ? Todo. To do Si (pi.) Todo el vino. Todos los libros. Todos los hombres. How do you spell this word ? How is this word written ? It is written thus. The word. My word. This word. ( I Como deletrea V. esta palabra ? t ^ Como se deletrea esta palabra? ( t ^ Como se escribe esta palabra ? t Se escribe asi. De esta manera. La palabra, (fcm.) Mi palabra. Esta palabra. To dye. To color. To dy© black. To dye red To dye green. To dye blue. To dye yellow. Ohs. C. Adjectives denoting color My blue coat. His new watch. His round hat. This white hat. 00 you dye your coat blue ? 1 dye it green. What color will you dye your coat? I will dye it blue. The dyer. To get dyed. Got dyed. What color have you had your hat dyed? I liave got it dyed white. Tehir * 3. TeTddOi (past part.'l Color ar 1. t Tenir de negro. t Tehir de Colorado, (de encarnado ) t Tehir de verde. t Tehir de azul. t Tehir de amarillo. or shape are placed after the noun. Mi vestido azul. Su reloj nuevo. Su sombrero redondo. Este sombrero bianco, t I Tine V. su vestido de azul ? t Yo le tiho de verde. t i De que color quiero V. tenir sa vestido ? t Yo le quiero tehir de azul El tlntorero. t Hacer tehir. Hecho tehir t Mandar tehir. Mandado tehir I De que color ha hecho V. tehir er sombrero ? t Le he hecho tehir de bianco. 150 THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSOS. Red. Brown. Gray. Colorado. Rojo. Encamado Moreno. Pardo Caf4 Pardo. Gris Poor. The stocking, the stockings. My thread stockings. The spring. Pobre. La media, las medias, (feminine ' Mis medias de hilo. La nrimavera, (feminine ) EXERCISES. 120 . How far have you travelled ? — I have travelled a^ far as Germany. - -Has he travelled as far as Italy ? — He has travelled as far as America. — How far have the Spaniards gone ? — They have gone as far as London. — How far has this poor man come ? — He has come as far as here. — Has he come as far as your house ? — He has come as far as my father’s. — Have they stolen any thing from you ? — They have stolen all the good wine from me. — Have they stolen any thing from your father? — They have stolen all his good books from him. — Dost thou steal any thing ? — I steal nothing. — Hast thou ever stolen any thing ? — I have never stolen any thing. — Have they stolen your good clothes from you ? — They have stolen them from me. — What have they stolen from me ? — They have stolen all the good books from you. — Have tliey ever stolen any thing from us ? — They have never stolen any thing from us. — How far do you wish to go ? — I wish to go as far as the wood. — Have you gone as far as there ? — I have not gone as far as there. — How far does your brothei wish to go ? — He wishes to go as far as the end of that road. — Where art thou going ? — I am going to the market. — How far are we going ? — We are going as far as the theatre. — Are you going as far as the well ? — I am going as far as the castle. — Has the carpenter drunk all the wine ? — He has drunk it. — Has your little boy torn all his books ? — He has torn them all. — Wh} has he torn them ? — Because he does not wish to study. 121 . How much have you lost ? — I have lost all my money. — Do you know where my father is ? — I do not know. — Have you not seen my book ? — I have not seen it. — Do you know how this word is written ? — It is written thus. — Do you dye any thing ? — I dye my hat. — What color do you dye it ? — I dye it black. — What color do you dye your clothes ? — 1 dye them yellow. — Do you get your thread dyed ? — I get it dyed. — What color do you get it dyed ? — I get it dyed green.-— What color dost thou get thy thread stockings dyed ? — I got them dvod THIRrsr-EIGHTH LESSON. 151 red.— -Does your son get his cloth dyed ?— He dues get it dyed.— Does he get it dyed red ? — He gets it dyed gray. — Wliat color have your friends got their coats dyed ?— They have got them (las) dyed green.— What color have the Italians had their hats dyed ?— They have had them dyed brown. — Have you a white hat ? — 1 have a black one. — What hat has the nobleman ? — He has two hats ; a white one ind a black one. — What hat has the American ? — He has a round hat. Have I a white hat? — You have several white and black hats. — Has your dyer already dyed your cloth ? — He aas dyed it. — What color ha'i he dyed it ?— He has dyed it green. — Do you travel sometimes ?— I travel often. — Where do you intend to go to this summer ? — I intend to go to Paris. — Do you not go to Italy ? — I do go tliither. — Hast thou sometimes travelled ? — I have never travelled. — Have your friends a mind to go to Holland ? — They have a mind to go (thither.) — When do they intend to depart ? — They intend to depart the dav after to- morrow. 122 . Is your brother already gone to Spain ? — He is not yet gone (thither.) — Have you travelled in Spain ? — I have travelled there. — When do you depart ? — I depart to-morrow. — At what o’clock ? — At five o’clock in the morning. — What have the Spaniards done ? — They have burnt all our good ships. — Have you finished all your exercises ? — I have finished them all. — How far is the Frenchman come ? — He is come as far as the middle of the road. — Where does your friend live ? — He lives on this side of the road. — Where is your warehouse ?* — It is on that side of the road. — Where is the counting-house of our friend ? — It is on that side of the theatre. — Is the garden of your friend on this or that side of the wood ? — It is on that side. — Is our warehouse not on tliis side of the road ? — It is on this side. — Where have you been this morning ? — I have been at the castle. — How long did you remain at the castle ? — I remained tnere an hour. — Is your brother below or above ? — He is above. — How far has your servant carried my trunk ? — He has carried it as far as my warehouse. — Has he come aa far as my house ? — No, Sir. — Have you been in France ? — I have been (there) several times. — Have your children already been in Germany ? —They have not yet been (there,) but I intend to send them tliere in tiio spring. — Will you go on tliis or that side of the road ? — I will go neither on this nor that side ; I will go in the middle of the road.— How far does tliis road lead ? — It leads as far as London. Fct the use of the verb to see Lesson XVIII., page 59. 152 THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. THIRTY-NINTH LESSON.— Leccion Trigesima noTuz. To be necessary. Is it necessary*? Must I ? Must we? It is necessary Must. i Ser menester^ > an irregula. impel ( Ser necesariOf y soiial verb. 1 1 i Es menester ? ^ Es necesario ? I t Es menester. Es necesario 1 3 it necessary to go to the market? M usl I, must we, go to market ? U is not necessary to go (there.) VViiat must be done to learn Spanish ? It is necessary to study a great deal. Musi, (implying obligation.) What must I do? You' must stay still Where must he go? He must go home. We must. You must. What must wo do? W’^e must write the letter. You must write your exercises. < Must have. ) To want. To need. ^ t ^ Es menester ir al mercado? t ^ Es necesario ir al mere ado ? No es menester (necesario) ir (alia.) I Que es menester (necesario) hacei para aprender el Espahol ? Es menester estudiar mucliisimo. Deber. Ser menester. Ser necesario [Que debo yo hacer? t I Que es menester (necesario) ha* cer ? V. debe quedarsequieto, (estar quieto.) t Es menester (necesario) quedarse quieto, (estar quieto.) I Adonde debe ir ^1 ? debe ir d, su casa, (d casa ) Debemos. t Es menester Es necesaiio. VV. deben. t Es menester. Es necesario I Que debemos hacer? I Que es menester (necesario) hacei i Debemos escribir la carta, t Es menester escribir la carta, t Es necesario escribir la carta. VV. deben escribir sus temas, (mas.) t Es menester (necesario) escribir sus temas. Haber menester. Necesitar. O* Mind that have is not translated. What must you have ? I must have some money. Must you have one shilling? t I Que ha menester V. ? I Que necesita V. ? t He menester algun dinera Necesito algun dinero. t I Ha menester V. un real [Necesita V. un real? THIRTY -NINTH LESSON. 153 iHust you have a great deal i must have a great deal I want only one penny. Is that all you want ? That is all I want (low much must thou have 7 How much dost thou want ? I want only a shilling. flow much must your brother have? fie wants only two shillings. t I Ha menester V. muchisimc ? t i^Necesita V. muchisiino? t lie menester muchisiino. t Necesito muchisiino. t Solo he menester un cuarto. t Solo necesito un cuarto. r t ^ Es cuanto ha menester V.? < t ^ No ha menester V. mas qu#* eso ( t iNo necesita /. mas que eso? ^ t Eso es cuanto he menester. ( t Eso es cuanto necesito. t I Cuanto has menester ? t I Cuanto necesitas ? t No he menester mas que un reaL t No necesito mas de un real, t ^Cuanto ha menester su henrano de V.? t ^Cuanto necesita su hermano de V.? t Ha menester dos reales sola- mente. t Necesita dos reales solamente. Have >ou wnat you want? I have what I want. He has what he wants. They have what they want 5 I Tiene V. lo que ha menester ? I I Tiene V. lo que necesita ? Tengo lo que he menester, (or ue cesito.) Tiene lo que ha menester, (or ne^ cesita.) Tieiien lo que han menester, (or no- cesitan, quieren.) More. No more. Do you not wart more ? I do not want more. He does not want more Mas. No — mas. I No ha menester V. (or no necesita V., or no quiere V.) mas? No he menester (or no necesito, no quiero) mas. No ha menester (or no necesita^ mas. To he to — must. To have to — must. ^hat am I to do ? Vou must work. Haber de. Tener que, I Que he de hacer ? V. ha de trabajar. 154 THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. Arn 1 to go there ? I i He de ir yo alld, ? You may, or you can go there. | V. puede ir alld. May — can. To he worth tiow much can that horse be worth? fie may be v/orth a hundred dollars flow much are you worth? We cannot be worth much, lie may be worth something Mow much is that gun worth ? It is worth but one dollar. How much is that worth ? That is not worth much. That is not worth any thing. This is worth more than that The one is not worth so much as the other. To he oetteTf (worth more.) Am I as good as my brother ? You are better than he. I am not so good as you. To give hack. To restore. Does ho restore you your book ? ) le does restore it to me I Poder * 2. Valer * 2. Poseer t Tener. I Cuanto puede Valer ese Cuba lie Puede valer cien pesos, t I Cuanto tienen VV. ? t No podemos tener mucho. t El puede tener algun caudal I Cuanto vale ese fusil ? No vale mas que un peso. I Cuanto vale eso ? Eso no vale mucho. Eso no vale nada. Este vale mas que aquel. El uno no vale tanto como el otro I t Valer mas, {ser mejor.) r t Valgo yo tanto como mi her < mano ? t I Soy tan bueno como mi hermano ? t V. vale mas que el. V. es mejor que el. t Yo no valgo tanto como V. Yo no soy tan bueno como V Volver * 2. Restituir (See veiDs in utr.] t [ Le vuelve €[ d V. el libro ? t ^ Le restituye €\ d V. el libro ? El me le vuelve. 6l me le restituye. t i Le ha vuelto d V. los guantes 1 t ^ Le ha restituido d V. los guanU& i 6l me los ha vuelto. ^^1 mo los ha restituido. fs 2 .i he given you bacK your gloves? lie has given me them back. Has your brother already com- | i Ha empezado ya sua temas el hor- monced his exercises ? mano de V ? He has not yet commenced them. i No los ha empezado todavfa. THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. 155 Tlie present, (gift.) flave you received a present ? I have received several. Have you received the books ? S liEve received them. From whom 7 From whom have you received pres- ents ? From my friends. r El regalo. < El presente. L La dddiva, (fern.) I I Ha recibido V. un legalo, (un pre- I sente) ? He recibido algunos. I Ha recibido V. los libros 7 Yo los he recibido. I ^ De quien ? [ I De quien ha recibido V. presenlcfci (regalos) ? 1 Do mis amigos. Whence 7 TWiere from 7 Where do you come from ? [ come from the garden. Where is he come from ? He is come from the theatre. Where have they come from ? De donde 7 I De donde viene V. ? Yo vengo del jardin. I De donde ha venido (di) ? (El) ha venido del teatro. I De donde han venido (ellos) ? From which 7 From which f The same. From which garden do you come ? From mine. # From which ? From the same v-’here you go. The same one. The same ones. EXERCISES. 123. Is it necessary to go to the market ? — It is not necessary to go thither. — What must you buy ? — I must buy some mutton. — Must 1 go for some wine ? — You must go for some. — Am I to go to the ball ? — You must go.— When must I go? — You must go this evening. — Must I go for the carpenter? — You must go for him. — What must be done to learn Russian ? — It is necessary to study a great deal. — Is It necessary to study a great deal to learn German ? — It is neces- sary to study a great deal. — What must I do? — You must buy u good book. — What is ne to do ? — He must stay still. — What are we tc ^ Del cual 7 ) (not followed by I De los cuales 7 \ a noun.) I De que 7 (followed by a noun.) El mismo — los mismos, I De que jardin viene V. ? Del mio. I Del cual ? Del mismo adonde V. va. El mismo. Los mismos. 156 THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. do ? — You must work. — ^IMust you work much in ordei to learn the Arabic ? — I must work much to learn it. — Why must I go to market \ — You must go to buy some mutton ana wine. — Must 1 go anywhere? — Thou mast go into the garden. — Must I send for any thing ? — ThoL must send tor some wine. — What must I do? — You must vvritea^ exercise. — To whom must I write a letter? — You mus^ vrite one tt your friend. — What do you want, Sir? — I want some cloth. — How much is that hat worth ? — It is worth four dollars. — Do you want aii} stockings? — I want some, (algunas .) — How much are these stockhigifi worth ? — They are worth two shillings. — Is that all you want ? — That is all. — Do you not want any shoes ? — I do not want any. — Dost thou want much money? — I want much. — How much must thou have? — I must have five dollars. — How mucti does your broil er want ? — He wants but sixpence. — Does he not want more ? — He does not want more. — Does your friend want more ? — He does not want so much^as I. — What do you want ? — I want money and clothes. — Have you now what you want ? — I have what I want.-^Has your father what he wants ? — He has what he wants 124 . Have the neighbor’s boys given you back your books ? — They have given me them back. — When did they give them back to you ? — Yester- day. — Has your little boy received a present ? — He has received several. — From whom has he received any ? — From my father and from yours. — Have you received any presents ? — I have received some. — What presents have you received ? — I have received fine presents. — Do you come from the garden ? — I do not come from the garden, but from the warehouse. — Where are you going to ? — I am going to the garden. — Whence does the Irishman come ? — He comes from the garden. — Does he come from the garden from which you come ? — He does not come from the same. — From which garden does he come ? — He comes from the garden of our old friend. — Whence comes your boy? — From the play. — How much may that horse oe worth ? — It may be worth five hundred dollars. — Is this book worth an much as that ? — It is worth more. — How much is my gun worth ?— » It is worth as much as that of your friend. — Are your horses worth os much as those of the English ? — They are not worth so much.— Hcv-’ nuch is that knife worth ? — It is worth nothing. 125 . Is your servant as good as mine ? — He is better than youni. — Are you as good as your brother ? — He is better than I. — Art thou is good as ihv friend ? — I am as good as he. — Are we as good as our neigh rOKTIETH LESSON. 157 ^i>rs ? — We are better than they. — Is your umordla worth as much as mine? — It is not worth so much. — Why is it not worth so much as mine? — Because it is not so fine as yours. — How much is that gun wortli ? — It is not worth much. — Do you wish to sell your horse ? — I do wish to sell it. — How much is it worth ? — It is worth two hundred dollars. — Do you wish to buy it? — I have bought one already. — Does your father intend to buy a horse ? — He does intend to buy one, but not yours. — Have your brothers commenced their exercises ? — They have commenced them. — Have you received your letters ? — Wc have not yet received them, (las.) — Have we what we want ? — We have not what we want. — What do we want ? — We want fine horses, .several servants, and much money. — Is mat all we want ?- -That is all we want. — What must I do? — You must write. — To whom must I write? — You must write to your friend. — Where is he? — He is in America. — Where am I to go? — You may go to France. — How far must I go ? — You may go as far as Paris. — Which dogs has your servant beaten ? — He has beaten those that have made much noise. FORTIETH LESSON. — Leccion Cuadragesima. OF THE IMPERFECT. There are in Spanisli two tenses corresponding to the English Imperfect viz : the Imperfect, Preterito Imperfecto^ No. 2 ; and the Preterit, Prete rito Perfecto Remoto, No. 3. The Imperfrcto, No. 2, represents the action as present, or still going on at the time spoken of, and corresponds to the English waSy or were, fol- .owed by the present participle. Example : — I studied my lesson when you came in ; that is, / was studying, id you go to the ball last ii’giit ? k'es, Sir, I went with ycur son and my brotlier 1 Tener, (activo.) 2. r Tenia, tenias, tenia; temamos, .eniais, I tenian. 3. I Tuve, tuviste, tuvo ; tuvimos, tuvis- L teis, tuvi^ron. 1 Ilaber, (auxiliar.) 2 r Habia, habias, habia ; habiamos, j habiais, habian. 3. I Hube, hubiste, hubo ; hubimos, hu- L bisteis, hubieron. I Ser and Estar. ^ r Era, eras, era ; frames, ^rais, eran. 2. < Estaba, estabas, estaba ; estiba- mos, est^lbais, estaban. < fFui, fuiste, fue ; fuimos, fuisteis, I fusion. I Estuve, estuviste, estuvo ; estuvi- ^ I mos, estuvisteis, estuvi^ron. I Hacer. 2. f Hacia, hacias, haeia ; haciamos, ha- J ciais, hacian. 3. I Hice, hiciste, hizo ; hicimos, hiefsteis, t hici^ron. I Poder. 2. f Podia, podias, podia ; podiamos, J podiais, podian. 3. j Pude, pudiste, pudo ; puuimos, pu L dlsteis, pudidron. Anoche. Ayer noche. I Fud V. al baile anoche fjr ayei noche) ? Si, senor, yo lui con su hijo de V v mi hermano. FORTIETH LESSON. 159 Did you stay until the end of the i Se quedarsn VV. hasta ol fia d^‘l ball ? I haile ? No, Sir, we left the room as your | No, senor, dejdmos la sala cuanda brother was coming in. | entraba su hermano de V. Had you any thing to do this morn- ^ Tenia V. algo que hacer esta ma* ing? I nana? I had some letters to write, but I had j Yo tenia que escribir algunas cartas, no paper j pero no tenia papel. Could you not ask for some? | i No podia V. pedir alguno ? i was going to ask for some when | Yo se Ze iba 6. pedir a V. cuando m«* you called me. I llamo. Some ' Le. La. Obs. A. When so7/ie, used in an unlimited sense, is not fcllowed oy a noun, it is rendered by one of the persons Ze, eZ, eZZa, &c.,Ze, Zfl,&c. I have no wine, but I am going to | Yo no tengo vino, pero voy d enviai send for some. j por el. FEMININE SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES DEFINITE ARTICLE FEMININE. The. ( To the. The woman Of the woman. To the woman. The mother. To the sister. )f the. The women. Of the women. To the women. Of the mothers. To the sisters. SINGULAR. La. De la. A la. La mujer. De la mujer. A la mujer. La madre. A la hermana. PLURAL Las. De laa A las. Las mujeres. De las mujeres. A las mujeres. De las madres. A las hermanas. She. They Has she ? She has She has not. Have they ? Tern.) They liave, (fern.) They have not, (fern.) Ella. Ellas. (See Table of Personal PronomOf Less. XX.) I Tiene ella? Ella tiene. Ella no tiene. I Tienen ellas s Ellas tienen. Ellas no tienen POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. Rde The Spanish Possessive Adjectives, or Pronouns, are always alike for both genders ; and they agree in number, not with the possessor, as iu English, but with the thing possessed; or substantive that follows afl^^J diem 160 FORTIETH LESSON, My 1 SINGULAR 1 Mi. PLUKAL. Mis. Thy. Tu. Tus Her. Its Their 1 Su. Sus. Your. \ Vuestro, (mas.) \ Vuestra, (fern.) V uestros. V uestras. Our. \ Nuestro, (mas.). ( Nuestra, (fern.) N uestroe N uestras O* Iri colloquial polite conversation the following are used : { Su, or el — de V., or de VV Sus, or los — de V... or de W (pi.) Su, or la — de V., or de VV. Sus, or las — de V., oi de VV They sold their share, (in stocks.) She sold her houses. The father and his son, or his daughter. The mother and her son, or her daughter. The child and its brother, or its sis- ter. Elios vendidron su accion. Ella vendi6 sus casas. El padre y su hijo, or su hija. La madre y su ;iijo, or su hija El nino y su hermano, or su hcr- mana. My pen. My spoon, liis or her nut. Our hand. Your window. Their door. My pens. My spoons. His or her nuts. Our hands. Your windows. Their doors. SINGULAR. Mi pluma. Mi cuchara. Su nuez Nuestra mano. PLURAL. Mis plumas Mis cucharas Sus nueces. Nuestras manos. C Vuestra ventana. Vuestras ventanas. < La (su) ventana de V., or de VV ^ Las (sus) ventanas de V , or de VV I Su puerta. Sus puertas. Ohs. B. In detached sentences, and in order to avoid ambiffuitv, his is translated dv el; her, de clla ; their, de ellosy or de cllas ; your, (in colloquial polite style,) de T., or de FF., after su or sus ; although these pronouns may he su})pressed. His father. Their books. Your brother. t Su padre de el. El padre do t Los libros de ellos, (de ellas.) t Su hermano de V. t El hermano de V. Mule. All adjectives terminating in o, change it into a to form the inme, and make their plural by adding 5 ; as good — buenOf buenos- bucnii hvenas. FORTIETH LESSON. 161 Virtuous. The virtuous woman. The virtuous women. Virtuoso La mujer virtuosa Las rnujeres virtuosas Oha. C. Adjectives form tlieir plural in conforrr ity with the rule aid iowu for the substant.’vos. (See Less. IX., Page 26, and App.) Rule. Adjectives ending in any other letter but o, are common to lx>th genders. Except a few terminating in an and that add an a for th« feminine. The amiable boy. Is she amiable ? The two sisters are very amiable. El muchacho amable. I Es ella amable ? Las dos hermanas son muy amables Obs. D. Adjectives signifying the natives of a country, or its productions, such as American^ Spaniard^ or Spanish^ terminating in o, change it into a to form the feminine ; those ending in a consonant, add a ; and a few ending in a are the same for both genders. America. American. The American women are hand- some, virtuous, and well educated. Ireland. Irishman. Irish. The female servants in this city are almost all Irishwomen. Which woman? Which women? Which daughter ? Which daughters ? Amdrica. Americapo— Amer^ana Las Americanas son bermpsHf vir- tuosas y bien educadas. Irlanda. Irlandes. Trlaudesa. Las criadas en esta ciudad so*> vasi todas Irlandesas i Que mujer ? i Que raujores f I Que hija ? ^ Quo hijas ? This, or that woman. I Esta 6 esa mujer. These, or those women. | Estas 6 esas rnujeres^ This young lady. These young ladies. That young lady. Those young ladies. Esta senorita. Estas sefioritas. Esa (or aquella) senorita Esas (or aquellas) seiioritaa Tlie hand. The hands. The right hand. The left hand. I have a sore hand. La mano. Las manos La mano derecha. La mano izquierda. t Tengo mala la mano. Ola. E. To havCi followed by a noun expressing that the part of Ihi oody signified by it is afl’ected with pain, c illness, may be translated inU »5panish by Tener dolor de, or by Doler ; when the latter is made use of, die noun representing the part affected is placed in the uominativo, as a mibject, and the person suffering, in the objective case. 16 ^ FORTIETH LESSOJS. The tooth The teeth. Elave you the toothache ? I have the headache. I have a very severe headache 1 feel a pain in my side Ills feet are sore. t La mucla, (ei diente.) t Las muelaSf (los dientes.) t I Tiene V. dolor de mutlae ? Tengo dolor de cabeza Me daele la cabeza. I t Tengo jaqueca. Tengo un doloi enel(or de) costadc Me duele el costado. i Tiene los pies malos The face. 1 La cara. The mouth. La boca The cheek La mejilla. The tongue, the language. La lengua. The door. La puerta The window. La ventana The street. La calle. The town. La ciudad. The stulF. La tela. The old woman La vieja Ohs. F. Common nouns and adjectives ending in a, (excepting those derived from the Greek,) as, clima, climate ; dogma^ &.c ; and also dia- day; map, &c., are generally feminine. (See Appendix.') INDEFINITE A. An. Of a. From. a. To a An industrious girl A happy young lady. An active young woman. ARTICLE FEMININE. Una. De una. A una Una muchacha industriosa. Una sehorita feliz. Una jdven activa. Ohs. G. Common substantives, tile gender by the article. A holy female martyr. Have ycd my pen? No, Madam, I have it not. vVhich bottle have you broken? VVhidi door have you opened? r nouns of one termination distinguish I Una Santa mdrtir. I i Tiene V. mi pluma? No, sehora, yo no la tengo. I I Que botella ha quebrado V 1 ^ I Que puerta ha abierto V. ? ( i Que puerta habeis abierto ? O’ The past participle coming immediately after the verb to have, haber,) admits of no change ; but when it follows the verb to be, (ser, oj it agrees with the subject noun or pronoun in gender and number. FORTIETH LESSON. 168 Which windows have you opened ? Which windows have been opened ? Which letters have you written ? Which letters had been written ? i Que ventaiias ha abierto V. 1 I Que ventanas ban sido ahierlaa ? I Que cartas han escrito VV. ? I Que cartas habian sidi escritas 7 These. Those. Slave you this, or that pen ? I have neither this, nor that. Estas. Esas. Aquellas I Tiene V. esta, 6 esa (or aqueila pluma ? No tengo esta, ni esa, (ni aquella.) It, or her Them. Do you see that woman 1 i see her lave you seen my sisters ? fo, my lady, I have not seen them. To him. To her. To it. To them. Do you speak to my sisters ? I speak to them. Some good water Some, any. A napkin. A towel. Te celebrate. To feast. I La. Las. ^ Ve V. d, esa mu er 1 ^ Veis d esa mujer ? I Yo la veo. (See Less. XX., Table.; I Ha visto V. a mis hermanas ? No, sehora, no las he visto. Le. (See Pronouns, Loss. XX ! Les. ^ Habla V d mis hermanas ? Yo les hablo. ( Alguna agua buena. Un poco dc agua huena. Alguna, algunas, (fern.) Una servilleta. Una toalla. Celebrar 1. Festejar 1. EXERCISES. 126 . How are your brothers ? — They have been very well for these few days, (ultimas dias .) — W here do they reside, (se kalian ?) — They reside n Paris. — Which day of the week do the Turks celebrate ? — They celebrate Friday, but the Christians celebrate Sunday, the Jews Satur- day, and the ne^oes their birthday. — “ Among you country people there are many fools, are there not ?” (no es asi,) asked a philosopher lately (el otro dia) of a peasant. The latter answered, “ Sir, they are to be found in all stations, (estado.^^) “ Fools sometimes tell the truth;” said the philosopher. — Has your sister my gold lace, (galonl ) — She has it not. — What has she ? — She has nothing. — Has your mother any tiling ? — She has a gold fork. — Who has my large bottle ? — Your sister has it. — Do yon sometimes see my mother ? — I see her often. — When did see your sister ? — I saw her a fortnight ago, (kace quiva 164 FORTIETH LESSON. dias .) — Who has my fine nuts ? — Your good sister has them. — Has she also my silver forks ? — She has them not. — Wlio has them Your mother has them. — What fork have you ? — I have my iron fork. — Have your sisters had my pens ? — They have not had them, but i believe that their children have had them. — Why does your brother complain ? — He complains because his right hand aches. — Why dcs you complain ? — I complain because my left hand aches. 127 . Is your sister as old as my mother ? — She is not so oM, but she is taller. — Has your brother purchased any thing ? — He has purchased something. — What has he bought ? — He has bought fine linen and good pens. — Has he not bought some silk stockings ? — He has bought some. — Is your sister writing ? — No, Madam, she is not writing — Why does she not write ? — Because slie has a sore hand. — Why does not the daughter of your neighbor go out ? — She does not go out because she has sore feet. — Why does my sister not speak ? — Because she has a sore mouth. — Hast thou not seen my silver pen ? — I have not seen it. — Does the wife (la mujer) of our shoemaker go out already ? — No, my lady, she does not go out yet, for she is still very ill. — Wliich bottle has your little sister broken ? — She broke the one which my mother bought yesterday. — Have you eaten of my soup or of my mother’s ? — I have eaten neither of yours nor your mother’s, but of that of my good sister. — Have you seen the woman who was with me this morning ? — I have not seen her. — Has your mother hurt herself ? — She has not hurt herself. 128 . Have you a sore nose ? — I have not 8 sore nose, but I have the toothache. — Have you cut your finger ? — No, my lady, (sehora,) I have cut my hand. — Will you give me a pen ? — I will give you one. — Will you have this or that ? — I will have neither. — Which one do you wish to have ? — I wish to have that which your sister has. — Do you wish to have my mother’s good black silk or my sister’s ? — I wish to have neither your mother’s nor your sister’s, but that which you have. — Can you write with this pen ? — I can write with it. — Each (cada) woman thinks herself amiable, and each (cada una) is conceited, (tictie amor pn/pio .) — The same as (sucede d los) men, my dear friend Many a one thinks himself learned who is not so, and many men surpass (exceden) women in vanity. — What is the matter with you ?— Nothing is the matter with me. — Why does your sister complain ?— Because she has a pain in her cheek. — Has your orother a sore hand ? ^ No. but he feels a pain in his side. — Do you open the window ?• FORTY-FIRST LESSON. 165 I open it, because it is too warm. — Which wind, ws has your sister opened ? — She has opened those of the front room, (el cuarto d la calk, — Have you been at the ball of my old acquaintance, (conoculo?)^ I have been there. — Which young ladies have you taken to the ball ? i — I took my sister’s friends there. — Did they dance ? — They danced a good deal. — Did they amuse tliemselves ? — They amused themselves. — Did they remain long at the ball ? — They remained there two hours. —Is this young lady a Turk ? — No, she is a Greek. — Does she speak French ? — She speaks it. — Does she not speak English ? — She speaks it also, but she speaks French better. — Has your sister a companion ? — Shj has one. — Does she like her ? — She likes her very much, for she is very amiable. FORTY-FIRST LESSON. To eat. Eaten. To dine, (eat dinner.) The dinner The breakfast. To eat supper^ (to sup.) The supper After, After me. After him. After you. After my brother . — Leccion Cuadragesima printer a. Comer Comido Comer. La comida. El almuerzo. El desayuno. Ccnar 1 Cenado La cena. Despvcs dcy (prep.) Despues de mi. Despues de el. Despues de V. Despues de S^V Despues de mi hermano. After having spoken. I t Despues de haber hablado. After carving the boiled meat. \ t Despues de trinchar el cocido O* Whenever the present participle in English is preceded by a prepo- sition, it must be translated in Spanish by the present of the infinitive mood ; except when the preposition is by, which is generally omitted, and the present participle translated liter-iliy. After having sold his house. t Despues de haber vendido su cn« j sa. After having been there. | t Despues de haber estado alld. I broke your knife after cutting the | t Yo quebrd el cuchillo de V doa roasted meat. 1 pues de trinchar el asado. To break. Broken. [ have dined earlier than you \Tou have supped late. Romper. Rjmpido, or roto. He comido mas temprano quo V V. ha conancs he pay you for the knives t I ie pays me for them. Pagar (object) d (complement.) t Pagar un caballo d uu hombra t Pagar el vestido al sastre. 1 1 Paga V. los zapatos al zapatero ? t Yo se los pa go. t I Paga el los cuchillos d V ? t El me los paga. To ask for To ask a man for money. I eisk my father for some mcney. Do you ask me for your hat 1 do ask you for it. Pedir * 3 (cbiect) d (complement j t Pedir dinero d un hombre. t Yo pido dinero d mi padre. 1 1 Me pide V. su sombrero ? Yo se le pido d V O’ In Spanish the thing paid or asked for is the object of the srerb, and the person Avho has been paid, or asked, is the complement governed by th© preposition d, to ; but if the person or the thing is only mentioned, that per- son or that thing must be made the object of the Spanish verb. I have paid the tailor. You have paid him. Have you paid the shoemaker ? 1 have paid him. Do you pay w/tat you owe ? Yes, I pay what I owe. Have you paid for your books? I have paid for them. Have you asked for breakfast ? I have asked for it. How much have you paid for them ? I have paid two dollars for them. Do you ask for something ? 1 ask for bread. To ask for, (inquire after.) Dc you ask for somebody ? Yes, Sir, I ask for your brother Do you ask for any thing ^ He pagado al sastre. V. le ha pagado. I Ha pagado V. al zapatero ? Yo le he pagado I Paga V. lo que debe ? Si, yo pago lo que debo. t I Ha pagado V. sus libros ? t Yo los ha pagado. t I Ha pedido V. el almuerzo V t Yo le he pedido. t i A cuanto los ha pagado V ? t Los he pagado d dos pesois. ^ t i Pide V. algo ? ( t Quiere V. algo ? 1 t Pido pan. t Preguntar 1 por. Buscar 1. t Informarse 1 de. Accrca de. I I Pregunta V. por alguno ? I Busca V. d, alguien ? I Si, senor, pregunto por su IiemTano de V. I t I B isca V. alguna cosa? * “ As soon as I arrived at the inn, I asked for supper” — “ Luego qvt Uegue al mcsoUi pedi la cena ” — Gil Blas, translated by Isla, Book 1 Chap. II. FORTY-FIRST LESSON. 167 I aak for the letters. After whom do you inquire ? They inquire after your brother ^be inquires of you he inquire after the boy * J Busco las cartas, t Vengo a buscar las cartas t I Acerca de quicn quiere V. inf or- marse ? f I For quien pregunta V.? I Elios preguntan por su hermanc c2e I V. Ella se informa de V. Ella le pregunta d V. 1 I Se informa el acerca del mucha I cho ? To tryj (to essay, attempt.) Will you try to do that? 1 have tried to do it.., I'ou must try to do it better. I Probar * I d. Procurar 1. I t I Quiere V. probar d hacer eso ? I He probado d hacerlo. { V. debe procurar hacerlo mejor. ^ Debeis procurar hacerlo mejor. To hold. Held. Do you hold my stick ? I do hold it Tener Tenido. Asir * 3 I Tiene V. mi baston Yo le tengo To look for. Are you looking for any thing? Whom are you looking for? I look for a brother of mine. My uncle. My cousin. My relation. 'Fhe parents, (father and mother ) I Buscar. S t I Busca V. algo ? t I Estd V. buscaudo algo? I t ^ A quien busca V. ? I t Yo busco d uu hermano mio. I Mi tio. I Mi primo. I Mi pariente. 1 t Los padres. A brother of mine. A cousin of yours. A relation of his, of hers. A friend of ours. A neighbor of theirs. Obs. Mio, mia; mios, mias, are dressing a person. Examples : — Cost thou come from the garden, ray son? My deal friend.^, you have come late. t Un hermano mio. t Un primo de V., (or suyo.) t Un pariente suyo, (de el, de ella.) t Un amigo nuestro. t Un vecino suyo, (deellos, ellas.) also used without an article in ad I Vienes del jardin, hijo mio ? Queridos amigos mios, VV han ve- nido tarde. 1G8 FORTY-FIRST LESSON. To tryy (to endeavor.) Dues he try to see me ? He tries to see you. Whom does he try to see ? He tries to see an uncle of his. \ Procurar 1. Esforzarsc • I \ Probar * 1. \ I Procura el \ erme ? ( ^ Se esfuerza el d, verme? ) J&l procura ver a V. I 6l se esfuerza para ver d. V. J i A quien procura ver? ^ i A quien se esfuerza d ver ? Procura ver d un tio suyo. Se esfuerza d ver d un tio suya Properly, Properly, Properly. Properly, Properly To do ine^s duty. You write properly. These men du their duty properly. As it should he. As I ought, AuS he ought. As you ought. As they ought. Have you don o j Our task properly ? We have done it properly. It. The duty. The task A glass of wine. A piece of bread. t C)mo se dehe. Deber Bien t Como deho. t Como debe. t Como V. debe. t Cojno debeH, Cumplir con su obligacion. t V. escribe como debe. t Evstos hombres cumplen con si obligacion como deben. t I Han hecho VV. su tarea como do ben ? t La hemos hecho como debemos. L' , (mas.) La, (fern.) E) deber. La tarea. Ln vaso de vino. Ln pedazo de pan EXERCISES.* 129. Have you paid for the gun ? — I have paid for it. — Has your uncle paid for the hooks ? — He has paid for them. — Have I paid the tailor for the clothes? — You have paid him for them. — Hast thou paid the merchant for the horse ? — I have not yet paid him for it. — Have we paid for our g»oves? — We have paid for them. — Has your cousin already paid for his shoes ? — He has not yet paid for them. — Does my brother pay you what he owes you ? — Ho does pay it me. — Do you pay what you owe? — I do pay what I owe. — Have you paid the baker ? — I have paid him. — Has your uncle paid the butcher for the mutton ? — He has paid him for it. — Who has broken my knife ? — 1 have broken it after cutting the bread. — Has your son broken my pencils ? — He has broken them after writing his letters. — Have you paid the merchant for the wine after drinking it ? — I have paid for it ^ No. 2 and No. 3, Less. XL., page 158, should be used according to die directions p-iven. FORIT- FIRST LESSON. 169 after drinldnt^ it. — How do I speak ? — You speak properly. — How has my cousin written his exercises ? — He has written them properly. — How have my children done their task ? — They have done it well.— Does this man do his duty ? — He always does it. — Do these men do their duty ? — They always do it. — Do you do your duty ? — I do wliat 1 ('an. — What do you ask this man for ? — I ask him for some 'money. '-What does this boy ask me for ? — He asks you for some money. — Do you ask me for any tiling ? — I ask you for a dollar. — Do you ask me for the bread ? — I do ask you for it. — ^Which merchant do you ask for gloves ? — I ask those for some who live in William-street. — What do you ask the baker for ? — I ask him for some bread. 130 . Do you ask the butchers for some mutton ? — I do E.sk them for some. — Dost thou ask me for the stick ? — I do ask thee for it. — Does he ask thee for the book ? — He does ask me for it. — What have you asked tlie Englishman for ? — I have asked him for my leather trunk. — Has he given it you ? — He has given it me. — Whom have you asked for some sugar ? — I have asked the merchant for some. — Whom does your brother pay for his shoes ? — He pays the shoemakers for them. — iVhom have we paid for the bread ? — We have paid our bakers for it. — How old art thou ? — I am not quite ten years old. — Dost thou ilready learn Spanish ? — I do already learn it. — Does thy brother know German ? — He does not know it. — Why does he not know it ? — Because he has not had time. — Is your father at home ? — No, he is gone out, but my brother is at home. — Where is your father gone to ? — He is gone to England. — Have you sometimes been there ? — I have never been there. — Do you intend going to France this summer ? — I do intend going there. — Do you intend to stay there long ? — I intend to stay there during the summer. — How long does your brother remain at home ? — Till twelve o’clock. — Have you had your gloves dyed ? — I have had them dyed. — What have you had them dyed ? — I have had Jiem dyed yellow. — Have you already dined ? — Not yet. — At what D’clock do you dine ? — I dine at six o’clock. — At whose house (en cuya casa) do you dine ? — I dine at the house of a friend of mine. — With whom did you dine yesterday ? — I dined with a relation of mine. — What did you eat ? — We ate good bread, ham, and cakes. — What did Tou drink ? — Wine. — Where does your uncle dine to-day ? — He dines with us. — At what o’clock does your father sup ? — He sups at nine o’cljck. — Do you sup earlier than he ? — I sup later than he. 131 . Where are you going to ? — I am going to a relation of mine, in order to breakfast with him. — Art thou willing to hold my gloves ? — t am willing to hold them. — Who holds my hat ? — Your son holds it 8 170 FORTY-SECOND LESSON. — ^Dost tliou hold my stick ? — I do hold it. — Will you try to spc^k ? -- I will try. — Has your little brother ever tried to do exercises ?* — Ha has tried. — Have you ever tried to make a hat ? — I have never tried to make one. — Whom are you looking for ? — I am looking for the man who has sold a horse to me. — Is your relation looking for any one ? — ^ He is looking for a friend of his. — Are we looking for any one ? — ^We are looking for a neighbor of ours. — Whom dost thou look for ? — I took for a friend of ours. — Are you looking for a servant of mine ?— No, I am looking for one of mine. — Have you tried to speak to your uncle ? — I have tried to speak to him. — Have you tried to see my father ? — I have tried to see him. — Has he received you ? — He has not received me. — Has he received your brothers ? — He has received them. — Have you been able to see your relation ? — I have not been able to see him. — ^What did you do after writing your exercises ? — I wrote my letter. — After whom do you inquire? — I I'nquire after tie tailor. — Does this man inquire after any one ? — He inquires after you. —Do they inquire after you ? — They do inquire after me. — Do they inquire after me ? — They do not inquire after you, but after a friend of yours. — Do you inquire after the physician ? — I do inquire after him. — What does your little (the diminutive) brother ask for ? — He asks for a small (the diminutive) piece of bread. — Has he not yet breakfasted ? — He has breakfasted, but he is still hungry. — What does your uncle ask for ? — He asks for a glass of wine. — Has he not already drunk ? — He has already drunk, but he is still thirsty. FORTY-SECOND LESSON . — Leccion CuadragHima segunda. Who. The one who Him who. Those who. To perceive, (to see.) Do you perceive the man who is coming ? I perceive him who is coming. Do you perceive the men who are going into the warehouse? I perceive those who are going into it To go in, {tc enter understood.) How is the weathei ? What kind of weather is it .' ft is fine weather now. What was the weather yesterday ? Qmc, (relative pronoun.) El que. Los que. Percibir 3. Divisar 1. Columbrar 1. I Columbra V. al hombre que viene s I Divisa V al hombre que viene ? Yo diviso (co) umbro) al que viene. i Divisa V. d los hombres quo van « entrer en el almacen ? Yo diviso d los que van d ^ntrsr t‘3 61. Entrar. I I Que tiempo hace 1 1 1 Que tiempo tenemoe 7 I t Hace hermoso tiompa 1 1 1 Que tiempo hizo ayor ? FOP.TY-SSCOND LESSON. 171 it was bad weather yesterday. VV as it good or bad weather ? rt weis not good weather. lUwas very warm It was very cold. Very Is it very warm now? It is neither warm nor cold. t Hizo mal tiempo ayer. 1 1 Hizo buen tiempo 6 mal tiemtx) 1 t No hizo buen tiempo. t Hizo mucho calor. t Hizo mucho frio. MuchOj (before a noun.) 1 1 Hace mucho calor ahora I ■f No hace calor ni frio. Dark. Obscure. Dusky. Gloomy. Clear. Light. Is it dark in your warehouse ? Is it dark in his garret? It is ^'erv dark there. Wet. Damp. Dry. Are the streets wet ? They are not very dry. Is the weather damp ? It is not damp. Is it dry weather ? The weather is too dry. The moonlight. The moonshine. It is moonlight. We have too much sun. Oseuro. Lhbrego. Triste. Claro. Despejado. t i Es (or esta) oseuro su almacen dc V.', + i Ee (or esta) oseuro su desvan ? Estd, muy oseuro alii. Mojado. Hiimedo. Seco. I Estan mojadas las callos ? No estan muy secas. I Esth humedo el tiempo ( No estd, humedo. I Es seco el tiempo ? El tiempo estd demasiado seco. La luz de la luna. El claro de la luna. t Hay luna. Hace luna. Demasiado sol tenemos. To taste. Have you tasted that wine? I have tasted it. How do you like it ? I like it well. Do you like cider ? No, I like wine. To like. I like fish. He likes fowl. Gustar. Probar. Catar I Ha probado (ha catado) V. aqiiel vino ? Le he gustado, (probado, catado.) t I Como le gusta d V. ? t Me gusta mucho. t i Le gusta d V. la sidra ? t No, me gusta el vino. r Gustarle duno. (See Less. XXIV.) t Me gusta el pescado. t A dl le gusta el polio. Do you like to see my brother? f like to see him. [ like to do it. He likes to study. t I Le gusta d V. ver d mi hermawc I t Me gusta verle. t Me gusta hacerlo. t Le gusta estudiar. 172 ^ tfORTY'SECOND LESSON. The scholar. 'Fhe pupil. The master, (teacher.) Tq learn by heart, Dc yom scholars like to learn by heart ? They do not like learning by h^skart. Have you learned your exercises by heart ? We have learned them. ' El discipulo, (escolar, estudlante I El alumno El discipulo El maestro. Aprender de memoria « 1 1 Les gusta d sus discipulos de V aprender de memoria 1 t El aprender de memoria no I’e* gusta. No les gusta aprender de memt»ria- t I Han aprendido VV sus temas do memoria 1 Los hemos aprendido Once a day. Three times a month So much a year. So much a head. So much a soldier. Six times a year. Early in the morning. We go out early in the morning. When did your father go out ? To speak of some one, or of some- thing. Of whom do you speak ? We speak of the man whom you know. Of what are they speaking? They are speaking of the weather. The weather The soldier. Also. t Una vez al dia. t Tres voces al mes, ^>or ine':i / t Taiito al ano. t Tanto por cabeza. t Tanto por soldado t Seis veces al aho. t Por la manana temprano. Salimos por la manana temprano I Cuando salid su padre de V. ? Hablar de alguno, {de algo. I De quien hablan VV ? I De quien hablais ? Hablamos del hombre que V. conosoL I De que estan hablando ellos ? Estan hablando del tiempo. El tiempo. El soldado. Tamhien. T 0 he content, satisfied with some one, or with something. 4r9 you satisfied with this man ? I am satisfied with him. Ajre you content with your new coat ? [ am content with it. With what are you contented ? Discontente i. Estar contento con (or de) alguicn, con (or dc) algo. I Estd, V. satisfecho de este hombre 1 Estoy satisfecho de 6\. I Est4 V. contento con su vestidf nuevo ? j Estoy satisfecho de dl. j I De que esta V. contento ? ' Malcontento. Descontento. i’ORTY-SECOND LESSON. ilh Tliey speak of your friend. They speak of him. They are speaking of your book. They are speaking of it. Hablan (se habla) de su amigo de V Hablan (se habla) de ^1. Estan hablando (se esta hablando) de su libro de V. Estaii (se esta) hablando de el. If I intend paying you if I receive money. Do you intend to buy paper? I intend to buy some, if they pay me what they owe me. How was the weather yesterday ? It was fine weather. I Si, ! Pienso (mtento) pagar d V. si recibo dinero. I Piensa V. comprar papel ? Intenlo comprar alguno si me pagan lo que mo ieben. I I Que tiempo hizc ayer ? 1 Hizo buen tiempo. EXERCISES. 132 . Do you perceive the man who is coming ? — I do not perceive him.^ Do you perceive the soldier’s children ? — I do perceive them. — Do yo'i perceive the men who are going into the garden ? — I do not perceive those who are going into the garden, but those who are going to the market. — Does your brother perceive the man who has lent him money ? — He does not perceive the one who has lent him, but the one to whom he has lent some. — Dost thou see the children who are studying ? — I do not see those who are studying, but those who are playing. — Dost thou perceive any thing ? — I perceive nothing. — Have you perceived my parents’ warehouses ? — I have perceived them. — Where have you perceived them ? — I have perceived them on that side of the road. — Do you like a large hat ? — I do not like a large hat, but a large umbrella. — What do you like to do ? — I like to write. — Do you like to see these little boys ? — I like to see them. — Do you like wine ? — I do like it. — Does your brother like cider, (sidra ?) — He does like it. — What do the soldiers like ? — They like wine. — Dost thou like tea or coffee ? — I like both. — Do these children like to study ? — They like to study and to play. — Do you like to read and to write ? — I like to read and to write. — How many times a day do you eat ? — Four times. — How often do your children drink a day ? — They drink several times a day. — Do you drink as often as they ? — I drink oftcner. — Do you often go to the theatre ? — I go sometimes. — How often in a month do you go ? — I go but once a momn. — How many times a year does your cousin go to the ball ? — He goes twice a year. — Do you go as often as he ? — I never go. — Does your cook often go to the market - He goes thither every morning. L74 FORTY-SECOND LESSON. 133 . Do you often go to my uncle ? — I go to him six times a year.— Do you like fowl ? — I like fowl, but I do not like fish. — What do you like? — I like a piece of bread and a glass of wine. — Do you learn by heart ? —I do not like learning by heart. — Do your pupils like to learn by heart ? — They like to study, but they do not like learning by heart. — How many exercises do they do a day ? — They only do two, out they do them properly. — Were you able to re id the note which I wrote to you ? — I was able to read it. — Did you understand it ? — I did under- stand it. — Do you understand the man who is speaking to you ?— T do not understand him. — Why do you not understand him ? — Because he speaks too badly. — Does this man know French ? — He knows it, but I do not know it. — Why do you not learn it ? — I have no time to learn it. — Do you intend going to the theatre this evening ? — I intend going, if you go. — Does your father intend to buy that horse ? — He intends buying it, if he receives his money. — Does your friend intend going to England ? — He intends going thither, if they pay him what they owe him. — Do you intend going to the concert ? — I intend to go, if my friend goes. — Does your brother intend to study Spanish ? — Ho intends studying it, if he finds a good master. 134 . How is the weather to-day ? — It is very fine weather. — Was it fine weather yesterday ? — It was bad weather yesterday. — How was the weather this morning ? — It was bad weather, but now it is fine weather. — Is it warm ? — It is very warm. — Is it not cold ? — It is not cold. — Is it warm or cold ? — It is neither warm nor cold. — Did you go to the garden the day before yesterday ? — I did not go. — Why did you not go ? — I did not go, because it was bad weather. — Do you intend going there to-morrow ? — I do intend going there if the weather is fine. — Is it light in your counting-house ? — It is not light in it. — Do you wish to work in mine ? — I do wish to work in it. — Is it light there ? — It is very light there. — Why cannot your brother work in his warehouse ? — He cannot work there, because it is too dark. — Where is it too dark ? — In his warehouse. — Is it light in that hole ? — It is dark (there.) — Is the weather dry ? — It is very dry. — Is it damp ? — It is not damp. It Is too dry. — Is it moonlight ? — It is not moonlight, it is very damp. — Of what does your uncle speak ? — He speaks of the fine weather. — Of what do those men speak? — They speak of fair and bad weather. — Do they not speak of the wind ? — They do also speak of it. — Dost thou speak of my uncle ? — I do not speak of him. — Of whom dost thou speak ? — I speak of thee and thy parents. — Do you inquire after any one ? — I inquire after your cousin ; is he at home ? — No, he ia at his best friend’s. FORTY-THIRD LESSON 175 135. Have you lasted that wine ? — 1 have tasted it. — How do you like it 1 —I like it well. — IIow does your cousin like that cider ? — He does xiot like it. — \Miich wdne do you wish to taste ? — I wish to taste that which you have tasted. — Will you taste this tobacco ? — I have tasted it already.— How do you like it ? — I like it well. — Why do you not taste that cider ? — Because I am not thirsty. — Wliy does your friend not taste this ham ? — Because he is not hungrv. — Of whom have Biey spoken ? — They have spoken of your friend. — Have they not spoken of the physicians ? — They have not spoken of tliem. — Do they not speak of tlie man of whom we have spoken ? — They do speak of him. — Have they spoken of the noblemen, (caballeros 7) — They nave spoken of them. — Have they spoken of those of whom we speak ? — They have not spoken of those of whom we speak, but they have spoken of others. — Have they spoken of our cliildren or of those of our neighbors ? — They have neither spoken of ours, nOr those of our neighbors. — Wliich children have been spoken of? — Those of our master have been spoken of. — Do they speak of my book ? — They do speak of it. — Are you satisfied with your pupils ? — I am satisfied with them. — How does my brother study ? — He studies well. — How many exercises have you studied ? — I have already studied forty-two. — Is your master satisfied with his scholar ? — He is satisfied with him. — Is your master satisfied with the presents which he has received ? — He is satisfied with them. — Have you received a note ? — I have received one. — Will you answer (it ?) — I am going to answer (it.) — When did you receive it ? — I received it early this morning. — Are you satisfied with it ? — I am not satisfied with it. — Does your friend ask you for money ? — He does ask me for some. FORTY-THIRD LESSON . — Leccion Cuadraghima tercera. OF PASSIVE VERBS. Passive Verbs represent the subject as receiving or suffering from othem action expressed by the verb. In Spanish, els in English, they are con- jugated by means of the auxiliary verb Ser, (to be,) placed before the past participle of the active verb ; and the noun or pronoun, representing tho agent (the subject) in the' active phrase, must be preceded by tlie preposi- tions por or dcf (by.) Either of them may be used when the action of the verb refers to the mind, and por only, v/hen otherwise. O" Observe thai Jie past participle of the principal verb must agree in gender and numboi vith the subject of the verb 176 FORIY-THIRD LESSON. I lev©. I am loved. Thou conductest. Thou art conducted. lie praises. IJo is praised. You punish. You are punished. Tliey blame. They are blamed. Yo amo. Yo soy amado de, (pof.) Tu conduces. Tu eres conducido por Fil alaba. El es alabado de, (por). V castiga. V. es castigado por Elios vituperan Elios son vituperados de, (por.) To praise. To punish To blame. Alahar. Elogxar. Castigar. Vituperar. Culpar. By me. By us. By thee. By you. By him. By them. Por (de) mi Por (de) nosotros. Por (de) ti. Por (de) vos, or vosocros por (de) V. ; por (de) VV. Por (de) el. Por (de) ellos. I am loved by him. Who is punished? I’he naughty boy is punished. By whom is he punished? tie is punished by his father. Which man is praised, and which is blamed ? Which t (not followed by a noun.) Naughty. Skilful. Diligent. Clever. Assiduous. Industrious. Studious. Idle. Ignorant. The id^er, (the lazy fellow.) To reward. To esteem. To despise. To hate. To travel to a place. Where has he travelled to ? has travelled to Vienna. Soy amado de el. I Quien es castigado ? i El muchacho malo es castigado ( El mal muchacho es castigado. I Por quien es castigado ? El es castigado por su padre. I Que hornbre es alabado, y cual e vituperado ? ^ Cual 7 Malo. (Mal, before a noun.) Habil. Diligente. Diestro. , Asiduo. Industrioso. Estudiosa Ocioso. Perezoso. Holgaza^ Ignorante. I El haragan. Recompensar 1. Premiar 1. Estimar. Apreciar 1. Despreciar. Menospreciar 1. Aborreccr 2. (See verbs in fci / Ir d. Irse d. I Adonde se ha ido 1 Se ha ido a Viena. FORTT-THIRD LESSON. 177 is il good travelling ? U IS good travelling. It is bad travelling. In the winter. In the summer. In the spring. In the autumn. & is rtad travelling in the winter To drive, to ride in a carriage. To r^de, (on horseback.) To go on foot. Do you like to ride ? 1 like to drive. I Es bueno viajar ? Es bueno viajar. Es malo viajar. En el invierno. En el veraho. En la primavera. En el otoho. Es malo viajar en el invierno. t Ir en coclic. Andar 1 * en coche. t Ir , {andar, pasear) d cahaUo Montar d caballo. Cahalgar. Ir d pie, t ^ Le gusta d. V. andar d. caballo ? t Me gusta ir en coche. To live. Is it good living in Paris ? Living is good in Paris. It is good living here. The living is good here. Dear, Is the living dear in London ? Is it dear living in London ? The living is dear he* . It is dear living her» Thunder The storm The fog. Is it windy ? Does the wind blow ? h is windy The wir d blows, h is not w indy, ft is very windy Does it thunder ? j Vivir. ^ I Se vive bien en Paris ? ( f ^ Lo pasa uno bien en Paris ? I Se vive bien en Paris. S Aqui se vive bien. Lo pasa uno bien aqui. I Caro. Costoso. Costar mucho, f ^ Es caro (costoso) el vivir en Ldn ^ dres ? ( I Cuesta mucho vivir en Londres? ^ El vivir aqui es caro. ( Cuesta mucho vivir aqui. I Trueno. Truenos. ^ La tormenta. La tempestad. f La borrasca. I La niebla. t t ^ Hace viento ? ( I Corre viento, (hace aire) ? ( t Hace viento ( Corre viento, (hace aire.) t t No hace viento. ( No corre viento, (hace aire.) { Hace mucho viento. ( Corre mucho viento, (hace aire, I t i Hay truenos 1 ^ Truena ? } I Estd. tronanda ? 178 POR^rr-THIRD LESSON. is it foggy ? Is it stoimy ? It is not stoimy. Does tho sun shine ? it thunders very much. 1 1 1 Hace niebla ? i Hay niebla j W i Estd tempestuoso el tiempo 7 ^ t [ Hay tempestad ? ^ 1 No hay tempestad. ) No estd tempestuoso. I I Luce el sol ? i Hay sol 1 1 Trueiia muchisimo. Afterwards As soon as. As soon as I have eaten I drink. As soon as I have taken off my shoes, I take otf my stockings. What do you do in the evening ? To sleep. Does your father still sleep ? He still sleeps. I Despues. Luego que. Asi que Asi que he comido, bebo t Luego que me he quitado los z& patos, me quito las medias. I Que hace V. por la tarde Dormir * 3. I Duerme todavia su padre de V ? Duerme todavia. Aun dueim© Without. Without money. Without speaking. Qhs. Sin (without) requires the live Without saying any thing Sin Sin dinero. t Sin hablar. verb which follows it to be in the infuu' f t Sin decir nada. < t Sin hablar palabra. f t Sin abrir la boca. At last. To arrive. Has he arrived at last ? He has not arrived yot. Is he coming at last ? He is coming. Al Jin. Finalmente Llegar 1. (See verbs in gar.) I Ha llegado finalmente ? Todavia no ha llegado. I Viene al fin ? El viene And then. And then he sleeps. As soon as he has supped he reads, and then he sleeps. Y entonces. Y pues. Y que Y entdnces duerme. Luego que ha cenado *ee, y eatdmc* duerme The parents, (father and mother.) Father and mother. Are you loved by your father and mother ? I am loved by my parents I t Los padres. I t Los padres. t i Es V amado de sus padros ? t Soy amado de mis oadres. FORTY-THIRD LESSON. 179 EXERCISES. 136. Are you loved ? — I am loved. — By whom are you loved ?— I am oved by my uncle. — By whom am I loved ? — Thou art loved by thy parents. — By whom are we loved ? — You are loved by your friends.— By whom are those boys loved ? — They are loved by their friends. — By whom is this man conducted ? — He is conducted by me. — Where do you conduct him to ? — I conduct him home. — By whom are we blamed ? — We are blamed by our enemies. — Why are we blamed by them ? — Because they do not love us. — Are you punished by your master ? — I am not punished by him, because I am good and studious. — Are we heard ? — We are, (Zo.) — By whom are we heard ? — We are heard by our neighbors. — Is thy master heard by his pupils ? — He is heard by them. — Which children are praised ? — Those that are good. — Which are punished ? — Those that are idle and naughty. — Are we praised or blamed ? — We are neither praised nor blamed. — Is our frrend loved by his masters ? — He is loved and praised by them, oecause he is studious and good ; but his brother is despised by his, oecause he is naughty and idle. — Is he sometimes punished ? — He is (Zo) every morning and every evening. — Are you sometimes punished ? — I am Q6) never ; I am loved and rewarded by my good masters. — Are these children never punished ? — They are (Zo) never, because they are studious and good ; but those are so (Zo) very often, because they are idle and naughty. — Who is praised and rewarded ? — Skilful children are praised, esteemed, and rewarded, but the ignorant are blamed, despised, and punished. — Who is loved and who is hated ? — He who is studious and good is loved, and he who is idle and naughty is hated. — Must (one) oe good in order to be loved ? — (One) must be so. — What must (one) do in order to be loved ? — (One) must be good and assiduous. — What must (one) do in order to be rewarded ? — (One) must be skilful, and study much, (see Lesson XXXIX., page 152.; 137. Why are those children loved ? — They are loved because they are good. — Are they better than we ? — They are not better, but more studious than you. — Is your brother as assiduous as mine ? — He is as assiduous as he, but your brother is better than mine. — Do you like to drive ? — I like to ride. — Has your brother ever been on horseback ? — He has never been on horseback. — Does your brother ride on horse- back as often as you ? — He rides on horseback oftener than I. — Did you go on horseback the day before yesterday ? — I went on horseback to-day. — Do you like travelling ? — I do like travelling. — Do you like travelling in the winter ? — I do not like travelling in the winter ; I like 180 FORTY-THIRD LESSON. travelling in the spring and in autumn. — Is it good .ravelling in the spring ? — It is good travelling in spring and in autumn, but it is bad travelling in the summer and in the winter. — Have you sometime? travelled in tlie winter? — I have often travelled in the winter and ir tlie. summer. — Does your brother travel often ? — He travels no longer he formerly travelled much. — Wnen do you like to ride ? — I ike tc; ride in the morning. — Have you been in London ? — I have been there. — Is the living good there ? — The living is good there, but dear. — Is it dear living in Paris ? — It is good living 'there,) and not dear. — Do you like travelling in France ? — I like travelling there, because one finds good people (buenas gentes) there. — Does your frierd like travelling in Holland ? — He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad there. — Do you like travelling in Italy ? — I do like travelling there, because the living is good there, and one (se hallo) finds good people there; but the roads are not very good there. — Do tie English like to travel in Spain ? — They like to travel there ; but they find the roads too bad. — How is the weather ? — The weather is very bad. — Is it windy ? — It is very windy. — Was it stormy yesterday ? — It was very stormy. 138 . Do you go to the market this morning ? — I do go, if it is not stormy — Do you intend going to France this year ? — I intend going (thither) if the weather is not too bad. — Do you like to go on foot ? — I do not like to go on foot, but I like going in a carriage when {cuando) I am travelling. — Will you go on foot ? — I cannot go on foot, because I am tired. — What sort of weather is it ? — It thunders. — Does the sun shine ? — The sun does not shine ; it is foggy. — Do you hear the thun- der ? — I hear it. — Is it fine weather ? — The wind blows hard, and it thunders much. — Of whom have you spoken ? — We have spoken of you. — Have you praised me ? — We have not praised you ; we have blamed you. — Why have you blamed me ? — Because you do not study well. — Of what has your brother spoken ? — He has spoken of his books, his horses, and his dogs. — What do you do in the evening ? — I work as soon as I have supped. — And Vv'hat do you do afterwards ? — (Afterwards I sleep. — When do you drink ? — I drink as soon as I have oaten. — Have you spoken to the merchant ? — I have snoken to him. — What has he said ? — He has left (salir) Vithout saying any thing.— Cun you work without speaking ? — I can work, but not study Spanish without speaking. — Wilt thou go for some wine ? — I cannot go foi wine vvitliout money. — Have you bought any horses ? — I do not buy without money. — Has your father arrived at last ? — He has arrived. — Wlien did he arrive ? — This morning at four o’clock. — Has youi isousin set out at last ? — He has not set out yet. — Have you at last FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. 181 ^imd a good master ? — I have at last found one. — Are you at last learning Spanish ? — I am at last learning it. — ^Vhy have you not already learned it ? — Because I have not been able to find a g(X)d master. FORTY-FOURTH LESSON . — Leccion Cuadragesima cuarta^ OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. When the action falls upon the agent, and the object refers to the sam« person as the subject, the verb is called reflective or pronominal. In Span- ish almost all active verbs may become reflective, and used as pronominal These verbs form their compound tenses with the auxiliary habere (to have.) The pronoun object must be of the same person as that of the subject and each person is conjugated with a double personal pronoun. However, the pronoun subject is almost always understood in Spanish, while in English it is the object. I — (myself.) Thou — (thyself.) He — (himself.) She — (herself.) It — (itself.) One — (one’s self.) We — (ourselves.) Sing. You — (yourself.) Plur. You, ye — (yourselves.) Mas. They — (themselves.) Fern. They — (themselves.) I (Yo) me — (n mi mismo.y I (Tii) te — (a ti inismo.) (El) se — {d si mismo.) I (Ella) se — (d si misma,) S (El) se — (d si mismo.) (Ella) se — (d si misma.) Uno se — alguno se — (d si mismo.) (Nosotros) nos — (d nosotros mismos V se — iyos os) a si mismo— (d vod mismo.) W. se — (vosotros os ) — (d si mismos] — (d vosotros mismos.) Elios se — (d si- mismos.) Ellas se — (d si mismas.) Obs. A. It will be remarked that the pronoun object of the third peran s always se, whatever its gender or number may be. To cut yourself. To cut myself. To cut ourselves To cut himself. I'o cut herself. Cortarse V. (Cortaros.) Cortarme. Cortarnos. Cortarse (el.) Cortarse (ella.' ^ The words in italics are often added to the verb to givo more energy in t'.'e Boutonce. 182 FORTr-FOURTH LESSON. To cut itself. To cut one’s self. Do you burn yourself? I do not burn myself. You do not bum yourseli I see myself. Do I see myself? He sees himself. Wo see ourselves. They see themseWes. He always praises himself Do you wdsh to warm yourself? I do wish to warm myself. Does he wish to warm himself? He does wish to warm himself They wish to warm themselves. To enjoy. To divert. To amuse one^s self. In what do you amuse yourself? I amuse myself in reading. He diverts himself in playing. Each. Each one. Kacn man amuses himself as he likes. Each one amuses himself in the best way he can. The taste. Each man has his taste. Each of you. The world, (the people.) Every one. Everybody fiveiybody speaks of it. Cortarse (dl.) Cortarse felia-1 Cortarse. I Se quema V. ? (Yo) no me quemo V. no se quema (Yo) me veo. I Me veo yo ? fil se ve. (Nosotros) nos vemos. Elios se ven. Ellas se ven. 6l se alaba siempre d si mismo I Quiere V. calentarse ? I Se quiere V. calentar ? Me quiero calentar. I Quiere 4\ calentarse ? quiero calentarse. Elios se quieren calentar Divertirse Entretenerse * * Recrearse 1. I A (or en) que so divierte V. ? Yo me recreo leyendo, (or en leer ) Se entretiene en jugar, (jugando.) Qada. Todo. Cada uno. Cada hombre se divierte como le gusta, (como gusta.) Cada uno se divierte del mejor mode que puede. El gusto. Cada uno tiene su gusto. Cada hombre tiene su gusto. Cada uno de VV. El mundo, (la gente.; Cada uno. Todo cl mundo. Todos. Cada uno (or todo el mundo) habia de ello. Todos hablan de ello. s 5 I ‘ See W <^^he Appendix Conjugated like tener FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. 183 Ev eiy one is liable to error. Cada uno (tod) el muiido) comoto yerros t Todos estamos sujetos d error To mistake You are mistaken. He is mistaken. t Equivocarse 1 t V. se equivoca. t El se equivoca. To deceive, to cheat but enemies. — Is he not loved ? — He is flattered, but he is not beloved. — Do you flatter yourself that you know Spanish ? — I do flatter myseii tliat 1 know it ; for I can speak, read, and write it. — Has the physician done any harm to your child ? — He has cut his finger, {el le ha cortado el dedo,) but he has not done him any harm, so (y) you are mistaken, if you believe that he has done him any harm. — Why do you listen jo that man ? — I listen to him, but I do not believe him ; fjr I know that he is a story-teller. — How do you know that he is a story-teller ? — He does not believe in God j and all those {los que) who do not believe in God are storv-teller^ FORTY-SIXTH LESSON . — Leccion Cuadragesima sexta. We have already seen (Lessons XLI. and XLII.) some idiomatical ex- pressions with hacer, all of which belong to the impersonal verbs. Tnece vorl)s, having no determinate subject, are conjugated only in the third per- »oii singular, without any pronoun OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. To rain. It rains. To snow. It snows. To hail. It hails. To lighten. It lightens Does it lighten ? It does lighten. It rains very hard. lilover * 2. Llueve. Nevar * 1. Nieva. Granizar 1. Graniza. Relampaguear 1. Relampaguea. I Relampaguea ? Relampaguea, (or si.; Llueve muy recio. El reHmpago. El quitasol. Relampaguea mucho. I Nieva ? i Estl nevando i I Nieva mucho. I Graniza mucho. The lightning The parasol It lightens much. Does it snow ? It snows much. It hails much 192 FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. The sun does not shine The sun is in my eyes r t No hay sol. No hace sol / 7 No parece el sol. (No luce el sol. I t Mo da el sol en los ojoB To thunder, it thunders 1 Tronar * 1, truena. To shine, to glitter. | Lucir, resplandecer. (See App.j To shut. Have you done ? Is the walking good ? In that country. The country. He has made many friends in that country. Cerrar * 1. t I Ha acabado V. ? I Estd, bueno (el piso) para pasoar ? En ese pais. El pais. El se ha hecho muchos amigos ec ese pais. { De quCf (of both genders and numbers.) BOTH GENDERS. MAS FEM De quien. Del cual. De la cual, (sing) De quienes. De los cuales. De las cuales, (plur.) r see the man of whom you speak. | 1 have bought the horse of which vou spoke to mo | Whose, 1 see the man whos brother has kill- ed my dog. I see the man whose dog you have killed. Do you see the child whose father set out yesterday '? I see it. Whom have you seen ? 1 have seen the merchant whose warehouse you have taken. [ have spoken to the man whose warehouse has been burnt. That which. That of which. Yo veo al hombre de quien V. habla. He comprado el caballo de que (or del cual) V. me habl6. SINGULAR. PLURAL Cuyo, (mas.) Cuyos, (mas.) Cuya, (fern.) * Cuyas, (fern.) Yo veo al hombre cuyo hermano na matado mi perro. Yo veo al hombre cuyo perro V. ha matado. ^Ve V. al niho cuyo padre se mar- cho ayer? Yo le veo. I A quien ha visto V. ? Yo he visto al comerciante cuyo al- macen ha tornado V. He hablado al hombre cuyo almacer se ha quemado. Lo que. Aquello que Aquello de que KOHTY-SIXTH LESSOJ^, 193 Thaty or the one of which. Thoscy or the ones of which. I have that of which I have need. [ have what I want. H 3 has what he wants. f Aquel de quien, (mas. sing.) J Aquclla de quien, (fern, sing.) I Aquel del cual, (mas. sing.) L Aquella de la cunl, (fern, sing.) r Aquellos de quienes, (mas. plur.) j Aquellas de quienes, (fern, plur.) I Aquellos de los cuales, (mas. plur ) L Aquellas de las cuales, (fem. plur.) Tengo lo que he menester, (necesito.l I Tiene lo que ha menester, (necesita.) Have you the book of which you have need? I have that of which I have need. Has the man the nails of which he has need ? He has those of which he has need. To need. To want To have need ot I Tiene V. el libro que ha meLestei (que necesita) ? Tengo el que he menester, (necesito.) I Tiene el hombre los clavos que ha menester, (que necesita) ? 6l tiene los que ha menester. El tiene aquellos que necesita. / Haber menester. Necesitar. Which men do you see ? [ see those of whom you have spoken to me. Do you see the pupils of whom I have spoken tc you ? { see them. I Que hombres ve V. ? Yo veo d, aquellos de quienes (de los cuales) V. me ha hablado. iVe V. d los discipulos de quienee (de los cuales) he hablado d V. ? Yo los veo. To whom. [ the children to whom you have given some cakes. To which men do you speak ? 1 8}>eak to those to whom you have applied. To apply to. To meet with. \ have met with the men to whom you have applied. Al cualy (mas.) A' los cuales, (pi.) , A la cualy (fem.) A' las cuales, (pi.) Yo veo los ninos d quienes (d loa cuales) V. ha dado algunos hollos, (bizcochos.) A que hombres habla V.? Yo hablo d aquellos d quienes (or d los cuales) V. ha recurrido. Recurrir a. Acudir a. Dirigirse d. Encontrar d. Encontrarse con. Yo me he encontrado con los hom bres d quienes (or d los cualoe) V ha acudido. 194 i’ORTY-SIXTH LESSON Df which men do you speak ? [ speak of those whose children have been studious and obedient. Obedient. Disobedient. So that, j !>av8 lost my money, so that I can- not pay you. I am ill, so that I cannot go out. I De que hombres habla V.7 Yo hablo de aquellos cuyos Ui'Scs; han sido estudiosos y ohedientes Obediente. Desobedieiite AsL De suerte qucy (conjuncticn.; He perdido mi dinero, y asi no Ifi puedo pagar d V. Estoy malo, asi no puedo salir. 111. j Malo. Enfermc To be ill. 1 Estar malo. Esti.i eiifermo EXERCISES. 144. Have you at last learned Spanish ? — I was ill, so* that I cculd nd learn it. — Has your brother learned it ? — He has not learned it, because he has not yet been able to find a good master. — Do you go to the baU this evening ? — I have sore feet, so that I cannot go (to it.) — Did you understand that German ? — I do not know German, so that I could not understand him. — Have you bought the horse of which you spoke to me ? — I have no money, so that I could not buy it. — Have you seen the man from whom I have received a present ? — I have not seen him. — Have you seen the fine gun of which I spoke to you ? — I have seen it. — Has your uncle seen the books of which you spoke to him ? — He has seen them. — Hast thou seen the man whose children have been punished ? — I have not seen him. — To whom have you been speaking in the theatre ? — I have been speaking to the man whose brother has killed my fine dog. — Have you seen the little boy whose father has be- come a lawyer ? — I have seen him. — Whom have you seen at the ball 1 — I have seen there the men whose horses, and those whose coach you have bought. — Whom do you see now ? — I see the man whose servant has broken my looking-glass. — Have you heard the man whose friend has lent me money ? — I have not heard him. — Whom have you heard ? — I have heard the French captain whose son is my friend. — Hast thou brushed the coat of which 1 spoke to thee ? — I have not yet brushed it. «-Have you received the money which you have been wanting ? — I aave received it. — Have I the paper of which I have need ? — You have It. — Has your brother the books which he is wanting ? — ^He has them. — Have you spoken to the merchants whose warehouse we have taken ? — We have spoken to them. — ^Have you spoken to the physician whose son has studied German ? — I have spoken to him. — Hast thou FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 195 seen the poor men whose warehouses have been burnt ? — I nave seen tliem. — Have you read the books which we have lent you ? — Wo have read them. — What do you say of them ? — We say that they are very .ane. — Have your children what they want ? — They have what ihey want. 145. Of which man do you speak ? — I speak of the one whose brothe? has turned soldier.-^f which children have you spoken ? — 1 ilav^^ spoken of those whose parents are learned. — Which book have you read ? — I have read that of which I spoke to vou yesterday. — Which paper has your cousin ? — He has that of which he has need. — Which fishes has he eaten ? — He has eaten those which you do not like. — Of which books are you in want ? — I am in want of those of which you have spoken to me. — Are you not in want of those which I am reading ? — I am not in v/ant of them. — Do you see the children to whom I have given cakes ? — I do not see those to whom you have given cakes, but those whom you have punished. — To whom have you given some money? — I have given some to those who have been skilful. — To which children must one give books ? — One must give (some) to those who are good and obedient. — To whom doT you give to eat and to drink ? — To those who are hungry and thirsty. — Do you give any thing to the children who are idle ? — I give them nothing. — Did it snow yesterday ? — It did snow, hail, and lighten. — Did it rain ? — It did rain. — Did you go out ? — I never go out when it is bad weather. — Have the captains at last listened to that man ? — They have refused to listen to him ; all those to whom he applied have refused to near him. — With whom have you met this morning ? — I have met with the man by whom I am esteemed. — Have you given any cakes to your pupils ? — They have not studied well, so that I have given them nothing. TORTY-SEVENTH LESSON . — Leccion Cuadragesima septima, OF THE FUTURE— No 4. The First Future, Futuro Indejinidoy is formed from the infinitive mood in the same manner as the other tenses. (See the table of terminations ir the Appendix.) To speak — I shall or will speak. I’o sell — I shall or will sell. To receive — I shai! or will receive. Hablar — yo hablar^. Vender — yo vendere Recibir — v^* recibird. 196 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. Thou shait or wilt speak. He shall or will speak. You shall or will speak. We shall or will speak. They shall or will speak. You shall or will speak. Tii hablards. ]^^1 hablara. V. hablard. {Vos hahlateis. Nosotros hablardmos. Elios (ellas) hablardn. VV. hablaran. {Vosbtros hahlareib.) Qbs, 111 Spanish, the first person singular of the Future always end/; In c, and from this all the other persons may be formed by changing i into dSf df emos, eisy dn. Examples: — To love — I shall or will love. To foresee — I shall or will foresee. To restore — I shall or will restore. To have — I shall or will havp, (act.) To have — I shall or will have, (aux.) 'To be — I shall or will be. To be — I shall or will be. Amar — amare, Prever — prevere, Restituir — restituire, Teller — tendre, Haber — habre, Ser — sere, Estar — estare. asy «, emns, eiSy in. To go — I shall or vill go. To come — I shall or will come. To know — I shall or will know. To be worth — I shall or will be worth. To be able — I shall or will be able. To do — I shall or will do. To be willing — I shall or will be willing. To go out — I shall or will go out. To owe — I shall or will owe. To give — I shall or will give. To see — I shall or will see. Ir — ire, Venir, vendre. Saber — sabre, Valer — valdre, Poder — podre, Hacer — hare, Querer — querre, Salir — saldre, Deber — debere, Dar — dare, Ver — vere. aSf a, emo8, eiSy dn. To be necessary — it will or shall be necessary. To rain — it will rain. To send — I shall or will send. To sit down — I shall or will sit down. Ser menester — serd, menester. Ser necesario — serd, necesario Llover — lloverd,. Enviar — enviare. Sentarse — me sentare. (See reftvXf* tive verbs.) Shall or will he have money ? ilo will have some. He will not have any. Shall you soon have done (finish) writing ? [ shall soon have done, (finish.) Ele will soon have done (finish) his exercise. I Tendrd el dinero? El tendrd, alguno, (or uii poco.; fil no tendrd. ninguno. I Acabard V. pronto de escribir if Pronto acabard. Pronto acabard su ejercicio FORTY-SEVENTH LESSOJ^. 191 ^Vlieu shall you write your exer- cises? i will do them soon, (ere long.) My brother will do his exercise to- morrow Next Monday. Last Monday Next month. This month. This country. ^Cuando escribiri V. sus ejerc .cios? Yo los escribire pronto. Mi hermano hara su tema manana t El Ldnes que viene, (or proximo or que entra.) t El Lunes pasado. t El mes que viene, (or que entra.) Este mes. Este pais. When will your cousin go to the concert? lie will go next Tuesday. Shall you go anywhere ? We shall go nowhere. iCuando ird al concierto su prime de V.? 6l ird. el Mdrtes que viene I Iran VV. d alguna parte ? No iremosd ninguna parte Will he send me the book ? He will send it you if he has done with it Shall you be at home this afternoon ? I shall be (there.) Will your father be at home ? He will be (there.) Will your cousins be there ? They will be (there.) I Me enviard el libro ? El se le enviard d V. si le ha scaba* do. I Estard V. en casa esta tarde ? Si, senor; or, Yo estard. [ Estard en casa el senor padre de V.? Si, senor ; or Si, estard. I Estardn alii los senores primos de V.? Si, senor ; or, Elios estardn 'Vill he send me the books ? He will send them to you. Will he send some paper to my counting-house ? He will send some (thither.) I Me enviard dl los libros ? se los enviard a V. i Enviard dl algun papel d mi oficio Si, enviard algune. Sliall you be able to pay your shoe- maker ? I have lost my money, so that I shall not bo able to pay him. My friend has lost his pocket-book, so that he will mt be able to pay Cor his shoes. Will you nold any thing ? I shall hold your umbrella I Podrd V. pagar d su zapatero ? He perdido mi dinero, asi no podr$ pagarle. Mi amigo ha perdido su cartera, y por consiguiente, (y asi,) no podri pagar sus zapatos. I I Tendrd V. alguna cosa ? 1 Yo tendrd su pardguas de V 198 irORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. Will your friend go tc my concert ? ' Ird su amigo de V. d m; ooncierto ? He will go. fil ird. Shall you come ? ^VendrdV. ? I shall come. i Yo vendre. Will it be necessary to go to the 1 Serd menester (or neceEario) ir ol market ? mere ado (plaia) ? It will be necessary to go to-marrow Serd menester (or necesario) ir mo- morning. nana por la manana. It will not be necessary to go there No seid menester (or necesario) if alld. Shall you see my father to-day ? 1 Vera V. d mi padre hoy ? I shall see him. Yo le vere. To lean. Apoyarse. Me apoyard To employ. Emplear. Empleard To try. Probar *. Probard. To run. Correr. Correrd. To expire. Espirar. Espirare The pocket-book. La cartera, (fern.) The beef. La vaca, (fern.) EXERCISES. 146 . Shall you have any books? — I shall have some — Who will give you any ? — My uncle will give me some. — When will your cousin have money ? — He will have some next m:iiith. — How much money shall you have? — I shall have thirty-five dollars. — Who will have good friends ? — The English will have some. — Will your father be at home this evening ? — He will be at home. — Will you be there ? — 1 shall also be there. — Will your uncle go out to-day ? — He will go out, if it is fine weather. — Shall you go out ? — 1 shall go out, if it does not rain. — Will you love my son ? — 1 shall love him, if he is good. — Will you pay your shoemaker ? — I shall pay him, if I receive my money. — Will you love my children ? — If they are good and assiduous I shall love them ; but if they are idle and naughty I shall despise and punish them. — Am I right in speaKing thus ? — You are not wrong. — Is your friend still writing ? — He is still writing. — Have you not done speak- mg ? — I shall soon have done. — Have our friends desne reading ?~ - Tliey will soon have done. — Has the tailor made my coat ? — He has not made it yet, but he will soon make it. — When will he make it ? — When he rhall have {tenga) time —When will you do vour exe»*cises 1 IfORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 199 — I shall do tliem when I shall have (tenga) time — When will your brother do his ? — He will do them next Saturday. — Wilt thou come to me, {d verme 1 ) — I shall come. — When wilt thou come ? — I shall come next Friday. — When have you seen my uncle ? — I saw him last Sun- day — Will your cousins g’o to the ball next Tuesday ? — They will go. — Will you come to my concert ? — I shall come, if 1 am not ill. 147. When will you send me the money which you owe me ?— J shal send it you soon. — Will your brothers send me the books which I have lent them ? — They will send them to you. — When will they send them to me ? — They will send them to you next monti. — Will you be able to pay me what you owe me ? — I shall not be able to pay it you, for I have lost all my money. — Will the American be able to pay for his shoes ? — He has lost his pocket-book, so that he will not be able to pay for them. — Will it be necessary to send for the physician ? — Nobody is ill, so that it will not be necessary send for him. — Will it be necessary to go to the market to-morrow V — It will be necessary to go (there,) for we want some beef, some b-ead, and some wine. — Shall you see your father to-day ? — I shall see him. — Where will he be ? — He will be at his counting-house. — W' 11 you go to the ball to-night ? — I shall not go, for I am too ill to go (out.) — Will your friend go ? — He will go, if you go. — Where wi 1 our neighbors go ? — They will go nowhere ; they will remain at home, for they have a good deal to do. FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— Leccion To belong. Do you belong? I do belong. Does that horse belong to your father ? It dees belong to him. To whom do these gloves belong ? They belong to the captains. Do these horses belong to the cap- tains ? They do belong to them. Cuadraghima octava, Ser de, Pertenccer a, I Pertenece V. ? Yo pertener.co. I Pertenece ese cabal lo d su paUre de V.? I Es ese caballo de su padre de V ? Si, es de dl. Es suyo. I De quien son estos guantes ?‘ Son de los capitaiies. I Son estos caballos de los capitanea Son de ellos. Son suyos. To suit. i Acomodar. Ajustar. Vemr. ( Convenir * 2, (like venir.) 200 FORTY-EIGHIH LESSON. Does that cl^th suit your brother? It suits him. Do those shoes suit your trothers? They suit them. Does it suit you to do that ? It suits me to do it Does it suit ycur cousin tc come with us? It does not suit him to go out. To succeed. Do you succeed in learning Spanish ? I succeed in it. 1 do succeed in learning it. Do these men succeed in selling their horses ? They succeed therein. I Conviene este pafio al heimauo de V.? Le conviene. I Acomodan (vienen) esos zapatos ^ sus lierinaijos de V. ? Les acomodan. Tes vienen. I Le conviene d V. hacer eso? Me conviene hacerlo. I Le conviene al primo de V ven* con nosotros? No le conviene salir. Conseguir 3, (see App.) hograr. I Consigue V. aprender el Espahol ? Lo consigo. Yo consigo aprenderle. I Consiguen estos hombrea vendei sus caballos ? Consiguen venderlos. To succeed. Do you succeed in doing that ? I succeed in it. Tener huen exito. Salir bten. Lograr. 1 1 Tiene V. buen exito en hacer eso ^ t t Le sale d V. bien hacer eso 7 t Teiigo buen exito en hacerlo. t Me sale bien hacerlo. To forget To clean. Tho inkstand. Olvidar 1. Limpiar 1. El tintero. Immediately, directly This instant, instantly Presently. I am going to do it. I will do it immediately. I am going to work. Inmediatamente. Luego. Al instante. De repente. Presenternente. Ahora. Luego Voy d hacerlo. Yo lo hard inmediatamente. Voy d trabajar. is there 7 Are there T There is not. There are not. Will there bo? There will bo» I I Hay 7 I No hay. I I Habrd ? 1 Hahrl BORTl EIGHTH LESSOR. 20 ] Was or were there)^ — ^has there been ? I'here was or were) — there has been. Is there any wine ? Tliere is some. There is not any. Are there any men ? There are some. There are not any. I Hubo 1 I Ha habido 1 Hubo. Ha habido. I Hay algun vino ? Hay un poco. No hay ningimo. I Hay algunos hombres ? Hay algunosr No hay ning^unos. I'.’iere are men who will not study. Is there any one ? \t 6 there to be many people at the ball ? There are to be a great many people (there.) Hay hombres que no quieren estudiai I Hay alguien ? i Hay alguno ? I Ha de haber mucha gente en e bade ? Ha de haber muclia (gente.) On credit. To sell on credit. The credit. Ready money. To buy for cash. To sell for cash. To pay down. Will you buy for cash ? Does it suit you to sell me on credit ? A1 fiado. Vender al fiado. El credito. Dinero contante. Comprar contante, (al contado.) Vender al contante, (al contado) Pagar dinero contante. I Quiere V. comprar al contado ? I Le conviene a V. vendermo a fiado, (d credito) ? To Jit, Does that coat fit me ? It fits you. That hat does not fit your brother It does not fit him. They fit me. That fits you very well. t Caerle a uno. (See App.) Sentar, (See App.) t I Me cae bien este vestido ? i Me sienta bien ? t Le cae bien d V. Le sienta d V. bieri. Ese sombrero no le sienta bien d sti hermano de V. No le sienta bien. t Me caen bien. t Eso le cae muy bien d V. To keep. You had better. I had better. He had better. Guardar 1. t Quedarse con. t V. hard, mejor, (haria mejor.) t Yo hard mejor, (haria mejor.; t 6l hard, mejor, (haria mejor.) 202 FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. Instead of keeping vonr horse, you had better sell it. Instead of selling his hat, he had bet- ter keep it. Will you keep the horse ? I shall keep it. ¥ ou must not keep my money. To please, to be pleased. To please some one. Does that book please you ? It pleases me much. I will do what you please. You are pleased to say so. V/hat is your pleasure ? What do you want ? What do you say ? t En vez de guardar su caballo, V hard mejor en venderle. t En vez de vender su sombrsn hard mejor en quedarse con 61 I Guardard V. el caballo ? t ^ Se quedard V. con el caballo ? I Yo le guardare. t Me quedard con I V. no debe guardar mi dinero. Gustar. Gustarle d uno. Gustar. Agradar. Placer d uno t [ Le gusta a V. ese libro ? t Me gusta mucho. t Yo hard lo que V. guste, (subj.) t Es cortesia de V. el decir oso. t V. tiene la bondad de decir eso. t I Que man da V.? I Qiie gusta V. ? I Que dice V. ? i Que quiere V. ? To please. liow do you please yourself here ? I please myself very well. Ohs. A The impersonal it is is son in the plural. Whose book is this ? It is mine, (it belongs to me.) Are these your shoes? They are ours, (they belong to us.) Obs. B. When the possessive pn belonging to it, it loses the article. I t Irlc a uno. Pasarlo. Estar ( t ^ Como le va d V. aqui ? ( I Como lo pasa V. ? I t A mi me va bien. rendered by es in the singular, and b) I De quien es este libro ? Es mio. I Son de VV. estos zapatos ? Son nuestros. )noun comes after ser, (to be,) meaning Ir is they who have seen him It is your friends who are in the rght. Ji is I who. It is you who. It is they who. t Elios son los que le han visto. t Los amigos de V sou los que tienoii razon. Yo soy quien. V. es quien. W son nuienes. 1 Elios son quienes. M ino —mine, (belonging to me.) 3urs —ours, (belonging to us.) My fj icnd’s, (belonging to my friend.) El mio — los mios. Mio — ^mios. El nuestro — los nuestros. Nuestro - nuestros. Es de mi am^s^o. j^OKTY -EIGHTH LESSON; 203 Is that your son ? I i ese el hijo de \ ? Is that yoiu child? j ^ Es de V. ese nifio 1 Obs. C. When the demonstrative pronouns this and that are not f )ilov,^ed a noun, they are rendered in Spanish by esto, eso, and aquello, meaning this or that thing ; but when the word pointed out in English by this ox that is understood, it should be expressed in Spanish ; or another turn must be given to the sentence, so as to have the demonstrative pronoun immedi- ately before the word it points out. Therefore the last two sentences above 4;ould be constructed thus : Is that boy your son ? — i Es ese muchacho el Lijo da V. ? Is that child yours ? — i Es de V. ese niiio ? EXERCISES. 148. To whom does tliat horse belong ? — It belongs to the English cap- tain whose son has written a note to you. — Does this money belong to you ? — It does belong to me. — From whom have you received it ? — I have received it from the men whose children you have seen. — Whose horses are those ? — They are ours. — Have you told your brother that I am waiting for him here ? — I have forgotten to tell him so, (Zo.) — Is it your father or mine who is gone to Berlin ? — It is mine. — Is it your baker, or that of our friend, who has sold you bread on credit ? — It is ours. — Is that your son ? — He is not mine, he is my friend’s. — Where is yours ? — He is at Paris. — Have you brought me the book wiiich you promised me ? — I have forgotten it. — Has your uncle brought you the pocket-books which he promised you ? — He has forgotten to bring me them, {las,) — Have you already written to your friend ? — I have not yet had time to write to him. — Have you forgotten to write to your relation ? — I have not forgotten to write to him.-— Does this cloth suit you ? — It does not suit me ; have you no other ? — I have some other ; but it is dearer than this. — Will you show it me ? —I will show it you. — Do these shoes suit your uncle ? — They do not suit him, because they are too dear. — Are these the shoes of which you have spoken to us ? — They are the same. — Whose shoes are Uxese ? — They belong to the nobleman whom you have seen this morning in my warehouse. — Does it suit you to come with us ? — I ices not suit me. — Does it suit you to go to the market ? — It does no* suit me to go (thither.) — Did you go on foot to Germany ? — It does not suit me to go on foot, so that I went thither in a CDach. — (Lesson KLIV.) 149. What is your pleasure. Sir? — I am inquiring after your fatlier. is ho at home ? — No, Sir, he is gine out. — What do you say ? — I toll yes 204 FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. that he is gone out. — Will you wait till he comes bavk, {el vuelva 'j (Lesson XXXVI.) — I have no time to wait. — Does this merchant sell on credit ? — He does not sell on credit. — Does it suit you to buy fo* cash ? — It does not suit me. — Where did you buy these pretty knives — I bought them of the merchant whose warehouse you saw yesterday. — Has he sold them to >ou on creait ? — He has sold them to me for 'ash. — Do you often buy for cash ? — Not so often as you. — Have you forgotten any tiling here 1 — I have forgotten nothing. — Does it suit you to learn tliis by heart ? — I have not much time to study, so that it does not suit me to learn it by heart. — Has that man tried to speak to your father ? — He has tried to speak to him, but he has not suc- ceeded in it. — Have you succeeded in writing an exercise? — I have succeeded in it. — Have those merchants succeeded in selling their horses ? — They have not succeeded therein. — Have you tried to clean my inkstand ? — I have tried, but I have not succeeded in it. — Do your children succeed in learning English? — They do succeed in it. — Is there any wine in this cask ? — There is some in it. — Is there any vinegar in this glass ? — There is none in it. — Is wine or cider in it ? — There is neither wine nor cider in it. — What is there in it ? — There is some vinegar in it. 150. Are there any men in your warehouse ? — There are some there.-* Is there any one in the warehouse ? — There is no one there. — Wer<. there many people in the theatre ? — There were many (there.) — WiL there be many people at your ball ? — There will be many (there.) — Are there many children that will not play ? — There are many that will not study, but all will play. — Hast thou cleaned my trunk ? — I have tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. — Do you intend buying an umbrella ? — I intend buying one, if the merchant sells it me on credit. — Do you intend to keep mine ? — I intend to give it you back, (Lesson XXXIX., page 154,) if I buy one. — Have you returned the books tc my brother ? — I have not returned them to him yet. — How long do you intend keeping them ? — I intend keeping them till next Saturday. — How long do you intend keeping my horse ? — I intend keeping it till my father returns, {vuelva .) — Have you cleaned my knife ? — 1 have not hrtd time yet, but I will do it this instant. — Have you made a hre, (encendido la candela 1) — Not yet ; but I will make one presently.— Why have you not worked ? — I have not yet been able. — What had you to do ? — I had to clean your carpet, and to mend your thread stockings. — Do you intend to sell your coat ? — I intend keeping it, for I want it. — Instead of keeping it you had better sell it. — Do you seli your horses ? — I do nrt sell them. — Instead of keeping them you hac FOKTY-NINTH LESSON, 205 setter sell them. — Does our friend keep his parasol ? — He does keep it , nut instead of keeping it he had better sell it, for it is worn out. — Does your son tear his book ? — He does tear it ; but ho is wrong in doing so, for instead of tearing it he had better read it. FORTY-NINTH LESSON.— Leccio7i To go away. When will you go away? ! will go soon. By and by. He will go away soon, (by and by.) We will go away to-morrow. They will go to-morrow I'hou wilt go immediately. When. To become What will become of you if .you lose your money ? do not know what will become of me. What will become of him ? What will become of us ? I do not know what will become of them. The turn. My turn. In my turn. In his turn, lu my brothel’s turn Each in his turn. Cuadragesima nona Irse *. March arse. H.ess XLIV.) I Cuando se ird,, (orse marchara V ?) Pronto me ire, (or me marchare ) r hue go. ) t De aqui a poco. ^ t Dentro de poco. ! se ird (or so marchar*^^ luego. i Nos iremos (nos marcharemoH) ma I nan a. So iran (se marcharan) mahana. Te iras (te marchards) inmediata- mente. j Cuando. Hacerse de. Ser de. (Less. XLIV.) Suceder. t I Que se hard de V si pierde sv dinero 7 t I Que le suceder d d V. si pierdt su dinero 7 t Yo no se lo que se hard de mi. t Yo no se Zo que serd de mi. I I Que serd. de el ? t ^ Que serd de nosotros ? t Yo no se lo que se hard, de clloe t Yo no se lo que sera de ellos El turno. Mi turno. A mi turno. t Cuando d mi me toque. A su turnc. t Cuando d. €[ le toque. A1 turno de mi hermano. t Cuando le toque d, mi hermano Cada uno d, su turno. t Cuando d cada mio le tonur ! I ! 1 , ! S 206 FORTY- KINTH LESSON. Wlien it comes to your turn Our turn will come To take a turn, (a walk.) Ho has gone to take a walk. To walk round the garden. Behind. To run A blow. A knock A stab. A clap. A slap. Have you given that man a blow? t have given him one. A blow with a stick. A kick, (with the foot.) A blow with the fist. A stab of a knife. A shot, or the report of a gun. The shot of a pistol. A glance of the eye. A clap of thunder. t Cuando sea el turno do V t Cuando le toque d. V. Nuestro turno vendrd.. t Nos tocard d nosotros. t Dar una vuelta, (un passo ) f Ir d pasear. 1 t Ha ido d dar una vuelta, (un pesaa ^ t Dar una vuelta en el jardin. ( t Dar un paseo en el jardin Detras de Tras Correr. Un golpo. Un porraic Una punalada. Una herida. Una palmada. Una bofetada I Ha dado V. un golpo -(un Dorraz j' i ese hombre ? Si ; or, Yo le he dado (uno.) t Un palo Un garrotazo t Un puntapid. t Un punetazo. Una punada t Una cuchillada. t Un tiro. Un canonazo. t Un pistoletazo. t Una ojeada. Una mirada t Un trueno. To give a cut with a knife. To give a man a blow with a stick. To give a man a kick. To give a man a blew with the fist. To pull. To draw. To shoot. To fire. To fire a gun. To fire a pistol To fire at some one I iiav3 firea at that bird. I have fired twice. [ have fired three times. ( have fired several times. How many times have you fired ? How many times have you fired at tliat bird ? Dar una cuchillada. t Dar de palos d un hombre. Apaiear Dar un puntapid d un hombre Dar un punetazo d un hombre. Tirar. Sacar Disparar. Hacer fuego. Disparar un fusil, (or un caiion.; Disparar una pistola. t Disparar un tiro d alguno, ,or e uno.) Tirar un tiro d alguno, (or d uno.) t He disparado un tiro d ese pljaro t He tirado un tiro d ese pajaro t He tirado dos tiros. He tirado tres tiros. He tirado varios tiros, t I Cuantas veces ha tirado V 7 t I Cuantas vecos ha tirado V. a ese pdjaro ? FORTY-NINTH LESSON 207 %. have fired at it several times. . have heard a shot. I have heard the report of a pistol. Wo Jiave heard a clap of thunder t Le he tirado varies tirce. He oido un tiro. He oido un pistoletaza Hemos oido un trueno. The fist. To cast an eye upon some one^ or something. I have cast an eye upon that book. i have cast an eye upon it. I El puno. Echar una ojeada (or mirada) a alguno, (or alguna cosa.) He echado una ojeada (una mirada i d ese libro. i He echado una mirada a €\. Has that man gone away? He has gone away. Have your brothers gone away 1 They have gone away. They have not gone away. Have they gone away ? They were not willing to go away. I Se ha marchado ese hombre ? El se ha marchado. I Se han ido sus hermanos de V ? Se han ido, (marchado.) No se han ido, (marchado.) ^Se han marchado ellos? No querian marcharso. No quisi^ron march arse. EXERCISES. 151. Are you going away already ? — I am not going yet. — When will that man go away ? — He will go presently. — Will you go away soon 1 — I shall go away next Thursday. — When will your friends go away V — They will go away next month. — When wilt thou go away ? — I will go away instantly. — Why has your father gone away so soon ? — He has promised his friend to be at his house at a quarter to nine, so that he went away early in order to keep (cumplir con) what he has promised. — When shall we go av/ay ? — ^We shall go away to-morrow. — Shall we start (partir) early? — We shall start at five o’clock in the morning. — When will you go av/ay ? — I shall go away as soon as I have done {hay a acabado de) writing. — When will your children go away ? — They will go as soon as they have done {hay an acabado) their exercises. — Will you go when I shall go, {vaya 7) — I shall go away when you go, vaya.) — Will our neighbors soon go away ? — They will go away when they have (hayan) done speaking. — What will become of your son if he does not study ? — If he dofts not study he will learn nothing. — What will become of yDu if you lose your money? — I do not know i^’hat will become of me. — What will become of your friend if he loses sis pocket-book ? — I do not kiow what will become of him if he loses 208 FORTY-NINTH LESSON. it. — What has become of your son ? — I do not know what has become of him. — Has he enlisted ? — He has not enlisted. — What will bocomc of us if our friends go away ? — I do not know what will become of us if they go away. — W'hat has become of your relations ? — They have gone away. 152 . Jo you intend buying a horse ? — I cannot buy one, for I have not }et received my money. — Must I go to the theatre? — You must net go (thither,) for it is very bad weather. — Why do you not go to my brother ? — It does not suit me to go to hun, for I cannot yet pay him what I owe him. — Why does your servant give that man a cut with his knife? — He gives him a cut, because the man has given him a blow with the fist. — Which of these two pupils begins to speak ? — The one who is studious begins to speak. — What does the other do who is not so ? — He also begins to speak, but he knows neither how to write nor to read. — Does he not listen to what you tell him ? — Ho does not listen to it, if I do not give him a beating, {azotes .) — Why do these children not work ? — Their master has given them blows with his fist, so that they will not work. — Why has he given them blows with his fist ? — Because they have been disobedient. — Have you fired a gun ? — I have fired three times. — At what did you fire ? — I fired at a bird. — Have you fired a gun at that man ? — I have fired a pistol at him. — Why have you fired a pistol at him ? — Because he has given me a stab with his knife. — How many times have you fired at that bird ? — I have fired at it twice. — Have you killed it ? — I have killed it at the second shot, {al segnndo tiro .) — Have you killed that bird at tlie first shot, {al 'primer tiro 1 ) — I have killed it at the fourth. — Do you fire at the birds which you see upon the trees, or at those which you see in the gardens ? — I fire neither at those which I see upon tho D’ees nor at those which I see in the gardens, but at those which t oerceive on the castle behind the wood. 153 . How many times have the enemies fired at us ? — They have fired at us several times. — Have they killed any one ? — They have killed no one. — Have you a wish to fire at that bird ? — I have a desire to fire at it. — Why do you not fire at those birds ? — I cannot, for I liave a sore finger. — When did the captain fire ? — He fired Qiizo fuego) when rds soldiers fired, {lo hicieron .) — How many birds have you shot at ? — f have shot at all that I have perceived, but I have killed none, because iry gun is good for nothing. — Have you cast an eye upon that man { have cast an eye upon him. — Has he seen you ? — He has not seen Tie, for he has sore eyes. — Have you drunk of that wine ? — T liave FIFTIETH LESSON. 209 arunk of it, {un ;;oco,) and it has done me good. — What have you done tvitJi my book ? — I have put it upon your trunk. — Am I to answer you ? — You will answer me when it comes to your turn, {cuando le totjue .) — Is it my brother’s turn ? — When it comes to his turn (le toque) shall ask (se lo) him, for — each in his turn. — Have you Uiken a walk Uiis morning ? — 1 have taken a walk round the garden. — Where is your uncle gone to ? — He is gone to take a walk. — Why do you run ? — I run because I see my best friend. — Who runs behind us ? — Our dog runs behind us. — Do you perceive that bird ? — I perceive it behind the tree. — Why have your brothers gone away ? — They have gone away, because they did not wish to be seen by the man whose dog they have killed. FIFTIETH LESSON.-^-Deccion Quincuagesima, To hear of. Have you heard of your brother ? I heard of him.' Since. Ib it long since you have breakfast- ed? How long is it since you breakfasted? it is not long since I have breakfast- ed. (t is a great while Vince. ' It is a short while since. How long is it since you heard of your brother? It is a year since I heard of him. Oir hahlar de. Tenet noticias de Saber de. Ha oido V. hablar de su hermano de V.? ^ I Ha sabido V. de su hermano ? I Ha tenido V noticias del hermano . deV.? He oido hablar de dl. He sabido de dl. He tenido noticias do el, (noticias suyas.) I Desde. I I Hace mucho que V. ha almorza- do? 1 1 Hay mucho tiemp© desde que V ha almorzado? t ^Cuanto hace que V. ha almorza* do? 1 1 Cuanto hay que V. ha almorzado 1 f No hace mucho quo yo he almor- zado. I t No hay mucho tiempo que yo ha L almorzado. Mucho tiempo hace, (hay.) Poco tiempo hace, (hay.) I Cuanto hace que V. ha tenido nc- ticias de su hermano de V. ? Hace un aho que no he sabido de Ol / 210 FIFTIETH LESSON. It is only a year since. It is more than a year since. More than. Wore than nine. More than twenty times. 1 1 is hardly six months since Ago, A few hours ago. Half an hour ago. Two years ago. Two hours and a half ago. A fortnight ago. A fortnight. Have you been long in Spain? No hace mas de un ano. Hay mas de un ano. Mas de. (See Lesson XXIX. i Mas de nueve. Mas de veinte veces. t Hace d peiias seis meses, t Hay d penas seis meses. Pasado. t Hace pocas horas. Hay (ha) pocii horas. t Hace media hora. Hay media ho ra. t Hace dos ahos. Hay dos anoe t Hace (hay) dos horas y media, t Hace (hay) quince dias, (dos se- man as.) Quince dias (dos semanas.) ( I Ha estado V. mucho tiempo en Es- I paha ? ] i^Hace mucho tiempo que V esU I en Espana ? # Ods. A, In English the state of existence of action, when in its duia- tion, is always expressed in the perfect tense, while in Spanish it is ex- pressed by the present tense. He has been in Madrid these three j Hace tres ahos que estd en Madrid, years. I have been living here these two t Hace dos ahos que vivo (que estoy) years. aqui. Rem. — The word tiempo is often understood. How long have you had that hat ? t ^ Cuanto hace que tieiie V esc sombrero ? I have had it these five years. t Hace cinco ahos que le tengo. How long 1 (since when ?) How long has he been here ? These three days. Since the third of this month. This month. Since the first of the month. I nave seen him more than twenty iiraes. I Cuanto hace 7 i Cuanto hay (jha) 1 I Desde cuando 7 t I Cuanto hace (hay) que estd aqnl 5 I I Desde cuando estd aqm ? t Hace (hay) tres dias. t Desde el tres de este mes, t Hace (hay) un mes. t Desde el primero de este mes. Le he visto mas de veinte vecee FIFTIETH LESSON. 211 It is six moutiis since I spoke to him. Since I saw you it has rained very much. It is more than a year since I heard of him. Hace eeis meses que le hat>l^. Hace seis meses que le he hablado. Desde que le vi d V. ha llovido mu- ch o. Hace mas (or hay mas) de un ahr que he sabido de cl. C En este momento. Ahora mismo. (relating to time.) ^ Al 7no?nento. Alpunto. Alinstante ( Poco ha. Poco hace. To have just | t Acahar de. Ohs. B To express an action recently past, the Spaniards make use of the verb acahar, (to ’finish,) followed by de, (of,) and the infinitive mood oi the verb. t Acabo de ver a su hermano de V t Acaba de escribir, t Los hombres acaban de llegar. I Hace mucho tiempo que aguarda ese hombre ? Ahora mismo llega. t Acaba de llegar ahora. / have just seen your brother ie has just done writing. The men have just arrived. Hao that man been waiting long ? He has but just come. To do one’s best. I will do my best. He will do his best I do my best t Haccr uno lo mejor que puede. t Hacer todo su poder. Empeharse en. t Yo hare lo mejor que pueda. ) ^ . . t 6l hard lo mejor que pueda. S i t Yo hago lo mejor que puedo. I t Yo me empeuo. To spend {money.) How much have you spent to-day? He has fifty dollars a month to live upon. Gastar {dinero.) I Cuanto ha gastado V. hoy ? t Tlene cincuenta pesos de renta al mes. ilavo the horses been found ? They have been found. The men have been seen. Our children have been praised and rev,"arded, because they have been good and studious. By whom have they been rewarded? By whom have we been blamed? I Se han hallado los caballos ? Se han hallado. Los hombres han sido vistos Nuestros ninos haii sido alabadisy recompensados, porque han side buenos y estudiosos. I Tor quien han sido recompensados 1 I For quien hemos sido vit uporados 1 To pass. Before, Pasar. Antes. Ante. Delantc. Par, 212 FIFTIETH LESSON. Ohs C. Before is expressed in Spanish by antes when it denotes priorit} of time ; by delante, or sometimes por, when it designates the place ; aiif' by ante when it signifies in the presence of ; as, before me, ante mi. Before ten o’clock. To pass before some one To pass before a place. A place. I have passed before the theatre. He has passed before me. Antes de las diez. Pasar delaiile de alguno, (de uno Pasar delante de (pOr) un iugar. Uu lugar. He pasado delante de (por^ d teatro Ha pasado delante de mi. To spend time in something. What do you spend your time in ? I wspend my time in studying. What has he spent his time in ? What shall we spend our time in ? Pasar {emplear or gastar) el tiem^ po cn alguna cosa. t I En que pasa V. su tiempo ? t Yo empleo mi tiempc en estudiar t I En que ha empleado su tiempo 1 t i En que pasarenios nuestro tiem po ? To miss, to fail. The merchant has failed to bring the money. You have missed your turn. V"ou have failed to come to me this morning. To be good for something. To he good for nothing. Of what use is that ? It is good for nothing. A good-for-nothing fellow. (s the gun which you have bought a good one ? [1 is werth nothing, (good for noth- ing.) To throw away. Have you thrown away any thing ? I have not thrown away any thing. The store. The shop. Storekeeper. Shopkeeper. Perder. Omitir. Faltat Descuidar El comerciante ha faltado d traer el dinero. V. ha perdido su turno. V. ha faltado d (V. se ha descuidado de) venir d mi casa esta manana. Ser bueno para algo, (para alguna cosa.) Servir de algo. No ser hueno para nada, (para nin- guna cosa.) No servir de nada, (or para nada.) I Para que (de que) sirve eso ? Eso no es bueno para nada. t Eso de nada sirve. Un bribon. I Es bueno el fusil que V ha com prado ? No es bueno para naaa. t No sirve de nada. Tirar. Arrojar. Desechai I Ha tirade V. algo, (alguna cosa) ! Nada he tirado. La tienda. Tendero. M ereader FIFTIETH LESSON. 213 EXERCISES. 154 . Have you heard of any one ? — I have not heard of any one, for i oave not gone out this morning. — Have you not heard of tlie man wlio has killed a soldier ?— I have not heard of him.— Have you heard of my brothers ? — I have not heard of them. — Ot whom has your cousin n^^rd ? — He has heard of his friend who is gone to America. — Is it long since he heard of him ? — It is not long since he heard of him. — How long is it ?— It is only a month. — Have you been long in Paris ? —These three years. — Has your brother been long in London ? — He has oeen there these ten years. — How long is it since you dined ? — It is long since I dined, but it is not long since I supped. — How long 8 it since y^ou supped ? — It is half an hour. — How long have you had these books? — I have had them these three months. — How long is it since your cousin set out ? — It is more than a year since he set out. — What is become of the man who has lent you money ? — I do not know what is become of him, for it is a great while since I saw him. — Is it long since you heard of the soldier who gave your friend a cut with the knife ? — It is more than a year since I heard of him. — How long have you been learning Spanish ? — I have been learning it only these two Oronths. — Do you know already how to speak it ? — You see that I am beginning to speak it. — Have the children of the English noblemen been learning it long ? — They have been learning it these three years, and they do not yet begin to speak. — Why do they not know how to speak it ? — They do not know how to speak it, because they are learning it badly. — Why do they not learn it well ? — They have not a good master, so that they do not learn it well. 155 . Is it long since you saw the young man wlio learned German with the master with whom we learned it ? — I have not seen liim for nearly a year. — How long is it since that child ate ? — It ate a few minutes ago. — How long is it since those children drank ? — They drank a quarter of an hour ago. — How long has your friend been in Spain ? — He has been there this month. — How often have you seen the king, {al rey ?) — I saw him more than ten times when I was in Madrid. — Wlien did you meet my brother ? — I met him a fortnight ago. — Wliere did you meet him ? — I met him before the theatre.— Did he do you any ton ? — He did me no harm, for he is a very good boy. — Where are my gloves ? — They (los han) have thrown them away. — Have tlie horses been found ? — They have been found. — V/here have they been found ? — They have been found behind the wood, on this side of the read. — Have you been seen by anybody ? — I have been seen by no* 214 FIFTIETH LESSON. body. — Do you expect any one 7 — 1 expect my cousin tlie captain. - Have you not seen him ? — I have seen him this morning ; he has passed before my warehouse. — What does this young man wait for ? — He waits for money. — Art thou waiting for any thing ? — I am waiting for my book. — Is this young man waiting for his money ? — He is waiting for it. — Has the king passed here, (por aqun)—lle has not passed here, but before tlie theatre. — Has he not passed before tho •'.astle ? — He has passed there, but I have net seen him. 156. What do you spend your time in 7 — I spend my cime in studying. — What does your brother spend his time in ? — ^He spends his time in reading and playing. — Does this man spend his time in working ? — He is a good-for-nothing fellow ; lie spends his tfne in drinking and playing. — What do your children spend their time in ?— They spend their time in learning. — Can you pay me what you owe me ?— I cannot pay it you, for the merchant has failed to bring me my money. — Why have you breakfasted without me ? — You failed to come at nine o’clock, so that we have breakfasted without you. — Has the storekeeper brought you the gloves which you bought at his store ? — He has failed to bring them to me. — Has he sold them to you on credit ? — He has sold them to me, on the contrary, for cash. — Do you know those men ? — I do not know them ; but I believe that they are good-for-nothing fellows, for they spend their time in playing. — Why did you fail to come to my father this morning ? — The tailor did not bring me the coat which ho promised me, (me habia prometido,) so tliat I could not go to him — Who is the man who has just spoken to you ? — He is a merchant. — What has the shoemaker just brought ? — He has brought the shoes which he has made us. — Who are the men that have just arrived ? — They are Russians. — Where did your uncle dine yesterday? — lie dined at home. — How much did he spend ? — He spent five shillings.— How much has he a month to live upon ? — He has two hundred dol- lars a month to live upon. — Do you throw your hat away ? — I do not throw it away, for it fits me very well. — How much have you spent to-day ?--I have not spent much; I have spent only two shillings. — Do you spend every day as much as that ? — I sometimes spend more than that. — Has that man been waiting long ? — He has but just come, —What does he wish ? — He wishes to vspeak to you, — Are yon willing do that ? — I am willing to do it. FIFIY- FIRST LESSON 215 FIFI’Y-FIRST LESSON . — Leccion Quincuagesmia 'primera. Far ‘ioit far r (meaning what distance?) How far is it from here to Pans? (s it far from here to Paris ? It is far. It is not far. Ilow many miles is it? It is twenty miles. A mile. It is almost two hundred miles from here to Paris. It is nearly a hundred miles from Berlin to Vienna. I Lijos. Distante, Remoto. ^ f I Cuanto dista ? (Dislar.) I Quo distancia hay 7 (Imp verb— ^ see Appendix.) I Estar lejos ? ^ Cuanto hay ? . I Hay mucho 7 I Cuanto hay de aqui d Paris? I Estd Paris Idjos de aqui ? Estd lejos I No estd lejos I Cuantas millas dista? I Cuanto dista 7 Veinte millas, Una milla. De aqui a Paris hay casi doscienta# millas. Hay cerca de cien millas de Berlir d Viena. From. From Venice. From London. I am from Paris. What countryman are you ? Are you from France ? I am. The Castilian. He is a Castilian, (from Castile.) The king. The philosopher. The preceptor, the tutor The professor. The landlord, the innkeeper De. De Venecia- De L6ndres. Yo soy de Paris, t Soy hijo de Paris t i De que pais es V. ? I De donde sois ? i De que tierra t t i Es V. Frances? • I Sois Franceses ? Si, senor. El Castellano. ^11 es Castellano. El rey. El fiMsofo. El preceptor. El ayo. El maestro El profesor. El catedrdtico Posadero. Mesonero Ilostolero Huesped. Casero. Patron. Are you a Biscayan? Whence do you come ( I come from Bilboa. ( ^ Es V. Vizcaino ? ' I De donde viene V ? ' Vengo de Bilbdo- 216 fiity-first lesson. To Jly, to run away, I run away, thou runaest away, he runs away, you run away. We run away, you run away, they run away, you run away. Why do you fly ? I fly because I am afraid. I Huir Huirse *, (see App., ver&a in uir.) Escaparse. Fug arse. 1 Yo huyo, td huyes, el huye, V. huy*^ Nosotros huimos, vosotros huis, elloss huyen, VV huyen. I Porque huye V. 1 Yo huyo porque tengo miedo To assure. j Asegurar. 1 assure you that he is arrived. | t Yo aseguro d, V. que el ha llegado. Ohs. When the verb to be is used instead of to havoy as in the fore- going example, it is translated haber. To hear, (to have knowledge of.) Have you heard nothing new ? 1 have heard nothing new. Oir *. Saber (See App. for these two verbs.) t I No sabe V. nada de nuevo? t Yo no he sabido nada de nuevo To happen. The happiness, fortune. Unhappiness, misfortune. A great misfortune has happened. He has met with a great misfortune. What has happened to you ? Nothing has happened to me. I have met with your brother. The poor man. I have cut his finger. Von have broken the man’s neck. To pity. Do you pity that man ? i pity him with all my heart. With all my heart. I Acaecer. Acontecer. Suceder I Felicidad. Dicha. Fortuna. Gracia. Infelicidad. Desdicha. Desgracia Infortunio. Ha sucedido una gran desgracia. t Le ha sucedido un grande inforti> nio. I Que le ha sucedido d, V. ? I Que os ha acontecido ? No me ha sucedido nada. Me he encontrado con el hermanc 1 de V. I El pobre hombre. I t Yo le he cortado el dedo. t V. le ha torcido (rornpido) el pe» cuezo al hombre. Compadecer. Compadecerse de. (See verbs in cer, in App.) Tener Idstima. I Se compadece V. de ese hombre ? Le compadezco con todo mi corazou J Con (de) todo mi corazon t t Con toda mi alma FIFT^'FIRST LESSON. 217 To complain. Do you complain ? S do not complain. Do you complain of my friend ? I do complain of him. I do not complain of him. To dare. To spoil, to damage. To serve, to wait upon. Dost thou wait upon, (serve ?) L do wait upon, (I serve.) Ele waits upon, (he serves.) To serve some one, (to wait upon some one.) Has he been in your service ? Has he served you f How long has he been in your ser- vice 1 The service Quejarse dc Lamentarse de I Se queja V.? No me quejo. I Se queja V. de mi amigo ? t De veras (ciertamente) me que^o de a No me quejo de a Osar. Atreverse. Arriesgarse Echar d perder. Inutilizar. Servir * (See Appendix.) Estar en servicio de otro, d tru mandado.) I Sirves tii ? Yo sirvo. Estoy sirvdendo. i:i sirve. 6l esta sirviendo. Servir d alguno. Estar sirviendo d alguno. Estar al servicio de alguno. [Ha estado dl en el servicio do V ? I Ha servido d V. ? I Ha estado sirviendo d V. ? I Cuanto tiempo ha servido dl d V. ? I Cuanto tiempo ha estado sirviendo d V.? El servicio. To offer. Do you ofFei '( I do offer. Thou offerest He offers. Tc confide, to trust, to tnti ast. l\) you trust mo with your money ? I d) trust you with it. I have intrusted that man with a secret The secret To keep any thing secret 10 Ofrecer *. (See App., verbs m cer.) I Ofrece V. ? [ Ofreceis vos, (voso- tros) Yo ofrezco. t De veras ofrezco. Tii ofreces. El ofrece. Confiar a, {de, en.) Fiarse de, (en.) t Contar con. Hacer confianza de I Me confia V. su dinero ? Yo se le confio d V. Yo he confiado un secreto d ese hombre. El secreto. Guard ar secreto. Tener secreta algiina coaa. 218 FIFTY-FIiiRT LESSON. I have kept it secret. He guardado secret©. Lo he teiiido secret© To take care of something Do you take care of your clothes ? i Jo take care of them. ' Will you take care of my horse? I will take care of k. To leave. To squander y to dissipate. Me has squandered all his wealth To hinder. To prevent. To keep from. V ou hinder me from sleeping. To purchase. Cuidar de alguna cosa. Tener cuidado de. ^Cuida V de sus vestidos, (sa icf-a! Si, yo cuido de ellos, (de ella.) I Quiore V. cuidar mi caballo ? I Quiere V. cuidar de mi caballo Si, yo cuidare ae ^I. Dejar. Malgastar. Disipar Desperdiciar. Derrochar fil ha disipado todo su caudak Impedir *. Embarazar Estorhar. No dejar V. no me deja dormir Me impide dormir. K Comprar. UQ hi' ‘ Hacer algunas compras 1 1 1 1 « j i Qu® ^21 comprado Yt. hey ? What have you purchased to day ? ^ ^ y . I have purchased two handkerchiefs. | Yo he comprado dos panuelos Have you purchased any thing to- ^ i Ha comprado V. hoy alguna cosa ‘ f t i Hahecho V. hoy algunas compras 1 day? Most lovely, charming. Admirably. That hat fits you admirably Tliat coat fits him very well. It is charming. Preciosisimo. Amabilisimo. Encantador. Admirablemente. t Ese sombrero le va (sienta) d. V muy bien. Esa casaca le sienta perfectamente Esa casaca le va como pintada. Eso es hechicero, encantador, deli- cioso. t Mono, divertido, gracioso EXERCISES. 157 . How far is it from Paris to London ?— It is nearly two hundred aiiles from Paris to London. — Is it far from here to Berlin ? — It is far —Is it far from here to Vienna ? — It is almost a hundred and FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. 219 raiLes from here to Vienna. — Is it farther from Paris to Blois than fron: Orleans to Paris ?— It is farther from Orleans to Paris than from Paris to Blois. How far is it from Paris to Berlin ? — It is almost a hundred and thirty miles from Paris to Berlin.— Do you intend to go to Paris goon ? — I intend to go thither soon. — Why do you wish to go tliis time ? In order to buy good books and good gloves there, and to seo my good friends. — Is it long since you were there ? — It is nearly a year since I was there. — Do you not go to Italy this year ? — 1 do nol go tliither, for it is too far from here to Italy.— Who are the men that hav^e just arrived ? — They are philosophers. — Of what country are they? — They are from London. — Who is the man who has just started ? — He is an Englishman, who has squandered away all his fortune in France. — ^What countryman are you ? — I am a Spaniard, and my friend is an Italian. — Are you from Cadiz ? — No, I am from Madrid. — How much money have your children spent to-day ? — They have spent but little ; they have spent but one dollar. — Where did you dine yesterday ? — I dined at the innkeeper’s. — Did you spend much ? — I spent a dollar and a half. — Has the king passed here ? — He has not passed here, but before the theatre. — Have you seen him ? — I have seen him. — Is it the first time you have seen him ? — It is not the first time, for I have seen him more than twenty times. 15S. Why does that man run away ? — He runs away because he is afraid. — Why do you run away ? — I run away because I am afraid. — Of whom are you afraid ? — I am afraid of the man who does not love me. — Is he your enemy? — I do not know whether he is my enemy ; but I fear all those who do not love me, for if they do me no harm, they will do me no good. — Do you fear my cousin ? — I do not fear him, for he has never done anybody harm. — You are in the wrong to run away before that man, for I assure you that he is a very good man, who has never done harm to any one. — Of whom has your brother heard ? — He has heard of a man to whom a misfortune has happened. — Why have your scholars not done their exercises ? — I assure you that they have done them, and you are mistaken if you beheve that they have not done them. — What have you done with my book ? — I assure you that I have not seen it. — Has your son had mv Knives ? — He assures me that he has not had them. — Has your uncle arrived already ? — He has not arrived yet. — Vv^ill you wait till he returns, {que el llegue cannot wait, for I have a good deal to do. — Have you not heard any thing new ? — I have heard nothing new. — Has the king arrived ? — They say that he has arrived. — What has happened to you ? — A great misfortune has happened to me. — What ? 220 FIFTY 'FIRST LESSOK, — 1 have met with my greatest enemy, who has given me a blow with a slick. — Then I pity you with all my heart. — Why do you pity that man — I pity him because you have broken his neck. — Wliy do you complain of my friend ? — I complain of him because he has cut my finger. — Does that man serve you well ? — He does serve me well, but he spends too much. — Are you willing to take tliis servant ? — I am willing to take him, if he will serve me. — Can I take that servant ? — You can take him, for he has served me very well. — How long is it since he is out of {que el dejo) your service ? — It is but two months since. — Has he served you long ? — He has served me (for) six years. 159. Do you offer me any thing ? — I have nothing to offer you, — What Joes my friend offer you ? — He offers me a book. — Have the Parisians offered you any thing ? — They have offered me wine, bread, and good beef. — Why do you pity our neighbor ? — I pity him, because he has trusted a merchant of Paris with his money, and the man (y este) will not return it to him. — Do you trust this man with any thing ? — I do not trust him with any thing. — Has he already kept any thing from /ou ? — I have never trusted him with any thing, so that he has never Kept any thing from me. — Will you trust my father with your money ? —1 will trust him with it. — With what secret has my son intrusted you ? — I cannot intrust you with that with which he has intrusted me, for he has desired me {encatgado) to keep it secret. — Whom do you intrust with your secrets ? — I intrust nobody with them, so that nobody xnows them. — Has your brother been rewarded ? — He has. on the contrary, been punished ; but I beg you to keep Qo tenga) it secret, for no one knows it. — What has happened to him ? — I will tell you what has happened to him, if you promise me to keep it secret. Do you promise me to keep it secret ? — I do promise you, for I pity him with all my heart. — Will you take care of my clothes ? — I will take care of them. — Are you taking care of the book which I lent you ? — I am taking care of it. — Who will take care of my servant ? — The landlord will take care of him. — Do you throw away your hat ? — I do not throw it away, for it fits me admirably. — Does your friend sell his coat ? — He does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully. — Who has spoiled my book ? — No one has spoiled it, because no one has dared to touch it. FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. 22J FIFTY-SECOND LESSON.— the people come soon ? Soorif — very soon. A violin. To play upon the violin. To play the violin. The harpsichord. To play the harpsichord. To play upon the harpsichord. IVliat instrument do you play? ‘Leccion Quincuagesima segwida. I Vendrd la gente luego ? LucgOy presto, pronto. Muy pronU Un violin. t Tocar el viwlin. I Clave. Clavicordio t Tocar el piano, (el clavicordio.^ I t I Que instrumento toca V . 7 To touch Near ' Near me. Near them. Near the fire. Near the trees. Near going. Where do you live ? I live near the castle. What are you doing near the fire 7 To dance To fall. To drop, (meaning to let fall.) Has he dropped any thing ? He has not dropped any thing. Tocar. Palpar. Cerca de. Junto d. Cerca de mu Junto d mu Cerca de ellos, (or ellas.) Cerca del fuego. Cerca de los drboles. Cerca de ir. I En donde vive V. 7 Vivo junto al castillo. I Que estd, V. haciendo junto al fuego ? Danzar. Bailor Caer *. Dejar caer. I Ha dejado dl caer algo 7 iil no ha dejado caer nada. To retain. To hold hack. To approach. To draw near. Do you approach the fy*o 7 I do approach it. To approach, to have access to one. He is a man difficult of access. I go away (withdraw) from the fire. Retener *, (conj. like Tener.y Acercarse d. Aproximarse d.® I Se acerca V. al fuego ? Me acerco, (d dl.) Acercarse. Tener comunicacion con. Es un honiDro de dificil acceso. Yo mo quite del fuego. * See Lesson XXIV., and Appendix. See Lesson XXVI., Oba F 222 FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. To withdraw from* To go away from. [ go away from it. Why does that man go away from the fire ? ^le goes away from it because he is not cold. To recollect. Do you recollect that ? I do recollect it. Does your brother recollect that He does recollect it Do you recollect the words ? I do recollect them. Have you recollected the words ? I have recollected them. I have not recollected them. Have you recollected them ? You have recollected them. Has he recollected them ? He has recollected them. VVe have recollected them. They have recollected them. To rememher. To recollect. Do you remember that man ? Do you remember that ? I do remember it. What do you remember? I remember nothing. To sit down- Are you sitting dawn ? Quitarse de. Apartarsc dc. Retirarse de. Irse de * Yo me quito de €\ I Porqud se retira ese hombre del fuego ? t El se retira porque no tiene fr to Acordarse de I Se acuerda V de eso ? I Os acordais vos (or vosotros) de eso ? Me acuerdo de ello. I Se acuerda de eso e hermano de V.? 6 1 se acuerda de ello. I Se acuerda V. de las palabras ? Me acuerdo de ellas. I Se ha acordado V. de las palabras ? Me he acordado de ellas. No me he acordado de ellas. I Os habeis acordado de ellas ? V. se ha acordado de ellas. I Se ha acordado dl de ellas ? El se ha acordado de ellas. Nos hemos acordado de ellas. Se hail acordado de ellas. Acordarse de *. Recordarse de *. I Os acordais de ese hombre ? I Se acuerda V. de ese hombre ? I I Se acuerda V. de eso ? Si me acuerdo. Me acuerdo de eso. I De que os acordais ? I De que se acuerda V. ? I No me acuerdo de nada. I Sentarsc Estar sent ado. I I Estd V. sentado ? [So sienta V. ? ( 1 See Acordarse in the Appendix, where its irregularity is explained. ^ See Alentar in the Appendix, where the irregularities of sentarae ar« explained FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. 223 )L Am sitting down. Thou art sitting down. Ho is sitting down. I shall or will sit down. He sits near the fire. He is sitting near the fire. Me siento. Estoy senlado. Tii te sientas. Estds sentado se sieiita. Estd sentado. Yo me sentar4. El se sienta cerca del fuego. ^:i estd sentado junto al fuegc • Gustar mas de. Prefcrird. To like better, to prefer. ^ Do you like to stay here better than going out ? TiGusta V. mas de estar aqui qae de salir ? ■j I Prefiere V. estar aqui d salir? ■ I Quiere V. mejor (or mas bien' estar V. aqui que salir ? Gustar is most frequently used placing the object as a suoject, in which case the verb agrees with it in the third person singular or plural, and the subject is expressed by the corresponding pronoun in the objective case, to wit : me, ^c, se, Ze, le (v) d V. J like staying here better than going out. He likes to play better than to study. Do you like to write better than to speak ? I like to speak better than to write. Better than. He likes to do both. I like beef better than mutton. Do you like bread better than meat? X like neither the one nor’the other t like tea as much as coffee. Just as much. Some veal. Calf, calves. t Mo gusta mas estar aqui que salir. t A dl le gusta mas jugar que es- tudiar. t i Le gusta d V. mas escribir que hablar ? t A mi me gusta mas hablar que escribir. Mas que. Mejor que. t A dl le gusta hacer lo uno y le otro, (or el uno y el otro.) Me gusta mas la vaca que el camero. t i Le gusta d V. mejor el pan que la came ? t No mo gustan ni el uno, ni la otra. f El td me gusta tanto como el cafe Tanto como. Lo mismo (n) que. Un poco de tei*nera. Temera. Ternero, ternera • terncros, ternenys Qukk Feutt. ^ i De prtsa. 224 FiriY-SECOND LESSON. ( Tardo. Lento. Lentamsnte Slow. Slowly. ^ Aloud, your master speak aloud ? lie speaks aloud. ill order to learn Spanish, one must speak aloud. Quicker, Faster, Not so quick. Less quick. As fast as you. ife eats quicker than I. I >o you learn as fast as I ? I iearii faster than you. i do not understand you, because you speak too fast To sell cheap. To sell dear* Does he sell cheap ? He does not sell dear. He has sold me very dear. So, This man sells every thing so dear, that one cannot buy any thing from him. You speak so fast that I cannot un- derstand you. To buy something of some one I have bought it of him. So muchf so many, I have written so many notes, that I cannot write any more. Alto, En alta voz. Redo. iHabla alto el maestro de \ (oi vuestro maestro) ? El habla alto. Para aprender el Espahol, es menc©- , ter hablar alto. Mas presto. Mas ligero. No tan presto, Menos pronto Tan pronto como V. (vos, or vosotros.) ^:i come mas presto oue yo. I Aprende V. tan pronto como yo ? Yo aprendo mas pronto que V. Yo no entiendo d, V. (os entiendo) porque V habla (hablais) tan dr prisa. Vender harato. Vender caro, I Vende 6\ barato I El no vende caro. El me ha vendido rnuy caro. Tan, Este hombre lo vende t.odo tan caio, que no se le puede corpprar nada. V. habla tan ligero oue yo puedo entenderle. Comprar algo de alguno. Yo se le he comprado^ (d. di.) Tanto, tanta, Tantos, tantas. He escrito tantas esquelas quo no puedo escribir mas. I ^ * you feai to go out ? 1 do fear to go out. To run away. To Jly, JDid you run away ? I Teme V. salir? ^ Temeis salir ) t Ciertamente temo salir. Huir *. Escaparse, Salvarse, : I Huyd V.? I So escap6 V ? ^ Particular care must be paid in the translation of these phrases, foi t'o sc le he comprado, may mean, I bought it of, or from him ; and also, 1 bought it to, or for his benefit. To avoid ambiguity, the pronouns d el d eila, a. ellos, &c. are placed after the verb. FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. 225 f diQ not rui away. Why did that man run away 1 lie ran away because he was afraid* Wlio has run away ? lie has run away. Yc no hui. Yo no mo escape I Porque huy6 (or se escapd; (w h ombre ? 6l huyd (se escapd) porque tenia rniedo. ^ Quieii se ha huido, (or escapade) ? I El so ha huido. El se ha escapade EXERCISE? 160 . Do you play the violin ? — I do no„ play the violin, but the harpsi- chord. — Shall we have a ball to-night ? — We shall have one. — At what o'clock ? — At a quarter to eleven. — What o’clock is it now ? — It .s almost eleven, and the people will soon come. — What instrument will vou play ? — I shall play the violin.— If you play the violin I shall play upon the harpsichord. — Are there to be (deberd haber) a great many people at our ball ? — There is to be a great many. — Will you dance ? — I shall dance. — Will your children dance ? — They will dance if they please. — In what do you spend your time in this country ? — I spend my time in playing on the harpsichord, and in reading. — In what does your cousin divert himself ? — He diverts himself in playing upon the violin. — Does any one dance when you play ? — A great many people dance when I play. — Who ? — At first (jprimero) our children, then our cousins, at last our neighbors. — Do you amuse yourselves ? — I assure you that we amuse ourselves very much. — Whom do you pity ? — I pity your friend. — Why do you pity him ? — I pity him because he is ill. — Has anybody pitied you ? — Nobody has pitied me, because I have not been ill. — Do you offer me any thing ? — I offer you a fine gun. — What has my father offered you ? — He has offered me a fine book. — To whom have you offered your fine horses ? — I have offered them tc the English captain. — Dost thou offer thy pretty little dog to thesf children ? — I offer it to them, for I love them with all my heart. — Why have you given that boy a blow with your fist ? — Because he hindered me from sleeping. — Has anybody hindered you from writing, {que V, escriba ?) — Nobody has hindered me from writing, but I have hindered somebody from hurting your cousin. 161 . Have you dropped any thing ? — I have dropped nothing, but my cousin dropped some money. — Who has picked it up ? — Some men have picked it up. — Was it returned to him, (se le han vuelto 1) — It was returned to him. — Is it cold to-day ? — It is very cold. — Will you draw soar the fire ? — I cannot drav/ near (it,) for I am afraid of burning my 226 FIlfTY-SECOND LESSON'. Belf. — Why does your friend go away from the fire ? — He goes awa^ (from it) because he is afraid of burning himself. — Art thou coming near the fire ? — I am coming near (it,) because I am very cold. — Dc you go away from the fire ? — I do go away (from it.) — Why do you gc away (from it ?) — Because I am not cold. — Are you cold or warm ?— i am neither cold nor warm. — Why do your children approach the fire 1 — They approach (it) because they are cold. — Is anybody cold ?— Somebody is cold. — Who is cold ? — The little boy, whose father has lent you a horse, is cold. — Why docs he not warm himself ? — Because his father has no money to buy wood. — Will you tell him to come (gue venga) to me to warm himself ? — I will tell him so, (lo ,) — Do you remember any thing ? — I remember nothing. — What does your uncle recollect ? — He recollects what you have promised him. — What have I promised him? — You have promised him to go to France with him next winter. — I intend to do so, if it is not too cold. — Why do you withdraw from the fire ? — I have been sitting near the fire this hour and a half, so that I am no longer cold. — Does your friend not like to sit near the fire ? — He likes, (on the contrary,) much to sit near the tire, but only when he is cold. — ^IVIay one approach your uncle ? — One may approach him, for he receives everybody. — Will you sit down ? — I will sit down. — Where does your father sit down ? — He sits down near me. — Where shall I sit down ? — You may sit near me. — Do you sit down near the fire ? — I do not sit down near the fire, for I am afraid of being too warm. — Do you recollect my brother ? — I do recollect him 162 . Do your parents recollect their old friends ? — They do recollect them. — Do you recollect these words ? — I do not recollect them. — Have you recollected that ? — I have recollected it. — Has your uncle recol- lected those words ? — He has recollected them. — Have I recollected my exercise ? — You have recollected it. — Have you recollected your exercises ? — I have recollected them, for I have learned them by heart , and my brothers have recollected theirs, because they have learned them by heart. — Is it long since you saw your friend from Paris ? — I saw him a fortnight ago. — Do your scholars like to learn by heart ? — They do not like to learn by heart ; they like reading and writing better nhan learning by heart. — Do you like cider better than wine ? — I like wine better than cider. — Does your brother like to play ? — He likes to atudy better than to play. — Do you like veal better than mutton ? — I hke the latter better than the former. — Do you like to drink better than \o eat ?- ^ like to eat better than to drink ; but my uncle likes to drink oetter than to eat. — Does the Frenchman Lke fowl (la gallina) better dtait fish ? — He likes fish better than fowl. — Do you like to write beUei FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. 227 Ilian to speak ? — I like to do both. — Do you like honey better than iu^ar ? — I like neither. — Does your father like coffee better than tea ? ^He likes neither. — Can you understand me ? — No, Sir, for you speak too fast. — Will you be kind enough (tener la hondad) not to speak so fast ? — I will not speak so fast, if you will listen to me. 163 . Can you understand what my brother tells you ? — ^He speaks so fast, that I cannot understand him. — Can your pupils understand you ? •—They understand me when I speak slowly ; for in order to be under- stood I must speak slowly, (que yo hahle.) — Is it necessary to speak aloud to learn French ? — It is necessary to speak aloud. — Does your master speak aloud ? — He does speak aloud and slow. — Why do you not buy any thing of that merchant ? — He sells so dear that I cannot buy any thing of him. — Will you take me to another ? — I will take you to the son of the one whom you bought of last year. — Does he sell as dear as this one ? — He sells cheaper. — Do your children like .earning Italian better than Spanish ? — They do not like to learn either ; they only like to learn French.-r-Do you like mutton ? — I like beef better than mutton. — Do your children like cakes better than bread ? — They like both. — Has he read all the books which he bought ? — He bought so many that he cannot read them all. — Do you wish to write some exercises ? — I have written so many that I cannot write any more. — Why does that man run away ? — He runs away because he is afraid. — Will any one do him harm ? — No one will do liim harm ; but he dares not stay, because he has not done his task, and is afraid of being punished. — Will any one touch him ? — No one will touch him, but he will be punished by his master for not having (j)orque no ha) done his task. FIFTY-THIRD LESSON.— Leccion By the side of. T o pass by the side of some one. I have passed by the side of you. Have you passed by the side of my brother ? T have passed by the side of him. To pass by a place I have passed by the theatre. Quincuagesima tercera Al lado dcf (or por el lado de.) Pasar por (or al lado de) alguno. Yo he pasado al lado de V I Ha pasado V. al lado, (or por el lado) de mi hermano ? Yo he pasado ^ su lado, (or por su lado.) t Pasar cerca de un lugar, t Yo he pasado cerca del (or par ol’ teatro 228 FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. I huTO passed by the castle. t He pasado cerca del Castillo. Vou have passed before my ware- t V. ha pasado por (or bouse. 1 mi almacen. or junto iJ delante dej To dare J t^aro not go thither He dares not do it I did not dare to tell him so. I Osar, Atrcverse. (See in the Ap pendix, verbs taking a prepos* I tioii before the infinitive.) J Yo no oso ir alld. No me atrevo d ir alia. I no se atreve d hacerlo. I Yo no me atrevi d decirselo asi. To mahe use of, to use. Do you use my horse ? I do use it. Does your father use it ? Fie does use it. Have you used my guii ? I have used it They have used your books. They have used them. To instruct, i instruct, thou instructest, he in- structs ; we instruct, you instruct, they instruct Servirse de, Usar, (See Less. I.) I Se sirve V. de mi caballo ? Me sirvo de el. t 4 Se sirve de el su seiior padre de V.? j Se sirve de 6\. \ Usa de el. I Ha usado V. (or se ha servido Y.) de mi escopeta ? He usado de ella. Me he servido de ella. I Elios han usado de (se han servido 1 de) los libros de V, Los han usado. Se han servido de ellos. Instruir Instruyendo, Yo instruyo, td instruyes, ^1 instruye • nosotros instruimos, vosotros in. struis, VOS instruis, V instruye, VV instruyen, ellos mstruyen. To teach. To teach some one something. Ho teaches me arithmetic. ! teach you Spanish. I have taught him Spanish. To teach some one to do something. Ensehar. Enseiiar algo d alguno. El me enseha la aritmdtica. Yo le enseho d. V. el espahol. Yo le he ensenado el espahol. Ensenar d alguno d hacer algUiU cosa. See verbs in uir, in the Appendix, where their irregularities are ex plained. FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. 229 ffc tsaohes m« to read. I me eiisena a leer. I uacii him to write. | Yo le enseho d escribir. The Spanish master, (meaning the El maestro de espahol. master of the Spanish language.) The Spanish master, (meaning that' El maestro espanoL the master is a Spaniard, what- ever ha teaches.) To get shaved. To dress. To undress. To dress one^s self. To undress one^s self. Have you dressed yourself? I have not yet dressed myself Have you dressed the child ? I have dressed it. To undo. To get rid of At 6 you getting rid of your damaged sugar ? ( am getting rid of it. Did you get rid of yoiir old ship ? I did get rid of it Afeitar Rasurar. t Afeitarse. Hacerse afeitar. Vestir *. Desnudar. Vestirse *. Desnudarse. < i Se ha vestido V. ? ^ i Os habeis vestido ? Todavia no me he vestido. I Ha vestido V. al niho, (or mhay Le (la) he vestido. Deshacer * (Conjugated like hacei See Appendix.) Deshacerse de. Zafarse. Librarse de. I Se deshace V. de su aziicar averie do? t i Va V. saliendo del azucar riado 7 S Me deshago de el. Voy saliendo de el. I I Se deshizo V. de su fragata viejai 1 Me deshice de ella. To part with. The design, the intention I intend to go thither. Do you intend to part with, your lioreos ? I have already parted with them. He has parted with his gun. ( Deshacerse de Enagenar, ( Vender. El designio. La intencion. Yo tengo intencion de ir alia. I Tiene V. intencion de desbocorat (de vender) sus caballos ? J Ya mo he deshecho de ellos. Ya los he vendido. 1 6l ha vendido su escopeta. 230 FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. Have you parted with (discharged) your servant ? \ have parted with (discharged) him. To wake. To awake. I Ha despedido V a su cnaii;/ 1 Si, ya le he despedido. I Despertar Dispertar ^ Despertar, Despertarse,^ ) Dispertar, Dispertarse,^ Obs. Dispertar generally means, to put an end to sleep; dispertar st ^ ^ jcterrupt sleep. f generally awake at six o’clock in tho morning. My servant generally wakes me at six o’clock in the morning. A. slight noise awakes me. A dream has waked me. I do not make a noise, in order not to wake him. Yo despierto generalmente d ’as sew de la man ana. Mi criado me dispierta generalmentj d las seis de la manana. Un ligero ruido me despierta Un sue no me ha dispertado. Yo no hago ruido, para no dispertarla A dream. Generally. To come down. To alight from one’s horse mount To dis- Un sueno. Un eiisueno. Generalmente. Ordinariamente. Bajar, Apearse de su caballo. Desmonta? To conduct one’s self To behave, [ conduct myself well flow does he conduct himself? Towards, He behaves ill towards tha; man. Ho behaves ill towards me To he worth while. Is it worth while ? It is worth while. Is it not worth while ? Conducirse * *, (hien or mal,Y Portarse, Comportarse. Yo me conduzco bien I Como se porta (conduce) dl ( A. Con, Para con, Hdcia, 6l se porta mal con aquel hombrc se porta mal conmigo Merecer Valer la pena dc. J I Lo merece eso ? f i Vale eso la pena ? I t Lo merece. Vale la pena. i t i No lo merece ? ) I No vale la pena ? ^ Despertar or dispertar are conjugated like alentar, (See this verb in the Appendix.) * See in the Appendix the irregularities of conducir, and all tho verljf aiidijig in **, ecer, ocer, ucir FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. 23 J Is it worth while to do that? Is it worth while to write to him ? It is worth nothing Is it better ? It is better. it be better ? It will not be better It is better to do this than that. U is better to stay here than go walking. t I Merece eso hacerse ? i Vale la pen a hacer eso ? I ^ Vale la pena escribirle ? I No vale nada. I Es mejor ? i Vale mas ? Es mejor. Vale mas. I Ser4 mejor ? i Valdrd mas 1 No serd, mejor. No valdra iiKta ) Es mejor hacer esto que eso Mas vale hacer esto que eso. a- I Mejor es estar aqui que ir d, pasoa/ EXERCISES. 164. Have your books been found ? — They have been found. — ^Where — Under the bed. — Is my coat on the bed ? — It is under (it.) — Are your brother’s stockings under the bed ? — They are upon it. — Have I been seen by anybody ? — You have been seen by nobody. — Have you passed by anybody ? — I passed by the side of you, and you did not see nie. — Has anybody passed by the side of you ? — Nobody has passed by the side of me. — Where has your son passed ? — He has passed by the theatre. — Shall you pass by the castle ? — I shall pass (there.) — Why have you not cleaned my trunk ? — I was afraid to soil my fingers. — Has my brother’s servant cleaned his master’s guns ? — He has cleaned them. — Has he not been afraid to soil his fingers ? — He has not been afraid of soiling them, because his fingers are never clean. — Do you use the books which I have lent you ? — I do use them. — May 1 use your knife ? — Thou mayst use it, but thou must not cut (te cortes) thyself. — May my brothers use your books ? — They may use them. — May we use your gun ? — You may use it, but you must not spoil it, (no la echen d perder ,) — What have you done with my wood ? — I nave used it to warm myself. — Has your father used my horse ? — He has used it. — Have our neighbors used our clothes ? — They have not used them, because they did not want them. — Who has used my hat ? . — Nobody nas used it. — Have you told your brother to come down, (que haje V ) — I did not dare to tell him. — Why have you not dared to tell him ? — Because I did not wish to wake him, (despertarle.) — Has he told you not to wake him ? — He has told me not to wake him (despterle) when he sleeps 165. Have you shaved to-day ? — I have shaved. — Has your brothei shaved? — He has not shaved himself, but he get shaved. — Do voii 232 fiftf-th:rd lesson. Bhave often ? — 1 sliave every morning, and sometimes also in the evening. — When do you shave in the evening ? — When I do not dine at home. — I low many times a day does your father shave ? — He shaves only once a day, but my uncle shaves twice a day. — Does your cousin shave often ? — He shaves only every other day, {un dia si,y un dia uo.'i — At what o’clock do you dress in the morning ? — I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and I breakfast every day at eight o’clock, or at a quarter past eight. — Does your neighbor dress before he breakfasts ? — He breakfasts before he dresses. — At what o’c ock in the evening dost thou undress ? — I undress as soon as I return from the theatre. — Dost thou go to the theatre every evening? — I do not go every evening, for it is better to study than to go to the theatre. — At what o’clock dost thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre ? — I then undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten o’c. ock. — Have you already dressed the child ? — I have not dressed it yet, for it is still asleep. — At what o’clock does it get up ? — It gets up as soon as it is waked. — Do you rise as early as I ? — I do not know at what o’clock you rise, but I rise as soon as I awake. — Will you tell my servant to wake me (que me dispierle) to-morrow at four o’clock ? — I will tell him. — Why have you risen so early ? — My children have made such a noise that they wakened m6. — Have you slept well ? — I have not slept well, for you made too much noise. — At what o’clock did the good captain awake ? — He awoke at a quarter past five in the morning. 166 . How did my child behave? — He behaved very well. — How did my brother behave towards you ? — He behaved very well towards me, for he behaves well towards everybody. — Is it worth while to write .o that man ? — It is not worth while to write to him. — Is it worth while to dismount from my horse in order to buy a cake ? — It is not worth while, for it is not long since you ate. — Is it worth while to dismount from my horse in order to give something to that poor man ? — Yes, for he seems to want it ; but you can give him something without dis- mounting from your horse. — Is it better to go to the theatre than to study ? — It is better to do the latter than the former.— Is it better to learn to read Spanish than to speak it ? — It is not worth while to learn to read it without learning to speak it. — Is it better to go to bed than to go a-walking ? — It is better to do the latter than the former. — Is it better to go to France than to Germany? — It is not worth while to go to France or to Germany when one has no wish to travel. — Did you at last get rid of that man ? — I did get rid of him. — Why has your father parted with his horses ? — Because he did not want them any more. — Has your merchant succeeded at last to get rid of his damaged sugar ^ FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. 283 —He ha^ succeeded in getting rid of it. — Has he sold it on credit ?— lie was able to sell it for cash, so that he did not sell it on credit. — Who has taught you to read ? — 1 have learned it with a Spanish master. — Has he taught you to write ? — He has taught me to read and to write. — Who has taught your brother arithmetic ? — A Spanish master has taught it him. — Do you call me ? — I do call you. — What do you want ? — Why do you not rise ; do you not know that it is already late ? — What do you want me for ? — I have lost all my money, and I come to beg you to lend {me preste) me some. — What o’clock is it ? — It is already a quarter past six, and you have slept long enough. — ^Is it long since you rose ? — It is an hour and a half since I rose. — Do you wish to take a walk with me ? — I cannot go a- walking, foi I am waiting for my Spanish master. FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON . — Leccion Quincuagejirna cuarta To hope, to expect Esperar. Aguardar. I hope. Thou hopest. He hopes. You hope. We do hope. V. espera. Vos (vosotros) esperais Nosotros esperamos. Yo espero. Tii esperas. espera Do you expect to find him there ? I do expect it. I Espera V. hallarle alia ? t Si. Espero hallarle. To change, (meaning to exchange.) To change one thing for another. I change my hat for his. Camhiar, Trocar *. Permutar, Cambiar una cosa por (con) otra. Cambio {trueco) mi sombrero poi el suyo. T} change ^ (meaning to pat on other Mudar de. Mudarse dc. things.) Do you change your hat? ^ do change it. 1 I Se muda V el sombrero ? t Le mudo. Le ramhio. Me pongo otro. He changes his linen, riioy change their clothes I So mudan de vestido. 234 FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. To mix. ^ Mezclarse, Meter se / Entrcmeterst I mix among the men. Me meto entre los hombres. He mixes among the soldiers. Se mezcla entre los soldadon Among, Entre. En meaio de. To recognise. Do you recognise that man ? [t is so long since I saw him, that I do not recollect him. More than. I have more bread than I can eat. That man has more money than he will spend. There is more wine than is neces- sary. You have more money than you want. We have more shoes than we want. That man has fewer friends than he imagines. To fancy. To think. To earn, to gain, to get. Reconocer.^ I Reconoce V. d ese hombro ? t Hace tanto tiempo que le vi, quo na le reconozco, {no me acuerdo de el.) Mas (n) que. Del que. Dc lo que. Yo tengo mas pan que (del quej puedo comer. Ese hombre tiene mas dinero del que puede gastar. t Hay mas vino del iiecesario, (del que se necesita.) t V. tiene mas dinero del que nece- sita, (del que ha menester.) t Tenemos mas zapatos que hemoo menester, (necesitamos.) Ese hombre tiene mdnos amigos quo (de los que) dl piensa. Imaginar. Imaginarse Pensar *. Ganar. Has your father already started, (de- parted j) He is ready to depart. Ready. To make ready To make one's self ready. To keep one's self ready. I Ha salido ya el padre de ? Estd pronto (listo) para salir Pronto, Presto Listo. Preparar Prepararse. t Estar pronto. Estar preparado, I Estar dispuesto a, {para.) To split. To break somebody's heart. T ou break that man’s heart. Whese heart do I break ? Partir. Abrir. t Partir (desgarrar, or quebrar) ei corazon de alguno. t V. le quiebfa el corazon d ese liom bre. f I A quicn le qmebro yo el corazon ^ ' See the Appendix for verbs ending in acer, ocer, ucir FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. 235 * To spill To spread. Vo expatiate, to lay stress upon. That man is always expatiating upon that subject. The subject. Always. To stretch one’s self along the floor. To hang on, {upon.) The wall. I hang my coat on the wall He hangs his hat upon the tree. W e hang our shoes upon the nails. A^ho has hanged the basket on the tree? The ihief has been hanged. The thief. The robber, the highwayman. You are always studious, and will always be so. Your brother is, and always will be good. A w^ell-educated sop never gives his father a grief ; he loves, honors, and respects him. Derramar. Exten dt r. Esparcir. Divulgar. Espaciarse. Difundirse. Ese hombre siempre se difunde sobri esa materia. El sdjeto. La materia. Siempre. t Tirarse sobre el suelo. Tenderse Extenderse *. Colgar de, {en.) (See Acurdar, in the Appendix.) La pared. Yo cuelgo mi vestido en la pared. 6l cuelga su sombrero en el drbol. Col games nuestros zapatos en lea clavos. I Quien ha colgado la canasta en el drbol ? t El ladron ha sido ahorcado, (col- gado.) El ladron. t El bandolero. El salteador de camino. V. es siempre estudioso, y siempre lo serd,. El hermano de V. es bueno, y siem- pre lo serd. Un hijo bien educado nuuca da pesar d su padre ; el le am a, lo honra, v le respeta. EXERCISES. 167 . Do you hope to receive a note to-day ? — I hope to receive one.— From whom ? — From a friend of mine. — What dost thou hope 7 — hope to see my parents to-day, for my tutor has promised me to take me to them. — Does your friend hope to receive any thing ? — He hopea to receive something, for he has worked well. — ^Do you hope to arrive early in Paris ? — We hope to arrive there at a quarter past eight, for our father is waiting for us this evening. — ^Do you expect to find him at home ? — We do expect it. — For what (cosa) have you exchanged youi* coacli of which you have spoken to me ? — I have exchanged ii a fine Arabian horse. — Do you wish to exchange your book foi 236 FIFTY-FOURTH LESSOL\ mine ? — I cannotj for I want it to study Spanish — Why do you tajcc your hat off ? — I take it otF because I see my old master coming. — Do you put on another hat to go to the market ? — I do not put on anothei to go to the market, but {jpero si) to go to the concert. — When will the concert take place ? — (It will take place) the day after to-morrow.— Why do you go away ? — Do you not amuse }^ouiself here ? — You are mistaken when you say that I do not amuse myseif here, for I assure you that I find a great deal of pleasure in conversing with you ; but 1 am going because I am expected at my relation’s ball. — Have you promised to go ? — I have promised. — Have you changed y^ur liat in order to go to the English captain ? — I have changed my hat, but 1 have not changed my coat or my shoes. — How many times a day dost thou change thy clothes, {rojpa 1 ) — I change them Qa) to dine and to go to the theatre. 168 . Why do y( a mix among these men ? — I mix among them in ordei to know what they say of me. — What will become of you if you always mix among the soldiers ? — I do not know what will become of me, bui I assure you that they will do me no harm, for they do not hurt any- body. — Have you recognised your father ? — It was so long since I saw him, that I did not recognise him. — Has he recognised you ? — He recognised me instantly. — How long have you had this coat ? — It is a long time since I have had it. — How long has your brother had that gun ? — He has had it a great while. — Do you still (siempre) speak Spanish ? — It is so long since I spoke it, that I have nearly forgotten it all, {del todo .) — How long is it since your cousin has been learning Spanish ? — It is only three months since. — Does he know as much as you ? — He knows more than I, for he has been learning it longer. — Do you know why that man does not eat ? — I believe he is not hungry, for he has more bread than he can eat. — Have you given your son any money ? — I have given him more than he will spend. — Will you give me a glass of cider? — You need not drink cider, for there is more wine than is necessary. — Am I to sell my gun in order to buy a new hat ? — You need not sell it, for you have more money than you want. — Do you wish to speak to the shoemaker ? — I do not wish to speak to him, foi we iiave more shoes than we want. — Why do the Spaniards rejoice ? — They rejoice because lliey flatter themselves they have many good friends. — Are they not right in rejoicing? — They are wrong, for tliey Iiave fewer iriends than they imagine. 169 . Are you ready to depart with me ? — I am so. — Does your uncle depart with ua ? — He departs with us if he pleases, (quiere .) — Will yoc FIFTY- FIFTH LESSON. 237 * ?eli him to be ready (que se este) to start to-morrow at six j’clocii in the evening ? — I will tell him so. — Is this young man ready to go out ?— Not yet, but he will soon be ready. — Why have they hanged tliat man? —They have hanged him because he has killed somebody. — Have they hanged the man who stole a horse from your brother ? — They have punished him, but they have not hanged him ; they hang only high- waymen in our country. — What have you done with my coat ? — 1 have langed it on the wall. — Will you hang my hat upon the tree? — I will hang it (thereon.) — Have you not seen my shoes ? — I found them under vour bed, and have hanged them upon the nails. — Has the thief who stole your gun been hanged ? — ^He has been punished, but he has not been hanged. — Why do you expatiate so much upon that subject ?— Because it is necessary to speak upon all subjects. — If it is necessary to listen to you, and to answer you when you expatiate upon that sub- ject, I will hang my hat upon the nail, stretch myself along the floor, listen to you, and answer you as well as I can, {yo 'pueda.') — You will do well. FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON . — Leccion Quincuagesima quinta. To he well. How do you do ? J t Estar hien Estar hueno. ( Pasarlo hien. ^ I Como esta V. ? ^Como lo pasa V. 1 ( f i Como se halla V. ? Ohs. A. The verbs to he, and to do, when used in English to inquire after, or to speak of a person’s health, are translated by the verbs estar, pasarlo, hallarse. r I Como esta el seiior padre de V. ? How is your father ? % ^ Como lo pasa (se halla) el senor C padre de V. ? He is very well. | t merced se halla muy hien. Ohs. B. The qualifications of sehor, (Mr.,) sehora, (Mrs.,) sehorito ;^Master,) sehorita, (Miss,) are generally placed in Spanish before the com- mon nouns of the parents, relations, or friends of the person spoken to, when we mean to pay them particular respect. For the same purpose the Span- iards use the words su merced, (his or her honor,) su sehoria, (my lord or my lady,) &c., instead of the noun or pronoun of the person spoken of The words sehor, sehora, sehorita, must be preceded by the corresponding nrticlo when speaking of the persons, but not when addressing them.. Will the colonel come ? i Vendrd el senor coronol ? No, because he is ill. t No, porque su sehoria esta enfer 238 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON* Your brother. Your cousin. Your brothers. Ohs, C, The plurals cf senor, seno and seiioritas, I'he Epigrams of Mr. F*'aiicisco de Salas. Obs. D. Mr. is translated Don, names only. Don is used only in thes Leandro Fernandez de Moratin — Los Fernandez de Moratin. Serior Doi most polite a^d respectful manner of i To doubt a thing, * To question any thing. i Do you doubt that ? 1 do doubt it I do not doubt it. I make no question, have no doubt of it. What do you doubt? f doubt what that man has told me. The doubt. Without doubt, no doubt. El senor hermano de V., ) Su senor primo de V., (W.) Los senores hermanos de V., (VV ) 2 , and sehorita, are senores, sehoras Los Epi gramas de Don Francisco de Salas. rs. and Miss, Doha, before baptismal igular, thus: Messieurs Nicolas, and Senores Don Nicolas, y Don Leandro i, Sehora or Sehorita Doha, is the peaking of, or addressing a person Dudar uno de una cosa Cuestionar. Disputar. Preguntar. Conttcvertir * I Duda V. de eso ? Yo lo dudo. Yo no lo dudo. t Yo no lo dudo, (no /o pregunto, oj no lo dispute.) I Que (de que) duda V. ? Yo dudo lo que ese homb’'e me ha dicho. La duda. Sin duda. To agree to a thing. Do you agree to that ? I do agree to it. Convenir en, {con or d.) (Conjuga* ted like venir. See App.) I Conviene V. (convenis vos) en eso ? Convengo en ello. ifow much have you paid for that hat ? I have paid three dollars for it. I Cuanto ha pagado V. por ese wm- brero ? Yo he pagado tres pesos por 61. t Tres pesos. Ohs. E. In the colloquial style, such phrases as the preceding one are answered by merely stating the price. I have bought this horse for fifty dollars. The price. ^ Have you agreed about the price? We have agreed about it. About what have you agreed ? About the price Yo he comprado este caballo poi cincuenta pesos. El precio. I Han convenido VV. en el precio ? Hemos convenido. I En que hau convenido '^’V ? En el precio. FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. 239 Fo agree, to compose a difference. To feel, feeling. I fool, thou feelest, he feels. U e feel, you feel, they feel To consent. f consent to go thither. However. To n ear, (to wear garments.) U'hiit garments does he wear ? He wears beautiful garments. The garment Against my custom. As customary. My partner To observe something. To take notice of something. Do you take notice of that ? 1 do take notice of it Did you observe that? Did you notice what he did ? I did notice it. 1 Convenirse *. Componeise • I Sentir *. Sintiendo Yo siento, tu sientes, el sie?ite. Sentimos, sentis, .sientcn. Conseniir en. (Conjugated Ikn sentir.) ' Consiento en ir all^. 1 No obstante Con todo Usar Jjlevar. Traer ♦ I Que vestidos usa ? El lleva hermosos vestidos. El vestido. Contra mi costumbre t Contra mi modo. Como de costumbre. t Segun es uso. I Mi socio. Mi companero. Percibir * Observar Reparar. Notar algo, (alguna cosa.) I Repara V. esto ? i Observais eso ? Lo reparo. Lo observe I Percibio V. eso ? I Repard V. lo que el hizo ? Lo repare. To expect, (to hope.) Do you expect to receive a nc'te from your uncle ? I expect it He expects it We expect it Have we expected it ? We have expected it. Esperar. I Espera V. recibir un billote del senor su tio ? Yo le espero. El le espera. Nosotros le esperamos. I Le hemos esperado nosotros ? Nosotros le hemos esperado. To get, (to procure.) I cannot procure any money. Re cannot procure any thing to oat t Conseguir *. Procurar Lograr. Hallar. ^ No puedo conseguir ningun dinero. ( t No puedo hallar un real. Ci El no puede procurarse d tu9 < tento, f t ]&1 no puede ganar la vida. 240 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. Penknife. After having, After having read my lesson, I wrote it. ;\fter having cut myself, I broke my penknife I El cortaplurnas. ^ Despues de haber, (despuos d^.j ( Despues que. Despues que yo hube leido mi leccioiii la escribi Despues que me hube cortado, yo quebrd mi cortaplurnas. Obs. F. When after, followed by a present participle, is translated in Spanish by despues que, the verb which follows it must be in one of the past tenses ; but if it is rendered by despues de, the verb that comes after it ta iQ the infinitive mood. { Despues que yo lei la carta. Despues que hube leido la carta. Despues de haber le.do la carta. Despues de leer la carta. To make fun of some one, or some- thing. To laugh at some one, or something. He laughs at everybody. He criticises everybody. Do you laugh at that man ? [ do not laugh at him. To stop, {to staij.) Have you stayed long at Berlin ? I stayed there only three days. To sojourn, {to stay.) Where does your brother stay present ? At present, actually. The residence, stay, abode. Pans is a fine place to live in. Af‘©r reading. After cutting myself. (See Obs. F.) Mofarse de alguno, (de alguna cosa.' Burlarse de (con) alguno. Burlarse de (con) alguna cosa. Reirse de alguno, (de alguna cosa.; ]fel se rie de todo el mundo, (do todos.) El critica d, todo el mundo. I Se rie V. (se burla V.) de aquel hombre 1 No me rio de dl. No hago burla de dl. Detenerse *. (Conjugated like tener See Appendix.) ^ Par arse. I Se ha detenido Y. mucho tiempc en Berlin ? Me detuve solamente tres dias. ^ Residir. Morar ( t Estar de asiento *. at j I En donde reside (mora) ahora su hermano de V. ? A1 presente. Actual mente Ahora Domicilio. t Paris es una ciudad muy hermosa para vivir de asicnto. t Despues de leer, (de haber leido.“ t Despues de habermo cortad/> FIFTY-J-FTH LESSON. 241 After dressing yourself. After dressing himself. ' After shaving ourselves. After warming themselves. I returned the -book after reading it. I hrew the knife away after cutting myself. i''ou went to the concert after dress- ing yourself. They went out after warming them- selves. t Despues de haoerse V. yestido. Despues que V. se vistio t t Despues de vestirse. f t Despues que el se hubo vest ido. r t Despues de habernos rasurado. ^ t Despues de habernos hecho ^ barba. I t Despues de haberse calentado. ! t Yo volvi el libro despues de haberlo j leido. t Yo arroje el cuchillo despues de haberme cortado. t V. fud al concierto despues de ha- berse vestido. t Se fueron despues de haberse ca- lentado. The sick person, (the patient ) Tolerably well. It is rather late. It is rather far. I El enfermo. El paciente. S Bastante bien. Medianamento. \ Tal cual. I Es muy tarde. 1 Es muy lejos. t Estd algo lejos EXERCISES. 170 . How is your father ? — He is (only) so-so. — How is your patient ? — He is a little better to-day than yesterday. — Is it long since you saw your brothers ? — I saw them two days ago. — How art thou ? — I am tolerably well. — How long has your cousin been learning Spanish ? — He has been learning it only three months. — Does he already speak it ? — He already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your brother, who has been learning it these two years. — Is it long since you heard of my uncle ? — It is ha~dly a fortnight since I heard of him. — Where is he staying now ? — He is staying at Berlin, but my father is in Lon- don. — Did you stay long at Vienna ? — I stayed there a fortnight. — How long did your cousin stay at Paris ? — He stayed there only a month. — Do you like to speak to my uncle ? — I like much to speak to him, but I do not like him to {que hag a hurla de mi) laugh at me. — Wliy does he laugh at you ? — He laughs at me because I speak badly. — Why has your brother no friends ? — He has none because he criticises everybody. — Why are you laughing at that man ? — I do not intend to laugh at him. — I beg you not to do it, {que no lo haga,) for you will break his heart if you laugh at him. — Do you doubt what I ap‘ lolling you ? — I do not d( ubt it. — Do vou doul/t what that man he« 11 242 fiftf-fifth lesson. told you ? — 1 doubt it, for he has often told stories. — Have you at last bought the horse which you wished {queria) to buy last month ?— I have not bought it, for I have not been able to procure money, 171 . Has your uncle at last bougnt the garden ? — He has not bouglit it. for he could not agree about the price. — Have you at last agreed about the price of that picture ? — We have agreed about it. — How much have you paid for it ? — I have paid two hundred dollars for it. — What hast thou bought to-day ? — I have bought two fine horses, three beautiful pictures, and a fine gun. — For how much hast thou bought the pictures ? — I have bought them for five hundred dollars. — Do you find them dear ? — I do not find them dear. — Have you agreed with your partner ? — I have agreed with him. — Does he consent to pay yoi the price of the ship ? — He consents to pay it me. — Do you consent to go to Spain ? — I consent to go thither. — Have you seen your old friend again ? — I have seen him again. — Did you recognise him ? — I could hardly recognise him, for, contrary to his custom, he wears a large hat. — How is he ? — He is very well. — What garments does he wear ? — He wears beautiful new garments. — Have you taken notice of what your boy has dune ? — I have taken notice of it. — Have you punished him for it, {ello I ) — I have punished him for it. — Has your father already written to you ? — Not yet ; but I expect to receive a note from him to-day. — Of what do you complain ? — I complain of not being able to procure some money. — Why do these poor men com- plain ? — They complain because they cannot procure any thing to eat. — How are your parents ? — They are as usual, very well. — Is your uncle well ? — He is better than he usually is. — Have you already heard of your friend who is in Germany ? — I have already written to him several times ; however, he has not answered me yet. 172 . What have you done with the books which the English captain has lent you ? — 1 have returned them to him after reading them. — Why have you thrown away your penknife ? — I have thrown it away after cutting myself. — When did I go to the concert ? — You went thither after dressing yourself. — When did your brother go to the ball ? — He went (thither) after dressing himself. — When did you breakfast ? — We breakfasted after shaving ourselves. — When did our neighbors go aut ? — They went out after warming themselves. — Why have you punished your boy ? — I have punished him because he has broken my finest glass. I gave him some wine, and instead of drinking it, he spilt it on the new carpet, and broke the glass. — What did you do this morning ? — I shaved after rising, and went out after breakfasting.— FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. 243 What did you father do last night ? — He supped after coming from the play, and went to bed after supping. — Hid he rise early ? — He rose at sunrise. FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON.— Leccion Quincuaghima sexta. Tr. go to the village. To be in the village. To go to the exchange To be at the exchange. To or at the parlor. To or at the kitchen. To or at the cellar. To or at the church. To or at the school. To or at the Spanish school. To or at the dancing school. The play, (the comedy ) The opera. To go a-hunting. To be a-hunting. To go a-fishing. To be a-fishing. To hunt. The whole day. All the day. The whole morning.^ The whole evening. The whole night. All the night The whole week. The whole society. All at once Suddenly. All ol" a sudden. Ir d la aldea. Estar en la aldea. Ir d la lonja. Estar en la lonja. A or en la sala. A or en la cocina. A or en la cueva, bodega, {sotano,) A or en la iglesia. A or en la escuela. A or en la escuela espanola. A or en la escuela de Espahol. A or en la escuela de danza, {haile. La comedia. La fipera. J Ir d caza. Ir d la caza. \ \ Ir d cazar. Estar cazando. t Cazar. Ir d pescar. Ir d la pesca de. Estar pescaiido. Pescar. Cazar. Todo el dia, (masc.) Toda la manaiia ^ t Toda la noche. Toda la noche. Toda la semana Toda la sociedad. De una vez. A la vez. Do seguida De repente. Shbitamente. * Morning, as a word of address, is translated dias ; as. Good morning, Sir — Buenos dias, sehor ; and dias is used from early dawn till two o’clock, r. M. Otherwise it is literally translated ; as. He arrived at ten o’clock, A. M . — El llego d las diez de la maiiana. Afternoon is translated tardes when addressing to, and tarde when speaking of, from two till seven o’clock, p. M. From this hour, and generally from candlelight, evening is .endered hy noche ; as. We expect them this evening at nine o'clock — Nosotros los esperamos esta noche d las nuevf. TABLE OP THE PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE ABSOLUTE. 244 FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. > W m m m m cj cd ^ ^ .£ w ® ® ^ a S 13 T 3 3 na C CQ ^ m w rt ^ c 3 c 3 > Sq cJ C3 W g 3 U) u oSOO^O'^ccO .2 >->>-»® >^® ® G -4-> OQ CB > OQ ^ rooQtnnjMTOajQOM' O O O ® ►>-» 5 >> ® ® - = :? = -S. 'S 3 6 S .5 e § f-. )13 Ex (i. and not with the possessor, as in English. O' When Uated or Vstedes is expressed in the sentence, the possessive, el suyo, los suyos, ^c., must be used; bat when Uated or Usledea is not expressed, the possessive pronoun must be translated by el de V., el de VV., .aa de Vaa 01 los de VV., <{*r. FII’IJ’-SIXTH LESSON. 246 Which books have I ? You have yours and hers. Has she not hers and mine ? She has hers, but not yours. You liave yours. I have yours. She has hers and his. He has his and hers. I have his. I have hers. I have theirs. IVhat do you wish to send to your aunt ? r wish to send her a tart. Will you send her some fruit also ? [ will send her some. Have you sent the books to my sis- ters? [ have sent them to them. This week. This year. Last week. Next week. Every woman Every time. Every M^eek Your mother. Your sister. Your sisters. A person. The earache. The heartache. The belly-ache. The stomach-ache. She has the stomach-ache. Her sister has a violent headache. J liave the stomach-ache. I Que libros tengo yo? V. tiene los suyos y los de ella. I No tiene ella los suyos y los mios? Ella tiene los suyos, pero no los de V V. tiene los suyos, (las suyas.) Yo tengo los de V., (las de V.) Ella tiene los suyos y los de el. 6l tiene los suyos y los de ella. Tengo la suya, (la de el.) Tengo la suya, (la de ella.) Tengo la suya, (la de ellos, or la de ellas.) I Quo quiere V. enviar d, su senora tia ? Y'o quiero enviarlo una empanada- I Quiere V. enviarle tambien alguus fruta ? Si, quiero enviarle alguna. I Ha enviado V. los libros d mis her manas ? Yo se los he enviado. Esta semana. Este aho, (mas.) La semana pasada. La semana pr6xima. t La semana que entra. Tod as las mujeres. Cada vez. Todas las veces. Cada semana. Todas las semanas. Su senora raadre de V (See Obs. B, Less. LV.) La senora (sehorita) hermana de V. Las senoras (senoritas) hermanas de V. (See Obs. C, Less. LV.) Una persona. Dolor de oido. t Mai de corazon. Dolor de vientre Dolor de estomago. Ella tiene dolor de estdmago. Su hermana tiene un terrible dolor de cabeza. Tengo dolor de estdrnago. 246 FIFTT-SIXTH LESSON, The ache, pain. El dolor. La pena. The tart La empanada 'The peach. El durazno. The strawberry La fresa. The cherry. La cereza. The gazette. \ i La gazeta. The newspaper ( 1 El papel pdblico. El Noticiosc». The merchandiss, (goods.) 1 La mercaderia lias mercaderisa The aunt. La tia. The female cousin. La prima. The niece. La sobrina. The maid-servant. La criada. The female relation. La parienta. The female neighbor La vecina. The female cook. La cocinera. The brother-in-law. El cunado. The sister-in-law. La cunada. Obs. B. The following nouns express their gender by different termina lions MASCULINE. FEMININE. An abbot. Un abad. An abbess. Una abadesa. An actor. Un actor. An actress. Una actriz. An ambassador Un embajador An ambassadress. Una embajadora.. A baron. Un baron. A baroness. or embajatriz. ' Una baronesa. A canon. Un canhnigo. A canoness. Una canonesa. A singer Un cantor. A female singer. Una cantora, oi A count. Un conde. A countess. cantarina, or can- tatriz. Una condesa. A dancer Un bailarin. A female dancer Una bailarina A god. Un dios. A goddess. Una diosa. A deacon. Un didcono. A deaconess. Una diaconisa. A duke. Un duque. A duchess. Una duquesa. An elector Un elector. An electress. Una electriz, oi An emperor Un emperadoi An empress. electora. Una emperatriz A hero. Un hdroe. A heroine. Una heroina. A poet. Un poeta. A poetess. Una poetisa A priest. Un sacerdote. A priestess. Una sacerdotka A prince. Un pnncipe. A princess. Una princesa A prior. Un prior. A prioress. Una priora. A prop^iet. Un profeta. A prophetess Una profetisa. FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. 247 k king. Lfn rey. A queen. Una rem« Sir,(addressing.) ) Senor. Lady. t Senora. Gentleman. J Caballero. } Dama. Ohs. C Some nouns distinguish their gender by difTerent woids. Father. Padre. Mother. Madre. Godfather. Padrino Godmother. Madrina. Stepfather. Padrastro Stepmother Madrastra. Son-in-law. Yerno. Daughter-in- -law. Nuera. Man. Hombre. Woman. Mujer. Horse. Cabalio. Mare. Yegua. Ram. Carnero. Ewe. Oveja. Hull. Toro. Cow. Vac a. To hire, to let. Have you already hired a room ? To admit or grant a thing. To confess a thing. Do you grant that ? I do grant it. Do you confess your fault ? I confess it. I confess it to be a fault. To confess, to avow, to own, to acknowledge. To confess. Alquilar. Arrendar *. Dar, or tomar en alquiler, or arron» damiento. I Ha alquilado V. ya un cuarto, (oi aposento, or camara) 1 Admitir. Conceder una cosa. Confesar * una cosa. (See Alenta/r., I Concede V. (admite V.) eso ? Lo concede. Lo admito. I Confiesa V. su falta ? La confieso. Confieso que es una faila. Confesar. Declarar. Protestar. Reconocer. (See verbs in ocer.) I Confesar * So much, so many. She has so many candles that she cannot burn them all. To catch a cold To make sick. if you eat so much it will make you sick. Tanto — tanta. Tantos — tantas. Ella tiene tantas velas que no puede usarlas todas. Resfriarse. Constiparse. Acatarrarso. t Coger un resfriado, (una fluxion.) t Poner male. Hacer mal, (dano.) Si V. come tanto, esto le pondrti male, (or le hard, dano.) Ohs, D When the English pronoun it relates to a preceding circum- stance, it is translated esto ; when to a following circumstance, by eso. Does it suit you to lend your gun ? | i Le conviene d V prestar su esco I peta ? 248 FIFTY ftIXTH LESSON. It does not suit to lend it Where did you catch a cold ? I caught a cold in going from the opera. To have a cold. The cold. The cough. 1 have a cold. You have a cough. The brain. The chest. J No me conviene prestarla. ( No me acomoda prestarla. I En donde cogi6 V. ese resfriado, (oi esa fluxion) ? I En donde se constip6 V. ? Me resfrie al salir de la dpera. f Estar resfriado, (constipado, or acatar- ' rado.) '| t Teller catarro, (una fluxion, or un constipado.) j El catarro. El resfriado. El consti pado. La fluxion. I La tos. Tengo catarro, (un constipado, or una fluxion.) V. tiene tos El celebro, or cerebro El pecho. EXERCISES. 173 . TVhere is your cousin ? — He is in the Idtchen. — Has your coon (fern.) already made the soup ? — She has made it, for it is already upon the table. — Where is your mother? — She is at church. — Is your sister gone to school ? — She is gone thither. — Does your mother often go to church ? — She goes thither every morning and every evening. — At what o’clock in the morning does she go to church ? — She goes thither as soon as she gets up.— At what o’clock does she get up ? — She gets up at sunrise. — Dost thou go to school to-day ? — I do go thither. — What dost thou learn at school ? — I learn to read, write, and speak (there.) — Where is your aunt ? — She is gone to the play with my little sister. — Do your sisters go this evening to the opera ? — No, Madam, they go tt the dancing-school. — Do they not go to the French school ? — Tliey gt thither in the morning, but not {y no) in the evening. — Is your fathei gone a-hunting ? — He has not been able to go a-hunting, for he has a cold. — Do you like to go a-hunting ? — I like to go a-fishing better thao a> hunting. — Is your father still in the country ? — Yes, Madam, he is still there. — What does he do (there '^) — He goes a-hunting and a-fishing. — Did you hunt in the country ? — I hunted vhe whole day. — How long did you stay with my mother? — I stayed with her the whole evening — Is it long since you were at me castle ? — I was there last week. — Did you find many people there ? — I found only three persons there die count, the countess, and their daughter. FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. 249 174 . Are these girls as good (discrete) as their brothers ? — They are oettei tn.'in they. — Can (saber) your sisters speak German ? — They cannot, but they are learning it. — Have you brought any thing to your mother 1 1 brought her some good fruit and a fine tart. — What has your niece brouo-lit you ? — She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries, and good peaches. — Do you like peaches ? — I like them much. — How many peaches has your neighbor (fern.) given you ? — She has given me more than twenty. — Have you eaten many cherries this year ? — 1 have eaten many. — Did you give any to your little sister ? — I gave her so many that she cannot eat them all. — Why have you not given any to your good neighbor, (fern. ?) — I wished to give her some, but she would not take any, because she does not like cherries. — Were there any pears (la pera) last year ? — There were not many. — Has your cousin (fern.) any strawberries ? — She has so many that she cannot eat them all. 175 . Why do your sisters not go to the play ? — They cannot go thithei because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. — Where did they catch a cold ? — They caught a cold in going from the opera last xiight. — Does it suit your sister to eat some peaches ? — It does not suit her to eat any, for she has already eaten a good many, and if she eats so much it v/ill make her ill. — Did you sleep well last night ? — I did not sleep well, for my children made too much noise in my room. — Where were you last night ? — I was at my brother-in-law’s. — Did you see* your sister-in-law ? — I did see her. — How is slie ? — She is better than usual. — Did you play ? — We did not play, but we read some good books ; for my sister-in-law likes to read better than to play. — Have you read the gazette to-day ? — I have read it. — Is there any thing new in it ? — I have not read any thing new (in it.) — Where have you been since I saw you ? — I have been at Vienna, Paris, and Berlin. — Did you speak to my aunt ? — I did speak to her. — What does she say ? — She says that she wishes to see you. — Whither have you put my pen ? — I have put it upon the bench. — Do you intend to see your niece to- day ? — I intend to see her, for she has promised me to dine with us.— I admire (admirar) that family, (la familial for the father is the king and the mother is the queen of it. The children and the servants aro the subjects (el sujeto) of the state, (el estado.) The tutors of the children are the ministers, (el ministro,) who share with the king and queen the care (el cuidado) of the government, (elgobiemx .) The good education (la educacion, fern.) which is given to childrei is the crown of monarchs, (el monarca.) 250 FIFTY- SEVENTH LESSON. 176. Have you already hired a room ? — I have already hired one. — W here nave you hired it ? — I have hired it in William-street, number one hundred and fifty-two. — At whose house have you hired it ? — At the house of the man whose son has sold you a horse. — For whom haa your father hired a room ? — He has hired one for his son, wno has just arrived from France. — Why have you not kept your promise ? — I do not remember what I promised you. — Did you not promise us to take us to the concert last Thursday? — I confess that I was wrong in promising you ; the concert, however, {con todo^) has not taken place. — Does your orother confess his fault ? — He confesses it. — What doea your uncle say to that note ? — He says that it is written very well, but he admits that he has been wrong in sending it to the captain. — Do you confess your fault now ? — I confess it to be a fault. — Where have you found my coat ? — I have found it in tlie blue room, (Obs. C, Les- son XXXVIII.) — Will you hang my hat on the tree ? — I will hang it (thereon.) — How are you to-day ? — I am not very well. — What is the matter with you ? — I have a violent headache and a cold. — Where did you catch a cold ? — I caught it last night in going from the play. FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON . — Leccion Quincuagesima septima. OF THE GERUND. The Gerund (by which the English present participle is translated) i& formed from the present of the infinitive mood, by suppressing the termi- nations ar, er, or ir, and adding in their place undo to the verbs of the first conjugation, and iendo to those of the second and third. 1. To speak, hablar. 2. To sell, vender. 3. To receive, recibir. Speaking, hMando. Selling, vexidiendo. Receiving, recihiendo. Ohs. A. Verbs ending in eer, and uir, (when the u is sounded, as in atribuir,) change the i, with which the termination begins, into y ; thus* yendOf instead of iendo ; as — To read, leer. | Reading, \eycndo. To instruct, instruzr | Instructing, instruyewt/o. Ohs. B. The English present participle may be translated into Spanish by tl 9 Gerund, when it expresses the action of the verb as continuing, and unfinished. It is then used alone, or preceded by the verb Estar, but by ao means by other words ; as. He corrects whilst reading, el corrige leyendo^ 01 zstando leyendo, mientras estd leyendo, (t mientras Ice, or al leer ;) but :t cannot ho said, el corrige mientras leyendo. FFITY-SEVENTH LESSON. 251 rhe man eats while* running [ write while reading. He questions while speaking. V^ou speak while answering me. To question-^ The cravat. The carriage. The house. The letter. The table. The family. The promise. The leg The sore throat. The throat. I have a sore throat. The meat. Salt meat. Fresh meat. Fresh beef. Cold water. The food, (victuals ) The dish, (mess.) Salt meats. Milk food. The traveller. To march, to walk, to step. Ghs. C. To walk, meaning to do it vasearse, (Lesson XLV ) When it 1 is expressed as above. I have walked a good deal to day. 1 have been walking in the garden with my mother. To walk, or travel a mile. To walk, or travel a league. To walk a step. El hombre come yendo corriendo. t El hombre come al ir corriendo. t Yo escribe midntras leo El pregunta mientras (or cuando estd hablando. t V. habla al tiempo de responderme V. habla mientras (cuando) mores- ponde. Preguntar. Cuestionar La corbata. La carroza, (el coche.) La casa. La carta. La letra. La mesa. La familia. La promesa. La pierna. El mal de garganta. La garganta. Yo tengo mal de garganta. Yo tengo la garganta mala, t La garganta me hace mai. La came. Came salada. Came fresca. Vaca fresca. Agua fria. La comida. El alimento. Los platos. Las viandas. Came en escabeche. Lacticinios. Viagero. Viajante. Andar Caminar. Dar un paso. for pleasure, is translated by pasear, oi signifies to move slowly on the feet, Hoy he and ado muchisimo. He estado paseando con mi madiu en el jardin. Andar (caminar, viajar) una milla Andar (caminar, viajar) una legua. t Dar un paso. 252 FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. To take a step (meaning to measures.) To go on a journey. To make a speech. A piece of business. An aflair. I'o transact business. take 5 t Tomar sus medidas^ t Valerse de rnedioit Ir d, un viage. t Salir d un viage. Hacer un viage. I Hacer un discurso. Un legocio. Un asunto. I Negociar. Hacer negocios To meddle with something. What are you meddling with ? I am meddling with my own busi- ness. That man always meddles with other people’s business. I do not meddle with other people’s business. Meterse, or entremetersc con guno, {en algun negocio.) Jn gerirse. I En que se mete V. ? I En que os meteis ? Yo me meto en mis propios negocios Ese h ombre se mete siempre en lo? negocios agenos, (de otros.) Yo no me entremeto en los negocios agenos. Others. Other people. He emphys himself in painting. The art of painting. Chemistry. The art Strange. To employ one^s self in. 1 Otros. Otras gentes. Se ocupa en la pintura. t Trahaja de pin tor. El (la) arte de la pintura La pintura. La quimica. El (la) arte. Extra ho. Asombroso. SingUiar. Emplearse en. Ocuparse ctu To concern some one. To look at some one I Jo not like to meddle with things that do not concern me. That concerns nobody, lo concern one’s self about some- thir.g. Concernir *. Tocar Importar. Pertenecer. Interesar. Mirar d alguno, No me gusta meterme en cosas qu4 no me tocan, (or importan.) Eso no toca (interesa) d. ninguno. + Inquietarse de, (por or acerca de) t Fatigarse de, (por oi acerca de.) I'o attract. Loaiktoae attracts Iron. Atraer *. El iman atrae el hierro, (fierro.) FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 253 ^ Su canto me atrae. Her einging attracts me ^ atrae. To charm. ( To enchant. f S Hechizar. Encantar. Embeiesar I am charmed with it. Estoy encantado de (or con) ello The beauty La he.-mosura. The goodness. La hondad. Obs. D Nouns ending in ady dad, or tad, expressing properties oi qualities, a? 3 feminine. The harmony. La harmonia. The voice La voz. The power El poder. To repeat. Repetir * The repetition. La repeticion. The commencement, beginning. El principio, or comienzo. The wisdom. La sabiduria. Study. El estudio. The lord. El senor A good memory. Una buena meinoria. A memorandum. | ( Apunte. Nota. Razon. Apmitamiento. The nightingale. El ruisenor. All the beginnings are difficult | Todos los principios son dificilea. To create. Criar, or crear. Creation. La creacion The Creator. El Criador. The benefit. El beneficio. The fear of the Lord. El temor del Senor. Heaven. El cielo. The earth La tierreu Solitude. La Boledad. The lesson. La leccion The goodness. La bondad (See Obs. D, above.) Flour, meal Harina. The mill. El molino EXERCISES. 177 . Will you dine with us to-day? — With much pleasure. — ^What have fou for dinner ? — We have good soup, some fresh and salt meat, and some milk food. — Do you like milk food ? — I like it better than all other food. — Are you ready to dine ? — I am ready. — Do you intend tc 254 FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON set out soon ? — I intend setting out next week. — Do you travel alono^ solo ?) — No, Madam, I travel with my uncle. — Do you travel on foot or in a carriage? (Less. XIJIL) — We travel in a carriage. — Did you meet any one in your last journey {ultinio) to Berlin ’ — We met many travellers. — What do you intend to spend your time in (Lesson L-) tliis summer ? — I inte*ad to take a short journey.^ — Did you walk much in your last journey? — I like much to walk, but my ancle likes to go in a carriage. — Did he not wish to walk? — lie wished to walk at first, {al principio,) but he wished to get into the coach {montar en el coche) after having taken a few steps, so that I did not walk much. — What have you been doing at school to-day ? — We have been listening to our professor. — Wnat did he say ? — He made a long {gran) speech on the goodness of God. After saying, “ Repetition is the mother of studies, and a good memory is a great benefit of God,” he said, “ God is the creator of heaven and earth ; the fear of the Lord is the beginning of all wisdom.” — What are you doing all day in this garden ? — I am walking in it. — What is there in it that attracts you, {que atrael) — The singing of the birds attracts me. — Are there any nightingales (in it ?) — There are some in it, and the harmony of their singing enchants m.e. — Have those nightingales more power over {sohre) you than the beauties of painting, or the voice of your tender {tierna) mother, who loves you so much ? — I confess the harmony ot the singing of those little birds has more power over me than the most bonder words of my dearest friends. 178 . What does your niece amuse herself with (Lesson XLIV.) in her solitude ? — She reads a good deal, and writes letters to her mother. — What does your uncle amuse himself with in his solitude ? — He employs himself in painting and chemistry. — Does he no longer do any business ? — He no longer does any, for he is too old to do it. — Why does he meddle with your business ? — He does not generally meddle with other people’s business, but he meddles with mine oecause he loves me. — Has your master made you repeat your lesson to-day ? — He has made me repeat it. — ^Did you know it ? — I knew it pretty well. — Have you also done some exercises ? — I have done sume, but what is that to you, {sirvase decirme que le importa d F.,) I beg ? — I do not generally meddle with things that do not concern me, but I lovo you so much that I concern myself much about {quc yo me inter eso) what you are doing. — Does any one trouble his head about you ? — No one troubles his head about me, for I am not worth the trouble, {m valgo la pena.) — Who corrects your exercises ? — My master corrects tliem. — How does he correct them? — He corrects them in rcarlinjl FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 255 dicm, and in reading them he speaks to me. — How many things does your master do at the same time, {a la vez 1 ) — He does four things at the same time. — How so, {comol) — He reads and corrects my exer- cises, speaks to me and questions me all at once. — Does your sister sing while dancing ? — She sings while working, but she cannot sing tvliile dancing. — Has your mother left? — She has not left yet. — When will she set out ? — She will set out to-morrow evening. — At what o’clock ? — At a quarter to seven. — Have your sisters arrived ? — They have not arrived yet, but we expect them tliis evening. — Will they spend the evening (Note, page 243) with us ? — They will spend it with us, for they have promised me to do so. — Where have you spent the morning ? — I have spent it in the country. — Do you go every morning to the country ? — I do not go every morning, but twice a week. — Why has your niece not colled upon me ? — She is very 111, and has spent the whole day in her room. FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON . — Leccion Quincuagesirna octava The past or compound future is formed from the future of the auxiliarf «md the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. Example ; — OF THE PAST FUTURE.— No. 4, p. I shall have loved. Yo habrd am ado. Tii habrds amado. t\ , or ella habrd amaao. V. habrd amado. Nosotros habr^mos amado. Vosotros (orvos) habreis amado. Elios (or ellas) habrdn amado. VV. habrdn amado. Thou wilt have loved. He, or she will have loved. You will have loved. We shall have loved. You will have loved. They will have lovec. You will have loved. [ shall have come. Thou wilt have come, He will have come. She will have come You will have come We shall have come. You will have come. They will have come You vnll have come. Yo habrd venido. Th habrds venido. ]&1 habrd venido Ella habrd venido. V. habrd venido. Nosotros habrdmos venido. Vosotros (or vos) habrdis venido Elios (or ellas) habrdn venido. VV. habrdn venido. 256 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON I shall have been praised. Thou wilt have been praised. He will have been praised. She will have been praised. You will have been praised. We shall have been praised. You will have been praised. Tliey will have been praised. \’ou will have been praised. To have left. When I have paid for the horse, I shall have only ten dollars left. How much money have you left? I have five dollars left. I have only one dollar left. How much has your brother left ? He has one dollar left. How much has your sister left ? She has only a few pence left. How much have your brothers left ? They hav» a hundred dollars left. When they have paid the tailor, they will have a hundred dollars left, Obs. A The conjunctions wkeUf jr the compound of the present, of 1 press futurity. Example : — When I am at my aunt’s, will you come to see me ? A.fter you have done writing, will you take a turn with me ? You will play, when you have finished your exercise Yo habrd side alabado, (alabada.) Tu habrds sido alabado, (alabada ) 6l habrd, sido alabado. Ella habrd sido alabada. V. habrd sido alabado, (alabada., Nosotros (or nosotrbs) habremos sidr. alabados, (alabadas.) Vosotros (or vosotras) habreis sid»' alabados, (alabadas.) Elios (ellas) habran sido alabados^ (alabadas.) VV. habrdn sido alabados, (alabadas.) Quedar Sobrar. Resiar. + Cuando yo haya pagadc el (oi por el) caballo, solo me quedardn diez pesos. 1 1 Cuanto dinero le queda d V., (^oi os queda) ? t Me quedan cinco pesos. Me queda solo un peso. I Cuanto le resta (or queda) al her- mano de V. ? Le queda un peso. i Cuanto le queda d la senora her- mana de V. ? (or d su senora, &c.) Le quedan solo unos cuartos. I Cuanto ha quedado d sus hermanoa de V.? Les han quedado cien pesos. Cuando ellos hayan pagado al sastro, les quedardn cien pesos. as soon as, after, require the present, le subjunctive mood, when they ex« iVendrd V. d verme, cuando este en casa de mi tia ? I Custard V. de dar un paseo {una vuelta) conmigo, de spues que haya acabado de esci ibir? V. jugard, evande haya acabado sv ejercicio pirrr-EiGHTH lesson. 257 ( i Que hard. 'V. despues que haya »Vhat will you do when you have J comido? diiiod 1 t Qwe hai a F. despues de comei (or de la comida) f IVlieii J lave spoken to your brother, Cuando yo haya hablado al sefioi I sliall know what I have to do. herrnano de V. sabre lo que he do haner IDIOMS WITH HACER. How is the weather ? It is fine weather. It is bad weather. It is hot. It is very warm. It is cold. It is very cold. The wind blows high. It is a long time that I saw him. It is becoming late. It is becoming night. He causes an information to be made. She counterfeits the idiot, (or feigns to be an idiot.) He acts as a broker. Not to mind a person, (or thing.) To ridicule any one. To boast of. Out of doors. I I Que tiempo hace ? Hace buen tiempo. Hace hermoso tiempo. Hace mal tiempo. Hace calor. Hace mucho calor. Hace frio. Hace mucho frio. Hace mucho viento. Hace mucho tiempo que le vi. f Se hace tarde. t Se hace uoche. Anochece. t ^11 hace hacer una informacloii. t Ella hace la boba, (la toiita.) Hace el (or de) corredor. No hacer caso de una persona, (oi cosa.) Hacer chacota (or burla) de algmio Hacer alarde. Fuera. To enter. To go in. To come in Will you go into my room ? I wiil go in. I shall go in. To sit down. To siti to Oe seated. lls is seated upon the large chair. She is seated upon the bench. Erurar. (Ir adentro.) I Quiere V. entrar en mi cuarto (aposento) ? Yq entrare. (Si, senor.) Eiitrard. Sentarse. (See Lesson I II.) Estar sentadOi (fern, scntada^ ]&1 estd, sentado en la silla de hraxoi Ella esta sentada en el banco. To fill with To fill a bottle with wine Llenar — de, Llenar de vino una liotella 258 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESS03S. Do you fill that bottle with water ? fill my purse with money. EJe fills Elis belly with meat. The pocket. Have you come quite alone I No, I have brought all my men along with me. To bring. fie has brought all his men along with him. Have you brought your brother along with you ? I Eiave brought him along with me. Have you told the groom to bring me the horse ? The groom. Are you bringing in my books ? I am bringing them to you. To take, to carry. Will you take that dog to the stable ? r will take it thither. Are you carrying that gun to my father ? I carry it to him. The cane, the stick. The stable. I Llena V. de agua esta bctella 1 Yo lleno de dinoro mi bo Isa. 6l se llena de came la barriga. (A very low expression.) La bolsa, (fern.) El bolsillo, La faltriquera, (fern.) ^ Ha venido V. absolutamente solo ? No, yo he traido toda mi gente (todcs mis hombres) conmigo Traer * ]&1 ha traido toda su gente consigo. I Ha traido V. consigo d su her- maiio ? Yo le he traido conmigo. I Ha dicho V. al mozo de caballo* (caballerizo) que traiga mi cabaliol El mozo de caballos. El caballerizo. I Me trae V. mis libros ? Yo se los traigo d V. Llevar. Traer. Conducir i Quiere V. llevar ese perro al es* table ? Yo le llevare alli. I Lleva V. esa escopeta d mi padro ? Yo se la llevo La cana. El palo, (mas l El hasten, (mas.) El establo, (mas.) La caballeriza, (fern ) To come down, to go down. I'o go down into the well. To go, or come down the hill. To go down the river. To alight from one’s horse, or dis- mt imt. To alight, 10 get out I Bajar d, (or de.'^. Descender ® 1 Bajar al pozo. \ Bajar el cerro ( Descender del cerro. I Bajar el rio. ^ t Apearse del caballo. ( Desmontarse. I Apearse. Bajar. Salir de. FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 259 To go up, to mount, to ascend. To go up the mountain. To get into the coach. To get on board a ship. Subir. Montar. Subir el monte. Eiitrar (subir) en e coche t Embarcarse. Tc desire, to beg, to request, to pray. Will you desire your brother to come I i Quiere V. suplicar a su hcrmam? down ? 1 que baje 7 Ohs. B. Verbs signifying* to beg, to request, to command, &c., require liie verb governed by them to be in the subjunctive mood. (See Appendix ^ Desear. Suplicar. Pedir Rogar *. The beard. The river. The stream, torrent. To go, or come up the river. La barba. El rio. La corriente. El torrente. Subir el rio. EXERCISES. 179 . Will your parents go into the country to-morrow ? — They will not go, for it is too dusty. — Shall we take a walk to-day ? — We will not trke a walk, for it is too muddy out of doors, (en la calle .) — Do you s?e the castle of my relation behind yonder mountain, (aquella mon~ iahal ) — I see it. — Shall we go in ? — We will go in if you liket — Will /ou go into that room ? — I shall not go into it, for it is smoky. — I wish fou a good morning. Madam. — Will you not come in ? Will you not dt down — I will sit down upon that large chair. — Will you tell me what has become of your brother ? — I will tell you. — Where is your lister ? — Do you not see her ? She sits upon the bench. — Is your father seated upon the bench ? — No, he sits upon the chair. — Hast tliou spent all thy money ? — I have not spent all. — How much hast thou left ? — I have not much left. I have but five shillings left. — How much money have thy sisters left ? — They have but three dollars left, — Have you money enough left to pay your tailor ? — I have enougn left to pay him ; but if I pay him I shall have but little left. — How much money will your brothers have left ? — They will have a hundred dollars lefi. — When will you go to Italy ? — I shall go as soon as (luego que) I have Qiaya) learned Italian. — When will your brothers go to France ? — They will go thither as soon as they know (sepan) French. — When will they learn it ? — They will learn it when they have (Jiayan) found a good master. — How much money shall wc> have left when ve have (hayamos) paid for our horses ? — When we have Qiayamos' (K'id for them we shall have only a hundred dollars left. 2G0 FIFTY-EIGHTH LES80B. 180 . Do you gain any thing by (en) that business ? — I do not gain mucb by it, {en el,) but my brother gains a good deal by it. He [ills hia nurse with money. — How much money have you gained ? — I \ivya gained only a little, but my cousin has gained much by it. He has tilled his pocket with money. — Why does that man not work { — He i *5 a good-tor-nothing fellow, for he does nothing but eat all the day long. He (continually) fills his belly with meat, so that he will make himself (se enfermard) ill if he continues {continuar) to eat so much. — With what have you filled that bottle ? — I have filled it with wine. — Will this man take care of my horse ? — He \\\J take care of it. — WIio will take care of my servant ? — The landlord will take care of liim. — Does your ser\'ant take care of your horses ? — He does take care of them. — Is he taking care of your clothes ? — He takes care of them, for he brushes them every morning. — Have you ever drunk French wine / — I have never drunk any. — Is it long since you ate French bread ?— It is almost three years since 1 ate any. — Have you hurt my brother in-law ? — I have not hurt him, but he has cut my finger. — What has he cut your finger with ? — Witli the knife wliich you have lent him. 181 . Is } our father arrived at last ? — Everybody says that he is arrived, but I have not seen him yet. — Has the physician hurt your son ? — He has hurt him, for he has cut his finger. — Have they cut off that man’s leg ? — They have cut it off. — Are you pleased with your servant ? — I am much pleased with him, for he is fit for any thing, (j)ara lodo.) — What does he know ? — He knows every thing, {todo.) — Can he ride ? — He can. — Has your brother returned at last from England ? — He has returned thence, and has brought you a fine horse. — Has he told his groom to bring it to me, {me le traiga ?) — He has told him to bring {lleve) it to you. — What do you think of that horse ? — I think that it is a fine and good one, and beg you to lead {lleve) it into the stable. — In what did you spend your time yesterday ? — I went to the concert, and afterwards to the play. — W'hen did that man go down into the well ? — He went down into it this morning. — Has he come up again yet, {volver d subir 1) — He came up an hour ago. — Where is your brother I — He is in his room. — Will you tell him to come down, {que bajel)^ ■ I will tell him so, but he is not dressed (Lesson LIII.) yet. — Is your friend still on the mountain ? — He has already come dov.n. — Did you go down or up the river ? — We went down it. — Did my cousin speak to you before he started ? — He spoke to me before he got into tha coach. — Have you seen my brother ? — I saw him before I went od board tlie ship. — Is it better to get into a coach than to go on board FIFTY-NINTn LESSON. 261 jhe Sihip ? — It is not worth while to get into a coach or to go on board Jie ship when one has no wish to travel. FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. — Leccion Quincuagesima nona. Ohs. A. The Imperfect is a past tense, which was still present at ths progresos de una enfemedad. be changed into used to, use No 2 Olvidaba, olvidabas, olvidaba. Nc. 2 Olvide, olvidaste, olvidd. No. 3. Cuando ibamos d la escuela, olvidaba- mos d menudo nuesiros libros. Cuando V. iba d la iglesia, V. pcdia frecuentemente al Sehor por sus hij os. Cuando recibiamos dinero, le em- pledbamos en comprar buenos libros. Cuando V. compraba de eso merca- der, no pagaba siempre al contada I Logrd componer la corbata de V su hermana ? Si ; or, Lo logrd. I Ila vuelto de la plaza la mujer " Todama no. No ha vuelto. I Han convenido en eso las mujeres 1 Convinieron (or han convenido) on ello. I A donde fud su hermana de V. ? Ella fue d la iglesia. 266 SIXTIETH LESSON. OF THE CONDITIONAL OR POTENTIAL SlxMPLE This tense corresponds to No. 8, the second termination of the Imperfect of the subjunctive mood. The Imperfect of the subjunctive has three ler- niinations for each person : the first, No. 7, is ra ; the second, No. 6, is ria ; and the third. No. 9, is se, (See the table of the terminations of lha vsrDs.) In phrases in which the Potential is used, there are generally tv? jeatences, one of which is the principal,' and the other the subordinate. In Spanish, the verb of the principal is in the termination marked No. 8, and tlio verb of the subordinate is in the terminations marked Nos. 7 or 9 Example ; — If I had money, / would buy hooks — Si yo tuviese (tuv era) dinero compraria lihros. The sentence in italics is the principal, and although, in the above example, it is placed after the subordinate it might be placed before. It is easy to distinguish the principal from the subo7 dinate : the last is always preceded by a conjunction. I would have, thou wouldst have, he ^ or she would have. j We would have, you would have, | they would have. J I could have, thou couidst have, he*' or she could have. We could have, you could have, they could have. I might have, thou mightst have, he might have. We might have, you might have, they might have. Tendria, tendrias, tendria. Tendriamos, tendriais, ten- dr i an. Tuviera, tuvieras, tuviera. Tiivieramos, tuvierais, tu- vieran. > Tuviese, tuvieses, tuviese. ^ Tuviesemos, tuvieseis, tu- viesen. j ►No. 8 ^No. 7 . No. 9. Obs. If {si) is sometimes understood in English, but it must always I)e expressed in Spanish, and the tenses used in the subordinate must be Na 7 and No. 9 Example: — Had I money, I would buy books — Si yo tuviera (or tuviese) dinero, compraria libros. No. 8 of To wish, I would, thou wouldst, he would. We would, you would, they would. No. 8 de Querer, Querria, querrias, querria. Querriamos, querriais, querrian If I had money, I would have a \ new coat, | If thou couidst do this, thou wouldst do that. If he could, hs would, I would go if I had time. If he knew what you have done, he would scold yotu To scold. Si yo tuviera (or tuviese) dineui^ compraria una casaca nueva. Si tii pudieras (or pudieses) hacof esto, querrias hacer aquello. Si ^1 pudiera, (or pudiese,) querria. Yo iria si tuviera tiempo. Si ^1 supiera (or supiese) lo que V. ha hecho, le reprenderia. Reprender. (Conj. like Prender.'i SIXTIETH LESSON. 267 ff tliere vere any wood, he would make a fire. Should the men come, ii would he necessary to give them something to drink. Should we receive our letters, we would not read them until to- morrow Not until. Si hubieru (hubiese) lena, eZ encen^ deria la candela^ {haria el fuego.] Si vinieran (viniesen) los hombres, seria menesler darles algo {algu- na cosa) que beher. Si recibiesemos (recibieuimos) n oes- trus cartas, no las leeriamos hmU mahana. No hasta. CONDITIONAL OR POTENTIAL COMPOUND. T^is tense is formed from No. 8 of Haber, with the peist participle of thw verb to be conjugated. (It is marked No. 8, p.) Nos. 8, 7, 9, of To have, (aux.) | I would have, thou wouldst have,'] he would have. I We would have, you would have, ( they would have. J I could have, thou couldst have, he' could have. We could have, you could have, they could have. I might have, thou mightst have, he [ might have. We might have, you might have, they might have. No. 8, p. of To have, (active.) I would have had, thou wouldst have ^ had, he or she would have had. We would have had, you would have had, they would have had. 1 Nos. 8, 7, 9, de Haber. Habria, habrias, habria. 'I Habriamos, habriais, ha- brian. Hubiera, hubieras, hu- biera. Hubieramos, hubierais, hubieran. Hubiese, hubieses, hu- biese. Hubi6semos, hubieseis, hubiesen. I j No. 8. No. 7 No. 9. No. 8, p. de Tener. Habria tenido, habrias"' tenido, habria tenido. Habriamos tenido, ha- briais tenido, habrian tenido. > ^ No. 8, p If I had received my money, / would have bought new books. If he had had a pen, he would have recollected the word. If you had risen early, you could . not have caught a cold. If they had get rid of their old horse, they would have procured a bet- ter one Si hubiera (hubiese) recibido mi di nero, habria comprado nuevos lit ■ ros. Si el hubiera (hubiese) tenido uu& pluma, se habria acordado de la palabra. Si V. se hubiera levantado temprano, no se habria resfriado. Si se hubiesen deshecho de 8U caba* llo viejo, habrian comprado otn mejor. 268 SIXTIETH LESSON. If he had washed his hands, he would have wiped them. If I had known that, I would have behaved differently. If thou hadst taken notice of that, thou wouldst not have been mis- taken. Si el se hubiera lavado las manor, las habria enjugado. ^ Si yo hubiese sabido eso, me habri portado diferentemente. Si hubieras (hubieses) notado eso» no te habrias equivecado Wnuld you learn Spanish if I learn- it ? I wjuld learn it if you learned it. Would you have learned German^ if I had learned it? I would have learned it if you had learned it. Would you go to Spain if I went there with you ? I would gOy if you went with me. Would you have gone to France if I had gone with you ? Would you go out if I remained at home ? [ would remain at home if you went out. Would you have written a letter if I had written a note. I Aprenderia V. el Espahol si yo le aprendiera, (le aprendiese) ? Yo le aprenderia si V. 'e aprendiera, (le aprendiese.) I Habria V aprendido el Alt many si yo le hubiera (hubiese) aprendi- do ? Yo le habria aprendido si V. le hu- biera (hubiese) aprendido. I Iria V a Espaha si yo fuera (fuese) con V. ? Yo iriay si V. fuera conmigo. I Habria V. ido d Fran day si yo hubiera (hubiese) ido con el ? I Saldria V. si yo me quedara (que- dase) en casa ? Yo me quedaria en casa si V sa* liera, (saliese.) I Habria escrito V. una carta si ya hubiera (hubiese) escrito un hi liete ? There is my book. Here is my book. There it is. There they are. Here I am. That is the reason why. Therefore I say so. K Aili estd mi libro. ( Alli tiene V. mi libro. ( Aqui estd mi libro. ^ Aqui tiene V. mi libro. Alli estd. Alli le tiene \ Alli estan. Alli los tiene \ Aqui estoy. Aqui me tiene V Esa es la razon por la ciial. Pues yo digo eso. My feet are cold. His feet are cold. He has a pain in his side. Her hands are cold t Tengo l'>s pies frios. t Tiene los pies frios. t Tiene dolor de costado J Sus manos estan frias. f Ella tiene laf manos frias SIXTIETH LESSON. 2G9 My body is cold. Her tongue hurts her very much. My head hurts me. Her leg hurts her. Mi cuerpo esta frio. Tengo el cuerpo frio. t A ella le duele mucho la lengua. t Me duele la cabeza. t A ella le duele la pienia. EXERCISES. 185 Did you forget any thing when you went to school ? — We often forgot our books. — Where did you forget them ? — We forgot them at die school. — Did we forget any thing ? — You forgot nothing.— Did your mother pray for any one when she went to church ? — She prayed for her children. — For whom did we pray? — You prayed for your parents. — For whom did our parents pray ? — They prayed for their children. — When you received your money what did you do with it ? — We employed it in purchasing some good books. — Did you employ yours also in purchasing books ? — No ; we employed it in assisting the poor, (socorrer .) — Did you not pay your tailor? — We did pay him. — Did you always pay in cash when you bought of that merchant ? — We always paid in cash, for we never buy on credit. — Has your sister succeeded in mending your stockings ? — She has succeeded in it. — Has your mother returned from church ? — She has not yet returned. — Whither has’ your aunt gone ? — She has gone to church. — Whither have our cousins (fern.) gone ? — They have gone to the concert. — Have they not yet returned from it ? — They have not yet returned. 186. Who is there ? — It is I, (yo soy.) — Who are those men ? — The} are foreigners w^ho wish to speak to you. — Of what country are they ? — They are Americans. — Where is my book ? — There it is. — And my pen ? — Here it is. — Where is your sister ? — There she is. — Where are our cousins (fern. ?) — There they are. — Where are you, Joim, (Juan ?) — Here I am. — Why do your children live in Spain ? — They wish to learn Spanish ; that is the reason why they live in Spain. — Wl\y do you sit near the fire ? — My hands and feet are cold ; that is the reason why I sit near the fire.: — Are your sister’s hands cold ? — No ; but her feet are cold. — What is the matter with your aunt ? — Her leg hurts her. — Is any thing the matter with you ? — My head hurts me. — What is the matter with that woman ? — Her tongue huns hei very much. — Why do you not eat ? — I shall not eat before I have a good appetite. — Has your sister a good appetite ?— She has a very good appetite ; that is the reason why she eats so much. — If you have read the Ixx^ks which I lent you whv do you not return them to me ?— ^70 SIXTIETH LESSOET. I intend reading them oace more, {otra vez ;) that is the reason why 1 aave not yet returned them to you ; but I will return them tc 3 ^ou as soon as I have (haya) read them a second time, {otra rez.)— Why have you not brought my shoes ? — They were not made, there* fore I did not bring them ; but I bring them to you now : here they are, * — Why has your daughter not learned her exercises ? — She has taken a walk with her companion, (fern. ;) that is the reason why she has no! learned them : but she promises to learn them to-morrow, if you do not scold her. 187 . Would you have money if your father were here ? — I shoiJd have some if lie were here. — Would you have been pleased if I had had Borne books ? — I should have been much pleased if you had had some. — Would you have praised my little brother if he had been good ?— If he had been good I should certainly not only have praised, but also loved, honored, {honrar,) and rewarded him. — Should we be praised if we did our exercises ? — If you did them without a fault {sin falta) you would be praised and rewarded. — Would my brother not have been punished if he had done his exercises ? — He would not have been punished if he had done them. — Would my sister have been praised if she had not been skilful ? — She would certainly not have been praised if she had not been very skilful, and if she had not worked from morning {desde) till evening.— Would you give me something if I were very good ? — If you were very good, and if you worked well, I would give you a fine book. — Would you have written to your sister if I had gone to Paris ? — I would have written to her, and sent her something handsome if you had gone thither. — Would you speak if I listened to you ? — I would speak if you listened to me, and if you would answer me. — Would you have spoken to my mother if you had seen her? — I would have spoken to her, and have begged of her {rogar) to s?nd you a handsome gold watch if I had seen her. 188 . One of the valet de chambres {ayuda de cdmara) of Louis XIY. {de Luis XIV.) requested that prince, as he was going to bed, to recommend to the first president a lawsuit {pleito) which he had against {contra) his father-in-law, and said, in urging him, ( urgiendole ;) “ Alas, (All!) Sire, {Senor() you (F. M. — Vuestra Majestad) have but to say yne word.” “ Well,” {BienO said Louis XIV., “ it is not that which embarrasses me, {embarazar ;) but tell me, if thou wert in thy father-in- law’s place, and thy father-in-law in thine, wouldst thou be glad {te (ilegrarias) if I said (dijera) that word ?” It the men should come it would be necessary to give them some SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. 273 thing to di ink. — If he could do this he would do that. — 1 have alway? flattered myself, my dear brother, that you loved me as much as I love you ; but 1 now see that I have been mistaken. I should like to know why you went a-walking without me. — I have heard, my dear sister, fhat you are angry with me, {estar enfadado^) because I went a- walk- ing witliout you. I assure you that, had I known that you were not ill, I should have come for you ; but I inquired at your physician’s ^jut your health, and he told me that you had been keeping your bedl \utado en camd) the last eight days, (por oclio dias.) 189. A French officer having arri\ ed at the court (corte) of Vienna, the empress Theresa {Teresa) asked (preguntar) liim, if he believed that the princess of N., whom he had seen the day before, was really the handsomest woman in the {del) world, as was said. (See Obs. B, Lesson XXXVII.) “ Madam,” replied {replicar) the officer, “ I thought so yesterday.” — How do you like (Lesson XXIV.) that meat ' — I like it very well. — May I ask you for {Me tomare la lihertad de pedir d V. un poco) a piece o^ that fish ? — If you will have the goodness to pass me your plate I wdll give you some. — Would you have the goodness to pour me out {echarme) some drink, {de heherl) — With much pleasure. — Cicero, seeing his son-in-law, who was very short, (pequeno^) arrive (venir) with a long sword {espada largo) at his side, (a su lado) said, Who has fastened (atado) my son-in-law to this sword ?” SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. — Leccion Sexagesima primera. What has become of your aunt ? I do not know what has become of her. What has become of your sisters ? cannot tell you what has become of them. To die, to lose life i die, thou diest, he or she dies. Shall or will you die ? [ shall die. I Que se ha hecho de la senora tin de V.? Yo no s4 lo que se ha hecho de ella. I Que se ha hecho de las senoritas hermaiias de V. ? Yo no puedo decir 4. V. lo que so ha hecho de ellas. Morir *. Morirse. Perder la vida Muero, mueres, muere. I Morird (or se morird) V. ? (See Lee sonXLVI.) ' Yo morird. Yo me morird. 272 SIXTY-FIRST LESSOK, TIjat man died this morning, and his wife died also. This man is d#^ad. Th^ woman died this morning Ese h ombre murl6 (su murid) esi<* man ana, y su mujer se muri(' (muri6) tambiea Este h ombre esta v^or ha) muerto. La mujer murid (or se murid) esta mahaiia. (See Lees. XXXIII.) Wine sells well. Wine will sell well next year. Tlmt door shuts easily. That window does not open easily. 1 hat picture is seen far off. Far off, from afar. Winter clothes are not worn in sum- mer. That is not said. That cannot be comprehended. To conceive, to comprehend. It is clear. According to circumstances. According to. The circumstance. That is according to circumstances. It depends. 1 t El vino se vende bien. I t El vino se venderd. bien el afi-j I prdxirno, (or el aho que viene.) i t Esa puerta se cierra fdcilmente. I t Esa ventana no se abre facilmejte t Ese cuadro (esa piiitura) se ve de lejos. De lejos. Desde .djos. t La ropa de invierno no se usa e el verano. t Eso no se dice. t Eso.no se concibe, (comprendi } Concebir *. Comprender Es claro. Eso es claro. Segun las circunstancias. Segun. Conforme d. La circunstancia. t Comforme d.. Depende de. Glad. Pleased. Sorry. Displeased. Are you rich ] I am. Are the women handsome ? They are ; they are rich and nano- some. Are yon from Spain ? I am. What countrywoman is she? She is from Spain. Would you be sorry if you were lich ? I should not be sorry for it. To be an$p'y with somebody Alegre. Contento Sentido. Triste I Es V. rico ? Si. Soy rico. Si lo soy. I Son hermosas las mujeres ? Si son, (si lo son ;) son ricas y he. mesas. I Es V. de Espana ? ^ Es V. Espauol ' Si. Si lo soy. Soy espanol. I De que pais es ella ? Es de Espana. Es espanol a. t I Sentiria V. el eer rico ? I Si fuera V. rico, lo sentiria 7 t Yo no lo sentiria. Estar enfadado con alguno. f Enfadarsp con alguno. Enojarsf SIXTY- FIRST LESSON. 273 I'c be angry about something. Wljat are you angry about ? Are you sorry for having done it ? I am sorry for it. Honest. Polite. Impolite. Polite, courteous. Impolite, uncivil. Happy Lucky. Unhappy. Unlucky. Easy Difficult. Useful. Useless. Is it useful to write a good deal ? It is useful. Is it well (right) to take the property of others 1 Others* property^ (what belongs to others.) It is bad, (wrong.) It is not well, (wrong.) Well, right. Bad, wrong. Of what use is that That is of no use. What is this ? I do not know what it is. 1 t Enfadarse de algo. ^ t ^ De que se enfada V. ? ) t i Que le enfada d V. ? t I Sieiite V. haberlo heclio ? t Lo siento. Civil. Cortes. Politico Incivil. Descortes. Impolitico. Politico. Cortes. Impolitico. Descortes. Dichoso. Feliz. Desdichado. Infeliz Desgrac'adt Facil. Dificil. Util. In d til. I I Es dtil escribir muchisiino ? 1 Es dtil. I Es justo tomar lo ageno ? I Es bien tomar lo que es de otro * Lo ageno. Es malo. Es injusto. No es bien. Es malo. I Bien. Justo. ' Malo. Injusto. J I De que sirve eso ? ( I Para que sirve eso ? De iiada sirve, (eso.) Para nada sirve. I I Que es esto ? I No sd lo que es. Wliat is your name ? My name is Charles, fl^hat do you call this in Spanish ? tiow do you express this in Spanish? What is that called ? r t [ Como se llama V. ? < I Cual es el nombre de V. ? ( t Cual (conio) es la gracin de P*. J I t Yo me llamo Carlos. 1 t I Como se llama esto en espaiiol ? I 1 1 Como se dice esto en espahol ? 1 t I Como se llama eso ? George the Third. Charles the Seventh. Jorge Tercero. Carlos Sdptimo. 274 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. Oba. After tlie Christian name of a sovereign, the Spaniards .he ordinal numbers without the article as far as the tenth of the same name, after which they use either the cardinal or the ordinal number with- out the article. Louis the Fourteenth. Henry the Fourth. Charles the Fifth spoke several Eu- ropean languages fluently. Europe. European. Fluently. Luis Catorce. Henrique Cuarto. Carlos Quinto hablaba corriente- mente varias lenguas Europeas. Europa. El Europeo. Corrientemente. Rather, Rather than. Rather than squander my money I will keep it. To keepj (to remain with.) 1 will rather pay him thac go there. I will rather burn the coat than wear it. He has arrived sooner than I. A half-worn coat. To do things imperfectly. Mas bien. An^es. Mejor quA Mas bien que. Antes que. Antes que (mas bien que) disipar mi dinero me quedard con dl. t Quedarse con. Guardar Mas bien quiero pagarle quo ir alH. Mas bien quiero quernar la casara que usarla, (ponermela.) Ha llegado mas pronto que yo. Una casaca medio usada. Hacer las cosas imperfertamente. t Hacer las cosas d medias EXERCISES. 190 . What has become of your uncle ? — I will tell you what has become of him. — Here is the chair upon which he often sat. — Is he dead ? — He is dead. — When did he die ? — He died two years ago. — I am very much afflicted {aflyido) at it. — Why do you not sit down ? — If you will stay with me I will sit down ; but if you go I shall go along with you. — What has become of your aunt ? — I do not know what has be- come of her. — Will you tell me v/hat has become of your sister ? — I will tell you what has become of her. — Is she dead ? — She is not dead. — What has become of her ? — She is gone to Vienna. — What has be- came of your sisters ? — I cannot tell what has become of them, for I have not seen them these two years. — Are your parents still alive ?— « They are dead. — How long is it since your cousin (fern.) died ? — It is six months since she died. — Did the wine sell well last year ? — It did not sell very well ; but jt will sell better next year, for there will be a great deal, and it will not be dear. — Why do you open the door ? — Do you not see how it smokes here ? — I see it, but you must (deber) upen the window instead of opening the door. — The window does not open easily ; that is the reason why ! open the door. — When will you SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. 275 ^hat ii 1 — i will shut it as soon as there is Qiaya) (Obs, A, lossou LVIU.) no more smoke. — Did you often go a-fishing when you were in that couniry ? — We often went a-fishing and a-hunting. — If you will gc with us into tlie country you wfill see my father’s castle. — You are very polite, !Sir ; but I have seen that castle already. 191 . Wlien did you see my fatner’s castle ? — I saw it when I was travel- ling last year. It is a very fine castle, and is seen far oft‘. — How is iliat said ?— That is not said. That cannot be comprehended. — Cannot every thing be expressed in your language ? — Every thing can be expressed, but not as in yours. — Will you rise early to-morrow ? — It will depend upon circumstances ; if I go to bed early I shall rise early, but if I go to bed late I shall rise late. — Will you love my children ? — If they are good I shall love them. — Will you dine with us to-morrow ? — If you get ready Qiace preparar) the food I like I shall dine with 70U. — Have you already read the letter which you received this morn- ing ? — I have not opened it yet. — When will you read it ?~I shall read it as soon as I have (tenga) time. — Of what use is that ? — It is of no use. — Why have you picked it up ? — I have picked it up in order to show it you. — Can you tell me what it is ? — I cannot tell you, for I do not know ; but I will ask (preguntar) my brotlier, who will tell you. — Where did you find it ? — I found it on the shore of the river, near the wood. — Did you perceive it from afar ? — I had no need to perceive it from afar, for I passed by the side of the river. — Have you ever seen such a thing ? — Never. — Is it useful to speak much ? — It is according to circumstances : if one wishes to learn a foreign {estrangerJ) language it is useful to speak a great deal. — Is it as useful to write as to speak ? — It is more useful to speak than to write ; but in order to earn a foreign language one must do both, (lo uno y lo otro,) — Is it useful to write all that one says ? — That is useless. 192 . Where did you take this book from ? — I took it out of {del) the room of your friend, (fern.) — Is it right to take the books of other people ? — It is not right, I know ; but I wanted it, and I hope that your friend will not be displeased, for I will return it to her as soon as I have read {que le hay a) it. — What is your name ? — My name is William. {Guillermo ). — What is your sister’s name? — Her name is Eleanor {liconor ,) — Why does Charles complain of his sister ? — Because she Qas taken his pens. — Of whom do those children complain ? — Francis {Francisco) complains of Eleanor, and Eleanor of Francis. — Who is right ? — They are both wrong ; for Eleanor wishes to take Francis’s oooks, and Francis Eleanor’s. — To whom have you lent Cer\^antea 276 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. works, {las obrasl ) — I have lent the first volume to \v’ilhani and tht second to Louisa, {Luisa.) — How is tliat said in Spanish ? — It is saio thus. — How is that said in German ? — That is not said in German.— Has the tailor brought you your new coat ? — He has brought it me but it does not fit (Lesson XLVTII.)me well. — Will he make you another? — He will make me another; for rather tlian.wear it I will give it ^ /viy, (regalar.) — Will you use that horse ? — I ^^se it. — Why will you not use it ? — Because it does not suit me. — Will you pay for it ? — I will rather pay for it tlian use it. — To whom do those fine books belong, {de quien son ?) — They belong to William. — Who has given them to him ? — His father. — Will he read them ? — He will tear them rather than read them. — Who has told you that ? — He lias told me so himself, (el mismo.) 193 . What countrywoman is that lady, (seaora 1 ) — She is from i^'rance. —Are you from France ? — No, I am from Germany. — Why do you not give your clothes to mend ? — It is not worth while, for I must have new clothes. — Is the coat which you wear not a good one ? — It is a half-worn coat, and is good for nothing. — Would you be sorry if your mother were to arrive to-day ? — I should not be sorry for it. — Would your sister be sorry if she were rich ? — She would not be sorry for it. — Are you angry with any one ? — I am angry with Louisa, who went to the opera without 'telling me a word of it. — Where were you when she went out ? — I was in my room. — I assure you that she is very sorry for it ; for had she known that you w^re in your room, she would have called you in order to take you along with her to the opera. — Charles V., who spoke fluently several Luropean languages, used to say, (solia decir,) that we should speak ^ que se debia hablar) Sprmish with the gods, Italian with our friend (fern.,) French with our friend, (mas.,) German with soldiers, English 'with geese, (gansos^) Hungarian (hungaro) with horses, and Bohemian (oohemio) with the devil, (el diahlo.) SIXTY-SECOND LY^^SO^.—Lecdon Sexagesima segunda. As tOy (as for.) As to me. I En cuanto a. \ Eh cuanto d mi. j For lo que a mi me loca. Ohs. A. What (lo que) is generally translated qucj or que cosa^ before the ‘nfmitive. SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. 277 As to that, I do not know what to say. i do not know v/hat to do. [ do not know wliere to go. He does not know what to answer. We do not know what to buy. To die of a disease. She died of the smallpox. The smallpox. The fever. The intermittent fever. The apoplexy, lie had a cold fit. He has an ague, tlis fever has returned. He has been struck with apoplexy. To strike. En cuanto 4 eso, yo no s4 qiie decir Yo no s^ que (cosa) hacer. Y o no se d donde ir. El no sabe que (cosa) responder. No sabemos que (cosa) comprar Morir (morirse) de una enfermedad Ella murih de las viruelas. Las viruelas. Calentura. Fiebre La terciana. La apoplegia. fil tuvo un ataque de fiebre. El tiene calentura. Le ha vuelto la fiebre. El ha tenido un ataque de apoplogit t Le ha dado una apoplegia Herir. Golpear Dar Sure. I am sure of that. I am sure that she has arrived. I am sure of it. Something has happened. Nothing has happened. What has happened ? What has happened to her ? She had an accident. To shed. To pour out. A tear. To shed tears. To pour out some drink. [ pour out some drink for that man. With tears in his, her, our, my eyes Sweet. Mild. Sour. Acid. S>me sweet wjno. A mild air. A mild zephyr. A soft sleep. ?^othing makes life more agreeable than tlie society of, and the inter- course with our friends. Seguro. Segura. Estoy seguro de eso, (de ello.) Estoy seguro que ella ha llegade. Estoy seguro de ello. Algo ha sucedido. Nada ha sucedido. i Que ha sucedido ? I Que le ha sucedido d ella ? A ella le ha sucedido un accidonte Derramar. Echar. Una lagrima. Derramar lagrimas. Echar im trago. Echar de beber Echo un trago d ese hombre t Con lagrimas en los ojos. Dulce. Apacible. Agrio. Acido Vino dulce. Un semblante apacible. Un duloe cdfiro. Un dulce sueno. Nada hace la vida mas agradabla que la companfa y el trato de nu- estros amigos. 278 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON To repair to. 1 0 repair to the army, to one’s regi- ment. An army. A regiment I repaired to that place He repaired there. Ir d alguna pane. Volvcr d Ir al ejercito, volverse k su r©gt miento. Un ejercito. Un regimiento Fui d ese lugar. Fu^ allti To cry. To scream. To shriek. To help. The help. I help him to do that. I help you to write. ^ will help you to work. To cry for help. To znquinr after some one. Wih you have the goodness to pass mo that plate? 'Vill you pass me that plate, if you please ? If you please. AlS you please. Ai your pleasure. A.S you like. To knocK at the door To hnsi some one To distrust one. Do you trust that man ? ( do trust him. He trusts me. Wo must not trust everybody. Everyboapi (every one.) Everybodyy (all the world. To laugh at something. I laugh at that. We will laugh at if Gritar. Dar gritos. Chillar. Ayudar. Socorrer El socorro. La ayuda. La asislencla Le ayudo d hacer eso Le ayudo d V. d escribir. Le ayudard d V d trabajar Pedir socorro d voces. ( Informarse de alguno. \ Preguntar por. { I Tendrd V. la bondad de pasaime ese plato ? t I Me hard V. el favor de pasar ese plato ? S I Gusta V. de pasarme ese plato ? Se servird V. pasarme ese plato ? I Si V. gusta. I Como V. guste, (subj.) I Llamar d la puerta. Tocar d. C Confiarse d {de) alguno. < Tener confianza en alguno Fiarse de alguno. Desconjiar de, I Se fia V. de ese hombre ? Yo me fio de el. 6l se fia de mi No nos debemos fiar dc Icdo mundo. Cada uno Todo el mundc ' Reirse de algo. j Yo me rio de eso. I Nos reirdmos de elk SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. 279 Do you laugh at that ? I do laugh at it. At what do they laugh 7 I Se rie V de eso 7 Me rio de ello. I De que se rien elios, (ellas) 7 Tt/ augh tn a personas face. We laughed in his face. To laugh at, to deride some one I laugh at (deride) you. Did you laugh at us ? We did not laugh at you. Reirse de uno en su3 barhas Reirse de uno en sus bigotes. Nos reimos en su cara. Reirse de uno. Burlarse de uno Me rio (me burlo) do V. J i Se rieron VV. de nosotros? ( ^ Se han reido VV. de nosolros 7 S No nos reimos de VV. No nos hernos reido de VV Full. A book full of errors. To afford. Can you udiord to buy that horse ? ^ can«ct afford it. . can afford it I Lleno. I Un libro llenc Je errores, (yerros.) Tener medios (proporcion) de. Poder. f I Tiene V. medios de comprar ese < caballo ? ( I Puede V. comprar ese caballo ? I No tengo medios. No puedo. I Tengo proporcion. Puedo. Wb'» is there ? It i.«» I It is not I. It is he. D is not he. Are they your brothers I It is they. It is not they. Is it she 7 It is she It is not she. .^re they your sisters 7 It is they, (fern.) It is not they, (fern.) It is I who speak. It is they who laugh. Is it you who laugh? I» is thou who hast done it I Quien estd ahi ? Yo. Soy yo. Yo soy. Yo no sov. No soy yo. Es 6\. El es. Noes^l. 6l no es. I Son ellos los hermanos de V ? Son ellos. Ellos son. No son ellos. Ellos no son I Es ella ? Ella es. No es ella. Ella no es. I Son ellas sus hermanas do V 1 Son elleis. Ellas son. No son ellas. Ellas no son t Yo soy quien hablo. t Ellos (ell 2 is) son quienes rieu t ^ Es V. quien so rie ? i t Tu eres quien lo ha hecho 280 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. It is you, gentlemen, who have said so, (that.) We learn Spanish, m / brother and I. t VV., Caballeros, son quhnes ban dicho eso, (lo han dicho.) Mi hermano y yo aprendemos el pahol. Obs. B. In Spanish, when a verb lias two pronouns for a subject, itagioea m the plural with the person which has the priority. Example: — V. y yo !o haremos-— You and I will do it. V. y el escribirdn la carta — You and he will write the letter. Td y el la leeriis — Thou and he will read it You and I will go into country. You and he will stay at home. You will go to the country, and I will return to town. A lady. What were you doing when your tutor was here ? I was doing nothing. F said nothing. I t V. y yo iremos al campo. V. y el se queda.^an en casa. Fos y el os quedareis en c He tenido mal de ojos Descuidar de Ceder. Rendirse. Sujetarse t Se debe ceder d la nocesidad. 286 SIXTY-THIRD LESSOTs". To spring forward. riie cat springs upon the rat. To leap on horseback. ^n increase, an augmentation For more bad luck. For more good luck For more bad luck I have lost my purse To lose one’s wits. Fhat man has lost his wits, and he does not know what to do. Saliar. Abalanzarsa d. Echarse sohre. El gato se abalanza ^ la rata. Saltar sobre un caballo. Aumento. Colmo. Por mayo* For colmo de la desgracia. Por mayor desgracia. Para colmo de la desgracia Para colmo de la dicha. Por colmo de la dicha Por mayor dicha. Por mayor desgracia he perdido mi bolsa. Perder la chabeta, (el juicio.) Perder la cabeza. Irsele d uno la cabeza. Ese hombre ha perdido la : abeza, (e juicio,) y no sabe quo hacer. A ese hombre se le ha ido la cabeza, y no sabe que hacer. ^ Por fuerza. Positivamento. ) A toda fuerza. Absolutamente. I Ese hombre quiere absolutamente I (por fuerza) prestarme dinero. Obstinately, by all means. That man wishes by all means to lend mo money. To follow. I follow, thou followest, he follows. To pursue. To preserve, to save. Seguir * Sigo. Sigues. Sigue. Per seguir. (Conj. like Seguir., Preservar. Ahorrar EXERCISES. 198 . Why do you associate with those people ? — I associate with them t>ecause they are useful to me. — If you continue to associate with them you will get into bad scrapes, for tney have mai^y enemies. — ^IIcw does your cousin conduct himself? — He does not conduct himself very well, for he is always getting into some bad scrape, (or other.) — Do you not sometimes get into bad scrapes ? — It is true (verdad) that 1 sometimes get into them, but I always get out of them again. — Do you see those men who seem desirous of approaching us 7 — I do see ihem, but I do not fear them, {temer,) for they hurt nobody. — We must go away, (retirarrios,) for I do not like to mix with people whom I do SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. 287 aol know. — I beg of you not to be afraid of them, for I perceive niy ancle among them. — Do you know a good place to swim in ? — I know one. — Where is it ? — On t}>sit side (Lesson XXXVIII.) of the river, behind the wood, {el bosque,) ne{\r the high road, (el camino real.) — When shall we go to swim? — This evening, if you like. — Will you wait for me before the city gate ? — I shall wait for you there ; but I Deg of you not to forget it. — You know that I never forget my prom- ises. — Where did you become acquainted with that lady ? — I became acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. — Why does your cousin ask me for (Lesson XLI.) money and books ? — Because l»e is a fool ; of me, (a mi,) who am his nearest relation, (su mas ctr- cano pariente,) and his best friend, he asks nothing. — Why did you not come to dinner ? — I have been hindered, but you have been able to dine without me. — Do you think that we shall not dine, if you can- not come ? — How long Qiasta que hora) did yon wait for me ? — We waited for you till a quarter past seven, and as you did not come we dined without you. — Have you drunk my health ? — We have drunk vours, and that of your parents. 199 . How Qoes your uncle look, (que semblante ?) — He looks very gay, for he is much pleased with his children. — Do his friends look as gay as he ? — They, on the contrary, look sad, because they are discontented. My uncle has no money, and is always contented, and his friends, who have a good deal (of it,) are scarcely ever so. — Do you like your sister ? — I like her much, and as she is very good-natured (es muy carihosa) to (con) me I am so to her ; but how do you like yours ? — We love each other, because we are pleased with each other. — A certain (cierto) man liked much wine, but he found in it (el) two bad qualities. “ If I put water to it,” said he, “ I spoil it ; and if I do not put any to it, it spoils me.” — Does your cousin resemble you ? — He resembles me. — Do your sisters resemble each other ? — They do not resemble each other ; for the elder (mayor) is idle and naughty, and the youngei (la menor) assiduous and good-natured towards everybody. — How is your aunt ? — She is very well. — Does your mother enjoy good health ? — She imagines she enjoys good health, but I believe she is mistaken, for she has had a bad cough these six months of which (de la cual) she cannot get rid. — Is that man angry with you ? — I think he is angry witli me because I do not go to see him : but I do not like to go to his house, for when I go to him, instead of receiving me with pleasure, he looks displeased. — You must not believe that ; he is not angry with you, foi be is not so bad (malo) as he looks, (parece.) He is the best man in die world ; but one must know him in order to appreciate him.— There 288 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. is a great difference {la diferencia) between you and him, {el ;) you look pleased with all those who come to see you, and he looks cross at them. Is it right to laugh thus at everybody ? — If I laugh at your coat I do not laugh at everybody. — Does your son resemble any one ? — He resembles no one. — Why do you not drink ? — I do not know what to drink, for I like good wine, and yours looks like vinegar. — If you wish to have some other I shall go down (bajar) into the cellar to fetch you some. — You are too polite, Sir, I shall drink no more to-day. — Have you known my father long ? — I have known him long, for I made his acquaintance when I was yet at school. We often worked for one another, and we loved each other like brothers. — I believe it, for you resemble each other. — When I had not done my exercises he did them for me, and when he had not done his I did them for him. — Why does your father send for the physician ? — He is ill, and as {y coma) the physician does not come he sends for him. — Ah, {Ay^) it is all over with me ! — But, bless me, {Dios mio !) why do you cry thus ? — I have been robbed (Obs. A, Lesson XLV.) of my gold rings, Qa soiiija de oro,} my best clothes, and all my money ; that is the reason why I cry. — Do not make {no haga V.) so much noise, for it is we who have taken them all, in order to teach you to take better care {de cuidar mfytrr, Lesson L.) of your things, {cosas,) and to shut the door of your room when you go out. — Why do you look so sad ? — I have experienced great misfortunes ; after having lost all my money I was beaten by bad-looking men ; and to my still greater ill-luck, I hear that my good uncle, whom I love so much, has been struck with apoplexy. — You must not afflict yourself (no se ajUja F.) so much, for you know that we must yield to necessity. SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON . — Leccion Sexagesima cuarta, Obs. A. How, how much, and how many, in exclamatory sentencoo, are translated by cuan before adjectives, and by que de, cuanto, or cuanios befort^ nouns 200 . How good you are ! How ! ; Cuanta bondad tiene V. ! ; Cuan necio es ! ; Cuan necia es cUa ! Hew foolish he is ! How foolish she is . SIXTY- FOURTH LESSON. 289 llo A rich that man is ! flow handsome that woman is ! flow much kindness you have me ! H:)W many obligations I arn under to you I To he under obligations to some one. I am under many obligations to him. Hdw many people ! How happy you are ! >Iow much wealth that man has ! How much money that man has spent in his life I To be obliged to some one for some- thing. To be indebted to some one for some- thing. ? am indebted to him for it. To thank. To thank some one for something. I thank you for the trouble you have taken tor me. ; Cuan rico es ese hombre ; Que de riquezas tieno ese hombre ! ; Cuantas riquezas tiene ese hombre i ; Cuan hermosa es esa sehora ! t ; Que de bondad tiene V. para ml ! t / Cuanta es la bondad de V. para conrnigo ! ; Que de obligaciones le debo yo it V.! Deber obligaciones. Tcner obligaciones Estar obligado d uno. Le debo (le tengo) muchas obi gu- ciones. Le estoy muy obligado. ; Que de gente I ; Cuanta gente ! ; Cuantos / ; Cuan dichoso es V. ! ; Que de riquezas tiene ese hombre i ; Que de dinero ha gastado ese hon> bre en su vida I Agradeedrselo d uno Estimdrselo d, uno. Deberle algo d uno Se lo debo d 61. Agradecer. Dar gracias. Agradecerselo d uno. Yo le agradezco d V. el trabajo qns se ha tornado por mi. I Is there any thing more grand ? [s there any thing more cruel ? Is there any thing more wicked ? Can any thing be more handsome ? I Que cosa hay mas grande ? I Que cosa hay mas cruel ? I Que cosa peor hay, (mas mala hay) ? I Que cosa mas hermosa puede ha* ber ? How large ? How high? How deep? Of what size ? Of what height ? Of what depth ? I De que tamaho ? I De que alto V i De que aitura ? I De que profuiididad ? In speaking of dimension the adjective is more generally used than ih? ^uDstaniive. 13 290 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. Oh3. B When speaking of dim when the English use the verb to the noun or adjective of dimension. Of what height is her house ? ft is nearly fifty feet high. Our house is thirty feet broad. That table is six feet long. That river is twentj feet deep. The size. Of what size is that man ? How was that child dressed ? He was dressed in green. The man with the blue coat. The woman with the red gown. True Is it true that his house is burnt? It is true. It is not (true.) Is it not (true ?) Perhaps. I shall perhaps go there. To share. To divide. ision, we use in Spanish the verb j ; and the preposition de stands before r t i Cuanto tiene de alto(de altura) ia casa de ella ? f ^ Que air’tm*a tiene la casa de ella ? t Tiene cerca de cincuenta pies do alto, (de altura.) t Nuestra casa tiene trienta pi6s de I ancho, (de anciiura.) t Esa mesa tiene seis pids de largo, I (de largura.) t Ese rio tiene veinte pids de profun- do, (de profundidad.) El tamano. El talle. La estaturfc t I Que tamano tiene ese hombre ? I De que tamano es ese hombre ? I Como estaba vestido ese nino ? t Estaba vestido de verde. t El hombre de la casaca azul. t La mujer del vestido encarnado. Verdad. I Es verdad que su casa se haquemado'j Es verdad No es verdad. i No es verdad? Quizd. Quizas. Acaso. For ventura. Tal vez. Quizd ird alld. Partir. Dividir. Participar Whose ? Whose horse is this ? It is mine. It belongs to me. IV hose horses are these ? They are mine. They belong to :ne. Whose house is that? It is mine. It belongs to me Whose houses are these ? They are mine Tliey belong to mOf I De quien ? (See Lessons XXI and XXIX.) De quien es ese caballo ? Es mio I De quien son estos cabalU >3 ? Son mios. I De quien es esa casa ? Es mieu Me pertenece. I De quien soi. estas casas { Son mias. t Son de mi propiedif^ SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON, 291 To run up. Many men had nin up ; but instead of extinguishing the fire, they set to plundering. To run to the assistance of some one. To save. To deliver. To save anybody’s life. To plunder. To rob. To set about something. Have they succeeded in extinguish- ing the fire ? They have succeeded in it. The watch indicates the hours. To indicate. To mark. Acudir. Correr d Much os hombres habian acudido; pero en vez de apagar el fuego, at' pusieron d. saquear. Acudir d socorrer d alguno. Salvar. Lihertar. Salvar la vida d alguno. Pillar. Saquear. Robar. Ponerse d. I Han logrado apagar el fuego ? Lo han logrado. El reloj senala (apunta) la bora. Indicar. Senalar. Marcar To quarrel. To quarrel with one. ^ To dispute (to contend) about some- thing. About what are these people dispu- ting? They are disputing about who shall go first. Thus. So. To be ignorant ofy (not to know.) The day before. The day before that day was Satur- day. Rehir *. Pelcar Renir con alguno. Disputar (altercar) sobre algo I Acerca do que (sobre que) se d ispn- tan estas gentes ? Se disputan sobre quien se ird pri- mero. A SI. De esta manera. Ignorar. (No saber.) El dia antes. La vispera. El dia dntes de aquel dia era un Sdbado. La vispera de aquel dia era un Sd- bado. The day before Sunday is Saturday. I t La vispera del Domingo es el Sd- 1 bado. EXERCISES. 201 . Can you not get rid of that man ? (Lesson LIII.) — I cannot get rid of him, for he wil. absolutely follow me. — Has he not lost his wits ? — It may be, (puede ser.) — What does he ask you for ? — He wishes to sell me a horse \yhich I do not want. — Whose houses are those? — Thcv are mine. — Do these pens belong to you ? — No, they belong to my sister. — Are those the pens with which she writes so well ? — Tliey vre tlie same. — Whose gun is this ? — It is my father’s. — -Are these 292 SIXTF-FOURTH LESSON. books your sister’s ? — They are hers. — Whose carnage is this ?- -It is mine. — Which is the man of whom you complain ? — It is he (el que) who wears a red coat. — “ What is ^he difference (la diferencia) between a watch and me ?” inquired (p'egunto) a lady of a young officer. — “My lady,” replied he, (respondio este,) “a watch marks the hours, and near (cerca) you one forgets them.” — A Russian peasant who had never seen asses, (burros,) seeing several in France, said, (dijo,) “ Lord, (Dios mio !) what large hares (la liebre) there are in this country !” — How many obligations I am under to you, my dear friend ! you have saved my life ! without you I had been lost. — Have those miserable men hurt you ? — They have beaten and robbed me, and when you ran to my assistance they were about to (iban) strip 'desnu^ iarme) and kill me. — I am happy to have delivered you from the (de ias) hands of those robbers. — How good you are ! 202 . Will you go to Mr. Tortenson’s to-night ? — I shall, perhaps, go.— ■« And will your sisters go ? — They will, perhaps. — Had you any pleasure yesterday at the concert ? — I had no pleasure there, for there was such a multitude of people there that one could hardly get in, — I bring you a pretty present with which you will be much pleased. — What is it ? — It is a silk cravat. — Where is it ? — I have it in my pocket, (en mi bolsillo.) — Does it please you ? — It pleases me much and I thank you for it with all my heart. I hope that you v/ill at last accept (aceptar) something of me. — What do you intend to give me ? — I will not tell you, for if I do tell you, you will have no pleasure when I give it to you. — Have you seen any one at the market ? — I have seei a good many people there. — How were they dressed ? — Some were dressed in blue, some in green, some in yellow, and several in red. — Who are those men ? — The one who is dressed in gray is my neighbor, and the man with the black coat the physician whose son has given my neighbor a blow with a stick. — Who is the man with tiie green coat ? — He is one of my relations. — Are there many philosophers in your country ? — There are as many there as in yours. — How does this hat fit me ? — It fits you very well. — How does that coat fit your brother ? — It fits him admirably. — Is youi brother as tall (alto) as you ? — He is taller than I, but I am older (yiejo) than he. — Of what size is that man ? — He is five feet four inches (una pulgada) high. — How high is the house of ou"*< landlord ? — It is sixty feet high. — Is your well deep ? — Yes, Sir, for it is fifty feet deep. — “ There are many .earned men (unsahio) in Rome, are there not, \ no es verdadV^) Milton asked a Roman. “ Not so many as when you were there,” a^swerec [respomlio) the Roman. SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. 293 203 . Is it true that your uncle has arrived ? — I assure you that he has strived. — Is it true that the king has assured you of his assistance, {de su asislencia ?) — I assure you that it is true. — Is it true tliat the six thousand (mil ; takes no s in the plural) men, whom we were expecting, have arrived ? — I have heard so. — Will you dine with us ? — I cannot dine with you, for I have just eaten. — Will your brothe? drink a glass of wine ? — He cannot drink, for I assure you that he ha*? just drunk. — Why are those men quarrelling ? — They are quarrelling because they do not know what to do. — Have they succeeded in extinguishing the fire ? — They have at last succeeded in it ; but it is said (Obs. A, Lesson XLV.) that several houses have been burnt. — Have they not been able to save any thing ? — They have not been able to save any thing ; for instead of extinguishing the fire, the miserable wretches (los malvados) who had come up, set to plundering. — What has happened ? — A great misfortune has happened. — Why did my friends set out without me ? — They waited for you till twelve o’clock, and seeing that you did not come they set out. — What is the day □efore Monday called ? — The day before Monday is Sunday. — Why did you not run to the assistance of your neighbor whose house has oeen burnt ? — ^I was quite (enteramente) ignorant of his house being on fire, (que su casa se estaba quemando ;) for had I known it I would have run to his assistance. SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON.- To propose. I propose going on a journey. He proposes joining a hunting party. A game at chess. A game at billiards. A gam', at cards. To succeed. Do you succeed in doing that ? I do feucceed in it -Leccion Sexagesima quinta. Proponer. Proponerse. Hacer cuenta de. Me propongo hacer un viaje. Hago cueuta de hacer un viaje. Intenta juntarse d. ima partida de caza. Una partida de ajedrez. Una partida de billar. Una mesa de billar. Un juego de cartas. Uiia partida de naipes. Conseguir. Alcanzar Lograr. Salir bien. I Logra V. hacer oao I Si, logro hacerlo. 294 SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. endeavor. I endeavor to do it. I endeavor to succeed in it. Endeavor to do better. Esforzarse. Proturar hitentai Yo procure hacerlo. Yo procure lograrlo. Procure V. hacer mejor Since, considering. Since yoa are happy, why do you complain ? To he thoroughly acquainted with a thing. To make ones self thoroughly ac- quainted with a thing. That man understands that business perfectly. I understand that well. Since or from. From that time. From my childhood. From morning until night. From the beginning to the end. From here to there. I have had that book these two years. , have lived in Madrid these three years Yaque. Pues que. lYa. que es V. dichoso, porque ee queja ? Conocer una cosa d fondo. Entcrarse d fondo en {de) una cosa Ese hombre conoce d fondo ese asun to, (ese negocio.) Estoy bien enterado en ello Desde. Desde por Desde ese tiempo. Desde mi ninez, (infancia.) Desde por la manana hasta la noche Desde el principio hasta el fin. Desde aqui hasta alii, t Ya van dos anos que tengo esvi libro. t Tres anos ha que estoy (or que vivo) en Madrid. To blow, to blow out To reduce. To produce. To translate. To introduce To destroy. To construct. Soplar. Apagar. Reducir, Producir, Traducir, Introducir. J Destruir. ) Construir. \ Soe verbs in uclr. See verbs in uir To reduce the price. To reduce the price a dollar. To translate into Spanish. To translate from Spanish into Eng- lish. lo translate from one language into another. I introduce him to you. Reducir (bajar) el precio. Reducir (bajar) un peso del precio. Traducir al (en) espanol. Traducir del espanol al ingles. Traducir de una lengua d otra. ^ Yo le introduzco en su casa de V f t Yo se le presento d V SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. 295 Self, selves. Myself. Thyself. Himself. Herself. Ourselves. Y ourself. Y ourselves. One’s self. lie himself has told it me. fie has told it me, (to myself, not to another person.) One does not like to flatter one’s self Even. Not even. ile has not even money enough to buy some bread. We must love everybody, even our enemies. Again, (anew.) He speaks again. Mismo. Misma. Mismos. Mismas. Yo mismo. Yo misma. Tu mismo. Tu misma El mismo. Si mismo. Ella misma. Si misma. Nosotros mismos. Nosotras mismaji V. mismo. V. misma. Si mismo. Si misma. Vos mismo. Vos misma. C VV. mismos. VV. mismas. < Si mismos. Si mismas. ^ Vosotros mismos. Vosotras mismoa Si mismo. 6l mismo me lo ha dicho. 6l me lo ha dicho d mi mismo. No gusta uno de lisongearse d si mismo. Ann. Ni aun. No tiene bastante dinero aun para comprar pan. Debemos amar d todo el mundo ; aun d nuestros enemigos. Otra vez. Segunda vez. De nuevo. t Volver d. Habla otra vez. Habla segunda vezi t Vuelve d hablar. I s To fall. Tlie price of the merchandise falls To deduct To overcharge, to ash too much. jlot having overcharged you, I can- not deduct any thing. An ell, a yard. A mile. A league. Caer. Bajar, Baja el precio de las mercaderlas. Deducir. Rehajar. Sobrecargar. Poner alguna cosa d mucho precio No habiendole puesto d V. muy su- bido el precio (muy alto el precio) no puedo rebajar nada. Una vara. Una milla. Una legua. n , , . , , /. N i Producir. Dar. Vender 7 produce, (to yield, to profit.) ^ 296 SIXTY -FIFTH LESSON. How much does that employment viold you a year ? An employmont. C t Cuanto le produce d V al ufio n < empleo ? I Cuanto gana V al am 7 i Un empleo. I Escaparse. Huit. I Hair. Escaparse, f A pretar los t atones. ^ t Poner los pies en polvorosa, ( t Totnar las de. Villadiego, Desertar Ha desertado de la hatalla El ladron se ha escapado I De ningun modo. ^ No dej todo. De ningun mo Jo. ( Nada de esn EXERCISES. 204. Well, (y bien,) does your sister make any progress ? — She would make Bome, if she were as assiduous as you. — You flatter me. — Not at all; I assure you that I should be highly satisfied, (muy,) if all my pupils worked like you. — Why do you not go out to-day ? — I would go out ii it were fine weather. — Shall I have the pleasure of seeing you to- morrow ? — If you wish it I will come. — Shall I still be here when you arrive, {llegue 1) — Will you have occasion (ocasion) to go to town this evening ? — I do not know, but I would go now if I had an onportunity, (una buena ocasion.) — You would not have so much pleasure, and you would not be so happy, if you had not friends and books. — Man (el) would not experience so much misery (la miseria) in his career, (la carrera^) and he would not be so unhappy, were he not so blind^ (ciego.) — You would not have that insensibility (esa insensibilidad) to- wards the poor, and you would not be so deaf (sordo) to their supplica- tion, (el ruego^) if you had been yourself in misery for some time. — You would not say that if you knew me well. — Why has your sister done her exercises? — She would have done them if she had not been prevented. — If you workea more, and spoke oftener, you would gpeak better. — I assure you. Sir, that I should learn better if I had more time. — I do not complain of you, but of your sister. — You would have no reason (motive) to complain of her, had she had time to do what you gave her to do. — Do you already know what has happened 1 — ^ have not heard any thing. — The house of our neighbo- has beei To maJee one^s escape. To run awayyjiee. To take to one^s heels. To desert, fie deserted the battle. The thief has run away. By no means. Not at all. SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON”. 297 burnt down, (quemado.) — Have they not been able to save any thing 1 —They weie very fortunate (mutj afortunados) in saving the persons that were in It ; but out of the {de las) things that were there, they could save nothing. — Who has told you that ?— Our neighbor himself has told it me. 205 . \Miy are you without a light ? — The wind blew it out when you came in. — What is the price of this cloth? — 1 sell it at three dollars and a half the ell, Qa vara.) — I think it very dear. Has the price of cloth not fallen ? — It has not fallen : the price of all goods has fallen, except that of cloth, (menos el del 'pano.) — I will give you three dollars for it. — I cannot let you have {dar) it for (por) that price, for it costs me more. — Will you have the goodness to show me some pieces Qa p'kza,) of English cloth ? — With much pleasure. — Does this cloth suit you ? — It does not suit me. — Why does it not suit you ? — ^Because it is too dear ; if you will lower the price, (rebajar alguna cosa^) I shall buy twenty yards of it. — Not having asked too much, I cannot take off any thing. — You learn Spanish: does your master let you translate? — He lets me read, write, and translate. — Is it useful to translate in learning a foreign language ? — It is useful to translate when you {sahe) nearly know the language you are learning ; but while (cuando) you do not yet know any thing it is entirely (del todo) useless. — What does yoiu Spanish master make you do ? — He makes me read a lesson ; after- wards he makes me translate English exercises into Spanish on the lesson which he has made me read ; and from the beginning to the end of the lesson he speaks Spanish to me, and I have to answer hin in the very language Qa misrna lengua) which he is teaching me.— Have. you already learned much in that manner? — You see that I havf already learned something, for I have hardly been learning it thre^ months, and I already understand you when you speak to me, and can answer you. — Can you read (it) as well ? — I can read and write as well as speak, (it.) — Does your master also teach German? — Ha teaches it. — Wishing to make his acquaintance, I must beg of you (yo le suplico) to introduce me to him, {que me presente V, a el.) 206 . How many exercises do you translate a day ? — If the exercises are aot difficult I translate from three to four every day ; and when they so 1 translate but one. — How many have you already done to-day ? —It is the third which I am translating ; but to-morrow I hope to be able to do one more, for I shall be alone, (solo.) — Have you paid a visit to my aunt ? — I went to see her two months ago, and as she looked displeased, I have not gone to her any more »mce that time. — How dc 298 SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. yon do to-day ? — 1 am very unwell. — How do you like that soup ? — 1 think it is very bad ; but since I have lost my appetite (el apetito) I dc not like any thing. — How much does that employment yield to your father ? — It yields him more than four thousand dollars. — What news do they mention, (decirl) — Tney say nothing new. — What do you in- tend to do to-morrow ? — I propose joining a hunting party. — Does youi brother purpose playing (hacer) a game at billiards? — He proposes playing a game at chess. — Why do some people laugh when I speak ? — Those are un polite people ; you have only to laugh also, and they will no longer laugh at you. If you did as I do (como yo) you would speak well. You must study (es menester) a little every day, and you will soon be no longer afraid to speak. — I will endeavor to follow your advice, for I have resolved (proponerse) to rise every morning at six o’clock, to study till ten o’clock, and to go to bed early. — Why does your sister complain ? — I do not know ; since she succeeds in every thing, and since (y que) she is happy, even happier than you and 1, Why does she complain ? — Perhaps she complains (quejarse) because she is not thoroughly acquainted with that business. — That may be. {SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. A kind, a sort, (a species.) What kind of fruit is that? A stone, (of a fruit.) A stone of a peach, an apricot, a plum. Stone-fruit. One must break the stone before one comes to the kernel. A kernel. An almond. Kernel-fruit. It is a kernel-fruit. To gather. I gather, I gathered, I will gather To gather fruit. To serve up the soup. To bring in the desseri The fruit. An apricot. \ peach. -Leccion Sexagcsmia sexta. Genero. Especie. Clase. I Que especie de fruta es esa ? Hueso, (de fruta.) Un hueso de melocoton, albaricoque, ciruela. Fruta de hueso. » Es necesario romper el hueso para conseguir la almendra. Una pepita. Una almendra. Meollo Una almendra. Fruta de pepita. Es fruta de pepita. Cojer. Cojo. Cojia. Cojerd. Cojer fruta. Servir la sopa. Servir los postres. La fruta. Un albaricoque. Un durazno. Un meloGotcn SIXTY -SIXTH LESSON. 299 A plum An anecdote Roast meat. I Una ciruela I Una andcdota I El asado. The last. Last week. To cease, to leave off. I leave off reading. She leaves off speaking. El dltimo. La dltiraa. Pasado. Pasada. La semana pasada, (dllimaL.) Cesar. Parar. Dejar de Yo ceso de leer. Ella cesa de hablar. To avoid. To escape. To escape a misfortune. He ran away to avoid death. Evitai. Escapar. Escapar. Evitar. Evitar una desgracia. Se escap6 para evitar la muerta To do without a thing Can you do without bread ? [ can do without it. There are many things which we must do without I Privarse de. Pasar. Pasarse sin I Puede V. pasar sin pan ? I Puede V. privarse de pan ^ Puedo pasar sin 6\. Me puedo privar de 6\. Hay muchas cosas sin las cuales se puede pasar, (de las cuales puede uiio pasarse.) To execute a commission. To acquit one’s self of a commis- sion. I have executed your commission. Have you executed my commission ? I have executed it. To do one’s duty. To discharge, to do, or to fulfil one^s duty. That man always does his dutj riiat man always fulfils his duty. Vo rely, to depend upon something. He depends upon h. I rely upon it You may rely upon him. C Cum.plir con un encargo. < Ejecutar una comision. ( Hacer una comision. He cumplido con su encargo de V. I Ha cumplido V. con mi encargo, (comision) ? He cumplido con ^1, (ella.) Cumplir con si ohligacion, {de- ber.) Hacer su deber. Ese hombre i umple siempre con sn ohligacion. Contar con. Confiar en. ^11 confia en eso. Cuento con eso. V. puede contar con 61, (coafisu en 61.'! 300 SIXTl SIXTH LESSOR. To suffice^ to be sufficient. Is til at bread sufficient for you ? It is suificient for me. Will that money be sufficient for that man ? It will be sufficient for him. Lillie wealth suffices to the wise. Has that sum been sufficient for that man ? Was that man contented with that sum ? ft has been sufficient for him. He has been contented with it. To be contented with something. It would be sufficient for him if you would only add a few dollars. Me would be contented if you would add a few dollars. To add To build. To embark, to go m board. A sail. To set sail. To set sail for. To set sail for America. To sail. Under full sail. To set under full sail. Ho embarked on the sixteenth of hist month He sailed on the thirteenth instant. The instant, the present month. The fourth or fifth instant. ’Fbe letter is dated the 6th instant. Bastar. Ser bastante, [suftcicnle.) I Le basta d V. ese pan ? Si. Me basta. I Serd suficiente ese dinero para es' hornbre ? Sera suficiente para el. Poca riqueza basta al sabio. i Ha sido bastante esi suma para csf hornbre ? I Estaba contento ese hoi3fi.bre con esa suma 7 Ha sido bastante para el. Ha estado satisfecho con ell?. Estar satisfecho con, (or de.) Seria bastante para el si V. aiiadiera solamente algunos oesos. Si V anadiese algunos pesos C8- taria satisfecho. Anadir. Acrecentar * Aumentar. I Edificar. Fabricar. Ernbarcar. Embarcarse. Ir d bordo. Abordo. Una vela. Hacer vela. Hacerse d la vela. Hacer vela para. Hacerse d la vela para la America Nave gar. A velas llenas. A velas tendidas. Andar d buena vela. Se embared el diez y seis del mci pasado. Se hizo d la vela el trece del cor riente. El corriente. El cuatro 6 cinco del corriente. La carta lleva fecha del seia del corriente. That is to say, {i. e.\ Et ccetera, {etc., ^-c.) My pen (quill) is better than yours. [ write better than ycu. tliey will warm ffie soup. Es decir. A saber. Et cetera, {etc., ^a.) Mi pluma es oejor que la de Y. Yo escribo mejor que V t Pondrdn la sopa d calentar. SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. Dinner (or supper) is on the table. Do you choose any soup ? Shall I lielp you to some soup ? I will trouble you for a little. To serve up, to attend. 803 La comida (or 1 l cena) eetd en ?« mesa. I Gusta V. de sopa ? I Lo servire ^ V. un poco de sopa ? Hagame V. el favor de darme u;s poco. Servir. Servirse. Asistir Poner en ^a mesa EXERCISES. 207. I should like to (querria) know why I cannot speak as well as you ? — I will tell you : you would speak quite as well (tan bien como) as I, if you were not so bashful, (corto.) But if you had studied your les- sons more carefully you would not be afraid to speak ; for in order to speak well one must know, (sepa,) and it is very natural that he whc does not know well what he has learned, should be timid, (sea cnrtOy pres, subj.) You would not be so timid as you are, if you were sure to make no faults. I come to wish you a good morning. — You are very kind, (bondoso.) — Would you do me a favor ? — Tell me what you want, for I would' do any thing (cualquiera cosa) to oblige you, (servirle.) — I want five hundred dollars, and I beg you to lend them to me. I will return them to you as soon as I have received my money. You would oblige (favorecer) me much if you would render (hacer) me this service. — I would do it with all my heart if I could ; but having lost all my money, it is impossible for me (me es imposible) to render you this service. — Will you ask your brother whether he (si) is satisfied with (con) the money which I have sent him? — As- to my brother, he is satisfied with it, but 1 am not so ; for having suffered sliipwreck (naufragar) I am in want of the money which you owe me. 208. Have they served up the soup ? — Thy have served it up some minutes ago. — Then it must be cold, and I only like soup hot, (caliente.) —They will warm it for you. — You will oblige me, (favorecer.) — Shall I help you to some of this roast meat ? — I will trouble you for a little. — Will you eat some of this mutton ? — I thank you, I like fowl cotter. — May I offer you (le ofrecere) some wine ? — I will trouble you fo7 a little. — Have tney already brought in the dessert? — They have brought it in. — Do you like fruit ? — I like fruit, but I have no more appetite. — Will you eat a little cheese ? — I will eat a little. — Shall 1 kelp you to English or Dutch cheese? -I will eat a little Dutcl? 302 BIXTY-SIXTH LESSOR. cheese. — What kind of fruit is that ? — It is stone-fruit. — What is u called ? — It is called thus. — Will you wash your hands ? — I should like to {querer) wash them, but I have no towel to {para) wipe tliein with. — I will let you have (mandare que le den) a towel, some soap, and some water. — I shall be much obliged (agradecer) to you. — May I ask you for {me hard V, el favor de) a little water ?— Here is some, {aqui la tiene F.) — Can you do without soap ? — As for soap I can do without it, but I must have a towel to wipe my hands with. — Do you often do without soap ? — There are many things which we must do without. — Why has that man run away ? — Because he had no other means of escaping the punishment {castigo) which he had desei ved, {merecer.) — Why did your brothers not get a better horse ? — If they had got rid of their old horse, they would have got a better. — Has your father arrived already ? — Not yet, but we hope that he will arrive this very day, (hoy mismo.) — Has your friend set out in time — I do not know, but I hope he has set out in time. 209. Have you executed my commission ? — I have executed it. — Has vour brother executed the commission which I gave him ? — He has executed it. — Would you execute a commission for me ? — I am under so many obligations to you that I will always execute your commis- sions, when it shall please you to give me any. — Will you ask the merchant whether {si) he can let me have {darme) the horse at the price which I have offered him ? — I am sure that he would be satisfied if vou would add a few dollars more. — If I were sure of that, I would add a few dollars more. — Good morning, my children ! have you done your task ? — You well know that we always do it ; for we must be ill {seria menester que estuviesemos enfermos, imperfect of the subjunctive, of wliich hereafter) not to {para) do it. — What do you give us to-day ? — I give you to study the sixty-sixth lesson, and to do the exercises belonging to it ; that is to say, the 207th, 208th, and 209th. Will you endeavor to commit no errors, {hacer f alias ?) — We shall endeavor to commit none. — Is this bread sufficient for you ? — It would be sufficient for me if I was not very hungry. — When did your brother embark for America ? — He sailed on the 30th of last month. — Do you promise me to speak to your brother ? — I promise you, you may depend upon Si — I rely upon you. — Will you work harder {mg or) for next lesson* than you have done for dds ? — I will work harder. — May I rely upon It ? — You may. SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON 303 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON . — Leccion Sexagesima septima. Tn hr a judge of something. Are you a judge of cloth ? I am a judge of it. I am not a judge of it. I am a good judge of it. 1 am not a good judge of it. To draw. i i chalkf to trace, (tc counter- draw.) To draw a landscape To draw after life The drawing. The drawer. Nature. Ser perito (inteligente, facultativo en alguna cosa. Conocedor de. t Entender de. Poder juzgar de. 1 1 Entiende V. de panos ? t Si. Entiendo. t No. No soy perito. t Soy inteligente. + Es mi oficio t No entiendo nada No puedo juzgar Dihujar. Bosquejar Dihujar con yeso, Trazar Delinear. Calcar. Dihujar un paisaje, (un paia.) Dihujar al natural. El dibujo. El dibujador. El dibujanie La naturaleza. m'lnagb, or to go about a thing. How do you manage to make a fire without tongs ? f go about it so. You go about it the wrong way. i go about it the right way. How does your brother manage to do that ? Skilfully. Handily. Dexterously. Cleverly. Awkwardly. Unhandily. Badly. To forbid. fc fcibid you to do that. To lower, to cast down. To cast down one’s eye. The curtain. The curtain rises — falls. The .stocks have fallen. ^ t Manejar. Hacer para. ( Procurar. Lograr, 1 1 Como hace V. para encender fuegc sin tenazas ? t Hago de esta manera. V. lo hace mal, (t al reves.) Yo lo hago bien. I De que mode procura su hermoro de V. hacer eso ? Diestramente. Manosamente. Habilmente. Desmanadamente. Toscamento Torpemente. Malamente. Prohibir. No querer. Yo le prohibo d V. hacer eao. Bajar. t Bajar los ojos. La cortina. El telon. La cortina se levanta, (baja.) El telon se levanta, (se baja.) Los fondos pfiblicos han bajado 804 SIXTY -SEVENTH LESSON Tlie day falls. Night comes on. It grows dark. It grows late. To stoop. To smell. To feel. He smells of garlic. To feel some one’s pulse. To consent to a thing. I consent to it To hide, to conceal. The mind. Indeed. In fact. The truth. The effect True. It is true. A true man. riiis is the right place for that pic- ture. C El dia cae. t El sol se pcm. < f Anochece. t Se hace noch£ ( t Ohscursce. I Se hace tarde. ^ Encorvarse. Inclinarsp I Bajarse Oler *. Sentir Huele d ajo. t Tomar el pulso d alguno. Consentir Yo consiento en ello, (en eso.' Esconder. Ocultar El entendimiento. La mento. En verdad. A la verdad En efccto. La verdad. El efecto. Verdadero. t Verdad. t Es verdad. Es hombre sincere. Este es el verdadero lugar para es*? cuadro. To think much of one, {to esteem one.) To esteem some one I do not think much of that man. I think much of him. I esteem him much. The case. The flower, the bloom, the blossom. On a level with, even with. Fhat house is on a level with the water. To blossom, {to flourish.) To grow. To grow tall That child grows so fast that w© may even see it. The rain has made the corn grow. Corn. Hacer gran (or macho) caso de uno Hacer estimacion. Estimar d alguno. Apreciar. Yo no hago gran caso de ese hombrf t No tengo en mucho d ese hoinhre Yo hago mucho caso de el. Yo le estimo mucho El caso. La flor. A nivel de. A flor de Esa czisa estd d flor del agua. Ecliar flores. Florecer, Crecer. (See verbs in cer, App.) Ese nine crece tan rdpidamente que podemos verlo. La Iluvia ha hecho crecer el graiio. Maiz SIXTr-SETENTH LESSON. 305 A cover A shelter. A cottage. A hut. To sh eller one’s self from something. To take shelter from something. Let llicm shelter themselves from tlio rain, the wind. Let us enter that cottage in order to bo shelterea from the storm, (the tempest.) Un albergue. Una posada. Una guarid 2 u Un abrigo. Una cabana. Una choza. t Jacaly (in Mexico.) Ponerse al abrigo (d cubierlo) de al guna cosa. Abrigarse, Pdnganse ellos al abrigo (d cubierto) de la 11 u via, del viento. Entremos en esa choza para guarfi' cernos de la tempestad. Everywhere. All over. Throughout. All over (throughout) the town. A shade. Under the shade. Si^ down under the shade of that tree. ( For todo. For toda. < For todos. For todas. f For todas partes. ^ Por toda la ciudad. ( Por todo el pueblo. Una sombra. A la sombra. Sientese V. d la sombra de ese drbol To pretend. That man pretends to sleep. That young lady pretends to know Spanish. They pretend to come near us. Aparentar. Fingirse. t Hacerse. llacer que, or como que Ese hombre se finge dormido. \ Se hace {se finge) dormido. t Esa sehqrita hace que sabe el cspahol. Fingen acercarse d nosotros Now. From. Since. From morning. From the break of day. From this time forward. As soon as. Af soon as I see i/iim I shall speak lo him. Fram the cradle. From a child. For fear of. / To catch a cold. Ahora. Desde. Desde ia man an a. Desde el amanecer. t Desde hoy en adelanto. Luego que. Ast que. t As! que le vea yo le hablariS. Desde la cuna. Desde la ninoz. Por miedo de. Por temor de. For no. I Resfriarse ’ S06 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. I wDl not gcj out for fear of catching a cold. He does not wish to go to town, for fear of meeting one of his creditors. fie does not wish to open his purse, for fear of losing his money. No saldrd por temor de restriarme, o:> de tomar una fluxion. 6l no quiere ir d la ciudad por temoi de encontrarse con uno de su? acreedores. "fil no quiere abrir su bolsa por miedr, de perder su dinero. To copy. To transcribe. To decline. To transcribe fairly. A su )stantive. An adjective. A pronoun. A verb. A preposition. A grammar. A dictionary. Copiar. Transcribe. Decliiiar. t Sacar en limpio. Copiar. Un substantivo. Un adjetivo Un pronombre. Un verbo. Una preposicion. Una gramltica. Un diccionario EXERCISES. 210 . Are ycAi a judge of cloth ? — I am a judge of it. — Will you buy somu f ards for me ? — If you will give me the money I will buy you some. — You will gblige Qiacer favor) me. — Is that man a judge of cloth ? — He is not a good judge of it. — How do you manage to do that ? — I manage it so. — Will you show me how you manage it ? — I will show you, {yo lo quiero.) — What must I do for my lesson of to-morrow ? — You will transcribe your exercises fairly, do three others, and study "the next lesson, (siguiente ,) — How do you manage to get goods (wer- caderias) without money ? — I buy on credit. — How does your sister manage to learn French without a dictionary ? — She manages it thus, — She manages it very dexterously. But how does your brother manage it ? — He manages it very awkwardly ; he reads, and looks for the words in the dictionary. — He may learn in this manner twenty years without knowing how to make a single sentence, (una sola sen^ tencia,) — Why does your sister cast down her eyes ? — She casts them down because she is ashamed of not having done her task. — Shall wo breakfast in the garden to-day ? — The weather is so fine, that we Bhould take advantage of it, (aprovecharse,) — How do you like that coffee ? — I like it very much. — Why do you stoop ? — I stoop to pick up the handkerchief which I have dropped. — Why do your sisters hide themselves ? — They would not hide themselves if they did not fear to be seen. — Whom are they afraid of ? — They are afraid of their governess (una aya) who scolded them yesterday because they liad oot done their tasks, (la tarea,) SIXTY-EIGHTK LESSON. 307 211 . Have you already seen my son ? — I have not seen him yet ; how is le ? — He is very well ; you will not be able to recognise him, for he has grown very tail in a short time. — Why does that man give nothing to the poor ? — He is too avaricious, (avaro ;) he does not wish to open his purse for fear of losing his money. — What sort of weather is it ? — It is very warm ; it is long since we had any rain : I believe we shall have a storm, {una tempestad.) — It may be, (puede ser.) — The wind rises, (levantarse,) it thunders already; do you hear it? — Yes, I hear it, but the storm is still far off, (lejos.) — Not so far as you think ; see how it lightens. — Bless me, {Dios mio !) what a shower, (que aguacero /) — If we go into some place we shall be sheltered from the storm. — Let us go into that cottage, then, (pues ;) we shall be sheltered the^e from the wind and the rain. — Where shall we go to now ? Which road shall we take ? — The shortest (corto) will be the best. — We have too much sun, and I am still very tired ; let us sit down under the shade of that tree. — Who is that man who is sitting under the tree ? — I do not know him. — It seems he wishes to be alone, (estar solo ;) for when we offer (querer*) to approach him, he pretends to be asleep. — He is like your sister : she understands French very well ; but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends not to understand me. — You have promised me to speak to the captain ; why have you not done so ? — f have not seen him ; but as soon as I see him Quego que le vea) 1 'hall speak to him. SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. — Leccion Sexagesima octava, THE PLUPERFECT, (No. 2, p.) — Preterito Pluscuamperfecto, (No. 2, p.) This tense is formed with No. 2, the imperfect of the auxiliary haber, and the past participle (p.) of the verb to be conjugated. This tense is used to express an action which was already pa«l when an action also past took place. Example : — I had already finishea my task when you came in — Ya hahia acabado mi tarcaj cuando F. entro. I had dined when ho arrived. You had lost your purse when I found mine. Had you finished your exercise when I camo in? Vo, Sir, / had not finished it. We had dined when it struck twelve. Yo hahia comido cuando lleg(5. V. hahia perdido su bolsa cuando yo haI14 la mia.. I Habia acabado V, su ejercicio cuando yo entrd ? No, senor, yo no le habiu acabado. Habiamos comido cuando dieron las doco. 308 SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. I had read your letter when I wrote I Yo habia leido la carta de V cuands mine. | escribl la mia. O* It will be perceived that this tense is used in connection with the Preterito Perfecto Remoto, (No. 3.) For the use of that tense see Lesson XL. Observe that the Preterito Imperfecto (No. 2) answers to the English used to ; the Preterito Perfecto Remoto (No. 3) to did ; and that thp Pret^ritd Pluscuamperfecto (Nor 2, p.) corresponds to the English pluperfect lie came (used to come) to see me e\ery day. They came (did come) yesterday. I had seen them before. After you had spoken you used ^o go out. After shaving I washed my face. The king had appointed an admiral when he heard of you, (did hear.) After having warmed themselves they went into the garden. As soon as the bell rung (did ring) you awoke, (did wake.) As soon as they called me (did call) I got up, (did get.) As soon as he was ready he came to see me. As soon as we had our money we agreed to that. As soon as he had his horse he came to show it me. After trying several times they suc- ceeded in doing it As soon as I saw him I obtained what I wanted, (was wanting.) As soon as / spoke to him he did what / wanted. The business was soon over El venia d verme todos los dids. Elios vinieron ayer. Yo los habia visto dntes. Despues que V. habia hablado V. salia. Despues de afeitarme me lavaba la cara. El rey habia nombrado un almirante, cuando le habldron de V. Despues de haberse calentado se fueron al jardin. Asi que repied (sono) la campana V desperto. Luego que me llarndron me levante. Luego que el estuvo pronto (listo) vino d vermo. Asi que tuvtmos nuestro dinero con- venimos en ello. Luego que tuvo su caballo vino d en- sehdrmele. Despues de probar muchas veces logrdron hacerlo. Asi que le vi consegui lo que yc queria. Al memento que le hable hizo lo que yo queria Pronto se acabo el asunto. OF THE PRETERIT ANTERIOR, (No. 3, p.) • ^ Del Preterito Perfecto Anterior, (No. 3, p.) 'Hiis tense is fonned with No. 3 of haber and the past participle (p.) of the 7orb to be conjugated. It is used (from its name anterior) to express an action past before another which is likewise past, and is hardly ever used except after one of the conjunctions. SIXTY -EIGHTH LESSON. 309 ^ Luego que. Asi que ( A1 momeiito que. Despues que. Cuaiido. Apeiias. done. Examples : — I Luego que hube acabudo mi trabajo se le lleve d el. Asi que yo me kube vestido sail. ! Asi que hube comido dieron ms Uoce I Pronto hube acabad.) de comer. O* No 3 should be preferred to this tense, which is seldom used in Rpanish. EXERCISES. 212 . What did you do when you had finished your letter ? — 1 went to my brother, who took (llevar) me to the theatre, where I had the pleasure to find one of my friends whom I had not seen for ten years. — What didst thou do after getting up this morning ? — When I had read the ‘etter of the Polish count I went to see the theatre of the prince which I had not seen before, (iodama.) — What did your father do when he had breakfasted ? — He shaved and went out. — Wliat did your friend do after he had been a-walking ? — He went to the baron, {baron.) — Did the baron cut the meat after he had cut the bread ? — He cut the bread after he had cut the meat. — When do you set out ? — I do 1 ot set out till to-morrow ; for before I leave I will once m?re see my good friends. — What did your children do when they aad breakfasted? — They went a-walking with their dear preceptor, (pre- ceptor.) — Where did your uncle go after he had warmed himself? — He went nowhere. After he had warmed himself he undressed and went to bed. — At what o’clock did he get up ? — He got up at sunrise, — Did you wake him ? — I had no need to wake him, for he had got up before me. — What did your cousin do when he heard of the death {la muerte) of his best friend ? — He was much afflicted, and went to bed ^,ithout saying a word. — Rid you shave before you breakfasted ? — I shaved when I had breakfasted. — Did you go to bed when you had eaten supper? — When I had eaten supper I wrote my letters, and when 1 had written them I went to bed. — At what {de que) are you afflicted 1 — I am afflicted at that accident. — Are you afflicted at the death of four relation ? — I am much afflicted at it, {de ella .) — When did yow As soon as After. When. No sooner, scarcely. It also expresses an action quickly Lm soon as I had finished my work I carried it to iiim. soon as 1 had dressed myself I went out. When I had dined it struck twelve. 1 hid soon done eating. 310 SIXTir-ElGIITH LESSOJS, relation die ? — He died last month. — Of whom do you complain ?— I complain of your boy. — Why do you complain of him ? — Because he has killed the pretty dog which I received from one of my friends. — Of what has your uncle complained ? — He has complained of what you have done. — Has he complained of the letter which I wrote to him the day before yesterday ? — He has complained of it 213 . Why did you not stay longei in Holland ? — When I was there the living was dear, and I had not money enough to stay there longer. — VMiat sort of weather was it when you were on the way to Vienna ? — It was very bad weather, for it was stormy, and snowed and rained very heavily, (fd cdntaros.) — Where have you been since I saw you ? — We sojourned long on the sea-shore, until a ship arrived, which brought us to France. — Will you continue your narrative ? — Scarcely had w^e arrived in France when we were taken (llevar) to the king, who received us very well, and sent us back to our country. — A peasant having seen that old men {anciano) used (servirse de) spectacles {ante- ojos) to read, went to an optician (optico) and asked for a pair, {pedir.) The peasant then took a book, and having opened it, said the spectacles were not good. The optician put another pair {otro par) of the best which he could find in his shop Qa tienda) upon his nose , but the peasant being still unable to read, the merchant said to him : “ My friend, perhaps you cannot read at all ?” “ If I could, (si yo supiera leer,^^) said the peasant, “ I should not want your spectacles.^' — Henry IV. meeting one day in his palace {el palacio) a man whom he did not know, asked him to whom he belonged : “ I belong to mysoif,” replied this man. My friend,” said the king, “ you have a stupid master.” — Tell us {cuentenos V.) what has happened to you lately, (ei otro dia.) — Very willingly, (con mucho gusto :) but on condition mat you wil) listen to me (que VV, me escuchen) without interrupting (interrumpir) me. — We will not interrupt you ; you may be (poder < rrJar) sure o' 11 , (con ello.) — Being lately at the theatre, I saw La J'mtura par^ ^ante ana La Mujer llorosa performed, (ver representar,) This lattei pbv (la ultima :omedia) not being very amusing to me, I went to tli9 concert, where the music caused me a violent headache. I then left (dejar) the concert, cursing it, (maldecir,) and went straight (en derechwa) to the madhouse (la casa de lo» locos), in order to see my cousin. On entering the hospital of my cousin I was struck with horror (estar penetrado de horror) at seeing several madmen, (el loi:o,) who came up to me, jumping (saltar) and howling, (aulla-ndo.)-- What did you do then? — I did the same, aPxd they set i7p a laugh [e^diar d retr) as they were withdrawing, (al retirar$e,) SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. 311 SIXTY-NINITI LESSON. —LecaoTi Sexagesima nov/i. To get beaten. To get paid. Vq gat one’s self invited to dine. At first Firstly. Secondly Thirdly, &c. Is your mother at home ? She is. I am going to her house. A cause. A cause of complaint. She has reason to be sad. Grief, sorrow, sadness. Is that woman ready to go out? Stie is. C t Llevar una paliza. ^ Llevar una tunda. ( t Sufrir una tunda, {una palitfL I t Hacerse pagar. 1 t Hacerse convidar k comer. Primero. A1 principio. t Desde luego. Primeramente. Primero. En primer lugar. S Segundamente. Segundo. Ell segundo lugar. 'y Terceramente. Tercero \ En tercer lugar, &c. I Estd en casa la senora madre de \ Si, estd. Si, senor, (senora.) Voy d casa de ella. (Voy d su casa. Una causa. Una razon. Un sujeto. Un motivo. Un sujeto (un motivo) de queja. Ella tiene motivo de estar triste. Pesar. Pesadumbre. Tristeza. I Esta esa muger pronta para sanr i Si, estd. Notwithstanding, in spite of. In spite of him, her, them. To manage. Do you manage to finish your work every Saturday night ? Do you manage to have your work done every Saturday night ? Try to do that, to oblige me. , No obstante. Sin embargo. A pesai A pesar de el, de ella, de ellos. Conscguir. Lograr. Ingeniarse para. Procurar. I Consigue V. acabar su trabajo todo? los sdbados por la noche ? t t Se ingenia V. para tener acabado su trabajo todos los sdbados po! (or en) la noche ? Procure V. hacer eso para servinne, (obligarme.) Obs. When in order to can be substituted for the preposition to, tlie litter is rendered in Spanish by para, to express the end, the desi^, or cause for which a thing is done. I »vill do every thing to oblige you. i Yo lo har^ todo para servir $ V SIXTT-NINl'il LESSOR. tm To look upon, into. The window looks into the street. The window looks out upon the river. The back door looks into the garden. Caer d. Dar d. Mirar L La ventana cae d la callo. ! La ventana mira al rio. 1 La puerta trasera da al jar din. To drown. To drown a dog. To be drowned, to be drowning. To drown one’s self, to get drowned. To leap through the window. To throw out of the window. I am drowning. Ho jumped out of the window. To fasten. He ivas fastened to a tree. The cattle. To keep warm. To keep cool. To keep clean- T » keep on one’s guard against some one Ke^'p on your guard against that man. I Anegar. Ahogar. (En el agua.) I Ahogar un perro en el agua. I Ahogarse. Saltar por la ventana Echar por la ventana Me ahogo. Me estoy ahogando Salt6 por la ventana. Atar. Amarrar t Le amarraron (atdroii) a un drbcl El ganado. Mantenerse caliente. Mantenerse fresco Mantenerse limpio, (aseado.) C Guardarse de alguno, (de uno.; < Free averse de alguno, (de uno.) \ Estar sobre aviso con respecto a. Gudrdese V. de ese hombre To tarke care (to beware) of some- body or something. If you do not take care of that horse it will kick you A kick, (of a horse or ox.) T %ke care that you do not fall. Take care. A thought An idea. A sally. To be struck by a thought A thought strikes me. Tliat never passed my mind Guardarse de. Tener cuidado dc (con) alguno, ,(con alguna cosa ) Si V. no se guarda de ese caballo ie dard coces. Una coz. Tenga V. cuidado do no caerso. t Cuidado. I Un pensamiento. I Una idea. r Un dicho agudo. Un chiste. < Una agudeza. Un arranque. (Una viveza. Un repente. Darle golpe d uno un pensamiento. Harcerle fuerza d uno una idea 1 Me da golpe un pensamiento. Eso nunca me pasd por el pensu . miento. I Eso jamas me entrd en el pensa V miento. SIXTY -NINTH LESSON. 313 7V> tike into one^s head. ifo took it into his head lately to rob me. \£ ir your head ? In my place. In your place In his place. In her place. We must put every thing in its place- Around, round. Wt sailed around England. They went about the town to look ai the curiosities. To go around the house. To go about the house. To cost. How much does that cost you ? How much does this book cost yon ? It costs me three dollars and a half. That table costs him twenty dollars. AlonCf by one's self. I was alone. One woman only. One God. Gcd alone can do that. Tlic very thought of it is criminal. A fc"Dgle reading is not sufficient to satisfy a mind that has a true t iste. C t Pasarle {ponerseli dunoenpor)h < caheza. ^ Metersele 4 wno en la caheza. I Ultimamente se le puso en la cabeia I robarme. Que le pasa d V. por la cab^za i ^ Que tiene V. en la cabeza ? En mi lugar. ; En su ugar de V. En su lugar. I En su lugar. En el lugar de 61 En su lugar. En su lugar de eliu t Todas las cosas se deben poner on su lugar. Al rededor, (vuelta.) Navegamos al rededor de Ingla terra. t Fueron por toda la ciudad para examinar las curiosidaaes. Ir al rededor de la casa. 1 Dar la vuelta de la casa. i 1 Ir por toda la casa. < t Ir de aqui para all! en la casa. ( t Andar toda la casa. Costar *. I Cuanto le cuesta d V eso ? I Cuanto le cuesta d V. este libro ? Me cuesta tres pesos y medio, (veinte reales.) Esa mesa le cuesta veinte pesos. Solo. Sola. Por si solo. Por si sola. Yo estaba solo, (sola ) Una sola muger Un solo Dios. Solo Dios puede hacer eso. t El mero pensamiento es culpable. Una sola lectura no basta para sa- I tisfacer d un ingenio que tiene im ' gusto exacto. To kill hi shooting. He has blown oat his brains I Matar d tiros. r t Se ha levantado la tapa de k><* ( sesos. ? t So ha tirado un tiro {mortal.) 14 814 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. Jle has blown out his brains with a pistol. He served for a long time, acquired honors, and died contented. Be arrived poor, grew nch in a short time, and lost all jq a still shorter th'Qd. Se volo la tapa de los sesos de nn pistoletavir). Sirvid largo tiempo, adquiiid honores, y murid satisfecho, (coiitento.) Llcgd aqui pobre, se hizo rico (enri- quecid) eii poco tiempo, y per did cuanto tenia en menos tiemv*o today ia. EXERCISES. 214 . What is the matter with you ? Why do you look so melancholy, ( parecer ?) — I should not look so melancholy if I had no reason to be sad. I have heard just now (Lesson L.) that one of my best fr'ends has shot himself with a pistol, and that one of my wife’s best friends has drowned herself. — Where has she drowned herself? — She ha5. drowned herself in the river which is behind her house. Yesterday, at four o’clock in the morning, she rose without saying a w^ord to any one, (ninguna persona^ leaped out of the window which looks into the garden, and threw herself into the river, where she was drowned. — I have a great mind (niucha gand) to bathe (bannrse) to-day. — Where will you bathe ? — In the river. — Are you not afraid of being drowned ?— Oh, no ! I can (saber) swim. — Who taught you ? — Last summer I took a few lessons in the swimming-school, (escuela de nada'^.) When had you finished your task ? — I had finished it when you came in. — Those who had contributed (contrihuir) most to his elevation to the throne (trono) of his ancestors, were those who labored (t^a- hajar) with the most eagerness to precipitate (precipitar) him from it, (de el.) As soon as Caesar (Cesar) had crossed (pasar) the Rubicon, he had no longer to deliberate, (deliherar :) he was obliged to conquer (veneer) or to die. — An emperor (emperador) who was irritated at (irritado contra) an astrologer, asked him: “Wretch, (miserable !) what death dost thou believe thou wilt die ?” — “ I shall die of the fever,’ replied the astrologer. “ Thou liest,” said the emperor, “ thou wilt die this instant of a violent death, (muerte vio lentad^) As he was going to be seized, (asir^) he said to the emperor, ^ Sire, order some one to feel (pres, subj.) my pulse, (senor, manck V. M, que se me tome el pulso,) and it will be found that I have a fe- rcr.” This sally (agudeza) saved his life. 215 . Do you perceive yonder house, (aqi^ella '*) — I do percei'^e it : whtu Mouse is it ? — It Is an inn, ( una venta ;) if you like we will go into 'v SEVENTIETH LESSON. 815 m drink a ^luss of wine, for I am very thirsty. — You are always thirsty when you see an inn. — If we enter I shall drink your health. — Rather than (Lesson LXI.) go into an inn I will not drink. — When will you pay me what you owe me? — When I have money: it is useless to ask me for some to-day, for you know very well that tliere is nothing to be had of him who has nothing. — When do yo^ tliink you will have money ? — I think I shall have some next year.—. Will you do what I shall tell you ? — I will do it if it is not too difficult. Why do you laugh at me ? — I do not laugh at you, but at your coat —Does it not look like (Lesson LXIII.) yours ? — It does not look like it, for mine is short {corto) and yours is too long, {largo ;) mine is black and yours is green. — Why do you associate with that man ? — I would not associate with him if he had not rendered me great services, {el favor.) — Do not trust him, for if you are not on your guard, he will cheat {enganar) you. — Why do you work so much ? — I work in order to be one day useful to my country. — When I was yet little I once {un dia) said to my father, “ I do not know commerce, {el comercio,) and I do not know how to sell ; let me {'permitame V.) play.” My father answered me, smiling, {son- riendose,) “ In dealing (traficando se aprende d) one learns to deal, and in selling, to sell.” “ But, my dear father,” replied {replicar) I, “ in play- irio >ne learns also to play.” “ You are right,” said he to me, “ but you must first learn what is necessary and useful.” — Judge not, {nojuzgue F.,) that you may not be judged, {si no quiere que le juzguen !) Why do you perceive the mote {una paja) in your brother’s eye, you who do not perceive the beam {una viga) which is in your own eye ?— Would you copy your exercises if I copied mine? — I would copy them if you copied yours. — Would your sister have transcribed liei letter if I had transcribed mine ? — She would have transcribed it. — Would she have set out if I had set out ? — I cannot tell you what she svould have done if you had set out. SEVENTIETH LESSON. —Leccion Septuagesima, OF THE IMPERATIVE.- DeZ imperativu, No. 6. See the table of terminations. This mood is used when the action expresses commanding, praying, oi sxnorting. The subject (when expressed) is always placed after tho verb 'this mood has the three persouft in both numbers. S16 SEVENTIETH LESSON No. 5 of To be. No. 5 de Ser 1st Let me be. "I f 1. Sea yo. 2d. Be thou. ! I 2. Se td. 3d. Let him be i ^ Sea ^1, (ella, or V 2d. Be thou not. J L 2. No seas td.^ 1st. Let us be. f 1. Seainos nosotros. 2d, Be ye or you. ip, , ) 2. Sed vos, (vosotros.^^ 3d. Let them be. \ * } 3. Seau ellos, (ellas, or VV.) 2d. Be ye not. J L 2. No seals vos, (vosotros.‘) No. 5 of To have, (active.) | Let me have, &c. | Let us have, &c. | Have patience. | Be (ye) attentive j Go (yo) there. Give it me Send it to him. Lend it to me. No. 5 de Tener, (active.) Tenga yo, ten td, no tengas id. ten ga el, (ella, V.) Tengamos nosotros, tened vosotros, no tengais vosotros, tengan ellos, (ellas, VV.) Teiiga V. paciencia. Sean VV. atentos. (Sed atentos.) Esten VV. atentos. (Estad atentos) Vayan VV. alld. (Id alia.) Dernele (demela) V. Enviesele (eiiviesela) V. (a ^1.) Prestemele (prestemela) V. Ohs. The pronouns object and complement are placed after the Im- perative, and joined to it so as to form a single word, when the verb is used affirmatively ; but, when used negatively, the pronouns are placed bekie. (See Lesson XX. Obs. A.) Do not give it to me. j No me le (no me la) d^ V Do not lend it to him. | No se le (no se la) preste V. d dl. Have the goodness to hand mo that I Tonga V. la bondad de pasarme es-^ plate. I plato. To borrow. J will b(jrrow seme money of you. I w ill borrow that money of you Borrow it of (or from) him. I borrow it from him. Do not tell it to him — to her. Do not return it to them. Pedir 'prestado. Yo quiero pedir d V algun dinero prestado. Yo quiero pedir prestado ese dinero d V Pidasele V. prestado d dl. Yo se le pido prestado d dl. No se lo diga V. d dl — d ella. No se le (la or lo) vuelva V. k ellot, (d ellas.) ' O* \Yien the second person, either singular or plural, is used nega- iMvely, its termination is the same as the second person singular or plural of the subjunctive. SEVENTIETH LESSON. 317 Patieuce. Impatience. The neighbor. The snuff-box. Paciencia. Impaciencia. El projimo La tabaquera. Caja de polvo, (de tabaco.) Bo (ye) good I Sean VV. buenoL Sed buenoa. Know (ye) it. | Sepanlo VV. Sabedio vosotros. Obey your masters, and never give them any trouble. Pay what you owe, comfort the af- flicted, and do good to those that have offended you. Love God, and thy neighbor as thy- self. To obey. To comfort. To offend. Let us always love and practise vir- tue, and w’e shall be happy both in this life and in the next. To practise. Liet us see which of us can shoot best. f Obedezean VV. d sus maestros, y ao j les den jamas ninguna pena. I Obedeced d vuestros maestros, y nunca les dels ninguna pena. Pague V. sus deudas, ampare d los aflijidos, y haga bien a log quo le hayan ofendido. Ama d Dios, y d tu prdjfmo oomo i ti mismo. Ohedecer. (See verbs in cer.) Amparar. Consolar. Ofender. Amemos y practiquemos siempre la virtud, y serdmos felices tanto en esta vida como en la otra, Practicar. Ejercer. Hacer. Veamos cual de nosotros puede tira/ mejor. To express. To express one^s self. To moke one's self understood. To have the habit. To accustom. To accustom one’s self to something. Children must bo accustomed early to labor. To bt accustomed to a tiling. 1 am accustomed to it. 1 cannot express myself in Spanish, because I am not in the habit of speaking. Vou speak properly To converse To chatter to prate. Expresar. Expresarse. Hacerse comprender, (entender.) Tener costumbre. Soler *. Acostumbrar. Acostumbrarse. Acostumbrarse d alguna cosa. A los Linos se les debe acostumbrai temprano al trabajo. Estar acostumbrado d una cosa. Estoy acostumbrado d ello. No puedo expresarme en espanol[ porque no tengo costumbre de ha' blar. V. habla propiamente. Conversar. Charlar 318 SEVENTIETH LESSON, A prattler, a chatterer. I practise speaking. To permit, to allow. The permission. I perniit you to go there. Do good to the poor, have compas- sion on the unfortunate, and God will take care of the rest. To do good to some one. To have compassion on some one. Compassion. Pity. The rest. If he comes, tell him I am in the garden. Ask the merchant whether he can let me have the horse at the price which 1 have offered him. I read, and was told. Tliere they laugh and weep by turns. If they knew what you liave done. The country where diamonds are found. You have been, or will soon be told. What we conceive well we expre.ss clearly. To appear before my eyes, his merit is too great. We do not like to see those to whom we owe so much. It is from a king (Agesilaus) that we have that excellent maxim — “ That a man is great only inas- much aa ho is just.’* Un charlanie, Un hahlado^ Un platicon, Parlante, I t No hago mas que hablar Permitir, Conceder, La permision, (licencia.) Yo le permito a V. que vaya all^. Ilaga V. bien d los pobres, tonga compasion de los infortunados, y Dios cuidard de lo demas. Racer bien d alguno, Compadecerse. Tener comjjasion de alguno Compasion Ldstima. El resto. Lo demas. Si ^1 viene, dlgale V. que estoy en el jardin. Inffirmese V. del mercader si puede dejarme (venderme) el caballo por el precio que lo he ofrecido. Lei, y me dijeron. Alli uno rie y llora por turnos. t Alli rieii y Horan alternativamente Si supieran lo que V. ha hecho. El pais (la tierra) en donde se hallan los diamantes. Ya le hail dicho d V., 6 pronto le dirdn. L-o que pe concibe bien se expresa con claridad. Para presentarse ante mi, su mdrito es demasiado grande. No nos gusta ver d aquellos d quienes debemos tanto. De un rey (Agesilao) es de quieii te- nemos esa gran mdxima- Que uno no es grande sino en cusmta es justo.” 5 SEVENTIETH LESSON. 319 EXERCISES. 216. Have patience, niy dear friend, and be not sad ; for sadness alters m nada remedia) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse, (lo male peor.) Be not afraid of your creditors ; be sure tliat they will do you no harm. They will wait if you cannot pay them yet. — When will ^ou pay me what you owe me ? — As soon as I have (tenga) money I will pay all that you have advanced (for) me. I have not forgotten it. for I think of it (en ello) every day. I am your debtor, (deudor,) and I shall never deny it. — What a beautiful inkstand you have there ! pray lend it me. — What do you wish to do with it ? — I wish to show it tc my sister. — Take it, but take care of it, and do not break it. — Do not fear (tzo ienga V, cuidado.) — What do you want of my lirother ? — J want to borrow some money of him. — Borrow (jpedir) some (le) oJ somebody else, (d otra persona.) — If he will net lend me any I will borrow some (le) of somebody else. — You will do well. — Do not wish hr (apetecer) what you cannot have, but be contented with what Providence (la Providencia) has given you, and consider (considerar) that there are many men who have not what you have. — Life being short, let us endeavor (Lesson LXV.) to make it as agreeable as pos- sible. But let us also consider that the abuse (el ahuso) of pleasure (in the plural in Spanish) makes it bitter, (amargo, fern.) — Have you done your exercises ? — I could not do them, because my brother was not at home. — You must not get {dar d hacer) your exercises done by your brother, but you must do them yourself, ( V, mismo) — What are you doing there ? — I am reading the book which you lent me. — You are wrong in always reading it. — What am I to do ? — Draw this land- scape, (Lesson LX VII.,) and when you have drawn it you shall decline some substantives with adjectives. 217. What must we do in order to be happy ? — Always love and practise virtue, and you will be happy both in this life and in the next. — Since (ya que) we wish to be happy, let us do good to the poor, and let us have compassion on the unfortunate ; let us obey our masters, and .eever give them any trouble ; let us comfort the unfortunate, (infor- ianadoSy) love our neighbor as ourselves, and not hate those (ahorrec&r) hat have offended us ; in short, (en una palabra,) let us always fulfil Dur duty, and God will take care of the rest. — My son, in order to be oved you must oe laborious (lahorioso) and good. Thou art accused ^acusar) of having been idle and negligent in thy affairs. Thou know- ^st, however, that thy brother has been punished for having been naughty. Being lately (el otro dia) in town, I received a letter from SEVENTIETH LESSOlf. m ihy tutor, in which he strongly (fuertemente) complained of thee. Dt not weep ; now go into thy room, learn thy lesson, and bo a good boy, {buerw.) otherwise {de otro modo) thou v/ilt get notliing for dinner. — 1 shall be so good, my dear father, that you will certainly be satisfied •vith me. — Has the little boy kept his word, (cumplir con su palahra J) — N(it quite ; for after having said that, he went into his room, took 'lis books, sat down at the table, and fell asleep. — “ He is a very good sK>y when he sleeps,” said his father, seeing him some time after. Good morning, Miss N. — Ah ! here you are at last. I have been waiting for you with impatience. — You will pardon me, (jperdonar^ my dear, I could not come sooner. — Sit down, if you please. — How is your mother ? — She is better to-day than she was yesterday. — I am glad of it, (rnucho me alegro de ello .) — Were you at the ball yesterday ? — I was there. — Were you much amused, .^) — Only so-so. — At what o’clock did you return home ? — At a quarter past eleven. 218 . Have you been learning Spanish long ? — No, Sir, I have only been learning it these six months. — Is it possible ! you speak tolerably well (Jbastante bien) for so short a time, {tan carlo tiempo.) — You jest, {burlarse ;) I do not know much (of it) yet. — Indeed, you speak it well already. — I think you flatter me a little. — Not at all ; you speak it properly. — In order to speak it properly one must know more (of it) than I know. — You know enough (of it) to make yourself understood. — I still make many faults.— -That is nothing, (-j eso no le hace ;) you must not be bashful ; besides {ademas) you have made no faults in ail you have said just now.— 1 am still timid, because I am afraid of being laughed at, {que se rian de mi, pres, of the subjunctive.) — They w^ould be very unpolite to laugh at you. Who would be so unpoliie as to laugh at you, {que se riese de V, 1) Do you not know the proverb ? — What proverb ? — He who wishes to speak well must begin by {par) speaking badly. — Do you understand all I am telling you ? — I under- stand and comprehend it very well ; but I cannot express myself well in Spanish, because I am not in the habit of speaking it. — That will come in {con el tiempo) time. — I wish {lo deseo) it wdth all my lieart. Do you sometimes see my brother ? — I see him sometimes ; when 1 met him the other day he complained of you. “ If he had behaved better, and had been more economical,” said he, “ he would have no debts, and I would not have been angry with him.” — I begged of him U) have compassion on you, {se compadeciera de F.,) telling him that you had not even money enough to buy bread. — “ Tell him, when you sec him,” replied he to me, “ that notwithstanding his bad behavior (la conducta) towards me, I pardon {perdonar d uno) him. Tell hinr SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. 321 also,” continued he, ‘ that one should not laugh {que no se debe reir) at tliosc to whom one is under obligation. Have the goodness to do this, and I shall be much obliged to you,” added he in going avvav (fl/ irse.) SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON . — Leccion Septuagesirna prtmera. To stand up. 1 To remain up \ Will you permit me to go to the J market ? ] To hasten. | Make haste, and return soon. | Go and tell him that I cannot come I to-day. I He came and told us he could not J come. ^ Go and see your friends. | Esiar en pie. Permanecer en pie I Me permite V. ir al mercado, la plaza) ? I Quiere V. permitirme que vaya la plaza ? Apresurarse. Despacharse. Ir presto^ {pronto.) Despdchese V., y vuelva pronto. Vaya V d decirle quQ no puedo ve- nir hoy. Vaya V., y digale que no puedo vo nir hoy. Vino d decirnos que no podia venir. Vino y nos dijo que no podia venir Vaya V. d ver d sus amigos. To weepf to cry. The least blow makes him cry. To frighten. To be frightened^ to startle The least thing frightens him. Be not fr—' -'ened. To be frightened at something arc you frightened at? Llorar. El menor golpe le hace llorar Asustar. Espantar. Asustarse. Sobresaltarse. La menor cosa le espanta. Se sobresalta de la menor cosa. I No se espante (sobresalte) V. I Asustarse (espantarse, sobresaltar jg) j de algo, (de alguna cosa.) 1 I De que se asusla V. ? At my expense. At his or her expense At our expense. At other people’s expense. I A expensas mias. A mi costa. 1 A expensas suyas. A su costa J A expensas nuestras. ( A nuestra costa. J A expensas agenajs. f A costa agena. 522 SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. To depend. ri'at depends upon circumstancea That does not depend upon me. It depends upo~ him to do it. Oh ! yes, it depends upon him. That man lives at everybody’s ex- pense. To astonish j to surprise. To he astonished, to wonder. To he surprised at something. I am surprised at it. An extraordinary thing happened which surprised everybody To take place. Many things have passed which will surprise you. To surprise. Many days will pass before that. A man came in who asked mo how I was. Depender de. Estar eu. Eso depende de las circunstandaa Eso no depende de mi. Depende de 6\ el hacorlo. Esld en ^1 el hacerlo. ; Ah ! si, depende de 4\. Ese hombre vive d expensas de tods ! how rapidly time passes I ; Dios mio ! cuaii pronto se peisa o .n your society I j tiempo en la conipahia de V I ^ ^ El cumplirnieiiio. Ei cumplido. 1 he compliment. i t . • ^ ^ La ateiicion. You make me a compliment which I V. me hace un cumplido al ciial nc I do not know how to answer | como corresponder. The fault tt IS not my fault. Do not lay it to my charge. To lay to onc^s charge Who can help it ? Whose fault is it ? i cannot help it. I Culpa, Falta. ^ No es culpa mia. No cs mi falta. \ t Yo no tengo la culpa. No me le (la, or lo) impute V. A. S Irnputarle d uno. Echar la culpa d. I Quien lo puede remediar ? t I Quien tiene la culpa ? No puedo remediarlo. The delay. He does it without delay I must go, (must be off.) Go away ! Begone ! To jest. The jest, joke. You are jesting. He cannot take a jest, he is joker. To beg some one’s pardon To pardon. ] beg your pardon- The pardon. s 1 s 1 J s I La tardanza. La dilaciou. La detencion. La demora. Lo (le, or la) hace sin tardanza. t Tengo que irme. Es menester que me vaya. ; Vdyase V. ! ; Mdrchese V I Burlarse. Chancearse Chacotearse. La burla. La chanza. La chacota. V. se burla. V. se chancea t 6l no entiende de burlas. Pedir perdon d alguno. Pedir el perdon de alguno. Perdonar, Yo pido perdon d ^ Yo pido el perdon de V. Perddneme V. t Con perdon de V El perdon. To advance, fhe watch goes too fast, (gains.) To retard, Fhe watch goes too slow, (loses.) Adelantar. El reloj adelaula. Atrazar. El reloj atrasa. 328 SE^KNir-SECOND LESSON. My watch has stopped To stop. Whore did wo stop ? We left off at the fortieth lessc’a, page one hundred and tiiirty-six. To wind up a watch. To regulate a watch. Ifour watch is twenty minutes too fast, and mine a quarter of an hour too slow. It has not struck twelve yet. It will soon strike twelve. Has it already struck twelve ? To strike, (speaking of hours.) On condition, provided. He will lend you money, provided you will henceforth be more economi- cal than you have hitherto been. Hereafter, for the future, hence- forth. The future. Economical. Hitherto. To renounce gambling. To follow advice, (counsel.) You look so me’ancholy. Adieu, farewell, God be with you, good-hy. I hope to see you again soon. Mi reloj se ha parade Pararse. Parar. I En donde hemos parado ? Nos paramos en la leccion cuudiR gesima, pajina ciento troinia. y Bok t Dar cuerda d un reloj Arreglar un reloj. El reloj de V. adelanta veinte mira> tofe y el mio atrasa un cuuto dc bora. t Todavia no ban dado las doce. t Las doce estan al dar. S t Las doce van d dar. t Pronto dardn las doce. i t I Han dado ya los doco Dar Con tal que. Con condition que. Bajo de condicion que. El le prestard d V. dinero con tal que en adelante sea V. mas econd- mic*: de lo que ha sido hasta ahora En adelante. De aqui en adelante En lo venidero. En lo future. I Lo future. Lo venidero. Econhmico. Frugal. Parco. Moderado. Hasta ah ora. Renunciar al juego. Seguir el consejo de alguno. V. parece tan melanc6lico. A Dios, Vaya V. con Dios. Quede V. con Dios, C Espero tener el gusto do volverle i ver d V ( Espero volverle d ver i V. pronto EXERCISES. 220 . What o’clock is it ? — It is half-past one. — You say it is haif-past one, and by (por) my watch it is but half-past twelve. — It will soon strike — Pardon me, it has not yet struck one. — I assure you it is five and twenty minutes past ore, for my watch goes very well. — Bless r.e ! how rapidly- time passes in your society ! — You make me a com SEVENTY -SECOND LESSON. 329 jliment which 1 (?o not know how to answer. — Have you bought yowl R’atch in Paris ?- -I have not bought it, my uncle has made me a present o'" it. — What has that woman intrusted you with ? — She has intrurtted me with a secret about a count who is in great embar- rassment about the (d causa) marriage of one of bis daughters. — Does any one ask her in marriage ? — The man who demands her in mar- riage is a nobleman of the neigiiborhood, {la vecindad.) — Is lie rich ? —No. he is a poor devil {diablo) who has not a penny. — You say you have no friends among your schoolfellows, {el condisct'pulo ;) but is it not your fault? You have spoken ill of them, and they have not offended you. They have done you good, and nevertheless {sin em- hargn) you have quarrelled with them, (Lesson LXIV.) Believe me, he who has no friends deserves {merece) to have none. 221. Dialogue {didlogo) hehceen a tailor and his journeyman^ {el ojicia^,) — Charles, have you taken the clothes to the Count Narissi ? — Yes, Sir, I have taken them to him. — What did he say ? — He said notliing but that he had a great mind to give me a box on the ear, {hofetadas^ plur.,) because I had not brought them sooner. — What did you answer him ? — Sir, said I, I do not understand that joke : pay me what you owe me ; and if you do not do so instantly I shall take other measures. Scarcely had I said that, when he put his hand to his sword, {d sv espada,) and 1 ran away. 222. What are you astonished at ? — I am astonished to find you still in bed. — If you knew how sick I am, you would not be astonished at it. Has it already struck twelve ? — Yes, Madam, it is already half-past twelve. — Is it so late ? Is it possible ? — That is not late, it is still early. — Does your watch go well, {bien 1) — No, Miss N., it is a quarter of an hour too fast. — And mine is half an hour too slow. — Perhaps it has stopped. — In fact, you are right. — Is it wound up ? — It is wound up, and yet {sin embargo) it does not go. — Do you hear ? it is striking one o’clock. — Then I will regulate my watch and go home. — Pray Biay a Uttle longer! — I cannot, for we dine precisely at one o’clock, [a la una en punto.) — Adieu, then, till I see you again. 223. \Miat is the matter with you, my dear friend ? why do you look so nfie.ancholy ? — Nothing ails me, {nada tengo.) — Are you in any trouble, {esta V, apurado 1) — I have nothing, and even less than nothing, for I have not a penny, and I owe a great deal to my creditors : am I not very unhappy ? — When a man is well and has friends he is not un- 330 SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. happ3'. — ^Dare I ask you a favor ? — Wliat do you wish Have the goodness to lend me fifty dollars — I will lend you them with all m) heart, but on condition that you will renounce gambling, (ahandom el juego,) and be more economical than you have hitherto been. — 1 see now that you are my friend, and I love you too much not to follow your advice. John, (Juan!) — What is your pleasure. Sir? — Bring some wine.-. Presently, Sir. — Henry ! — Madam ? — Make the fire, (encienda V, can dela.) — The maid-servant has made it already. — Bring me some paper, pens, and ink. Bring me also some sand (arenilla) or blotting-paper, (papel de estraza,) sealing-wax, (lacre,) and a light, (una vela encendida,) Go and tell (vaya V, d decir) my sister not to wait (que no me espere) for me, and be back again (volver) at twelve o’clock in order to carry my letters to the post, (correo.) — Very well, madam. SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. — Leccion Septuagesima tercera To last, (to wear well.) That cloth will wear well. How long has that coat lasted you ? To my liking To everybody’s liking. Nobody can do any thing to his liking Durar. Durar largo tiempOf {mucho.) Ese pano durard largo tiompo. I Cuanto tiempo le ha durado d V esa casaca ? A mi gusto Que me guste. Que me agrade. A 1 gusto de todos. Que d todos les guste, (Its agrade.; t Nadie puede hacer cosa alguna qut le guste, (que le agrade.) A boarding-house. A boarding-school. To keep a boarding-house. Fc board with anj’^ one, o a:23"where. Casa de huespedes. Posada. Pupilage. Tener una casa de nudspedos Tener una posada. Hospedarse (tomar posada) con id guno. Vivir con alguno. V Estar en posada con a^grnio. Ti> exclaim. To make uneasy. Exclamar. Inquietar. Molestar. Desai«r,sfgat SKVENTr-THIRD LESSON. 331 To gcti or grow uneasy. To be uneasy Wliy do you fret, (are you uneasy f do not fret, (am not uneasy.) 1 bat news makes me uneasy. i am uneasy at not receiving any news. She is une 2 isy about that affair. Do not be uneasy. The uneasiness, trouble. Quiet. To quiet. Compose yourself To alter, to change. Tliat nian has altered a great deal since I saw him. { Inquietarse. Molesla^se Desasosegarse. Incomodai it Estar inquieto, (ansioso, cuidadosu desasosegado, incomodc ) I Porqud se inquieta V ? Yo no me inquieto. Esa noticia me inquieta. t Me da cuidado esa noticia. Me inquieta el no recibir noticias. t No se que hacernie porque nc recibo noticias. Ella se inquieta d cerca de os8 asunto. No se inquiete V. La inquiet Lid. La incomodidad. El desasosiego. I Tranquilo. Sosegado. Quieto Tra-nquilizar. Sosegar. Aquietar. Apaciguar. Tranquilicese V. Sosidguese V Alter ar. Camhiar. Mudar. Ese hombre se ha mudado mucha desde que le vi. To he of use. Of what use is that to you ? That is of no use to me. Of what use is that to your brother? It is of no use to him. Of what use is that stick to you ? I use it to b(>at my dogs. Of what us#3 is that horse to you ? I use it to carry my vegetables to the market Df what use are these bottles to yonr landlord ? They serve him to put his wme in. To stand instead, to he as. f use my gun as a stick. This hole serves him as a house. Se ucod his cravat as a nightcap. To avail Servir de. t i De que le sirve d V. eso ? t De nada me sirve eso. t ^ De que sirve eso al hermano de V.? t De nada le sirve. t i De que le sirve d V. ese palo ? t Me sirve para apalear mis perros. t ^ De que le sirve d V. ese caballo ? Me sirve para llevar las verduras al mercado, (la plaza.) I De que sirven estas botellas d su huesped de V. ? t Le sirven para llenarlas de vino Servir de. Usar como. Mi escopeta me sirve de baston. Uso mi escopeta como baston. Este hueco le sirve de casa. Se sirvid de su corbata como df gorro de dormir. Servir de. Aproveckar de. 832 SEVENTY-THIKD LESSON. U^iat avails it to you to cry ? It avails me nothing^. Opposite Opposite that house. Opposite the garden 0{)posite to me. Right opposite. He lives opposite the castle. I live opposite the king’s library. To get hold of. To take possession of. To witness, to show. To give evidence against some one. The witness. Me has shown a great deal of friend- ship to me. To turn some one into ridicule. To become ridiculous. To make one's self ridiculous. To he horn. Where were you born ? I was born in this country Where was your sister born ? She was born in the United States of North America. Where were your brothers born ? They were born in Spain. The boarder 7'lie pouch. A pillow Down. A test i guar. Testificar. Maaifestar t Ser testigo contra alguno. t Salir testigo contra alguno. El testigo. t La testigo, (fern.) Me testified mucha amistad Ridiculizar d alguno. Hacerse ridiculo. Ridiculizarse Volverse ridiculo. t Nacer. (See Appendix.) t I En donde nacid V. ? t Yo naci en este pais, t I En donde nacid su hermar.a do V.? t Ella nacid en los E.stados Unidos de la America del Norte, t I En donde nacieron los hermarotf de V.? t Nacieron en Espana. El huesped. El pensionista. El morral. La bolsa de eazadoros. Una funda. PI union. ( t [ De que le sirve d V. liorai ? f I Que le aprovecha a V. liorai 1 I t De nada me sirve En /rente. Frcnte d. Enfrente de esa casa. Fhifrente del jardin. Frente a mi. Frente a. Por frente. Vive en frente del castillo. Yo vivo en frente de (frente j 1) la biblioteca real. Asir. Agarrar. Apodorarsb de. EXERCISES. Sir, may {aireverse) I ask where the Earl of B. lives ? — He lives near the castle on the other side of the river. — Could you tell me SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. 333 ^liich road I must take to go thither ?— You must go (segui?) (along) me shore, and you will come (llegar) to a little street on the right, jvdiich will lead you straight (en derechura) to his house. It is a tine aoiise, you will find it easily. — I thank you, Sir. — Does Count N. live rjere? — Yes, Sir, walk in, {sirvase V, j>asar d denlro,'^ if you please. — Is tlie count at home ? I wish to have the honor (^ei honor) to speak to him. — Yes, Sir, he is at home , whom shall I have the honor to announce, {anunciar?) — I am from B., and my name is {llamarse) F. Which is the shortest {corto) way to the arsenal, {an arsenal 1) — Go down this street, and when you come Qlegue) to the bottom, {cai >,) turn to the left, and take {jpase por) lie cross- vay; you will then enter into a rather narrow (bastante estrecha) street, which will lead rou to a great square, {la plaza,) where you will see a blind allev. — Through (por) which I must pass? — No, for there is no outlet, (la Sdlida.) You must leave it on the right, and pass under the arcade which is near it. — And then? — And then you must inquire, (further.) — I am very much obliged to you. — Do not mention it, hay de que,) — Are you able to translate an English letter into Spanish ? — I am^ — Who has taught you ? — My Spanish master. 225. Why does your mother fret ? — She frets at receiving no news from her son w^ho is with the army. — She need not be uneasy about him, for whenever he gets into a bad scrape he knows how to get out of it again. — Last summer when we were a-hunting together (juntos) night grew upon us (se cerro la noche) at at least ten leagues (una legua) from our country-seat, {la quinta.) — Well, (pues,) where did you pass the night ? — I was very uneasy at first, but your brother not in the least, (no ;) on the contrary, he tranquillized me, so that I lost my uneasiness. We found at last a peasant’s hut where we passed the night. Here I had an opportunity to see how clever your brother is. A few benches and a truss of straw (un haz de paja) served him to make a comfortable (hueno) bed ; he used a bottle as a candlestick, our pouches served us as a pillow, and our cravats as nightcaps. When wo awoke in the morning, we were as fresh and healthy as if we had slept on down and silk. — A candidate (un candidato) petitioned (pedir) the king of Prussia (Prusla) for an employment, (un empleo.) This prince asked him where he was born. “ 1 was born at Berlin,’' answered he. “ Begone !” said the monarch, (el monarcaj) “ all the men of Berlin (los hijos de Berlin) are good for nothing.” “ I beg 'four majesty’s (la majestad) pardon,” replied the candidate, “ there are some good ones, and I know two.” “ Which are those two ?” asked the kln^. « The first,” replied the candidate, “ is your majesty, and I 334 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. am tlie second.” The king could not help laughing (710 pudc tninoi que reir) at this answer, and granted {conceder) the request, ( ia %uplica,) HEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON . — Leccion Septuagesima cuarta. To lose sight of. The sight i wear spectacles b cause my sight is bad, (I have bad sight.) I am near-sighted. The ship is so far off that we shall soon lose sight of it. I have lost sight of that. As it is long since I was in England, I have lost sight of your brother As it is long since I have read any Spanish, I have lost sight of It Perder algo de vista. La vista. Llevo anteojos porquo tengo la vists mala. (See Obs. D, Less. XXVI.) t Tengo la vista corta. El buque estd tan leios jue prontc le perderdmos de vista. He perdido eso de vista. Como hace mucho tiempo desde que estuve en Inglaterra, he perdido de vista d su hermano de V t Como hace mucho que no he leid . espahol, casi le he olvidado. Ought. Should. You ought or should do that. You ought not to speak thus to his father. We ought to go there earlier. They should listen to what you say. You should pay more attention to what I say. You ought to have done that. You should have managed the thing differently. He should have managed the thing better than he has done. They ought to have managed the thing £U3 I did. H’e ought to have managed it dif- ferently from what they did. To bid or to wish. I bid you a good morning. I wish you a good morning I wish you a good journey. No 8 of Deher (See Less. LX./ V. deberia hacer eso. V. no deberia hablar asi al sehor pa dre de el. Deberiamos ir alH mas temprano. Deberian escuchar lo que V. dice. VV. deberian hacer mas atencion a lo que digo. V. deberia haber hecho eso. V. deberia haber manejado la cosa de otro modo, (diferentemente.) FI podna haber hecho la cosa mejoi de lo que la ha hecho. Elios deberian haber manejado h cosa como yo lo hice. Deberiamos haber lo hecho do olrt modo que ellos. I Desear. r t Muy buenos dias tenga V ^ Deseo d- V. felices dias. f Buenos dias. [ Le deser d V. feliz viag© SKVEKrY-FOURTH LESSON. 335 ft; play a garae at billiards. To play upoi* the flute. A fall. To have a fall. A stay, a sojourn. To make a stay. Doc« your brother intend to make a long stay in the town ? He does not intend to make a long stay in it. To propose, (meanir.g to intend.) I propose going on that journey. I propose (intend) joining a hunting party. Jugar una mesa (partida) de billar t Tocar la flauta- Una caida. t Dar una caida. Residencia. Morada t Estar de asiento. Morar. Residii 1 1 Piensa su hermano de V. estar largo tiempo de asiento en s ciudad ? t !fil no piensa estar de asiento eu olla. Proponerse. t Pensar Inientar Tener intencion. t Pienso hacer ese viage Intento juntarme d una partida de caza. To suspect, to guess. I suspect what he has done. He does not suspect what is going to happen to him To think of some one, of something. Of whom do you think ? Of what do you think ? To turn upon. To be the question. It is questioned, it turns upon. The question is not your pleasure, but your improvement. You play, Sir, but playing is not the thing, but studying. What is going on i The question is to know what we shall do to pass the time agreeably. Sospechar. Presumir. Recelar Adivinar, Suponer. Yo presumo lo que ha hecho. No sospecha lo que va d sucederle. Pensar en alguno, en alguna cosa. I En quien piensa V ? I En que piensa V ? Tratarse de algo Volver la vista* Se trata de. No se trata del placer, sino de su adelantamiento de V. V. juega, senor, pero no se trata de jugar, sino ae estudiar. I De que se trata { Se trata de saber lo que hardmos para emplear el tiempo gustosamente. On purpose. f beg your pardon, I have not It cn purpose. A proposito. Yo pido perdon d V., no lo he hechc d propdsito. t No lo he hecho d mal hacer* To hold one s tongue. i C altar se. t C altar se la hocc* I t No abrir la boca. 836 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. Dc you hold your tongue ? I hold my tongue. He holds his tongue. After speaking half an hour> he held his tongue. I Se calla V Yo me callo. El se calla. Despues de haber habladc por m^dia bora, se call6. EXERCISES. 226 . A chief having one day entered a boarding-house, stole three cloak?^ (la rMpa.) In going av/ay he was met by one of the boarders who had a fine laced {galoneado) cloak. Seeing so many cloaks, he asked tlie man where he had taken them. The thief answered boldly (^con mucho sosiego) that they belonged to three gentlemen {caballeros) of the house, who had given them to be cleaned, {para que las iimpiase.) ‘‘ Then you must also clean mine, for it is very much in need of it,” said the boarder ; “ but,” added he, “ you must return it to me at three o’clock.” “ I shall not fail, {/altar, ) Sir,” answered the thief, as he carried off {llevar) the four cloaks, with which he {que) is still tc return, {todavia no han jarecido,) — You are singing, {cantar,) gentle- men, but it is not a time for singing ; you ought to be silent, and to listen to what you are told. — We are at a loss. — What are you at a loss about ? — I am going to tell you : the question is with us how we shall pass our time agreeably. — Play a game at billiards or at chess. — We have proposed joining a hunting-party ; do you go with us, {venir ?) — I cannot, for I have not done my task yet ; and if I neglect it, my master will sccfld me. — Every one according to his liking ; if you like staying at home better than going a-h unting we cannot hinder you. — Does Mr. B. go with us ? — Perhaps. — I should not like to go with him, for he is too great a talker, {muy hablador,) excepting that {menos eso) he is an honest man. What is the matter with you ? You look angry. — I have reason to {motivo) be angry, for there is no means of getting money now. — Have you been to Mr. A.’s ? — I have been to his house ; but there is no possibility {ningun medio) of borrowing from him. I suspected that he would not lend me any, that is the reason why I did not wish to ask him ; and had you not told me to do so, I should not have sub- jected myself {exponer) to a refusal, {d una negativa.) 227 . I suspected that you would be thirsty, and (that) your sister (would oc) hungry ; that is the reason why I brought {traer) you hither E am serry, however, not to see your mother. — Why do }ou not drink your cofiee ? — If I were not sleepy I would drink it. — Sometimes vou SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 837 are sleepy, sometimes {ptras) cold, sometimes warm, and sometimes something else is the matter with you, (y muchas veces otras cosas,) I believe that you think too much of the misfortune that has happened to your friend, (fern.) — If I did not think about it, who would think about it ? — Of whom does your brother think ? — He thinks of me, for we always think of each other (uno de otro) when we are not together, {juntos.) The Biscayans are excellent ball-players, (jugadores.) — The two chess-players were very skilful. — Do you know any flute-player, {flautista^) or any violin-player, {violinista ?) — I know a very good flute-player, but I do not know any violin-player. — For what purpose do you ask ? — Because I intend to have a musical entertainment. — Do you sometimes practise (hacer) music ? — Very often, for I like it much. — What instrument do you play ? — I play the violin, and my sister plays the harpsichord. My brother who plays the bass {el contrabajo) accompanies {acompafiar) us, and Miss Stolz sometimes applauds {aplaudir) us. — Does she not also play some (musical) instrument ? — She plays the harp, {el harpa,) but she is too proud {orgulloso) to practise music with us. — A very poor town went to considerable expense {hizo gastos considerables) in feasts and illuminations {fiestas e iluminaciones) on the occasion of its prince passing through, {cuando paso su principe.) The latter seemed himself astonished at it. — It has only done,” said a courtier, {cortesanoj} “ what it owed (to your majesty.”) “ That is true,” replied another, “ but it owes all tlia^ it has done.” SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON . — Leccion Septuagesima quints. Towards, (physical!) .) (morally.) Hdcia. Con. Para con. fie comes towards me. lie behaved very well towards me. V\'^e must always behave well to- wards everybody. The behavior of others is but an echo of our own. If we behave well towards them, they will also be- have well towards us ; but if we use them ill, we must not expect better from them. Viene hd,cia mi. Se port6 muy bien conmigo. Siempre nos debemos portar bien para con todo el mundo. La conducta de los otros no es maa que el eco de la nuestra. Si noo portamos bien con ellos, se porta- rdn igualmente bien con nosotros ; pero si no los tratamos bien, no debemos esperar que noe tiatew mejor. 15 338 6EVENTY FIFTH LESSON. To treat or to use somebody well. To use somebody ill. Everybody, Others. Aa you have always used me well, I will not use you ill. fie has always used me well, and I have always used him in the same manner. Tratar bien d unOy {algum.)^ Tratar mol d uno, (alguno.) Todo el mundo, Todos. Otro. Otros. (Indefinite Pronouns, see App ' Como V. me ha tratado siempro bien, yo no le tratard mal. Siempre me ha tratado bien, y yo lo he tratado siempre de la misma manera. To delayy {to tarry.) Do not be long before you return. I shall not be long before I return. To long to or f 01 < I long to see my brother. He longs to receive his money. We long for dinner, because we are very hungry. T ney long to sleep, because they are tired. Tardar Tardarse. Detenersfi No tarde V. en volver. No tardard en volver ' Esperar con ansias Estar ansioso. Desear con vehemencia. Tener gran gana. - Tener muchas ganas de. Estoy ansiosa de ver d mi hermano Desea mucho recibir su dinero. Tenemos muchas ganas de comer porque tenemos mucha hambre. Tienen muchas ganas de dormir porque estan cansados. To be at one* s ease. < To he comfortable. ' To be uncomfortable. ^ I am very much at my ease upon this chair. 5 Tou are uncomfortable upon your chair. What can that be We are unccraforlable in that board- ing-house. That man is wefi off for he has plenty of money. Estar uno con desahogo. Estar d sus anchuras. Estar bien. Estar comodamente. t Pasarlo bien. Estar incomodamente. t Pasarlo mal. t Estoy muy d mis anchuras en esta sill a. V. estd incdmodamente on su sDla. I Que puede ser eso ? 'Estamos incdmodamente en esa po« sada. t Lo pasamos muy mal en esa po ^ sada. , t Ese hombre lo pasa bien, porque tiene mucho dinero SEVENTY -FIFTH LESSON. 339 Tliat man is badly oli, for he is poor To make one s self comfortable. M ake yourself comfortable. To inconvenience one’s self. To put one’s self out of the way Do not put yourself out of the way. That man never inconveniences him- self ; he never does it for any- body. Can you, without putting yourself to inconvenience, lend me your gun? Solicitar. Hacer instancias. Hacer diligencias. Instar Pedir encarecidamente. Pedir con instancia. t Me vali de toda especie de suplicas para ernpefiarle d que lo hiciera. Solicitar. Instar. Suplicar. Rogar J Aqui y alld. Acd y alld. ( Acd y aculld. De cuando en cuando. Tal cual. Asi asi. He hecho m’ composision tal cual. Here and there. Now and then, (from time to time.) Indifferently, (as good as bad.) I have done my composition tolera- bly well. To make entreaties. To beg with entreaties. I employed every kind of entreaty to engage him to do it. To solicit^ to presSi to sue, to en- treat. t Ese h ombre lo pasa mal, poique ea pobre. Hacer uno lo que le acnmoda. Estar uno comodamcnte Pdiigase V. cdmodamente. t Ilaga V. lo que le acomode. Incomodarse. Molestarse. No se incomode V. No se molesto V Ese hombre nunca se incomoda nunca se molesta por nadie I Puede V., sin incomodarse, prcstar- rne su escopeta ? To impart something to somebody. Have you imparted that to your father ? f have imparted it to him. C Informar d alguno de alguna cosa < Dar parte de alguna cosa d uno. ( Comunicar algo d alguno. ^ I Ha informado V. de eso d su padre 1 ( I Ha dado V. parte de eso d su padre 1 ] Le he informado de ello. To postpone^ to put off. l/et us put that off until to-morrow. Lot us put off that lesson until another time. Posponer Difcrir ♦. Difiramos eso hasta manaiia. Difiramos esa leccion hasta otra ve 2 340 SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. In vam. in vaiu I looked around, I saw iieitlier man nor house : not the least sign of settlement. A dwelling, habitation, settlement. In vain 1 speak, for you do not listen to me. In vain I do my best, 1 cannot do any thing to his liking. Vou may say what you please, no- body will believe you. It is in vain that they earn money, they will never be rich. VVe search in vain, for what we have lost we cannot find. To salute. To wish a good morning. I have the honor to bid you adieu. Present my compliments to him, to her. Remember me to him, to her. Pray, present my compliments to your sister. Remember me (present my compli- ments) to him, to her. I shall not fail. At your servic3. En vano. Poi mas que For mas que volvia lo? ojos d todas partes, no veia iii casas, ni horn- bres : ni la mas minima senal da habitacion. Una habitacion. En vano hablo yo, pues VV. no me escuchan. For mas que haga, yo no puedo hacei nada d su gusto. Foi mas que diga V. ninguno le creerd. For mas dinero que ganen, jamas serdn ricOs. En vano buscamos, pues lo que ho- mos perdido no lo hallaremos Saludar. Para saludar t Darle d uno los buenos dias. Tengo el honor de saludarle d V Tengo el honor de despedirme de V Encomiendeme V. d dl, d ella. Digale V. muchas cosas de mi parte. Hdgame V. el favor de encomendar me d su senora hermana. Dele V. memorias y expresionea finisimas mias. No faltard. t Con mucho gusto. Fara servir d V. The present, (tne present time or tense.) The past. The future. The loss of time. Enjoy all the pleasures that virtue. peiTTiits. Tc enjoy. El presente. Lo presente. El pasado. Lo pasado. El futuro. Lo future. Lo veniderc La perdida de tiempo. Gozad de todos los placeres que per- mite la virtud. Gozar. EXERCISES. 228 . Have you made your Sj;anish composition ? — 1 have made it. — VVaa your tutor pleased with it? — He was not. In vain I do my best; J SE iTENTY-FXFTH LjfiSSON. 341 c&nnot do any diing to his liking. — You may say what you please, {io qv£ quiera,) nobody will believe you. — Can you, without putting yoursel! tO inconvenience, lend me five hundred dollars ? — As you have always used me well 1 will use you in the same manner, (jnodo.) 1 will lend you the money you want, but on condition that you will 16- turn it to me next week. — You may depend upon it, (jpoder contar .] — How has my son behaved towards you ? — He has behaved well to« wards me, for he behaves well towards everybody. His father told him often : The behavior of others is but an echo of our own. If wo behave well towards them, they will also behave well towards us ; but if we use them ill, we must not expect better (mas) from them. — May I see your brothers ? — You will see them to-morrow. As they have just arrived from a long journey they long for sleep, for they are very tired. — What has my sister said ? — She said that she longed for dinneri because she was very hungry. — Are you comfortable at your boarding- house ? — I am very comfortable there. — Have you imparted to youi brother what I told you ? — As he was very tired, he longed for sleep ; so that 1 have put off imparting it to him till to-morrow. 229 . I have the honor to wish you a good morning. How do you do ?-^ Very well at your service. — And how are all at home ? — Tolerably well, thank God, (d Dios gracias /) My sister was a little indisposed, but she is better ; she told (encargar) me to give you (que le vresentase) her best compliments. — I am glad (alegrarse) to hear that she is well. As for you, you are health itself, (la misma salud ;) you cannot look ootter, (es imposible tener mejor semblanle.) — 1 have no time to be ill : my business would not permit me. Please to sit down ; here is a chair. — I will not detain you from your business ; I know that a merchant’s time is precious. — I have nothing pressing (urgente) to do now, my courier is already dispatched, (mi correo esta despachado.) — I shall not stay any longer. I only wished in passing to inquire about youi health. — You do me much honor. — It is very fine weather to-day. If you will allow me I shall have the pleasure of seeing you again this afternoon, (al pasar por aqui,) and if you have time we will take a little turn together. — With the greatest pleasure. In that case I shall wait for you. — I will come for you about seven o’clock. — Adieu, then till I sec you again. — I have the honor to bid you adieu. 230 . The loss of time is an irreparable loss. A single minute (un solo) cannot be recovered (pagar) for all the gold in the world. It is then of the greatest importance to employ well the time, which consists only of minutes, of winch we must make good use, {Jbuen usn \ Wc 312 SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. have but the present ; the past is no longer any thing, and the future is uncertain, {incierto,) — A great many people ruin themselves (ar- ruinarse) because they wish tc indulge themselves too much, {quieren pasarlo bien.) If most men knew how to content themselves {con- tentarse) with what they have, they would be happy ; but their greedi- ness {codicid) very often makes them unhappy. — In order to be happy we must forget the past, not trouble ourselves about {acongojarse) the lutiire, and enjoy the present. — I was very much dejected (triste) when my cousin came to me. “ What is the matter with you ?” he asked me. “ Oh, (/ Ay de mi !) my dear cousin,” replied I, “ in losing that money I have lost every thing.” “ Do not fret,” said he to me, “ for I iia^ e found your money.” SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. — Leccion Septuagesima sexta* To mean. What do you mean? I mean. What does that man mean ? He means. What does that mean ? That means. That does not mean any thing. I do not know what that means. To he particular. ! do not like to deal with that man, for he is too particular. To srow impatient. To fret. Do not fret about that. { Querer decir. Hacer dnimo. ( Significar. t I Que quiere V. decir? t Quiero decir. 1 1 Que quiere decir ese hombre ? t Ll quiere decir. 1 1 Que quiere decir eso ? t I Que signihca eso ? I t Eso quiere decir. Eso significa t Eso no significa nada. t Nada quiere decir eso. t Yo no sd lo que quiere decir eso. t Yo no s^ lo que significa eso. Ser singular. Ser estrano. t Tener uno rarezas. No me gusta tratar {tener negncioa con ese hombre, porque os mu^ estrano. Inquietarse. Enfadarse. Apurarsi Impacientarse. Consumirse. I t No se impaciente V.' de eso. To sit up. To watch I have sat up all night. To aavise. The dress. The costume. Elegant dress. Velar. He velado toda la noche. Aconsejar El vestidc El trage. El uso. Trage elegante. Vestido de rnod&. SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 843 To dress one^s self. I I tioX man always dresses well. | To find fault with something * That man always finds fault 'vith every thing he sees. 1^0 you find fault with that ? I do not find fault with it. A trick. To play a trick. To play a trick upon some one. tie played me a trick. | Take care, that man will piny you | a trick. | Besides^ (more.) V'ou have given me three books, but I want three besides. Less. Three less. Three too many. To reach. My reach. Within my reach. Out of ray reach. | These things are not within the 1 reach of everybody. | Within gun-shot ^ A gun-shot, (meaning distance.) ( Two gun-shots, ( “ “ ) 1 flow many snots have you fired ? < ( wonder why that man makes such ^ a noise. Vestirse. Ese hombre se viste siempre bien t Hallar fait a en alguna case. t Hallar que decir de alguna coaa t Ese hombre halla siempre quo decal de cuanto vd. 1 1 Halla V. que decir de eso? t Yo no hallo que decir de ello. Engaho. Chasco. Bur la. Piezo. Jugar una pieza. Dar un chasco. Jugar una pieza d alguno. t Me jug6 una pieza. t Me did un chasco. Guidado, ese hombre le jugard d V una pieza, (t le dard un chasco.) Ademas de. Ademas de los tres libros que V. me ha dado, quiero otros tres, (quiero tres mas.) Mdnos. t Faltan. t Faltan tres. t Sobran tres. Alcanzar. t Alcanzar d entender Mi alcance. Alcanzo d. A mi alcance. Alcanzo d ello. Fuera de mi alcance. No alcanzo d ello. t No alcanzo d entenderlo. Todo el mundo no alcanza d entendei estas cosas. A tiro de escopeta. t A tiro de hala. A dos tiros de escopetas. I Cuantos tiros ha disparado V. ? I Cuantos escopetazos ha tirade V. ? I Cuantas veces hizo V. fuego ? Quisiera saber porqud hace tanto ruido ese hombre. Estraho mucho que haga tanto ruido ese hombre. t Me admiro porqve hace tanto rui- do ese hombre. 344 SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSOiN. So long as. So long as you behave well, people will love you. 1 o carry olT. A mouthful. To cverwhelm To heap. To load. To overwhelm some one with joy. Generous. Charitable. Beneficent. You have heaped benefits upon me. Sincere. Sincerely. An advantage. The disadvantage. The prejudice. I shall never say any thing to your disadvantage. To surrender. The enemies have surrendered. To prefer 1 prefer the useful to the agreeable. I Mientras. En tanto que. Le amaran a V. mientras se portc I bien. lilevarse. Quitar. Quitar del medio. Un bocado. Un pedacito. Colmar. Llenar. Abrumar Llenar d alguno de gozo. Colmar d alguno de gozo. Generoso. Caritativo. Benefico. V. me ha colmado de beneficios. Sincere. Sinceramente. (Adverb, see App.) Una ventaja. La desventaja. El perjuicio. Nuiica dird nada en perjuicio de V, Rendlrse * Entregar. Los enemigos se han rendido. Preferir * Yo prefiero lo dtil d lo agradable. Obs. A. Adjectives used substantively are preceded by the indefijiito pronoun lo. (See Appendix.) The drinking. 1 El beber. The eating. | El comer. Ohs. B. Verbs used substantively take the article el. (See Appendix.) To behold. Behold those beautiful flowers, with their colors so fresh and bright. The col6r. The lily. The. violet. The forget-me-not The rose. An emblem. Fresh verdure is salutary to our eyes. Mirar. Miren VV. (or mirad^ esas hermosas flores, con sus colores tan frescos y vivos, (or brillantes.) El color. El lirio. La violeta. La trill itaria. La rosa. Un emblema, (mas.) El verdor fresco es agradable d la vista. SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 34^1 EXERCISES. 231. Why have ycu played a trick upon that man ? — Because he altvays 5nds fault witii every thing he sees. — What does that mean, Sir ? — Tliat means *hat I do not like to deal with you, because you are toe particular. — I wonder why your brother has not done (haya liecho) hia task. — It was too difficult. He has sat up all night, and has not been able to do it, because'it was out of his reach. — As soon as Mr. Flausen sees me he begins to speak English, in order to practise, (gercitar,) and overwhelms me with politeness, (^cortesias,) so that I often do not know what to answer. His brothers do the same, (lo mismo.') How- ever, they are very good people, (gentes they are not only rich and amiable, but they are also generous and charitable. They love me sincerely, therefore I love them also, and consequently shall never say any thing to their disadvantage. I should love them still more, if they did not make so much ceremony ; but every one has his faults, and mine is to speak too much of their ceremonies. 232. Have the enemies surrendered ? — They have not surrendered, for they did not prefer life to death. They had neither bread, nor meat, nor water, nor arms, nor money ; notwithstanding they determined to die rather than surrender. — Why are you so sad ? — You do not know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend, (fern.) — Tell me, (lo,) for J assure you that I share your sufferings as well as your pleasures. — 1 am sure that you feel for me, (que V, me compadece,) but I cannot teii you nov^ what makes me uneasy. I will however tell you when an epportumty offers, (se presente.) Let us speak of something else now What do you think of the man who spoke to us yesterday at the concert ? — He is a man of much understanding, (talento,) and not a; all wrapt up in his own merits, (y nada presumido.) But why do yov ask me that ? — To speak of something. — It is said : contentment (con lento) surpasses (valer mas) riches ; let us then always be content. Let us share (partir) (with each other) what we have, and remain oui lifetime (mientras vivamos) inseparable friends. You will always be welcome at my house, and I hope to be equally so at yours. If I saw you happy I should be equally so, and we should be more contented llian the greatest princes, who are not always so. We shall be happy when we are perfectly contented with what we have ; and if we da our duty as we ought, God will take care of the rest. The past being no longer any thing, let us not be uneasy about the future, and enjoy the present [546 &EVEKTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 233 . Behold, ladies, {sehoras^) those beautiful flowers, witn their co.ors 5C fresh and bright ; they drink nothing but water. The white lily has the color of innocence, (inocencia ;) the violet indicates gentleness, (indica la dulzura ;) you may see it in Louisa’s eyes. The forget-me-not lias tlie color of heaven, our future dwelling, and the rose, the queen of flowers, is the emblem of beauty and of joy. You see all that personified (per* licmijicado) in seeing the beautiful Amelia, {Amalia.) How beautiful is the fresh verdure ! It is salutary to our eyes, and has the color of hope, (de la esperanza^) our most faithful friend, (fern.,) who never deserts (ahandonar) us, not even in death, {en el momento de la rnuerte.) — One word more, my dear friend. — What is your pleasure ? — I forgot to tell you to present my compliments {que me encomendara) to your mother. Tell her, if you please, that I regret (sentir) not having been at home when lately she honored me with her visit. — I thank you fox her, {en su nombre,) I shall not fail. — Farewell then. SRVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Leccion Septuagesima ssptima, A silk gown. A kitchen table. A mahogany table. A brick house. A stone house. A windmill. A coflee-mill. A sugar-mill. A velvet bonnet. A silver tankard. A water-mill. A steam -mill. Fire-arms. A two-wheeled wagon. A four-wheeled carriage A one-story house A two-story house. A Ihree-story house. A one-horse wagon. A four-horse carriage. Gunpowder Un tunfco (trage, vestido) de seda. Una mesa de cocina. Una mesa de caoba. Una casa de ladrillo. Una casa de piedra. Un molino de viento. Un molinillo de cafe. Un trapiche. Ingen io de azticar Un gorro de terciopelo. Un jarro de plata. Un molino de agua. Un molino de vapor. Armas de fuego. Un carro de dos ruedas. Un carruage (coche) de cuatro ruev , das. Una casa de un alto. Una casa de dos altos. Una casa de tres altos. (See Lessee II., Obs. A.) Un carro tiradb por un caballo. Un carruage tirado por cuatro ca ballos. Pblvora. SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 347 Ohs. A. We have seen (Lesson II.) that the prepositijn de is pat bo- fvvcen two substantives, the latter of which expresses the substance of whicis the former is made ; but the preposition para is sometimes made use ol when the latter expresses the use of the former. In both cases the order of the two substantives is inverted in Spanish, when they make a compound ‘«r English. To exaggerate. rbat man exaggerates all that he says and does. All that. To take the place of, to be instead of That man is father to me. | That umbrella serves him as a cane. | An inch. On a small scale. On a large scale. Thereabouts, nearly. Alternately, turn by turn. To endeavor, to strive. To give one^s self up to grief To melt. To melt in tears. Exagerar. Ponderar. Ese hombro .^xagera cuaiito dice y hace. Cuanto. Todo lo que Ser. Servir de. Ese h ombre me es un segundo padie, Ese hombro me sirve de padre. Ese pardguas le sirve de cana. Una pulgada. En pequeno. For menor. En grande. For mayor. Cerca de. Foco mas 6 mdiite de. Alternativamente. For turnos. Esforzarse. Empeharse. Abandonarse (entregarse) al dolor Dejarse veneer del dolor. Derretir Derretirse Derretirso en Idgrimas. 1 To raise, ro cause. To raise difficulties. To cause quarrels. To cause suspicions. The behavior of that man raised sus- picions in my mind. Excitar. Incitar. Mover. Levant at Excitar dificultades. Mover pendencias. Excitar sospechas. La conducta de ese hombre me inoi* t6 a sospecharle. To shake. ®].ake that tree, and the fruit will come down. Sacudir. Sacuda V ese arbol, y la fruta caer^ al suelo. To he in want of. To he short of. To want. fhal man is ia want of every ^ Yo dudaba that you Yo dude ^ would have ' Yo dudaria ! come. Yo habia dudado J . Yo habria dudado J que V. vin- iera ; or que V. viniese. queV.huhie- ra vpuido ; or que V hubiese ve- nido. Remark A, on the use of the subjunctive. After the following conjunctions, the verb is in the subjunctive, prosenti ir imperfect, in conformity with the rules above explained. Hvat, in erder that, to the »^nd that. I nfoes, except, If, t should it hap- pen, Ikjforo, d fin que. d minos que. en caso que — si. antes que. Though, although, For feai of, lest, unless, In case, if, Though. hien que por temor de no, sea que, d me- nos que. en caso que si lunque. 858 SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. Till, until, Far from, Not that, For all til at, not- withstandiii^ that, Sluppose that, If over so little, how •little soever, hasta que. lejos de, no por quc, no obstante eso supuesto que. por poco que. Provided that, save that. Though, although. Without, However littloj Whether, Suppose that, cm ial qm. aunque. sin, sin que. por poco que sea que. i supuesto que se suponc. £XAMPLF« Will you stay here until I can go out with you ? I will go out before he comes back. If you had what you have not, you would be rich. I send you my book, that you may read it. Unless you accompany her, she will not go out. Though your children are idle, they make progress. If a man had ever so little acquaint- ance with another, ho was bound to take a part in the dispute, and venture his person as much as if he had himself been angry. Be it as it may. Though she is little and bad-looking, she is nevertheless amiable. I would not have her for a wife, though she is rich and has a great dea. of wit, because she is not good-hearted. Provided you are my friend, I am content. Whether you are in the nght or in the wrong. Although the monkey be dressed jn silk, he is still a monkey. I Quiere V. estarse aqui hasta qm yo pueda salir con V.? Yo saldrd antes que dl vuelva. Si V. tumera lo que no tiene, V seria rico. Envio d V. mi libro para que (d fin de que) V. le lea. A menos que V. la acompahe, ella no saldrd. Aunque los ninos de V. scan perezo- sos, olios hacen progresos. Por poca amistad que un hombre tumera con otro, era necesario quo el se mezclara en la disputa, y que arriesgara su persona tanto como si 61 mismo se hubiera (hubiese) encolerizado. Sea lo que fuere. Sea lo que sea ^ t Como quiera que sea. Aunque sea. Aunque ella sea chica, y tenga mala cara, no deja de ser amable. Yo no querria tomarla por mi esposa aunque sea rica, y tenga mucho taleiito, porque no tiene bueii co- razpn. Con tal que V. sea mi amigo, estny contento. Sea que V tenga ^ 6 no tenga mzotj Aunque se msta de seda La Mona, Mona se queda Iriarte, Fable XXVI] SEV^ENTY-NINTH LESSON. 359 But before it comes to that issue, a | knight must travel througli the world. But bo that as it n.ay, I will order it to be repaired in the first village, whore we can find a blacksmith, in such a manner as to be unex- celled, nay, even unequalled, by that which Vulcan forged and fin- ished for the god of war. I want to divide no spoils, but to beg and supplicate some friend to bring me a draught of wine, and that he will wipe me dry of this sweat. I Pero antes que se llcgue d ^ tdr- mino es menester andar poi el I mundo. I D. Quijotet cap. xxi. pi. i. Pero sea lo que fuere, yo la adsre- zard en el primer lugar donde hay a herrero, y de suerte quo no le haga ventaja, ni aun le llegue la que hizo y forjd el dios de las herrerias para el dios de las batallas. Ditto i ditto. Yo no quicro repartir despojos, sino pediVf y suplicar d algun amigo, que me de un trago de vino, y me enjugue este sudor. Ditto, cap. liii. pt. ii. Ohs A. Some conjunctions govern the indicative, when the sentence affirms positively that the thing in question is, has been, or will be ; and the subjunctive, when the sense of the phrase indicates uncertainty, condition, stipulation, contingency, futurity, or wish. Examples : — If- Although. But. So, in such a manner. So as to So that. Ind. You behave in such a manner, that you are loved by everybody Subj. Behave in such a manner that you may be loved. If he lent them money, they also lent it to him. If he lent (should he lend) them money, they would also lend it to him. D- it so as to have him satisfied. Cut for me, he could not have known it Ind. If he had gained a suit, he also bad lost a friend, and therefore he had reason to complain Si. Aunque. Si no. ^ De {de tal) forma que. De {de tal) manera que. De {de tal) modo que. ^ De {de tal) suerte que. Ind. V. se porta de manera que amado de todo el mundo. Subj. Pdrtese V. de tal mfinera que sea amado, {se haga amar.) Si ^1 les prestd dinero, ellos tambien se le prestJlron. Si €\ les prestara dinero, ellos tam- bien se le prestarian. t Hdgalo V. de modo que €i quedc satisfecho. Si no fuera por mi, 61 no lo hauria sabido. Ind. Si 61 habia ganado el pleito, tambien habia perdido un omigot y asi tenia razon de quojarse. 360 SEVENTY- NINTH LESSON. Subj. If he had gained (that is, had he gained) the suit, he would have lost a friend, and therefore he had no reason to be sorry. Tnd. Although I had Deen there often, I had never seen her. Subj, Although I had been there often, (or had I been,) I never should have seen her. Subj. Si ^1 hubiera ganado el pleiU habria perdido un amigo, y asi IK tenia razon de quejarse. McHenry’s Gram Ind. Aunque yo habia estado a me- nudo alii, nunca la habia visto. ♦ Subj. Aunque yo hubiera estado alii k menudo, nunca la habria visto. Ohs. B. 'The subjunctive is used after the conjunction que when it is elliptic or substituted for other conjunctions, such as : d Jin quey {de que,) sea qu€y sin quCf con tal quey antes qucy despues quey d menos quey hasta que, o3 oil his wishes. I cuanto 61 quiera. 374 EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. Thick. A thick cloud A thick bea»-‘i. He has a thick heard A burst. A burst of laughter. To burst out laughing. To burst out. To burst out a laughing. Splendor, brightness. To make a great show. To light. To suffer one’s self to be beaten. To let or to suffer one’s self to fall. To suffer one’s self to be insulted. To suffer one’s self to die. To let one’s self be struck. To send back, to send away. To extol, to praise up. To boast, to praise one’s self. Go thither. Let us go. Go thou. Go (thou) thither. Go rthou) away. Lot him go thither Lot them go thither t Espeso. Espesa. Denso Dousa Grueso. Gruesa. Una nube espesa. t Una barha pohlada, {espesa.) t EL es barhicerrado. Un reventon, (estallido, estampidex flujo.) Una carcajada. Un flu^o do risa, Reventar de risa. Caerse de risa Reventar. Estallar. Brotar. Romper. Quebrar. Prorumpir. Dar de carcajadas. Hacerse trizaa Esplendor. Resplandor Brillo. Lustre. Brillaniez. Claridad. Pompa. Magnificencia. Hacer ostentacion. Hacer un gran papel. J Alumbrar. Iluminar. Dar luz. Encender Dejarse aporroar, (golpear, maltia tar, sacudir.) Dejarse caer. Dejarse insultar. Dejarse morir. Dejarse apalear. Devolver. t Volver d enmat. Remitir (enviar) otra vez. Hacer volver. C Engrandecer. Alabar. / Magnificar. Ensalzar. Aplaudir f Engrandecer. Exaltar. Jactarse. Vanagloriarse. Alabarse. Exaltarse. Preciarse t Echar plantas. C Vaya V. ahi, (alli or alld.) < Id VOS (vosotros) ahi, (alii or alld.) ^ Ve tti alli, (alld or ahi.) I Vamos. I Ve td. I Ve alia, (alli.) ‘ Veto. Vdyase €[ alia. Que se vaya €\ alU. J Vayanse ellos alld. \ Que 86 vayan ellos alli. EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. 375 Go away, bi>gone. Let us begone. | hiir go av*^ay, let him begone. | Give me. | Give it to me. ^ Give it to him | Give him some. To get paid. | Get paid. | Let us set out. | Let us breakfast. I Let him give it to me. L&\ him be here at twelve o’clock. Let him send it me He may believe it. Make an end of it. Let him finish. Let him tak? it. Let her say so. Rather, (before an adjective.) ■ S Vete. Marchate. t Quitate de aqui. Vayase V. Marchese V .t Quitese V. de aqui. Vd.monos. Marchcmonos. t Quitemonos de aqui. Qne se vaya. Que se marclio. t Que deje el puesto. Deme V. Denme VV. Dadme. Demele (demela) V Dddmele. Dadmela vos. Desele (desela) V. Diotele or k, (vos, vosotros.) Dele V. alguno, (algunos, algun& algunas.) Dadle vos, vosotros alguno, (algunos alguna, algunas.) Hacerse pagar. Hdgase V. pagar. + Haceos pagar. Salgamos. Marchemos. Partarn os. V dmonos. Almorcemos. Demele el. Que ^1 me le de Que el este aqui d las doce. Que el estd aqui al medio dia. Que el me le (la) envie. 6 1 puede creerle, (la or lo.) Acabar. Final izar. Terminar. Concluir. Que acabe, (dl.) t Dejele V. acabar , {que acabe.) Tdmele, (el.) Que le tome dl. Dejele V. que le tome. Digalo ella. Deje V. que ella lo diga. t Dejeselo V. decir. Algo. The starling. If I were to question you as I used to da at the beginning of our les- sons, what would you answer ? We found these questions at first El estornino, iSi yo les hicicra d VV. (os hicieraj preguntas como lo hacia al principle de nuestras lecciones, que me re- spouderian VV. (que responderiais)! Nosotros hallamos al principio ealas 376 EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. rather ridiculous ; but full of con- fidence in your method, we an- swered as well as the small quan- tity of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. tVe were not long in finding out that those questions were calculatea lo ground us in the rules, and to ex- ercise us in conversation, by the contradictory answers we were obliged to make. We can now almost keep up a con- versation in Spanish. This phrase does not seem to us logi- cally correct. We should be ungrateful if we al- lowed such an opportunity to escape without expressing our ' liveliest gratitude to you. In all cases, at all events. The native. The insurmountable difficulty preguntas algo riditw.as ; pero llenos de confianza en el m^todc de V., (vuestro metodo,) las res- pondimos tan bien como nos lo permiti6 el corto niimero de pala- bras y reglas que entOnccs po»e.‘a- mos, (sabiamos.) No tardamos mucho en hallar quc aquellas preguntas estaban c^dcii- ladas para inculcarnos las regI:iF, y ejercitarnos en la conversacion, por (medio de) las respuestas coii- tradictorias, que estdbamos cjliga- dos d hacer. A1 presente podemos mantener c asl toda una conversacion en es panol. Esta frase no nos parece Idgicamentc correcta. Nosotros seriamos unos ingratos si dejaramos escapar una tal oportu* nidad de manifestar d V. (mani- festaros) nuestro mas vivo recouoci- miento. En todo caso. En todo evento, (suceso.) En todas ocasiones. t Suceda lo que succda. El nalivo. El natural. t EL originario de, El hijo (tt La dificultad insuperable. EXERCISES. 243 . Will you drink a cup of coffee ? — I thank you, I do not like coftee. — Then you will drink a glass of wine ? — I have just drunk some.—- Let us take a walk. — Willingly, (con mucho gusto ;) but where shall we go to ? — Come with me into my aunt’s garden ; we shall there find very agreeable society. — I believe it ; but the question is (eZ caso es) whether this agreeaole society will admit me. — You are welcome everywhere. — What ails you, my friend ? How do you like that wine ? — 1 like it very well, (muy bien ;) but I have drunk enough of it.— Drink once more, {ptra copita.) — No, too much is unwholesome ; 1 know my constitution. — Do not fall. What is the matter with you ?— KIGHTY-SECCKD LESSON. 377 cl j not know ; but my head is giddy, (estoy aturdido ;) I tiiink I am ihinling, (pienso que me desmayo .) — I think so also, for you look almost like a dead person, (un cadaver .) — What countryman are you 1 — I am an American. — You speak Spanish {espailoL) so well that I took you for a Spaniard by birth. — You are jesting. — Pardon me ; I do not jest at all. How long have you been in Spain, (Espaiia?) — A few days. — In earnest ? — You doubt it, perhaps, because I speak Spanish ; I knew it before I came to Spain. — How did you learn it go well ? — I did like the prudent starling. Tell me, why are you always on bad terms {en discordia) with you? wdfe ? and why do you engage in unprofitable trades, (meterse en nego cios inutiles ?) It costs so much trouble (cuesta tanto) to get {Lener) a situation ; and you have a good one and neglect it. Do you not think of the future ? — Now allow me to speak also, (a mi turno .) — All you have just said seems reasonable ; but it is not my fault, if I have lost my reputation ; it is that of my wife : she has sold my finesi clothes, my rings, (anillos,) and my gold watch. I am full of (cargado) debts, and I do not know what to do. — I will not excuse your wife ; but I know that you have also contributed to your ruin, {la ruina.) Women are generally good when they are left so, {cuando se dejan ser tales.) 244. Dialogue. The Master. — If I were now to ask Qiacer) you such (algunas pr& guntas) questions as I did in the beginning of our lessons, viz. {poi ^emplo :) Have you the hat which my brother has ? am I hungry ? has he the tree of my brother’s garden ? &c. What would you answer ? The Pupils. — We are obliged {estar obligado) to confess that we found these questions at first rather {algo) ridiculous ; but full of con- fidence in your method, we answered as well as the small quantity of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were, in fact, {pero^) not long (to be not long, no tardar mucho) in finding out that these questions were calculated to ground us in the rules, and to exer- cise us in conversation, by the contradictory answers we were obliged to make. But now that we can almost keep up a conversation in tne beautiful language which you teach us, we should answer: It is im- possible that we should have the same hat which your brother lias, for two persons cannot have one and the same thing. To tlie second question we should answer, that it is impossible for us to know whether you are hungry or no*;. As to the last, we should say : that ihere is more than one tree in a garden ; and in asking us whether he 378 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. nas the tree of the garden, the phrase does not seem to us logicallj correct. _At all events we should be ungrateful (ingrato) if we allowed such an opportunity to escape, without expressing (expresar) our liveliest gratitude to you for the trouble you have taken. In ar- ranging (por e arreglo) those wise combinations, (combinacicn,) you have succeeded in grounding us almost imperceptibly {imperceptible'^ mente) in the rules, and exercising us in the conversation, of a lan- guage which, taught in any other way, presents to foreigners, and even to natives, almost insurmountable difficulties, {insuperables,) EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON.- To lack, {to be wanting.) | It lacks a quarter. It lacks a half. How much does it want ? It does not want much. It wants but a trifle It lacks but an inch of my being as tall as you. It lacked a great deal of my being as rich as you. The half. The third part. The fourth part. You think you have returned me all ; a great deal is wanting. Tie younger is not so good as the elder by far. In a foolish manner, at random. He talks at random like a ci*azy man. jssort to violence. A fact, is a fact. -Leccion Octogesima tercera. Faltar, Necesitarse. Le falta un cuarto, (un cuarteron ) Le falta una cuarta parte. Le falta una (la) mitad. I Cuaiito le falta? No le falta mucho. t Solo le falta un poquito, {una ba~ gatela.) Solo me falta una pulgada, para ser tan alto como V. t Por una pulgada no soy tan alto como V Faltaba mucho para que yo fuese tan rico como V. La mitad. ( La tercia (tercera) parte, (fern.) El ter do, (mas.) La cuarta parte. Un cuarto. V. piensa que me lo ha devuelto todo ; pero falta muchisimo. ' El menor no es con mucho tan bueno como el mayor. Mucho le falta al menor, para ser . tan bueno como el mayo^ t A trochemoche. \ A diestro y d siniesti'o t El habla d tontas y d locas corns un hombre sin juicio. Venir d las manos. Un hecho. Es un hecha EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. 379 EUe* Or else. O. De otra suerie. De otro mode De otra mancra. Si no. To make fun of. To contradict, to give one the he. Should he say so, I would give him tho lie His actions belie his words. To scratch C Burlarse de. Chancearse con. ^ Reirse de. Hacer burla. ( Hacer chacota de. De(?menlir *. Decirle d uno que miente. Dar uiia desmentida. Contradecir * Si el dijera eso, yo le desmentiria. Sus acciones contradicen (desmieii' ten) sus palabras. Arahar. Ras^uhar To escape. fell from the top of the tree to the bottom, but I did not hurt myself much. [ escaped with a scratch. The thief has been taken, but he will escape with a few months’ impris- onment. Escapar. Escaparse. t Quedar lihre. t Salir Uhre. Yo cai de la cima del drbol hasta el pie, pero no me lastime mucho. Escape con un arano, (rasguno.) El ladron fud tornado, pero saldra libre (escapard) con algunos meses de prisioii. By dint of. By dint of labor. By too much weeping. you will cry your eyes out. I obtained of him tJiat favor by dint of entreaty. Afuerza de t A fuerza de trabajo. t A fuerza de lagrimas, {de llorar.) t A fuerza de llorar, perderd V. los ojos. Se le secardn a V. los ojos. t Consegui de dl ese favor d fuerza de siiplicas. That excepted. 1 That fault excepted, he is a gci»d man. To vie with each otner t Excepto {salvOf menos) eso t Amen de^ (little used.) t Quitada esa falta, es uii buen hombre. t A competencia. A porfia, t A cual mas. A cual mejor. Hiose men are trying to rival each other t Esos hombres tiabajan d compe- tencia. Estan procurando excederse uno i otro. 580 ElJHTr-THIRD LESSON. Clean. Clean linen. The more as. The less as. I am the more discontented witli his conduct as he is under many ob- ligations to me. I am the less pleased with his con- duct, as I had more right to his friendship 1 wish that I wish that house was mine Limpio. Ropa limp'a, (b!anca; Tanto mas ciianto. Tan to mas cuanto mas Tanto menos cuanto. Tanto menos cuanto mentis flj mas. Yo estoy tanto mas descent ento d* su conducta, cuanto el me dobc muchas obligaciones. Yo estoy tanto menos satisfecho de su conducta, cuanto mas dcrocho tenia yo d su annstad. Yo quiero (deseo) que. Yo querria (quisiera) que esa casa fuese mia. Yo deseara (desearia) que esa casa fuese mia. To muse, to think. I thought a long time on that affair. Meditar, rejlexionar, pensar — {en.) Yo reflexione largo tiempo en este negocio. To be naked. To have the head uncovered. To have the feet uncovered. S Estar desnudo, (desnuda.) \ t Estar {andar) en cueros. C Tener la cabeza desnuda. < t Estar descuhierto. \ t Tener la cabeza al atre. f Tener los pies desnudos. J t Estar descalzo. 1 Estar {andar) descalzo de pie y t pierna. Ohs. A. When the verb haher is used, no preposition is required ; but mih the verbs estar and andar the prepositions de or con must be employed srhen the substaniives are expressed, as in the following examples : — To be barefooted. ' Tener los pies desnudos. t Estar {andar) descalzo. < Estar (andar) con los pids desnudos (descalzos.) ^ Estar (andar^ desnudo de pi6s. EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. 381 C Tener la cabeza desnuda, ^descubier To be baieheaded < ta.) i Estar (andar) con la cabeza al airo To ride barebacked j t Montar (andar) ^ caballo en pelo. Vo have likcy or to think to have. ( had like to have lost my money, f thought to have lost my life. tVo had like to have lost our fingers, tie was very near falling He \\ as within a hair’s oreadth of being killed. He had liked to have died. C Estar para. / Estar a pique de, {a punto de.) \ Faltar poco para, t Per poco. Estuve para perder mi dinero. Pense haber perdido la videu For poco perdimos los dedos. Estuvo d pique de caer. C For poco le matan. ^ t Estuvo en un tris que le mataran ( Falto casi nada para ser muerto. C Estuvo para morir, (or ^ punto de < muerte.) ( Pens6 morii. C A los (sus) talones. At, on, or upon your heels. < Al alcance, (or d, los alcances.) V En seguimiento. The enemy is at our heels. | El enemigo nos sigue los alcances. To strike, (speaking of lightning.) The lightning has struck. The lightning struck the ship. While my brother was on the open sea, a violent storm rose unex- pectedly ; the lightning struck the ship, which it set on fire, and the whole crew jumped into the sea to save themselves by swimming. lie was struck with fright, when he saw that the fire was gaining on nil sides. fie did not know what to do lie hesitated no longer. I have not heard of him yet An angel. A masterpiece. Masterpieces. Caer (estallar, dar, romper) sobre, or en. Ha caido un rayo. Un rayo cay 6 sobre (en) el barco. Mientreis mi hermano estaba en alta mar, se levantd de repente una tempestad, cay6 un rayo sobre el barco, le puso fuego, y toda la tripulacion se echb al mar, para salvarse d nauo, (nadando.) El qued6 amedrentado, cuando vio que el fuego se extendia por todas partes. .fil no sabia que hacer, (or que par tido tomar.) £l no vacil6 mucho tiempo. Todavia no he sabido de 6\, Un dngel. Una obra maestra. Una obra de prim era ;Iase. 1 Obras maestras S82 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. Ohs. B. Words compounded of prepositions and nouns, aio generally translated by single words. Example : — Four-o’clocks, (flowers.) | Maravillas His cr her physiognomy. Ills or her shape. The expression. The look. Contentment. Respect. Admiration. Grace, charm. Delightfully. Fascinating. Thin, (slender.) Uncommonly well. His or her look inspires respect and admiration. Su fisonomfa de dl, or de ella. Su talle, figura (or forma) de dl, ® de ella. La expresion. C El aspecto. El semblante. < El aire. El ademan. ( La cara. La mirada. La vistiu Contento. Coutenlamiento Gusto. Placer. Respeto. Respecto. Miramiento. Acatamiento. I Admiracion. Gracia. Gracias. Eiicanto Atractivo. Donaire I Deliciosamente. Hechiceramente. Encantadoramente. Delgado. Flaco. Descaniado Extraordinariamente bien. Su presencia iuspira respeto y ad miracion. EXERCISE. 245 . Will you be my guest, {comer conmigo : tomar la sopa conmigo , hacer penitencia conmigo ?) — I thank you ; a friend of mine has inviied me to dinner : he has ordered (hacer preparar) my favorite dish, (un plato favorito.) — What is it ? — It is a dish of milk, (laciicinio .) — As for me, I do not like milk-meat : there is nothing like (no hay nada como) a good piece of roast beef or veal. — What has become of youi younger brother ? — He has suffered shipwreck (naufragar) in going to America. — You must give me an account ')f that, (dar una relacicn.)-^ Very willingly, (de muy buena gana.) — Being on the open sea, a great storm arose. The lightning struck the ship and set it on fire. The crew jumped into the sea to save themselves by swimming. My brother knew not what to do, having never learned to swim. He reflected in vain ; he found no means to save his life. He was struck with fright when he saw that the fire was gaining on all sides. He hesitated no longer, and jumped into the sea. — Well, (pues lien,) whal has become of him ? — I do not know, having not heard of him yet.— KIGHTr-FOURTH LESSON. 383 But who told you all that ? — My nephew, who was there, and who saved hiirself. — As you are talking of your nephew, (d proposito de — ,) where is he at present ? — He is in Italy. — Is it long since you heard ot him ? — I have received a letter from him to-day. — What d<3es he write to you ? — He writes to me that he is going to marry a young woman who brings him {qiie le trae) a hundred thousand dollars. — Is she handsome ? — Handsome as an angel ; she is a master-piece of nature. Her physiognomy is mild and full of expression ; her eyes are the finest in the (del) world, and her mouth is charming, (y su hoca muy linda.) She is neither too tall nor too short ; her shape is slender ; all her actions are full of grace, and her manners are en- gaging. Her look inspires respect and admiration. She has also a great deal of wit ; she speaks several languages, dances uncommonly well, and sings delightfully. My nephew finds in her (lialla en ella) but one defect, (un defecto.) — And what is that defect ? — She is affected, (afectada.) — There is nothing perfect in the world. — How happy you are ! you are rich, you have a good wife pretty children, a fine house, and all you wish. — Not all, my friend. — What do you desire more ? — Contentment ; for you know that he only is hanov who is contented. EIGHT Y-FOURTH LESSON. — Leccion Octogesima cuartn To read again. To (v) again. Obs. A. When again signifies that the Spaniards use the verb volver d, the action of which is to be repeated, When will you read this book again ? I will read it again to-morrow. To unriddle. To disentangle. To find out. To disentangle the hai» To unriddle difficulties. I liave not been able to find out the aense of that phrase. A quarrel. I Volver d leer. I Volver d the action of the verb is to be repeated, in its different tenses ; and the verb, in the infinitive. I I Cuando volverd V d leer este libro ? I Yo le volvere d leer manana. C Desenredar. Desenmaranar. Explicar. f Adivinar Hallar. Desenmaranar el cabeJlo. Desenredar (explicar, aclarar) las dificultades. Y ) no he podido hallar (eniender) el sentido de esa frase. t Una desavenencia, (diferencia, rlSa quimera.) Uu pleito. Una contienda, (disputa, pendoncin.) 884 EIGUTY-FOURTH LESSON. To have differences (a quarrel) with some one. To take good care To shun. To beware I will take good care not to do it Mind you not to lend that man money. He takes good care not to answer the question which I asked him. To ask a question. If you take into your head to do that, I will punish you. t Estar de cuerno, {de hocico con alguno.) Teller un pleito (una contienda) con alguien. Cuidar de. Cuidarse de. Tener cuidado de. Guardarse de. Precaverse de. Recatarse de. Evitar. Yo me guardare bien de no hacerlo. Cuidese V. de no prestar dinero d esc hombre 6l tiene cuidado de no responder d la pregunta que yo le he hecho. Hacer una pregunta. Preguntar Si d V. se le pone en la cabeza hacer eso, yo le castigare. To become. To jit well. Obs. B. These verbs in this sense or plural. Does that become me ? That does not become you. ft does not become you to do that. That fits you wonderfully well. Her dress does not become her. It does not become you to reproach me with it. Sentar bien. Estar bien. Caer bien. Ir bien. Venir bien. are used only in the third person singula: I I Me sienta eso bien ? No le sienta d V. I No le cae bien d V. No le estd bien d V. hacer eso. Eso le va d V. (le sienta d V.) per- fectamente. Su tocado no le sentaba, (iba bien.) Estd bien en V. el afedrmelo ! (frd- nicamente.) To follow from it. It follows from it, that you should not do that. How is it that you have come so late? I do not know how it is. How is it that he had not his gun ? I do not know how it happened. Seguirse. Deducirse. h»acarse. De eso se sigue que V. no deberia hacerlo. I Porqud es que V. viene tan tardo ? Yo no se porqud. I Como sucedio que el no tuviern so escopeta ? Yo no se como sucedin To fast. To be fasting. To give notice to. To lot anybody kno w I Ayunar. I Estar en ayunas. J Avisar. Noticiar. luformar. ( Hacer saber d alguno, (alguna coiw. KIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. 385 To warn some one of something. Give notice to that man of his bro- ther’s return. « Precautelar. Precauciouar. Advertir de antemaiio. Informe (avise) V. d ese hombre dc la vuelta de su hermano, {que eu hermano ha vuelto.) To clear. To elucidate. To clear up. l^e weather is clearing up. To refresh. llefresh yourself, and return tc me immediately. To whiten. To bleach. ^’o blacken. To turn pale. To grow pale. To grow old. To grow young. 1 To blush. To redden. < Aclarar. Despejar. Poner cn claro I El tiempo se aclara. Reirescar. Refrescarse. Descansar. Reposar. Repose V., (refresquese,) y vuolva aqui (d verme) inmediatamento. Blanquear. Emblanquecer. Ennegrecer. Ponerse palido. Perder (mudar) el color. Envejecer. Envejecerse. Avejentarse. Aviejarse. Rejuvenecer. Remozar. Abochornarse. Correrse. Sonrosearse. Sonrojarse. t Tener verguenza, (rubor») To make merry. To make one’s self merry. He makes merry at my expense. To feign. To dissemble. To pretend. I feign, thou feignest, he feigns. He knows the art of dissembling. To procrastinate. To go slow about. I do not like to transact business with that man, for he always goes very slow about it ^ Alegrar d. Alegrarse de. ( Divertir d. Divertirse d, (con.) J Alegrarse. Divertirse. ( Ponerse (estar) alegre. 1 El se divierte d mi costa. ^ Fingir. Aparentar. \ Disimular. Encubrir. Yo finjo. Til finjes. 6l (V.) finje. 6l sabe (conoce) el arte de fingu*, (disimular.) { Diferir. Dilatar. \ Dejar de un dia para otro. t No me gusta tener negocics oon ese hombre, porque siempre Ics despacha con pies de plomo. A proof. I Una prueba. Tills is a proof. | Esta es una prueba. To strayy to get lost, to lose one^s s^lf, to los-i one*8 way. ir r Descaminarse. Descamarse. Extraviarse. Perderse. f Perder el camino. - 386 EIGHTY FOURTH LESSON. Through. riie cannon ball went throuffli the wall. ! 2 an him through the body ' Par, De medio a mtdh De parte d parte. De un lado d otro. De travel At traves. For medio. < Por en medio. Por enire, I La bala del canon pas6 de un lado I a otro de la mural la, {traspaso S Le atravesd el cuerpo con mi espada t Yo le eiwase mi espada en el cuerpn. EXERCISES. 246 . The Emperor Charles the Fifth (^Carlos Quinto) bei^ig me day cun a-hunting lost his way in the forest, and having come to a house entered it to refresh himself. There were in it four men, who pro* tended to sleep. One of them rose, and approaching the Emperoi told him he had dreamed he should take his watch, and took it. Then another rose and said he had dreamed that his surtout (sobretodo) fitted him wonderfully, and took it. The third took his purse. At last the fourth came up, and said he hoped he would not take it ill if he searched him, and in doing it perceived around the emperor’s neck a small gold chain to which a whistle was attached, which he wished to rob him of. But the emperor said : “ My good friend, before depriving me (privar d und) of this trinket, (alhaja,) I must teach you its vir- tue.” Saying this, he whistled. His attendants, who were seeking him, hastened to the house, and were thunderstruck {queddron pasma- dos) to behold his majesty in such a state. But the emperor seeing himself out of danger, {fuera de peligro,) said : “ These men (aqut ieneis unos hombres que) have dreamed all that they liked. 1 wish in my turn also to dream.” And after having mused a few seconds, he said : “ I have dreamed that you all four deserve to be hanged which was no sooner spoken than executed before the house. A certain king making one day his entrance into a town at two 3’clock in the afternoon, (de la larde,) the senate sent some deputies (un diputado) to compliment him. The one who was to speak Qiabia de hablar) began thus : “ Alexander the Great, the great Alexander,"' find stopped short, (se corto.) — The king, who v/as very hungry, (tenia hambre,) said : “ Ah ! my friend. Alexander the Great had dined, and I am still fasting, (estar en ayunasJ^) Having said this, he proceeded o (siguio su camino) the City Hall, or State House, (d la casa co^ nstorial,) where a magnificent dinner had been prepared for him. EIGHTY-FIFTU LESSEN. 887 247 . A good old man, being very ill, sent tor his wife, who was still verj f oung, and said to her : “ My dear, you see that my last hour is ap- proaching, and that I am compelled to leave you. If, therefore, you wish me to die in peace you must do me a favor. You are still young, %nd will, without doubt, marry again, (se volcerd d casar :) knowing this, I request of you not to wed (no se case con) M. Louis ; for I confesg tliat 1 have always been very jealous of him, and am so still. I shouldj therefore, die in despair (desesperado) if you did not promise me that.” The wife answered : “ My dear husband, (alma mia^ I entreat you, let not this hinder you from dying peaceably ; for I assure you that, if even I wished to wed him I could not do so, being already promised to another.” It was customary with Frederick the Great, whenever a new soldier appeared in his guards, to ask him three questions ; viz. : “ How old are you ? How long have you been in my service ? Are you satis- fied with your pay and treatment ?” It happened that a young soldier, born in France, who had served in his own country, desired to enlist in the Prussian service. His figure caused him to be immediately accepted ; but he was totally ignorant of the German dialect ; and h:s captain giving him notice that the king would question him in that tongue the first time he should see him, cautioned him at the same time to learn by heart the three answers that he was to make to the king. Accordingly he learned them by the next day ; and as soon as he appeared in the ranks Frederick came up to interrogate him : but he happened to begin upon him by the second question, and asked him, “ How long have you been in my service ?” “ Twenty-one years,’ answered the soldier. The king, struck with his youth, which plainly indicated that he had not borne a musket so long as that, said to him, much astonished, “ How old are you ?” “ One year, an’t please youi majesty, (con permiso de Vuestra Majestad.^') Frederick, more as- tonished still, cried, “ You or I must certainly be bereft of our senses.” The soldier, who took this for the third question, replied firmly, (ci?:! ienuedo^ “ Both, an’t please your majesty.” EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. — Leccion Octogesima quinta. To doublt Dollar. Pedir dohle, (el dohle) Duplicar, El diiplo. El doble. Dos veces mas. Otro taiito mas The double. B88 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. That merchant asks twice eis much as Le ought. iTou Must bargain with him; he will g'ivo it you for the half. You have twice your share. You hi/e three times your sliaie. Ese comerciante pide dos veces mas de lo que debe. Es menester que V. se ajusto con el ; porque 61 se lo dard d V. per la mitad. V. tiene dobie parte que le toca. V. tiene tres veces mas de lo qne le toca. To renew. To stun. Wild, giddy. Open, frank, real. I told him yes. I told him no. To squeeze. To lay up, to put hy. Put your money by. A.S soon as I have read my book, put it by. I do not care much about going the play to-night. Renovar *. Aturdir. Atolondrar. Aiontar AtroiTado. Alocado Desatinado. Atolondrado. Franco. iLgenuo Sincere Verdadero. Real. Yo le dije si, (que si ) Yo le dije no, (que no.', Apretar ^ Juntar. Cerrar. ( Apretar. Guardar. Guardo V. su dinero. Luego que yo hube leido mi libro le guarde, (le cerre, le puse d ub lado.) No me da cuidado ir, 6 no, a la como- dia esta noche. Saciar. Hartar. Llenar. Satisfacer. Yo he estado comiendo una hora, y no puedo saciar mi hambre. Estar satisfechOf {harto, saciado^ lleno.) Refrescarse, Refrigerarse, Apagar la sed Hace media hora que estoy bebiendo^ y no puedo apagar mi sed. Haber apagado la sed. Haberse refrescado. Tener sed. Estar sediento. Ansiar. Anhelar. Eba es un hombre sedi nto de sangr< he dmbas partes. For dmbos iados. For todos ladoa. 1 For todos Iados. For todas partea I to To satisfy one^s self with a thing. I have been eating an hour, and I cannot satisfy my hunger To he satisfied. To quench one^s thirst. [ have been drinking this half hour, but I cannot quench my thirst. To have one’s thirst quenched. Tq thirst for, to be thirsty, or dry tliat is a bloodthirsty fellow. [ On both sides, cii every side. On all sides. . EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 38a A.II 0 W lire, my lady, to introduce to you Mr. G., an old friend of our family. I am delighted to become acquainted with you. I shall do all in my power to deserve your good opinion. Lndies, allow me to introduce to you Mr. B., whose brother has rendered such eminent services to your cousin. VVe are very nappy to see you at our house. Sehora , permitame V. que le presente el Senor G., antiguo amigo de nuestra famiiia.^ Tengo mucho gusto en hacer el conocirniento de V. Yo hare cuanto este de mi parte pare merecer la buena opinion do V. Sehoras, permitanme VV. que lee presente el Seiior B., cnyo hei^ mano ha hecho tan importantee servicios al prime de VV. Nos consideramos muy felices en ver d V en nuestra casa. It is the prerogative of great men to conquer envy ; merit gives it birth, and merit destroys it. Es prerogativa de los grandes hom- bres conquistar la enviJia ; ei m6rito la hace nacer, y el mdiito la destroy e. EXERCISES. 248 . A man (cierto) had two sons, one of whom liked to sleep very late in the morning, (a pierna suella^) and the otlier was very industrious, {aplicado y trabajador^) and always rose very early. The latter having one day gone out very early, found a purse well filled with money. He ran to his brother to inform him (« contarle) of his good luck, (la buena fortuna^ and said to Iiim : “ See, Louis, what is got {ganarse) by rising early?” — “Faith, {cierto answered his brother, “if the person to whom it belongs had not risen earlier than I, (he) would not have lost it.” A lazy young fellow being asked, {preguntado,) what made him lie (vorque se estaba) in bed so long ? — “ I am busied, {estar ocupadoy^) says ne, “ in hearing counsel every morning. Industry (el trabajo) advises me to get up ; sloth {la pereza) to lie still ; and so they give me twenty reasons pro and con, {en pro y en contra.) It is my part {tenet obliga^ cion de) to hear what is said on both sides ; and by the time the cause is over {acabarse) dinner is ready.” It was a beautiful turn given by a great lady, who, being {se cueTtta un hermoso rasgo — ) asked where her husband was, when he lay con* tealed {estar escondido) for having been deeply concerned in a con- spiracy, (a causa de haber tornado gran parte en una conspiracUm^ resolutely {resueltamente) answered, she had hid him. This confession {esla confesi(m) drew her before the king, who told her, nothing but 390 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. her discovering where her lord was concealed could save her from the torture, (que si no descubria donde se hallaba su senor marido, ncda vodria librarla de la tortura.) “ And will that do, (bastar ?”) said the lady. “Yes,” says the king, “I will give you my word for it.” “ Then,” says she, “ I have hid liim in my heart, where you will find him.” Wliich surprising answer (esta admirable repuesta) charmed her enemies. 249 . Cornelia, the illustrious (^ilustre) mother of the Gracchi, {de los Gracos,) after the death of her husband, who left her with twelve children, applied herself to (dedicarse «) the care of her family, with a ! wisdom {una discrecion) and prudence that acquired for (adquirir*) her universal esteem, (estimacion universal.) Only three out of the twelve lived to years of maturity, {edad madura ;) one daughter, Sem- pronia, whom she married to the second Scipio Africanus ; and two sons, Tiberius and Caius, whom she brought up (crio) with so much care, that, though they were generally acknowledged (confesar generalmente) to have been born with the most happy dispositions, {la disposicion^) it was judged that they were still more indebted {deber) to education than nature. The answer she gave {dar*) a Campanian lady (una dama de Campania) concerning them (con respecto d ellos) is very famous, (famoso — sa,) and includes in h (contener*) great instruction for ladies and mothers. That lady, who was very rich, and fond of pomp and show, (apasionado d la pompa y d la ostentacion,) having displayed (mostrar) her diamonds, (el diamante^ pearls, (la perla^) and richest jewels, ; earnestly desired (suplicar con ahinco) Cornelia to let her see her i jewels also. Cornelia dexterously (diestramenle) turned the conversa- ' tion to another subject to wait the return of her sons, who were gone to the public schools. When they returned, and entered their mother’s apartment, she said to the Campanian lady, pointing to them, (mostrar :) “ These are my jewels, and the only ornaments (adornos) I prize, (apreciar.^') And such ornaments, (unos ornamentos,) which are the i strength (la fuerza) and support (el sosten) of society, add a brightc! lustre (mayor lustre) to the fair (la hermosura) than all the jewels of tlie East, (del Oriente.) EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. 391 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON . — Leccion Octogesima sexUu ' SOME IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. lu To To Tc To To To meet with one’s match. To go to bed betimes. To catch at a fly. To stop at a trifle ; or to bo afflicted with a light cause. To dismay one’s spirit in the perform- ance, or pursuit of any thing. To inure, or accustom one’s self to execute or perform any thing. To be siiot as a criminal. To bury, or silence an affair. To give up one’s command. To command imperiously. To treat a person contemptuously. To be wet to the skin. To defend the ground inch by inch. To obtain a thing without pain or labor. To sustain one’s opinion steadfastly. To be one’s principal support and aid. To bribe. To dive into other people’s affairs. To meddle witn things in which one has no concern. To be loaded with honorable titles, riie principal town of a district. To get into favor, {to please.) To hit upon a thing, {to find it out.) To have an unexpected change for the better. To go on better and better. To turn one out of doors. Tener gracia para todo. Dormir profundamente. Dormir como una piedra. Dormir d pierna suelta. Estar para perderse, (or arruinai ac. Echar tierra en los ojos. Deslumbrar. Echar rayos y centellas. Echar pestes. Hallar la horma de su zapato. Acostarse con las gallinas, Agarrarse {asirse) de un pelo, Ahogarse en poca agua. Quehrar {cortar) las alas. - Hacerse d las armas. Pasar por las armas. Echar tierra d alguna cosa. Arrirnar el baston, (or el mando.) Mandar d baqueta^ (or d la baqueta.) Tratar d baqueta, (or d la baqueta.) Estar mojado hasta los huesos. Defender el terreno palmo d palmo. Conseguir una cosa d pie quedo, {on enjuto.) Sostener su opinion d pie firmer Ser sus pies y sus manos. Untar las mams. C Meterse en vidas agenas. ^ Meterse en lo que {d uno) m le va f ni le viene. Tener muchas campanulas. Cabeza de Partido. Caer en gracia. Caer en ello. Caersele {d uno) la sopa en la mteU Poner d uno en la (or echarU d la] calle do every thing gracefully. sleep soundly. sleep void of all cares, bo on the brink of ruin. cast a mist before one’s eyes, fret and fume. 392 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSOH. To lose one’s livelihood. To be crest-fallen or dispirited. To defend a thing with ail one’s might or force. Every one is master to dispose of his own property. To go abroad without a cloak or surtout. To waste one’s time in fruitless pur- suits. To go stark naked. To be roving and wandering about. To be in cross purposes : to deal in tfs and ands. To quarrel, to scuffle, to box. To fight. To go groping along, or in the dark. To walk on all-fours. To conform to the times. To go a begging To be at hide and seek. To go skulking. To be carried from post to pillar. To go with a design to deceive some- body. To lead an abandoned life. To live very economically. By her gait one would say it is Louisa. To pull down the courage of any person. To humble any one. To bow down the head : to obey without objection or reply. To be ashamed. Ti stop one’s mouth. 7 J shut one’s mouth. To offer a thing for mere ceremony’s sake. To keep a profound silence. To be the talk of the town. Not to dare to say no. To talk well or ill of others. To blush deeply with shame Quedar en la calle. Andar (or ir) de capa ciida. Defender una cosa d capa y eapada Cada uno puede hacer de su cape un sayo. Andar en cuerpo, Andar d caza de gangas, Andar en carnes, (or en cueros., Andar de Ceca en Meca, I Andar en dimes y dirctes. ( Andar en dares y tomares, Andar d irornpis, (or d palos.) Andar a degas, (or d tientas.) Andar d galas. Andar con el tiempo, (or al uao.) Andar d la sopa. Andar d somhra de tejado. Andar de H erodes d Pilatos. Andar con segundas, (or con mala intenciones.) Andar en malos pasos. Andar pie con hola. En el andar se parece d Luisa Bajar los hrios d alguno. Bajar los Jiumos d alguno. Bajar la cabeza, (or las orejas.) Bajar los ojos. Cerrar (or tapar) d uno la hoca. Coserse la boca. Ofrecer algo con la boca chica. No decir esta hoca es mia, Andar de boca en boca. No tener boca para decir no (or negar.) Tener buena (or mala) hoca. Caersele d uno la cara dr cer guenza. EIGHTY -SIXTH LESSON. 393 To chido or reprove one severely. Mum, mum, not a word. To obtain one’s ends by crafty si- lence. To act out of reason. In one’s way, going along. To come off victorious in an engage- ment or dispute. To be in high office : to be in an ex- alted station. That is another kind of speech. To be stranger to fear. Not to know one’s duty or business. Employment of much profit, and lit- tle trouble Not to be able to bring one to reason. At all events. To be, or not to be, to the point. There is nothing more than what you see. Without examination. To cure one excess with another. To hit the mark. To chatter or prattle a good deal. To make a person blush To fall into an error. To give cause for laughing. To make one cry. To clothe one. To feed one. To give trouble : to grieve. To trust. To encourage an undertaking. To publish, to print, to bring to light. To give a cause to — To furnish materials. To shut the door upon one. To give gratis or for nothing. To put off with words and excuses. To stretch. To consent. To touch one to the quick. To share with : also^ to inform, r© give security : to find bail. Caleniarle a alguno las oi ejaa. Panto en hoca. Mdtalas callando. Ir fuera de camino. De camino. Quedar el campo par uno. Estar en el candelero Ese es otro cantar. No conocer la cara al miedo. No saber en donde se tiene la careu Came sin hueso. No poder hacer carrera con algunc En todo caso. Ser (or no ser) del caso. No hay ?nas cera que la que ardc. A ojos c err ados. Sacar un clavo con otro clavo. Dar en el clavo. Hablar por los codos. Sacarle los colores al rostro, (i una persona.) Dar de ojos. Dor que reir. Dar que llorar. Dar de vestir. Dar de comer. Dar que sentir. Dar al fiado, (or d cridito.) Dar calor {dnimo or alma) a urte cmpresa. Dar d la cstampa. Dar dim Dar asunto para — Dar barro d la mano. Dar con la puerta en los ojvs. Dar dadoj (or de balde.) Dar con la entretenida. Dar de si. Dar el si. Dar en lo vivo. Dar en las mataduras, Dar parted Dar Jianza. Dar fiador. 394 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSOR? . To wage war ; to torment, to vex. To wish a good day. To congratulate on one’s birthday. To give earnest; that is, money in token of a bargain or contract. To nod, calling or informing. To despair. To surrender. I give it up. To shake hands. To manage one’s affairs in an able manner. To set sail. It gives me no concern. To leave a word, or orders. To leave in writing. To excel, to surpass. To frustrate, to baffle. To delay, to procrastinate. To omit something necessary to the subject. To get the start of any person. To take the lead. Make yourself easy. I understand what you tell me. To be security ; to answer for N. To be ready to set out. To be on the alert. To be in good humor : to be ir bad spirits. To stand a sentry. To be in haste, in a hurry. To interpose, to meaiaie. To be merr 5 \ To have a sound unoersianding. To be idle. To bo very siubborn. To be in difticuities. To bo careful of every thing To be at hand. To be kept in constraint. To DO ready to fall To be at the point of death. Dar que Tiacer Dar gturi^i Dar los buenos diaa. Darle d uno los dias. Dar senal Dar seiialf (or la seiial.) Darse al diantre. Darse por vencido. - Me doy por vencido. Darse las manos. Darse mafia. Darse d la vela. No se me da nada^ Dejar dicho, {mandadoy or sus 6r denes.) Dejar cscrito. Dejar atras. Dejar fresco d aiguno. Dejar para rnanana. Dejarse alguna cosa en el tintero Cojer la delantera. To mar la (or ir en la) delantera. Descuide V No le de d V. cuidado Estoy en lo que V, me dice. E star por Fulano. Estar para (or por) salir. Estar cleria. Estar de buen humor, (or de ma humor.) Estar de faccion, (or de centinela.) Estar de priesa. Estar de por medio. Estar de gorja, {alegre, or dc cha cuta.) Estar en su juicio. Estar mano sobre mono Estarse en sus trecc. Estar apurado. Estar en todo, Estar d la mano. Estar d raya. Estarse cayendo. Estarse muriendo EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. 895 To be in want o! money. In behalf of his sister. To b© merry : to be in good humor To caress, to wheedle. To do, or serve an ill turn. To glory, or boast in one’s wicked- ness To be giddy-brained. To indicate one’s sentiments by the looks. To talk without reflection. To talk on an endless subject. To oblige to come, to cause, or ask to be sent. It is cold. It was very cold. To act as a notary. To counterfeit an idiot. To endeavor to arrive. To make any one lose his temper. To pay attention to. To pluck up a heart. To raise soldiers. To make one’s fortune. To be well matched. To reckon without the host. To do wonders. To act a part- To cut or make a figure To take a family dinner with one. To carve, (a dish for a person.) To affect doing some business. To inure one’s self to labor. To intend, to mean. To be disposed to do every thing. To kil' two birds with one stone. To ketip one’s bed, to be ill. To play one’s frolics. To procure to one the means of be- coming rich. To feign not to see. To affect to be deaf. To endeavor to walk after a long ill- ness, (or when first ’earning to walk ) Faltarle d uno el diner o. A favor de su hermana. Estar de fiesta. Estar para fiesl 'js Hacer fiestas. Hacer un fiaco servicio. Hacer del samhenito gala. Terter los cascos d la ginela. Hablar con los ojos. Hahlar de memoria. Hablar de la mai Hacer venir. Hace frio. Hacia fiizo) mucho fric Hacer de escribano. Hacerse el boboy {el tonto.) Hacer por llegar. Hacer d uno perder los estrihoB. Hacer caso de. Hacer de tripas corazon. Hacer gente. Hacer hombre d alguno. Hacer juego. Hacer la cuenta sin la huespedi. Hacer milagros. Hacer papel. Hacer penitencia con alguno Hacer plato. Hacer que hacemos. Hacerse al trabajo. Hacer intencion. Hacer d pluma y d pelo. Hacer de un camino {una via) iis mandados. Hacer cama. Hacer de las suyas. Hacerle d uno la olla gorda. Hacer la vista corta. Hacer orejas de mer cadet., Hacer pinitos. 396 EJGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. To excel, to surpass. To take care of a thing. To feign to oe ignorant, innocent. To be too easy and indulgent to others. To praise one exceedingly. To fail down flat, to dash to pieces. I lay a hundred dollars that it is so. To have no concern in a thing. To go on softly. Walk carefully. To go off, to go out, to evaporate, to ooze. To become moderate, to restrain one’s self. Who is there ? Go to, (frequently an expression of contempt.) To reprimand severely. Checkmate. To discover any one’s designs. Very far, at a great distance. To get over a thing well, or ill. To be on good or bad terms. To rain hard, to rain buckets full To go in enmity. To be one’s chief support, or assist- ance. To be familiar alone, or in company. To wish to enjoy the fruit of anoth- er’s labor, without having con- tributed to it. lb be born to wretchedness. To be born to good luck. To affect business. lb be a man of strict integrity and honor. To have a large family to support. To have an absolute power over any thing. To act without cause or motive, without rhyme or reason. To put to the sword. To become surety. Hacer ray a, Hacerse cargo de 'ilguna cosa Hacer se chiquito, (inocente.) Hacerse de miel, * Hacerse lenguas de aJguno. Hacerse tortilla ^ {atiicos.) Van cien pesos que es eierto esa No ir nada en una cosa. Ir con tiento. Vaya V. con tiente Irse, El gas se ha ido. Irse d la mano, I Quien va 1 i Quien va alia ? Vaya V. {vete, idos) d pasear Dar unjahon. Jaque y mate, Conocer eljuego. ic A legua. A la legua. < De muchas leguas. De cien leguas f A lo lejos. De lejos. Desde Idjos. Librarse bien, imal.) Salir bien Salir mal, Llevarse bien, {mat.) Llover d cdntaroa. An dar d (de) malas. Ser sus pies y sus manos Estar mano d mano. Vonir con sus manos lavadas. Naccr de caheza, Nacer de pies. Fingir negocios. Ser hombre de obligaciones. * Estar cargado de ohligacionca Tener el palo y el mando. Ohrar sin que m para qut. Pasar d cuchillo. Quedar par alguno EIGHT! -SIXTH LESSON. 39*3 To take any things in the worst souse. To make futile, or silly allegations. To endeavor to ruin, or destroy a person or thing. To be rich, (colloquial.) To name, or cite unnecessarily any person or thing, (colIoquiaL) Not to know what one is about. To happen, or occur what it may. For ever and ever. He is a worthless fellow To have equal numbers. To make essays or trials ; to grope or to feel where one cannot see. To understand thoroughly. To bribe with money. To be hand and glove. Better late than never. To boast of any thing. To find one in a favorable disposi- tion. Et cetera, (colloquial,) used after several epithets. Mr. N. N., et cetera- To bear up under the frowns of for- tune. Not to come up to or near one in any line. To be haughty with good fortune. 0/js. It may also be remarked, . many proverbs, and proverbial forms are some of those most in use. Death rather than dishonor. Provide in good time for a bad one. \ thing well begun is half finished. A.rms and literature render families illustrious. There is a time for every thing. He who has faults of his own, should not reflect upon another for having the same. Pieeents remove difficulties. Tomar por doude qutma. Dar razones de pie de banco. Tirar corno d real de entmigo Tener cuhieito el rinon. Sacar d bailar. No saber lo que se pesca. Saiga lo que saliere. Por los siglos de los siglos. El es un tal por cual. Estar tanios d tantos. Andar tentando. Estar d lo ultimo. Untar las manos con unguento de Mejico. Ser una y came. Mas vale iarde que nunca. Hacer vanidad. Cojer {hallar) d alguno de vena. Don Fulano de Tal y otras yerbc* Estar al yunque No llegar d los zancdjos. Subirse cn zancos. that there are in Spanish a gre? f expression, of which the following Comer arena dates que hacer vileza Agosto, y vendimia, no es cada dia Barba bien remojada^ medio rapada, Alrnete y bonete hacen cosas de co« pete. Cada cosa en su tiempOf y nabos eji adviento. Cdllate y callemos, que sendas not debemos. Dddivas quehrantan pcnas 898 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. Tell me what company you keep, and I will tell you who you are. Be cautious before you pay, or re- ceive payment. Trust in God, for your own merit avails but little. He who undertakes many things at once, seldom succeeds in any. A flatterer’s talk is always vain and unprofitable. You must not advise one to go to war, or to marry. Rude play is used only by low-bred people. He labors, although uselessly, who works without attention. To affect great diligence, and neglect one’s duty. God helps him who helps himself. Fools and obstinate people make lawyers rich. Neither look into another’s letter, nor put your hand into another man’s chest. A good paymaster needs no pawn. We must catch the manners of the times. Evil communication corrupts man- ners. Curse on accounts with relations. ^'Iake youi affairs public, and every one will judge of them according to his own fancy. You are v/oilh as much as you pos- sess. A wolf in a lamb’s skin. * Wind and good luck are seldom last ing. An old uninstructed person will not loam any thing. Dime con quien andas, direte quiets eres. Escribe antes que deSf y lecibe antes que escribas, Fortuna te de Dios, hijo, que cl saber poco te basta. Galgo que muchas liebres leoantSt ninguna mata, Habla de lisonjero siempre es y sin provecho. Jr d la guerra, ni casar, no se ha de aconsejar, Juego de manos es de villanos. Lahrar y hacer albardas todo ea dar puntadas. Las Haves en la cinta, y el goto en la cocina. A quien madruga Dios le ayuda. Necios, y porjiados hacen ricos a lot letrados. Ni ojo en la carta, ni mono en el area Al buen pagador no le duelen pren- das. Cual el tiempo, tal el tiento. Quien con lohos anda d aullar si ensena. Reniega de cuentas con deudos y deudas. Saca lo tuyo al mercado, y unoi dir an que es negro, y otros que e* blareco Tanto vales, cuanto tienes Unas de gato, y hdbito de bra to Viento y ventura poco dura. Ya estd duro el alcacer p^n pofiae. APPENDIX THE ELEMENTS OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE: BETMl A LiRIEF, BUT COMPREHENSIVE RECAPITULATION OF THE RILES ESTABLISHED IN THIS METHOD, AND OF ALL THE VERBS. BOTH REGULAR AND IRREGULAR, SO AS TO RENDER THEIR USE EASV AND FAMILIAR TO THE MOST ORDINARY CAPACITY PARTICULARLY DESIGNED FOR YOUNG SCHOLARS, AND PERSONS WHO ARE THEIR OWN INSTRUCTORS. BY MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA, PTlurESSOR OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN COLUMBIA COLLEGE, CITY OF NEW YORK NEW YORK: D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, 1, 3, AND 6 BOND STREET. 1 8 8 7 . ADVERTISEMENT. As it is supposed that the Student is conversant with the English Grammar, the technical words belonging to it are made use of in the following Appendix, without explaining them; because they are the same in Spanish. Should the Learner be unacquainted with the Grammar of his mothei tongue, he is advised to make himself first acquainted with it. in order the better to profit by this Appendix. iNbw York, Februery , 1848 . APPENDIX ORTHOGRAPHY SPANISH ALPHABET. The letters made use of in the Spanish language are twenty -seven ' number, as follows ; — ‘ A a a\ like a in alarm. B b hay^ h in babery. C c thay, ill lisped, as in theft. Ch ch Icliay, ch in chess. D d day, d in dedicate, fed. E e a or ay, e in egg. F f f in elfect. G g • hay, h (breathing forcibly the h) in hay, he, ham. H h atchay. h silent, as in lieir, honor. 1 i ee. i in idiotism. J j hotdh. h (more strongly aspi- rated than g) in home. L 1 ai^-lay. 1 in element, labial I.l 11 ai-lyay. ll in brilliant. M m aH-may, - m in amen. N n aV-nay, n in energy, no. N h ai'-nyay. n (somewnat nasal) in poniard, onion. 0 0 oh^ 0 in odorous. P P V in paper, plan. Q q coo, y in piquet, quint. Pw r er-ay. r 1 soft, in erect. R r er-ray. r or rr (very harsh) in rack, horror. S s essay. ss in senseless. T t lay. t in tent. U u oo. u in lull. ^ For the respective sounds of the letters in the English words, explaiia- rory of the sounds they are intended to represent, the student must consuP Walkcr^s English Pronouncing DictionarVi from which they are copied. i02 APPENDIX. V V X X V y V y Z z vay^ like v in ai'-kiss, x (cs]' in ee vowel, or ) > V in ee griegay ^ ^ ee consonant, softer than g or j in thaV-dak^ th lisped, in velvet. maxim. liberty. gentry, jet. thermometer The vowels are a, e, ?*, o, w, and y when it stands by itself, or at the end af a word, or of a syllable immediately followed by a consonant. Thesa letters must be sounded as they are in the following English words, which must be regarded as a Standard : — A M E N I T Y. — o H ! F DLL. 1 2 3 3 4 5 a e i y 0 u DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS. "ai, au. ay. oe, oi, oy. 13 15 13 42 43 43 ea, ei, eo, eu, ey. ua, ue. ui, uo. uy. 21 23 24 25 23 51 52 53 64 53 ia. ie. io, iu. iai, iei, uai, uei, uey. t 31 32 34 35 313 323 513 523 523 EXAMPLES. Dabais, pausa, hay ; Hnea, veis, virgineo, deuda, ley ; gracia, cielo, precio, ciudad; h^roe, sois, voy; fragua, dueno, ruido, drduo, muy ; apreciaist yacieis, santiguais, averigiieis, buey. In the following combinations the vowels are pronounced separately, forming two distinct sounds. aa, ae, ao, ee, ii, oa, oo. 11 12 14 22 33 41 44 EXAMPLES. Contraamura, caemos, aorta, paseen, friisimo, coailar, loor THE VOWELS a, e, o, u, y. a, e, i, 6, u. Pronounced ah, ay, ee, oh, oo, ee, ah, ay, ee, oh, oo. Pronounce them quickly. Pronounce them slow y SYLLABLES. Qh9 A. Pronounce the vowels of the following table, as directed above Dut be particuleir to sound the u as oo in coo, or u in full. Every lattei must be fully pronounced, h excepted. APPENDIX. 403 TABLE I. ab ob lb ob ub ar er ir cr 01 ac ec ic oc uc as es is os ua ad ed id od ^ ud at et it ot ut t ag eg ig eg «g ab eh ih oh uh ^ ax ex ix ox ox al el il ol ul ( acs ecs ics ocs acs am ein im oin um ail en in on un \ az ez iz oz uz ap ep ip op up X ath} eth ith oth uth Obs. h To make it easier for a young scholar to learn at sight the pro- nunciation of every letter, the sound of it is i epresented in the following table by an English syllable, in italics, under it. H, under j or g, must be trongly aspirated ; th, under c or z, lisped as in thin. truth ; and r harshly ronounced TABLE II. ) ba be bi bo bu J ma me mi mo mu \ hah hay hee boh boo ( mah may mee nioh moo ^ ca qne' qui CO CU K na lie iii no nu ^ kah kay kee koh koo X nah nay nee noh noo S cua cue cui cuo \ na ne fii no nu ^ kwah kway kwee kwo ( nyah nye-ay nyee nyoh nyoo ) cha che chi cho chu S pa pe pi po pu ( tchah tchay tehee tchoh tchoo ( pah pay pee poh poo S da de di do du S qua qiie qiii quo \ dah day dee doh doo X kwah kway kwee kwoh Wa fe fi fo hi ^ ra re ri TO ru Xfah fay fee foh foo X rah ray ree roh TOO \ ga gue gui ge gu K sa se si so su X gah g^y gee goh goo ( ssah ssay ssee ssoh ) gua giie gui guo jta te ti to tu X gwah gway gwee gv)oh X tah tay tee toh too K ha he h‘ hoh hu ^ va ve vi VO vu / ah ay ee oh Ort X vah vay vee voh voc J ja je ji jo jo J xa xe xi xo XU ( hah hay hee hoh hoo X esah esay csce csoh zsoo \ ge gi S ya* ye yi yo yu hay hee (jah jay jee joh joo Ua le li lo lu K za ze zi zo zu X lah lay lee loh loo ^ thah thay thee thoh tkoi. \ Ua lie Hi l!o llu s ce ci ( lyah lyc-ay lyee t,yoh lyoo I thay^ thee * Th, lisped ^ in pathi truikt theft ^ thin. 404 APPENDIX. Oba. C. The vowels are never silent, except u in the syllables gucy gui que, quif the sound of which corresponds to that heaid in the English words getf gcescy etiquette, quint. When the u in^these syllables is to b© scunded tt is marked with a dia3resis ; thus, arguir, aqueducto. But, in conformity with the present use, the words in which the u is pronounced after q are written with c; thus, cuatro, acueducto. Obs, D. The consonants that are pronounced differently from the Eng- lish are the following : — C before a, o, u, I, r, and when it is at the end of a syllable, sounds like k in English ; as canal, colico, cur a, clamor, credito, pacto, C before t, or 2 , sounds lisped, like th in the English words theft, thin. Ch sounds like the same letters in the English words chap, chess, chin, chop, choose, much. When ch is followed by a vowel marked with a circumflex ac cent, ?t must be pronounced as k ; as, Chdribdis. But all the words derived from the Greek having ch, are at present written in Spanish with c before a, o, u, r, and with qu before e or i ; as, arcdngel, cristiano, cco, monarquia. D must be pronouiiced as the same letter in English. In some parts of Spain it is pronounced as th in father ; and in others, where it occurs at the end of words, as th, or as t, or is even silent ; thus, ciudad, ciudath, ciiidat, ciudd. This pronunciation is considered provincial, and not Castilian G before a, o, u, I, r, sounds as in English ; as, galan, gohierno, gusto, gloria, gracia. Before e or i, it sounds like the English h aspirated ; as, genio, (hen'-e-o,) gitano, (he-tan-oh.) H is always mute, or silent, except at the beginning of words followed by ue, in which case it has a very soft and slightly nasal sound, as in huesc, 'bone.) The vulgar pronounce such words as if written with g, J has a guttural sound, harsher, however, than the aspirated h in Eng- lish. Before e or i it sounds as the g does in Spanish before the same letters. LL is sounded by placing the tip of the tongue against the lower teeth, ind turning the thick part of it towards the roof of the mouth while emit- ting the breath with rapidity. It may be heard in the English word mii- lion ; but the ll must be pronounced more .quickly and strongly than in that. LL is consid^^'ed in Spanish a single letter with a double character, consequently it cannot be divided ; thus, ca-llar. N has a strong nasal sound, somewha^ like n in poniard. The gn in French gives the exact sound. Q is always followed by u, and is pronounced like k. In conformity with ihe modern orthography, the syllables in which u is sounded before a, e, o are written with c instead of q ; thus, cuando, cuestion ^ R, at the beginning of a word, after n, I, s, and in compound words the primitive of which begin with r, has a harsh and rough sound ; as. rata enriquecei , malrotar, cariredondo. When ab and ob are not prepositioca as in abrogar, obi epcion, the r becomes liquid ; as in abrojo, obrero. APPENDIX. 405 R, in the middle of a wore', or between two vowels, has a very smooth louiid ; as in morosidad, meriio The harsh and rou^h sound of r between two vowels, in Ihe middle of simple words, is always expressed by double rr; thus, barraca, correcto, horror. Common people frequently clip the r; saying paa instead oi para. N. B Some Spaniards make in manuscript the letter r thus, x ; as, fuexdds paxa amaxxaxle, (cuerdas para amarrarle,) cords to tie it. Tho tebolai will do well to take notice of, but not to follow this old fashion. If Liie English r be not well formed, it will be mistaken for i or z. S has always a harsh, hissing sound, like ss in English ; as in dempost* mmar» (to dispossess.) There is not a word in Spanish beginning with a followed by a consonant. S' is not written double, except when the pro- noun se comes after the first person plural of a verb; as, dimoiselef (wo gave it to him.) T must be pronounced as in the words tarti ten^ tirii tone. It never un- iergoes the variations it does in English, in creature, nation, &c. ; conse- quently creatura, patio, tia, &bc., must be pronounced cray-ah-toor' ~ah, pah' -tee-oh, tce-ah, &c. T is never written double N. B. As the English capital in manuscript, has in Spanish a different name and power, the learner is advised always to use this Q/ Observe, also, that this C^is called by the Spaniards T, not F. U always sounds as it does in English in the words full, pull. V must be pronounced as in English. It is frequently used in man?i- script instead of the capital U; thus, for Vn dia. X sounds like cs or ks in English ; as, experiencia. When it is me last letter of a word it has a guttural sound, like that of the Spanish y, as in careax, (quiver ;) but such words are no longer written with x, but v/ith j ; thus, reloj, (watch,) formerly relax. Y, when alone, or after a vowel, and followed by a consonant, or at the end of a wore, is a vowel, and sounds like ee in English ; as, el y ella, (he and she,) convoy. Y, before a vowel in the same syllable, or between two vowels, is a consonant, and sounds like the English j, though somewhat softer Some persons write i in estoy, soy, voy, y, muy, instead of y. Thus — estoi, soi, voi, i, mui. In Spanish manuscript capital Y is to be used instead of capital I ; thus — ^ue e/ cozone/ ^^nacco cfe con u/n ^cUa^n t/o/ These nouns, in printing, would be Isidro, Isla, Ignacio, Izquierdo, Iniii Jifante. 406 APPENDIX. 2 must be pronounced as th in the English words thanks theft, tha% thorn, path, tenth, truths N. B. Particular care must be taken to pronounce fully ana distinctly the letters c, a, r, and 5 , at the end of the words. , REMARKS ON THE PRONUNCIATION. Every well-educated person in old Spain, as well as in its former and ac- nial possessions in America, speaks and writes correctly the Spanish o! Castilian language ; but as the Spanish Peninsula consists of several p:ov- inces, that once were states and kingdoms independent from each other, and (Biscay excepted) were settled and governed by various nations, there are to be observed, in the mass of the people of each of its present divisions, certain peculiarities, propensities, and even animosities, that make the in- habitants of each division appear almost a different people. Some of them have had a peculiar idiom ; hence it is that the Lengua Castellana is not spoken in all its purity by every person, except in both Castiles, and par- ‘.icularly in the districts of Burgos, Salamanca, Toledo, &c. The most frequent faults to be observed, and which the scholar iS warnea to avoid, are the following : — B instead of V ; as, el bihc. in lieu of el vice, he lives. V (( B; (( el vevio, <( el bebio, he drank s « C; (( serernonia, (( ceremonia, ceremony c u s ; « selehro, (( celebro, the brain. s u z ; (( casa. n caza. hunting. R u L; (( craro, (( claro, clear. Y « LL; (( cavayo, (( caballo. a horse. LL Y; (( polio, it poyo. a bench. N (( M; ti onbro, (t hombro, a shoulder H is used in words that have it not, and is omitted in others that have it : as, handan instead of andan, (they walk ;) el iso for el hizo, (he made ;) olio for hoyo, (a hole.) J is sometimes used instead of h; as, el se juio for el se huyo, (he ran away.) In the terminations ado and ido they generally suppress the d, both in writing and pronouncing, and say, un hestio colordo for un vcstido Colorado, (a red dress.) The first e, in the verbs of the first conjugation, that double that letter, as pasear, (to walk,) is sounded, an6 even written i ; thus, yo me pasie ioa la tarde instead of yo me pasee toda la tarde, (I walked all the afternoon ;) diendo for yendo, (going,) &c. Vallejo, Palomares, and other Spanish authors, may be consulted on the Bubject. DOUBLE LETTERS. In simple words, e, i, c, r, are the only letters that may be written double. E is double in the verbs of the first conjugation, when it is the last of Iheir radical letters, and the termination begins v-ith e; as, pasear, (\x APPENDIX. 407 valk.) The radical letters are pase. The termination of the first person lingular of the preterit Is e — pasee, (I did walk.) I is double in the superlative degree of the monosyllables ending in io ; ftSj friot (cold ;) friisimo, (very cold.) C is double only before e or z, and is pronounced with both syllables ; as, acceder, (to accede ;) accidente, (accident.) Remark. — Almost all words ending in English in ction, and their deriva- tives, change the t into c, and become Spanish ; as, diction, (diccion dictionary, (diccionario.) R is written double in the middle of words, between two vowels, to point out its harsh sound ; as, carro, (a cart ;) cm ro, (I run,) &cc., to distin- guish them from caro, (dear ;) coro, (choir,) &c. (See R.) In compound words all the vowels, and also n and s, are written double, whenever any of them are the last of the component and the first of the word to be compounded ; as, contraabertura, (a counter-opening ;) preemi^ nente, (pre-eminent ;) amandoos, (ye loving each other ;) dannos, (they give us ;) ddmosselos, (we give them to him.) DIVISION OF SYI.LARLES. Vowels forming a diphthong or triphthong must not be separated; a», gra-cio-so, pre-ciaia, and not gra-ci-os-o, pre-ci-ais. A single consonant between two vowels must be joined to the vowei after it ; except x, that must be left with the preceding ; as, hue-no, jlo-res, me-lo-co-to-ne-ro, ex-d-men. LL, being considered a single letter, follows the same rule, which is also the case with ch ; as, ca-ha-Ue-ro, mu-cha-cho. Two consonants between two vowels are divided by placing one to each syllable ; as, car-ga^men-to, en-ter-ne-ci-mien-to. Except if the first of them be an /, or any of the mute letters, followed by I or r, for then both are joined to the second syllable ; as, a-jiic-cion, ha-hlan-chin, co-hre. When three consonants come between two vowels, the first two of them belong to the first syllable, if the second of said consonants be s, and the third to the second syllable ; as, cons-ti-tu-cion, ins-pi-rar But if the second letter be /, or any of the mute letters, followed by I or r, one belongs to the first, and the other two to the second syllable ; as, con-jiic-to, an-cla. Four consonants between two vowels are equally divided ; as, abs-trac* don. Compound words are to be divided into their component parts ; as, dei- 9r-de-nar. But should the simple word in its Latin origin begin with 5, followed by a consonant the s is to be placed with the preceding syllable ; as, ins-tru-ir. PUNCTUATION. The notes used in Spanish for punctuation are the same as in English A differencej however, is to be observed in the points of exclamation am? 408 APPENDIX. interrogation, which in long sentences are placed upside down at tho be- ginning of them, in order that the reader may calculate, and apply tha proper emphasis and tone of voice ; as — ( j Como no ! respondid Sancho. i Por ventura el qua ^ / Coh’-moh noh I res-pon-deeoh' San-tchoh. i Por ven-toor~rah ell hay J ayer mantedron era otro que el hijo de mi padre ? ah-jer man-tay-ar-on er-ah oh-troh kay ell ee-koh day me pah-dray ? J iy las alforjas que hoy me faltan son de otro que de <51 ( I ee lass al-for-hass kay oh-ee may fal-tan son day oh-troh kay day ell J mismo? Que! ^Te faltan las alforjas, Sancho? I miss-moh ? Kay ! i Tay faltan lass al-for-hass, San-tchoh 7 Don Quijote, Cap. xviii., part 1 Translation. — How now ! answered Sancho. Mayhap, then, they whom they tossed up in the blanket yesterday was not the son of my father ? and did the saddle-bags that are lost to-day belong to some other person 1 How I Hast thou lost the saddle-bags, Sancho ? N. B. No apostrophe is used in Spanish. It is found, however, in very old books, and particularly in poetry ; at present it is entirely expunged. Formerly it was also customary to suppress the e of words beginning with that letter, when they came after the preposition de, joining both words in one ; thus, del, deste, dellos, &c., instead of de el, de este, &c ACCENT. The Spanish vowels have always the same unvaried sound, whether they be at the beginning, in the midst, or at the end of a word. They, in all situations, must be fully and distinctly pronounced. The only difference to be observed in them, is the time requisite in their pronunciation. This time is called accent. An accent is that peculiar stress of the voice laid on a vowel of a sylla- ble, in consequence of which it is more distinctly and forcibly pronounced than the other vowels of tho same word. Hence the vowels are called long or short. A vowel is termed Zong* when it requires a peculiar stress of the voice to bo laid upon it ; dwelling, consequently, on it a longer time than on any other vowel of the same word ; as c in the first syllable of reverence, which is distinguished from the other two c’s by the time spent in pronouncing it. The latter are therefore called short, because the stress of the voice is not laid on them, they being pronounced rapidly. The following English words will elucidate this explanation. No. 1. An abstract, an accent, the torment, the conduct No. 2. To abstract, to accent, to torment, to conduct The words in line No. 1 have the accent on the first syllable, and those ol No. 2 on the last Consequently it is said df the former, that they have APPENDIX. 409 ihe first syllable long, and the second short ; and of the latter, that then tiret syllable is short, and the second long. The little line, or mark set over a vowel, to point out that it must be pro- nounced long, is arso called an accent. In the Spanish language the only accent used at present is that styled the acute (') In old books there is found also the circumflex, to indicate that the ch preceding the vowel marked with it must be pronounced as c (k) before a, o, or u, and as qu before e or i ; and that x is to be sounded as cs ; as, archangel, AchileSt proximo, which at present are written arcdngel, (ar-can'-hell,) Aquiles, (ah-key-less,) proximo, (prok-see-moh.) The vowels d, e, 6, u, when used as prepositions or conjunctions, are al- ways accented ; as, ama d tu projimo, sabios e ignor antes, grandes 6 pf>- luerios. The accent is never placed over y. But in printing (dictionaries excepted) the capitals are seldom accented ; and in manuscript are almost diways unaccented. Monosyllables of more than ono signification are accented on that sylla- rfk in which ti vowel is pronounced longer ; as — Tu, thou. Tu, thy. Si, himself, &c. Si, if. he. El, the. De, give you. Dc, of. Mi, me. Mi, my. Te, tea. Te, thee Se, I know. Se, himself, &c. &c. &c. TilK USE OF THE ACCENT. Nouns ending in q ^ owel have, for the most part, the penultimate, or last 0 ^ liable but one, long, and consequently they do not require the mark or decent to point it out ; as, publico, habito ; but if the stress of the voice Ij to be laid on any other tsyllable, it must be indicated by placing the accent upon such syllable ; thus, publico, public ; publico, I publish ; publico, he published ; habito, a habit ; habito, I inhabit ; habito, he inhabited. WORDS FOR EXERCISE. Animn, calculo, intimo, participe, numero. "Capitulo, domestico, limite, practice, titulo. Celebre, ejercito, cantara, termino, vario. But if to a person of a verb ending in an accented vowel the case of a pronoun be added, the accent must be retained, although it fall on the pe~*‘ nultimate ; as, pago, he paid ; pagole, he paid him. Words ending in a consonant have, generally, the last syllable long, and do not require the mark of the accent ; as, caridad, animal, capitan, favor, interes, lobrcguez. But should the accent be on any other syllable it must be marked ; as, orden, iris, mdrtir, cardeter, caracteres, (pi.) Exception 1. — The plurals of nouns and adjectives, which, though they t3rminate in s, retain the accent they have in the singular ; as, padreSi amorosos, capitanes, {rom padre, amoroso, & Ee-hoh, dee-hoh lah ve-ai-heth-ee-tah gath-mo-nyah ^ Son, said the little-old-woman prude agues el haile con ins alharacas. ah-gwess ell bah-ee-lay cone toos al-ar-ac-ass. disturb the ball with your vociferations. jusilsimo hoos-tee-se-moh very just los devengues ; loss day-ven-gess ; que es kay ess that it is euando kwan-doh when de paciencia, y day pa';h-ee-enth-ee-ah, say that te tay paguen pah-gain al page, m all pah- hay, nr to the page, n< i Bien conozco Be-en coh-noth-cob Well I know tus gdjes toos gah-hess you should be paid your pero aguarda them you have earned ; but perquisites con un poco per-oh ah-gwar-dah cone oon poh-coh wait veras ver-ass que kay — patience, de quejarte Ve day Kai-har-tay. Vay to complain. Go now dile al Jorobado dee-lay al Hor-oh-bah-doh tell the Hunchbacked and you will see that no ahora al almacen ah-or-ah al al-matt -en now to the store que kay to with no iienes noh tee-en-ess you have del dell He-gan-tay, of the Giants’ sign, and ruegue enc irccidisima- roo-ai-gay en-car-eth-ee-dee-set--uiaii beg very earnestly a little mot wo moh-tee rob reason Gigante, y 112 APPENDIX. que kay to menle al meii-tay al \ the checer, y cheth-er, ee [ and y los otros ' ee loss ch-tross and the other puedes hacer poo-ai-cless ath er you may do Don Hermogencs Don Er-moh-heri-ess que kay to guitarrista gee-tar-ris-tali guitar-player traiga trah-ee-gah bring along musicos, moo-see-coss, musicians, otros oh-tross other el ell tenga sin ven-gah sin come without d JuanitOf ah Hoo-an-ee-toh, — Jack, le que le encargue. kay ay en-car-gay. which him I requesited. encargos : recoge en-car-goss : rai-coh-hay commissions : ask ajonjoliy el ah-hon-hoh-lee, ell Don Hermogenes for the oily grain, the verizado, el unguento anodino, i vcr-ith-ah-doh, ell oon-goo-en-toh ah-no-dee-nok , e verized, the unguent anodyne, cicatrizativo, que Arrigorriaga thic-ah-treeth-ah-tee-voh, kay Ar-ree-gor-ree-ah-gah cicatrisive, that Arrigorriaga guardar: ; cuidado con no hacer de gwar-dar : i coo-ee-dah-doh cone no ath-er day ' keep ; take care not to make with falta al ano" fal-tah al an-oti fail about dusk al contrahajoy al con-lrah-bah-hoh the bass-viol player, Al irte Al ir-tay By the way de casa de day cas-sah day at the house of gengibre puU hen-he-bray poo^ ginger pul- el emplasio ell em-plas-toh the plaster dejo d day-hoh ah left with te un hatur^ and le lay him to do rillo ! De camino ree-lyoh ! Day cah-mee-noh mash ! By the way Olazaverreteguieta, 0-lath-ah-ver-rai-tai-gee-ai-tah, ee Olazaverreteguieta, and lla ' lyah pasa a ver pas-sah ah ver stop to see y pidele toh-doh oon ba-tuoi all a d Don Herrnenegildo ah Don Er-may-nay-hil-doh — Don fiermenegildo la disertacionci- que kay that pee-dai-lay lah ask him for the Iharguerigoitia escribio E-bar-gain-go-ee-tee-al es-cree-bee-oh dis-er-tath^ee-on-thii- short disquisition agiotage, ah-he-o-tah-hay stock-jobbing calle de Ibarguengoitia wrote Dt al borceguinei 7, que Dee al borth-ai-gee-ner-oh, kay Tell — buskin-maker, who Barrionuevo sobre soh-bray on que cal-lyay day Bar-ree-oh-noo-ai-voh kay venga ven-gah ah vive vee-vay lives verme, ver-may. en en in el elJ the la lah No No street - - Barrionuevo to come to see me. Do not Divides truer de casa de dona Geronv'ia el-veedess trah-er' day cas-sah day doh-nyah Her-oh-nec ma forget to bring from the hou.se of donna Gerome Juarez el manguitOy y la cajitUy con los zarcillos lloo-ar-eth oil man-gee toh, ee lah cah-he-tah, cone loss tharth eel-lyos Juarez the muff, and the little box. with the ear-rings y dijes de dee-hess day and trinkets of Gertruditas. Her-troo-dee-tass. Gertruditas Miray Mir-ah, Mind, no no not juegues hoo-ai-gess to play la lab thi APPENDIX. 413 calle y pierdas to do lo que traes. Antes de cal-lyay ee pee-er-dass toh-doh lo kay trah-ess. An-tess day street and lose all that you bring. Before going saliVi haja y di d Catujita que el gigote que bah-jah ee dee go down and tell para el hijo par-ah ell ee-hoh for the son haga ah-gah she must make de ajo y la ’ so pah day ah-hoh ee lah ah Cah-too-hee-tah — dear Kate del cojo dell coh-hoh of the lame man kay ell that the se le say lay — it he-go-tay hash comio CO rne-ol eat kay that e/ ^ gato : que < gah-toh: kay ' cat : that sopa ha inmediatamente nn poco di in-may-de-ah-tah-men'tay oor. poh-coh day immediately some envte d mi ahijaditOf que en-vee-ay ah me ah-ee-han-dee-toh kay soup — garlic and it send to my little godson, who estard muerto de hambre. Encierra el perro ess-tar-ah' moo-er-toh day am-bray. Enth-ee-er-rah ell pair-roh will be dying with hunger. Lock up the dog para que no haga ruido en el corredorcillo : par-ah kay no ah-gah roo-ee-doh en ell cor-ray-dor-thil-lyoh * ( in order C cuelga < coo-el-ga that not may make las j aulas de lass hah-oo-lass day the jilgueros hang up the te, porque me pore-kay may because me pollitos pol-lyee-toss chicken cages of molestan mole-ess-tan they disturb al gallinero, ai gal-lyee-ner-oh to the hencoop. noise los loss hil-gay-ross the con cone with passage : los loss the tate quietOf estudia hien tah-tay kee-ai-toh, ess-too-dee-ah bee-en be still, study well diez veces diez hacen ciento ; dee-eth veth-ess dee-eth atn-en the-en-to , ten times ten make la pronunciacion clara lah pro-noonth-ee-ahth-ee-on clar-ah ee vel-oth the pronunciation clear and quick DESPROPORCIONADISIMAMENTE, la maS des-pro-porth-ee-o-nah-diss-see-mah-men-tay^ lah mass without any proportion whatever, the more hallards en Castellano. al-lye-ar-as8 en Cas-tel-lye-an-oh. ym may find in Spanish. en el gabinc- en ell gah-bee-nai linnets in the cabinet, sus gorgcos. Lleva soos gore-hay-oss Lye-ai-vah their chirping. Car*y Cuando vuelvas^ es- Kwan-doh voo-el-vass, esjf- When you return, la tahla, hasta lah tah-blah, ass-tah the numeration-table, as far as ejercitate en ai-herth-ee -tah-tay cn hundred ; exercise yourself y veloz de la palahra day of lah the larga lar-gah long que kay that pah lah-brak word tal vet tal vetb perhap? 414 APPENDIX, COMMON SPANISH ABBREVIATIONS. A. C Alio Cristiano, tn the year of Ch^st a.’ Arroba, or arrobas, twenty-five pounds. As. Anos, years. A. A. Autores, authors. A. V. E. A. V." Es.®‘®, to Y, E, (Your Excd lency.) Adm.** Administrador, administrator. Ag.“ Agosto, August, Ain.® Amigo, friend. An.** Antonio, Anthony, Ang.» Angosto, narrow. App.** App.®* Apostolico, ca. apostolical. Art. Articulo, article. Arzbpo. Arzobispo, archbishop. At,® Atento, respectful. B. Beato, blessed, ~ Barr. Barril, barrel. B.' Bachiller, bachelor. B. L. M. Beso 6 besa las manos. I kiss, or he kisses tht hands. B. L. P. Beso 6 besa los pies, I kiss, or he kisses the feet. 3 mo p e Beatisimo Padre, most blessed father * C. A. R. Cat.® Ap." Rom.® Cath, Apost. Rom, C. M. B. Cuyas manos beso. whose hands I kiss. C. P. B. Cuyos pies beso, whose feet I kiss Cam.® Camara, chamber. Cap.® Capitulo, chapter. Cap.® Capiian, captain. Capp.® Capellan, chaplain. CoU Coiumna, column. Comis.® Comisario, commissary. Comp.® Compania, company. Cons.® Consejo, council. Conv.*® Conveniente, convenient. Corr.*® Corriente, current. ^ do vy. Cuando, when. C.*® C.*® Cuanto, ta. how much. D. or D.® or D.® Don, Dona, mister, mistress D, D. Doctores, doctors. 0 ' or D,®' Doctor, doctor. APPENDIX. 413 D Dios, God. D."“(lha. . Dicho, dicha. said^t ditio. Dro. Derecho, right or duty. Die " 10." Diciembre, December, Doz. Docena, dozen. Doin.® Domingo, Sunday. Ecc.® Ecc.* Eclesiastico, ca. ecclesiastic. Enm/“, vale. Enmendado, amended^ valid. En.® Enero, January. Es.“® Es Escelentisimo, ma. most excellent. Es.“® p." Escribano publico. Not.* Public Fho. fha. Fecho, fecha. dated. Feb.® Febrero, February. Foi Folio, folio. Fr. Fray, brother oj certain reli- gious orders. Fr. Frey, A title of the knights of certain orders Fran.®® Francisco, Francis. Frnz. Fernandez, Fernandez. Gue. or gde. Guarde, save, preserve. Gra. Gracia, grace. Gen.’ or (adj.) gral. General, general. Id. Yd. Idem, . ditto. Tgla. Iglesia, church. 11 .® Ilustre, illustrious. 11 mo J1 ma Ilustrisimo, ma. most illustrious. Inq.®^ Inquisidor, inquisitor. Intend.*® Intendente, intendant. Jbs. Jesus, Jesus. J. U. I Jesus, Maria y Jose, Jesus, Mary, and Joseph Jph. Josef, Jose, Joseph. Jn. Juan, John. L. L. Leyes, laws. Lib. Libro, book. IJb.Mb. , Libras, pounds. Lin. Linea, line. Lic.^“ Licenciado, licentiate. L. S. Lugar del sello. place of the seal. M. P. S Muy poderoso Senor, most powerful Lord, M.’ Madre, Mother. M.®' Mayor, elder, major. M.® a • Muchos anos, many years. 116 APPENDIX. Mag/ Magestad, Majesty > Man.' Manuel, Manuel, May."* Mayordomo, Steward, Mig,' Miguel, Michael, Mntro Ministro, minister. Mrd. Merced, favor, worship. Mrn. Martin, Martin, Mras. Muestras, patterns. Mrnz. Martinez, Martinez, Mro. Maestro, master. Mr&. Maravedis, maravedis. Ms. Muchos, many. MS. Manuscnto, manuscript. MSS. Manuscritos, manuscripts. N. Fulano, such a one. N. C. M. Nro. Cat.® Mon area, our Cath, Mon, .N. S. Nuestro Senor, our Lord, s. s.* Nuestra Senora, our Lady, Nro. nra. Nuestro, nuestra, our. Nov.* 9.'* Noviembre, November, Obpo. Obispo, Bishop, Oct." 8." Octubre, October, On. oiiz. Onza, onzas. ounce, doubloor,^. Ord.“ ord. Orden, ordenes. order, orders. P. D. Posdata, postscript. P.*q Para que. for, in order thta'i P.* Padre, father. P.* Pedro, Peter, P.' Por, /or, per, by. P.* Pies, pesos, feet, dollars. pt. Plata, silver or plate. p te Parte, part. p to Puerto, port. Pag. Pagina, page. Pag.*' Pagamento, payment. Pza. Pieza, piece. PL Plana, trowe„, page. Pror Procurador attorney. Publ* Publico, public. Prcv/’ Provisor, provtsor. Pral. Principal, principal. p mt p io Proximo pasaao, last past. aos Quintales, quintals APPEK DIX. 417 Q or q.* Que, that. Q.“ Quien, who. Q. S. M. 13. Que sus manos besa, W, K, Y, H. R.' V - Real, reales velloii, real, reales, silver ctm, R.“* Reverendisimo, most reverend. R. R.**** R.*** Reverendo, reverenda, reverend. P. M. Fr. Padre maestro fray, reverend father and mui ter. R.‘‘ Recibi, I received. Rec.* Recibo, receipt. Resp. Respuesta, answer. S. San 6 Santo, Santa, saint, holy. S. M. Su magestad. his majesty. S.' or S « S." Senor, Senora, Sir, Madam. S. S.^ Su Santidad, his Holiness. SS. S/*** Senores, gentlemen, Messrs. S. S. S. Su seguro servidor, your faithful servant Seb.“ Sebastian, Sebastian. Sop." or 7.’’" Setiembre, September. S.“* Secret.® Secretana, secretarifs office. S.® Secret.® Secretario, secretary. Ser.“® or ““ Serenisimo, ma, most serene. Serv.® Servicio, service. Serv.' Servidor, servant. Sig.- Siguiente, following. SS.“® Santisimo, most holy. SS.“' Santisimo(el Sacramento) host, the holy sacru merit. SS.“® P.® Santisimo padre. most holy father. SS.®* Escribano, notary, scrivener^ S. S. P. P. Santos padres. holy fathers. Sup.®* Suplica, entreaty, request. Sup.*® Suplicante, petitioner. Super.*® Superintendente, superintendent. S. Y. 0 Salvo yerro u omision, errors or omissions cx cep ted. Ten.*® Teniente, lieutenant. Tesor.® Tesorero, treasurer. I’om. Tomo, volume Tpo. Tiempo, time Ton.' Tonelada, ^on. T.-aL Tribunal, tribunal. V. M. Vuestra Magestad, your Majesty, APPENDIX V. R. Vuestra Real, your Royal. Ult* Ultimo, last. V. V. Venerable, venerable. V. A. Vuestra Alteza, your highness. V. B.* Vuestra Beatitud, your beatitude. V. I Vuestra Il.“% your grace. V. E. or V. Ex. Vuecelencia, your excellency. V. G Verbi gracia. for example. Vm. Vmd. V. Vd.^ Vuestra, vuesa merced, you, your worship, y ia\ or usted. favor. V. P. Vuestra Paternidad, your paternity V. R.“ Vuestra Reverencia, your reverence. \ S.% Usia, V.® Sehoria, your lordship, honor. V. S. I. Vuesehoria Ilustrisima, your most illustf'ioud reverence. Vuestra Santidad, your holiness. v.« Real vellon. real of bullion, corn Vol. Volumen, volume. V. S. G. Vuelta si gusta. please turn over Vro. vra. Vuestro, vuestra. your. X mo Diezmo, tenth and tithe. Xp.*» Cristo, Christ. Cristiano, Christian. Xptobal, Cristobal, Christopher. In the Old Books, — a stands for an or am. e “ en or em. I “ in or im. o stands for on or om. u un or tun q “ que OTHER ABBREVIATIONS. § is read Pdrrafo, a paragraph Mily a thousand. J. M. J., a1 the beginning of writings of religious persons, means Jesus, Maria, Jose. The Jesuits always be-gin and finish their letters and other writings with Jhs, which means and is read Jesus. * An s is added to these abbreviations when more than one person is ad- dressed ; and then they stand for vuestras mercedes, vuesas mercldes oi ustedesy in the plural. At present the word usted and its plural are ex- pn^saed by a V. or VV. APPENDIX. 419 ETYMOLOGY. There are in Spanish nine sorts of words, or, as ihey are commonlj jailed. Parts of Speech; namely, the Article, the Noun, the Pronoun, die Verb, the Participle, the Adverb, the Preposition, the Conjunction, find the Interjection The meaning of a word must be first ascertained, in order to classify it Example : — Claro, clear. Ese claro (a substantive) es muy vequeho, that skylight is very small. Un dia claro^ (an adjective,) a cleai day El no kahla claro, (an adverb,) he does not speak plain. Take notice, that henceforth the numbers placed thus (1) after a word or at the end of a sentence or a paragraph, refer to the page which the learner must consult in the preceding Method. ARTICLE. There are two articles : the Indefinite and the Definite. indefinite article. Must ulinc Sing. A or an. I/n, (38.) Plur. Some. Unos or algunoa Feminine “ “ “ Una, (162.) “ “ Unas or algunas definite article. Masculine Sing The. El, (9.) Plur The. Los, (26.) Feminine “ “ La, (159.) “ “ Las, (159.) When the masculine definite article el comes after the preposition d (to) or d ,s (of, from,) the e is suppressed, and the two words are written as one ; thus, al, del, instead of d el, de el. The pronoun el (he, it) is distinguished by the accent, and it is always written separately from the said prepositions ; thus d el, de el. Ohs. El, los, (34,) la, las, are articles when they are before a noun, to point out how far its signification extends ; but they are pronouns when el B the subject of a verb, or comes after a preposition ; and la, (her, it,) los, 'as, (them,) are governed by a verb ; as— The bed of Don Quixote was fore- most, and next to it Sancho made his. El lecho de Don Quijote estaha primero, y luego junto d dl hizc Sancho el suyo. Don Quijote, cap xvi. pt i. NOUNS Nouns are either substantive or adjective. 'Souns Substantive have Persons, Numbers, Genders, and Cases. 420 APPENDIX. PERSONS. There are three persons ; namely, the speaker ^ wlio is called the person; the person spoken to, who is styled the second person and thfl person or thing spoken of, which is said to be the third person : as — Make haste, son Sancho, (second person,) and tell (second person) that Lady of the hawk, (third parson,) that I, the knight of the lions, (first person,) send my re- spects to her exceeding beauty. The speaker seldom refers to himself by name. When brutes, or inanimate objects, stand as speakers or persons spoken to, they are said to be personified ; as — Corre, hijo Sancho, y di a aquello seuora del azor, que yo, cl cab i Hero de los leones, bcso las mano* 2 su gran fermosara. Don Quijote, cap. xxx. pt. ii Oh Jars of Toboso, which have re- called to my mind the dear ob- ject of my greatest sorrow ! ; O tohosescas Tinajas, que me A«- be is traido a la memoria la dula prcnda de mi mayor omargura ! Don Quijote, cap. xviii. pt. ii. There are two numbers, the Singular and the Plural. (Less. IX. p. 26.) Rule 1. Nouns ending in a short vowel, that is to say, a vowel having no accent over it, form their plural by adding s to the singular ; as, head, cabeza, heads, cabezas ; eye, ojo, eyes, ojos. Rule 2. Nouns terminating in a long vowel, that is to say, a vowel naving an accent over it ; or in any consonant, or in y, add es to the sin- gular ; as, ruby, rubi, rubies, rubies ; lion, Icon, lions, leones ; law, ley, laws, leyes. Except papa, mama, pie, &lc. Maravedi, the smallest Spanish brass coin, has three plurals, rnaravedies, maravedis, maravedises. Nouns terminating in z change it into c, or retain it and add ts to form the plural ; as, cross, cruz, crosses, cruces, or cruzes. Rule 3. Nouns of two syllables ending in s, being accented on the pe nnltimate, admit of no change for the plural, and distinguish it by means Df the article ; thus, Monday, lunes, Mondays, los lunes : — He had lentils on Fridays, and an addition of a pigeon on Sundays. El tenia lentejas los vi^rnes, y al- gun palomino de aiiadidura lop domingos. Don Quijote, cap. i. pt. i The same is to be observed with nouns compound of a verb, and a nciir plural ; as, the penknife, el cortaplumas, the penknives, los cortapiurnas There are some nouns with a plural termination without reference to an\ lingular ; as. Alfilcres, Esposas, Griilos, ladies* pinmoney. handcuffs. fetters. Albricias, a present for good news Alicates, pincers. Preces, prayers, &lc. (zeal,) has no pioral . Zelos, (jcaloasv,) has no singular. ikPPENDIX. 421 Don and Doila, as Spanish titles for a gentleman or lady^, are not used in Jie plural ; and in conformity with the present custom they are placed only t)efor6 prenomens, or baptismal names; as, Messrs. Nicholas and Leandro F. Moratin, Don Nicolas y Don Leandro Fernandez de Moratin. Mr. Capmanv, el Senor Capmany, and not Don Capmany. GENDEa. There are two genders, the masculine and the feminine. Every Ac, or male animal, is of the masculine gender ; as, boy, mucha^* cho ; lion, Icon. Every sAe, or female animal, is of ♦he feminine gender ; £s, girl, muchacha ; lioness, Icona. The collective nouns g'cnfc, people ; turba, torpa, crowd; multitude multitude ; plebe, common people ; juveniud, youth , vejez, old age ; asam- bleOi assembly; ave, bird; Aes^ia, beast, &c., require the articles, the ad- jectives, and the pronouns that agree with or refer to them, to be of the feminine gender ; as — The coach must belong to some travelling people. El coche debe de ser de algunt, gente pasagera. Don Quijote, cap. viii. pt. i. Nouns signifying dignities, offices, trades, professions, &c., proper to men, are masculine ; and those proper to mv omen, feminine. Remark. There are some nouns of animals which custom* has made cc express both genders, under either the masculine or feminine termination preceded by the corresponding article. Nouns of this description are called ill the grammatical language epicenos, epicene. Such are the following MASCULINE. El avestruz, El buitre, El cisne, El cuervo, El gilguero, El ruiseTwr, the ostrich, the vulture, the swan, the crow, the goldfinch the nightingale. I FExMlNINE. La ardilla, the squirrel. La becada, La calandria, La grulla, La pc^'diz, La tor tug a. the woodcock, the lark, the crane, the partridge, the turtle. The rest of these nouns will be found in the dictionary. The word macho, male, or hembra, female, with the corresponding ai licle, is prefixed to any noun of this kind when it is necessary to distinguish the sex ; as, the partridge, la perdiz — the male, or he partridge, el macho de la perdiz ; the sparrow, el gorrion — the female, or she sparrow, la hem- bra del gorrion. Obs. A. The pronouns he or sne, and the nouns male and female, arc Lot lianslated into Spanish when the gender may be distinguished by changing the termination of the noun masculine; as, A wmlf, un lobo. I A she wolf, una loha. A male servant, un criado. | A female servant, una criada. * Si volet usus, quern penes arbitrium est, ct jus, et norma loguendt. - lIOrtACE. 422 AlPENDIX. RULK3 TO FORM THE FEMININE OF COMMON NOUNS OF AX MATE BE1N06. Rule 1. Common substantives ending in o, and the most part of tliOBC in e, change the o or c into a to form the feminine ; as^ Son, Brother, A male relative, hijo, hermano pariente. Daughter, Sister, A female relative. hija. hermana. parienta. Except tcstigo, (witness,) that admits of no change, and distinguishes the gonder by the article ; thus, cZ, or la testigo. Ohs, B, The feminine nouns formed out of the substantives signifying iignity, trade, &c., mean not only the female whc enjoys the dignity, or follows the same trade or profession, but most frequently the wife, and even die daughter of the person that has the dignity, or follows the trade, &c. ; as, Superiora, Capiiana, a female superior, a captain’s wife. Conjitero, Conjitera. confectioner Conjitera, may signify a female confectioner, or a confectioner’s wife cr daughter. Rule 2. Most of the common nouns ending in an and on, add an a foi the feminine ; as, Capitan, Patron, Pastor, captain. patron shepherd. Capitana, a female commander. Patrona, a patroness. Pastora, a shepherdess. Rule 3. National nouns, that is, nouns that express the nation or coun- try of persons, or where the thing is produced, or comes from, whether they be substantive or adjective, if they terminate in o, change it into a ; and il they end in a consonant, add an a to form the feminine ; as, Americano, Americana, American. | Espaiiol, Espanola, Spaniard. Rule 4. Common substantives ending in a, and most of those termina- ting in en or ir, admit of no change, and distinguish the gender by the ar- ticles — (Obs. D, 162;) as, Un pensionista, a pensioner. I El mdrtir, the martyr. Una pensionista, “ | La mdrtir, the female martyr. Rule 5. Almost all words compound of the substantives man or woman And an adjective, distinguish their gender, in Spanish, by prefixing to them Ihe corresponding article and omitting said substantives ; as, Unjooen, a young man. I Unajoven, a young woman. Los Ingleses, the Englishmen. | Las Inglesas, the English women. Man and woman are translated when a particular emphasis is placed on diem Obs. C. Many of the nouns compound of said substantives, or of an ad- jective, are translated in Spanish by a single word, to be found in the dic- tionary, in the masculine gender, out of which the feminine may be formed XI conformity with the foregoing rules ; as, El lechero, the milkman. ' La lechera, the milk-woman Un naranjero, an orange-man. | Una naranjera, an orange-woman APPENDIX. ^ 423 SuLE 6 Some nouns express their gender by diffeienl termini^tioua See Lesson LVI., page 246.) Rule 7. Some nouns distinguish their gender by different words. 'See Lesson LVI., page 247.) GENDER OF NOUNS NEUTER IN ENGLISH The nouns that are neuter in English are masculine or feminine in Spanish, according to their signification or their termination. BY THE SIGNiriCATIUN. Arte^ canal, capital, corte, dote, /rente, guardia, orden, mar, arc masculine or feminine according to their meaning, to wit: Arte, (art,) in the singular, may be used in either gender ; in the plural, only in the feminine. Should arte be qualified by an adjective, the latter agrees with it in the feminine termination ; as, El delicado gusto de V. en el arte I Your fine taste in the rhymic art. ritmica. I Moratin, Comedia Nueva. Mar, (sea,) when it is alone, may be used in either gender. When it is accompanied by the adjectives Mediterranean, White, Red, &c., it is mascu- line ; as, el or la mar ; el mar Rojo. With other adjectives it is generally feminine : la mar estaha algo mas sosegada, (Cervantes.) However, the ase id not fixed. Orden (order) is masculine when it signifies arrangement, or refers to architecture ; as. All was in good order. | Todo estaha en hucn orden. The edifice is of the Ionic order. | El edificio es del orden Jonico. Orden, signifying command, or a religious or military institution, is femi- nine ; as, 1 received your order. I Yo recihi la orden de V. Two friars of the order of St. Bene- Dos frailes de la orden de San Be- diet. nito. Cervantes. Dueno, (master, owner, lord, mistress, lady,) in a figurative sense, is used only in the masculine termination for both sexes ; as. From that instant I made he" mis- Desde aquel instante la hice duenc tress of my heart (senora) de mi corazon. Don Quijote, cap. xliv. pt. i masculine. Canal, Erie canal, el canal Erie. Capital, a slock of funds. Corte, the sharp edge of a tool, a paltein for a dress, means, &c. Dote, a gift of nature, endowment Frenie, the front feminine. Canal, the gutter, or leader of watei from the roof of a house. Capital, the chief city of a country. Corte, the court, the persons that compose it, courtship, attendance Dote, dowry, dower. Frente, the forehead. 424 APPENDIX. MASCULINE. . soldier of the king’s Quardia, guard. Margen, the margin of a book, &c Parte, a report, information. <&c., &c. FEMININE Guardia, a guard, a body of soldiow Margen, the bank of a river Parte, the part of a vi^hole. &c., &c Alhald, a permit, or certificate of a custom-house, (little used ;) anatejUG, anathema ; azucar, sugar ; cisma, schism ; cutis, the fine skin ; emldcma, emblem ; puentc, bridge ; tribu, tribe, &c., may be used as masculine oi feminine BY THE TERMINATION. Ohs. D The proper names of kingdoms, provinces, cities, &lc., when they stand alone, are generally of the gender of their termination ; as, Spain is almost insulated from the rest of the continent Espana estd casi aislada del resto del continente. But when they are qualified by common nouns of dilferent terminations, they agree with them accordingly ; as, Toledo es una antigua ciudad. Sevilla fue un reino poderoso. Toledo is an ancient city Seville was a powerful kingdom. The following general rules are subject to many exceptions, of which Duly the most usual are pointed out. Rule 1. — Nouns ending in a uvq feminine, (162.) Except most of those derived from the Greek ; as, Antipoda. antipode. [ Clima, climate, &c. And also the following : — Dia, day. Guarda-costa. , custom -hous Mapa, map. \ Paragua, umbrella. Idioma, idiom. Viva, huzza. Poema, poem. 1 1 &c. &c. ULE 2. — Nouns ending in d or ad are feminine. Except — Ardid, stratagem. 1 Sud, south Cesped, turf. 1 &c. &c . B. — A great many of the words ending in English in ty, may 1 1 into Spanish by changing it into dad ; as — Activity, actividad, | Veracity, veracidad. ULE 3. — Nouns ending in e, i, o, or u, are masculine Except- Calle, street. Noche, night. Came, flesh, meat Tarde, afternoon CLase, class. Llave, key. E specie, species. Leche, milk. Suerte, chance Nieve, snow. Hanibre, hunger. Nave, nao, vessel. Costumbre, custom. Mano, hand. Mente, mind &c APPENDIX. 425 fiuEa 4. — N&ins ending in Z, n, Miel, honey. Col, cabbage. Imdgen, image. Razon, reason. Voz, voice. Tos, cough. Cruz, cross. &LC. &c. r, s, or z. are masculine. Except^ Luz, light. Flor, flower Nariz, nose. Nihez, childhood Vejez- old age Nuez, nut Paz, peace. &.C. &.C. Rule 5. — Nouns ending in ion are feminine. Except — Sarampion, measles. I Turhionj shower Bastion, bastion. | &.c. &c. CASES. There are three cases: the Subject, or nominative case; the Object, ot tiie direct objective case ; and the Complement, or the indirect objective case, (69.) The object is the accusative in Latin ; and the complement answers to the dative, or any of the oblique cases, except the vocative, which 111 Spanish is a subject absolute When two pronouns, oZyec/ and complement, come together in a sentence, the complement is always set before the object. When they are governed by a verb in the infinitive, or in the imperative mood, they are placed after it, and written so as to form one word with it ; as — He promised to send them to me. | El prometio envidrmelos. In cases where the stress of the voice is on the last syllable of the verb, it is preserved on the same syllable ; which, on account of changhig its place, requires the mark of the accent; thus, dan, danme, ddnmelos, they give them to me. Remark. — When the object of a transitive verb is the noun of a rational being, or a proper noun, or a thing personified, it must be preceded by the preposition d, (which in that case being an idiom,* is not translated intc English ;) but the preposition is not required in other cases. The surgeon cured the wounded woman. The surgeon dressed the woman’s w Dund. The*o is a God in heaven, who takes care to chastise the wicked, and to reward the righteous His impatience killed Chrysostom. El cirujano curd k la mujer herida. El 'irujano vendo la herida dc lo mujer. Dios hay en el cielo que no se cuida de castigar al male, y dc premiar al bueno. Don Quijote, cap, xxii. pt. i. Su impaciencia mato d Crisostomo. Ditto, cap. xiv. pt i. * Idiom is the peculiar construction of a language which distinguishes \i altogether from others. — Crabb. 426 APPENDIX. It was known there that Signor Don Juan had taken Tunez. We must, in slaying giants, pnde kill Se supo tn ella que eJ Senar Dcr Juan hahia tornado d Tunez» Don Quijote, cap. xxxix. pt i. Nosotros hemos de matar en los gu gantes d la soherhia. Ditto ^ ditto ADJECTIVES Adjectives have persons cases^ numbers, and genders; they admit, be- Bsdes, several degrees of signification. The person and case of the adjectives are the same as those of the nouns or pronouns which they qualify ; as, Art thou come to rejoice at the cruel exploits of thy character, and be- hold, like another merciless Nero, the flames of his burning Rome ? I Vienes d ufanarte en las cruelee hazanas de tu condicion, 6 ver, como otro desapiadado Nero, el in- cendio de su abrasada Roma ? Don Quijote, cap. xiv. pt. i. NUMBERS The plural number of the adjectives is formed by the same rules laid down for the substantives, (26,) as. White Crimson. Natural. Prudent. Happy. Blanco, blancos ; blanca, blancas. Carrnesi, carraesies. Natural, naturales. Prudcnte, prudentes. Feliz, felices, or felizes, (78.) genders. Rule 1. Adjectives ending in o are of the masculine gender, and change the o into a to form the feminine ; as, fine,^no, Jina, (161.) Rule 2. Most of the adjectives ending in an, on, or, add an a for the feminine ; as, Haragan, Jiaragana, idle. | Griton, gritona, clamorous. Rule 3. Adjectives ending in any other letter are common to both gexi- iors ; as. Un hombre prudente, Una mujer prudente. Un cuento persa, Una anecdota persa, (161 ) consonant, add an a to foirB A prudent man. A prudent woman. A Persian story. A Persian anecdote. Rule 4. National adjectives ending in die feminine ; as, A Spaniard. | Vn Espaiiol. A Spanish lady. I Una seiiora espancla, Spanish gold. I Oro espanol, Spanish silver. 1 Plata espanola. APPEiSDIX. 427 DEGREES OF SIGNIFICATION OR C0MFARa30N. Til© comparative of superiority is formed by translating moi c, mas, than auE ; as, Honor is more precious than riches. | El honor es mas precioso que l(U 1 riquezas. (108-9.) When the comparative in English is formed by the addition of the temn nation cr, as fairer ^ it must be translated as if written more fair ; this, He is richer (more rich) than his I El es mas rico que su hermano. brother. The comparative of inferiority is formed by translating literally the ad- verbs LcsSf MENos, thany que j is, Silver- is less useful than iron. | La plata es menos util que el hierro It may also be expressed negatively ; as, Silver is not so useful as iron. | La plata no es tan util como el hieriK More thaUf less thany before a noun signifying quantity oi umber, are rendered by mas de, menos de ; as. They spent more than five hundred dollars. He gains less than what he says. Elios gastdron mas de quinientos pesos. El gana m^nos de lo que dice. More than, less than, preceded by no, may be translated mas que ; as, He earns no more than twelve shil- lings a day El no gana mas que doce reales al dia. The comparative of equality is formed by translating the adverbs as or so, TAN, before the adjective, and the second adverb as, como ; as. She is as tall as a spear, and as fresh as an April morning. It may also be expressed by not less He was from the coast of St. Lucar, not less of a thief than Cacus, and not less mischievous than a stu- dent or a page. Ella es tan grande como una lanza, y tan fresca como una mahana de Abril. Don Quijote, cap. xiii. pt ii. than; as, El era de la playa de San Lucar, no mdnos ladron que Caco, ni md- nos maleante que estudiante, 6 page. Ditto, cap. ii. pt I COMPARATIVES WITH NOUNS AND VERBS, (108-9.) As much, ( with reference to a J tanto, (masculine,) > So much, \ substantive sing. ^ tanta, (feminine,) J K with reference to a ^ tantos, (masculine,) ) *i^a.ny, ^ substantive plur. \ tantas, (feminine,) \ como. Not so mush, no tanto, (mas.) no tanta, (fern.) as, como Not so many, no tantos, (mas.) no tantas, (fern.) as, c(rmo. 428 APPENDIX. He has as much honor t and as much instruction as his competitor ; but he has neither so many years of service, nor has given so many proofs of his practical knowledge. El tiene tanto honor, y tanta uistmO' cion, como su compctidor ; peri el no 'tiene taiitos ahos de icrvicio^ ni ha dado tantas pruebas dc mu conocimientos prdcticos. So as is rendered by de modo que, de suerte que, de manera que ; os — Do (you) it, so as to please him. 1 Hdgalo V. de modo que el quedi I contento. As much aSi as many as, with reference to a noun, are trans- lated by tanto or tanta comoy cuanto, or cuanta, according to tlie gender and number of the nctrn they refer to ; as — Ue spends as much money as he re- ceives. As for dolls, Anastasia has as many as she wants. You have here as much as you want. El gasta tanto diner o comoy or cuanto recibe. En cuanto d munccas, Anastasia tiene tantas cuantas quicre. listed tiene aqui cuanto (or tanto cuanto) ha menester. As much, or so much, with reference to a verbal adjective, is translateu tan — como; as, They are as much interested as you. | Elios esian tan interesados como V When the second as, in this kind of phrases is followed by a verb in the present of the infinitive mood, it must be translated que, and the verb in the indicative mood ; as. She is so charitable as to deprive herself even of the most necessary things to give them to the poor. Ella es tan caritativa que se priva aun de las cosas mas necesarias para darlas d los pobres. The most — the least, (109,) with reference to verbs, must be translated only by mas or menos, omitting the article the; as. He is the man they praise the most. Such is the person they oppose the least. * El es el hombre que ellos mas ala- bam Tal es la persona d quien menos sz oponen. Obs. When the adiective in the comparative degree, in English, (whethe it be formed tlirough the adverbs more or less, or through the iffixes r or er,) is preceded by the definite article the, and the same article {the'^ is repeated in the second part of the sentence, before an adjective in die comparative degree ; the article the is omitted in both parts, and cuanto is used instead of it in the first, and tanto in the second part of it ; as, The shorter (more short) time is, the more precious it isi Cuanto * mas breve el tiempo es, tanto mas precioso il es. The more, or the less, (110,) repeated in the same sentence with reference to a verb, must also be translated cuanto mas or menos, tanto mas ox minos; asv APPENDIX. 429 Now there is no doubt that this exer- Ahora no hay que dudai sino que else exceeds all others, and that it este ejercicio excede d todos loa ought to be the more esteemed, otrosy y tanto mas se ha de tener because it is the more exposed to en estimay cuanto d mas peiigros danger. estd expuesto. Don Quuote, cap. xxxvii. pt. i The more, the less, rhay be also rendered by mientras mas or menos ; as, Ihe more he plays, the less he j Mientras mas juega, menos aprende. learns. or tanto menos aprende. When the more and the least relate to a noun, cuanto and tanto change Uieir number and gender so as to agree with it ; as. The more pride he shows, the more enemies he makes. Cuanta mas soherbia muestra el^ tantos mas enemigos se hacc. Tanto may be omitted in the second part of the sentence ; as. The more he has, the more he wants. I Cuanto mas tiene, mas qaiere, oi 1 tanto mas quiere So or such as, followed by a verb in the infinitive mood, is rendered by tan que, placing the verb in the same tense as the one that pre* cedes it in the same sentence as. His friend’s failure was so unexpect- ed, as to oblige him to stop his , business. La quiehra de su amigo fue tan inesperada, que le ohligo d sus- pender sus negocios. BUrERLATIVE. The Superlative is absolute or relative. The superlative absolute (] 10) is formed by prefixing the adverb rruy (very) to the adjective ; as — Fair. Very fair, fairest. Hermoso, hermosa. May hermoso, muy hermosa. It is also formed by adding the termination isimo to the adjective, which drops the last letter, if it be o or e ; as — Very fair, most fair, fairest. Merry. Very meny, most merry, merriest. Useful. VeT^ useful, most useful. . j. ( ble change Adjectives *= , . ! CO “ tciininatmg < in I Hermosisirno, hermosisima. Alegre. Alegrtsimo, alegrisima. Util. Utilisimo, utilisima. ble into bil; as, amable, amabilisimo CO “ qu ; “ rico, riqmsimo. go “ gu; “ largo, larguisimo. “ z “ c / “ feliz, fclicisimo. The most part of the dissyllables in io, double the i ; as — Fio, pious I Piisimo, most pious. Adjectives in ientt, drop the i ; as — Tnliente, valiat.t { VaUntisimo. most valiant 430 APPENDIX. Tile adjective in the superlative degree, in English, whether fcnned by the terminations st or est, or by the adverbs 7nost or least, being preceded by the article the, (which constitutes it a superlative relative,) must be translated by the definite article, and the adverbs mas or menos, according to the gender and number of the substantive it refers to ; as — !!e has the finest broadcloth, but I *El tiene el paiio mas jino, pern cllos they want the least expensive. | quieren el menos costoso. N. B. — The adverbs mas or menos must always be placed immediately before the adjective ; thus — The most innocent pleasures are al- Los placeres 7nas mocentes so7i ways the most pure. sie7npre c^)s mas puros, or los mas inocentes placeres, &c., but not los mas placeres inocentes. An adjective in the superlative degree, in English, preceded by the defi- nite article the, taken substantively, must be translated by the superlative foimed by the termination isimo ; as. The Highest (or the Most High) or- ( El Altishno lo dispuso asi. dered it so. | An adjective in the superlative degree, preceded by the article, being used with a reference to a verb, or a sentence, must be translated by using the pronoun lo instead of the article, and placing the adjective in the com- parative degree ; as. The best that he can do, is to pay I Lo mejor que puede hacer, es pagn7 immediately. | inmediatamente. For the irregular comparatives and superlatives, consult page 111 NOUNS OF NUMBER. CARDINAL NUMBERS. One. Uno, m Una, £ Eleven. Once Two. Dos.^ T welve. Doce. Three Tres. Thirteen. Trece Four Cuatro. Fourteen Catorce. ■Five Cinco Fifteen. Quince Six. Sets. Sixteen. Diez y seis. Seven. Siete. Seventeen. Diez y siete. Eight Ocho. Eighteen. Diez y ocho Nine Nueve. Nineteen. Diez y nueve Ten. Diez. Twenty. Veinte. From dos, (two,) up to ciento, (hundred,) inclusively, the numbers ait plural, and common to both genders ; as — Three men, trcs hombres. | Four women, ruatro rr.vjerea. appendix. 431 Twenly-one Tweiity-twc. Twenty-three Twenty-four. Twenty-five. Twenty -six. Twrenty-seveii. Twenty-eight. Tw^enty-nine. Thirty^ Thirty-one. Thirty-two, &c. Forty Fifty. Veintiuno, Veintidos. Veintitres. Veinticuatrc Veinticinco Veintiseis. Veintisiete. Veintiocho. Veintinueve. Treinta. Treinta y uno. Treinta y dos. CUARENTA. ClNCUENTA. Sixty. Seventy. Eighty. Ninety. A or one hundred Two hundred. Three hundred. Four hundred. Five hundred. Six hundred. Seven hundred. Eight hundred. Nine hundred. A or one thousand Sesenta. Setenta. OCHENTA Noventa. ClENTO. Doscientoa.^ Trescientoa. Cuatrocienta Quinientoa Seiscientos. Seiecientos Ochocientoa. Novecientoa Mil.* * One thousand and one. One thousand and eleven. One thousand one hundred and one. One thousand five hundred. Two thousand. Five hundred thousand. A Million. Mil y uno. Mil y once. Milf cienio y uno. Mil y quinientoa. Dos mil. Quinientos mil. Millon, {cuenio.) Two numbers coming together in an inverted order in English, are trans- lated by placing the highest in the first place ; thus, Three and thirty. | Treinta y tres. Eleven hundred f fifteen hundred, and the like expressions, are always translated one thousand one hundred, one thousand five hundred, &c. ; thus, mil y ciento, mil y quinientos, and not once cientos, &c. The cardinal numbers are used instead of the ordinal in speaking of the days of the month, excepting the first ; as, The fourth of July. El cuairo de Julio. The first of May. El primero de Mayo. (See Obs. A, p 46.) The words o'* clock (65, Obs. B,) are omitted in reference to the hours of the day, which are expressed by the cardinal numbers, preceded by the article las or la with reference to una, one ; as. * From doscientos to novecientos, inclusively, the termination oa is changed into as for the femmine ; as — Three hundred miles. 1 Trescientas millas. * Mil has neither gender nor number ; but it may be used in the plural, speaking, as in English, in a vague sense ; as — In that railroad many thousands I En ese Ferro-carril se han gaatad^ have been spent | muchos miles. 432 What time is it ? It is one o’clock. It is two o’clock APPENDIX. I Quc hora e& 7 Es la una. Son las dus. ORDINAL NUMBERS First, primero, | Second, segundo, (4G.) Ordinal numbers change o into a for the feminine, and admit the earns yariation of numbers as the adjectives. Obs. The adjectives uno, one, primer first, (46,) alguno, some, wfw- none, hueno^ good, ma/o, bad, postreroy (little used,) last, drop the o wli3n they are immediately followed by a substantive alone, or preceded by an adjective in the singular. Ciento, hundred, loses the last syllable before nouns of either gender, (Obs. A, p. 139.) Grande, great, generally loses the last syllable when it is not applied to size ; as, el Gran Capitan, (Obs. C, p. 97.) Santo, saint, also drops the last syllable before nouns mas cuHne in the singular, except Domingo, Tomas, zon. Prov. iii. five simple, and five compound tenses, SIMPLE TENSES. N 6. Present. L aless I write. | A mdnos que yo escriba. N. 7. Imperfect, First Terminatioru It was necessary that I should write. ] Fud necesario que yo escribiet i N. 8. Imperfect, Second Termination, I would write, if I could. [ Yo escribiria, si pudiera. N. 9. Imperfect, Third Termination, Me would not do it, even if I should I El no lo haria, aun cuando yo ea write. cribiese N. 10. Future Indefinite. Should I write, I will inform you. | Si yo escribiere, lo informard d V COMPOUND tenses. N. 6, p. Preterit. I doubt whether he has written. | Yo dudo que dl hay a escrito. N. 7, p. Pluperfect, First Termination, I should know it, if he had written. | Yo lo sabria, si dl hubiera escrito, N. 8, p. Pluperfect, Second Termination, ^I© would have written, had he I El habria escrito, si lo hubiera sa known it. | bido. N. 9, p. Pluperfect, Third Termination, Even if he had written, he would not I ^il no lo habria estorbado, aun cuan- have prevented it. | do hubiese escrito. N. 10, p. Future. inform him of it, should he not have 1 Infdrmele V. do ello, por si no hu^ written. biere escrito OF THE conjugation. The Conjugation of a verb, is the regular combination and arrangement of its Several numbers, persons, moods, and tenses. These combinations are made and formed in the Spanish language, out sf the present of the infinitive mood of any verb, which invariably termi- nates in either ar, er or tr, which syllables are called its termination ; and the letters that remain of the said present of the infinitive, after separating ane of the said terminations, whatever they may be, are called its root, and Sie ’ootters of such root are called its radical letters as, to esteem appendix. 441 98iim-ar ; to offend, ofend-er , to permit, permiUir ; in which verbs ar, er ir are the terminations ; and estim, ofend^ permit, the radical LETTEHf of each respectively, to which the other combinations must be added to form the various persons and tenses of a verb. All the Spanish verbs are, therefore, classed into three conjugations Verbs ending in ar belong to the first ; those in er to the second ; and thosa in ir to the third. Obs. E. It is not necessary to express the pronouns subject or nomina^ lint, in the colloquial style, {usted and ustedes excepted ;) but they must b* * caed whenever elegance or clearness requires it. Ohs. F. The numbers before the terminations point out the different per- iv)ns. N. 2, before usted and ustedes, denotes that they are of the second person, but that the verb agrees with them in the third, (by Enallage.) TERMINATIONS OF ALL THE REGULAR VERBS. Ohs. G. The grave accent ( ' ) upon a vowel in the following termina- tions, points out the syllable on which the stress of the voice is laid, but over which the mark of it must not be set. The acute accent ( ' ) marks the syllable on which the stress of the voice lays, and over which the ac* cent is to be written. When there is no mark of an accent in the termina- tion, the syllable that precedes it is long, SIMPLE TENSES. First Conjugation. | Second Conjugation, j Third Conjugation. Present \ o arm, armar. Termination, ar. Radical letters, arm. Gerund.* Arming*, ando. Participle past.^ \Tmcd, ado. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. To offend, ofender. Termination, er. Radical letters, ofend. Gerund. Offending*, iendo Participle past. Offendcfi, ido. Present. To unite, unir T ermination, ir. Radical letters, un. I Gerund. I Uniting*, iend^ I Participle past. I Unitcci, ido * The Gerundio (gerund) never changes its termination for gender oi number. * The participle past coming immediately after any of the tenses of the verb haher, (to have,) does not admit of any change of gender or number. \fter other vei bs, it changes its termination to agree with that of the person 'ir thing it refers to. First Coijugatioii. i Second Conjugation. . Third Conjugation 442 APPENDIX. uiicerstood of ail inc veros in the imperfect tense. APPENDIX. 443 42 :2 I -TJ ». ^ *13 ^ 9 « 'C — T TJ cj 'TS ^ <13 -a ® ^ C3 ^3 aj .ti .ti '3 .ti 5 s g c s a a CO^-- P ^ ® O ^ O ^ O ^* (^ CO (?! -H ci 00 CJ P ® s 0^0 S -22 R '«j • I > ® „ ® .ti « ® ^ ® .tJ ® ^ § .•§ '3 ‘S 'a p p -I ^ I 3 a a _ a f ^hIsI ^o’^S-3S®P WJP® o ^ o ^ o ^ CO ci >-H ci 00 ci' •S -2 I s S 'T? 'S na '5 -2 ^ 'p a ® ^ -5 ' -® *p p ^ P » 5tt P f® " 1 o ;® ^ o ^ % p I ^ O 5 « o j 5 ® o ^ o x: O '-i(3!?OOC'irHC^CO(Oj -<^ 'Q ® ^ ® ® V ® lll p ® p 0^0 Ph H »“lCiOOC^— ICJOOG^ II' o _ J! ca _a ® o I HH H ffi ^ I sS a; f & 15 p ^ o '5f '© '^O '« '« '© ,60 , .S*22sgjs 4J ■ *3 '?S '5i '-5c» ® q®®_c®s®®’ii® ®SS®Sa 3 SC®S '-H(rjoicoc'irHC}c^?oci Ph o oT ?>> c3 S « a '« '« c S i oT i a i I i >> I e e s s -C ® o " K ^ !*>■ Ph H rH (7i CO C? I=i O o iJ > ^ S ^3 •S si S « C e § *§ 2^0 3 3 ^ (-^ o 3 3 'S -® a « t: - >.'Z o 5 j 5 ® ® vw — o S >» ^^3*0 '** '“S hJOOHJO^OOJO p^c^cioocQrHcicicoci Q O O W > HH o )z; »-i w OJ . s .2 « 'C u: «0 r- ^ iS o d s .r> 'a I -.3 3 f "S I "I -Si J ^ Sc ^ !c i-ij= o»^ OJ 3 O r-MCJCOCJ^C^CO( 7 ? S "3 s ,S g 'S ^ 12 " rj *rt ^ • G "M Z t3 3 3 3 ^ . s s o ^ ® _3 ^ e g- - 3 S ® c <5J ^ ^-3 £ 3 ' rT “ £ ^ :-i d d £ - 3 = £ Qj ^ ^ V - -«S- - £ cT C 5 C s3 ® b 3 ^ (53 >% 3 ^ 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 "* C c = 3"->^"- 3 jD 3 ® S ®S 5 ® 5 cd 5 j ^©5 E^oc^ojco »-tCMCO Tlr-tCSJOOCJ 3"2 3 ® -2 £5 3 S 8 ® ,. 1« -s 2 I o « ^ o R, .G .£,<« 3 ^ -P bo « .“S •^■3 CO ® 3 1 ^ 3.2 --3 2 fJ a 2 eo ® s 3 ^ > S to ^ 3 li-= sS=$ li-l* 4» -3'3 3 4-3 - d -Sfc| I 5 «c II I" r* 3s ® to 3 "3 ^ ® ® ___ 3 . ® -3 >. ^ £ "5 ® 5 ® - c g £ ® = V) 3 = 1; ® ^ ® ® 3! ^ c« ^ ! C tD ^ ; gs I ia tfl S * APPENDIX. 445 , OD . . S *S s e ^ '‘Qj 1 i 7 T s c: I s ^ I ■ ,C5 r s o s u =2 *j 3 . be 3 !? g 2 E “t ^-5 ' S ^ S ^ 1 -=- Ok® O j= V E-, a >H ^ >, gH >. he 2 '-^C'JOOC^fHClCOC^ ^52 ^O > 'il! S T I 1 S .t: . . ®'^ fl « o »« ® .ti flT 3 “ H ’ >» r>^ 2 £ .^‘c ’3 'c 5^ 2 £ o § ® § ^ « H K P« ^ Px H 1 -J (?j CO oi r-; C^ CO . . =0 . . S -S R s e R 53 ^R 14 1 I ■xi ^ ^ ^ no »-k R ®e2 ^ ’' »> .VI -! n •2 .^’2'£'2=i|'3 i "2v-JfSj5§oc5 »® "3 o ® o oi ® j^cgJn ®2 ^o 5 =JD*-^T ^.3 hc^ 00 s E f>f:if E f • hX)3S^£^>»^ ^■ 3 ® 3-5®®=* ^ 33 =® 0 Kr 03=0 *-^(?icoc^.- 5 cicooi R R « R g R R 5^ 2 b 't«f 'i? 'C 8 S 'R 'R 'R 'b 'R 'R 'R 'R « « 'Si Si R R v 2 ® « ’I vS vg h b ^ ^ ^ ^ I -s^. ^ f= § 2 § s £ R 2*^ Ter btinij ghts t an ht a it ai ht a ght ht ai Ter arrrij 06 5 • OU S H ^ Z'c® 3 ^ 3 <0 I O 3 : ' •-HC^COC^r-iGSlCOC^ t-HC>JC 0 (?l»-tC}fOCM 446 APPENDIX. .5® 'Qj S ^ ^ ^ ®® . .< . . s ^ ^ ^ ^ v» v» ^ '^ -C be •p ^ be -r*^ be *p 2 c -^'S 2 _ 3 g S g C 2 O ” S a, S ® e J3 ® O ^ O JS - tc>< ^ 5 h Eh S 2 S3 HQ g -T 3 ’5 2 2 ^ = I g i " ^ TS ^ i.-“ ••§ *JU fl 3 ^ Hrt 2 111 l-S “ H ^ 5? C^ 00 C^ .-t (7J CO CM «6 2 — o H S >- I u .V T3 = J 'H Is H "i (M CO c 4 1 2 J® o ^ >H I S c OA) ^ s C3 S _C O H 2 ® q)q 3 q)q)q>q 3 q'qj '« '« 'C 'S £ § 2 2 ^ s o ^ p cS o ^ Hs ^ *T3 n3 .V n3 ^ p p 'tS p ^ £ tfi eP III! ® ^ “ rs ^ ^ _ 5 ® 5 ® ® £ 2 . > 2 -s: -d JP >* 1 > r»-» *j -•-» : ^ o' £ p ^ >» d ® b ^ b £ ® (M CO (M ^ 01 CO Ol ce > g s t £ 5 S -2 I "£ ® *2 I 2 ! E £ 5 ^ c ® — , ® »H r-! *P c 5 ^ ^ xi ^ •*2 ® ® -p £ 5 f J O Wh ^ O -s 12 « fee *. ® c ‘’t ,< ■5 ’£ sx s o I a I "Soil t,g §.s S W -g (/} 'S £ ■£ ce >- J rt ^ •p p "w S3 p .P c- ® ® -p rt s » I s «) "P p qj «S g ^ £■§ £§ g -^-,2 S ® “ •'d o' S W) 2 ^ b qT ^ ,g c > ° 6 1 1 lltol ® ® "S s a d P< £ APPENDIX, 447 COMPOUND TENSES. Obs. These tenses being formed by placing after the verb haber, (tc nave.) the participle past of the principal verb, or the verb that is conju- gated, only one participle for each conjugation is here given, in all the Reuses INDICATIVE MOOD N 1, p. Perfect, or Preterit Definite It is compounded of the present of the indicative of the verb hahcr, (to have,) and the perfect, or participle past of the verb which is conjugated For brevity’s sake, the English is prefixed only to the first person of all thosfi .onses. / have armed. I have offended. I have united. Yo he arm ado. Yo he ofondido. Yo he unido. 1. He 2. lias 3. Ha 2. V ha I armado ofendido unido. Hemos Habeis Han VV. han { armado. ofendidc. unido / had armed. I had offended. I had united. N. 2, p. Pluperfect. Yo habia armado. Yo habia ofendido. Yo habia unido. 1. Habia 2. Habias 3. Habia 2 V. habia I armado. ofendido. unido Habfamos Habiais Habiaii VV. habian I armado. ofendido. unido. N 3, p. Preterit Indefinite, or Anterior.. I had armed. I had offended. I had united. 1 Hube 2. Hubiste 3. Hubo 2. V. hubo Yo hube armado. Yo hube ofendido. Yo hube unido Hubimos Mubisteis Hubieron VV. hubieron armado ofendido. unido. N. 4, p. Future / shall have armed. I I shall have offended. I shall have united. Definite. Yo habre armado Yo habre ofendido Yo habre unido. 1 Ilabrd 2 . Habras 3. llabrd 2 V. habrd I armado. ofendido unido. Habremos Habre is Habrdn VV habrdn i armado. ofendido unido APPENDIX 148 SUBJUNCTIVE MOCD. N. 6, p. Perfect, or Preterit Definite. / may have armed. I may have offended I may have united 1 Ilaya 2. Hay as 3. llaya 2. V. haya Yo haya armado. Yo haya ofendido Yo haya uaido. Hdyamos Hayais Hayaii VV. hayan armadc. ofendido unido. N. 7, p. * might have armed. I might have offended. I might have united. 1. Hubiera ^ armado. ofendido. unido. 2. Hubieras 3. Hubiera 2 V. hubiera Pluperfect — Termination ier\. Yo hubiera armado. Yo hubiera ofendido. Yo hubiera unido Hubidramos Hubicrais Hubiera n VV. hubierau N. 8, p. Pluperfect — Termination ria. 1 might {would) have armed. I might {would) have offended. I might {would) have united. 1. Habria 2. Habrias 3. Habria 2. V. habria Yo habria ani ado. Yo habria ofendido. Yp habria unido Habriamos Habria is. Habrian VV. habrian Pluperfect — Termination iese. I might have armed. I might have offended. I might have united. 1. Hubiese 2. Hubieses .3. Hubiese 2. V. hubiese armado. ofendido. unido. N. 10, p Should I have armed. Should I have offended. Should / have united. 1 Hubiere 2. Hubieres 3- Huoiere 2 V. hubiere armado. ofendido unido. Yo hubiese armado Yo hubiese ofendido Yo hubiese unido. Hubicsemos Hubiese is Hubiesen VV. iiubiesen. Futt re Definite. Si yo hubiere armado. Si yo hubiere ofendida Si yo hubiere unido. Hubiereinos "1 armado. ofendido unido. Hubidreis Hubiereii VV. hubieren APPENDIX. 449 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. INFINITIVE MOOD PRESENT. To have, I Teller. | Ser. Hibiendo GERUND. Having, I Teiiiendo. | Siendo. PAST PARTICIPLE. To he, Estax Being, Estandc Had, flabida Teiiido. Been Sido. Esiad' INDICATIVE MOOD. N. 1. PRESENT. I have. / am. ] He. Tengo. Soy. Esto*y ? Has. Tienes. Eres. Estas 3 Ha. Tiene. Es Estd. 2 V. ha. V. tiene. V. es. V. esta. 1 Hemos. Tenemos. Somos Estamot 2 Habeife Teneis. Sois. Estais. 3 Han. Tienen. Son Estan 2 VV. han. VV. tienen. VV. son VV estan. N. 2 IMPERFECT TENSE. 1 had. 1 was 1 Habia. Tenia. Era. Estaba. 2 riabias. Tenias. Eras. Estabas. 3 Habia. Tenia. Era. Estaba. 2 V. habia. V. tenia. V. era. V. estaba. 1 Habiamos. Teniamos. Eramos. Estaba mob 2 Habiais. Teniais. Erais. Estabais, 3 Habian. Tenian. Eran. Estaban. 2 VV. habian. VV. tenian. VV. eran. VV. estaban N. 3. PRETERIT. I had / was 1 ITube. Tuve. Fui. Estuve. S Hiibiste. Tuviste. Fuiste. Estuvisle 3 llubo. Tuvo. Fue. Estuvo 2 V. hubo. V. tuvo. V. fud. V. estuVu. 1 Hubimos. Tuvimos. Fuimos. Estuvimos 2 Hubisteis. Tuvisteis. Fuisteis. Estuvisteis. 3 Hubi^ron Tuvi^ron. I Fueron. Estuvidron. VV hubieron. VV. tuvidrou VV. fueron VV. estuvier< 150 APPENDIX N. 4. FUTURE. / shall have. 1 shall he. 1 Habrd. Tendrd. Serd. Estar6. 2. Habrda Tendrds Serds. Estards. 3. Habrd. Tendrd. Serd. Estard. 2 V. habrd. V. tendrd. V. serd. V. estard. 1 Habrdrnos. Tendrdmos. Seremos. EstardmoH. 2. Habrdis. Tendreis. Serdis. Estardis. 3. Ilabrdn. Tendrdn. Serdn. Est^rdn. 2 VV babran VV. tendrdn. VV. serdn. VV. estardL N. 5. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Let me have:' Let me he. 1 Lot me have Tenga yo. Sea. Estd. 2. Have thou. Ten td. Se. Estd. 2. Have not. No tengas. No seas. No estes. 3. Let him have. Tenga el. Sea. Estd. 2. Have. Tenga V Sea V. Estd V. 1. Let us have. Tengamos. Seamos. Estemos. 2. Have ye. Teived. Sed. Estad. 2. Have not. No tengais. No seals. No esteis. 3. Let them have. Tengan. Sean. Esten. 2. Have you. Tengan VV. Sean VV. Esten V^ SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. N. 6. PRESENT / may have. 1 may he. 1 Haya. Tenga. Sea. Estd. 2. Hayas. Tengas. Seas. Estes. 3. Haya. Tenga. Sea. Estd. 2. V. haya. V. tenga. V. sea. V. estd. 1. Hdyamos. Tengamos. Seamos Estemos. 2. Hdyais. Tengais. Seais. Esteis. 3. Hayan. Tengan. Sean. Esten. 2. VV. hayan. VV. tengan. VV. scan. VV. esten N. 7. IMPERFECT TENSE — FIRST TERMINATION. I would have. I would he. 2. Ilubieras. 3. Hubiera. 2. V. hubiera. X. Hubi^ramos. 2. Hubierais. 3 Hiibieran VV. hubieran Tuviera. Tuvieras. T Liviera. V. tuviera. T uviOramos. T uvierais. Tuvieran. VV. tuvieran. Fuera. F ueras. F uera. V. fuera. Fu^ramos. Fu^rais. Fueraii. I VV fueran. Estuviera. Estuvieras. Estuviera. V. estuviera. Estuvi^ramoe. Estuvi^rais. Ectuvieran. VV. estuvidraii APPENDIX 451 N. 8. SECOND TERMINATION / would have. I would be. 1 flabria Tendria. Seria. Estaria. 2 Habrias. Tendrias. Serias. Estarieis. 3 Habria. Tendria. Seria. Estaria. 2. V. habria. V. tendria. V. seria. V. estaria. i. Ilabriamos. Tendriamos. Seriamos. Estariamoa. 2 Habriais. Tendriais. Seriais. Estariais. 3 Habrian. Tendrian. Serial!. Estarian 2 V^V. habrian. VV. tendrian. VV. serial! VV. estarian N. 9. THIRD TERMINATION. i should have. I should be. 1 Hubiese. Tuviese. Fuese. Estuviese. 2 Hubieses. Tuvieses. F ueses. Estuvieses. 3 Hubiese. T uviese. Fuese. Estuviese. 2 V. hubiese. V. tuviese. V. fuese. V. estuviese. 1 Hubidsemos. Tuvi^semos. Fudsemos. Estuviesenios. 2 Hubieseis. Tuvidseis. F ueseis. Estuvieseis. 3 Hubiesen. T uviesen. Fuesen. Estuviesen. 2 V^V. hubiesen. VV. tuviesen. VV. fuesen VV. estuviesen N. 10 FUTURE When I shall have. When I shall be. 1 Hubiere. T uviere. Fuere. Estuviere. 2 Hubieres. Tuvieres. Fueres. Estuvieres. 3. Hubiere. Tuviere. Fuere. Estuviere. 2. V. hubiere V tuviere. V. fuere. • V estuviere. 1. Hubi^remos. T uvidremos. Fudremos. Estuvieremos. 2. Hubidreis. Tuvi^reis. Fuereis. Estuviereis. 3. Hubieren. Tuvieren. Fueren. Estuvieren. 2. VV. hubieren. VV. tuvieren VV. fue'ren. VV. estuvieren. IDIOMATICAL TRANSLATION OF SOME TENSES. present of the infinitive mood, and the (p N. B. — The (i) stands for the for the past participle. I am to (i ) I'hoii art to (i,) &c. I was tc (i,) &.C. i shall be obliged to (i,) &c I have just (p,) &c. ! had just, &c. . am going to (i,) &c. I was going to (i,) &<; He de (i,) (139, 153.) Has de (i,) &c. Hahia de (i,) &c. Habre de (i,) &c. Acaho de (i,) acabas de (i,) &c (21 1 Acababa de (i,) acabahis de (i,) &c Voy d (i,) vas d (i,) va d (i.) Vamos d (i,) vais d (i,) van d (i.) Iba d (i,) ibas d (i,) iba d (i,) 452 APPENDIX To (v) again, &c I liked to have (p.) To be near. ) _ . , To come near. ^ V^rUaple To be about (p. oi i.) To be to (i.) It is? to be observec. ' Voocer a (i,j Vuelvo a (i,) tuelves a (i,) nutlvt ^ rt (i.) Volvemos d (i,) volveis d Tk) tuil ^ ven d (i.) I Estuve para (i.) ^ £ Estar d pique de (i.) < Estar d panto de (i.) ( Estar para (i.) Estar para. Ser de, Haber de. Deher Es de notar. Se ha de notar Debe notarse. TABLE SHOWING HOW TO PLACE THE DIFFERENT PRONOUNS IN A SENTENCE, (69 ) fil me le (los, la, las, lo) da. no te le (los, la, las, lo) envia. ^Nosle (los, la, las, lo) ofrece el ? No os le (los, la, las, lo) trae ^1? V. no se le (los, la, las, lo) promete. A VERB AFFIRMATIVELY, NEGATIVELY, I recompense, or do recompense. | I do not recompense. | Do I recompense? | Do I not recompense ? | I have corresponded. I I have not corresponded. | Have I corresponded? | Have I not corresponded? | AND INTERROGATIVELY CONJUGATED. Recompenso. Yo no recompenso, or No recompenso. I Recompenso 7 or i Recompenso yo i I No recompenso 7 or I No recompenso yo 7 He correspondido. No he correspondido. I He correspondido 7 or I He correspondido yo 7 I No he correspondido yo 7 PASSIVE VERBS. (175.) Passive verbs are formed from active-transitive verbs ny adding their par- ticiple past, or passive, to tne auxiliary verb ser, (to be,) through all ni changes, as in English ; thus, from the active verb amar, (to love,) is formed the passive verb ser amado, (to be loved.) Obs. A. The participle must agree in gender and number with the nominative it refers to ; consequently it changes the o into a when the fub- ject is feminine, and adds s for the plurai ; thus, He is loved. She is loved. Von are loved SINGULAR. El es amado. Ella es amada. V. es amado, (amada.) APPENDIX. 453 They are loved. They are loved. You are loved. PLURAL. Elios son amados. Ellas son atnadas, VV. son amadoSy (amadas.) Ohs. B. Ill the compound tenses the participle of the principal verb ia lli 0 only one that admits the change ; the participle of the auxiliary verb JO bo (been, sido) is unchangeable ; n 3 has been rewarded. They have been rewarded. She had been admired. They had been admired. You could have been employed. You could have been assisted. El ha sido premia do, Elios han sido premiados. Ella habia sido admirada, Ellas hahian sido admiradas. V. hahria sido empleado, {emple- ada.) VV. habrian sido asistidos, {asistu das.) Obs. C. Passive impersonal verbs, and those referring to inanimate c b- jects or things, are translated by placing the verb which is in the participle past in English, in the same person and number in which the verb to be is in the English sentence, placing the pronoun se before it ; thus. This ship was built in less than three months — Esta fragata se construyo en menos de Ires meses, instead of fue construida. It is said — Se dice, instead of Es dicho. PRONOMINAL, OR REFLECTIVE VERBS. A pronominal, or reflective verb, is that which has the same person or thing as subject and object ; as, He arms himself. | El se arma a si mismo. These verbs terminate their present of the infinitive mood by the pronoun se, which must be suppressed in order to find out the conjugation ; thus — To approach. I Acer car se. To be sorry | Dolerse. To repent. | Arrepentirse. Taking off the se we here have, acercar, 1st conjugation; doler, 2d conju- Ration ; and arrepentir, 3d conjugation. (80.) These verbs are conjugated by placing the pronouns me, te, se, se, nos, os, se, se, according to the number and person of the nominative they refer to, immediately before the verb, if the subject be expressed before it ; and either before or after the verb, if the subject be not expressed or placed after it When they are placed after the verb they must be written so as to 'brm one word with it. In the imperative mood they are always placed after the verb, which sup- presses the s in the fir&t person plural, and the d in the second person of the Game number. When the second person singular or plural is used with the adverb no, the pronouns are placed before the verb. Examples: — i54 APPENDIX. 1. I congratulate myself. 2. Thou congratulatest thyself. 3 He congratulates himself. 2, You congratulate yourself. 1 We congratulate ourselves. 2 You congratulate yourselves. 3 They congratulate themselves You congratulate yourselves \ 1 had congratulated myself. 2 I have armed myself. 3. They had flattered themselves. IMPERA Behave (thou) well. Behave (you) well Behave not ill. Behave (you) not ill. Let us prepare ourselves. Yo me congratulo. Tu te congratulas El se congratula, V. se congratula, Nosotros nos congraiulamo$ Vosotros os congratulais. Elios se congratulan, VV. se congratulan. Me hahia congratulado. Yo me he armada. Elios se habian lisonjeado MOOD. Portate hien. Portdos hien, (the a is suppressed.) No te portes mal No os porteis mal. Preparemonos. (The s is suppressed, i GERUND.-~GferM7^^^^o. The Gerund is that part of the verb that terminates in undo in the verba of the first conjugation, and in iendo in those of the second and third ; as, puhlicando, (publishing,) from publicar ; prometiendo, (promising,) from prometer; asistiendo, (assisting,) from asistir. It does not admit any change of gender or number. It is translated by the English present participle, and conjugated with tlie verb estar, (to be ;) as. Anastasia estd leyendo, y Maria Ana estd tocando el piano. Anastasia is reading, and Maria Ann is playing on the piano. It is used also absolutely ; as, By practising virtue thou wilt be happy I In such cases it may be expressed by the corresponding tense of its vero and even by the noun derived from it ; as, Practicando la virtud, serdsfeliz Columbus discovered the new world in the reign of Isabella, the Catho- lic, and under her auspices. Reinando Isabel, la Catohea, y hajo sus auspicios. Colon descuhrio el Nuevo Mundo, (or cuando reinaba Isabel, or en el reinado de Isabel.) PARTICIPLE. The passive or past participle terminates in ado in the first conjugatioii ind in idc in the second and third. It changes its termination according to the number and gender of the person it refers to ; except when it follows immediately after the verb haher, or any other auxiliary, in which case it does not admit of any change APPENDIX. 45D All passive participles that do not terminate in ado regular ; such are the following, from the verbs — or ido are To open. ahriry abicrto. To cover. cubrir. cubierto* To say, deciTy dicho. To write. escribir, escrito To fry. freivy frito. To do, hacevy hccho. To print. imprimiry impreso To die, morivy muerto To solve, solveVy sueito. To see. very visto. To put. ponevy puesto. To turn, volvevy vuelto. Tlieir compounds have the same irregularity Obs. The participles past of haheVy ser, esiary and tenery do not ad- Dili any variation. The firsi and the last had it formerly. VERBS THAT HAVE TWO PARTICIPT.FS. There are some verbs that have two passive pariicipleSy the one regulai fold the other irregular. They are contained in the following list, in whicli, tor brevity’s sake, the irregular participle only is expressed. To surfeit. ahitavy ahito. To bless, hendecivy bendito. To compel. compeler, comp also To conclude. concluiTy concluso. To confuse. confundivy confuso. To convince. convencevy convicto. To convert. convertivy converse. To awake. dcspertavy despierto To elect. elegify electo. To wipe, enjugavy enjuto. To exclude. excluivy excluso To expel. expeleVy expulso. To express. expresaVy expreso. To extinguish. extinguivy extinto. To fix. fijfiry To satiate. hartary harto. To include. incluiry incluso. To incur, incurrivy incurso. To insert. in^ertary inserto. To invert. invertir ’nverso. To ingraft, ingerify ingerto. To join, untavy iunto. To cniso, maldecvr maldiU 456 APPENDIX. To manifest. manifestart manijiesto. To fade, mar chit ar. marchito To omit, omitirf omiso. To oppress. oprimir^ opreso. To perfect, perfeccionary perfecto To arrest, prendeTy preso. To prescribe, prescribir, prescrito To provide. proveery provisto. To shut up. recluiry recluso To break. romper, roto. To loosen. soltar, suelto. To suppress. supriinhy supreso. To suspend. suspendery suspenso. The regular participles of these verbs are used to form the coinpouuc tenses with haher ; as, He has awaked early. | El ha dispertado temprano. The irregular participles are used as verbal adjectives, and with the vertii s'cr, &c., and do not form compound tenses with haber ; excepting preso, vrescritOj provisio, roto, and a few others ; as, He is early awaked. I El estd despierto temprano. They have provided. | Elios han provisto, (proveido,) ADVERBS. Adverbs are formed from adjectives of one termination by adding to them mente ; as, dulce, dulcemente : and from those of two terminations by add- ing mente to the feminine ; as, gracioso, graciosamente. They admit tbo superlative ; as, graciosisimamente. When two or more adverbs ending in ly occur in the same sentence, the termination mente is added to the last only ; as. He speaks elegantly and correctly. 1 El habla correcta y elegantementf A FEW OF THE ADVERBS. Here, aedy aqui. Well, bien. There, alld, alliy ahi. 111, mal. Near, cerca. More, mas Far, lejos. Less, menos. Where, dondey adonde. Much, mucho. Within, dentro. Little, poco. Without, fuera. Already, ya. Vp, arriba. Often, d menudo. Down, abajo. To-day, hoy. Before, delante. Yesterday, ayer. Behind, detras. To-morrow, mahana. Upon, encima. Last night, anoche. Under, debajo. Now, ahora APPENDIX. 457 PreseiUlj luego Thus, aai. Late, tarde. Very, muy. Early, temprano. Even, aun. Always, siernpre. Yes, si. Never, nunca, jamas. No, nor. noy ni SOME ADVERBIAL EXPRESSKINS. All “fours. d gatas. Across, de traces. in heaps, d montones. Suddenly, de repents Hardly, d penas. Gratis, de balde. At once. de una vez. Indeed, de veraa. Sometimes, d veces. Softly, poco d poco. On credit. d plazo. Behold, he aquiy or alii PREPOSITIONS. The most frequent are — At, to, for, A. Towards, hdcia. Before, dntes, ante Until, hasta. With, con. For, to, para. Against, contra. By, for, through, por. Of, from. de. According, seguru From, desde. Without, sin. ^n, on, at. en. On, upon. sobre. Between, among, entre. Behind, tras, detras. The following prepositions require de after them, when they are followed oy a noun or pronoun ; as — That man ( comes after. I Ese hojnhre viene ! despues. Sir, he will go after you. | Ne/ior, el ird despues de V k d cercay al rededor, en torno. About, ( d cerca dcy al rededor de, en torno de. Before, dnieSy delante. Within, in. dentro. Above, up. cncima. After, despues. Below, ahajo. Behind, detras, tro3. Under, bajo. Beneath, debajo. Out of. fuera. Opposite, enfrente Near, cerca. On, upon. encima. CONJUNCTIONS. They are classed as follows : — COPULATIVE. Moreover, ademas. That, que. And, y or i, e * Also, tamhien. Neither, nor. ni.^ ^ K is used instead of y when the following word begins with i or hi » as, W ise men and ignorant. I Sabios e ignorantea. Mother and daughter. | Madre e kija. Neither he nor she went out, m el ni ella salieron. 20 458 APPENDIX. DISJUNCTIVE Or, either, ) Whether, \ Whether, either. o, M, ya. sea que. tampoco ADVERSATIVE. Bjt, E-van, maSf pero. \ aun cuando f aurii cuando. Although, though, aunque. fJecause, Why ? Since, By, for. Therefore, Alas ! Ah! Wo to me . Lo! Well! Holla . porque, que. I porque ? pues, pues que. por. par tanto. Whereas, por cuanU That, pa>i'a que That, C para quo In order that, \dfin de If, But, Provided, Unless, Since, As, So, CONDITIONAIh sL sino. con tai que. J a menos de \ d menos que CONTINUATIVE. pueSf pues to aui COMPARa f iTE. comoy ast coma, asi. ; Ay • ; Ah ! ; Ay de mi ! ; He : / Ea ! ; Ola / INTERJECTIONS. Take care ! / Tate ! Hurrah ! ; Viva ! Here ! / Cc ! Fie! i Puf ! God grant. / Ojald ' ANALOGY. PJLES TO TRANSLATE MANY OF THE ENGLISH AND SPANISH WORDS HAVING THI SAME GREEK OR LATIN ORIGIN 1. Words in fl, e, aZ, ar, ble, ion, sion, sts, are the same in both Ian» gnages; as, diploma, epitome, vital, solar, durable, opinion, adhesion^ analysis. 2. Words in ant, ent, ient, add an e; as, observant, ohservante ; regent, ngcnte; ohoAiewi, obediente. 3. Words in ect, ic, id, il, add an o; as, select, selecto ; critic, critico ; plscid, pldcido ; tranquil, tranquilo* 4 Words in ance or ancy change it into ancia ; and those in ence oi into encia ; as, tolerance, toler ancia ; constancy, prudence, adolescency. 5. Words in acy, amy, emy, logy, ody, omy, ory, asy, esy, change the \ V is employed instead of d, when the word immediately folVwmg t? hcgms with o or ho as,— Si.Ver or gold 1 Plata ti oro APPENDIX. 459 mlo J ; as, efficacy, infanij', academy, mytholc^y, melody, economy, theory fantasy, courtesy — ejicacia, ^c. 6. Those in cky change it into quia ; and those in phy into p.a ; as, monarchy, monarquia ; philosophy , filosojia. 7. Words in ice change it into icia ; as, avarice, avaricia. 8 Words in inc, ivcy ire^ change e into o ; as, divine, active, severe — ^'vino, ^c. 9. Those in tion change it into cion ; as, constitution, constitucion. 10. Words in ty change it into dad, and sometimes add ad instead of the y 'j as, activity, actividad; majesty, magestad. 11. Words in ary, ery, ory, change the y into io ; as, anniversary, «/«• vcrsario ; baptistery, bautisterio ; laboratory, laboratorio. 12. Words in ous or ious, change ous into oso ; as, famous, fainoso ; delicious, delicioso. 13. Latin words beginning with s followed by a consonant, either lose the s, or add an e ; as, scientia, ciencia ; spiritus, espiritu. 14. Proper nouns in us change it into o ; as, Publius, Publio ; Titus, Tito, (348.) Those in er change it into ro ; as, Alexander, Alejandro. Those in o add n ; as, Cicero, Ciceron. Those in es or on are the same in both languages. Nouns having the diphthongs (b, cb, retain the e only ; as, Mwoos, Eneas ; CEdipus, Edipo ; Caesar, Cesar. SYNTAX. Syntax principally consists of two parts, Concord {Concordancia) and Government, ( Regimen.) Concord is the agreement which one word has with another in gender, * Agreement is the similarity of words in number, gender, &c As the articles and adjectives admit of no variation of either in English, it will bo proper to explain here what that word imports and requires in Spaiiish, V hich will be better understood by the following examples : — The rich man The rich men. The rich woman. The rich women. A just man. Some just men. A just woman. Some just women. El hombre rico. Los h ombres ricos La mujer rica. Las mujeres ricas Un hombre Unos homhres justos Una mu]eT jusia. Unas mu}eres Justus It will be observed by these examples, that the article the ha& no change Ji English, and that el has four in Spanish. The same is the case with tlm sdjectives rich &nd just, and with the articles un and unos. ^60 APPENDIX, aumber, case, or person. Gcvernment is tha power which one part oi speech has over another in directing its mood, tense, or case. The follow- ing rales contain the most important of both. OF THE ARTICLE. Rule 1. The article must agree in number, gender, and case, with the toun to wnich it refers ; as, Quiet sol .tude, pleasant fields, serene weather, purling streams, and tranquillity of mind contribute very much to the fecundity even of the most barren genius. El sosiegOj el lugar apacihle, la amenidad de los campoSf la sere- nidad de los cielos, el murmurar de las fuentes, la quietud del es- piritu son grande parte para que las musas mas esteriles se mues- tren fecundas Don Quijote, prol., pt. i. Obs, i. The nouns agua, (water,) aguilay (eagle,) acta, (act, recorc ) ancla, (anchor,) diay (wing,) almay (soul,) ave, (bird,) ama, (the mistress of a house, a housekeeper,) and a few others, though feminine, require the masculine article, but oniy in the singular number, and when they are im- mediately preceded by ii. They quenched their thirst in the I Elios hehieron del agua del arroyo. v.^ater of the rivulet. j Don Quijote, cap. xviii. pt. l Some other nouns feminine beginning with a, or Aa, having the first Byllable long, are frequently used in the singular with the masculine article. This use, however, is not generally sanctioned ; and the greatest number of the classic writers follow the rule laid down by the Spanish Academy, that excepts only the above nouns. Rule 2. The English indefinite article before national nouns, as well as before those that signify the dignity, profession, trade, condition, &c., ol persons, in the titles of books and other performances, and in exclamations, is not translated into Spanish ; as. The Monserrate of Cristobal de Vi- rues, a Valencian poet. It was certainly known that Don Juan de Austria was appointed a general of the league. And ending in Zoilus or Zeuxis, though one was a backbiter, and the other a painter. What a pity ! El Monserrate de Cristobal de Vi- rueSy poeta Valenciano, Don Quijote, cap. vi. pt i. Se supo por cierto que venia por General desta liga Don Juan de Austria. Ditto, cap. xxxix. Y acabando en Zoilo, 6 Zeuxis, aunque fue maldiciente el uno, y pintor el otro. Ditto, Pref. / Que lastima .' Obs. 2. If the indefinite article be immediately followed by an udjec e omitted ; as. This broadcloth is worth ten dollars a yard. Butter sells at two shillings a pound. Este paiio vale diez pesos vara, (or d diez pest s la vara, or iiez pe» SOS por vara.) La manteca (mantequilla) se vendt d dos reales libra, {la libra, ( r por libra,) Rule 7. The English definite article before ordinal numbers, when they are immediately preceded by a substantive, in quotations, divisions of books, names of dignity, &c., is omitted in Spanish ; as, Book the first, chapter the second, section the fifth, &c. The invincible Charles the Fifth. Lihro primero, capitulo segundo, pdrrafo quinto. EL invictisimo Carlos quinto. i D. Quijote, cap. xxxix. Obs. 5. When the English definite article precedes an adjective used as an epithet before the nouns above stated. It must be translated ; as. Augustus Caesar v/ould have been in the wrong had he consented to the /execution of what the divine Mantuan ordered on his death- bed. No hubiera acertado Augusto Cesar si consintiera que se pusiera en ejecucion lo que el divino Mantu- ano dejo en su testamento orde- nado. D. Quijote, cap. xiii. Rule 8 The article a, and the adjective one, are not translated before hundred, thousand, million, half, &c. ; as. In the year one thousand, one hun- dred and one. fie asks, or wants one yard and a En el aho de mil, ciento, y uno. El necesita, or quiere vara y media- half. Rule 9. Proper names of persons and of countries do not admit the irticle ; the former, however, in a colloquial and very familiar use, take it ; as. She was called Tolosa. I Se llamaba la Tolosa. I Don Quijote, cap. iii. Obs. 6. The nouns muerte, (death,) cielo, (heaven,) and the like namejfej lake the article, except in exclamations or direct speeches ; as, the power of death be your sub- iect, apply “ Pallida, morsf &c. Si tratdredes delpoder de la muerte^ acudid luego con ** Pallida mors,** &c D. QurioTE, Prdlogo APPENDIX. 468 Remark. *' It is the rule of our language^ (the Castilian,) that proper ^ouns are net accompanied hy articles; excepting la Mancha, la Cc- kuna, la Habana.” — (Grammar of the Castilian Language, by the Roya; Spanish Academy, part ii., ch. vi.) The preceding rule has been given in (?onformity with this decision of the Academy, which may be used as foi-lows : — The names of the countries that are not qualified by the adjectives cld ci uew, upper or lower, &c., expressed or understood, are generally used with- out the article ; as, Mexico. Mejico. | Malta. Malta. The nam'^s of ihe countries that are lives, when these are not expressed) article; America, or la Americ Andalucia, (alta or baja.) When tl the article. The following are exceptions, and Brazil. Canada. Paraguay. Peru. A province of New Castile. Barbadoes. Florida. Ferrol. Corunna. Havana, &c. qualified by the said, or other adjec- may be used with or without the , (norte or sud.) Andalucia, or la ) adjective is expressed they require iiust always be used with the article. El Brasil. El Canada. El Paraguay El Peru. La Alcarria. La Barbada. La Florida. El Ferrol. La Coruna. La. Habana, ^c. The article is omitted in the dates of letters written in the places above excepted. Obs. 1. Proper names of mountains and rivers take the definite mas- culine article, without regard to their termination ; as, Those who feea their flocks upon the f^pacious meads of the meandering Guadiana ; those who shiver with the chib’ blasts of the whistling Pyrenees Los que su ganado apacientan en las extendidas dehesas del toHu- oso Guadiana ; los que tiem'olan con el frio del silboso Pirineo. Don Quijote, cap. xviii. Rule 10. When several nouns come together in English, with an arti- cle before the first of them only, the article is repeated before every one, specially when they are of different genders, and a particular emphasis is ^aced on them. When they are used in English without any article, the p of the article. A few examples may elucidate this remark. To set up a store. To open the store. To encourage, to support. To die. To miss one’s aim. To be successful. To have an evil tongue. To have lh3 tongue sore. Abrir tienda, Abrir la tienda Dar alma, Dar el alma. Dar en blancn. Dar en el blantm. Teller mala lengua, Tener mala la lengua. OF THE NOUN AND THE ADJECTIVE. ULE 15. — The adjective must agroa with the substantive in gender ant dumber; as, The valiant boy. I El muchacho valiente The handsome girls. j Las muchachas hermosas. avpj:ndix. 465 Obs. 9- An adjective qualifying^ two or more nouns or {Toiiouiis ci differ- #nt genders, in the singular, agrees 11 the plural ; as, The father and the son are rich. The rnolher and the daughter are handsome. He and she are generous. I’iie house and the garden are mag- nificent. with them in the masculine terminatioa El padre y el liijo son ricos. La madre y la kija son hcrtnosna. El y ella son generosos. La casa y eljardin son magnificos. Ohs. 10. Two or more adjectives qualifying a plural noun, which sign>fiefi them as separately considered, agree with it in the singular ; as, She is unexcelled by Helen, unri- valled by Lucretia, or any other heroine of ages past, whether Gre- cian, Roman, or Barbarian. A ella no la llega Elena^ ni la al~ canza Lucreciaf ni otra alguna de las famosas mujeres, que vi- vieron en las edades pretcritas, griega, latina, 6 bdrbara. Don Quijote, cap. xxv. Ohs. 11. An adjective qualifying two or more nouns of inanimate objects or things, having different gender and number, generally agrees with the nearest ; as, A union which the equality of our family and riches seemed to point out. Union que casi la conceriaoa In igualdad de nuestro linaje, y riquezas Don Quijote, cap. xxiv Ohs. ly. A noun of the feminine gender in the plural, being in the same phrase with a noun masculine in the singular, having but one adjective, tin adjective agrees in tlia plural, and in the masculine termination, if the vero agrees with the plural noun ; as. His promises and his oath have been I Sus promesas y su juramento han false. I sido falsos. i!n such cases it is better to place the plural noun next the adjective, and make the agreement with it ; thus — Su juramento y sus promcsas han sido falsas. Rule 16. — An adjective qualifying two or more plural nouns or pronouns, of different genders, agrees with them in the masculine termination in the Dlu'al ; as, toth the brothers and sisters are I Tanto los hermanoSf como las her* chk\ri,table. | manas son caritativos. Obs. 13. This rule is strictly ooserved when the nouns or pronouns signify animate objects ; but when the nouns signify inanimate objects or things classic authors, both ancient and modern, generally make the adjective agree with the nearest substantive ; as. 466 APPENDIX. r Sus temores y esperanzas fueron vanat J Sus esperanzas y temores fueron vanos. ' ) Vanas fueron sus esperanzas y temores. L Vanos fueron sus temores y esperanzas Dichosas eran mis horas, mis diaa y mis aiios. y Don Quijote, cap. liii. pt i Rule 17. — An adjective referring to listed, (you,) Usia, (your lordship or ladyship,) &c., must agree in gender with that of the person spoken of ox to, without any regard to the termination of these nouns ; as, llis fears and hopes were vain. ' Happy were my hours, my days, and my years. If your lordship would be pleased to bestow on me, &c. V our worship must be out of your senses, said Sancho. Si vuestra Sehoria fuese servido dt darme, ^c. Don Quijote, cap. xlii. pt. ii. Vuestra merced dehe de ser men- guado, dijo Sancho, Ditto, ditto. Rule 18. — The English possessive case with the ’s, is translated b\ imitting the ’s, setting the preposition de (of) before the word to which the A^as annexed, and placing the noun which is the last in the English sentence ^he first in the Spanish translation, with the corresponding article ; and re* rersing hi the same manner the order of the other nouns ; as, He has read Pope’s works. ^ El ha leido las ohras de Pope. He has read the works of Pope. If there be more than two substantives, the last in English must be the first in Spanish ; as, La casa del compahero de su Ae?- mano. His brother’s partner’s house. Ohs. 14. In English the sign ’s is frequently used instead of the noun of a place, house, office, store, &c., where a thing has happened or been done, which being omitted by ellipsis, it is perfectly understood by the whole of the sentence ; but the noun thus omitted must always be expressed in Spanish ; as. Sancho figured to himself that ho would find at her’s, (the duchess’s house,) what he had found at Don Diego’s and Basil’s. A Sancho se le figuraha que hah i de hallar en ella, (la casa de la duquesa,) lo que hahia hallado cn la casa de Don Diego, y en la da Basilio. Don Quijote, cap. xxxi. pt. ii Role 19. — Common nouns of the masculine gender, in the plural nuinbas’, ar« frequently used to express both genders ; as. riio duke and duchess, extremely satisfied with the chase, returned to their castle. Satisf echos los dvques de la caxa volvieron a su castillo, Don Quijote, cap. xxxv APPENDIX. 467 R(/le 20. —Adjectives si^iiilYing dimension, such as deep, high, low ktmg, wide, thick, &-c., require the preposition de between them and tli€ lumber, and also after the substantive they refer to ; and the verb to he w fransiated by tener, (290 ;) as, They have a room twenty-four feet long twelve wide, and fifN^en high. Elios tienen un aposento (cuarto) de veinticuatro pies ae largo, doa de ancho y quince de alto. The adjectives in such cases are used only in the singular number, and ta the masculine gender. Obs. 15. When the nouns, length, width, height. See., ire made use of, ?iiey must be preceded by the preposition de ; and they may be translated as substantives or adjectives ; as, The Giralda of Seville is 300 feet i height. La Giralda de Sevilla tiene 300 de pies alto, (or de altura.) Rule 21. — The adjective is to be always placed after the noun or nouns t qualifies ; as. Take notice, doctor, that from hence- forth you need not to take the trouble to provide dainty and deli- cate dishes for me. Mirad, doctor, de aqui adelante no os cureis de darme d comer cosas regaladas, ni manjares exquisites. D. Quuote, cap. xlix. pt. ii. Ohs. 16. When a particular emphasis is laid on the adjective, it is gene- rally placed before the substantive ; as. Tlie limpid fountains and murmuring rills afforded them their savory and transparent waters in magnificent abundance. Las claras fuentes, p corrienics rios enmagnijica abundancia sabrosas y iransparentes aguas les ofrecian, D. Quuote, cap. xi. pt. i. When one of tvo or more adjectives qualifying a substantive is more em- phatically used than the other, or others, it is generally placed before the noun, and the other adjective after it ; as. My good young lady, have pity on a I Caritativa Senorita mia, compade- poor fugitive slave. ceos de una pohre. esclava fugt’ tiva. De Alea. Rule 22. — The adjectives uno, (one,) alguno, (some,) ninguno, (none,) are always placed before their substantives ; and when they are immediate- ly followed by a masculine noun, or adjective in the singular, they drop the 0 The same do hueno, malo, (12,) primero, and tercero, (46.) Grande, (97, 261,) ciento, (139,) and santo suppress the last syllable ; as, Asl was one day in Mercers street, in Toledo. ^Itiiough the composition of it cost | me some trouble. I Estando yo un dia en el Alcana de Toledo. D. Qutjote, cap. ix. Aunque me costo algun trabajc componerla. Ditto, Preface. Obs. 17. Uno drops the o also before substantives in the plural ; ar, They could not find x>ne in twenty- one days. Elios no pudieron h'lllar unc en vo intiun dias. APPENDIX. 168 OF THE PRONOUN. Rulk 23. — The personal pronouns subject ^ or in the nominatiTe cqfo, arc frequently omitted, (14,) especially in colloquial style, unless a paiticulal emphasis is laid on them, or it is necessary to express them in order to avoid ambiguity, which may happen by their omission in the first ana third persoi' singular of the imperfect tense of the indicative, and of the mperfecl ten-ie of the subjunctive mood of all the verbs ; as, Pensaba co nprar la casa wliich phrase may signify, “ I thought, or he thought to buy the house,” fo, the want of the pronouns yo or el, iVe know that thou wast at Algiers Sahiamm nue estabas en Argel. D. Quijote, cap. xli. Yo velo cuando tu duermeSi yo lion cuando tu cantos. Ditto, ?ap. xl. pt. ii. Rule 24. — Me, thee, him, &c., must be translated me, te, le, 6lc., when they are the immediate object of the verb ; as, I watch while thou art sleeping, I weep while thou art singing. As soon as she saw me, she told me, bo not uneasy, my friend. Asi como clla me vie me dijo : no te turbes, amigo. D. Quijote, cap. xxvii. Aquien se humilla, Dios ie ensalza Ditto, cap. xi. Obs. 18. Him, her, them, you, (when referring to usted,) being thf direct object of a pronominal or reflective verb, must be translated se ; as. He that is humble, God will exalt. And a great friend of his dressed himself also as a shepherd. Y juntaynente se vistio con el de pastor otro su grande amigo. D. Quijote, cap. xiv. Obs. 19. Me, him, her, you, &c., being the indirect objective, or com- plement of a verb governed or preceded by a preposition expressed or un- derstood, are translated mi, el, ella, Pronouns, p 70.) Except should the preposition be d, for then they are generally translated me, le, &c., without the preposition, and frequently re- peated with it before mi and el, to give more energy to the phrase ; as. El supo la partida, y no de mi. D. Quijote, cap. xliii. Por ella deje la casa de mi padre. Ditto, ditto. Tienele aqui encantado, como itu tiene d mi. Ditto, cap. xxiii. pt. ii. Rule 25. — As him, her, it, them, you, (usted,) may be in English lh« ci)jtct or the complement of a verb, particular care must be taken to distin* guish these cases. When they are the object of the verb they are trans- lateti le, la, los, or las, according to the gender and number of the noun oi pronoun they stand for When they are the comDlement, or indirect objec He was informed of the departure, though not by mo. For her 1 forsook my father’s house. He k^eps him here enchanted, as well as myself. APPENDIX. 469 live casoj they must be expressed by h in the sinjjular, and Us in the pluial, for both genders ; eis, He prostrated him on the ground. The companions who saw them sc AnJ we who know her. Quixote called Sancho to give him his helmet. The hostess recounted to them what had happened in her house be- tween him and the muleteer. Don Quixote asked her what was her name. But the deeds which they (the maids) had seen kept their mirth under the rein. El le derriho en el suelo. D. Quuote, cap. iii. Los companeros que tales los vieron Ditto, Jitto. Y los que la conocemos. Ditto, cap. xii. Don Quijote llamd a. Sancho qu*. viniese d darle la celada. Ditto, ditto. La huespeda les conto lo que con el y con el arriero les hahia aconte- cido. Ditto, cap. xxxii pt. i. Don Quijote le pregunt.6 como se llamaba. Ditto, caj . iii. Pero las proezas que ya habian visto (las doncellas) les tenian la visa d raya. Ditto, ditto. In order to prevent the ambiguity that in some phrases may result, the pronouns H ella, &c., are repeated ; as, He delivered the letter to him, (to | El le entrego la carta d el, {a ella.) hei.) I Rule 26. — Mismo (self) is sometimes added to the nouns or pronouns to give them particular energ)” It changes its termination, like any otner ad- jective, according to the number and gender of the noun or pronoun it re- fers to, and is placed near it ; as. Without money, Alexander himself 1 Sin hacienda Alejandro mismo pa- must have seemed frugal. reciera estrecho. I D. Quijote, cap. xxxix. Rule 27. — The neuter pronoun it, is used in English to repre.«5ent objects or things that by nature are neither male nor female ; and even animals, when their gender is not known. In Spanish all common nouns are either masculine or feminine, as has been explained in treating of gender ; con- sequently the pronoun it, and its plural them, must be translated el, ellos ella, ellas, with the respective variation of the cases of said persons. The scholar, therefore, must be careful to ascertain the gender and case of the noun to which it refers in English before translating said pronoun ; as, He read the project, and approved it. El leyo el proyecto, y le aprobo. She received the letter, and answer- Ella recibio la carta, y la contesto. ed it. Obs. 20.-T— When the pronoun it is redundant in a phrase, it must not be Uanslated. It is redundant when it is used instead of the words that after the verb, and which constitute its subject or object : as. 470 APPENDIX. It is a matter of constant experience, that bodily exercise is conducive to health. Es materia de constantc experitneta que el ejercicio corporal es condu' cente d la salud. In which phrase the natural order is: that bodily exercise is conducive to healthy is a matter of constant experience. It, referring to the verbs, or to phrases and sentences to which no gendei can be applied, is translated bj the pronoun lo ; and when it is to be placed after a preposition in Spanish, by ello The gallant shepherd begged him to accompany them to their tents ; Don Quixote was fain to comply with ity and accordingly did it so. Whoe'^ er spends his time ill, sooner or later will repent of it. It, in the impersonal verbs (as has lated ; as. It rains, llueve. ; as, El gallardo pastor le pidio que se viniese con el d sus tiendas ; hii- bolo de conceder Don Quijoie, y asi lo kizo. D. Quijote, cap xlviii. pt. ii. Quienquiera que en plea mai cl tiempo, tarde 6 tempranc se arre- pentird de ello. been already explained) is not trails- I It is cold, kace frio, In the phrases it is said, they say, it is rumored, &c., the pronouns it and they are not translated : the verb is placed in the third person singular, pre- fixing the pronoun se to it, or in the third person plural without any pro- noun ; as, As they say, let the dead go to the Y como dicen, vdyase el muerto d bier, and the living to good cheer. la sepultura, y el vivo d la hoga- za. Don Quijote, cap. xix. Rule 28. — When two or more objective cases of the pronouns occur in the same phrase, they must be arranged in the following order: se is to be placed before all others; then me, te, nos, or os; in the third place, le, los la, las, les ; and el, ella, &c., with a preposition, the last of all ; as. He gave it (a book) to them. | El se le (un libro) did d ellos. Rule 29. Whe^ coming immediately after its antecedent, is translated que ; when it stand? by itself, or is governed by a preposition, it is rendered by quien; as, Sancho came out to receive the Sancho salio d ver Lo que te man- commands of Don Quixote, who | daba Don Quijote, que estaba had sat down upon a bench. ! sentado solve un poyo. Don Quijote, cap. lix. pt. ii. •V student to whom you imparted Un estudiante d quien disteis^uenta your intentions, was he who dis- | de vuestros pensamientos fue el closed it. I que lo descubrio. I Don Quijote, cap. xliv. pt. ii. W/iio/i, that, or any other two relative pronouns, being in the same sen- tence, tlie second may be translated cual, with the corresponding article APPENDIX. 471 Co avoid the repetition of the same pronoun, unless a particular emphasis is placed on it; as, The first person (whom) I met, his father, who said to me. La prunera persona con quien cn- contre fue su padre, el cual me dijo. Don Quijote, cap. xli. Ohs, 21. When these pronouns are governed by a preposition, whom is Sisually translated quien or ewaZ, with reference to persons ; and que^ and sometimes cual, with the corresponding article, speaking of animals or things ; as, Indeed, Signior Don Luis, it suits well to whom -you are the dress you wear, and the bed in which you now lie Por ciertOf Sefior Don Luis, que corresponde Men d quien vos sois cl hdbito quo tends, y la cama en que os hallo Don Quijc te, cap. xliv. Rule 30 . — He who, she who, they who, those who, are translated el que, la que, los que, las que, and sometimes, for the sake of energy, aquel que, &c. ; as, Asi ella como el quo la acompahaba Don Quijote, cap. xxxvii. Don Fernando y los que con el ve~ nian. Ditto, cap. xxxvi. Obs. 22. What, when it is the same as that which, is translated lo que ; Both she, and he who accompanied her. Don Fernando, and those who came with him. He could see it, for through what might be termed the roof, entered a stream of light. Pudolo ver, porque por lo que se po~ dia llarnar techo, entraba un rayo de sol. Don Quijote, cap. Iv. pt. W. Rule 31 . — Relative pronouns are called interrogative when they aro' employed to make a question. They are translated in the same manner as the ro^ itive pronouns. Which, referring to more than one object, is trans- lated cual or cualeS ; as, I I Quien fue el ignorantc que jirmo tal mandamiento ? I Que Caballero andante pago vecho 6 alcabala ? Don Quijote, cap. xlv I Quien (or cual) de ellos (or ellas) vendrd ? I Cual de los (or las) dos quiere V,1 ■ I Quien llama d la puerta ? i Quien llama ? i Quien estd ahi ? i Quien es f Ohs 23. When the interrogation begins by a preposition, the answer must begin by the same preposition ; as, Who was the ignorant wretch who signed suen a warrant ? What knight-errant ever paid tax or custom 1 Which of them will como ? Which of the two will you have ? Who knocks at the door ? 172 APPENDIX. Where are you going ? To the Exchange. Where do you come from 7 From iny counting-room. What way did you come ? Through Broad street. With wliom did you come ^ With my partner. Where can I see you this afternoon 1 At home. What day of the month is tins ? The thirtieth of January, 1848. I Adonde va V 7 A la Lonja. / De donde tiene T. ? De mi esrriturio. I Par donde vino V. 7 For la calle Ancha^ I Con quien vino V. ? I Con mi sock , {companei i\) I En donde prodr^ vei a V esta tarde ? En casa. I A cdantos estamqs hoy ? A treinta de Enero de 1648. Remark. — The pronouns who, whom, {quien, que,) which, that, (que,) and the conjunction that, {que,) although they are frequently omitted in English, must always be expressed in Spanish. The attention of thelearne: is particularly requested on this subject. Examples. — He thinks you are in the right. 4’he man you were speaking to. The letter she wrote. They thought he would do it. Do you believe he will consent ? El cree que V. tiene razon. El homhrc d quien V. hahlaba. La carta que ella escribio. Elios pensdron que el lo haria. I Cree V, que el consienta 7 Rule 32. The possessive pronouns conjunctive, referring to the parts or limbs of the body, or other things of common use in or about it, are gene- rally expressed by the definite article ; as. She saw him move his hand, and lay it upon his sword. She threw her amrs about his neck. Ella le vio encaminar la mano d ponerla en la espada. Don Quijote, cap. xxxvi. Ella le echo los brazos al cuello. Ditto, ditto. Her, as an objective case of the personal pronoun, must be translated la )r le, according to its relation to the verb ; and when it is preceded by a preposition, by ella. As a possessive sus, suyo, &.C., (de V.) de ella ; as, They invited her, and with that ob- ject they wrote her a letter. The book was for her She lost her gloves. He looked for her handkerchief. pronoun it must be expressed by su., Elios la conviddron, y con este oh- jeto le escribieron una carta. El libro era para ella. Ella perdio sus guantes. El busca el pahuelo de ella. In the last example her is not translated su in order to avoid the am biguity, because su might mean in Spanish either his or her As the pronouns his, hers, yours, theirs, when they stand alone are al. translated suyo, which proiKun agrees in gender and number with the per- son or thing possessed, and not with the possessor as in English ; when- ever an ambiguity may arise from the use of that pronoun alone, the pro APPENDIX. 473 flour, that /epresents the person of the possessor, preceded by is to ho repeated after it, or used in its stead ; as. Send me his (book, m. s.) — En tieine V. el suyo de el ; or better, el dc el alone. Possessive pronouns must be repeated before every substantive in a sen tence, though not expressed in English ; as. He bought his hat and gloves in John El compro su sombrero y sus guan* street. Sutler me to avail myself of the prop from which you could not disen- gage me with all your importuni- ties, threats, promises, nor presents. ies en la calle de Juan. Dejadme llegar al arrimo de quicn no me han podido apartar vuestrae importunaciones, vuesiras amena- zas, vue sir as promesas i ni vuestras dddivas. H. Quijote, cap. xxxvi. pt. ii. OF THE VERB. Rule 33. — A verb having several pronouns of different persons for its rabject, (nominative,) must agree in the plural with the first of them in or- dei ; as. You, he, and I will do it. I V. el y yo lo haremos. Thou and she wrote well. | Tu y ella escribisteis bien. In the first example the verb is placed in the first person plural, because the pronoun /, together with the other two, is the same as wt ; and in the second, because the two pronouns may be expressed by you. They left Zoraida and me by our- selves, and we are going to see whether my father is still alive Solos quedamos Zoraida y yo, y vamos con iniencion de ver si mi padre es vivo. D. Quijote, cap. xi. The person speaking, out of civility always names himself the last. When listed and a pronoun of the third person singular form the subject of a verb, the verb is in the third person plural ; as. You and he saw them. | listed y el los vieron. Ohs. 24. A verb having for a subject a noun in the singular, that com- prehends in itself tne sense of the other subjects of the same verb preceding ‘t should it be the last, or the nearest to the verb, must agree with it in tho lingular ; as. So that the solitude of the place, the darkness of the night, the noise of the water and rustling of the leaves, all together y caused horror and dismay. De manera que la soledad, el sitio la oscuridady el ruido del agua con el susurro de las hojaSy lode causaba horror y espanto. D. Quijote, cap. xx. pt. i. Obs. 25. When the subject is a common noun plural, in which tin speaker is iimluded, the verb is placed in the first person plural ; as, i74 APPENDIX. The Spaniards, whenever they have a choice, incline to that which is most difficult. Los Espano.es siemprt que tenomoi eleccion, nos inclinamos d lo mat dijicultoso. Solis, lib..iii. cap. viii. Ohs. 26. Two or more subjects of diffierent number, connected by an adversative conjunction, require that the verb shall agree, with the last oi them : as. Not only the mother and the daugh- ters, hut the father also was then dead. No solamente la madre y las hijas, sino tamhien el padre habia muer< to entonces. M‘ Henry. Rule 34 . — Collective nouns definite^ or such as denote a determinate lumber of persons or things, require the verb in the singular ; as. Seest thou that cloud of dust? The whole of it is raised by a vast army of various and innumerable nations that are marching that way. I Ves aquella polvarcda ? Toda es cuajada de un copiosisimo ejercito de diversas e innumerahles genteSy que por alii viene marchando. D. Quijote, cap. xviii Collective nouns indefinite must have the verbs in the plural ; as. Be that as it may, these people are carried, but not voluntarily, they are driven by force. Como quiera que ello sea, esta gente, aunqiie los llevan, van de por fuerza. D. Quijote, cap. xxii. Particular care, hov/ever, must be paid to the logical sense of the phrase, for it may sometimes require the singular ; as. The greatest number of the people of the castle, who did not know the truth of the case, were sur- prised and astonished. La mayor parte de la gente del cas~ tillo que no sabia la verdad del caso estaba suspensa y admirada. D. Quijote, cap. xlvi. pt. ii. Rule 35. — An active transitive verb requires the noun that is the object of its action, in the objective case ; and the prepositjoii a must besides be prefixed to it, when the said object signifies a person or thing personified, or is a proper noun ; as. Don Fernando, Cardenio, Lucinda, and Dorothea were struck dumb wit? astonishment, gazing in si- lence to one another. Callahan todos, y mirdhanse todos, Dorotea d Don Fernando, Don Fernando k Cardenio, Cardenio k Luscinda, y Luscinda k Carde* nio. D. Quijote, cap. xxxvi. Memos de conquistar k la gula y al sueilo en el poco comer, y en el mucho velar. Ditto, cap. viii. El aho siguiente acometio k la Go* leta. Ditto, cap. xxxix. Ohs. 27 The p’*eposition d is not used before the pronouns me, te, se, nos, ss, le, los, la, las, les, lo ; but it is required before the otte»* cases of said oronouns; as, H^e must conquer gluttony and sloth by temperance and watchfulness. Next year he attacked the Goleta. APPENDIX. 475 lly beauty compels you to love me. 9Vho would give thee islands to gov- ern? A que me ameis cs mueve mi her- mosura. D. Quijote, cap. xiv, I Quien te hahia de dar d ti isla$ que gobernar 1 DittOf cap. liv. pt. ii. Ghs. 28. Active-transitive, and even intransitive verbs, and those signify- ing to adhere^ to accede to^ &c., require the preposition «, even before othoi objects, to prevent ambiguity ; as. The old man found a little kid that its mother had lost. El viejo hallo un cabrito que habia perdido d su rnadre. Obs 29. An active-transitive verb, having both as object and complement two nouns or pronouns, signifying rational beings, both cases requiring the position d, suppresses it before the object direct, and retains it before the object indirect or complement ; as. 4y dear father, I recommend to you the innocent Laura, am not your daughter, you have taken away from mo my husband. Querido padre, yo os recomiendo la inocente Laura. Yo no soy vuestra hija, vos me ha- beis quitado mi esposo. JovELLANos, El Deliucuente, [act V. sc. 3, 5 Rule 36. The present of the infinitive mood in English, used substan- .ively as a subject or object of another verb, does not admit any preposition oefore it in Spanish, and frequently takes the article el ; as. I have always heard it said, that to confer benefits on base-minded people is like throwing water into the sea. [ swear to go with you. Siempre he oido decir que el hacei bien d villanos, es echar agua en el mar D. Quijote, cap. xxiii Yo juro ir con vos. Ditto, cap. XXX. Ohs. 30. The verbs, will, shall may, could, &c., when they are not auxiliary, but expressed by querer, deber. or poder, govern the verb that follows immediately after them in the present infinitive without a preposi- tion ; as, I could do no less than answer him. lie would not pass these things in silence. No pude dejar de responderle. Don Quijote, cap. xxxii, El no quiso pasar estas cosas en si* lencio. Ditto, cap. xvi. Rule 37. — Verbs implying, to move, to begin, to compel, to teach, U itarn, to exhort, to invite, to assist, to oppose, to accustom, &c., gcvmm th9 verb that depends on them in the present of the infinitive mood, and feiierally require the preposition d ; as. The innkeeper returned to see what his guest commanded. El ventero volvio d ver lo qut .vn huesped mandaba. Don Quijote cap ii ^76 APPENDIX. The companions of the wo:^sled he- gan to discharge a shower of stone upon Don Quixote. Los compancros de los he% idos cv menzfiron a Hover piedrais sobrt Don Quijote, D. Quu. cap. iii Ohs. 31. Verbs implying motion, govern the noun or verb, denoting from whence the motion proo^^eds, with de ; the noun or verb which points out its direction, with d; and the noun expressing the space through which U passes, with por ; as. I come from the city of Baeza, in company with eleven other priests, and we are going to the city of Segovia. As he entered the street of St. Jago, in Madrid, a judge was coming through it. Vengo de la ciudad de Baeza con otros once sacerdotes, y '^amos a la ciudad dt Segovia. Don Quijote, cap. xix Al entrar en la calle de Santiago en Madrid, veiiia d salir por ella un Alcalde. Ditto, cap. xlviii. Bule 38. — The present or active participle in English, being alone in the phrase, must be literally translated ; as, So saying, she entered into the thick- est part of a wood. Y en diciendo esto, se entro en la mas cerrado de un hosque. Don Quijote, cap. xiv.. Obs. 32. The English present participle, referring to a noun that is an object of the former verb, may be translated in the gerund, in the infinitive or in the indicative mood, according to the sense of the phrase ; as. I saw the boys playing, (that is, whilst they were playing.) Yo vi d los rnuchachos jugando, (or jugar, or que jugaban.) Obs. 33. Words ending in English in ing, prefixed to a common noun, are used as verbal adjectives ; and they are most frequently translated by the Spanish participles terminating in ante or iente ; as. A loving father, An obedient son. The constituting assembly, Un padre amante, Un hijo ohediente, La asamblea constituyente, from the verbs amar, obedecer, constituir. But as not all the Spanish verbs have active participles, and as verbal adjectives in ante or iente can not be formed of all of them, the learner, before translating the English words terminating in ing, must consult the dictionary in order to find out tht proper word to be used in the translation ; as. An affecting scene. Una escena sensible, (not afectante ) Meddling people. Gente entrsmetida, (not entrerne- tiente.) Presuming iaeas. Ideas presuntuosas, (not presumien^ tes.) Ohi. 34. A substantive, compounded of a present participle and a ccinnuji innn, is generally translated by a particular name ; as, A speaking-trumpet [ Una vocina. A.PPENDIX. 477 *t IS also expressed by the infinitive mood of the verb, and even by a sub- wantive derived from it, preceded in either ceise by the preposition de / as. A repeatiiiff-watch. A fishing-rod. Un reloj de repeticion, Una caha de pescar. Rule 39. — The English present or active participle, being preceded by a proposition, i« translated by the present of the infinitive mood after the same proposition ; as, i (c^ue iodama das, Sancho, en decir, en pensar, en creer, y en afirmar que Dulcinea estaha ocupada en tan vil ojicio ? I Don Quijote, cap. viii. Ohs 35. When the preposition is the English particople is frequently translated by the Spanish gerund, suppressing the preposition ; as, Wilt thou still persist, Sancho, in saying, thinking, believing, and afiirrning, that Dulcinea was em- ployed in such a mean object? And by doing it you will oblige him to sign the deed. He lost his place by speaking too freely. Y haciendolo, V. le ohligard d fir- mar la escritura. El perdio su plaza por hablar con demasiada libertad. Ohs 36. The English present participle used substantively with an article, is translated either as a substantive or in the present of the infinitive mood with the article ; as. The commencing of a thing is as good as half completing it. El comenzar las cosas cs tenerlas medio acabadas, D. Quijote, cap. xli. Ohs. 37. When the present participle of the verb to be, (being,) followed by a past participle, points out the action expressed by the latter as present and continuing, it is translated by the verb estar in the corresponding tense, preceded by the pronoun se, and the past participle is rendered by the Spanish gerund ; as. To let, one of the two houses now being finished in Pearl street. Se alquila una de las dos casas, que se estan acabando en la calle de la Perla. REMARK. The following rules are devoted to the explanation of the tenses that claim particular notice: no mention, therefore, is made of those of uhich the literal translation is sufficient. Rule 40. — As the tense called in English the Imperfect of the Indica- tive, may be translated into Spanish by the Imperfect Tense, N. 2, o.* by the Preterit Indefinite, N 3, as it has been explained in Les.son XLst pago3 157-8, to the directions therein given the following explanations are added, the oetter to elucidate this subject. 1. When the imperfect tense in English expresses an action or a stats of things that was going on at some time past, but was still unfinished or in* complete, it must bo translated in the imperfect tense in Spanish ; as. 478 APPENDIX. In a town of La Mancha there lived a gentleman He maintained a female housekeeper turnea of for- ty, and a niece who was not quite tv/enty. En vn lugar de la Mancha vivia un hidalgo Tenia cn su casa una arna, que pasaba de los cuarentaf y una sohrina que no llegaba d los vcinte. D. Quijote, cap. L 2 This tense denotes a former progressive state of existence ; as, Yo le dije que pensaba en el prologs D. Quijote, Preface 1 Icld him I thought about the pre- face. lliat is to say, I was thinking. 3. It expresses a time present, with respect to another past, or that some- thing was being done at a time in which another circumstance happened j He died on the road to Constantino- p.e, whither they were carrying him. El murid en el camino de Constant tinopla, adonde le llevaban can- tivo. D. Quijote, cap. xxxix. 4. It denotes the recurrence or repetition of an action, at a time which is past ; as. This said gentleman, the hours that he was at leisure, (which were the greatest part of the year,) he ad- dicted himself to the reading of the books of chivalry. Este dicho hidalgo los ratos que estaba ocioso, (que eran los mas del aho,) se daba d leer libros de Caballerias. D. Quijote, cap. i. 5. The customs, habits, characters, professions, or occupations of individ- uals, when they are no longer in existence, or have undergone some chaiigo or alteration, are expressed by the imperfect ; as. He was of a rough constitution | El era de complexion recia y so and was called Quijana. The curate of his village was a learned man. But Master Nicholas, who was the barber of the same village, affirm- ed that none of them equalled the Knight of the Sun. 6. The verbs that imply continuance, or that express a state of things that v^as continued for some time or period, without any reference to the commencement, duration, or end of the action which they express, must be {ranslated by the imperfect tense ; as. He was a lative of Calabria, and llamaba Quijana. D. Quijote, cap. i. El cur a de su lugar era hombre sabio. DittOf ditto. Pero Maese Nicolas, que era ei barbero del mismo pueblo, decia que ninguno igualaba al caballero del Febo, Ditto, ditto. treated Ins slaves with great hu- manity. Don Antonio Moreno was called Hon Quixote’s entertainer, and he tried to find means, &:c. El a Calobres de nacion, y trataba con niucha humanidud d sus cau- tivos. D. Quijote, cap. xliv. Don Antonio Moreno se llamaba el huesped de Don Quijote, y andabs buscando medios, &c. Ditto, caj> Ixil APPENDIX. 479 Kem^rk. -It may, therefore, be considered as a rule, that whenever thif English imperfect tense may be expressed by the verb to he and the present participle of the same verb, or by the verbs used to, in the habit of, ac- customed to, &-C., preser\'ing the sense of the phrase, it must be translatea in Spanish by the imperfect tense. But as the imperfect tense is frequently expressed in English by tne am* iliary verb did, the scholar, before translating the principal verb, must a& certain whether did means at that time or then, expressing the action ns entirely finished and completed, without requiring any other verb ; oi whether the verb following did may be rendered by to be and the present participle, as explained in the preceding paragraph. If the verb to which did is prefixed may be translated by the verb to be and the present parti* ciple^ the verb must be translated by the imperfect tense in Spanish. But if the verb connected with did expresses an action entirely past, and that cannot be translated by to be and the present participle, without changing the meaning of the phrase, then it must be rendered by the preterit, N. 3, in Spanish ; as, Don Quixote did thank him for his | Agradecidselo Don Quijotc, comid good will, took a little sustenance, Sancho ate voraciously, and then both laid themselves (Zoion to sleep. algo, y Sancho mucho, y echd- ronse d dormir entrdmhns. D. Quijote, cap. lix. pt. ii. In the preceding example, the verbs took, ate, laid down, might be ex- pressed by did take, did eat, did lay down ; but not by was taking, eating, or laying down ; the verb consequently must be translated in the preterit, N. 3, (as in the example,) and not in the imperfect tense. Rule 41. — The imperfect tense of the subjunctive mood has three ter- minations, the first ending in ara or iera, N. 7 ; the second in aria, eria, or iria, N. 8 ; the third in ase or iese, N. 9. I. The terminations ara or iera, ase or iese, ought to be used when the verb is governed by a conditional conjunction ; and the verb that completes the sense of the sentence, (whether it be placed before or after the govern- ing verb,) must bo placed in the termination aria, eria, or iria, according to its conjugation ; as, If chance and fortune had not fa- vored me, the world would have been deprived of this pleasure. Si el acaso y la fortuna no me ayt»- daran, el mundo quedaria falto de este gusto. D. Quijote, cap. ix. 2. When there is in English an inversion in the phrase, the sentence mu^ be set first in the regular form, prefixing the corresponding conjunction to ho verb ; as, Were it not, (if it were not,) because I dc certainly know that all these inconveniences are annexed to the exorcise of arms, I would lie still where I am, and die with pure vexation Si no fuera, porque se may cur Li que todas estas incomodidaJcs tan anejas al ejercicio de las at- mas, aqui me dejaria morir de pure enojo. I>. Quijote, cap. 480 APPENDIX. 3. When the sentence begins without a conditional conjunction, the tei m illations ra, 7, or 8, may be used ; and the verb necessary to com- plete the sense, (should there be any,) must be placed in the termination ase or iese, according to its conjugation ; as, I would not like that princes and kings run themselves into such dangers. No querria (quisera) yo que los prin* cipeSf y los reyes^ se pusiesen en semejanies peligros. I D. Quijote, cap. xxxiv. pt ii The termination ara or ieray is generally used in ejaculation ; as. Who could describe now the throb- bings of my heart, while I remain- ed there ! / Quien pudiera decir ahora los so hresaltos que me did el corazon, mientras alii estuve i D. Quijote, cap. xxvii. 4. T wo or more verbs in the imperfect tense of the subjunctive, governed Dy the same conjunction, or completing the sense of the same phrase, must be placed in the termination chosen for the first of them, whether ra, «e, or na , as. Tile archbishop ordered one of his chaplains to go to the rector and inquire into me truth, and even to talk with the madman himself, and that if he shouid think that he was recovered, he might bring him away, and set him at liberty. Nl arzohispo mandd d un capellan suyo que se informase (inforrnara) del rector si era verdady y que asi mismo hablase con el loco, y que si le pareciese que tenia juicioy le sacase y pusiese en libertad. D. Quijote, cap. i. pt. ii. 5. When the imperfect tense of the subjunctive mood is governed by a verb in any ol the past tenses ot the indicative, and the governing verb sig- nifies to speak, to think, to believe, or any other of the like meaning, any of the three terminations may be used with the conjunction que ; provided the verb to be placed in the subjunctive mood has, as its subject or nomina- tive, any other person but the one speaking ; as, I said that he would come. | Yo decia que el I did say that he would come, j Yo dije que eZ I have said that he would come. | Yo he dicho que el I had said that he would come. I Yo habia dicho que el ^ But when the verb governed or subordinate, has the same subject or iominative as the leading or governing verb, only the termination ria is used ; as. viinera. vendria. viniese. it is not that, said Sancho, but be- cause IiDould not have any secret rot in my keeping. No es eso, dijo Sancho, sino que yo no querria que se me pudriesen de guardadas. D. Quijote, cap. xvii It must be observed, that although any of the terminations may be used f^itli the above-mentioned verbs, the termination ra generally indicates duty or obligation on the part of its subject, and the termination ria merely im plies futurity or possibility ; as APPENDIX. 481 The master told his servant to do it immediately. The mistress promised that her ser- vant would do it. El amo dijo a su criado que lo hici- era inmediatamente El ama prometid que su criada Ifi haria. REMARK The use of the Subjunctive Mood is fully explained in Lessons LXXVIIl., {351,) LXXIX., (356,) LXXX., (362,) and LXXXL, (368,) which the scholar is advised frequently and attentively to study, in order to make him- self perfectly well acquainted with the rules therein set forth. Rule 42. — Will and would, shall and should, can and could, may and might, used as auxiliaries, point out the tense of the verb that follows them, which is the only one that must be translated. But when they are used as principal verbs, they are translated querer, deher^ poder. 1. When the emphasis of the phrase Ues on the verb that follows them, will and shall point out the future of the indicative, and shall and should wiretimes the future of the subjuneti^^e ; as, She will come to-mormw. He shall do it to-day. Should they write, please o let me know it Ella vendrd maiiana, El lo hard hoy. Si ellos escrihieren, sirvase V. avu sdrmelo. Obs. 38. Will m»ans the free determination, or ready disposition to do a thing. Shall, in ^he first person, simply indicates and declares, in English, what will take niace ; in the second and third persons, it implies a promise, command, ^nd determination ; and in the interrogative sentences, permission ?r direct'OP In translating these two verbs, attention must be paid to these '•eniarks Therefore, he will not do it may mean he is not willing to do it, or he viill not be willing to do it, or he certainly shall not do it, according to the sense of the preceding sentences. This phrase in the first example must bo translated by the present of the indicative of the verb querer — el no quiere hacerlo ; in the second, will is to be placed in the future of the same verb— el no querrd hacerlo ; and in the third, the auxiliary will is not translated, and the verb to do (hacer) is translated in the future — H no lo hard. The same rule is to be observed with may and can, which may be trans- lated by the present of the indicative or subjunctive of the verb poder *, oi in the present of the subjunctive of the principal verb. 2 When will and would are not joined to any verb, they must be trans- lated by querer, (to wish, to be willing, to desire, to like ;) as. \\liy do you not write to-day ? Because I will not, (/ wont.) He begged his uncle to sign, but he would not. I P or que no escribe V. hoy 7 Porque no quiero, (no mo da la gaiia.) El suplico d su tio que firmara, pt'tn el nc quiso. 21 i82 APPENDIX. 3. Will and would, though followed by a verb, are translated ly qusre^ when they are used emphatically to express an absolute wish ; as, lie will be obeyed without any ex- I El quiere ser ohedccido sin excu$a ^use. I alguna. They would have him go, and he i Elios quisieron que el fuera, y cstu was obliged to do it. 1 vo ohligado d hacerlo. 4. Would denotes sometimes the repetition of an act, or a custom, Dr the iabit of doing a thing, and then it is frequently rendered by soler, usar^ acostumhrar, or by the verb that follows it, in all cases in he imperfect of the indicative ; as, In the summer the old man would En el verano el mejo solia (acostum- sit at his cottage door, and draw braba) sent arse d la puerta de sh letters in the sand for his darling. choza y dibujaba letras en la arena para su queridito ; or, El viejo se sentaba d la puerta^ &c 5. Should, used foi ought to, denoting duty or necessity of acting, ia translated by deber, in the tense of the other verb in the English sentence, or in the imperfect tense of the subjunctive ; as, You should not do that, since you know it is wrong. If he wishes to do it, he should ask permission before. V. no debe (debiera cr deberia) hacci eso, pues sabe que es malo. Si el desea hacer eso, el debe dates (debiera or deberia) pedir per?niso 6. Can and could, may and inight, signifying possibility, are translated by poder, (to be able ;) as, You can speak to him whenever you please ; but they may not take that liberty. If I could, I would write, lie might d: it, if he pleased. V. puede hablarle siempre que quie ra ; pero ellos no pueden tomarse esa libertad. Si yo pudiera, escribiria. El podria hacerlo, si quisiera 7. The auxiliaries would, could, should, might, being followed hy have and a past participle, must be translated by poder, querer, aeber, in the imperfect tense of the indicative, or in the termination, ra, N. 7, or ria, N S, of the imperfect of the subjunctive, according to the sense of the phrase, when the emphasis is on any of the said auxiliaries, leaving the verb have in the present of the infinitive; but when the emphasis is not on them, but in to have, this is translated by haber in the corresponding tense, followed by the participle querido, podido, or debido ; as. Ho should have spoken to them in time ; but he would not, and con- sequently ho lost the best opportu- nity ( could hart seen them, but I did not Know that the} were in town. El les debia (debiera or debeiia) ha* ber hablado en tiempo ; pero nc quiso, y por consiguiente perdU la mejor oportunidad. Yo hubiera podido vertos^ pero Hf supe que cstaban en la Qiudad APPENDIX. 483 You could have written it They should have paid it. f K. podia naherle escriio. J V. pudlera (podria) haberle efsiTito I V, hahia podido escrihirlc. I V. hubiera ^habria) podido escribirte ^ Elios debian haberle pagado. Elios debieran {deberian haharli ) pagado. Elios le habian debido pagar. Elios le hubieran (habiian) dihiik, ^ pagar. REMARK. The scholar is reminded carefully to examine and ascertain the meaning Df the phrases containing will, would, could, &c., before translating themj for, as it has been explained, these verbs may or may not be translated and placed in the indicative or in the subjunctive mood. OF THE PARTICIPLE. The Spanish past or passive participle, coming immediately after the verb haber, does not admit any change, (118 ;) as. Quedense los zapaios y las sangrius por los azotes, que sin culpa, le habeis dado, que si el rompio el cuero de los zapaios que vos pa- gasteis, vos le habeis rompido a de su cuerpo. D. Quijote, cap. iv. The passive participle, after the verbs ser and estar, changes its termina- tion, like an adjective, according to the number and gender of the noun or pronoun it refers to. It does the same after tener, when it is used as an active verb ; as, [A‘t the shoes and bleeding stand for the stripes you have given him ^without cause ; for if he wore out the leather of the shoes you paid for, you have torn the skin from his body. I am Pasamonte, whose life is writ- ten by these fingers. 1 have written a letter to my wife. Yo soy Pasamonte, cuya vida esta escrita por estos pulgares. D. Quijote, cap. xxii. Yo tengo escrita una carta d mi mujer. Ditto, cap. xxxvi pt ii The passive participle is often elegantly used at the beginning of a son- scnce, like the ablative absolute in Latin ; as, Don Quixote starting up, and trem- bling fi( m head to foot, said. Leventado en pie Don Q njotc, ^ temblando de los pies d la cabeza, dijo. D Quijote, cap. xxxii. pt ii. Ohs. 39 Words ending in ado or ido are participles, when they have the «me meaning and government as the verbs from v. iiich they may ho form- 184 APPENDIX. ed, having also a reference to time ; otherwise they are adjectives and have a different signification ; as, The captain being informed of the danger, could avoid it. The cautious captain avoided the danger. Advertido el capitan del ptligro, pudo evitarle El advertido capitan evito elpehgro Advertidoy in the first example, is a past participle ; in the second, aa Still ective. There are some words in ado and idoy that have both an active and a passive signification, and may be used as verbal adjectives ; as. Tired, tiresome. Measured, unassuming, prudent. Caused, provoking. Cansado Medido. Ocasionado OF THE ADVERB. The following quotations jrorn Cervantes j corroborate the rules alieaa^y laid down for the Adverb. When an adverb modifies a verb, it is generally placed after the verb ; «vhen it modifies an adjective or another adverb, it is generally placed be- fore, (106.) Except the adverbs of negation, as well as any other word ex- oressing a negative, and when the adverbs are emphatically used, for then they are placed before the verb ; as, I confess that I was wrong, and did not speak correctly. As Horace did with s) much ele- gance. Nada. (nothing,) nadie or ninguno, v’dien placed after the verb, require no Camacho the rich, in order to show i.ow little he resented or thought of the trick, desired that the en- tertainments might proceed. Yo confieso que anduve mal, y no dije bien. D. Quijote, cap. xxiii. pt. ii. Como tan eiegaiitemente lo hizo Horacio. Ditto, cap. xvi. pt. ii. (nobody*,) nunca 2 L\\d jamas, (never,) or ni before it ; as, El rico Camacho por mostrar qne no sentia la burla, ni la estimaba en nada, quiso que las fiestas pa- sasen adelante. D. Quijote, cap. xxi. pt. ii Two negatives make the phrase more elegant in Spanish ; thus, Ni quisro nada, (I want nothing,) is more energetic than, nada quiero. I gay nothing, answered Sancho. We are not at all in one another’s debt No digo nada, respondUo Sancho No nos debemus nada. D. Quijote, cap. xxii. pt ii. The conjunction but, preceded by a negative in the same sentence, have yenerallv be translated sino, and sometimes mas que or ?nas de ; as. appendix. 485 Sii, melancholy weis not made for beasts but for men ; and yet if men encourage melancholy too much, they become no better than beasts. A-s if their profession (the military) was the office of a common porter, for which nothing else is wanting hut good strength ^ SenoTf las tristezas no sc hicier^ p ira- las bestias sino para los homhres ; pero si los hombres lot sieriten demasiado, se vueLven bestias. D. Quijote, cap. xi. pt. ii Como si fuese su ejercicio (el de .e? annas) oficio de ganapanes para el cual no cs menester mas da buenas fuerzas. Ditto, cap. xxvii. When two or more adverbs ending in mente, follow in succession in the icame sentence, that termination is added to the last of them only, changing the others in the feminine termination, if they admit of it ; as. Cardenio heard these words very plainly and distinctly. Oyo estas azones Cardenio bien clara (claro) y distintamente. D. Quijote, cap. xxxvi. Nunca and jamas signify never, and are used separately or together; in the latter case, nunca must be placed before jamas, and thus they give greater energy to the phrase ; as, f shall never, never see them again. | Yo nunca jamas los volvere d ver. Jamas is often used after siernpre, (ever;) as, por siempre jamas, which means, for eper and ever. No is sometimes used redundantly, to give more force to the sentence \ as, The mighty Homer did not write in Latin, because he was a Greek ; nor Virgil in Greek, because he was a Roman. El grande Homero no escribio en latin, porque era Griego ; ni FiV- gilio no escribio en griego, porque era Latino, D. Quijote, cap. xv* pt. il OF THE PREPOSITIOJN. The govemment of the verbs through the prepositions is so varied, as to render it very difficult to explain and comprise it in a few rules adapted to the capacity of the younger classes of learners. The student, therefore, is requested to consult the “ List of the Prepositions required by certain Verbs,** &c., placed at the end of this part ; and also a go(xl dictionary, in which he will find the several meanings of the verbs in consequence of iho propositions that accompany them. As the English prepositions for and by, may be translated into Spanish by para and por, the following rules and examples are laid df'wn to assist the learner in the use of them m APPENDIX. PARA. Whion ; as, APPENDIX. 487 The letters are yet to be written. He did it not to be thought insensible. The answer is about to come, riio house is not yet finished. Las cartas a tan poi iscnbiT. Lo hizo para no pasar por insensibla La respucsta estd por veuir. La casa estd por acahar. Por, between two nouns, or two verbs in the present of the infinitive, de notes the choice between two things , as, Einperador por Emperador, y Me • narca por Monarca, en Ndpola tengo al gran Conde de Lemos D. Quuote, Dedication, pt. If I am to choose between an em- peror and other emperor, between a monarch and other monarch, I have the great Count of Lemos, at Naples. Por is often prefixed to an adverb, ana becomes an adverbial expression ; as On the top, por encima. | Underneath, por debajo. Prepositions require the noun or pronoun governed by them to be in the objective case. Personal pronouns, governed by a preposition expressed, must be placed in the indirect objective case or complement : except the pronouns me and thee, which, in conformity with the modern use, are placed in the nominative when they are governed by the preposition entre, (between ;) as, fudge whether it will be reasonable to lay his sufferings to me. For your desire to know what is be- tween us, O’ermaster it as you may. Ved si sera razonable que de su pena se me de 4 mi la culpa. Don Quuote, cap. xiv. Reprimid cuanto os fuere posible el deseo de saber lo que ha pasado entre el y yo. ITamlet, act i., [translated by Moratin When an English verb is accompanied oy, or ends in a preposition, as. She asks for the letter, he asked after you, they could not bring it about, the scholar must first ascertain whether the preposition constitutes a part of the verb, so as to make one single meaning with it, or whether it gives the verb a different signifi?ation or not : if the preposition with the verb have one single meaning, the preposition is not translated ; if it gives the verb a dif- ferent signification, it must be translated as directed in the dictionary. In the first of the above examples for makes a part of the verb pedir, and it is a »t translated, ella pide la carta. In the second it gives a different meaning ii the verb to ask, and is translated, el pregunta por V. In the third it is £ot translated, because it is also a part of the verb, which in that case sig- aihes conseguir ; thus, ellos no pudieron conseguirlo. Tney made a secret of it, but he at 1 Hicieron secreto de ello ; pero el rl last found it out. | jin le descubrid. As the grammatical order of the prepositions is frequently inverted in English, and in the colloquial style, the object of them is for shortness sake fcmetimes omitted ; the scholar must take care to put such phrases in thoij 488 APPENDIX. proper order, and to sup ply the word or words wanting, as the transition ot a sentence would be otherwise very incorrect. Examples: — Be careful in selecting the persons you accompany yoprself with. In* vert the construction thus, Be careful in selecting the persons with whom you accompany yourself. — Tenga V’’. huen cuidado en la eleccinn de las personas con quienes se acompahe Where do you come from? (from whence do you come ?) — i De donde viene V. 7 Where are you going tol (to what part are you going ?) — i Adonde va V 7 Eyes were made to see with, (to see with them .) — Los ojos se hicieron para ver, or para rtr ecu ellos. OF THE CONJUNCTION. The conjunction e is used instead of y, when the word coming after it begins with i or hi ; as. The authors of other nations con- clude that we are barbarous and ignorant. Both mother and son were struck with the uncouth figure of Don Quixote. Los autores extrangeros nos tienen por hdrharos e ignorantes. Don Quijote, cap. xlviii. Madre e hi jo quedaron suspensos de ver la extraha figura de Don Quijote. Ditto, cap. xviii. pt. ii. U is employed instead of d when the following word begins with o or ho ; as. This does not differ at all from any speech in the play of “ The most prodigious Black Man,'^ or other such. But they could not say whether it was a woman or a man who called them. Ni requires the verb in the plural ; as. Neither I nor my master ever set eyes on her. Esto no se distingue de una rela» cion de El Negro mas prodigi* oso,^^ 6 otra semejante. Cadalso, Los Erudites. Pero no podian decir, si era mujer d hombre quien los llamaha. IsLA, cartas N' yo, ni mi amo la hemos vista •jama.s. D. Quijote, cap. x. pt. ii OF THE INTERJECTION. Alas ! how’ much more agreeable will be the company of these rocks ! Ah, Lucinda ! Lucinda ! take care what you do ! Ha ! treacherous Don Fernando, robber of my glory ! O fatal star of my destiny ! Ah, ha ! cried the curate, have we got gia:7ts too in the dance? ; Ay desdichada ! / y cuan mas agradahle compahia hardn cstos riscos . Ditto, cap. xxviii. / Ah, Luscinda I Luscinda I mira lo que haces I • Ah traidor^ Don Fernando, rohndor de mi gloria! Ditto, cap. xxvii. / O fatal estrella mia ! Ditto, cap. xxvii. ; Ta, ta ! dijo el cura, ijayanes hay en lo danza 7 Do cap. xxi APPENDIX- 4S9 TABLE CONTAINING THE VERBS THAT GOVERN CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS. It is copied from the Grammar of the Spanish Academy, and the student s advised to consult it frequently, so as to become familiar with tlie use of tliorn. A. Aba’anzarse d los peligros, abantlonarse d la suerte, abocarse con algurio, abochornarse de algo, abogar por alguno, abordar (una nave) d, con otra, aborrecible d las gentes, aborrecido de todos, abrasarse cn deseos, abrirse d, con los amigos, abstenerse de la fruta, abundar de, en riquezas, aburrido de las desgracias, abusar de la amistad, ac.abar de venir, r;aecer d alguno, acaecer en tal tiernpo, acalorarse cn, con la disputa, acceder d la opiniar. de otro, accesible d todos, acertar d, con la casa, acogerse d sagrado, acomodarse d, con otro dictamen, acorn pail arse con otros, aconsejarse con, de sabios, dcvn ecer d los incautos, acordarse de lo pasado, acordarse con los contrarios, acosturnbrarse d trabi'os, acre de genio, acreditarse de necio, acreditarse con, para alguno, acreedor d la confianza, anreedor de alguno, actuarse de, en los negocios, acusar (ti alguno) de algun delito acusarse de las culpas adelantarse d otros, adhcrirse d otro dictamen, adolecer de alguna enfermedad, Afer« arse en, con su opinion, aferrarse (una nave) con otra, bficionarsc d, de alguna cusa, idirmarse en lo dicho, iffeno de verdad. to rush on dangers. to abandon one’s self to chance to confer with any one. to be chagrined with any thing. to plead for any one. to board (one ship) another. hateful to the people. detested by all. to be inflamed with desires. to open one’s self to one’s friends to abstain from fruit. JO abound with or in riches, weary with misfortunes, to abuse friendship, to be just come, to happen to any one. to happen at such a time, to grow warm in a dispute, to accede to another’s opinion accessible to ail. to fina out, to hit the house, to take shelter in a church, to conform one’s self to another opinion to keep company with others, to take advice with wise men. to happen to the unwary, to remember the past, to agree with the opponents, to accustom one’s seif to trouble austere in temper, disposition to prove one’s self a tool, to get credit with one. worthy of confidence, any one’s creditor, to acquaint one’s self with business to accuse (any one) of any crime to accuse one’s self of faults, to be in advance of others, to take the lead of others. to adhere to another opinion, to be ill of some disorder, to be fixed in one’s own opinion, to grapple (one ship) another, to be ibnd of any thing, to affirm what has been said, foreign to truth. 490 AFPKNDIX. iffradable al paladar agradecido a los beneftcios agraviarse de algimo, agraviarse de la seiitencia, agregarse d olros Egrio al gusto, dgudo de mgenio, ahitarse de manjares. ahogarse en el mar, ahorcajarse en las espaldas, tviiorrar de razones alion arse (no) con ninguno . airarse con alguno, djustarse d la razon, ajustarse con alguno, alabarse de vLliente, alargarse d la ciudad, alegrarse de algo, Alejarse de su tierra, ilirnentarse dc, con yerbas, alimentarse de esperanzas, alindar con otra heredad, allanarse d lo justo, alto de cuerpo, amable d lodos, Rmancebarse con los libros, arnaiite de alguno, amana-.se d escribir, amoroso con los suyos, ampararse de algo, de alguna cosa, ancho de boca, andar con el tiempo, andar de capa, andar en pleitos, andai d gatas, andai for tierra, angosto de manga, anhelar d, por mayor fortuna, anticiparse d otro, aovar en la ribera, aparar en la mano, aparecerse d alguno, aparecerse en el camino, aparejarse para el trabajo, apartarse de la ocasion, apartarse d un lado, apasionarse d, de, por alguno apearse de su opinion, apechugar con alguna cosa, apechugar por los peligros, aprdrear con las palabras, ipegarse d alguna cosa, tt'peiar de la sentencia, jxpc-lar d otro medio, apercibirse de armas, np« rcibirse d, para li batalla agreeable to the palate. grateful for benefits. to be affronted with any one. to appeal from the sentence to unite one’s self to others sour to the taste. witty, or sharp of intellect to surfeit one’s seif with fooajar de la autoridad, Dajar hdcm el valle, bajo de cuerpo, ben6fico d^ para la salud, Dlanco de ciitis, blando de corteza, blasfemar de la virtud, blasonar de valiente, bordar (algo) de, con plata, bordar (algo) al tam..ar, bordar de pasados, poclezar de hambre, lolo de punta, boyante en la fortuna, trarnar de corage, i rear d chasco, brcgar con alguno, blind ar con regales, brindar A la salud de afguns bueno de, para comer, bufar de ira bullir en, por todas paries *ii arse de algo. *o stick fast in the road to attract to one’s self, to animate one’s self to great to dare everybody, to attribute to another, to be afflicted with labor, tiouOiCS to overhasten actions, to take pet in conversation, to be affronted at a trifle to unite one’s self with another, to absent one’s self from Madrid to take one’s abode in any town to agree with all. ^o gain the advantage over others to be ashamed at asking, to be ashamed of any thing, to agree with any one. to furnish one’s self with clothes, to call a cause from an inferior co al tc ^ one’s own to vibrate on such a side to fluctuate in doubt to clamor for money. to dance on the rope. to bathe one’s self in water to run aground. to reach a wall with one’s chin to degenerate from his nature. to be degenerated in one’s actions to fight with the enemy. Do go down to the cellar, to descend from the tower, to recede from authority. „o descend towards the valley. -cw in stature, beneficial to the health, of a white complexion, of a soft skin, bark, to blaspheme against virtue to boast of bravery. to embroider (any thing) in or with silvol to embroider on a tambour frame. to embroider with a needle. to gape through hunger. blunt at the point. to be very fortunate to roar with anger. to vex with tricks. to struggle with any one to offer presents. to toast to any one’s heallk good to eat. to swell with anger. to move in all parts. tc make a jest of any thing APPEKDLX. 493 ETaDcr de pies, caber «n la rnano, eaer hAda tal parte, caer dt lo alto, caer en tierra, en cuenta, en error, en tal tiempo, en lo que se dice, caer por p^cua, caer solrc los enemigos, calarse de agua, calentarse a la lumbre, califi(;ar de docto, * callar (la verdad) d otro, callar rfe, por miedo, calumniar (^t alguno) de injusto, calzarse a alguno, cambiar (alguna cosa) con, por otra, caminai a, para Sevilla, caminar d pn^, caminar por el monte, cansarse de^ con el trabajo, cansarse de pretender, cansarse en el carnino capaz de cien arrobas, capaz dcy para el empleo, capitular con el eneinigo, capitular (^l alguno) de mal juez, cargarse de razon, casar (una persona 6 cosa) con otra, catequizar (a alguno) para alguna cosa, causar (perjuicio) d alguno, cautivar (a alguno) con, por beneficios, cavar (la imaginacion) en alguno, cavar (con la imaginacion) en alguna cosa, cazcalear de una parte k otra, ceder d otro a la autoridad, ceder en beneficio de alguno, censurar (alguna cosa) de mala, cenirse d lo posible, cliancearse con alguno, chapuzar (algo) en el agua, chico de cuerpo, chocar d alguno, chocar con otro, circunscribirse d una cosa, clarnar d Dios, clamar por dinero, clamorear por los muertos, coartar (la facultad) d alguno, cobrar (dinero) dc los deudores, cclegir dc, por los antecedentes, coligarse con alguno. to be able to stand in on one’s feet, to be contained in the hand, to fall on such a side, to fall from on high. to fall upon the earth, to comprehend, t« fall into a mistake, to fall out at su(h a time, to understand what is said to fall at Easter, to fall upon the enemy, to wet one’s self through xoith water to w'arin one’s self at the fire, to qualify any one as a learned man to conceal (the truth) from another, to be silent from fear, to calumniate (any one) as unjust, to lead another by the nose, to exchange (one thing) for another to travel to Seville, to travel on foot, to walk along the mountain, to fatigue one’s self with, the labor, to be tired of pretending, to be tired on the road, capable of holding a hundred arrobas • capable for the employment, to capitulate with the enemy, to reproach (any one) as a bad judge to insist upon one’s opinion, to couple (one. person or thing) with an other. to persuade (any one) to any thing, to cause (prejudice) to any one. to overcome (any one) with favors, any one to think (seriously.) to think (deeply) on any thing. to go lounging about. to yield to another, to authority. to resign in another’s favor. to blame (any thing) as bad. to keep within bounds. to joke with any one. to sink (any thing) in the water. small in person. to provoke any one. to strike one against another to confine one’s self to one thing to call on God. to cry out for money. to ring a peal for the dead. to restrict (the power) of any one. to recover (money) from debtors. to infer from the antecedents. to make an alliance with any one ♦ Four arrobas make a qr mtal 494 APPENDIX. columpiarse en el aire, Bombatir con, contra el enemigo, combinar (una cosa) con otra, comedirse en ’as palabras, comenzar A decir, comerse de envidia, compatible con la justicia, cornpensar (una cosa) con otra, competir con alguno, complacerse rfc, en alguna cosa, coinponerse con los deudores, componcrse de bueno y malo, comprar (alguno) a/, del vendedor, jomprensible al entendimiento, comprobar (algo) con instrurnentos comprorneterse con alguno, comprometerse en jueces arbitros, comunicar (luz) t alguna pane, comunicar (uno) con otro, concebir (alguna cosa) en el animo, concebir (una cosa) por buena, conceder (algo) d otro, conceptuar (^i alguno) de, por sabio, roncertar (una cosa) con otra, concordat (la copia) con el original, concurrir d algun lin, concurrir d alguna parte, concurrir con otros, concurrir (muchos) en un dictamen, condenar (a uno) d galeras, condenar (^ uno) en las costas, condescender d los ruegos, condescender con la instancia, condolerse de los trabajos, conducir (algo) d tal parte, conducir (una • >sa) al bien de otro, confabularse con l:s contrarios, confedcrarse con alguno, conferir (una cosa) con otra, conferir(unnegocio) con, entrc los amigos confesar (el deii.t:> al juez, confesarse d Dios, confesarse con alguno, confesarse de sus culpas, confiar (una cosa) d una persona, confiar en, de alguno, confinar (fi alguno) d tal parte, confinar (Espana) con Francia, confirmarse en su dictamen, conformarse con el tiempo, conforme d, con su opinion, confrontar con alguno, confrontar (una cosa) con otra, confundirse de lo que se ve ^nfundirse en sus juicios to sv/ing in the air to fight against the enemy, to combine (one thing) with anoiu^ to be civil in words to begin to say. to pine with envy compatible with ,Tistice to compensate (one thir g) wtth aii( to vie with any one. to be p.eased with any thing, to compound with debtors, to be made of good and bad. to buy (any one) from the seller comprehensible to the understanding, to prove (any thing) with instruments, to render one’s self answerable t aiq one to compromise by arbitration, \ n communicate (light) to any part to commune (one) with another to comprehend (something.) to conceive (any thing) as good, to yield (any thing) to another, to look upon (any one) as a wise man. to concert (one thing) with another, to make the copy agree with the original to concur to some end. to meet at some place, to concur with others, to agree (many) in one opinion to condemn (one) to the galleys, to condemn (one) in the costs, to condescend to entreaties, to condescend to the instance, to be grieved with the troubles to conduct (any thing) to such a place to conduce (something) to another’s gooc to converse with one’s enemies, to ally one’s seif to any one. to compare one thing with another, to confer on any business with friends to confess (one’s crime) to the judge to confess to God. to acknowledge to any one. to confess one’s sins, to intrust (any thing) to any one. to rely upon any one. to confine (any one) to such a place to lie adjacent (Spain) to France to be confirmed in one’s opinion, to conform to the times, conformable to his opinion, to confront with any one. to confront (one thing) with another to be confounded with what one sees, to be thrown (one’s senses into CJnhJ Sion. APPENDIX. 495 Sfsttgomar cun aiguno, congraciarse con otro congratularse con os suyos, congratmarse de alguaa cosa, congelurar (algo) de, por senalos, conmutar (algo) con otra cosa, conmutar (iin voto) en otra cosa., corisagrarse d Dios, consentir en algo, consolarse con sus parientes, conspirar d algima cosa, conspirar contra aiguno, conspirar en un intento, constar (el todo) de partes, constar por escrito, consultar d aiguno para un empl€5 consultar con letrados, consumado en una facultad, containinarse con los viciosos, contaminarse de heregias. conteinponzar con aiguno, contender con aiguno, contender sobre alguna cosa, contenerse en su obligacion, contestar d la pregunta, contraer (algo) d un asunto, contrapesar (una cosa) con otra, contraponer (una cosa) d otra, contrapuntarse con aiguno, contrapuntarse de palabras, contravenir d la ley, contribuir d tal cosa, contribuir con dinero, convalecer de la enfermedad, convencerse de la razon, convenir con otro, convenir en alguna cosa, conversar con alguna, conversar en materias de estadc, convertir (la hacienda) en dinero. convertirse d Dios, convidar (a aiguno) d comer, convidar (a aiguno) con dinero, convidarse d los trabajos, convocar d junta, eooperar (con otro) d alguna cosa «orrerse de vergUenza, iporresponder d los beneficios, oorresponderse con los amigos, cotejar (la copia) con el original, jrccer en virtudes, ciecido de cucipo Creer en Dios, Woerse dc alguna osa. to be congenial to ai y one to ingratiate one's seif into another’^ favor to congratulate one’s self with one’s owa friends. to rejoice in any thing, to conjecture (any thing) by signs, to barter (•>ne thing) for another to exchange (a vow) into another thirg to consecrate one’s self to God to agree to any thing, to be comforted with one's friends, to aspire to any thing, o conspire against any one I'D enter into a conspiracy to be composed (the whole) oj parts, to appear in writing, to propose any one lor an employment office. to consult with Jearned men to be consummate in a faculty. to pervert one’s self with the vicious. to contaminate one’s self with heresies. to temporize with any one. to contend with any one. to dispute upon any thing. to hold to one’s contract, duty. to answer one’s question. to apply (something) to a subject. to counterpoise (one thing) with anotha to put (one thing) against another. to compare one’s self with any one to scold at one another to transgress against the law. to contribute to such a thing. to contribute money. to recover /rom illness. to be convinced by reason. to agree with another to agree upon any thing. to converse with any one. to converse on affairs of state. to convert (goods) into money to be converted to God. to invite (any one) to dine. to offer money to anybody. to be ready to work. t;> convene a meeting. to co-operate in any thing. to be ashamed. to be grateful. to correspond with friends to compare (the copy) with the firigisiai to increase in virtues. tall in stature. to believe in God. to be convinced oj any thing 496 APPEUDIX. cucharetear en lodo, cuidar de algo, de alguno, culpar fk uno) de omiso, cumpur con alguno, cumplir con su obligacion, curarse de alguna enfemiedad. curarse en salud curtirse al aire, cuitido del sol. Dar (algo) d alguno, dar (A alguno) de palos, dar de bianco, dar en manias, dar por \ isto, darse a estudiar, darse al diantre, darse por vencido, deber (dinero) A alguno, decaer de su autoridad, decir (algo) a otro, decir (bien) con una cosa, decir (bien) de alguno, declararse A alguno, declararse por un partido, declinar A, hacta tal parte, declinar en bajeza, dedicar (tiernpo) al cstudio, dedicarse A la virtud, defender (& uno) de sus contranos, deferir (al parecer) de otro, defraudar (algo) de la autoridad de o degenerar de su nacimiento, delante de alguno, delatarse al juez, deleitarse con la vista, deleitarse en oir, deliberar sSbre tal cosa, dentro de casa, depender de alguno, dep yier (a alguno) de su empl*^, depositar (algo) en alguna parte, derivar de otro autoridad, derrenegar de alguna cosa, desabrirse con alguno, desabrocharse con alguno, desagradecido A algun benef 'm, iesaliogarse (con alguno) dt, su p«na desapropiarse de algo, desavenirsp con alguno, desavenirse (unos) de otres, desayunarse de aiguna noticia, liescabezarse en, con alguna co?'» I'^scalabazarse en alguna cosa, to intermeddle in every thing. to take care of something, of some d to blame (any one) for negligence to discharge one’s obligation to anytK>d5 to perform one’s c uty. t» be cured of any disorder. to lake care of one’s self in health to tan hi/ the air tanned by the sun. to give (something) to anybody, to beat (any one) with a stick to hit the mark, to be foolish, whimsical, to suppose any thing as seen, to give one’s self to study, to despair. to acknowledge one’s se.-f as conqi sred to be indebted to anybody, to fall from one’s authority, to say (any thing) to another, to agree (one thing) with another, to speak (well) of any one. to declare one’s self to anybody, to declare one’s self for a party to incline towards such a side, to degenerate. to employ (one’s time) in study to devote one’s self to virtue, to defend (anybody) from his enemies to adopt another’s opinion, to usurp (a little) another’s authority to degenerate from one’s ancestors, before anybody, to accuse one’s self a judge to be pleased with seeing, to delight in hearing, to deliberate upon any thing, within the house, to depend upon anybody, to depose (anybody) from his employ ment. to deposit (any thing) in any place, to derive authority from another, to detest any thing, to have a difference with anvbody. to divulge one’s secret to anothei. ungrateful for any benefit, to communicate (to another) one s hou ble. to alienate any thing. to disagree with any one. to disagree (some) with others. to take notice of any news. to labor hard in vain on any thing to puzzle one’s wits to find nut any thing APPENDIX. 497 lescansar de a fatiga^ descantillar (algo) de algi.na cosa descargarse de alguna cosa, descartarse de algun encargo, descemler a los valles, descender de buen linage, descolgarse rfe, par la inuralla, desoollar sobre otros, descomponerse con alguno, descondar de alguno, desconocido d los beneficios descontar (algo) de alguna cosa descubrirse con alguno, descuidar»e de^ en su obligacion, desdecir de su caracter, desdecir de lo dicho, desdenarse de alguna cosa, desembarazarse de estorbos, desembarcar de la nave, deseinbarcar en el puerto, desenfrenarse en vicios, desertar de las banderas, *esesperar de la pretension, rfesfalcar (algo) de alguna cosa, aesgajarse de los inontes, deshacerse d trabajar, deshacerse de alguna cosa, deshacerse en llanto, de«mentir d alguno, desmcntir (una cosa) de otra, desnudarse de pasiones, despedirse de alguna cosa, Jespeharse de un monte, despertar d alguno, despertar del sueho, despicarse de la ofensa, despobiarse de genie, desposarse con alguno, jlesprenderse de algo, despues de llegar, de alguno, de alguna cosa, desquiciar (h aiftTmo) de su poder, desquitarse de la p6rdida, desterrar (h uno) de su palria destrizarse d llorar, destrizarse de enfado, desvergonzarse con alguno desviarse del carnino, ^ desvivirse por algo, detenerse en dificultades, detcrrninarse d partir, uelras de la iglesia, dfevolver (la causa) a^juez, dojar (una manda) d algunc dejar de cscribir, digax (algo) en mano de otro to relieve one’s self from fatigue, to break off the corner of any thing, to clear one’s self from any thing to excuse one’s seif from any charge to descend to the valleys, to come of a good family to creep down the wall, to surpass others; to disagree with any one to mistrust any one. ungrateful for benefits, to discount one thing f?om another to disclose one’s self to any one to neglect one’s obligation, duty to deviate from one’s characte*^. to retract what one has said, to disdain any thing, to get rid of obstacles, to unship, unload from the vessel to land in the harbor, to abandon one’s self to vices, to desert the standard, to despair of one’s pretension, to deduct from another thing, to fall from the mountains, to work hard, with anxiety, to get rid of any thing, to burst into tears to give any one the lie. to contradict (one thing) another to divest one’s self of passions, to take leave of any thing, to fall headlong from a mountain, to awake any one. to awake from sleep, to be revenged of an affront, to become unpeopled, to marry any one. to get rid of something, after arriving, after any one, after anj thing. to deprive (any one) of his authority to make up for one’s loss. to banish (any one) from his cruntry to consume one’s self with weeping. to consume one’s self with anger. lo take liberties with anybody. to lose one’s way to be anxious for something. to be stopped by difficulties. to take tlie resolution to set out. behind the church. to return the cause to tne judge. to leave (a legacy) to any one. to leave off writing. to deposite something tn the bands o another ' 198 APPENDIX liferir (algo/ A, para otro tiempo, lignarse de conceder algo, iiinanar (una cosa) de otra, liscernir (una cosa) de otra, lisguf^arse de^ con alguna cosa, lisponer de los bienes, Jisponerse d caminar, iisputar de, sobre alguna cosa, iisentir de otro dictamen, distar (uii pueblo) de otro, distinguir (una cosa) de otra, distraerse de, en la conversacion, disv adir (d alguno) de alguna cosa, dividir (una cosa) de otra, dividir en partes, dividir entre muchos, dividir por mitad, dolerse de los pecados, dotado de ciencia, dudar de alguna cosa, durar hasta el invierno, durar por mucho tiempo, duro de corteza, Echar (algo) de, en, por tierra, echar (olor) de si, elevarse d, hasta el cielo, elevarse de ia tierra, embarcarse en negocios, embobarse con, de, en alguna cosa, emboscarse en el monte, embiitir (alguna cosa) de algodon, embutir (una cosa) en otra, enmendarse con la corr3^ccion, enmendarse de, en alguna cosa, empaparse en agua, emparejar con alguno, emparentar con alguno, empenarse en una cosa, empenarse por alguno, emplearse de alguna cosa, enagenarse de alguna cosa, enarnorarse de alguno, enarnoricarse. de algurso, encallar (la nave) en arena, encaminarse d alguna parte, enca~amarse en, por, sobre la parer , encararse d, con alguno, '^ncargarse de algun negocio, encasquetarse (algo) en ia cabeza, encastillarse en alguna parte, cncajarse en, por alguna parte, encenagarse en vicios, sncenderse en ira, mcerrarse en su casa, nit’*«arcarse en agua, to defer ^any thing, to another time to condescend to grant any thing, to emanate (one thing) from another to discern (one thing) from another to be disgusted with any thing, to dispose of goods to prepare one’s self to travel, to dispute about, on any thing, to dissent from another’s opinion, to be distant (one town) /rom another to distinguish (one thing) from anothe to wander from, in conversation, to dissuade (any one) from any thing to divide (one thing) from another to divide in parts, to divide between several, to divide into halves, to repent of sins, endowed with learning, to doubt any thing, to last till winter, to last a long time of a rough skin, barn to throw (any thing) from, on uie eanh to exhale (an odor) from one’s seif to be exalted to the skies. to be elevated /rom the earth. to be involved in business. to be stupified with any thing to lie in ambush on a hill. to inlay (any thing) with coltoa to inlay (one thing) in another, to be amended by correction. to correct one’s self in any thing. to be soaked with water to put one on a level with any one tG be related to any one. to pledge one’s self to a thing. to take part for another. to employ one’s self about a thing to alienate any thing. to be enamored with any one to fall in love with any one. to run (a ship) on shore, or on the sand to direct one’s course to any part. to climb up the wall. to face another. to charge one’s self with any business. ,o be obstinate in maintaining any thing to fortify one’s self in any place, to busy )ne’s self in any thing- *o become vicious, to kindle with anger, to shut one’s self up in one s house to drink too much water. APPENDIX. 499 rsj d Dios, eiiconarse von alguno, enfermar dtl peoho, eiifrascarse en la disputa, engolfarse en cosas graves, engreirse con la fortuiia, enlazar (alguna cosa) con otra, ciiredarse ^ana cosa) con, cn otra ensaya.rse d, para alguna cosa, ensiyarse en alguna cosa, Pateiider de alguna cosa, calender en sus negocios, enterarse de alguna cosa, enierarse en algun negocio, entrar en alguna parte, entregar (algo) d alguno, cntrerneterse en cosas de otro, tnviar (algo) d alguno, jquivocarse (una cosa) con otra, •.quivocarse cn algo, escaparse de la prision, escaparse por la ventana, jscarmentar de, con alguna cosa» jscarrnentar en cabeza agena, .sconderse en alguna parte, Bsconderse de alguno, cscaso de rnedios, escribir (cartas) d alguno, esculpir en bronr s, esinerarse en alguna cosa, espantarse dr algo, estampar en papel, estar d la orden de otro, estar de viage, estar en alguna parte, estar en ammo de, estar en lo que se hace estar para salir, estar por alguno estar (alguna cosa) por suceder, estrecharse ron alguno, estrecharse en los gastos, estrellarse ion alguno, eslrellatSB en, contra alguna cosa, estribar en alguna cosa, esceder (-na cosa) d otra, esceder (una xiad) en mil reaies, esceptuar (a alguno) de alguna cosa, escluir (alguno) de alguna parte 6 cosa. escusarse con alguno, escusarse de hacer alguna cosa, exhorlar (^i alguno) d tal cosa, exiintr (a alguno) de alguna cosa, exonerar (t alguno) de su empleo, espeler (^i alguno) de alguna parte, e» las artes. to commend one’s seif to to be irritated against a ny one to have a pain in the breast. to entangle one’s self in a disputa to be absorbed in important tlirngs. to become vain with fortune. -o tie (one thing) close to another. to interweave (one thing) with arid ’a®’; to try to do any thing. to become expert m any thing to understand any thing. to understand one’s business. to be well informed of any thing. to be well acquainted with any busitJOfix to enter any place. to deliver (something) to some one. Xo meddle with another’s affairs, to send (something) to some one. to mistake (one thing) for another, to be mistaken in any thing, to escape from prison, to escape through the window, to take warning at any thing, to take 'w'arning at another’s expen&*i to hide one’s self in any place to hide from any one. limited in means, to write (letters) to any one to engrave on brass, to exert one’s self in any thing to be terrified at any thing, lo print on paper to be under another’s directicn to be on a journey to be in some place to have a mind to. to know what is doing, to be ready to go out. to be in favor of any one. to be (something) near happen*ar to become intimate with any one to restrain one’s self in one’s expenses to fall out with any one. to dash one’s self against any thing to be supported in any thing to excel (one thing) another, to exceed (a sum) by one thousand reals to except (any one) from any thing, to exclude (any one) from any place 3 ; thing. to apologize to any one to excuse one’s seif from doing any ti to exhort (any one) to such a th.ng. to exempt (any one) from any t-iing to dismiss (any one) from his » ace. to expel (any one) f'^om any place, skilled in the arts 500 APPENDIX. estraei (\ma c >sa) de otra, eSira^iarse de la carrera, F^cil de digcrir, failar d. la palabra, faltar de alguiia parte, falto de juinio, fastidiarse de manjares, fatigarse de, en, por algiina t^osa, favorable d, para alguno, favorecerse de alguno, fiarse de, tn alguno, fiar (algo) d alguno, fiel d, con sus amigos, fijar (algo) en la pared, flexible d la razon, I'.uctuar en, entre dudas, fortificarse en alguna parte, franquearse d, con alguno, frisar (una persona 6 cosa) cor. atra hiera de casa, fuerte de condicion, fundarse en razon. Girai (una letra) d cargo de otro, girar de una parte d otra, girar por tal parte, girar sobre una casa de comcrcio, gloriarse de alguna cosa, gordo de talle, gozar de alguna cosa, graduar (una cosa) de, por buena, grangear (la voluntad) d, de alguno, guardarse de alguno, de alguna cosa, guarecerse de alguna pwsona 6 cosa guarecerse en alguna parte, giiarnecer funa cosa) con, ds otra, guiado de alguno, guiarse por a-gu*r o,^ guindarse por la pared, gustar de alguna ersa, II. Habil en papeles, babil para el empleo, habditar (a uno) cn, para alguna cosa, habitar con aiguno, fiabitar en tal parte, aabituarse d, en alguna cosa, hablar con, por alguno, hablar de, en, sobit algur a cosa riablar griego. to extract (one thing) frem xr.' T.hoi to deviate from one’s purpose. easy to digest. to fail in one’s promise to be ihissing, wanting wanting in sense. to be disgusted with victualfc to long for something. favorable to some one. to avail one’s self of any one to confide in any one. to trust (any thing) to any one faithful to one’s friends. to fix (any thingi in the wall. pliant to reason. to fluctuate in dou. t to strengthen one’s self in any place. to open one’s self to any one. to be like (a person or thing) with another out of the house. high, strong in temper. to be founded in reason. to draw (a bill) upon another, to reel from one side to another, to turn to such a siae. to draw upon a commercial house, to boast of any thing fat or thick-set. to relish any thing, to pronounce 'any thing) as good, to gam (the affection) of any vy.ie. to guard one’s self from any one, from any thing. to shelter one’s self from an> pr-rsun or thing. to take shelter in any place, to garnish (one thing) with aiiOther. guided by any one. to guide one’s self by any one. to suspend one’s self by the wall to like any thing. skilful in documents, qualified for the employment, to fit up (anybody) lo do any thing to dwell with any one to dwell in such a place, to accustom one’s self somcthii^g to speak with, or for any one to speak of, about any thing, to talk gibberish or Greek be handy at any thing. APPENDIX. 501 Hacer de v'a'ienle, aacer para ti. tiacer po^ algiino, hacerse con buenos libios, hallar (aiguna cosa) en ta parle, hallarse a, en la fiesta, harlarse de coinida, heiichir (el cantaro) di agua, tierlr (a alguiio; cn la estimacion, nerido de la injuria, German ar (ur.a cosa) con otra, f:ervir (un lugarj de, en gente, hiincarse de rOv.illas, iiocicar cn alguna cosa, holgarse con, de alguna cosa. huir de alguna persona 6 cosa, humanarse d alguna cosa, liumariarse con los inferiores, iiumillarse A alguna persona 6 c jss hundir (alguni cosa) en el agua, iiundirse en un pantano, I. Idoneo para alguna cosa, igual d. con otro, igual en fuerzas, jgualar (una cosa) A, con otra, imbuir (A alguno) de, en alguna cosa, irapeler (.A alguno) d alguna cosa, irnpelido de la necesidad, impenetrable d los mas perspicaces, impenetrable en el secreto, impetrar (algo) de alguno, iniplicarse con, en alguna cosa, Imponer (pena) d alguno, imponerse en alguna cosa importer d alguno, importunado de, por otr j. jmportunar (A alguno) con pietensiones, iinpresionar (A alguno) contra otro, impdi.ar (alguna cosa) en el aniino, impropio de, en, para su edad, irnpugnar alguna cosa d alguno impugnado de, por muchos, iinputar (la culpa) d otro, inaccesible d los pretend''3iites , inapeable de su opinion, incansable en el trabajo, Jicapaz de rernedio, tncesante en sus tarea s, mcjdir en culpa, incitar (A alguno) d su defensa, incitar (A alguno) contra otro, jiciinar (A alguno) d la virtud in3luir en el niimero, ’ncompatible con el rnando. to pretend to courage, to provide for one’s sell to do for any one to furnish one’s self with gviod books, to find (any thing) ^n such a place, to be present at the feast. *^o satiate one’s self with food to fill (the pitcher) with water, to hurt (any one) in his reputation, wounded by injury, to match (one thing) with another, to swarm (a place) with people, to kneel down, to stumble on any thing to rejoice at any thing, to fly from any person or thing, to lower one’s self to any thing to be condescending to inferiors, to humble one’s self to any person or thing. to plunge (any thing) into the water to sink in a bog. fit /or any thing, equal to, with another, equal in forces. to make (one thing) equal with another to imbibe (any one) with, in any thing, to compel (any one) to any thing. Impelled by necessity, impenetrable to the most perspicacious impenetrable in secrecy, to obtain (any thing) of anyone, to intermeddle in any thing, to impose (penalties) on any one. to instruct one’s self in any thing, to be of importance to any one. importuned with, by another, to importune (any one) with pretensiona to impress (any one) against another, to imprint (any thing) on the mind, unbecoming his age. to impugn any one in any thing, impugned by many, to impute (the fault) to any one. inaccessible to pretenders, obstinate in one’s opinion, untiring in work, incapable of remedy, ncessant in one’s labors, o fall again into a fault, to incite (any one) to one’s defcnc® to incite any one against another, to incline (any one) to virtue to include in the number, incompatible with the commaao. 602 APPENDIX. mcomyirensible d los hombics. Inconsecuente en algima cosa, mconstante e» su procecler, iiicorporar (una cosa) d, con, en otra, jicreible d, para mu<;hos, incurnDir (^una cosa) d alguno, incurrir en delitos, indeciso en resolver, Lndignarse con, contra alguno, .ndisponer (ii uno) con otro. icducir (a alguno) d pecai, uaductivo de error, indultar (a alguno) de la pena iTifatigable en el trabajo, liifecto de heregias, mierior d otro, inferior en alguna cosa, mferir (una cosa) de, por otra, iniicionado de peste, infiei d su amigo, inflexible d la razon, inflexible en su dictamen, influir en alguna cosa, inforinar (a alguno) de, sohre algina cosa, iniundir (ammo) d, en alguno, ngrato d los bencficios, ingrato con los amigos, inhabil para el empleo, inhabilitar (a alguno) para alguna cosa, inhibir (al juez) de, en el conocimiento, insensible d las injurias, inseparable de la virtud, insertar (una cosa) en otra, insinuar (una cosa) d alguno insinuarse con los poderosos, nsipido al gusto, insistir en, sobre alguna cosa, inspirar (alguna cosa) d alguno, irstruir (t aiguno) de, en, sobre alguna cosa, tnterceder con alguno por otro, nterceder por otro con alguno, nteresarse con alguno por otro, iHteresarsc en alguna cosa, iiiternarse con alguno, internal se en alguna cosa 6 lugar, mterpolai (unas cosas) c-^ otras, mterponer (su autoridad) con algur o, bitervenir en las cosas, intervenir ^wr alguno, aitroducirsc con los qde mandan, jicomprehensible to nien inconsistent in any thing, inconsistent in one’s proceedings, to incorporate (one thing) with another incredible to many. to be incumbent (any thing) on any one to incur crimes. undecided in resolving. to be angry with any one. to indispose (one) with another. lO induce (one) to sin. .eading to error. to pardon (any one) the punishment indefatigable in labor, infected with heresies, inferior to another, inferior in any thing, to infer (one thing) from another, mfected with the plague, unfaithful to one’s friend inflexible to reason, inflexible in one’s opinion, to have an influence over any tning. to inform (any one) of any thing, to infuse ^courage) in any one ungrateful for favors, ungrateful to friends, unfit for the employment, to disable any one for any thing, to inhibit (any judge) /rom taking cogni zance. insensible to injuries, inseparable from virtue, to insert (one thing) in another, to insinuate (any thing) to any one. to insinuate one's self into the favoi oi the great, insipid to the taste, to insist on any thing, to inspire (another) with any thing, to instruct (any one) in any thing to intercede with any one for anotner. to intercede for another with any one. to interest one’s seif with any one foi Jtn other. to interest one’s self in any thing, to creep into another’s tavcr. to penetrate into any t2±"g or place, to mingle (one thing) with another, to interpose (one’s authority) wiib, any one. to intervene in things to intervene /or any one. to introduce one’s self to those who com mand. to intrude one’s self into any place fotroducirse c«, por alguna parte, ArPEXDIX. 503 feiT&cido de, por los contraries, inveriiar en tal parte, uivertir (el caudal) en otro uso mgerir (un Arbol) en otro, 11 de (Madrid) d, h&cia Cadiz, ir contra alguno, ir por A cammo. ir por pan, ir tras alguno. Jictarse de alguna cosa, jug ar d tal juego, juga: amos) con otros, pi gar (alguna cosa) con otra, juntar (una cosa) d, con otra, justificarse de algun cargo, .mzgar de alguna cosa, Ladear (una cosa, d tal parte, ladearse (alguno) d otro partido, larnentarse de la desgracia, lanzar (algo) a, contra alguno, largo de cuerpo, largo de manos, lastimarse cow, en una piedra, lastiinarse de alguno, leer (los pensamientos) d alguno, lejos de la tierra, levantar (las manos) al cielo, levantar (alguna cosa) del suelo, levantar (alguna cosa) en alto, libertar (a alguno) de peligro, Ubrar (a alguno) de riesgos, lidiar cen alguno, ligar (una cosa) con otra, ligero de pies, .imitar Qas facultades) d alguno, limitado de talentos, lindar (una posesion) con otra, Uevar (algo) d alguna parte, llevarse de alguna pasion, luchar con alguno, ludir (una cosa) con otra. Malquistarse con alguno, aianar (agua) de una fuente, znai.ee de una mano, mancemunarse con otros, Diandar (alguna cosa) d alguno, manifestar (alguna cosa) d alguno, naantener (conversacion) d a guno, inantenerse de yerbas, aaantenerse en paz. invaded iy the enemies, to winter in such a place, to invest (stock) into another use. to ingraft (one tree) on another, to go (from Madrid) towards Cad.ii to go against anybody, to go in the w ay, road, to go for bread, to go after one to boast of any thing, to play at such a game to play (one) with another to move (one thing) with another, to join (one thing) to anotlier. to justify one’s self /rom any charge* to judge of any tiling. ,o incline (a thing) on such a side to be inclining to another party to lament the misfortune, to fling (something) at any one. tall in stature, liberal with, free with. to hurt one’s seif against a stone, to take pity on any one. to read (the thoughts) of any one from land. to raise (the hands) to heaven to raise (any thing) from the groiiuj to raise (any thing) on high, to deliver (any one) from danger to free (any one) from risk, to contend with any one. to tie (one thing) with another, lightfooted. to limit any one’s powders, of slender talents. to be adjoining (a possession) to anorh« to carry (something) to any place, to be carried away by some passion, to WTestle with any one. to rub (one thing) against another. to make one’s self hated by any one. to spring (water) from a fountain, maimed of one hand, to unite one’s self with others in the exs cution of any thing, to command (any thing) to any one. to manifest (any thing) to any one. to maintain conversation with one. .0 live upon herbs, to live in peace. 504 APPENDIX, maqumar contra alguno, maquinar cn, sohre alguna cosa, maravillarse de alguna cosa, mas de cien ducados, matarse en trabajar, malarse por conseguir alguna cosa, matizar con, de colores, rnediano de cuerpo, medlar con, por alguno, medlar entre los contrarios, rn^dirse con sus fuerzas, £ne, notar (h alg'iiio) de hablador, Qotificai (alguna cosa) d alguno, Obligar (a alguno) d alguna cosa, obstar (una cosa) a otra, obstlnarse en alguna cosa, obtener (alguna gracia) de alguno, ocultar (alguna cosa) d, de alguno, ocuparse en trabajar, ofenderse con, de alguna cosa, ofrecer (alguna cosa) d alguno, olrecerse d los peligros, oler (una cosa) d otra, olvidarse de lo pasado, opinar cn, sabre alguna cosa, opriinir 4 alguno con el poder, optar d los einpleos, ordenarse de sacerdote, orillar d alguna parte. Pactar (alguna cosa) con otro pagar con palabras, pagar en dinero, pagarse de buenas razones, paladearse con alguna cosa, pa'iar (alguna cosa) con otra, paudo de sernDlante, palmear d alguno, parar d la puerta, parar en casa, pararse d descansar, pararse con alguno, j ararse en alguna cosa, parco en la comida, parec er en alguna parte, parccerse d otro, parti<5ipar (algo) d alguno wrticipar de alguna cosa, parti«uiarizarse con alguno, pnrticularizarsc en alguna cosa, lArta d Italia, to be bom to a fortune, to spring (any thing) from any i nn. to be born of low parents, to be born to labor, trouble to swim in the river, to sail to tne inuies. to deny one’s self to company over-nice in one’s conduct, none of the present, to level one’s self to justice, to appoint (any one) to the employment, office. to censure (any one) as a talker, to notify (any thing) to any one. O. to oblige (any one) to any hing. to hinder (one thing) another. to be obstinate in any thing. to obtain (a favor) from any one. to conceal (any thing) from any one. lo be occupied with work. to be offended at any thing. to offer any thing to any one. to offer one’s self to dangers. to have the smell (one thing) of anolh€* to forget the past. to hold an opinion on any thing to oppress (another) by power. to be a candidate for offices. to be ordained as a priest. to draw near any side. to contract (something) with anotnei to pay with words, to pay in cash. to be satisfied with good reasons, to please one’s palate with any thing to palliate one thing with another pale-faced. to cheer any one with the hands. to stop at the door.^ to stay at home. tc stop to rest one’s self. to stop with any one to stop at any thing sparing in eating. to appear anvwliere. lo resemble another. ♦o communicate (any thing) to anv ♦^o partake of any thing, to be singular with any ono. to signalize one’s self tjs any to set off to Italy. 22 506 ArPENDIX. partir (algo) con otio, partir en pedazos, partir entre amigos, partir por rnitad, partir vor entero, partirse dc Espana, pasar d Madrid, pasar de Sevilla, pasar entre montes, pasar por el camiro, pasar por entre arboles pasar por cobarde, pasarse (alguna cosa) de la meni<^ vj i, pasarse (la fruta) de madura, pasarse (algimo) de letras, pasearse con otro, pasearse por el campo pecar contra la ley, pecar de ignorante, pecar en alguna cosa, pecar por demasia, pedir (alguna cosa) d alguno, pedir con justieia, pedir contra alguno, pedir de justicia, pedir en justicia, pedir por Dios, pedir por alguno, pegar (uiia cosa) i otra, pegar (una cosa) con otra, pegar contra, en la pared, pelarse por alguna cosa, peligrar en alguna cosa, pelotearse con alguno, penar en la otra vula, penar por alguna persona 6 cosa pender de alguna cosa, penetrar hasta las entranas, penetrado de dolor, pensar en, sobre alguna cosa perder (algo) de vista. pemerse (alguno) de vista perierse en el caniino, pel ecer de hambre, perecerse de risa, nerecerse por alguna cosa, peregrmar por el rnundo, perlurnar con incienso, pcrmanecer en alguna parte, permitir (alguna cosa) d alguno, p«rmutar (una cosa) con, por otra. perseguido de enemigos, nerseverar en algun intento, peiauaair (alguna 3osa) d alguno, persuadirse d alguna cosa, oersuadirse de, por las razones ie otro, jertenccer (una cosa ’ d alguno to share (an> thing) with anolb^ to break into pieces. to share between friends. to divide in halves to divide by tens. to set off from Spain. to go to Madrid to go beyond Seville. to pass between mountain?. to pass by the road. to pass between trees. to pass for a coward. to slip the memory (any thing.) to begin (the fruit) to decay. to become (some one) a scholar to take a walk with another to walk in the country. to transgress the law. to sin through ignorance. to be faulty in any thing. to sin through excess. to ask (any thing) of any one to ask with justice. to bring an action against any ont. to claim in law. to sue at law. to beg /or God. to ask for any one. to apply (one thing) to another. to join (one thing) with another to fasten against the wall. to be anxious for any thing. to be in danger in any thing. to scuffle with any one. to suffer in the other life. to suffer for any person or thing to depend upon any thing. to penetrate to the entrails penetrated with grief. to think of, upon any thing to lose sight of any thing. to excel tn an eminent degree to lose one’s way. to perish with hunger to die with laughing. me jor any thing, to wander through the world to perfume with incense, to remain in any place, to permit (any thing) to any f*ne to exchange (one thing) for anoiue? pursued by enemies, to persevere in any design to persuade any one of (anj thing ' to be persuaded 0 / any thing, to be persuaded by another’s reaso?v' to belong (any thing) to any one. APPENDIX. 507 p«frti echarse de lo necesa no, oesarle (a algiino) de lo que ha hecho pesado en la oonversacion, pescar con red, piar por alguna cosa, picaF de, en todo, picarse de alguna cosa, pintiparado a alguno, plagarse de graPxOS, plantar (h alguno) en alguna parte, plantarse en Cadiz, poblar de arboles, pobiar en buen parage, poblarse de gente, ponderar (una cosa) de grande, poner (a uno) d oficio, poner (alguna cosa) cn alguna parte, poner (a alguno) por corregidor, ponerse d escribir. porfiar con alguno, portarse con decencia, posar en alguna parte, poscido de teinor, postrado de la enfermcdad, postrarse d los pies de alguno, postrarse en cama, postrarse en tierra, precedido de otro, preciarse de valiente, precipitarse rfe, por alguna parte, preferido d otro, preferido de alguno, preguntar (alguna cosa) d alguno prendarse de alguno, prender (las plantas) en la tierra, preocuparse de alguna cosa, prepararse d, para alguna cosa, preponderar (una cosa) d otra, prescmdir de alguna cosa, presentar (alguna cosa) d alguno, presentar (a uno) p%ra una prebf ad? preservar (a algun:) de daho, presidir d otros, presidir en un tribunal, presidido de otro, prestar (dinero) d alguno, prestar (la dieta) para la salud, prestar sobre prenda, prcsumir de docto, prevalecer (la verdacf obre la mentira, prevenir (alguna cosa) d alguno, Drevenirse de lo necesaric, prevenirse para un viage, primero de, entre todos, I rirgarse en alguna cosa, nrivar (a alguno) de lo suyo, wsrar con alguno to provide one s self vcith necessarle-s to regTet (any one) vvliat he has don^ dull in conversation. to fish with a net. to long for any thing. to excel in every thing. to pique one’s self upon any tkrni; like to any one exactly. to be plagued with pimples. to set (any one) in ai.y place to be settled in Cadiz. to fill with t ees. to settle in a good situation. to be peopled with persons. to exaggerate (any thing) as great. to put (any one) in business. to put (any thing) somewhere. to appoint (any one) as corregidoi to set one’s self to writing. to be positive with any one. to conduct one’s self with decency to lodge in any place. possessed by fear. prostrated by sickness. to prostrate one’s self at anothe; to be confined to one’s bed. to kneel down on the ground. preceded by another. to pique one’s self upon courage. to be precipitated from any pUce preferred to another preferred by any one. to ask any one (any thing.) to be taken with any one. to take root (plants) in the earth. to be prepossessed with any thing. to prepare one’s self for any thing. to preponderate (one thing) over to lay aside any thing. lo present (any thing) to a^y one. *o present any one for a prebend, to preserve (any one) from injury, to preside over others, to preside in a tribunal, presided by another, to lend (money) to any one. to contribute (the diet) to health, to lend on security, to set up for a man of learning, to prevail (truth) over falsehood, to advise another of (any thing.) to provide one’s self with necesssnes to prepare one’s self for a journey first amonp' all. to intermeddle in any thing, to deprve (any one) of his ov n. t be intimate with any one. 608 APPENDIJt probar d saltar, probar de todo, proceder d la eleccion, proceder con, sin acuerdo, proceder contra alguno, proceder (una cosa) de otra, procesar (a uno) par delitos, procurar por alguno, proejar contra las olas, profesar en religion, prometer (alguna cosa) d alguno, pioinover {k alguno) a algun cargo, propasarse d, en alguna cosa, proponer (alguna cosa) d alguno, proponer (a alguno) en primer lugar, pi oporcionar (d alguno) para alguna cosa, proporcionarse d las fuerzas, proporcionarse para alguna cosa, prolongar (el plazo) d alguno, prorurnpir en lagrimas, proveer (la plaza) de viveres proveer (el empleo) en alguno provenir de otra cosa, provocar d ira, provocar (a alguno) con malas p "tlabras proximo a morir, pujar pur alguna cosa, purgarse de sospecha, Cuadrar con el encargo, cuadrar (alguna c -sa) d alguno, cual de los dos, •^uebrantar (los hiiesos) d alguno, quebrar (el corazon) d alguno, quedar de asiento, quedar de pi»is, quedar en casa, quedar (camino) por andar queda por alguno, quedar por cobarde, quedar (una cosa) por mia, quedarse en el sermon, quejarse d alguno, quejarse de alguno, querellarse d, ante el juez, quercliarse de su vecino, ^uemar con malas razones, luemarse de alguna palabra, quemarse por alguna cosa, laendo de sus amigos, iuien de ellos, iuitar (alguna cosa) d alguno luitar (alguna cosa) de aigui.*. parte iuitar se de quimeras. to try to jump, to taste of every thing, to proceed to the election, to proceed with or without circumspcs tion. to proceed against any one. ..o proceed (one thing) /rom another to proceed against a man for crimes to procure for any one. to row against the waves, to profess m religion to promise (any thing) to any one to promote (any one) to any office, to overshoot one’s mark xn any thing, to propose (any thing) to any one. to propose (any one) in the first place to fit (any one) for any thing, to proportion one’s self to one’s strength to fit one’s self for any thing, to prolong (the credit) to any one. to burst into tears. to furnish (the fortress) with provisions to provide any one with (an employment to proceed from something else to provoke to anger, to provoke (any one) hy scurrilous Ian guage. at the point of death. to strive for any thing. to clear one’s seif from suspicion to fit /or the employment. to fit (any thing) any one which of the two. to break any one’s bones. to break any one’s heart. to remain or reside in a place. to remain standing. to tarry at home. to have to proceed farther. to be bail for any one. to be reputed a coward. to fall (any thing) to my share. to stop short in a discourse. to complain to any one to complain of any one. to lay one’s complaint before llie judge to complain of one’s neighbor. tc inflame one with invective. to be offended with any word. to heat one’s self for any thing. beloved by one’s friends. which of them. to take (any thing) from any one. to take (any thing) from any place to free one’s self fiom whims APPENDIX. 509 R. Rabiar dt hambre, 'abiar j>or comer, radical 86 en la virtud, raer de alguna cosa, rallar (las tripas) d cualquiera, rayar con la virtud, razonar con alguno, rebalsarse (el agua) en alguna parte, rebatir (una cantidad) de otra, lebajar (una cantidad) de otra, recaer en la enfermedad, recalcarse en lo dicho, recatarse de alguno, recavar (alguna cosa) de, con alguno recetar (medicmas) a, para alguno, recetar contra alguno, recibir (alguna cosa) de alguno, recinir d cuenta, recibir (4 alguno) en casa, recibirse de abogado, recio de cuerpo, reclinarse en, sobre alguna cosa, recluir (A alguno) en alguna parte, recobrarse de la enfermedad, recogerse d. casa, recoinendar (alguna cosa) d alguno, recoiiipensar (agravios) con beneficios, reconcentrarse (el odio) en el corazon, reconciliar (^ uno) con otro, recoil venir (a alguno) con, de, sohre alguna cosa, recostarse en, sobre la silla, rccudir (^i alguno) con el sueldo, redondearse de deudas, reducir (alguna cosa) d la mitad, redundar en beneficio, referirse a alguna cosa, refocilarse con alguna cosa, refiigiarse d, en sagrado, reerlarse d lo justo, legodearse en. con alguna coii, reirse a carcajadas, reirse de alguno, reinirarse en alguna cosa reemplazar (a alguno' n su empleo, rendirse d la razon, renegar de alguna cosa, repartir (alguna cosa) d, entre algunos, representarse (alguna cos') d la iinag nacion, resbalarse de las manos, resentirse de alguna cosa, residir de asiento en alguna parte ro«idir en la corte, nspiolTcrea d alguna cosa. to be very hui.gry. to long to eat. to be fixed in virtue. to scrape from any thir g. to importune (the intestines) u y oiio to excel in virtue. to converse with any one. water to stagnate in any place to deiiuct (a sum> from anoth#»r. to abate (one sum) from anotner to relapse into sickness. to be firm in what has been said to be cautious of any one. to obtain (any thii.g) from any one. to prescribe (medicines) for any one to make a charge against any one to receive (any thing, from any one to receive on account. to receive (any one) at home to be admitted as a counsellor. of a strong constitution. to lean upon any thing. to shut (any one) up in any place. to recover one’s sell from sickness. to retire home. to recommend (any tiling) to any one. to recompense wrongs u>ilA benefits, to concentrate (hatred) in the heart, to reconcile (one) with another, to charge (any one) with any thing to recline on a seat, to pay (any one) his wages, to pay otf one’s debts, to reduce (any thing) to the half, to conduce to the benefit, to refer one’s self to any thing, to be refreshed with any thing to take refuge m some sacred place, to conform to what is right, to delight one’s self in any thing, to laugh heartily, to make a jest of any one. to examine one’s self in any thing, to take the place (of any one) in his em ployment, office, to yield to reason, to apostatize from any thing, to share (any thing) among several, to represent any thing to one’s tion. to slip away from the hands to resent any thing, to be settled in any place, to reside at court, to resolve upon any thing. 510 APPENDIX. responder 4 la prtgunta, restar (una cantidad) de otra, ••estituirse d su casa, resuitar (una cosa) de otra, retirarse d la soledad, retirarse del inundo, retraerse d alguna parte, retraerse de alguna cosa, retroceder A, hacxa tal parte, reventar de risa, reventar -por hablar, revestirse de auloridad, revolcarse en los vicios, revolver contra, hdcia, sobre el enemigo, robar (dinero) d alguno, rodar (el carro) por tierra, rodear (i alguno) por todas partes, rodear (una plaza) con, de inurailas, rogar (alguna cosa) d alguno, romper con alguno, romper po^ alguna parte, rozarse (una cosa) con otra, rozarse en las palabras. Saber d vino, saber de trabojos, sacar (una c*»sa) d la plaza, sacar de alguna parte, sacar en limpio, sacnfic.ar (alguna cosa) d Dios, sacrificarse por alguno, salir a alguna cosa, salir con la pretension, salir contra alguno, salir de alguna parte, salir por fiador, saltar (una cosa) d la imaginacion, sallar de el suelo, saltar de gozo, saltar en tierra, salvar (ii alguno) dcZ peligro, sanar de la enferrnedad, satisfacer par las cul))as, satisfacerse de la duda, segregar (it alguno) de alguna parte, segregar (una cosa) de otra, 'cguirse (una cosa) de otra, semejar, 6 senaejarse (una cosa) d otra pentarse en la mesa, sentarse d la silla, sentenciar (ti uno) d destierro, sentirse de algo, sepal ar vuna cosa) de otra, ser (una cosa) d gusto ae todos, ser (una cosa) de, para algunos ^rvir de mayoruomo. to answer the question, to remain (one sum) from another to return to one’s house, to result (one thing) from anothe to retire into solitude, to retire /rom the world. U) take refuge anywhere. to escape from any thing. to recede towards such a place to burst with laughter. to burst with a desire of speaking to be invested with authority to wallow it vice. to return to tne enemy. to rob any one of (money.) to overset ^a cart.) to encompass (any one) on r.ll sidei 1,0 surround (a place) with walls to beg (any thing) of any one. to break olf with any one. to break in any place. to rub (one thing) against anothei to stammer in one’s speech. to taste like wine, to be acquainted with trouble, to take (any thing) to the market, to take any thing from any place, to clear up all doubts, to copy fair, to sacrifice (any thing) to God. to sacrifice one’s self for any one to co-operate xn any thing, to obtain one’s aim. to go out against any one. to go out from any place, to appear as security, strike (any thing) the imagination to leap from the ground, to leap with joy. to leap on the ground, on shore, to save (any one) from danger, to recover from sickness, to atone for one’s faults, to oe satisfied for the doubt, to separate (any one) from any place to separate (one thing) from anothei t^ follow (one thing) from another, to liken (one thing) to another, to sernble. to sit down to table, to sit down in the chair, to condemn (one) to exile, to be sensible of any thing to separate (one thing) from anothei to be (any thing) to the taste of all to be (any thing) to or for. some one to serve as a steward. APPENDIX. 511 lervlr en palacio, servirse de alguno, sinoerarse de alguna cosa, sisar de la compra, Bitiado de enemigos, sitiar por hambre, situarse en alguna parte, Bobrellevar (los trabajos) cun paciencia, Bobrellevar (4 alguno) en sus trabajos, sobrepujar alguno) en autoridad, sobresalir en galas, sobresalir entre todos, sobresaltarse de alguna cosa sojuzgado de enemigos, someterse d alguno, sonar (alguna cosa) d hueca, sonar (alguna cosa) hdcia tal parte, sordo d las voces, sordo de un oido, sorprender (i alguno) en alguna cosa, sorprenderle en alguna cosa, sorprendido de la bulla, sospechar (alguna cosa) de alguno, sospechoso d alguno, subdividir en partes, subir d alguna parte, subir de alguna parte, subir sobre la mesa, subrogar (una cosa) en lugar de Gtra, subsistir del auxilio ageno, subsistir en el dict^men, sustiluir a, por alguno, bustituir (un poder) en alguno, sustraerse de la obediencia, Buceder (a alguno) en el empleo, sulrir (los trabajos; con paciencia, sugerir (alguna cosa) d alguno, sujetarse d a guno, 6 alguna cosa, sumergir (alguna cosa) en el agua sumirse en alguna parte, sumiso d la voluntad, supeditado de los contraries, fui erior d sus enemigos, superior en luces, Buplicar de la sentencia, suplicar por alguno, Buplir por alguno, surgir (la nave) en el puertf Burtir de viveres, Buspenso de oficio, (aopimr por cl mando, to be a servant xn a palace, to make use of any one. to clear one’s self from sometliing. to curtail from the purchase, besieged by enemies, to lay siege by means of hunger, to station one’s self in any place, to undergo (labors or troubles) with , » tience. to assist (any one) in his labcrs ^ troubles. to exceed (any one) in authority. to surpass in dress. to excel among all. to be started at any thing subdued by enemies. to submit to any one. to sound (any thing) hollow. to sound (any thing) towards such a si le deaf to the cries. deaf xoith one ear. to surprise (any one) with any thing, to surprise him in any thing, surprised by the noise, to suspect any one of (any thing.) suspected by any one. to subdivide into parts, to go up to any place, to go up from any place, to get upon the table, to substitute (one thing) instead of an other. to subsist by others’ aid, to continue in an opinion, to substitute for any one. to substitute (a power) to any one, to withdraw one’s self from subordina tion. to succeed (any one) in an employment office. to suffer (troubles) with patience, to suggest (any thing) to any one. to subject one’s self to any one, or an^ thing to plunge (any thing) in the water, to sink in any place, submissive to the will, subdued by the enemies, superior to one’s enemies superior in talents, to petition against the sentence, to entreat /or any one. to supply for any one. to ride (the vessel) at anchor in the port to supply with victuals, suspended in the exercise of one’s eoi ployment, office, to aspire after command. 512 APPENDIX, lu Stent arse ton yerbas, Bustentarse de esperanzas, Tachar {k alguno) de ligero, tembiar de frio, tenudo de niuchos, teiiieroso de Ja nmerte, leinible ti. los coiitrarios, remplarse en comer, tener (k uno) por otro, ;^enerse en pi6, tenir de azul, tirar A, hdcia tal parte, tirar por tal parte tiritar de frio, titubear en alguna cosa, tocar (la herencia) d algimo, tocar en alguna parte, tocado de enfermedad, tomar con, en las manos, lomar (una cosa) de tal modo, tomar (una cosa) a uno, torcido de cuerpo, tornar d alguna parte, tornar de alguna parte, ♦rabajar en alguna cosa, trabajar por alguna cosa, trabajar por otro, trabar de alguno, trabar (una cosa) con otra, trabar en alguna cosa, trabarse de palabras, trabucarse en las palabras, traer (alguna cosa) d alguna parte traer (alguna cosa) de alguna parte, traficar en drogas, transferir (alguna cosa) d otro tiempo, transferirse d tal parte, transrigurarse en otra cosa, transforinar (una cosa) en otra, traiisitar por alguna parte, transpirar por todas partes, transportar (algimacosa) d alguna parte, transportar (alguna cosa) de alffi.na parte traspasar (algur'i cosa) d alguiiO, iraspasado de dolor, trasplanlar (de una parte) d otra con alguno, tratar de alguna cosa, tiatar en lanas, tra resear con alguno, tnunlar de los enemigos, trocar (una cosa) por otra tropezar en alguna cosa TTltimo de todos, uncu (los bueyesj al carre, to feed upon he: &o. to sustain one’s self teiik to accuse (any one) of lerity. to tremble with cold feared bi/ many. fearful of death. dreadful to his enem:'es ‘o be ten.perate in eating. to take (< me) for another to keep one’s self on foot. to dye in blue. to draw on such a side. to diaw towards such a side to shiver with cold. to waver in any thing. to fall (the u.heritance) to any one to touch on anyw here. touched with disease. to take withf or tn the hands. to take (any thing) in such a mannsi to take (any thing) /rom any one. deformed in body. to turn to such a side. to turn from such a side. to work tn any thing. to contend for any thing. to work for another. to seize on any one. to join one thing with another to fall on any thing. to engage in words. to mistake one's words. to bring (any thing) to any place. to bring any thing from any place to deal in drugs. to transfer (any thing) to another time to transport one’s self to such a place. to ti ansform one’s self into another thini( to transform (one thing) into another. to pass by any place. to transpire on all sides. to transjiort (any thing) to any place. to transport (any thing) from any plac^ to transfer (something) to another. transfixed with grief. to transplant (from one place) to ancthei to treat with any one to treat of any thing. to deal tn wool. to banter with any one. to triumph over the enemy. to change (one thing) for anothe to stumble on any thing. the last cf all. to yoke (the oxen) to the cor* APPENDIX. siiiforinar (una cosa) con otra^ »nir (una cosa) A, con otra, unirse en comunidad, miirse entre si, uno de, entre muchos, uLil a la p^lna, util para tal cosa, Jtilizarse en, con alguna cosa^, Vacar al estudio, vaciarse de alguna cosa, vaciarse por la boca, vacilai en la eleccion, vacilar entre la esperanza y el temor, vacio de entendirniento, vagar por el mundo, valerse de alguno, de alguna cosa, vahiar (una cosa) en tal precio, vanaglonarse de alguna cosa, recino al trono, vecino de Antonio, velar a los muertos, velar sohre alguna cosa, vericerse a alguna cosa, vencido de los contrarios, renderse a alguno, vengarse de otro, venir n, de, por alguna parte, venir con algiino, verse con alguno, verse en allura, vestir A la moda, vestirse de pano, vigilar sobre sus subditos, violentarse A, en alguna cosa, visible a, para todos, vivir A su gusto, vivir con alguno, vivfr de liinosna, '/ivir por milagro, vivir sobre la haz de la tierra, volar al cielo, volar por el aiie, volver A, de, hdcia, por tal parte volver por la verdad volar en el pleito, votar por alguno, Zabullirse 6 zambullirse en el agus-^ lafarse de alguna persona 6 cosa zambucarse en alguna parte tarrpuzarse en agua, lapatparse con alguno, tcaor 'ar en la tormenta, 513 to make (one thing) uniform with another to unite (one thing) with another. to unite in a communiiv. to be united between theictfc ves. one among many. useful to the country useful for such a thing. to draw advantage oj any thing. to attend to study. to be emptied of any thing to be open-mouthed. to hesitate in one’s choice. to vacillate between hope and fea*- addle-headed. to wander through the world. to avail one’s self of any one or any thing to value (any thing) at such a price. to be puffed up with pride for any thing near the throne near Anthony. to watch the dead. to watch over any thing. to conquer one’s self in any thing. conquered by the enemy. to sell one’s self to any one. to revenge one’s self on another. to come to, from, or by any place. to come with another. to meet any one. to find one’s self in such a latitude, oi high station, to dress tn the fashion, to be dressed tn cloth, to watch over one’s subjects to be violent tn any thing visible to all. to live to one’s taste to live with any one. to live by alms, to live by a miracle, to live without care, to fly to heaven, to fly tn the air. to return to, from, towards, by such a plac?r to defend the truth, to vote tn the trial. to vote for any one. o piunge into the water, to escape any one or any thing to hide one’s self tn any place, to dive into water, to scuffle with any one. to sink or founder tn the storm. 614 APPENDIX. THE IRREGULAR VERBS. A verb is called irregular when, in some of its persons, it either takes letters that are not in its radicals, or suppresses or changes them, or tlie termination of its respective conjugation ; as tener, to have ; tengo, I have • tuve, 1 had ; tendre, I shall have : instead of teno, tent, tencrL Dar, U give ; doy, I give ; di, I gave : instead of do, de lERBS THAT, ON ACCOUNT OF THEIR PRONUNCIATION, REaUIRE A CHANGE IN THEIR RADICAL LETTERS. I Verbs ending in car change the c into au | When the first letter of the termination is e CER CIR GER 1 GIR 1 QUIR GUIR 2 GAR ZAR drop add change c o o QU u u Ohs. 1 and 2. Verbs ending in ger and gir, are written at present by Hiany learned persons with j instead of g, in all the tenses; thus, escojer, escoji, 6 lc, Obs. 3. Vel-bs ending in uir drop the u, when it is liquid, in the Infinitive mood, as in seguir; but they retain it when it is fully sounded, as in arguir> Ohs. 4. In the following examples, explanatory of the preceding rules, only the first person of an irregular tense is laid down, as it is easy to form the rest. When only one person is irregular, it is followed by the regular one, after which the rest may be formed. Examples : — Marcar, marque, marcaste, &c. Marque, &c. — Vencer, venzo, vences, &c. Venza, &c. — Resarcir, resarzo, resarces, &c. Resarza, &c. — Escoger, escojo, escoges, &.c. Escoja, &c. — Elegir, elijo, eliges, &c ELija, &LC. — DELiNauiR, delinco, delinques, &c. DeLinca, 6lc. — Seguir, sigo, sigues, &c. Siga, &c. — Pagar, pague, pagaste, &c. Pague, &lc • — Alcanzar, alcance, alcanzaste, &c. Alcance, &c. Obs. 5. The verbs of the third conjugation ending in Uir or nir, suppress the i of the termination when it is immediately followed by o or c; as, en- ^uliir, to swallow ; engulleron, they swallowed ; renir, to fight. While our masters are fighting, we Mientras nuestros duenos rineren must fight also. nosotros hemos de renir tamhien D. Quijots, cap. xiv. pt ii. APPENDIX. 515 V2RBB T'lIAT ARE IRREGULAR IN TllElR RADICAL LETTERS. Tno number of the Irregular Verbs in the Spanish language is upwards af Jive hundred and Jifty; forty of which confine their irregularities tc diemsolves, their compounds, and a few other verbs; the rest are arranged Into several classes. Remark — In the following collection of verbs, only the irregular tenser and persor>s are laid down, and printed in italics : the regular ones are in Roman characters. The tenses and persons omitted are formed in the reg- ular way. GENERAL RULES. 1. Verbs of the second and third conjugations that have a, e, or u for the last of their radical letters, change the i, by which the termination begins, into Y, when said i is immediately followed by E or o ; as VERBS. Rad letters Ctfer, to fall, ca Leer, to read, Ic Atnbuir, to attribute, atrihu GERUND. FRET. INDEF. N. 3. rermination 3 p. sing, terra. 3 p. pi. term. lENDO. lO. lERON. cayendo cay 6 cayeron leyendo ley 6 ley iron atrihuyendo atribuyo atribuyeron Obs. 6. The same change of i into y takes place in all the persons of the first, N. 7, and third, N. 9, terminations of the imperfect tense of the sub- jUJictive, and in the future of the same mood ; thus, Cayera, cayese, cayerc. —Leyera^ leyese, leyere. — Atribuyera, atribuyese, atribuyere. Obs. 7. In the verbs in uir this change is made when the u is sounded, as in atribuir ; but not when it is liquid, as in seguir. 2. Verbs ending in uir, when the u is sounded as in contribuir, (to con- ribute,) besides changing the i into y in the terminations beginning with io, te, as explained in the preceding rule, add y immediately after the u in all the terminations beginning with o, e, or a ; as. INSTRLTIR, to instruct. A verb of the third conjugatiou 5 • ( Termination, ir. Gerund, Instruyendo . — Indicative Present. 1 Instruyo, 2 instruyes, 3 instiuye, 2 V.instruye. 1 Instruimos, 2 instruis, 3 instruyen, 2 VV.in- stray en — Preterit Indefinite. 1 Instrui, 2 instruiste, 3 instruyo, 2 V nstruyo. 1 Instruimos, 2 instruisteis, 3 instruyeron, 2 VV. instruyeron, — Imperative. 1 Instruya yo, 2 instruye tu, 3 instruya el, 2 instruya V. 2 No instruyas tu, 1 Instruyamos nosotros, 2 instruid vosotros, 3 in- ttruyan ellos, 2 instruyan VV., 2 No instruyais . — Subjunctive Present I Instruya, &c. IxMperfect. 1st term., 1 Instruyera, &c. 2d term., 1 In strmria, &lq 3d tenn., 1 Instruyese, &c. Future. 1 Instruyeie, &c 516 APPENDIX. 3. Verbs tiiding in acer, ecer, ocer, ucir, take a z before the radicx Ct when the first letter of the termination is o or a j as, CONOCER, to know. A. verb of the second conjugation. J Radical letters, conoc \ Termination, er. Indicative Present 1 Cono^rco, 2 conoces, &-c. Subjunctive Present i Conozca, 2 conozcas, &c. Imperative. 1 Conozca yo, 2 conoce tii, 3 conozca 6\, 2 conozca V., 2 No conozcas 1 conozcamos^ 2 conoced, 3 conoz- can, 2 conozcan VV., 2 No conozcais. Except Hacer, Cocer, Torcer, and a few othei*s, together with their com- pounds. Ohs. 8 . Verbs ending in acer, &c., were formerly conjugated by changing the radical c into g, in the persons in which it was preceded by the z. Old people still do the same in some of the towns of Spain. Example : Y se reduzga d unidad, instead of reduzca — And it may be reduced to unity — Fr. Luis de Leon. ANALOGY BETWEEN SOME OF THE TENSES. 1. When the first and second person singular of the present of the indica- tive mood have the same irregularity, the third person singular and plural of it are likewise irregular; and the same irregularity takes place in the three persons singular and third plural of the present of the indicative mood, and of the imperative. See the verbs Pensar, Entender, ♦S'criiir.- -Except Haber, Ser, Estar, Dar, Saber, Ir, and their compounds. 2. When only the first person of the indicative mood is irregular, the same irregularity is to be observed in all the persons of the subjunctive and of the imperative mood ; excepting the second person singular and plural of the latter, and also the six verbs, Haber, Ser, &c. 3. When the gerund has any irregularity, then the third person singu- lar and the third person plural of the preterit indefinite (N. 3) have the game irregularity ; which is also found in the first termination, (N. 7,) thiid termination, (N. 8,) and in the future of the same mood. If these verbs drop the i of the termination in the third person plural of the preterit definite, they do the same also in the first and second terminations of the imperfect tense of the subjunctive, and in the future of the same mood See the verbs Pedir, Sentir, &c. 4 The same analogy is found between the future of the indicative mood and the termination ria (N. 8) of the imperfect of the subjunctive mood. Ocnsult verbs Tener, Poder, &lc. THE SEVEN MOST NUMEROUS CLASSES Or THE IRREGULAR VERBS I. ACRECENTAR, to increase, and all the verbs conjugated like it, take as i before the last e of the radical letters, in the hrst, second, and third pcreor. APPENDIX. 517 Mgular, and third plural of the present of the indicative mood, present sub unctive mood, and in the imperative. They are regularly conjugated in all the other tenses and moods. ACRECENTAR, to increase. Radical letters, Acrecent : termination, a.r Indicative. Present. 1 Acreciento 1 Acrecentamos 2 Acrecientas 2 Acrocentais 3 Acrecienta 3 Acrecientan 2 V. acrecienta 2 VV. acrecientan Subjunctive. Present. 1 Acrecienta 1 Acrecentemoe 2 Acrecientes 2 Acrecenteis 3 Acrecicnte 3 Acrecienten 2 V. acrecienta 2 VV.acreciantM^ Imperative. 1 Acrecienta yo 2 Acrecienta tu 3 Acreciente el 2 Acreciente V. 2 No acrecientes 1 Acrecentemos 2 Acreceiitad 3 Acrecienten 2 Acrecienten VV. 2 No acrecenteis. The following verbs, and their compounds, are conjugated like Acrecent i To hit the aim aceriar To recommend encomendar To breathe alentar To bury enterrar To render skilful adestrar To take warning escarmentar To feed apacentar To rub f re gar 2 To squeeze apretar To govern gohernar To hire arrendar To freeze helar To place asentar To shoe herrar To saw aserrar To winter invernar To stuff atestar To mention mentar To throw down aterrar To take a collatlo i merendar To cross airavesar To deny negar 2 To winnow mmtar To snow nevar To warm calentar To think pensar To blind cegar 2 To break quehrar To shut cerrar To recommend recomendar To commence comenzar To water regar 2 To agree concertar To burst reventar To confess confesar To cut down segar 2 To taste for the > decentar To sow semhrar first time ) To set sentar To break the back derrengar 2 To quiet sosegar To cut off the legs despernar To bury soterrar To awake despertar To tremble temblar To banish desicrrar To tempt tentar To pave empedrar To rake trasegar 2 To begin empezar To stumble tropezar To lock up encerrar * 618 APPENDIX. II ACORDAR, to agree, and all the verbs conjugated liKe it, take the kble ue instead of the last radical o, in the Jirst, second, and third person singular, and tnird plural of the present indicative mood, present subjunc- tive mood, and in the imperative. ACORDAR t: agree. Radical letters. Acord : termination, ar. Indicative. Subjunctive Present. Present. 1 Acuerdo 1 Acordamos 1 Acuerde 1 Acordemos 2 Acuerdas 2 Acordais 2 Acuerdes 2 Acordeis 3 Acuerda 3 Acuerdan 3 Acuerde 3 Acuerden V acuerda VV. acuerdan VV. acuerde VV. acuerden Imperative. Acuerde yo Acordemos Acuerda tii Acordad Acuerde 41 Acuerden Acuerde V Acuerden VV No acuerdes No acordeis. The following verbs, and their compounds, are conjugated like Acorda\ To shame avergonzar To force forzar To thunder atronar To rest holgar 2 To waste asolar To tread hollar To approve aprobai To show mostrar To bet apostar To people poblar To hoe aporcar To prove probar To grind amolar To remind recordar To breakfast almorzat To lie down rt costar To divine agorar To belch rtgoldai To la) lown acostar To renew renovar To cost costar To reprove reprobar 1 0 count contar To roll rodar To hang colgar 2 To compensate rescontar To console consoiar To breathe resollar To verify comprobar To entreat rogar 2 To strain colar To desolate desolar To demonstrate demostrar To skin desollar To surpass descollar To behead degollar To be impudent desvergonzarse To discourage desconsolat To diity emporcar 2 To meet encontrar To string encordar To solder soldvtr To meet encontrar To lessen soltar To engross engrosar To sound sonar APPENDIX. 519 To dream sohar To toast tostar To thuudor tronai To barter irocai ? To fly volar To overtimi volcar 2. III. MOVER, to movey and all the verbs conjugated like it, take the syllaola iie instead of the radical o, in the Jirsty second, and third ^person singular, and third plural of the present indicative mood, present subjunctive mood, and in the imperative. 1 Muevo 2 Mueves 3 Mueve V mueve MOVER, to move. Radical letters, Mov : termination, er. Indicative. 1 Movemos 2 Moveis 3 Mueven VV. mueven 1 Mueva 2 Muevas 3 Mueva V. mueva Subjunctive. 1 Mov am 03 2 Movais 3 Muevan VV muevan Imperative. Mueva yo Mueve tii Mueva cl Mueva V. No muevas Movamos Moved Muevan Muevan VV. No movais. The following verbs, and their compounds, are conjugated like Mover : To absolve ahsolver To grieve doler To iain Hover To solve solver To grind moler To twist torcer 2 To bite morder To turn volver To dissolve disolver To twist again retorcer 2. IV. ATENDER, to attend, and all the verbs conjugated like it, take an oefore the last e of the radical letters, in the first, second, and third person iingulaa , and third plural of the present indicative mood, present snbjuno- live mood, and in the imperative. Atiendo i Atiendes 3 Aticnde V atiende ATENDER, to attend. Radical letters, Atend : termination, er. Indicative. Present. 1 Atendemos 2 Atendeis 3 Atienden VV. atienden 1 Atienda 2 Atiendas 3 Atienda V. atienda Subjunctive Present. 1 Atendaraos 2 Atendais 3 Atiendan VV. atiendan 520 APPENDIX. Imperative. AUenda yo Alien de Atienda 6\ Atienda V. No aiiendas Atendamoe Atended Atiendan Atieiidan VV. No ateiidais. The following verbs, and their compounds, are conjugated like Atcndaf To ascend ascender To extend extender To contend contender To kindle encender To sift cerner To stink heder To condescend condescender To split header To descend descender To lose perder To defend defender To stretch out tender To neglect desatendcr To transcend trascendci To understand entender To pour out verier V. ASENTIR, to assent, and all the verbs conjugated like it, change th# e of the last syllable of their radical letters into i in the gerund; in th^ third person singular and plural of the preterit of the indicative mood ; ii the first person plural of the imperative; in the first and second person plu ral of the present of the subjunctive ; in all the persons of the first anC third terminations of the imperfect, and in the future of the said mood These verbs take besides an i before the last e of their radical letters, ii the first, second, and third person singular, and third person plural of thf present o' the indicative mood, present of the subjunctive, and in the iin perativo mood. ASENTIR, to assent Radical letters, Asent : termination, ir Gerund. Asiniiendo. 1 As^rnto 2 Asientea 3 Asiente V asiente Present. 1 Asentimos 2 Asentis 3 Asienten VV. asienten. Indicative. 1 Asenti 2 Asentiste 3 Asintio V. asintio Preterit 1 Asentimos 2 Asentisleis 3 Asintireon VV, asintixeoix Imperative. Asienta yo Asintamos Asiente Asentid Asienta 6\ Asientan Asienta V. Asientan VV No asientas No asintais APPENDIX. 521 Subjunctive 1 Asienta Present. 1 Asintamos 1 Asintiese 3d Term. 1 Asintiesemos 2 Asientas 2 Asintais 2 Asintieses 2 Asintieseis 3 Asienta 3 Asientan 3 Asintiese 3 Asintiesen 1 '. asienta VV. asientan. V. asintiese VV. asintiesejv 1st 1 Asintiera Imperfect, Termination. 1 Asintieramo^ 1 Asintiere Future. 1 Asintieremos 2 Asintieras 2 Asintierais 2 Asintieres 2 Asinticreis 3 Asintiera 3 Asinticran 3 Asintiere 3 Asintiere n V, asintiera VV, asintieran. V. asintiere VV isinticren. 2(Z Term. Asentiria, &c. The following verbs, and their compounds, are conjugated like Asentu To repent arrepentirse To boil hervir To advert advertir To wound herir To adhere adherir To ingraft ingerir To consent consentir To invert invertir To confer conferir To prefer prefer ir To controvert controvertir To pervert pervertir To convert convertir To require requerir To defer defer ir To refer referir To differ diferir To feel sentir. To digest digerir VI. PEDIR, to ask, and all the verbs conjugated like it, change the e of the last syllable of their radical letters into i in the gerund ; in the first, second^ and third person singular and third person plural of the present of the in- dicative mood ; in the third person singular and plural of the preterit ; in all the persons of the imperative, the second plural excepted ; and in all the persons cf the present of the subjunctive, of the first and third terminations of the imperfect, and of the future of the same mood. PEDIR, to ask. Radical letters, Ped : termination, ir 1 Pido 2 Pides 3 Pide Gerund. Pidiendo. Present. 1 Pedimos 2 Pedis 3 Piden VV piden Indicative. 1 Pedi 2 Pediste 3 Pidio V. Pidio Preterit. 1 PedlmoB 2 Pedisteis 3 Pidieron VV. pidieron 522 APPENDIX. Imperative. Pida JO Pidamos Pide Pedid Pida 6\ Pidan Pida V. Pidan V\ No pidas No pidais. Subjunctive. Present 3d Term. 1 Fida 1 Pidamos 1 Pidiese 1 Pidicsemo9 2 Pidas 2 Pidais 2 Pidieses 2 Pidieseis 3 Pida 3 Pidan 3 Pidiese 3 Pidiesen V pida VV. pidan. V. pidiese VV. pidiesen Imperfect. Termination. Future. i Pidiera 1 Pidieramos 1 Pidierc 1 Pidieremos 2 Pidieras 2 Pidierais 2 Pidicres 2 Pidiereis 3 Pidiera 3 Pidieran 3 Pidiere 3 Pidieren V. pidiera VV. pidieran. V. pidiere VV. pidieren. 2d Termination. i Pediria, &c The following verbs, and their cornpcunds, have the same irregularity Pedir : To benumb arrecir 2 To groan gemir To constrain constrehir 2 To measure medir To conceive concebir To quarrel reilir 2 To contend competir To follow seguir 2 To collect colejir 2 To render rendir To belt cefiir 2 To rule rejir 2 To melt derretir To repeat repetir To dissolve desleir To serve servir To elect elejir 2 To dye iehir 2 To attack embestir To dress vestir v; [ 1 . CONDUCIR, to conduct^ and the verbs conjugated like it, take a z bo- foro the radical c in the terminations beginning with o, or a, as explained ih ?age 516. This verb takes, besides, the terminations je, jiste, jo, jimos^ *lstcis, jeron, &c. in the tenses set below. These terminations were for- /nerly written with x, {conduxe,) and many persons write them with g condugc ) CONDUCIR, to conduct* Radical letters, Conduc : termination, it appendix. 523 Indicative. Present. i Conduzco 1 Condiiciinos i Conduces, &c. 2 Conducis, &c. ] Conduje 2 Condujiste 3 Condujo 2 V condujo Preterit 1 Condujimos 2 Condujisteis 3 Condujeron 2 VV. condujhan Lmperative. 1 Conduzc.j yo 1 Conduzcamos 2 Conduce tii 2 Couducid 3 Conduzca el 3 Conduzcan 2 Conduzca V. 2 Conduzcan VV 2 No conduzcas 2 No conduzcais. Subjunctive. I Conduzca &c. Present. 1 Conduzcamos &.C. Imperfect. \st Termination. I Condujera 1 Condujeramos &c. &c. 2d Temu 1 Coiiduoiria 1 Conduciriamos &.C. &c. 3d Term. 1 Condujese 1 Condujesemos &LC. 6lc Future. 1 Condujere 1 Condujeremos &c. &c. The following verbs are conjugated like Conducir : To produce To translate To introduce producir traducir introducir To reduce To deduce To adduce reducir deducir aducir IMPORTANT REMARK. Verbs that have two irregularities, are marked throughout all these rules with a 2 attached to them. Example : negar 2. This verb, besides taking an i before as Acrecentar, adds the letter u before the terminations be ginning with e, as explained in page 514, thus ; let him deny, niegue VERBS THE IRREOULARITY OF WHICH IS CONFINED ONLY TO THEM, AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. N- B. The tenses and persons not conjugated, or expressed in the follow- ing veros, are regular ; as for the sake of bre\ ity, only their irregularities arc forth. Thus in Andar, for instance, the present of the indicative mood is: 1 arzr/o, 2 andas, 3 anda, <^c. The imperfect tense, 1 andabuy 2 an- dabaSy ^c. ADQUIRIR, to acquire. Indie. Pies. 1 Adquiero, 2 adquieres, 3 adquiere, V. adquiere ; I idtfii njsiost 2 adq'^iiriSy 3 adquieren, VV. adquieren. 624 APPENDIX. imptrative, 1 Adquiera, 2 adquiere, 3 adquiera, adquiera V., 2 no ad quieras: 1 adquirdmos, 2 adquiridy 3 adquieraii, adquieran VV., 2 no ad< quirais. Suhj. 1 Adquiera, 2 adquieras, 3 adquiera, V. adquiera; 1 adqniramos 2 adquirais, adquieran, VV. adquieran. Inq,uirir, to inquire, is subjugated like Adquirir. ANDAR, to walk. Indie. Preterit 1 Anduve, 2 anduviste, 3 anduvo, V. anduvo: 1 anduvl- mos, 2 anduvisteis, 3 anduvicron, VV. anduvieron. Suhj. Imperf. terin. 1 Anduviera, 2 anduvieras, 3 anduviera, V andmiera: 1 anduvieramos, 2 anduvierais, 3 anduvieran, VV. anduvieran. « — 2 hahia There were j huho There will be hahrd Let there be haya There may be haya There might, \ huhiera could, would, > hahria or should be j huhiese When there shall > j i i- , > cuando hubiere be S HACER, to make. Gerund. Haciendo. Past participle. Hecho Indie. Pres. 1 Hago, 2 haces, &lc. — Imperf. 1 Hacia, &c. — Pret. ] Hico, 2 hiciste, 3 hizo, V. hizo: 1 hicimos, 2 hicisteis, 3 hici^ron, VV. hicid- ron. — Put. 1 Hard, 2 hards, 3 hard: 1 haremos, 2 hardis, 3 hardn. — Imper. 1 Haga, 2 haz, 3 haga* 1 hagamos, 2 haced, 3 hagan. — Suhj. Pres. 1 Haga, 2 hagas, &c. — Imper^ term. 1 Hiciera, 2 hicieras, 3 hiciera : 1 hicidra- mos, 2 hicidrais, 3 hicieran. — 2 hahria hahido ) huhiese hahido ) cuando hubiet^ S hahido 528 APPENDIX. 1 2 irds, 3 ird : 1 iremos, 2 ireis, 3 irdn. — Imper 1 Vaya, 2 3 vaya: 1 vamos, 2 id, 3 vayaii. — Subj. Pres. 1 Vaya, 2 vayas, 3 vaya 1 vd 3 amos, 2 vaj^ais, 3 vayan. — Imperf. term. 1 Fuera, 2 fueras^ 3 fuera ; 1 fueramos, 2 fudrais, 3 fueran. — 2s, 2 saldrias, 3 saldrian. — 3d term. 1 Saliese, &c. — Fut. 1 Saliere, 6lc. SATISFACER, to satisfy SATISFACER is a verb compounded of satis and hacer, and is conjii gated like hacer, changing the h into f ; thus, satisfago, satisfaces, iiatisfacia, &c., satisfice, satisficiste, satisfizo, ^c., ^c. Except the ir-u- perative, the second person singular of which is, satisface, or satisfaz SER, to he. See page 449. TENER, to hold. See page 449. TRAER, to bring. Gerund. Trayendc Past participle Traido. Indtc Pres. 1 Traigo, 2 traes, &c. — Imperf. 1 Traia, &c. — Pr«l I Tmjo, 2 trajiste, 3 trajo* 1 trajimos, 2 trajisteis, 3 traj<$ron. — Fnl APPENDIX. 531 i Trac3rd, &c. — Imper 1 Pra'ga, 2 trae, 3 traiga, traiga V., 2 no tra.gaa i traigamos, 2 traed, 3 traigan, traigan VV., 2 no traigais. — SubJ. Pres 1 Traiga, 2 traigas, 3 traiga, &c. — Imperf. 1st term. 1 Trajera, 2 trajeras, 3 tiajera: 1 trajeramos, 2 trajerais, 3 trajdran. — 2d term. 1 Traeria, &c. —■3d term. 1 Trajese, 2 trajeses, 3 trajese, &c. — Fut. 1 Trajore, 2 trajoreej 3 trajere : 1 trajeremos, 2 trajereis, 3 trajereii VALER, to be worth. Indie. Pres. 1 Valgo, 2 vales, &c. : 1 va.Iemos, &c. — Fut. 1 valdrd, 2 val- drds, 3 valdrd, V valdrd ; 1 valdremos, 2 valdrdis, 3 valdrdn, VV. valdrdn. — Imper. 1 Valga yo, 2 valct 3 valga, valga V 2 no valgas, &c., 2 no valgais — Subj. Pres. 1 Valga, 2 valgas, 3 valga, V. ralga: 1 valgamos, 2 valgais, 3 valgaii, VV. valgan. — Imperf. term. 1 Valiera, &c. — 2d term. 1 Val- dria, 2 valdrias, 3 valdria, V. valdria: 1 valdrfamos, 2 valdriais, 3 vaidrian; VV. vaidrian. — 3d term. 1 Valiese, 2 valieses, &c. — Fut. .1 Valiere, dt-c. VENIR, to come. Gerund. Viniendo Past participle. Venido. Indie. Pres. 1 Veiigo, 2 vienes, 3 vieiie, V. viene: 1 venimos, 2 vemSf 3 vienen, VV. vieneii. — Pret. 1 Vine, 2 veniste, 3 irino, V. vino : 1 venimos, 2 venisteiSf 3 vinieron, VV. vinieron. — Fut. 1 Vendre, 2 vendras, 3 vendrd, V. vendrd: 1 vendremos, 2 vendreis, 3 vendraji, VV. vendran. — Imper. 1 Venga yo, 2 ven td, 3 venga dl, venga V., 2 no vengas: 1 vengamos, 2 venid., 3 vengan, vengan VV., 2 no vengais. — Subj. Pres. 1 Venga, 2 vengus, 3 venga, V. venga: 1 vengamos, 2 vengais, 3 vengan, VV. vengan. — Imperf. 1st term. 1 Viniera, 2 vinieras, 3 viniera, V. viniera: 1 vinieramos, 2 vinierais, 3 vinieran, VV. vinieran. — 2d term. I Veiidria, 2 vendrias, 3 vendria, V. vendria: 1 vendriamos, 2 vendnais, 3 vendrian, VV. vendrian. — 3d term. I Viniese, 2 vinieses, 3 viniese, V. vinieee: 1 vinidsemos, 2 vi- nieseis, 3 viniesen, VV. viniesen. — Fut. 1 Viniere, 2 vinieres, 3 viniere, V viiiiere : 1 vinierernos, 2 viniereis, 3 vinieren, VV vinieren. VER, to see. Gerund. Viendo. Past participle. Visto. Indie. Pres. 1 Veo, 2 ves, 3 ve, V. ve : 1 vemos, 2 veis, 3 ven, VV. ven. — Imperf. 1 Veia,* 2 veias, 3 veia, V. veia: 1 veiamos, 2 veiais, 3 veian, VV. veian. — Pret. 1 Vi, 2 viste, 3 vi6, V. vi6 : 1 vimos, 2 visteis, 3 vieron, Vf vieron. — Fut. 1 Vere, 2 verds, 3 verd, V. verd, &c. — Imper. 1 Vea yo, 2 ve td, 3 vea cl, vea V., 2 no veas: 1 vedmos, 2 ved, 3 vean, vean VV., 2 no ve.i S. — Subj. Pres. 1 Vea, 2 veas, 3 vea, V. vea: 1 vedmos, 2 veais, 3 veaUj VV. vean. — Imperf. term. 1 Viera, 2 vieras, &c. — 2d term 1 Veria, 2 verias, &c. — 3d term. 1 Viese> 2 vieses, &c. — Fut. 1 Viere 2 viores, 3 viere, &c. Formerly it vras said ma, via granizaria w’ld, or sh‘d should hail ) granizase have hailed Wlien it shall 1 ganizare When it shall hail have hailed ha granizado habia granizado I hahrd granizado I hay a granizado j huhiera granizade > hahria granizado ) hubiese granizadt ) cuando hubiere } granizado The following are some of the impersonal verbs: To freeze To glare (speak- ing of the dew) To thaw To drizzlo To snow To lighten helary irr. - escarchar deshelar lloviznar nevar, irr. rclampaguear To thunder To rain To happen To dawn To become night tronar, irr Hover j irr. suceder acaecer acontecer amaneccr anochecer DEFECTIVE VERBS. SOLER, to accustom. This verb is used only in the two following tenses. Indie. Pres. 1 Suelo, 2 sueles, 3 suele, 2 V. suele : 1 solemos, 2 soleifc; b suelen, 2 VV. suelen. — Imperf. 1 Solia, 2 solias, 3 solia, 2 V solia : 1 so- Jiamos, 2 soliais, 3 solian, 2 VV. solian. PLACER, to please. This verb is used only in the third person singular or plural, in the nuxxk tnd tenses as follows • it is always accompanied by a personal pronoun ii? objective case. APPENDIX. 533 Indie. Pres. 1 Me place, 2 te place, 3 le place, 2 le place d V.: I no* siace, 2 os place, 3 les place, 2 les place d VV. ; or 1 Me placen, 2 te placen, &c. — Imperf. 1 Me placia, or placian, 2 te placia, or placian, &-C. — Pret. 1 Me plu^o, 2 te pi ago, &.c. : 1 me pluguieroii, 2 te plugui^roii, &c. ^SuhJ. Pres. 1 Me piegue, &c. — Imperf.^ 1st term. Me pluguiera, &,c. — 3(1 term. Me pliiguiese, &.c. — Fat. Me pluguicro. Remark. The Spanish Academy observes that the subjunctive mood Is . used only in the following expressions: plegucj pluguiera^ or pluguiese & Dios; and si me pluguiere^ if it should please me. Ohs. The verbs gustary to have a liking for; pesar^ to be sorry for; acomodar, to suit ; convenir, or no convenir, to comport, or not, with one'd interests, «Scc., are frequently used only in the third person singular or plu- ral ; and in that case they take as a suhjecty the person or thing liked, &c.. with which they agree in number ; and the person who likes, is sorry, &.c. becomes their complement, and is represented by the pronouns me, te, se, &c., as in the verb placer. Ex.: Music pleases him, le gusta la musico or el gusta de la. musica. A LIST OF ALL THE IRREGULAR VERBS. Ohs. 1. The compound verbs are not comprehended, when they have the same irregularity as the simple ones from which they are derived : aS; componer, contraponer, deponer, disponer, imponer, oponer, proponer, &lc., all of which are conjugated like poner. Ohs. 2. The verbs that admit some change for the sake of the sound., are marked with a 2, as negar, 2 niegue. Ohs. 3. The most general irregularities of the Spanish verbs, as it hj\ beei- already stated, consist in their taking i,j, y, or ue, or i, instead of o, or e. To find, therefore, the infinitive mood, and the person and tense ol such verbs, the scholar must first separate the regular termination, and then the letter- or letters that do not belong to the radicals of such verbs; as in comienzo, muestras, sintio, condujeron, trajeran, construyesen, the termi- nations are o, as, id, eron, eran, esen. The remaining letters are, comienz, rnuestr, sint, condiij, iraj, construy. Add to these the regular terminations of the infinitive mood, and they will read comienzar, muestrar, sintir, con- dujir, trajer, constuyir. Take off the i, j, and y, change the ue into o, and the i into e; add a c before the termination to those in ij, or uj; and they will be comenzar, rnostrar, sentir, conducir, truer, construir. It must be observed that verbs that have a y before their termination, may be of the second or third conjugation; in consequence of which the terminations of both may be tried in order to find them out in the dictionary. Example; creyo, huyen; take off o, yen, and add the terminations thus, creir, hucr the scholar will not find them, but he will find creer, hair. Ohs. 4. Verbs that have two participles are marked thus; Bendeciv'^ B Bendito, and the regular one is omitted. Qbs. 5. The irregular participles are set in italics after their verbs bU APPENDIX, O’ The verbs of the first column are conjugated like those of he sec Dnd, which must be consulted in their respective places Pajfe Pagi Abrir, rcg. Cerrar Acrcccntar, 516 Abierto, prt. in Cimentar, “ Absolver, Mover, 519 Cocer, see rule. 529 Absvelto^ prt. irr Coiar, Ac^ordar, 61S Abslraer, Traer, 530 Colegir, 2 Pedir, 521 Aoerlar, Jlcreccntar, 516-7 Colgar, 2 A curdar, 5D5 Acordab, see rule, 518 Comedirse, Pedir, 521 Acostar, Coinenzar, A crecentar, 516 Acrzgentar, see rule, 516-7 Cornpetir, Pedir, 521 Aoestrar, Concebir, Adherir, AsentiTy 520 Conc.ernir, Asentir, 520 Adquirir, 523 Concertar, Acrcccntar, 516 Adverlir, Asentir, 520 Concordar, Acurdar, 518 Aducir, Cunducir, 522 Condescender Atem'er, 519 Agorar, Acordar, 518 Condolerse, Mover, ib. Alentar, Acrecentar, 516 CONDUCIR, see rule. 522 Altnorzar, Acordar, 518 Conferir, Asentir, 520 Araoiar, Confesar Acrcccntar, 516 Andar, 524 Conocer, 51C Apacentar, Acreccntar, 516 Coriseguir, Pedir, 521 Aposlar, Acordar, 518 Conseritir, Asentir, 520 A probar, Consolar, Acordar, 518 Aprelar, Acrecentar, 516 Constrehir,* Pedir, 521 Argiiir, Jnstruirf 515 Conlar, A cordar, 518 Arre see nile, 530 ^ ZalicT-T , dseyxiic, tSf MODELOS de CARTAS MERCANTILES I FAMILIARES. FOR M. V. C. INTRODUCCION. Es muy necesario saber escribir bien una carta, porque ocurre casi dia- riameiite, tanto para los asuntos de importancia, como para los de pura cortesia, 6 mera diversion : y sieiido las cartas una conversacion entre ausentes, deben tener fluidez, claridad, sencillez, y naturalidad i. fin de decLr 6. aquellas personas d quienes se las envian lo mismo que se les diria, s« estuviesen presentes. Su estilo, por consiguiente, debe variar seguii el objeto d que se coiitraen, la persona d quien se dirijen, y la que las escribe. Es precise, pues, estudiar con atencion las reglas del estilo en las cartas ; mas no siendo posible explicarlas en los estrechos limites de e»te Apdndice, se aconseja d los j6venes estudiosos las aprendan en su respectiva lengua, (por ser las niismas en todas,) y por lo respective d la Castellana, hallardn exceJentes modelos en las Cartas Familiares del P. Isla, en las Carlas Mnrruecas de Cadalso, en la Colleccion de Cartas de varios autores Espafioles, recogidas por Don Gregorio Mayans; en lasde Antonio Perez, y por lo respective d las antiguas, en el Centon Epistolario del Br. Fenian Gomez de Cibdad Real, &c., pues como dice el erudito d ilustre autoi espanol, Feijoo, Los preceptos para escribir cartas pueden suplirse la copia de hue nos ejemplares.^ (Teatro Critico, tomo 7, discurso 10.) La curiosidad en cerrar las cartas, y la propiedad del sobrescrito, debon tambien cuidarse ; pues una palabra mas, 6 mdncs, en la cubierta do un papel, da 6 quita satisfaccion al qu") le rccibe, y suele influir mucho en la luerte de lo que se solicita. i\L Vz. C Nubi'A York, Feb. 8 tie 1848. 538 APPENDIX. CARTAS MERCANTILES. PROPUESTA PARA UNA CORRESPONDENCIA Seiior Don A. B., ^ N * I Nueva York d S de Fehrero de 1348. Muy Senor mio deseando estaolecer en esa ciudad una correspondencia Begura cca un sujeto de probidad para las varias comisiones y encargos, qu© puedan ocurrirme en los asnntos de mi comercio ; informado de las circun» fetancias y calidades, que concurren en V. me tomo la libertad de suplicails se sirva accptar el encargo de corresponsal mio, y de informarme de su resol ucion para mi gobierno. El buen nornbre, que la persona y casa de V. tienen en esta, me inducen igualmenle d ofrecerle mis sei*vicios para cuanto fuere de su agrado ; y ora ace|)te V. mi proposicion, 6 no, apreciare mucho se sirva honrarme con sua preceptos. Dios guarde la vida de V. los muchos anos que le desea su muy atenlo ^ervidor. Q. B S. M. C. D CONTESTACION. Sr. Dn. C. D., ) N ) N , d — de de 1848. Muy Senor mio : el honor de ser corresponsal de una persona del crddito de V. no puede dejar de aceptarse con la mayor satisfaccion. Yo desde luego le admito, daudole las mas sinceras gracias por esta prueba con que su confianza me distingue, y ofreciendo servirle con la punctualidad y bonradez que me son propias. Espero manifestar d V. la sinceridad de mis sentimientos luego que sc »irva emplearme, segun propone : y me aprovechard igualmento de sus ofer- d que estoy muy reconocido. Dios guarde d V. muchos ahos como le pide S. S. S. Q. B. S M. A. B. AVISO DE EMBARQUE. fir. Dn. E. F., ) N ] N , d-^ de de 1848 Muy Senor mio : en esta fecha y de conformidad con las drdenes de V be ©mbarcado de su cuenta y riesgo, d bordo de ia fragata Espanola KI N., the name of the residence of the person addressed to. ^ These words according to circumstances, must be, Muy Senorcs miu^ Muy Senor nues^ro ; Muy Senores nuestros. APPENDIX. 539 su Capitau Don Pr<5spero liigero, con destiiio d y d la drden y consignacion do Don F G. los efectos quo constan en la Factura y Conoci- aiieiito que incluyo en esta. Espero que sean del gusto de V. asi por su calidad, como por su precio, y que llogueu bien acoiidicionados, pues se ban enfardado con mucho esmero Celebrard la buena salud y prosperidades de V. y soy su muy afecto se- fiirc sorvidor Q- B- S. M. G. IL \ FACTURA. Factura de los efectos,* que por cuenta y riesgo de Don E. F. del corner* 510 de y con la marca y numero del mdrgen, tengo embarcados d borda lie la fragata Espanola, El Aguila, capitan Don Prbspero Ligero, con des- tino ^ para entregar d la 6rden de Don F G : d saber • F G. 1 d 10 — Diez Cajas de Pesos. 11 ^7 — Diez y siete Fardos de 28 39 — Doce barriles de Vino de Jerez 40 45 — Seis huacales do loza Pesos. Derechos Gastos Comision d por ciento — S. Y. O. Total : Pesos. N. N d de . G. H - CONOCIMIENTO. Digo yo ^Don Prospero Ligero) capitan y maestro que soy de la fragata, {goleta, &c.) que Dios salve nombrada El Aguila, de porte de tonela- das, que al presente esta surta, anclada, enjuta y bien acondicionada en este puerto de N para con la buena ventura, seguir este presente viage al puerto de S , que conozco haber recibido do vos Don {aqui la enu- meracion de los articulos embarcados) todos enjutos y bien acondicioirados y marcados con la marca del mdrgen : con los cuales mo oblige, llevdndom Dios en buen salvamento con el diclio mi barco, al d ’.ho puerto, de acudL por VOS y en vuestro nombre d Don pagdndorne de flete d razon do — — por con por ciento de capa y sus averia^ acostumbradas, a eptilo de comercio Y para cumplir y guardar todo lo dicho y expuesto, obh- * When the articles consist of one or two kinds only, it is said — Factura de ciento y veinte cajas de azucar or de sesenta hocoyes de azucar y tincuenta zurrones ae ailil^ &.c. 540 APPENDIX. go mi persona y bieiies, juntamente con el dicho mi barco, sus fletes, ajiuxo jos, y lo inejor parado de dl. En fd de lo ciial os doy tres conociniicntos de ub «, enor, firmados de mi nombre por mi, 6 por mi coatramaestro, 6 segQiido (an- tigiiamente mi Escribano) el uno cumplido, los otros no valgaii. N i 3 do Enero de 1848. Prospero Ligeuo. CONTESTACION A LA ANTERIOR Sor Da. , ^ N \ N Y.,d — de de 1848 Muy Senor mio: Don N. N. mi corresponsal en me avisa con fecha de haber llegado a aquel puerto procedente de el de la fragata Aguila, su capital! Dn. Prdspero Ligero, d igualmente haber recibioc de este, bien acondicionados, todos los efectos que conslaii de la factura, y conocimiento, que V. me remitid con su muy aprec able de Incluyo eii esta una ]etra de cambio, valor de a ocho dias vista, a cargo de los Sehores de ese cornercio, que se servira V. cobrar, y abonar d mi cueiita. Doy a V. las mas expresivas gracias por la eficacia y cuidado con que se •^irvo desempehar mis encargos, y me repito su muy afecto S. S. Q. B. S. M F. G LETRA DE CAMBIO. Nueva Yorky d — de de 1848. Por Pesos Fuertes. A ocho dias vista, se servirdn VV. mandar pagar por esta mi primera de cambio (no habidudolo hecho ya por la segunda, ni tercera de esta misma fecha, y valor) a la drden de Don la caiitidad de valor recibido de dicho senor, que anotardn VV. en cuenta segun aviso {or sm otro aviso) de S. S. S Q. B. S. M. F C EL ENDOSO rim era. A Don en Pagucso d la drden de Don N. Y., Febrero 8 de 1848. UN PAGARE. SON $150. Nueva York a S de Febrero de IS' u Pagare d veinte dias, contados desde la fecba, d Don Guzman de Alfa- ’Tiche, 6 su ordeii la cautidad de ciento y cincuonta pesos, valor recibido d< iuiho sejior en dinero efectivo (d en generos) L toda mi satisfacr’cn. Gjxes de PAa«^Mnr,/E APPENDIX. 511 UN VALE Vale por quinieiitos pesos fuertes, quo yo, el abajo firniado, Pedio PeroZj reciuo y del comercio de esta, me oblige d. pagar el dia 21 del prfixirno mea do Agosto d la 6rden de Du. Pedro Hernandez, y en el dornicilio do Don Rafat I Maiigual, del mismo comercio ; cuya cantidad precede de varies fdneros que en este dia me ha vendido, y yo coiifieso haber recibido d ir.i 3iilora satisfaccion. — Filadelfia d 9 de tebrerode 1843 SON 500 PS. FS. Pedro Perez. CARTA ORDEN. Sr. Dn. N. N. ) A \ C , d — de Je 1848. Mny Sehor rnio: en virtud do la presente, se servird V. e.itregar {oi pagar) al dador Don Juan Cancela, la cantidad de doscientoy y cincuenU pesos fuertes ($250.) valor recibido del mismo, que anotard V. en cuenta, sin otro aviso, (segun aviso,) de su afectisimo S. S. Q. B. S. D. M CARTA DE AVISO. Sr. Dn. N. N. ) A I C , d — de de 1848 Muy Sehor mio: con esta fecha he librado d cargo do V. y por cuenta, una letra por valor de doscientos y cincuenta pesos fuertes, ($250.) pajraderos a Don Juan Cancela. Espero le haga V. el honor etcosturnbrado, y me la carg'ie on cuenta, pues yo se la dejo abonada. Pasolo V. bien, y mande d su muy atento S. S. Q. B. S. M. D. M. CARTA DE RECOMENDACION. Muy Sehor mio, y amigo : Dn. N. N. dador de la presente, pasa d esa a asuntos propios, (con el objeto de recuperar su salud.) Es un sujeto de todo mi aprecio, y como tal se le recomiendo d V. d quien agradecerd comr Dropias cuantos favores se sirviere hacerle ; quedando yo obligado d recipro- •arlos d V. siempre que lenga la bondad de proporcionarme ocasion. Puede suceder que dicho Sehor, mi recomendado, haya rr.enester algun iinero, en cuyo caso se servird V. franquearle hasta la cantidad de mil 7 quinieiitos pesos <^$1500.) constituyendome yo responsable d abonar d V. la que le entrc‘gare, y de la cual tomara V. recibo por dupliccdo, d cuya vista je abouard la que fuere. — Para evitar contingencias, va au firma d cout' naacioii de la mia. 542 APPENDIX. Estaudo seguro de que V. tendrd particular satisfaociou en hacer el conocimieuto de una persona de tan apreciables circunstancias, y quo este nnsmo 1© estimulard d desernpenar perfectamento mi encargo, reitero d V mi alecto y quedo como siempre d sus ordenes S. S. S. Q. B. S. M. M. V C. R. M 'CIRCULAR Sr. Dn. Frcfticisco Canales N , d 14 de Fehrero de 1848 May Senor nuestro: permitanos V. que nos tomemos la iibertad de anunciarle que acabamos de establecer en esta ciudad (puerto, villa, &c.) una casa de comercio bajo la firma de Cancela y Mangual. Nuestro caudal, y la experiencia de los negocios, que hemos adquiridr. durante el tiempo que hemos trabajado en el escritorio d© los Senores RuiiJ y Compaiiia, (que nos ban permitido nos valgamos de su nombre,) nos ponen en estado de desernpenar los negocios que se nos encarguen, d satis- faccion de las personas, que se dignen honrarnos con su confianza. Dios guard© d V. muchos anos como desean sus muy ateiitos servidores. Q. B. S. M. CANCELA Y MANGUAL. Firma de Juan T. Cancela — Cancela y Mangual. “ Rafael U. Mangual — Cancela y Mangual. ORDEN PARA HACER UN SEGURO. Senores Navarro y Perea N. Y , d 10 de Febrero de 1848. Muy senores nuestros : d bordo de la fragata Espanola, Isabela, Capitau Francisco Chaves, que hac© viaj© d hemos registrado por nuestra cuenta los efectos que constan de la Factura y Conocimieuto adjulito La fragata es nueva, y velera, el capitan muy experimentado y se hard d la vela pasado manana. — Estas noticias serdn suficientes para que VV. puedau proceder d los Seguros, que les suplicamos hagun con un veinticinco poi oiemo do anmento por ganancias imaginarias. Nos rep^tiraos de VV con afecto S. S. S. Q. B. S. M. CANCEl.A V MANGUAL APPENDIX. 543 Dsben 18*47. Encro 13. CUENTA CORrJENTE. Los Sres. Duvivier y Wogaii eii su cuenta corriente con M. y B. Navarro. 1847 Han db HABSS i. Import© de la Fa- tura remitida por el Pepe Marzo 9. Pagado por el segu- ro del Arrogant©.. . Tunio 23. Pagado por su cuen- ta k D. E. Peug- r\et S. Y. O Enero 5. Producto liquido del azdcar recibi- do por El Aguila . $ Abril 17. Valor de su Letra de cambio k cargo de N Febrero 11. Alcance k su favor quo pasd d cuenta nueva (Salvo yerro, d Omision) N. Y., Febrero 11 de 1848. M. Y B. Navarro CUENTA DE UNA DEUDA. Don Lazarillo de Tonnes debe d. Pedro de Urdemalas. Pesos. Por dos casacas de pano, superfino, una azul y otra negra $ Por la hechura y avios do dos chalecos Por id. id. dos pantaloiies Por la compostura de un sobretodo N. Y d de de 1848. Total $ RECIBO He recibido de Don Leopoldo Peugnet la cantidad de ciento. cuarenta y aueve pesos, tres y medio reales por saldo de todas cuentas hasta la fecha Nueva York d 8 do Febrero de 1848. Francisco Estevan Soc Pesos 149.3.6. (or $149-43|.; OTRO. Raoibi de Don Fulano Droguete sesenta pesos d cuenta de mayor cantidad Jauja d 11 de Diciembre de 1800. Son 60 Pesos. Pascual Bobo- 544 APPENDIX. TABLA DE LA MONEDA CORRIENTE EN ESPANA, \ LAJ REPUBLICAS DE AMERICA. COBRE. 2 maravf^dises 2 ochavos cuarlos 4 reales de vellon 5 pesetas 4 pesetas columnarlas '’LATA. I Duro, peso fuerte, peso, 6 escudo de plata, o silver dollar.... ytile $1.00 I Medio duro, 6 escudo de vellon, half a dollar 50 I Peseta colunmaria, quarter of a dollar 25 I Real de plata Americano, New York shilling 12^ I Medio real, medio, New York sixpence OG^ Valor nominal. Valor real 1 peseta provincial 6 Sevillana, 20 cents. 16 cents 2 reales de velloii, half pistareen 10 “ 8 “ 1 real de vellon, 6 34 maravedises, quarter pis- tareen 5 “ 4 “ OHO Valor nom Valor inal. real. 1 Onza ii onza de oro, a doubloon $16.00 $15.56 I Onza, (cuatro escudos,) half of a doubloon 8.00 7.76 J Un doblon de ^ dos a Quarter of a doubloon 4.00 3.88 J Un dobloncito, 6 an escudo, an eighth of a doubloon. 2.00 1.34 'g Un escudito, un durillo, 6 veinten, a sixteenth of a doubloon 1.00 37 valen 1 ochavo. 1 cuarto. 1 real de vellon 1 peseta. 1 peso, or duro. 2 CARTAS FAMILIARES. Oarta de Don Gregorio Mayans al Dr. Don Assensio Sales sohre, el modo de FsESPonder. Muy Senor mio, y mi Amigo : En el trato familiar solemos hablar con libertad, y con aquella confianza que merecen los amigos : pero por escritc ftiele ser peligroso expiicarse con la misma claridad ; porque permanece b APPENDIX. 545 «enioria de lo que se escribe : y aunque el amigo sea fiel, tal vez no lo ec . i que hereda sus cartas, y con el tiempo paran estas en donde m^nos se oiensa. For eso es may prudente la duda do V. sobre el Modo con que Uno debe portarse por escrito. Homos de distiiiguir el que pregunta del que responde. Aquel tiene mayor libertad ; [mnjue puede callar sin nota ; <3 hacer la pregunta con arte, del modo rn^iios ofensivo, y mas cauteloso. Si io que se ha de pre- guntar tiene conexioii con la ofensa, y leido no puede dejar de causarla j asmos de distiiiguir las preguntas 4 que no nos obliga la necesidad de las voluiitarias. Las primeras son inescusables, y asi deben hacerse iel modo mas cauto; esto es mdnos circimstanciado, respecto de la inteligencia de otros, con quien no se trata. Las segundas deben evitarse cuanto sea posible. Ilecha la pregunta, se ha de considerar, si conviene responder, 6 no? Si es necesario, 6, si conviene responder, se puede hacer con palabras alusivas 4 la pregunta, callando la persona, 6 el negocio do que se trata, y respondi- endo en suposicion del hecho ; si bien este 4 voces es tal, que 41 mismo schala la persona, y el hecho, por mucho que se quiera ocultar : como se ve en las cartas de Ciceron 4 Atico. Si es peligroso responder absoluta- mente, debe callarse : y en casos de traicicn, entregarse la pregunta a quien convenga por no hacerse complice, ui aun disimulador en el delito de- .esa Majestad. Cuando Don Joseph Antonio de Quiros salib de la prision de la Inquisi- cion, y me escribi6, pedia la Caridad que yo le respondiese, y lo hice de modo, que habiendole aprisionado de nuevo, se alabaron mucho mis respues- tas, pues dije 4 aquel insigne Varon lo que le convenia, pensando lo que le jodia suceder. Callar era contra la ainistad, que siempre le habia yo pro- fesado, y le debia ; habiar pedia mucha prudencia. Estoy leyendo, y apuntando los tres dltimos libros de Dion Casio, que publicb en Roma en el ano 1724 Nicolas Carminio Falcon, habiendolos sacado de la Libreria Vaticana. Usted me mande: y nuestro Sehor guarde 4 Usted muchos anos como deseo. Olivia 4 6 de Junio de 1750. B. L. M. de Usted, Su mas seguro servidor, y amigo, Don Gregorio Mayans, y Sicji r Al Dr Don Assensio Sales l7a?ta de Don Antonio Solis d Don Antonio CarnerOy sohn asuntos familiares, Senor y amigo mio: vamos al negocio, que es muy tarde para no decii o que se viene 4 la pluma. La carta que vino en mi pliego se di6 con lo Mivertoncia que V. previno, en cuanto a su seguridad. Las vitelas ban hecho ruido. Solo me han dicho que el San 646 APPENDIX. viene gordo, y sera menester enflaquecerle de maiiera que parezca, algn tnas peiiitente ; y que tenga los brazes levantados en accion do predicar el juicio final. V. vaya teniendo cuidado con que ya se piden gollerias, como si fuoran vitelas ; y se ban de pagar como las miniaturas ; ponga V. uno y otro en el libro de las partidas que se deben, por lo que pudiere suceder. Espero, en respuesta del correo que viene, la censura de V. y del senor marques sobre lo que ha parecido mi libro en esas regiones del norte, qii® oor aca continuan sus aplausos ; aunque se habran vendido unos ciento y cincuenta tomos, pues en todo influye la falta de dinero y en Madrid hay pocos hombres que tengan dos reales de A echo juntos. lie pagado enteramente A D. N., porque me tenia con cuidado el maes- tro de obras. A V. se debe la de la Nueva Espana y tengo por evidente que no se habria impreso si no fuera por el socorro de V. ; porque la ayuda de costa todavia se esta en el aire. Y asi puede V. llamar suya la historia y las demas razones. A esta accion que ha hecho tanto ruido, de habcr acompanado al Divinisimo nuestro rey, escribi estos dos sonetos, porque su Majestad so acord6 de mi antigua vena. V. vera en ellos el trabajo quo me han costado, por el que le costard el leerlos. A D. Martin tenemos ya con titulo de su Majestad, en que le nombra Corrector general de los libros de estos reinos ; y estd en dnimo de ser tan conocido comp Murcia de la Liana. Tiene cincuenta doblones de salario, y lo que produjeren las erratas. Pone desde luego d las 6rdenes de V. esta dignidad, habiendo conseguido el sei persona de inuchos envidiosos. Sirvase V. ponerme A. L. P. de mi senora Dona N., y quedese lo demas para otra ocasion. Guarde Dios d V. muchos anos. Madrid, &c. Don AxNtonio de SoLis. Carta del P, Jose Francisco de Isla d su hermana Dona Ftoji.,’ cisca de Isla y Lozada. Villagarcia, a 24 de Julio de 175i:v Mujer de tu marido: has dado en la mania, de algunas semanas d e.'^ta parte, de que te pierdo el respeto, sin que yo acierte d concebir como sc puede perder lo que jamas se ha tenido. Pero tii eres una pequena dia- blesa, y sabes mas que Merlin, por lo que te estimard me comuniques esie secrete, que puede importar para mas de dos ocasiones. Hallar una cosa dntes de perderse es habilidad que d cada paso la usan los ladrones ; pero perderse lo que jamas se poseyb, no lo habia tenido por posible, hasta que tii me aseguras que es cosa evidente. Al fin, si te he perdido el respeto, fijare cedulones en las esouinas de los correos, (porque has de saber que los corrdos tienen esquiaas,) para que qualquiera persona que haya hadado an respeto que se perdi6, acuda d ti, A quien pertenece, que se le pagard cl hallazgo, y por lo que toca d mi, doy palabra de guardar tan bien el primere A.rPENDIX. 547 que te tenga, que no solo no se pueda perder, pero que niiiguiio me le pueda encontrar. No sabia que estuviese por prior de es© convent© de S. Agustin el Mro. Ocampo. Es de los hombres sabios, religiosos, honradcs ) atentos que he conocido. Dice bien : trat^le mucho en Pamplona, y Eiempre le he profesado singular estimacion. La he hecho muy grand© de la inemoria con que me honra, y de la amistad que me conserva. To estimard mucho, asi d ti, como d Nicolas, que I© correspondais en vuestro nombre y en el mio con el mas fino aprecio, tratdndol© con toda confian 2 :a 5 y eirviendule en quanto se le ofrezca Si dntes d© ahora hubiera sabido su destine, antes de ahora os habria hecho esta recomendacion ; porque tengo singular complacencia en que los hombres particulares seau particular- mente distinguidos. Si todos fueran como el Rmo. Ocampo, no habria quejas, porque no habria Gerundios. Dile cuanto quisieres d© mi parte, en ia inteligencia do que en nada te excederds. Ahora vete d pasear, que yo voy d escribir otras cartas. Sehora, B. T. P (con uii cardo)'el mas atento capellan d© Ti. mia YO Carta de Luscinda a Cardenio. Sehor: La palabra que Don Fernando os did de hablar d vuestro padre para que hablase al mio, la ha cuinplido mucho mas en su gusto que en vuestro provecho. Sabed, sehor, que el me ha pedido por esposa, y mi pa- dre, llevado de la ventaja que el piensa que Don Fernando os hace, ha ve- nido en lo que quiere con tantas veras, que d© aqui d dos dias se ha d© hacer el desposorio, tan secret© y tan d solas que solo han de ser testigos los Cielos y alguna gente de casa- Cual yo quedo, imaginadlo ; si os cumple venir, vedlo, y si os quiero bien 6 no el suceso deste negocio os lo dard d entender. A Dios plega que esta llegue d vuestras manos dntes que la mia se vea en condicion de juntarso con la de quien tan mal sabe guardar la fe que promete. Luscinda. {Don Quijote, ch. XXV 11., p. iD Carta de Don Carlos d Dona Francisca Bien mio : si no consigo hablar con Usted, hard lo posible para que llegue 1 sus manos esta carta. Apenas me separd de Usted, encontrd en la posadc. ul que yo Ilamaba mi enemigo ; y al verle, no sd como no espird de dolci We mandh que saliera inmediatament© de la ciudad, y fud precise cbede* serle. Yo me llamo Don Carlos, no Don Felix. Don Diego cs mi tio Vi 7a Usted dichosj* y olvide para siempre d su infeliz amigo. Carlos ds Urbina. (Moratzn — El Si de las Ninas, Act 111 , sc. xii.) APPENDIX. 548 / Carta de Don Quijotc de la Mancha a Sancho Panza, gobemadoi de la insula Barataria. ** <'^uaiido csperaba oir nuevas de tus descuidos 6 imperlinencias, Sanclic amigo, las oi de tus discrecioiies, de que di por ello gracias parliculares a. Cielo, el cual del estiercol sabe levantar los pobrcs, y de los loiitos hacei discretes. Diceiirne que gobieriias como si fueses lioinbre, y que eres hom- bre como si fueses bestia, segun es la humildad con que to tratas : y quiero que adviertas, Saiicho, que muchas veces conviene y es necesario por la autoridad del oficio, ir contra la humildad del corazon, porque el buen adorno de la persona que esta puesta en graves cargos, ha de ser conlcrme a lo que ellos piden, y no a la medida de lo que su humilde condicion la /ncliiia Vistete bien, que un palo compuesto no parece palo. no digo que traigaa dijes, ni galas, ni que siendo Juez te vistas como soldado, sino que te adoi nes con el hd.bito que tu oficio requiere, con tal que sea limpio y bien com- puesto. Para ganar la voluntad del pueblo que gobiernas, entre otras has de hacer dos cosas ; la una ser bien criado con todos, auntjue esto ya otra vez te lo he dicho, y la otra procurar la abundancia de los mantenimientos, que no hay cosa que mas fatigue el corazon de los pobres que la hambre y la carestia. “No hagas muchas pragmaticas, y si las hicieres procura que sean bue- iias, y sobre todo que se guardeii y cumplan, que las pragmaticas que no se guardan, lo misrno es que si no lo fuesen, dntes dan a entender que el Prin- cipe quo tuvo discrecion yauloridad para hacerlas, no tuvo valor para hacer que se guardasen : y las leyes que aternorizan y no se ejecutan, vienen a ser como la viga, rey de las ranas, que al principio las espant6, y con el tiempo la menospreciaron y se subieron sobre ella. Se padre de las vir- tudes, y padrastro de los vicios. No seas siempre riguroso, ni siempre blanao y escoge el medio entre estos dos extremos, que en esto esta el punto de la discrecion. Visita las cdrceles, las carnicerias y las plazas, que la presencia del Gobernador en lugares tales es de mucha imponancia. Consuela d los presos que esperan la brevedad de su despacho. Se coco d los carniceros. que po* entdnees igualan los pesos, y se espantajo d las placeras por la mis- ma razon. No te muestres (aunque por ventura los seas, lo cual yo no creo) codicioso, mujeriego, ni gloton, porque en sabiendo el pueblo y los que te trataii tu inclinacion determinada, por alli te dardn baterra hasta derri- barte en el profundo de la perdicion. Mira y remira, pasa y repasa los con- sejos y docurnentos que te di por escrito dntes que de aqui partieses d tu go- bierno, y verds corno hallas en ellos, si los guardas, una ayuda de costa quo te sobrelleve los trabajos y dificultades que d cada paso d los Gobernadorea se les ofrecen. Escribe d tus senores y mudstrateles agradecido, que la in- graf'tud es hija de la soberbia y uno do los mayores pecados que se sabe, y ia persona que es agradecida a los que bien le han hecho, da indicic qu< tambien lo serd d Dios, que tantos bienes le hizo y do continun le hace APPENDIX. 549 “ La Sefiota Duquesa despachb un propio con td vestido y otro presente i tu mujer Teresa Paiiza; por mornentos esperamos respuesta. Yo he estado un poco mal dispuesto de un cierto gateamiento, que me suscedi^ nc muy ^ cuento de inis narices ; pero no fue nada, que si hay encantadorea que me maltraten, tambien los hay que me defiendan. Avisame si el nia yordomo que esta contigo tuvo que ver en las acciones de la IVifaldi, com<» lii sospechaste, y de todo lo que te sucediere me irds dando aviso, pues es Ian corto el carnino, cuanto mas que yo pienso dejar presto esta vida ociosa en quo estoy, pues no naci para ella. CJn negocio se me ha ofrecido, que Greo que me ha de poner en desgracia de estos sehores ; pero aunque se me da mucho, no se me da nada, pues en fin, en fin, tengo de cumplir d.ntes con mi profesion que con su gusto, conforme d lo que suele decirse ; amicus Plato; sed magis arnica veritas. Digote este latin, poique me doy a entender que despues que eres Gobernador le habrds aprendido. Y d Dios, el cual te guarde de que ninguno te tenga Idstima. Tu amigo, Don Quijote de la Mancha.” {Ch. li.^ p, a.] ESQUELAS. M. V (el Sr., la Sra., or la Srta. A) agradecerd mucho que el Senoi N. (la Sonora or Senorita B.) le (la) favorezca, (honre,) con su compahia el lunes 8 del corriente despues de las 7 de la tarde. Calle de Troyoy Febrero 2 de 1848. Sr D. M Miercoles, 10 de Febrero de 1848. Querido amigo : esta noche vendrdn d esta muy de V. algunos sugetos que deseo la pasen con satisfaccioii ; para esto cuento con V. cuya pre- eeiicia espero para hacer brillante la compania. A Dios, hasta la vista. Amigo y servidor de V. — M. V M. V. sail! da afectuosa y respetuosamente al Sr. , y le quedara tnuy agradezido si se diere lugar para pasar en su compahia la tarde do 5ueves prbximo despues de las 7. Lunes Febrero — de 1848. M. V B. L. M. al Sehor (B. L. P. d la Sra. or Sta N.) y accpta con gusto su invitacion, por la que le da muchas gracias. Maries M V— B. li. M. al Sr. y siente no poder gozar de su amable oompahia la n^*che sehalada, por hallarse comprometido de antemano 550 APPENDIX. M V. aaluda amigable y respetuosamente al Sr. y ucepla con su convite para la noche de Jueves d w CEREMONIAL DE LAS CARTAS. I or coremonial se entiende el titulo de cortesia que se da & algnno, ccnic Vsted, Senoria, tion, volver a, 383, Obs. A. Apply to {to), recurrir, acudir, 193. Among, entre, en medio de, 234- Agree to a thing {to), convenir en, con, d 238. Agree {to), to compose a difference, CQn\en\tso Componerse, 239. As to, {as for), en cuanto a, 276. Afford {to), tener medios, (proporcion de). Poder, 279. Agreement of verb with several pronouns, 280, Obs. Again, otra vez. De nuevo. Volver d, 295. All over, por todo. Por toda. Por todas par tes, 305. B Badly, mal,106. Be {to), ser. Estar, 59. Ser de, 112. Be able {to), poder, 67. 144. 325. Be better {to), valer mas, ser mejor, 154. Because, porque, 139. Before, antes de, 105. Ante, delante, por, 211. 213, Obs. C. Be fond of {to), gustarle d uno, 88. Be necessary {to) — must, ser menester, sof necesario, 152. Be to {to), haber de, 139. 153. Both, ambos, uno y otro, 48. But, sino, pero, 24. But a f { (orsolamente) pocos ; unoa Jew, \ pQC(,g . cuantos, 42, 45. But few, I solo (or solamente) alguno-oa- ’ V unos cuantos, 43. But little, solo un poco, solamente un poco muy poco, 42. But, only, solo, solamente, no(v) sino, no (v mas que, 41. Be wrong {to), no tener razon, hacer mal p** 56. 552 INDEX. Be right Cto\ tener razon, hacer bien en, o6~l. Be worth (.to), valer, tener, poseer, 154. Be wUling Uo), querer, 58. 144. Be in want (to), huber menester, 82- Be acQuainted with (to)— to know, conocer, 82. 2rt3, Obs. A. Be iil (to), estar malo, enfermo, 128. Be S2tisJieU (to), with some one, cstar con- tunto con (or tie) alguien ; con (or dc) al- guno, 172. f^ecorne (to) — to turn, t Imcerse. Meterse, 1^3. Ser de, 205. To Jit well, sen tar bien, caei bien, 384. V-ilunj (to), ser do, Perteneccr, 199. By~and by, \\iego. Deaquiapoco. Dentro de poco, 205. Be good Jor nothing (to), no ser bueno para natia, para ninguna cosa, 212. Be good for something (to), set bueno para algo, para alguna cosa, 212. Better than, mas que. Mejor qne, 223. Be woi tk while (to), merecer. Valer la pena, 230. Be well (to), estar bien. Estar bueno. Pa- sarlo. Estar, 237. 283. Be under obligation (to), deber (tenor) obli- gacion. Estar obligado, 289. Be diornughly acquainted with (to), conocer una cosa a fondo, 294. Bring in the desert (to), servir los postres, 298. Be a judge of (to), serperito on. | Entender de, 303. Borrow (to), pedir prestado, 316. Be frightened (to), asustarse, sobresaltarse, 321. Be astonished (to)— surprised, maravillarse. Estar asombrado, 322. Be welcome (to), ser bien vinido. Agasajar, 323. Be born (to), nacer, 332. Be at one's ease (to), estar uno con deshaogo, estar a sus anehuras, 338. Be comfortable (to), estar comodamentc. Pasarlo bien, 338. Be uncomfortable (to), estar incomodamente. Pasarlo mal, 338. Beg with entreaties (to), pedir encarecida- mente, 339. Be varticular (to). «er singular. Tener uno rarezas. 342 Behold (to), mirar 344. Be in want oj Uo/. hacer falta. Faltar'e a uno, 347. B 2 ast(to)—tob*ag oreciarse. Jactarse. 369. |?5 it as it man . sea lo que fuere. Como quiera que sea 35H. Bear (to)— to nut up wiL\ sobrellevar Dcjar que. 373. Board, barba. The ve^-son whose heard is thick, un narbtrorrado 374 Burst out laughing aiguno, 97. Look for {to), buscar, 167 Like better {to), gustar mas de, querer 223. Laugh in a person's face, reirse de uno BUS barbas, (en sus bigotes,) 279. Look like some one {to), parecerse a UB®. parecer, tener semblante, 284. J^ook pleased {to), mostrar buena cara. J^ook cross {to), mostrar mala cara, 284. Leave off {to), cesar, parar, dejar de, 299. Look upon (to), caer. Dura. Mirara, 3l8;i Lay to one s charge {to), imputarle a uiu», Echar la culpa k, 327. Liking {to my), a mi gusto. Q,ue me guste, 330. Ijose sight of {to), perder algo de vista, 33L Long for {to), estar ansioso, 338. Leave it to one {to), dejar a. Penerlo e« manos de, 373. Lack {to)— to be wanting, faltar, 378. Lay up {to)— to put by, juntar. Guardar Apretar 388. M. May, poder, 154. Many, rnuchos, 41. Make zise of, servirse de. Usar de, 228. March {to), andar. Caminar, 251. Make {to), one's self thoroughly acquaiate^ with, enterarse a foiido en (de), 296. Myself, yo mismo, 295. Manage {to), to go about a thing, ma» jar. Hacer para, 303. 311. Make one's self understood {to), hacerse comprender (entender), 317. Make uneasy {to), 'mqxhaXat, Molestar. De- sasosegar, 330. Make one's self comfortable {to), hacer uno lo que le acomoda, 339. Make entreaties {to), solicitar. Hacer ins- tancias, 389. Mean {to), querer decir. Hacer 4nlmo. Significar, 342. Make the best {to), aprovecharse de. Sacxit venlaja de, 369. Make a great show {to), hacer gran papoi. 374. Muse {to'y—to think, meditar, 380. Make merry {to), alegrarse de. Divertirw a. 385. Me, me, 67. Table, 70. More, mas, 52. More— than, mas— que, 52. 89. 108. Ma^ da. Obs. A, 108, 109. More than, mas que, 109. Mas de’ qus 234. Mine, e! mio, 16. Los mios, 31. Mio, mia inios, mias, 167, Obs. Table, r44. Most, mas, 109. Much, inueho, 41. 109. Must, deber, ser menester, ser aeceeatSe , ra tar obligado, 153. INDEX. 355 iaae, .iiber necesilar, 152. Atp, mi, 10. El, lus ; la, las, B8. Obs. F, 160. MucA more, mucbo mas, 49. Manu more, inuchos mas, 49. Make a Jire (fa), «iicender candela, lumbre, 79. Mistake (to), equivocarse, 183. Meet tcitk (to), eiicontrar a. Eucantrarse con, 193. Miss (to)~to fail, perder, omitir. Faltar 212 . N. Mamcs of empires, kingdoms, states, U8, Obs. A. JVeither—nor, no, ni — ni, 17. Mever, no —jamas, nniica, nuica jamas, 118. Meed (to), hater menester, necesitar, 152. Mo, no 35. Mobody, not anybody, no one, not any one, ninguno, nadie, 22. Mobody, no one, nadie, ninguno, 137. Mo one, ninguno, 87, Mone, ninguno, 36. M'o other, no Cv) otro ; no (v) ningun otro 46. M'o more, not any more, no (v) mas, 49. 153. M'ot—as much as, no— tanto como, 109. M'o less — Uian, ) , JVo fewer -Oian, \ "o-nidnos-que, 108. M'ot ies i—than, no— m6nos— que, 109. M'o longer, no — mas, 141. M'ot so — as, no— tan— eomo, 109. Mowhere, ninguna parte, 119. Mot anywhere, ninguna parte, 64. Mcither the one nor the other, ni el uno, ni cl otro, 46. Mot— even, ni — aun, 295. Mot at all, de ningun modo. Nada de eso, 296. Mo, not, no, 12. 35, 36. M'othing, not any thing, no tv) nada. Nada (v), 13, Obs. A. Mot any, ninguno, ningun, ningunos, 85, 36. Mot many, no — muchos, 42. A" ot much, no — mucho, 42. Mot any other, no (v) otros, no (v) ningunos otros, 46. Mot much more, no (v) mucho mas, 49. M'ot many more, no (v) muchos mas, 49. Mot so often, no tan a menudo, 102. Mot so often as, no tan amenudo como, 102. Mot so much as, no tanto— como, 108. Vot so many us, no— taiitos— como, 108. M ot as much as, no tanto — como, 109. Mot less — than, no — menos — que, 109. Mot — as much as, no — tanto como, 109. Mot so — as, no — tan— convi, 119. Mot yet, no— todavia, aun no, .odavio no, J15. 118. Mot Quiet, no— todavia, todavia no, 135. Neuter verbs, verbos neutros, 13(. fe'uMBZRs. niimeros, 26. IIule. M“o less — than, no fewer— than, no— que, 108. Mever, no— jamas. Nunca. Nunca iamw 118. Mowhere, ninguna parte, 119. Mobody, nadie. Ninguno 137. o. O'cdock, 65. Obs. B. Object, objeto, 69, Obs. A. Of, de, 15. Of a, of aii, de un, 38. De its, 162. Of the, del, 15. De los, 26. De la, do lag 159. Often, k menudo, frecuentemente, 102. Oftener, mas a menudo, 103. Oftener than, mas a menudo que, 102. One, se, uno, 143, Obs. A. One more, otro mas, 50. One o'clock, la una, 65. Ojily, solo, solamente, no (v) sino, no i,v mas que, 41. Only a little, scjo— un pocc, 43. Order iji which the pronouns, objects, otti complements are placed, 69. Once a day, una vez al dia, 172. Or, 6. 16. Other, otro 45. 338. Other, others, otro, otros, 141. Other peo- ple, otros, otras gentes, 2o2, Our, nuestro, 28. 160. Ours, el nuestro, los nuestros, 31 . — ^Tabls, 244. Ought, as it should be, como se debe, 16S. Others' property, lo ageno, 273, Overcharge (to), poner alguna cosa a precic muy sabido, 295. On a level with, a nivel de, a flor del agua, 304. Opposite, enfrente, frente a, 332. One, uno, una, 143. P. Past Participle, participio pnsivo, 117. Passive verbs, verbos pasivos, 175. People, se, 143, Obs. A ; 145, Obs. B. Personal Pronouns, pronombres person, ales.— T able, 70. Please one (to), gustarle a uno, 86. Perfect Tense, preterite perfecto proxi- mo. 125. 185. Present of Indicative, presente de m dicativo, N. 1, 85. Present Participle, gertind, participie activo, gerund io, 250. Pronominal Verbs, verbos pronnmina 80, (1.) Possessive Pronouns, pronombres poae si VOS. — Table, 244. Put on (tn), meterse, 114 ; ponerse, 126. Put to dry (to), poner a secar, liacer sceui 134. Please (to), irle a uno, pasarlq, estar, 22E, Pay— for (to), pa gar a, 166. 556 INDEX. Pity (#o), compadecer, compadecerse, tener lastima, 216. Fart with ito\ deshacerse enagenar, vender, 229. Pour out (to) echar, 277. Four out some •brink, ecJiar (de beber) un trago, 277. Pluperficct, pretorito plus cuainperfecto, (N.2, p.,)307. Preterit Anterior, pretdrito perfect© an- terior, (iM. 3, p.,) 308. FuiiLed, embarazado, perdido, 326. Pardon (to), perdonar. / beg your pardon, yo pido perdon a V., 327. Play (to), jugar, 93. Play a trick (to), dar un chasco, jugar una pieza, 343. Play upon (to) — an instrument, tocar, 221. Procrastinate (to), diferir*, dilatar, .385. Possessive Adjective Pronouns, ICO. Q Quite as much, tanto, jiistamcnte tanto, > '2 Quite as many, tantos, justamente tantos, > Quicker, faster, mas presto, mas ligero, 224. Question a thing (to), dudar de, disputar, cuestionar, preguntar, 238. Quench one's thirst (to), refrescar, apagar la Bed. 388. 11 . Remain (to), quedar, quedarse. 119. Ride (to) — on horseback, xnontar (andar) a caballo, 177. Ride (to) — in a carriage, ir cn coche, andar (pasear en) coche, 177. Return (to), venir de. volver de, 148. Reflective verbs, verbos pronomenales, 181. Rejoice at something (to), alegrarse de algo (de alguna cosa), 186. Repair to (to), ir a, volverse, 278. Rather, mas bien, antes. Rather than, mas bien que, antes que, 274. Run up (to), acudir, 291. Rely (to) — to depend upon, contar con, confiar en, 299. Reach (to), alcanzar a, alcanzar a entender 343. Rather, before an adjective, algo, 375. s. 8T (meaning the one (n) of), el (n) del, el (iv de, 15. S’ (meaning that of or the one of), el del, el de. 15. Same (the), lo mismo, 106. El mismo, los mismoB, 155. Bcoerai varios, algunos, 51. Borne, un poco, alguno, algun, 34, 35. Le los, 99, Olis. G. iemabodu, « 49. Some more, tod avia mas, aun mas, algunof mas, todavia algunos, 49. Some other, otro, otros, algun otro, algunoa otros, 45. Somewhere, alguna parte, 64. So, USX, de s'lene que, 134. So so, asi asi, 134. Something, algo, alguna cosa, 13. Something like, como unos, unas, 135. Send for (to), enviur por, inandar por, envlitx a busiar, 77. She, ella. —Table, 70. Shortly, soon, pronto, luego, prontamentc 139. Should be (as it), como se debe, 168. So much the more than, tanto mas que. 111. So much the less than, tanto menos que, IIL So much a year, tanto al ano, i So much a head, tanto por cabeza, J Subject, sujeto, 69, Obs. A. Superlatives, superlativos, 110. Still, aun, dodavia, 55. Soon, luego, pronto. Fery soon, muy pronto 221 . Sooner, mas temprano, 115. Sometimes, algunas veces, 122, Set out (to), partir, salir, marcharse, 130 Steal something from some one (to), robai algo (alguna cosa a alguno), 149. 7'ry (to), probar a, procurar, 167, 168. So that, asi que, de suerte que, 194. Suit (to), acomodar, ajustar, venir, conve. nir, 199. Succeed (to), conseguir, lograr, tener baes 6xito, salir bien, 200. Shoot (to) — to fire, disparar, hacer fuego. Since, desde, 209. Ya que, pues que, 294. Spend time in something (to), pasar, empleai gastur el tiempo en alguna cosa, 212, Spoil (to), echar a perder, inutilizar, 217. Serve (to) — to wait upon, servir, estar co servicio de otro, 217. Squander (to) — to dissipate, malgaBtar,disipar, desperdiciar, derrochar, 218. Slow, slowly, tardo, lento, lentamente, poca a poco, 224. So, tan, 224. So much, so many, tanto, tanta, tantos, tan tas, 224. Sir, senor, 237, Obs. B ; 2^18, Obs, C and II. Sojourn (to)— to stay, residir, morar, T estaf de asiento, 240. Step (to), dar un paso, 251. Meaning to taki measures, valerse de medios, tomar sus medidas, 252. Such, un tal, una tnl, 262. Such a one, el senor Fulano de tal, un do« Fulano, 262. Spring (to), saltar, abalanzarse a, 286. Succeed (to), conseguir. Alcanzar. Salir bien 293. Serve up the soup (to), servir la sopa, 298. Suffice (to), bastar. Ser lottante. Sa 1 suficiente, 300. €fet g&il (it), hacerse a la vein, 300. of (to), oler ♦a, J04. t^trike (to) — speaking of hours, dar, 328. Solicit (to)— to sue, solixiitar. Rogar, 33& Sit up (to), velar, 342. So long as, niientras. En tanto que, 34-4. Subjunctive, subijuntivo, 351. Spare (to), ahorar, 370 Stop short (to), piiTSiTse. Cortarse 371. Stick to a thing (to), atenerue a. Pasar por - 373. Suffer (to) — to bear, sufrir. Agoantar, 373. Suffer one's self to (to), dejarse, 374. Strap (to) — to get lost, descamiimrse. Ex- tra viarse, 385. Satisfy one's self with (to), saciar. Ilartar. Sati^sfacer, 3S8. T Thatt e.se. 15.24. Esa, 161. That of, el del, el de, 15. 1'hat (relative), que, 25. That which, the one which, el que, 25. Lo nue. Aquello que, 192, 193. That one, aquel.24- Thai (meaning that thing), eso, aquello, 122 . That— all, cuanto, 153. That excepted, exerpto eso, salvo eso, mo- nos eso, 379. The more — as, tanto mas — cuanto. Tanto mas — cuanto mas, 380. That, or the one of which, aquel do quien, &c.. 193. Thank (to), agradecer. Dar gracias, 289. True, verdad. It is true, es verdad, 290. Towards, a. Con. Para con. Hacla, 230. Trust some one (to), conliarse a (de) alguno, 278. Take to one's heels (to), apretar los talones. t Tornar las de villadiego, 296. That is to say, es decir. A saber, 300. Think much of a person (to), hacer gran (mucho) caso de, 304. Take care (to), guardarse de. Preca verse de. Estar sobre aviso, 312. 383. Take into one's head (to), pasarle a uno. por la cabeza. Metersele, &c., 313. Therefore, por consiguiente. Aei pues, 322. Then, thus, pues. Entonces. Asi, 3^. Turn upon (to)— to be the question, tratarse de algo, 335. Towards, hacia. Para con, 337. Take the peace of (to), set. Servir de, 347. Turn to account (to), hacer vuler. Sacar ventaja de, 369. The less — as, tanto m^nos — cuanto mas or menos. Tanto monos — cuanto monos, 380. Turn pale (to), ponerse palido. Perder el color, 385. Thirst for (to) — to be thirsty, toner sed. Es- tar sediento, 388. The, el. 9. Los, 26. La, las, 159. El m- etead of la, 285, Oba- B. \ INDEX. 657 The more - the mare, cuanto mas — tanU mas, 110. The less — the less, cuanto m^noa — tanto menos, 110. The one and the other, el uno y el otro, oa unos y los oti os, 48. The one who, el que, los que, 170. The least, el nidnos, la menos. loa m^nos, las menos. 110. The most, el mas, la mas, los mas, las nru. 110 . These, estos, 28. 31. Estas, 161. Them, los, 34. Table, 70. Los, 163. Tkdr, su, sus, 28. 160. Theirs, el suyo, los suyos, 31. Table, 244 There, thither, alii, alia, 64. When not translated, 74, Obs. B. There is, there are, hay, 135. 200. Is there- more 7 i que- hay mas 1 289. This, este, 24. Esta, 16i. This one, este, 24. Till, until, hnsta. i Hasta cuando 1 iHasia que bora 1 142. They, ellos, 34. Table, 70. They, se, 143, Obs. B. They, uno. 143, Obs. B. ; 144, Obs. C. ; 185. Obs. A. Thine, el tuyo, los tuyos, 79. Table, 24K Thy. tu, tus, 79. 160. ' Those, esos, aquellos, 28. 31. Esaj, aqueilaa 161. Those of, los de, Those which, los que, 30. 170. 193. To. a, 66. To, meaning in order to, para, 66. To the, al. a los, 67. A la, a las, 159 To whom, a quien, a quienes, 73. 193. Thou, tu. Table, 70. Too, demasiado, 114. Too late, demasiado tarde, 115. Too many, demasiados, sobrados, 42. Too much, demasiado, sobrado, 42, 115. To me, to him, to you, ^c., me, le, a V Table, 70. Take off— away (to), quitar del medio, qui tarse. Llevar, llevarse, 98. Take a walk (to), pasearse, 186. Take place (to), tenerse. Verificarse. Ceie brarse. Darse. Haber, 122. Acoiitec«» 322. Travel tc a place (ta), ir a. Irse a, 17b. - u. Us, no3, 68. Table, 70.. Until, hasta. I Hastaque bora ? i^. Up to, hasta, 147. Upon, sobre, 131. UndcTi debajo de. Bajo, 131. Under full sail, a velas Uenas. A veloa tendi das, 300. Unriddle (to)— to find out, desenredar, 383 V. Very, muy. bien, 110. Mucho, 171. V(xry mueh, muchisi no, 41. l-JB. 558 INDEX. Very ‘aeU, inuy bien, 112. Very, very much, muy, 110. Vie with each other ito), a competenciK. A cuai mas. 379. w. quo, 14. 73. Meaning that which, lo quo. 92. 97. 137. H aul ito), haber menester. necesitar, 82. 152. ff'e, nosotros, 42. Table, 70. ff'here, where from, de donde, 155. fTAcre, on donde. donde. 64. 132. if’itk me, coninigo. 70 (1). Which, what, que, 11.25. Of which, deque, del dial. &c., 1^2, Which one, cual, 20. From which ^ de que. Del cual, 155. Which ones, cuales, 28. Who, quien. 21. Quienes, 73. Who Orelative'i, que, 170. Whom, quien, quienes, 73. Of whom, de quien. Del cual, &c., 192. Whom (,to), a quien, a quienes, 73. Whose, quien, quienes, 73. Whore, of whom, de quien, cujo, cuya, cu- yo"* cuyes, 113, Oba. C. ; 19^ Why porqu^, 133 Whose house (.at), en casa do quiao, 6L Well, bien, 106. When, cuando, 132. Without, sin, 178, Obs. Walk a child (to), hacer pasear a un iiitto Llevnr un nino a pasco, 186, Walk (to), andar, caminar, ^l. Wish a good morning (to), darle a nno hs buenos dias, 340. Whatever, whatsoever, cualquiera. Todc lo quo. Por mas (n) que, 362. Whoever, whosoever, quienquieia. cual quiera, 363. Would to Godf iplegiie a Dios' i Q,uieiD Dios! iPlegue al Ciolo! i Ojala ! 363. Warn some one (to), precautelar. preca*’ cionar, 384. Y. You, V., VV., 9, Obs. A. ; 63. Table, 70. Your, su (n) do V. or el (n) de V., 11. 160. Yours, el de V , los do V., el vuestro, loi vuestros, 16* 31. Table, 244 Yet, ya, 31. Yesterday, ayer, 122. Yield (Co), coder. Uoxidiree Saietarac. Yea, hi THE ENB, SCHOOL AND COLLEGE TEXT-BOOKS. SPANISH. AHN, A New, Practical, and Easy Method of Learning the Spanish Language, after the System of F. Ahn, Doctor of Philosophy and Professor at the College of Neuss. 12mo. 85 cents. Key to Spanish Grammar. 25 cents. BUTLER. The Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase-Book: An Easy and Agreeable Method of acquiring a Speaking Knowledge of the Spanish Language. By Francis Butler. 293 pages. 18mo. 50 cents. DE BELEM. The Spanish Phrase-Book ; or, Key to Spanish Con- versation : containing the Chief Idioms of the Spanish Language, with the Conjugations of the Auxiliary and the Regular Verbs — on the Plan of the late Abbe Bossuet. By E. M. de Belem. 88 pages. ISmo. 30 cents. DE TORNOS. The Combined Spanish Method. A New, Prac- tical, and Theoretical System of Learning the Castilian Language, embracing the most advantageous Features of the best known Methods. With a Pronouncing Vocabulary. 12mo. $1,25. Key to the Combined Spanish Method. 75 cents. DE VERE. Grammar of the Spanish Language, with a History of the Language and Practical Exercises. By Schele de Vere. 12mo, $1.00. D 1 CT 1 0 N A R Y. See Meadows and V el azquez. MEADOWS’S Spanish-English and English-Spanish Dictionary. 18mo. Half roan, $2.20. MORALES. Progressive Spanish Reader, with an Analytical Study of the Spanish Language. By Augustin Jose Morales, A. M. H. M., Professor of the Spanish Language in the New York Free Academy. 336 pages. 12mo. $1,25. School and College Text-Books. — {Continued.) OLLENDORFF. A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spanish Language, after the System of Ollendorff. By Mariano Velazquez and T. Simonne. 12mo. ^1.00. Key to the Exercises in the New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spanish Language, after the System of Ollendorif. By M. Velazquez and T. Simonne. 174 pages. I2mo. 75 cts. TOLON. The Elementary Spanish Reader and Translator. With Spanish and English Vocabulary, containing all the words used in the Lessons. By Miguel T. Tolon, 12mo. 75 cents. VELAZQUEZ. New Spanish Reader; consisting of Extracts from the Works of the most approved Authors, in Prose and Verse, arranged in progressive order, with Notes explanatory of the Idioms and most difidcult Constructions, and a copious VocabU' lary. By Mariano Velazquez de la Cadena. 12mo. $1.25. Seoane’s Neuman and Baretti. By M. Velazquez. A Pronouncing Dictionary of the Spanish and English Languages: composed from the Spanish Dictionaries of the Spanish Academy, Terreros, and Salva, upon the Basis of Seoane’s edition of Neuman and Baretti, and from the English Dictionaries of Webster, Worcester, and Walker ; with the addition of more than 8,000 Words, Idioms, and Familiar Phrases, the Irregularities of all the Verbs, and a Grammatical Synopsis of both Languages. In Two Parts. I. Spanish-English ; II. English-Spanish. 1,310 pages, large 8vo. $5.00. Seoane’s Neuman and Baretti, abridged. By M. Velazquez. A Dictionary of the Spanish and English Languages, abridged from the author’s larger work. 847 pages. 12mo. $1.50. An Easy Introduction to Spanish Conversation. By Mariano Vei az- QUEZ de la Cadena. 100 pages. 18mo. 35 cents. D. APPLETON c& CO., Publishers, 1, S, (& 5 Bond Street, New York. D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. SPANISH GEAMMAES. Ollendorff’s Spanish Grammar. A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spanish Language, with Practical Rules for Spanish Pronunciation, and Models of Social and Commercial Correspondence. By M. YE,, LASQUEZ and T. T. SIMONNE. 12mo, 560 pages. The admirable system introduced by Ollendorff is applied in this toL ume to the Spanish language. Having received, from the two distinguished editors to whom its supervision was intrusted, corrections, emendations, and additions, which specially adapt it to the youth of this country, it is believed to embrace every possible advantage for imparting a thorough and practical knowledge of Spanish. A course of systematic grammar underlies the whole ; but its development is so gradual and inductive as not to weary the learner. Numerous examples of regular and irregular verbs are presented : and nothing that can expedite the pupil’s progress, in the way of explanation and illustration, is omitted. KEY to the Same. Separate volume. Grammar of the Spanish Language : With a History of the Language and Practical Exercises. By M. SCHELE DE YERE. 12mo, 273 pages. In this volume are embodied the results of many years’ experience on the part of the author, as Professor of Spanish in the University of Yirginia. It aims to impart a critical knowledge of the language by a systematic course of grammar, illustrated with appropriate exercises. The author, has availed himself of the labors of recent grammarians and critics ; and, by condensing his rules and principles and rejecting a burdensome super- fiaity of detail, he has brought the whole within comparatively small com- pass. By pursuing this simple course, the language may be easily and quickly mastered, not only for conversational purposes, but for reading rt fluently, and writing it with elegance. B. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. Elementary Spanisli Reader : By M. B. TOLON. 12mo, 156 pages. This is one of the best Elementary Spanish Readers, not' only for the purposes of self-instruction, but also as a class-book for schools, that has been published. A full Vocabulary of all the words employed is ap» pended, rendering a large dictionary unnecessary. • Progressive Spanish Reader : With an Analytical Study of the Spanish Language. By AUGUSTIN JOSE MORALES, A. M., Prof, of the Spanish Language and Litera- ture in the College of the City of New York. 12mo, 336 pages. The prose extracts in this volume are preceded by an historical account of the origin and progress of the Spanish Langurge, and a condensed, scholarlike treatise on its grammar ; the poetical selections are introduced with an Essay on Spanish versification. Prepared in either case by the preliminary matter thus furnished, bearing directly on his work, the pupil enters intelligently on his task of translating. The extracts are brief, spirited, and entertaining ; drawn mainly from writers of the present day, they are a faithful representation of the language as it is now written and spoken. The arrangement is progressive, specimens of a more difScult character being presented as the student becomes able to cope with them. New Spanish Reader : Consisting of Extracts from the Works of the Most Approved Authors in Prose and Verse, arranged in Progressive Order; with Notes explanatory of the Idioms and Most Difficult Constructions, and a Copious Vocabulary. By M. VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA. 12mo, 351 pages. This book, being particularly intended for the use of beginners, has been prepared with three objects in view : First, to furnish the learner with pleasing and easy lessons, progressively developing the beauties and diffi- culties of the Spanish language ; secondly, to enrich their minds with valu- able. knowledge ; and thirdly, to form their character, by instilling correct principles into their hearts. In order, therefore, to obtain the desired ef- fects, the extracts have been carefully selected from those classic Spanish writers, both ancient and modern, whose style is generally admitted to be a pattern of elegance, combined with idiomatic purity and sound morality* D. APPLETON & 00:S PUBLICATIONS. Grammar for Teaching English to Spaniards. Gramatica Inglesa : Un Metodo para Aprender a Leer, Escribir, y Habler el Ingles, segun el Sistema de Ollendorif. Acompanado de un Apendice que com- prende en Compendio las Reglas contenidas en el Cuerpo Princi-} pal de la Obra ; un Tratado sobre la Pronunciacion, Division y Formacion de las Palabras Inglesas; una Lista de los Yerbos Regulares e Irregulares, con sus Conjugaciones y las Distintas Preposiciones que rigen ; Modelos de Oorrespondencia, etc., todo al Alcance de la Capacidad mas Mediana. Por RAMON PALEN- ZUELA y JUAN DE LA C. CARRENO. 12mo, 457 pages. Key to Exercises. Separate volume. Spaniards desirous of learning English will find in this volume all that is needed for its speedy and thorough acquisition. The system adopted is clear, simple, philosophical, and practical. Grammar for Teaching French to Spaniards. Gramatica Prancesa : Un Metodo para Aprender a Leer, Escribir, y Hablar el Frances, segun el Yerdadero Sistema de Ollendorff. Ordenado en Lecciones Pro- gresivas, consistiendo de Ejercicios Orales y Escritos ; enrique- cido de la Pronunciacion Figurado como se Estila en la Conver- sacion ; y de un Apendice, abrazando las Reglas de la Sintaxis, la Formacion de los Yerbos Regulares, y la Conjugacion de los Irregulares. Por TEODORO SIMONNE. 12rao, 341 pages. Key to Exercises. Separate volume. M. Simonne has done a good work in bringing the French language within the reach of Spaniards by this application of the Ollendorff system. A few weeks’ study of his “ Gramatica Francesa ” will impart a knowl- edge of the more common conversational idioms, and a thorough mastery of it will insure as perfect an acquaintance with French as can, be desired. With the aid of the Key the study can be pursued without a master ; for the illustrative exercises at once show whether the grammatical rules and principles successively laid down are properly understood. D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. The Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase^ Book. All Easy and Agreeable Method of Acquiring a Speaking Knowledge of the Spanish Language. By Professor BUTLER. 18mo, 293 pages. The object of the author is to make the Spanish language a living, speaking tongue to the learner ; and the method he adopts is that of na- ture. He begins with the simplest elements, and progressively advances, applying all former acquisitions as he proceeds, until the learner has mas- tered one of the most perfect languages of modern times. From the Few York Journal of Commerce. “ This is a g’ood book, and well fitted for the purposes for which it is designed. The Spanish language is one of great simplicity, and more easily acquired than any other modern tongue. For a beginner, we recommend this little book, which is small and de- signed to be carried in the pocket.” An Easy Introduction to Spanish Conver- sation. By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ BE LA CADENA. 18mo, 100 pages. This little work contains all that is necessary for making rapid prog- ress in Spanish conversation. It is well adapted for schools, and for persons who have httle time to study or are their own instructors. Spanish Grammar. Being a New, Practical, and Easy Method of Learning the Spanish Language ; after the System of A. E. AHN, Doctor of Philoso^ phy, and Professor at the College of Neuss. First American Edition, revised and enlarged. 12mo, 149 pages. Prof. Ahn’s method is one of peculiar excellence, and has met with great success. It has been happily described in his own words : “ Learn A foreign language as you learned your mother tongue — in the same sim- ple manner, and with the same natural gradations. This method of the distinguished German Doctor has been applied in the present instance to the Spanish Language, upon the basis of the excellent Grammars of Les- pada and Martinez, and it is hoped that its simplicity and utility will pro- cure for it the favor that its German, French, and Italian prototypes have already found in the Schools and Colleges of Europe. ■ Wj'* V ■;/ r V. , ^ /f. . -; , . ; r- ■ , , . ■■_.> • • STANDARD SPANISH TEXT-BOOKS. De Tornos. The Combined Spanish Method. A New Practical and Theoretical System of Learning the Castilian Language, embracing the most advan- tageous Features of the best known Methods. With a Pronouncing Vocabu- lary. 12mo. Key to the Combined Spanish Method. De Vere. Grammar of the Spanish Language, with a History of the Language and Practical Exercises. By Schele de Vere. 12mo. Dictionaries. See Meadows and Velazquez. Meadows’s Spanish-English and English-Spanish Dictionary. 18mo. Morales. Progressive Spanish Reader, with an Analytical Study of the Spanish Language. By Augustin Jose Morales, A. M. H. M., Professor of the Span- ish Language in the New York Free Academy. 336 pages. 12mo. Ollendorff. A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spanish Language, after the System of Ollendorff. By Mno. Velazquez and T. SiMONNE. 560 pages. 12mo. Key to the Exercises in the New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spanish Language, after the System of Ollendoi-ff. By M. Velaz- quez and T. Simonne. 174 pages. 12mo. Tolon. The Elementary Spanish Reader and Translator. With Spanish and English Vocabulary, containing all the words used in the Lessons. By Miguel T. Tolon. 156 pages. 12mo. Velazquez, New Spanish Reader; consisting of Extracts from the Works of the most approved Authors, in Prose and Verse, arranged in progressive order, with Notes explanatory of the Idioms and most difficult Constructions, and a copious Vocabulary. By Mariano Velazquez de la Cadena. 351 pages. 12mo. Seoane’s Neuman and Baretti. By Velazquez. A Pronouncing Dictionary of the Spanish and English Languages: composed from the Spanish Dic- tionaries of the Spanish Academy, Terreros, and Salva, upon the Basis of Seoane’s edition of Neuman and Baretti, and from the English Dictionaries of Webster, Worcester, and Walker; with the addition of more than Eight Thousand Words, Idioms, and Familiar Phrases, the Irregularities of all the Verbs, and a Grammatical Synopsis of both Languages. In Two Parts. I. Spanish-English ; II. English-Spanish. 1,310 pages, large 8vo. STANDARD SPANISH TEXT-BOOKS. Velazquez. Seoane’s Neuman and Baretti, abridged. By Velazquez. A Dictionary of the Spanish and English Languages, abridged from the author’s larger work. 847 pages, 12mo. An Easy Introduction to Spanish Conversation. By Mabiano Velazquez DE LA Cadena. 100 pages, 18m o. PORTUGUESE TEXT-BOOK. A New Method of Learning the Portuguese Language. By E. J. Grauert. LIBROS EN PORTUGTJES. Smith. Astronomia Illustrada. Disposta para o Uso dos Collcgios Publicos e Municipaes dos Estados Unidos. Illustrada com numerosos Diagrammas Originaes. Por Asa Smith, Director da Escola Publica No. 12, da Cidade de Nova York. Traduzida em Portuguez para que possa servir de Texto nos Collegios e nas Academias do Brasil e de Portugal, por Leonardo Aejbr- BLOM, Doutor em Philosophia. Elementos Scientificos. No 9 oes de Pliysica, pelo Professor Balfour Stewart. Traduc 9 ao de H. de Aquino. Com estampas. D. APPLETON & CO., Publishers, New York, Boston, Chicago, and San Francisco.